[opensuse-translation-commit] r89802 - trunk/yast/zh_TW/po

Author: keichwa Date: 2014-10-07 18:00:49 +0200 (Tue, 07 Oct 2014) New Revision: 89802 Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/add-on-creator.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/add-on.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/audit-laf.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/auth-client.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/auth-server.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/autoinst.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/base.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/bootloader.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ca-management.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/cio.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/cluster.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/control-center.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/control.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/country.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/crowbar.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/dhcp-server.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/dns-server.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/drbd.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/fcoe-client.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/firewall-services.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/firewall.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/firstboot.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ftp-server.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/geo-cluster.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/gtk.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/http-server.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/inetd.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/installation.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/instserver.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/iplb.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/iscsi-client.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/iscsi-lio-server.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/iscsi-server.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/isns.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/kdump.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/kerberos-server.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/kerberos.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/languages_db.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ldap-client.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ldap-server.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ldap.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/live-installer.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/lxc.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/mail.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/multipath.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ncurses-pkg.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ncurses.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/network.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/nfs.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/nfs_server.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/nis.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/nis_server.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ntp-client.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/oneclickinstall.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/online-update-configuration.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/online-update.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/opensuse_mirror.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/packager.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/pam.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/pkg-bindings.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/printer.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/product-creator.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/proxy.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/qt-pkg.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/qt.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/rdp.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/rear.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/registration.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/reipl.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/relocation-server.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/s390.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/samba-client.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/samba-server.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/samba-users.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/scanner.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/security.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/services-manager.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/slp-server.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/snapper.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/sound.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/squid.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/sshd.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/storage.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/sudo.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/support.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/sysconfig.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/tftp-server.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/timezone_db.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/tune.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/update.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/users.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/vm.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/wagon.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/wol.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/xpram.zh_TW.po trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/yast2-apparmor.zh_TW.po Log: merged Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/add-on-creator.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/add-on-creator.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/add-on-creator.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: add-on-creator\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:41+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:51+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-21 08:17+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -260,9 +260,7 @@ #. command line message, do not translate 'create', 'clone' #: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:864 -msgid "" -"There is no add-on product configuration present. Create a new one using the " -"'create' or 'clone' commands." +msgid "There is no add-on product configuration present. Create a new one using the 'create' or 'clone' commands." msgstr "附加產品的組態不存在。使用 'creat' 或 'clone' 命令來建立一個新的。" #. error message @@ -302,14 +300,12 @@ #. help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:156 -msgid "" -"<p>Start creating a new add-on product configuration with <b>Add</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Start creating a new add-on product configuration with <b>Add</b>.</p>" msgstr "<p>使用 <b>新增</b>開始建立新的附加產品組態。</p>" #. help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:160 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Edit</b> to modify the selected add-on product configuration.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Edit</b> to modify the selected add-on product configuration.</p>" msgstr "<p>使用 <b>編輯</b> 以修改選定的附加產品組態。</p>" #. help text @@ -319,9 +315,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:166 -msgid "" -"<p>Build the new add-on product based on the selected configuration with " -"<b>Build</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Build the new add-on product based on the selected configuration with <b>Build</b>.</p>" msgstr "<p>用 <b>建立</b> 來建立一個基於所選組態的新附加產品。</p>" #. table header item @@ -1064,28 +1058,18 @@ #. help text for start menu #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:44 -msgid "" -"<p>This module offers guidance for the creation of an add-on product.</p>" +msgid "<p>This module offers guidance for the creation of an add-on product.</p>" msgstr "<p>本模組提供建立附加產品的指導原則。</p>" #. help text for start menu, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:48 -msgid "" -"<p>Select how to create the new add-on product. You can create it from the " -"beginning or base it on an existing product.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>選擇建立新附加產品的方式。您可以在開始時建立或以現有的產品為基礎來建立。" +msgid "<p>Select how to create the new add-on product. You can create it from the beginning or base it on an existing product.</p>" +msgstr "<p>選擇建立新附加產品的方式。您可以在開始時建立或以現有的產品為基礎來建立。</p>" #. help text for start menu, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:52 -msgid "" -"<p>When basing the new product on an existing product, check <b>Generate " -"Package Descriptions</b> to generate new descriptions of packages in the " -"existing product.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>根據現有產品來建立新產品時，請核取<b>「產生套件描述」</b>以在現有產品中產" -"生新的套件描述。</p>" +msgid "<p>When basing the new product on an existing product, check <b>Generate Package Descriptions</b> to generate new descriptions of packages in the existing product.</p>" +msgstr "<p>根據現有產品來建立新產品時，請核取<b>「產生套件描述」</b>以在現有產品中產生新的套件描述。</p>" #. help text for initial data (paragraph title) #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:56 @@ -1104,12 +1088,8 @@ #. help text for initial data, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:64 -msgid "" -"<p>Select the product to which the new add-on product can be applied. This " -"selection forms the <b>REQUIRES</b> value of the <tt>content</tt> file.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>選擇可以套用新附加產品的產品。此選擇會建立<tt>內容</tt>檔案的 " -"<b>REQUIRES</b> 值。 </p>" +msgid "<p>Select the product to which the new add-on product can be applied. This selection forms the <b>REQUIRES</b> value of the <tt>content</tt> file.</p>" +msgstr "<p>選擇可以套用新附加產品的產品。此選擇會建立<tt>內容</tt>檔案的 <b>REQUIRES</b> 值。 </p>" #. help text for initial data (paragraph title), cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:68 @@ -1118,9 +1098,7 @@ #. help text for initial data, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:70 -msgid "" -"<p>Choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages that should " -"form your add-on product.</p>" +msgid "<p>Choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages that should form your add-on product.</p>" msgstr "<p>選擇包含來自附加產品的 RPM 套件的目錄路徑。</p>" #. help text for initial data (paragraph title), cont. @@ -1130,14 +1108,8 @@ #. help text for initial data, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:76 -msgid "" -"<p>Optionally, choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages " -"from the product the add-on product should be based on. These packages will " -"not be contained in the add-on product, but could be used for creating the " -"patterns later in the workflow.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>或者從附加產品的基礎產品，選擇包含 RPM 套件的目錄之路徑。 附加產品並不包含" -"這些套件，但這些套件稍後可在工作流程中建立模式。</p>" +msgid "<p>Optionally, choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages from the product the add-on product should be based on. These packages will not be contained in the add-on product, but could be used for creating the patterns later in the workflow.</p>" +msgstr "<p>或者從附加產品的基礎產品，選擇包含 RPM 套件的目錄之路徑。 附加產品並不包含這些套件，但這些套件稍後可在工作流程中建立模式。</p>" #. help text for content file editor (<tt>content</tt> is a name of file) #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:80 @@ -1146,13 +1118,8 @@ #. help text for content file editor, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:84 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the information required to identify the add-on product. Deselect " -"<b>Show Only Required Keywords</b> to see all attributes of the <tt>content file.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>輸入識別附加產品所需的資訊。請取消選取<b>「僅顯示需要的關鍵字」</b>以查看" -"<tt>內容</tt>檔案的所有屬性。</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter the information required to identify the add-on product. Deselect <b>Show Only Required Keywords</b> to see all attributes of the <tt>content</tt> file.</p>" +msgstr "<p>輸入識別附加產品所需的資訊。請取消選取<b>「僅顯示需要的關鍵字」</b>以查看<tt>內容</tt>檔案的所有屬性。</p>" #. help text for content file editor, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:88 @@ -1161,40 +1128,23 @@ #. help text for package description files #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:92 -msgid "" -"<p>Edit the language-specific descriptions of packages (<tt>packages.lang files) here.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>請在此處編輯套件的特定語言的描述 (<tt>packages.lang</tt> 檔案)。</p>" +msgid "<p>Edit the language-specific descriptions of packages (<tt>packages.lang</tt> files) here.</p>" +msgstr "<p>請在此處編輯套件的特定語言的描述 (<tt>packages.lang</tt> 檔案)。</p>" #. help text for package description files, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:96 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Add Language</b> to add a description file for a new language. The " -"list of available languages is read from the <b>LINGUAS</b> value of the " -"<tt>content</tt> file. Import an existing file with package descriptions " -"with <b>Import</b>. Delete the description file with <b>Delete</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>使用<b>「新增語言」</b>來新增新語言的描述檔案。可用語言的清單是由<tt>內容" -"</tt>檔案的 <b>LINGUAS</b> 值讀取。使用<b>「匯入」</b>來匯入含有套件描述的現" -"有檔案。使用<b>「刪除」</b>來刪除描述檔案。</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Add Language</b> to add a description file for a new language. The list of available languages is read from the <b>LINGUAS</b> value of the <tt>content</tt> file. Import an existing file with package descriptions with <b>Import</b>. Delete the description file with <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>使用<b>「新增語言」</b>來新增新語言的描述檔案。可用語言的清單是由<tt>內容</tt>檔案的 <b>LINGUAS</b> 值讀取。使用<b>「匯入」</b>來匯入含有套件描述的現有檔案。使用<b>「刪除」</b>來刪除描述檔案。</p>" #. help text for package description files, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:100 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Add</b> and <b>Edit</b> in the second table to modify description " -"entries for the selected package.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>使用第二個表格中的<b>「新增」</b>與<b>「編輯」</b>來修改所選套件的描述項" -"目。</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Add</b> and <b>Edit</b> in the second table to modify description entries for the selected package.</p>" +msgstr "<p>使用第二個表格中的<b>「新增」</b>與<b>「編輯」</b>來修改所選套件的描述項目。</p>" #. help text for package description files, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:104 -msgid "" -"<p>Optionally, choose the path for the file providing <b>Additional Package " -"Dependencies</b> (EXTRA_PROV).</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>可選性的，選擇提供 <b>附加套件相依性</b> 檔案(EXTRA_PROV) 的路徑。</p>" +msgid "<p>Optionally, choose the path for the file providing <b>Additional Package Dependencies</b> (EXTRA_PROV).</p>" +msgstr "<p>可選性的，選擇提供 <b>附加套件相依性</b> 檔案(EXTRA_PROV) 的路徑。</p>" #. help text for patterns #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:108 @@ -1203,127 +1153,72 @@ #. help text for patterns, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:112 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>New</b> to create a new pattern or <b>Import</b> to import an " -"existing one.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>使用<b>「新增」</b>來建立新模式，或使用<b>「匯入」</b>來匯入現有模式。</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>New</b> to create a new pattern or <b>Import</b> to import an existing one.</p>" +msgstr "<p>使用<b>「新增」</b>來建立新模式，或使用<b>「匯入」</b>來匯入現有模式。</p>" #. help text for patterns, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:116 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Add</b> and <b>Edit</b> in the second table to modify pattern " -"attributes.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>使用第二個表格中的<b>「新增」</b>與<b>「編輯」</b> 來修改模式屬性。</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Add</b> and <b>Edit</b> in the second table to modify pattern attributes.</p>" +msgstr "<p>使用第二個表格中的<b>「新增」</b>與<b>「編輯」</b> 來修改模式屬性。</p>" #. help text for patterns, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:120 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Required pattern</b> to mark the selected pattern as required " -"for\n" -"the add-on product. Such a pattern will be automatically preselected when " -"the installation of the add-on product is started.</p>" +"<p>Check <b>Required pattern</b> to mark the selected pattern as required for\n" +"the add-on product. Such a pattern will be automatically preselected when the installation of the add-on product is started.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>核取 <b>需求樣式</b> 設定所選定的樣式為此附加產品所需要。\n" "如此當開始安裝此附加產品時，這樣式將自動預先被選擇。</p>" #. help text for the 'various settings' dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:124 -msgid "" -"<p>Specify the path to the directory in which the add-on product should be " -"created. Select <b>Create ISO Image</b> to create the ISO image of the " -"product in the output directory.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>指定應建立附加產品的目錄路徑。請選取<b>「建立 ISO 影像」</b>在輸出目錄中建" -"立產品的 ISO 影像。</p>" +msgid "<p>Specify the path to the directory in which the add-on product should be created. Select <b>Create ISO Image</b> to create the ISO image of the product in the output directory.</p>" +msgstr "<p>指定應建立附加產品的目錄路徑。請選取<b>「建立 ISO 影像」</b>在輸出目錄中建立產品的 ISO 影像。</p>" #. help text for the 'various settings' dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:128 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Generate Changelog</b> to generate a changelog file containing all " -"changes of packages on the add-on product made in the last two years.</p>" -msgstr "" -"使用 <b>建立變更紀錄</b>來產生一個此附加產品在過去兩年套件變更的紀錄檔。</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Generate Changelog</b> to generate a changelog file containing all changes of packages on the add-on product made in the last two years.</p>" +msgstr "使用 <b>建立變更紀錄</b>來產生一個此附加產品在過去兩年套件變更的紀錄檔。</p>" #. help text for the 'various settings' dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:132 -msgid "" -"<p>Adapt the workflow of the add-on product with <b>Configure Workflow</b>. " -"Use <b>Optional Files</b> to configure texts of <tt>README</tt> files, " -"licenses, and other optional values.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>使用<b>「設定工作流程」</b>適應附加產品的工作流程。使用<b>「選擇性檔案」設定 <tt>README</tt> 檔案、授權與其他選擇性數值的文字。" +msgid "<p>Adapt the workflow of the add-on product with <b>Configure Workflow</b>. Use <b>Optional Files</b> to configure texts of <tt>README</tt> files, licenses, and other optional values.</p>" +msgstr "<p>使用<b>「設定工作流程」</b>適應附加產品的工作流程。使用<b>「選擇性檔案」</b>設定 <tt>README</tt> 檔案、授權與其他選擇性數值的文字。" #. workflow help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:136 -msgid "" -"<p>Here, you can enter the files necessary for customizing your add-on " -"product workflow.</p>" +msgid "<p>Here, you can enter the files necessary for customizing your add-on product workflow.</p>" msgstr "<p>在此處，您可以輸入自訂附加產品工作流程所需的檔案。</p>" #. workflow help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:140 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the location of the file with the workflow description. This file " -"is an alternative to <tt>control.xml</tt> and is saved as <tt>installation." -"xml</tt> in the add-on product's base directory.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>輸入含有工作流程描述檔案的位置。此檔案為 <tt>control.xml</tt> 的替代方案，" -"並在附加產品的基本目錄中儲存為 <tt>installation.xml</tt>。</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter the location of the file with the workflow description. This file is an alternative to <tt>control.xml</tt> and is saved as <tt>installation.xml</tt> in the add-on product's base directory.</p>" +msgstr "<p>輸入含有工作流程描述檔案的位置。此檔案為 <tt>control.xml</tt> 的替代方案，並在附加產品的基本目錄中儲存為 <tt>installation.xml</tt>。</p>" #. workflow help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:144 -msgid "" -"<p>To use custom YaST modules during the installation of the add-on product, " -"enter the path to the <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> archive where these modules are " -"stored or configure the contents of <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> by specifying the " -"YaST RPM packages in <b>Import the Packages</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>若要在安裝附加產品期間使用自訂的 YaST 模組，請輸入 <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> " -"壓縮檔的路徑，這些模組儲存或設定 <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> 內容，方法是在<b>「匯" -"入套件」</b>中指定 YaST RPM 套件。</p>" +msgid "<p>To use custom YaST modules during the installation of the add-on product, enter the path to the <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> archive where these modules are stored or configure the contents of <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> by specifying the YaST RPM packages in <b>Import the Packages</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>若要在安裝附加產品期間使用自訂的 YaST 模組，請輸入 <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> 壓縮檔的路徑，這些模組儲存或設定 <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> 內容，方法是在<b>「匯入套件」</b>中指定 YaST RPM 套件。</p>" #. help text for expert dialog 1 #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:148 -msgid "" -"<p>The optional <tt>info.txt</tt> file gives information about the add-on " -"that should be displayed as a pop-up window with an <b>OK</b> button.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>選擇性 <tt>info.txt</tt> 檔案會提供關於附加產品的資訊，且按一下<b>「確定」" -"</b>按鈕會顯示成快顯視窗。</p>" +msgid "<p>The optional <tt>info.txt</tt> file gives information about the add-on that should be displayed as a pop-up window with an <b>OK</b> button.</p>" +msgstr "<p>選擇性 <tt>info.txt</tt> 檔案會提供關於附加產品的資訊，且按一下<b>「確定」</b>按鈕會顯示成快顯視窗。</p>" #. help text for expert dialog 1, cont #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:152 -msgid "" -"<p>The text of the license is displayed in a window with <b>Agree</b> and " -"<b>Disagree</b> buttons before the installation starts. The files with the " -"license texts in different languages are compressed to the <tt>license.zip archive and stored in the <tt>media.1</tt> directory.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>在開始安裝之前，在視窗中會顯示授權文字和<b>「同意」</b>與<b>「不同意」 按鈕。含有不同語言的授權文字的檔案會被壓縮為 <tt>license.zip</tt> 歸檔，並" -"儲存於 <tt>media.1</tt> 目錄中。</p>" +msgid "<p>The text of the license is displayed in a window with <b>Agree</b> and <b>Disagree</b> buttons before the installation starts. The files with the license texts in different languages are compressed to the <tt>license.zip</tt> archive and stored in the <tt>media.1</tt> directory.</p>" +msgstr "<p>在開始安裝之前，在視窗中會顯示授權文字和<b>「同意」</b>與<b>「不同意」</b> 按鈕。含有不同語言的授權文字的檔案會被壓縮為 <tt>license.zip</tt> 歸檔，並儲存於 <tt>media.1</tt> 目錄中。</p>" #. help text for expert dialog 2 #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:156 -msgid "" -"<p>The <tt>COPYRIGHT</tt> and <tt>COPYING</tt> files can have various " -"language modifications and are stored in the root directory of the add-on " -"product.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p> <tt>版權</tt>與<tt>複製</tt>檔案可有各種語言的修改，且儲存於附加產品的根" -"目錄中。</p>" +msgid "<p>The <tt>COPYRIGHT</tt> and <tt>COPYING</tt> files can have various language modifications and are stored in the root directory of the add-on product.</p>" +msgstr "<p> <tt>版權</tt>與<tt>複製</tt>檔案可有各種語言的修改，且儲存於附加產品的根目錄中。</p>" #. help text for signing dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:160 -msgid "" -"<p>Here, configure the signing of the add-on product. Choose a secret key " -"from the list of keys available or create a new one with <b>Create</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>在此處，設定附加產品的簽署，從可用的金鑰清單中選擇機密金鑰，或按一下" -"<b>「建立」</b>來建立新金鑰。</p>" +msgid "<p>Here, configure the signing of the add-on product. Choose a secret key from the list of keys available or create a new one with <b>Create</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>在此處，設定附加產品的簽署，從可用的金鑰清單中選擇機密金鑰，或按一下<b>「建立」</b>來建立新金鑰。</p>" #. help text for signing dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:164 @@ -1332,59 +1227,37 @@ #. help text for signing dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:166 -msgid "" -"<p>Decide if you want to <b>Sign All Packages</b> of the add-on product with " -"the selected key. All previous package signatures will be removed.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>選擇您是否要用選定的金鑰對此附加產品 <b>簽署所有套件</b>。所有之前的套件簽" -"名都將被移除。</p>" +msgid "<p>Decide if you want to <b>Sign All Packages</b> of the add-on product with the selected key. All previous package signatures will be removed.</p>" +msgstr "<p>選擇您是否要用選定的金鑰對此附加產品 <b>簽署所有套件</b>。所有之前的套件簽名都將被移除。</p>" #. help text for generating new key dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:170 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the values necessary for generating the new primary key pair.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter the values necessary for generating the new primary key pair.</p>" msgstr "<p>輸入產生新主要金鑰組所需的值。</p>" #. help text for generating new key dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:174 -msgid "" -"<p>The default size of a DSA key is 1024 bits. RSA keys may be between 1024 " -"and 4096 bits long.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>DSA 金鑰的預設大小為 1024 位元。RSA 金鑰的長度介於 1024 與 4096 位元。" +msgid "<p>The default size of a DSA key is 1024 bits. RSA keys may be between 1024 and 4096 bits long.</p>" +msgstr "<p>DSA 金鑰的預設大小為 1024 位元。RSA 金鑰的長度介於 1024 與 4096 位元。" #. help text for generating new key dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:178 -msgid "" -"<p>As <b>Expiration Date</b>, enter the number of days after which the key " -"expires. If the number is followed by <tt>w</tt>,<tt>m</tt>, or <tt>y</tt>, " -"it indicates the number of weeks, months, or years. Leave the entry empty " -"for a key that never expires.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>至於<b>「過期日」</b>，請輸入金鑰過期之前的日數，若數字後面跟著 <tt>w、<tt>m</tt> 或 <tt>y</tt>，則表示週、月、年數。對永久有效的金鑰，則保持項" -"目為空。</p>" +msgid "<p>As <b>Expiration Date</b>, enter the number of days after which the key expires. If the number is followed by <tt>w</tt>,<tt>m</tt>, or <tt>y</tt>, it indicates the number of weeks, months, or years. Leave the entry empty for a key that never expires.</p>" +msgstr "<p>至於<b>「過期日」</b>，請輸入金鑰過期之前的日數，若數字後面跟著 <tt>w</tt>、<tt>m</tt> 或 <tt>y</tt>，則表示週、月、年數。對永久有效的金鑰，則保持項目為空。</p>" #. help text for generating new key dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:182 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Name</b>, <b>Comment</b>, and <b>E-Mail Address</b> to provide the " -"user identification with which the new key should be associated.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>使用<b>「名稱」</b>、<b>「註解」</b>與<b>「電子郵件地址」</b>來提供與新金" -"鑰相關的使用者識別資料。</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Name</b>, <b>Comment</b>, and <b>E-Mail Address</b> to provide the user identification with which the new key should be associated.</p>" +msgstr "<p>使用<b>「名稱」</b>、<b>「註解」</b>與<b>「電子郵件地址」</b>來提供與新金鑰相關的使用者識別資料。</p>" #. help text for overview dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:186 -msgid "" -"<p>Here, see the overview of data for generating the add-on product.</p>" +msgid "<p>Here, see the overview of data for generating the add-on product.</p>" msgstr "<p>在此處，可以查看資料綜覽以產生附加產品。</p>" #. help text for overview dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:190 -msgid "" -"<p>Press <b>Finish</b> to create the add-on product in the output directory." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>Press <b>Finish</b> to create the add-on product in the output directory.</p>" msgstr "<p>按下<b>「完成」</b>以在輸出目錄中建立附加產品。</p>" #. text entry label @@ -1503,9 +1376,7 @@ #. help text for content file 'BASEARCHS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:164 -msgid "" -"Space-separated list of product architectures. Matches the available product-" -"release packages architectures. " +msgid "Space-separated list of product architectures. Matches the available product-release packages architectures. " msgstr "由空白分隔的產品架構清單。符合可用的產品釋出套件架構。" #. label of content file 'VERSION' key @@ -1516,8 +1387,7 @@ #. help text for content file 'VERSION' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:176 msgid "Product version and release as in RPM <tt>major.minor-release</tt>." -msgstr "" -"產品版本與釋出編號，如 RPM 的表示法 <tt>主版本號.次版本號-釋出編號</tt>。" +msgstr "產品版本與釋出編號，如 RPM 的表示法 <tt>主版本號.次版本號-釋出編號</tt>。" #. table item label #. table item label @@ -1532,13 +1402,8 @@ #. help text for content file 'DISTRIBUTION' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:194 -msgid "" -"Some string denoting the distribution. The same string is most probably used " -"in the .rpms to denote the distribution. Usually a composition of the name, " -"version and architecture." -msgstr "" -"一些標明發行版的字串。同樣的字串很可能被用在 rpm 以標示此發行版。通常是名稱，" -"版本與架構的組成。" +msgid "Some string denoting the distribution. The same string is most probably used in the .rpms to denote the distribution. Usually a composition of the name, version and architecture." +msgstr "一些標明發行版的字串。同樣的字串很可能被用在 rpm 以標示此發行版。通常是名稱，版本與架構的組成。" #. label of content file key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:201 @@ -1567,11 +1432,8 @@ #. help text for content file '' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:227 -msgid "" -"UTF-8 encoded label. Default label if <b>LINGUAS</b> is omitted or no " -"default language can be determined." -msgstr "" -"UTF-8 編碼標籤。若省略 <b>LINGUAS</b> 或無法決定預設語言，則其為預設標籤。" +msgid "UTF-8 encoded label. Default label if <b>LINGUAS</b> is omitted or no default language can be determined." +msgstr "UTF-8 編碼標籤。若省略 <b>LINGUAS</b> 或無法決定預設語言，則其為預設標籤。" #. label of content file 'LINGUAS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:234 @@ -1640,13 +1502,8 @@ #. help text for content file 'LABEL.lang' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:304 -msgid "" -"UTF-8-encoded <b>LABEL</b>. <tt>lang</tt> has the same syntax as the " -"<b>LINGUAS</b> values. For each language in <b>LINGUAS</b>, a matching " -"<b>LABEL.lang</b> is expected." -msgstr "" -"UTF-8 編碼 <b>LABEL</b>。<tt>lang</tt> 具有與 <b>LINGUAS</b> 值相同的語法。對" -"於 <b>LINGUAS</b> 中的每種語言，必須是相符的 <b>LABEL.lang</b>。" +msgid "UTF-8-encoded <b>LABEL</b>. <tt>lang</tt> has the same syntax as the <b>LINGUAS</b> values. For each language in <b>LINGUAS</b>, a matching <b>LABEL.lang</b> is expected." +msgstr "UTF-8 編碼 <b>LABEL</b>。<tt>lang</tt> 具有與 <b>LINGUAS</b> 值相同的語法。對於 <b>LINGUAS</b> 中的每種語言，必須是相符的 <b>LABEL.lang</b>。" #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:328 msgid "Architecture" @@ -1684,9 +1541,7 @@ #. help text for 'Cat' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:366 -msgid "" -"One line category in the default language used to group patterns. Categories " -"are intended for the user and can be specified freely." +msgid "One line category in the default language used to group patterns. Categories are intended for the user and can be specified freely." msgstr "預設語言中適用於群組模式的單行分類。分類是用於使用者，且可自由地指定。" #. help text for 'Cat.lang' pattern key @@ -1721,8 +1576,7 @@ #. help text for 'Prc' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:400 -msgid "" -"These packages are installed by default but can be removed without complaint." +msgid "These packages are installed by default but can be removed without complaint." msgstr "依預設會安裝這些套件，但可任意移除。" #. label for 'Prs' pattern key @@ -1735,9 +1589,7 @@ #. help text for 'SUGGESTS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:410 src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:503 #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:712 -msgid "" -"These are just hints for an application and not handled during dependency " -"resolution." +msgid "These are just hints for an application and not handled during dependency resolution." msgstr "這些只是應用程式的提示，不會在相依性解析期間處理。" #. label for 'Ico' pattern key @@ -1749,19 +1601,10 @@ #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:420 msgid "" "If unspecified, the pattern name is used \n" -" instead (with blanks in the name replaced by underscores). If the filename " -"does not include a .png or .jpg extension, .png is appended. If no path is " -"specified, icons are searched for in the theme icon path (first /usr/share/" -"YaST2/theme/current/icons/32x32/apps/ then /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/" -"icons/48x48/apps/). Absolute and relative paths (to the theme path /usr/" -"share/YaST2/theme/current/) are allowed." +" instead (with blanks in the name replaced by underscores). If the filename does not include a .png or .jpg extension, .png is appended. If no path is specified, icons are searched for in the theme icon path (first /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/32x32/apps/ then /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/48x48/apps/). Absolute and relative paths (to the theme path /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/) are allowed." msgstr "" "若未指定，將使用 \n" -" 模式名稱 (名稱中含有空格，由底線取代)。若檔名沒有包含 .png 或 .jpg 副檔名，" -"則附加 .png。若沒有指定路徑，則會在主題圖示路徑 ( 首先 /usr/share/YaST2/" -"theme/current/icons/32x32/apps/ 然後 /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/" -"icons/48x48/apps/) 中搜尋圖示。允許絕對與相對路徑 (至主題路徑 /usr/share/" -"YaST2/theme/current/)。" +" 模式名稱 (名稱中含有空格，由底線取代)。若檔名沒有包含 .png 或 .jpg 副檔名，則附加 .png。若沒有指定路徑，則會在主題圖示路徑 ( 首先 /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/32x32/apps/ 然後 /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/48x48/apps/) 中搜尋圖示。允許絕對與相對路徑 (至主題路徑 /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/)。" #. label for 'Ord' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:429 @@ -1770,9 +1613,7 @@ #. help text for 'Ord' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:431 -msgid "" -"This three-digit integer value defines the order of the pattern when listing " -"multiple patterns in the user interface." +msgid "This three-digit integer value defines the order of the pattern when listing multiple patterns in the user interface." msgstr "在使用者介面中列出多個樣式時，此三位數整數值會定義樣式順序。" #. label for 'Req' pattern key @@ -1792,15 +1633,8 @@ #. help text for 'Prv' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:453 -msgid "" -"Capabilities this pattern provides. They can be used to match <b>REQUIRES from others. Every resolvable has a provide by default--its own name and " -"edition. For example, package <i>bar-1.42-1</i> provides the capability " -"<tt>bar = 1.42-1</tt>." -msgstr "" -"此樣式提供的功能。可用來符合其他產品的 <b>REQUIRES</b>。每個解析項目都有一個" -"預設提供 -- 自己的名稱與版本。例如，套件 <i>bar-1.42-1</i> 提供 <tt>bar = " -"1.42-1</tt> 。" +msgid "Capabilities this pattern provides. They can be used to match <b>REQUIRES</b> from others. Every resolvable has a provide by default--its own name and edition. For example, package <i>bar-1.42-1</i> provides the capability <tt>bar = 1.42-1</tt>." +msgstr "此樣式提供的功能。可用來符合其他產品的 <b>REQUIRES</b>。每個解析項目都有一個預設提供 -- 自己的名稱與版本。例如，套件 <i>bar-1.42-1</i> 提供 <tt>bar = 1.42-1</tt> 。" #. label for 'Con' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:461 @@ -1809,9 +1643,7 @@ #. help text for 'Con' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:463 -msgid "" -"This pattern cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that " -"provides the capability is installed." +msgid "This pattern cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that provides the capability is installed." msgstr "若特定解析項目或提供此相容項目已安裝，則無法安裝此模式。" #. label for 'Obs' pattern key @@ -1835,9 +1667,7 @@ #. help text for 'Rec' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:483 -msgid "" -"A weak version of REQUIRES. If recommended patterns cannot be installed, no " -"error is shown." +msgid "A weak version of REQUIRES. If recommended patterns cannot be installed, no error is shown." msgstr "REQUIRES 的較弱版本。若無法安裝推薦使用的樣式，不會顯示錯誤。" #. label for 'Sup' pattern key @@ -1847,13 +1677,8 @@ #. help text for 'Sup' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:493 -msgid "" -"A reverse <b>Rec</b>. This pattern is installed if the specified capability " -"is provided by an installed resolvable. The dependency resolver installs it. " -"Uninstalling it is silently accepted." -msgstr "" -"反向 <b>Rec</b>。若已安裝的可解析項目提供特定的功能，則將安裝此模式。相依性解" -"析程式會將其安裝。解除安裝時則是無訊息式接受。" +msgid "A reverse <b>Rec</b>. This pattern is installed if the specified capability is provided by an installed resolvable. The dependency resolver installs it. Uninstalling it is silently accepted." +msgstr "反向 <b>Rec</b>。若已安裝的可解析項目提供特定的功能，則將安裝此模式。相依性解析程式會將其安裝。解除安裝時則是無訊息式接受。" #. label for 'Sug' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:501 @@ -1867,9 +1692,7 @@ #. help text for 'Fre' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:513 -msgid "" -"The current pattern is only considered for installation if the pattern " -"specified here is installed." +msgid "The current pattern is only considered for installation if the pattern specified here is installed." msgstr "如果已安裝指定的樣式，目前的模式僅可用於安裝。" #. label for 'Ext' pattern key @@ -1929,11 +1752,8 @@ #. help text for 'Ins' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:601 -msgid "" -"An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected, such as a " -"test version warning or a commercial license." -msgstr "" -"若已選取套件，則會對使用者顯示非正式的訊息，例如測試版本警告或商業授權。" +msgid "An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected, such as a test version warning or a commercial license." +msgstr "若已選取套件，則會對使用者顯示非正式的訊息，例如測試版本警告或商業授權。" #. label for 'Del' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:608 @@ -1942,12 +1762,8 @@ #. help text for 'Del' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:610 -msgid "" -"An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected for " -"deletion, such as a warning that the system is unusable without the package." -msgstr "" -"若已選取要刪除的套件，則會對使用者顯示非正式的訊息，例如在沒有套件的情況下無" -"法使用系統的警告。" +msgid "An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected for deletion, such as a warning that the system is unusable without the package." +msgstr "若已選取要刪除的套件，則會對使用者顯示非正式的訊息，例如在沒有套件的情況下無法使用系統的警告。" #. label for 'Eul' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:617 @@ -1956,12 +1772,8 @@ #. help text for 'Eul' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:619 -msgid "" -"Text of the EULA. This text is displayed before the package installation. If " -"the user does not accept the EULA, the package is not installed." -msgstr "" -"EULA 的文字。此文字會在安裝套件之前顯示。若使用者不接受 EULA，將無法安裝套" -"件。" +msgid "Text of the EULA. This text is displayed before the package installation. If the user does not accept the EULA, the package is not installed." +msgstr "EULA 的文字。此文字會在安裝套件之前顯示。若使用者不接受 EULA，將無法安裝套件。" #. label of key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:660 @@ -1970,9 +1782,7 @@ #. help text for 'REQUIRES' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:662 -msgid "" -"<p>Resolvables that must be installed on the system to meet product " -"requirements.</p>" +msgid "<p>Resolvables that must be installed on the system to meet product requirements.</p>" msgstr "<p>要滿足此產品的需要，必須在系統上安裝的解决方案。</p>" #. label of PROVIDES key @@ -1982,9 +1792,7 @@ #. help text for 'PROVIDES' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:672 -msgid "" -"Capabilities this product provides. They can be used to match <b>requires from others." +msgid "Capabilities this product provides. They can be used to match <b>requires</b> from others." msgstr "為此產品提供相容性提供。他們可以用來滿足來自其他的<b>需要</b>。" #. label of 'CONFLICTS' key @@ -1994,9 +1802,7 @@ #. help text for 'CONFLICTS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:682 -msgid "" -"This resolvable cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that " -"provides the capability is installed." +msgid "This resolvable cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that provides the capability is installed." msgstr "若已安裝指定的可解析項目或提供功能的可解析項目，則無法安裝此解析項目。" #. label of 'OBSOLETES' key @@ -2006,9 +1812,7 @@ #. help text for 'OBSOLETES' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:692 -msgid "" -"When this resolvable is installed, it uninstalls any other resolvable with a " -"name matching this keyword." +msgid "When this resolvable is installed, it uninstalls any other resolvable with a name matching this keyword." msgstr "已安裝此可解析項目時，將解除安裝具有符合此關鍵字的其他可解析項目。" #. label of 'RECOMMENDS' key @@ -2018,12 +1822,8 @@ #. help text for 'RECOMMENDS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:702 -msgid "" -"A weak version of <b>requires</b>. An attempt is made to fulfill " -"<b>RECOMMENDS</b>, but they are silently ignored if no match is possible." -msgstr "" -"較弱版本的<b>需要</b>。會想要滿足 <b>推薦</b>，但若找不到相符的項目，則將被無" -"訊息的忽略。" +msgid "A weak version of <b>requires</b>. An attempt is made to fulfill <b>RECOMMENDS</b>, but they are silently ignored if no match is possible." +msgstr "較弱版本的<b>需要</b>。會想要滿足 <b>推薦</b>，但若找不到相符的項目，則將被無訊息的忽略。" #. label of 'SUGGESTS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:710 @@ -2052,9 +1852,7 @@ #. help text for 'productline' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:747 -msgid "" -"A short name for the product, which does not change between service packs " -"and versions." +msgid "A short name for the product, which does not change between service packs and versions." msgstr "產品的短名稱，這不會因補充包或版本而變更。" #. table item label @@ -2069,9 +1867,7 @@ #. help text for media type #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:761 -msgid "" -"Type of media that will be used for target product. Possible values are: cd, " -"ftp, dvd5, dvd9." +msgid "Type of media that will be used for target product. Possible values are: cd, ftp, dvd5, dvd9." msgstr "目標產品的媒體類型。可能值為：cd, ftp, dvd5, dvd9。" #. table item label Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/add-on.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/add-on.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/add-on.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: add-on\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:41+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:51+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-21 08:21+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -55,12 +55,8 @@ "dvd://\n" #: src/clients/add-on.rb:64 -msgid "" -"Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use " -"xmlfile= command line option." -msgstr "" -"遺失目標檔案名稱 ('xmlfile' 選項)。使用 xmlfile= 指令行選" -"項。" +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use xmlfile= command line option." +msgstr "遺失目標檔案名稱 ('xmlfile' 選項)。使用 xmlfile= 指令行選項。" #. dialog caption #. this is a heading @@ -144,8 +140,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:226 -msgid "" -"<p>Select the language extensions to be installed then click <b>OK</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select the language extensions to be installed then click <b>OK</b>.</p>" msgstr "<p>選取要安裝的語言擴充並按一下<b>「接受」</b>。</p>" #. TRANSLATORS: popup question @@ -403,12 +398,8 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help adp/2 #: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1288 -msgid "" -"<p>Click <b>Add</b> to add a new add-on product, or <b>Delete</b> to remove " -"an add-on which is in use.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>使用<b>「新增」</b>來建立新的附加產品，或使用<b>「刪除」</b>來移除現正使用" -"的附加產品。</p>" +msgid "<p>Click <b>Add</b> to add a new add-on product, or <b>Delete</b> to remove an add-on which is in use.</p>" +msgstr "<p>使用<b>「新增」</b>來建立新的附加產品，或使用<b>「刪除」</b>來移除現正使用的附加產品。</p>" #. no items #: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1341 @@ -490,9 +481,7 @@ #~ msgid "&Select Language Extensions to be Installed" #~ msgstr "選取要安裝的語言擴充(&S)" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Select the language extensions to be installed and then click the " -#~ "<b>OK</b> button.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Select the language extensions to be installed and then click the <b>OK</b> button.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>選取要安裝的語言擴充並按一下<b>「接受」</b>。</p>" #~ msgid "Reading packages available at the installation repositories..." Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/audit-laf.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/audit-laf.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/audit-laf.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: audit-laf\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:41+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:51+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-28 11:44+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -465,8 +465,7 @@ #. Read dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:35 msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Initializing Configuration of Linux Audit Framework</big><br>\n" +"<p><b><big>Initializing Configuration of Linux Audit Framework</big></b><br>\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>正在啟始化 Linux Audit Framework</big></b><br>\n" @@ -507,21 +506,15 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:54 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Auditd Log File Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"The audit daemon is the component of the Linux Auditing System which is " -"responsible for writing all relevant audit events to the log file <i>/var/" -"log/audit/audit.log</i> (default).\n" -"Events may come from the <i>apparmor</i> kernel module, from applications " -"which use <i>libaudit</i> (e.g. PAM) or incidents caused by rules (e.g. file " -"watches).</p>" +"The audit daemon is the component of the Linux Auditing System which is responsible for writing all relevant audit events to the log file <i>/var/log/audit/audit.log</i> (default).\n" +"Events may come from the <i>apparmor</i> kernel module, from applications which use <i>libaudit</i> (e.g. PAM) or incidents caused by rules (e.g. file watches).</p>" msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 2/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:60 msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Rules for auditctl</b> dialog offers more information about rules " -"and the possibility to add rules.\n" -"Detailed information about the log file settings can be obtained from the " -"manual page ('man auditd.conf').</p>" +"<p>The <b>Rules for auditctl</b> dialog offers more information about rules and the possibility to add rules.\n" +"Detailed information about the log file settings can be obtained from the manual page ('man auditd.conf').</p>" msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 3/8 @@ -534,42 +527,33 @@ #. logfile_settings dialog help 4/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:68 msgid "" -"<p><b>Format</b>: set <i>RAW</i> to log all data (store in a format exactly " -"as the kernel\n" -"sends it) or <i>NOLOG</i> to discard all audit information instead of " -"writing it on disk (does not affect\n" +"<p><b>Format</b>: set <i>RAW</i> to log all data (store in a format exactly as the kernel\n" +"sends it) or <i>NOLOG</i> to discard all audit information instead of writing it on disk (does not affect\n" "data sent to the dispatcher).</p> " msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 5/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:74 msgid "" -"<p><b>Flush</b>: describes how to write the data to disk. If set to " -"<i>INCREMENTAL</i> the\n" -"<b>Frequency</b> parameter tells how many records to write before issuing an " -"explicit flush to disk.\n" -"<i>NONE</i> means: no special effort is made to flush data, <i>DATA</i>: " -"keep data portion synced,\n" +"<p><b>Flush</b>: describes how to write the data to disk. If set to <i>INCREMENTAL</i> the\n" +"<b>Frequency</b> parameter tells how many records to write before issuing an explicit flush to disk.\n" +"<i>NONE</i> means: no special effort is made to flush data, <i>DATA</i>: keep data portion synced,\n" "<i>SYNC</i>: keep data and meta-data fully synced.</p>" msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 6/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:81 msgid "" -"<p>Configure the maximum log file size (in megabytes) and the action to take " -"when this\n" +"<p>Configure the maximum log file size (in megabytes) and the action to take when this\n" "value is reached via <b>Size and Action</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 7/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:85 msgid "" -"<p>If the action is set to <i>ROTATE</i> the <b>Number of Log Files</b> " -"specifies the number\n" -"of files to keep. Set to <i>SYSLOG</i>, the audit daemon will write a " -"warning\n" -"to /var/log/messages. With <i>SUSPEND</i> the daemon stops writing records " -"to\n" +"<p>If the action is set to <i>ROTATE</i> the <b>Number of Log Files</b> specifies the number\n" +"of files to keep. Set to <i>SYSLOG</i>, the audit daemon will write a warning\n" +"to /var/log/messages. With <i>SUSPEND</i> the daemon stops writing records to\n" "disk. <i>IGNORE</i> means do nothing, <i>KEEP_LOGS</i> is similar\n" "to ROTATE, but log files are not overwritten.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -577,13 +561,10 @@ #. logfile_settings dialog help 8/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:93 msgid "" -"<p><b>Computer Name Format</b> describes how to write the computer name to " -"the\n" +"<p><b>Computer Name Format</b> describes how to write the computer name to the\n" "log file. If <i>USER</i> is set, the <b>User Defined Name</b> is\n" -"used. <i>NONE</i> means no computer name is inserted. <i>HOSTNAME</i> uses " -"the\n" -"name returned by the 'gethostname' syscall. <i>FQD</i> uses the fully " -"qualified\n" +"used. <i>NONE</i> means no computer name is inserted. <i>HOSTNAME</i> uses the\n" +"name returned by the 'gethostname' syscall. <i>FQD</i> uses the fully qualified\n" "domain name.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -591,28 +572,23 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:101 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Auditd Dispatcher Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"Detailed information about the dispatcher settings can be obtained from the " -"manual page\n" +"Detailed information about the dispatcher settings can be obtained from the manual page\n" "('man auditd.conf').</p>" msgstr "" #. dispatcher dialog help 2/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:107 msgid "" -"<p><b>Dispatcher</b>: The dispatcher program is started by the audit daemon " -"and\n" +"<p><b>Dispatcher</b>: The dispatcher program is started by the audit daemon and\n" "gets all audit events on stdin.</p>" msgstr "" #. dispatcher dialog help 3/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:111 msgid "" -"<p><b>Communication</b>: Controls the communication between the daemon and " -"the dispatcher\n" -"program. A <i>lossy</i> communication means that events going to the " -"dispatcher are discarded\n" -"when the queue (a 128kB buffer) is full. Choose <i>lossless</i> if you want " -"a blocking/lossless\n" +"<p><b>Communication</b>: Controls the communication between the daemon and the dispatcher\n" +"program. A <i>lossy</i> communication means that events going to the dispatcher are discarded\n" +"when the queue (a 128kB buffer) is full. Choose <i>lossless</i> if you want a blocking/lossless\n" "communication.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -620,8 +596,7 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "<p>The dispatcher 'audispd' is an audit event multiplexor.\n" -"For more information see the manual pages ('man audispd' and 'man audispd." -"conf').</p>" +"For more information see the manual pages ('man audispd' and 'man audispd.conf').</p>" msgstr "" #. dispatcher dialog help 5/5 @@ -642,28 +617,23 @@ #. disk space dialog help 2/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:132 msgid "" -"<p><b>Space Left</b> (in megabytes) tells the audit daemon when to perform " -"an <b>Action</b> because\n" +"<p><b>Space Left</b> (in megabytes) tells the audit daemon when to perform an <b>Action</b> because\n" "the system is starting to run low on space.</p>" msgstr "" #. disk space dialog help 3/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:136 msgid "" -"<p>The value for <b>Admin Space Left</b> should be lower than above. The " -"system <b>is running\n" -"low</b> on disk space if the value is reached and the specified <b>Action will be performed.</p>" +"<p>The value for <b>Admin Space Left</b> should be lower than above. The system <b>is running\n" +"low</b> on disk space if the value is reached and the specified <b>Action</b> will be performed.</p>" msgstr "" #. disk space dialog hep 4/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:140 msgid "" "<p>If an action is set to <i>EMAIL</i>, a warning mail will be sent to the\n" -"account specified in <b>Action Mail Account</b>.<br> <i>SYSLOG</i> means " -"the\n" -"disk space warning will be written to /var/log/messages. <i>IGNORE</i> " -"means\n" +"account specified in <b>Action Mail Account</b>.<br> <i>SYSLOG</i> means the\n" +"disk space warning will be written to /var/log/messages. <i>IGNORE</i> means\n" "do nothing. <i>EXEC</i> runs the script specified in <b>Path to\n" "Script</b>. <i>SUSPEND</i> stops writing records to disk. <i>SINGLE</i>\n" "switches the system to single user mode. <i>HALT</i> shuts down the\n" @@ -673,10 +643,8 @@ #. disk space dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:150 msgid "" -"<p>You can also specify a <b>Disk Full Action</b> (disk has become full " -"already) and\n" -"a <b>Disk Error Action</b> (performed whenever an error is detected while " -"writing to disk).\n" +"<p>You can also specify a <b>Disk Full Action</b> (disk has become full already) and\n" +"a <b>Disk Error Action</b> (performed whenever an error is detected while writing to disk).\n" "Available actions are the same as above (except for <i>EMAIL</i>).</p>" msgstr "" @@ -684,8 +652,7 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:156 msgid "" "<p><b>Note:</b> All scripts specified for <i>EXEC</i> must be owned\n" -"by 'root', have '0750' file permissions, and the full path name has to be " -"entered.</p>\n" +"by 'root', have '0750' file permissions, and the full path name has to be entered.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 1/6 @@ -694,39 +661,31 @@ "<p><b><big>Rules for auditctl</big></b><br>\n" "This dialog offers the possibility to enable or to disable the syscall\n" "auditing as well as to lock the audit configuration.\n" -"The selected flag from <b>Set Enabled Flag</b> will be added to the rules." +"The selected flag from <b>Set Enabled Flag</b> will be added to the rules.</p>" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 2/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:167 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Note:</b><br>Locking the rules means they cannot be changed until next " -"reboot.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Note:</b><br>Locking the rules means they cannot be changed until next reboot.</p>" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 3/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:171 msgid "" "<p>Enabling auditing without additional rules will cause the\n" -" applications which use <i>libaudit</i>, e.g. PAM to log to /var/log/audit/" -"audit.log (default).</p> " +" applications which use <i>libaudit</i>, e.g. PAM to log to /var/log/audit/audit.log (default).</p> " msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 4/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:175 msgid "" -"<p>You can also edit the rules manually, which we only recommended for " -"advanced users.<br>\n" +"<p>You can also edit the rules manually, which we only recommended for advanced users.<br>\n" "For more information about all options, see 'man auditctl'.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:179 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Check Syntax</b> sends the rules via <i>auditctl</i> to the audit " -"subsystem and checks the syntax.<br><b>Restore</b> restores the settings " -"from /etc/audit/audit.rules.</p>\n" +msgid "<p><b>Check Syntax</b> sends the rules via <i>auditctl</i> to the audit subsystem and checks the syntax.<br><b>Restore</b> restores the settings from /etc/audit/audit.rules.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 6/6 @@ -767,9 +726,7 @@ #. skip it during initial and second stage or when create AY profile #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:318 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>To continue the configuration of Linux Auditing, the package <b>%1</b> " -"must be installed.</p>" +msgid "<p>To continue the configuration of Linux Auditing, the package <b>%1</b> must be installed.</p>" msgstr "<p>若要設定 iSCSI 啟動器的組態，必須安裝 <b>%1</b> 套件。</p>" #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:321 @@ -847,36 +804,48 @@ msgid "Cannot read audit.rules." msgstr "無法讀取 audit.rules。" -#. Error message +#. question shown in a popup about start of audit daemon +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:463 +msgid "Do you want to start it and enable start at boot\n" +msgstr "" + +#. question continues +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:467 +msgid "The daemon 'auditd' doesn't run.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. message about loaded kernel module #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:471 -msgid "" -"The audit daemon doesn't run.\n" -"Do you want to start it now?" +msgid "The 'apparmor' kernel module is loaded.\n" msgstr "" -"audit 精靈未執行。\n" -"您想要現在啟動它嗎？" -#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:476 -msgid "" -" The 'apparmor' kernel module is loaded.\n" -"The kernel uses a running audit daemon to log audit\n" -"events to /var/log/audit/audit.log (default). \n" -"Do you want to start the daemon now?" +#. Headline of a popup +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:480 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Start daemon." +msgid "Start of Audit Daemon" +msgstr "啟動精靈。" + +#. label of three buttons belonging to the popup +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:482 +msgid "Start and &Enable" msgstr "" -" 'apparmor' 核心模組已載入。\n" -"此核心使用了正在運作的 audit 精靈來紀錄 audit\n" -"事件到 /var/log/audit/audit.log (預設值)。 \n" -"您要現在啟動此精靈嗎？" -#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:484 -msgid "Audit daemon not running." -msgstr "Audit 精靈未執行。" +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:482 +msgid "&Start" +msgstr "啟動(&S)" -#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:489 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:482 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Do not install" +msgid "&Do not start" +msgstr "不要安裝" + +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:491 msgid "Cannot start the audit daemon." msgstr "無法啟動 audit 精靈。" -#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:490 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:492 msgid "" "The rules may be locked.\n" "Continue to check the rules. You can change\n" @@ -889,36 +858,36 @@ "需要重新啟動電腦。\n" #. Auditd read dialog caption -#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:546 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:548 msgid "Saving Audit Configuration" msgstr "儲存 Audit 組態" #. Progress stage 1/2 -#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:562 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:564 msgid "Write the settings" msgstr "寫入設定" #. Progress stage 2/2 -#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:564 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:566 msgid "Write the rules" msgstr "寫入規則" #. Progress step 1/2 -#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:568 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:570 msgid "Writing the settings..." msgstr "正在寫入設定..." #. Progress step 2/2 -#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:570 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:572 msgid "Writing the rules..." msgstr "正在寫入規則..." #. check first whether rules are already locked -#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:586 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:588 msgid "The rules are already locked." msgstr "規則已被鎖定。" -#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:587 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:589 msgid "" "Do you want to change the 'Enabled Flag'?\n" "If yes, the new rules will be written to /etc/audit/audit.rules.\n" @@ -929,26 +898,47 @@ "要讓變更生效需重新啟動電腦。\n" #. Error message -#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:612 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:614 msgid "Restart of the audit daemon failed." msgstr "重新啟動 audit 精靈失敗。" #. Error message -#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:619 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:621 msgid "Cannot write settings to auditd.conf." msgstr "無法將設定寫入 auditd.conf。" #. Error message, rules cannot be set -#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:650 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:652 msgid "Start yast2-audit-laf again and check the rules." msgstr "重新啟動 yast2-audit-laf 並檢查規則。" -#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:656 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:658 msgid "Cannot write settings to auditd.rules." msgstr "無法將設定寫入 auditd.rules。" #. Create a textual summary and a list of unconfigured cards #. @return summary of the current configuration -#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:705 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:707 msgid "Log file" msgstr "記錄檔案" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "The audit daemon doesn't run.\n" +#~ "Do you want to start it now?" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "audit 精靈未執行。\n" +#~ "您想要現在啟動它嗎？" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ " The 'apparmor' kernel module is loaded.\n" +#~ "The kernel uses a running audit daemon to log audit\n" +#~ "events to /var/log/audit/audit.log (default). \n" +#~ "Do you want to start the daemon now?" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ " 'apparmor' 核心模組已載入。\n" +#~ "此核心使用了正在運作的 audit 精靈來紀錄 audit\n" +#~ "事件到 /var/log/audit/audit.log (預設值)。 \n" +#~ "您要現在啟動此精靈嗎？" + +#~ msgid "Audit daemon not running." +#~ msgstr "Audit 精靈未執行。" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/auth-client.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/auth-client.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/auth-client.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:41+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:51+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" "Language-Team: none\n" @@ -57,12 +57,12 @@ #: src/include/dialogs.rb:148 src/include/dialogs.rb:220 #: src/include/dialogs.rb:310 src/include/dialogs.rb:371 msgid "Cancel" -msgstr "" +msgstr "取消" #: src/include/dialogs.rb:149 src/include/dialogs.rb:222 #: src/include/dialogs.rb:313 src/include/dialogs.rb:373 msgid "OK" -msgstr "" +msgstr "確定" #. Waiting for response #. Waiting for response @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ #: src/include/dialogs.rb:221 src/include/dialogs.rb:311 #: src/include/dialogs.rb:372 msgid "Help" -msgstr "" +msgstr "說明" #. No we open the dialog #: src/include/dialogs.rb:306 @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ #: src/include/dialogs.rb:312 msgid "New" -msgstr "" +msgstr "新增" #: src/include/dialogs.rb:356 msgid "Add New Domain" @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ #. The default ldap schema rfc2307 is deprecated use rfc2307bis #: src/include/dialogs.rb:421 msgid "Basic Settings:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "基本設定：" #: src/include/dialogs.rb:423 msgid "Services:" @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ #. Main dialog contents #: src/include/dialogs.rb:512 msgid "SPAM Prevention" -msgstr "" +msgstr "垃圾郵件預防措施" #: src/include/dialogs.rb:526 src/include/dialogs.rb:580 #: src/include/dialogs.rb:586 @@ -179,15 +179,15 @@ #: src/include/dialogs.rb:538 msgid "Add" -msgstr "" +msgstr "新增" #: src/include/dialogs.rb:539 msgid "Edit" -msgstr "" +msgstr "編輯" #: src/include/dialogs.rb:540 msgid "Delete" -msgstr "" +msgstr "刪除" #. Inetd configure dialog caption #: src/include/dialogs.rb:547 @@ -205,70 +205,48 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:22 -msgid "" -"Comma separated list of services that are started when sssd itself starts." +msgid "Comma separated list of services that are started when sssd itself starts." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:27 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:80 -msgid "" -"Number of times services should attempt to reconnect in the event of a Data " -"Provider crash or restart before they give up" +msgid "Number of times services should attempt to reconnect in the event of a Data Provider crash or restart before they give up" msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:31 -msgid "" -"SSSD can use more domains at the same time, but at least one must be " -"configured or SSSD won't start." +msgid "SSSD can use more domains at the same time, but at least one must be configured or SSSD won't start." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:32 -msgid "" -"This parameter contains the list of domains in the order these will be " -"queried." +msgid "This parameter contains the list of domains in the order these will be queried." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:36 -msgid "" -"Default regular expression that describes how to parse the string containing " -"user name and domain into these components" +msgid "Default regular expression that describes how to parse the string containing user name and domain into these components" msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:40 -msgid "" -"The default printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a " -"(name, domain) tuple into a fully qualified name." +msgid "The default printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, domain) tuple into a fully qualified name." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:44 -msgid "" -"SSSD monitors the state of resolv.conf to identify when it needs to update " -"its internal DNS resolver." +msgid "SSSD monitors the state of resolv.conf to identify when it needs to update its internal DNS resolver." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:45 -msgid "" -"By default, we will attempt to use inotify for this, and will fall back to " -"polling resolv.conf every five seconds if inotify cannot be used." +msgid "By default, we will attempt to use inotify for this, and will fall back to polling resolv.conf every five seconds if inotify cannot be used." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:49 -msgid "" -"Directory on the filesystem where SSSD should store Kerberos replay cache " -"files." +msgid "Directory on the filesystem where SSSD should store Kerberos replay cache files." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:53 -msgid "" -"This string will be used as a default domain name for all names without a " -"domain name component." +msgid "This string will be used as a default domain name for all names without a domain name component." msgstr "" #. Define Global Services Parameters #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:60 -msgid "" -"Bit mask that indicates which debug levels will be visible. 0x0010 is the " -"default value as well as the lowest allowed value, 0xFFF0 is the most " -"verbose mode." +msgid "Bit mask that indicates which debug levels will be visible. 0x0010 is the default value as well as the lowest allowed value, 0xFFF0 is the most verbose mode." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:65 @@ -284,42 +262,28 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:85 -msgid "" -"This option specifies the maximum number of file descriptors that may be " -"opened at one time by this SSSD process." +msgid "This option specifies the maximum number of file descriptors that may be opened at one time by this SSSD process." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:90 -msgid "" -"This option specifies the number of seconds that a client of an SSSD process " -"can hold onto a file descriptor without communicating on it." +msgid "This option specifies the number of seconds that a client of an SSSD process can hold onto a file descriptor without communicating on it." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:95 -msgid "" -"If a service is not responding to ping checks (see the “timeout” option), it " -"is first sent the SIGTERM signal that instructs it to quit gracefully." +msgid "If a service is not responding to ping checks (see the “timeout” option), it is first sent the SIGTERM signal that instructs it to quit gracefully." msgstr "" #. NSS configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:103 -msgid "" -"How many seconds should cache nss_sss enumerations (requests for info about " -"all users)?" +msgid "How many seconds should cache nss_sss enumerations (requests for info about all users)?" msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:108 -msgid "" -"The entry cache can be set to automatically update entries in the background " -"if they are requested beyond a percentage of the entry_cache_timeout value " -"for the domain." +msgid "The entry cache can be set to automatically update entries in the background if they are requested beyond a percentage of the entry_cache_timeout value for the domain." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:113 -msgid "" -"Specifies for how many seconds nss_sss should cache negative cache hits " -"(that is, queries for invalid database entries, like nonexistent ones) " -"before asking the back end again." +msgid "Specifies for how many seconds nss_sss should cache negative cache hits (that is, queries for invalid database entries, like nonexistent ones) before asking the back end again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:118 @@ -331,20 +295,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:128 -msgid "" -"If you want filtered user to still be group members set this option to false." +msgid "If you want filtered user to still be group members set this option to false." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:132 -msgid "" -"Override the user's home directory. You can either provide an absolute value " -"or a template." +msgid "Override the user's home directory. You can either provide an absolute value or a template." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:136 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1103 -msgid "" -"Set a default template for a user's home directory if one is not specified " -"explicitly by the domain's data provider." +msgid "Set a default template for a user's home directory if one is not specified explicitly by the domain's data provider." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:140 @@ -360,50 +319,36 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:153 -msgid "" -"The default shell to use if an allowed shell is not installed on the machine." +msgid "The default shell to use if an allowed shell is not installed on the machine." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:157 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1107 -msgid "" -"The default shell to use if the provider does not return one during lookup." +msgid "The default shell to use if the provider does not return one during lookup." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:162 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:205 -msgid "" -"Specifies time in seconds for which the list of subdomains will be " -"considered valid." +msgid "Specifies time in seconds for which the list of subdomains will be considered valid." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:167 -msgid "" -"Specifies time in seconds for which records in the in-memory cache will be " -"valid." +msgid "Specifies time in seconds for which records in the in-memory cache will be valid." msgstr "" #. PAM configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:175 -msgid "" -"If the authentication provider is offline, how long we should allow cached " -"logins (in days since the last successful online login)." +msgid "If the authentication provider is offline, how long we should allow cached logins (in days since the last successful online login)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:180 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:185 -msgid "" -"The time in minutes which has to pass after offline_failed_login_attempts " -"has been reached before a new login attempt is possible." +msgid "The time in minutes which has to pass after offline_failed_login_attempts has been reached before a new login attempt is possible." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:190 -msgid "" -"Controls what kind of messages are shown to the user during authentication." +msgid "Controls what kind of messages are shown to the user during authentication." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:195 -msgid "" -"For any PAM request while SSSD is online, the SSSD will attempt to " -"immediately update the cached identity information for the user in order to " -"ensure that authentication takes place with the latest information." +msgid "For any PAM request while SSSD is online, the SSSD will attempt to immediately update the cached identity information for the user in order to ensure that authentication takes place with the latest information." msgstr "" #. The kerberos domain section @@ -414,37 +359,27 @@ #. SUDO configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:213 -msgid "" -"Whether or not to evaluate the sudoNotBefore and sudoNotAfter attributes " -"that implement time-dependent sudoers entries." +msgid "Whether or not to evaluate the sudoNotBefore and sudoNotAfter attributes that implement time-dependent sudoers entries." msgstr "" #. AUTOFS configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:221 -msgid "" -"Specifies for how many seconds the autofs responder should cache negative " -"hits before asking the back end again." +msgid "Specifies for how many seconds the autofs responder should cache negative hits before asking the back end again." msgstr "" #. SSH configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:229 -msgid "" -"Whether or not to hash host names and addresses in the managed known_hosts " -"file." +msgid "Whether or not to hash host names and addresses in the managed known_hosts file." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:234 -msgid "" -"How many seconds to keep a host in the managed known_hosts file after its " -"host keys were requested." +msgid "How many seconds to keep a host in the managed known_hosts file after its host keys were requested." msgstr "" #. DOMAIN SECTIONS #. These configuration options can be present in a domain configuration section, that is, in a section called “[domain/NAME]” #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:243 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:248 -msgid "" -"UID and GID limits for the domain. If a domain contains an entry that is " -"outside these limits, it is ignored." +msgid "UID and GID limits for the domain. If a domain contains an entry that is outside these limits, it is ignored." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:253 @@ -452,51 +387,35 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:258 -msgid "" -"If the service does not terminate after “force_timeout” seconds, the monitor " -"will forcibly shut it down by sending a SIGKILL signal." +msgid "If the service does not terminate after “force_timeout” seconds, the monitor will forcibly shut it down by sending a SIGKILL signal." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:263 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider entries valid before asking the " -"backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:268 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider user entries valid before asking " -"the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider user entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:273 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider group entries valid before asking " -"the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider group entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:278 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider netgroup entries valid before " -"asking the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider netgroup entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:283 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider service entries valid before asking " -"the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider service entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:288 -msgid "" -"How many seconds sudo should consider rules valid before asking the backend " -"again." +msgid "How many seconds sudo should consider rules valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:293 -msgid "" -"How many seconds the autofs service should consider automounter maps valid " -"before asking the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds the autofs service should consider automounter maps valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:298 @@ -504,9 +423,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:303 -msgid "" -"Number of days entries are left in cache after last successful login before " -"being removed during a cleanup of the cache." +msgid "Number of days entries are left in cache after last successful login before being removed during a cleanup of the cache." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:308 @@ -514,9 +431,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:313 -msgid "" -"Use the full name and domain (as formatted by the domain's full_name_format) " -"as the user's login name reported to NSS." +msgid "Use the full name and domain (as formatted by the domain's full_name_format) as the user's login name reported to NSS." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:319 @@ -528,8 +443,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:331 -msgid "" -"The provider which should handle change password operations for the domain." +msgid "The provider which should handle change password operations for the domain." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:337 @@ -553,27 +467,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:366 -msgid "" -"Regular expression for this domain that describes how to parse the string " -"containing user name and domain into these components." +msgid "Regular expression for this domain that describes how to parse the string containing user name and domain into these components." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:371 -msgid "" -"A printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, " -"domain) tuple for this domain into a fully qualified name." +msgid "A printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, domain) tuple for this domain into a fully qualified name." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:377 -msgid "" -"Provides the ability to select preferred address family to use when " -"performing DNS lookups." +msgid "Provides the ability to select preferred address family to use when performing DNS lookups." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:382 -msgid "" -"Defines the amount of time (in seconds) to wait for a reply from the DNS " -"resolver before assuming that it is unreachable." +msgid "Defines the amount of time (in seconds) to wait for a reply from the DNS resolver before assuming that it is unreachable." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:386 @@ -581,9 +487,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:387 -msgid "" -"If service discovery is used in the back end, specifies the domain part of " -"the service discovery DNS query." +msgid "If service discovery is used in the back end, specifies the domain part of the service discovery DNS query." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:391 @@ -595,15 +499,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:401 -msgid "" -"When a user or group is looked up by name in the proxy provider, a second " -"lookup by ID is performed to 'canonicalize' the name in case the requested " -"name was an alias." +msgid "When a user or group is looked up by name in the proxy provider, a second lookup by ID is performed to 'canonicalize' the name in case the requested name was an alias." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:406 -msgid "" -"Use this homedir as default value for all subdomains within this domain." +msgid "Use this homedir as default value for all subdomains within this domain." msgstr "" #. Following options will be provided by SSSD's 'simple' access-control provider @@ -612,9 +512,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:417 -msgid "" -"Comma separated list of groups who are allowed to log in. This applies only " -"to groups within this SSSD domain." +msgid "Comma separated list of groups who are allowed to log in. This applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:422 @@ -622,9 +520,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:427 -msgid "" -"Comma separated list of groups that are explicitly denied access. This " -"applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." +msgid "Comma separated list of groups that are explicitly denied access. This applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:433 @@ -634,32 +530,23 @@ #. The local domain section #. This section contains settings for domain that stores users and groups in SSSD native database, that is, a domain that uses id_provider=local. #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:442 -msgid "" -"The tools append the login name to base_directory and use that as the home " -"directory." +msgid "The tools append the login name to base_directory and use that as the home directory." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:447 -msgid "" -"Indicate if a home directory should be created by default for new users." +msgid "Indicate if a home directory should be created by default for new users." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:452 -msgid "" -"Indicate if a home directory should be removed by default for deleted users." +msgid "Indicate if a home directory should be removed by default for deleted users." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:457 -msgid "" -"Used by sss_useradd(8) to specify the default permissions on a newly created " -"home directory." +msgid "Used by sss_useradd(8) to specify the default permissions on a newly created home directory." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:462 -msgid "" -"The skeleton directory, which contains files and directories to be copied in " -"the user's home directory, when the home directory is created by " -"sss_useradd(8)" +msgid "The skeleton directory, which contains files and directories to be copied in the user's home directory, when the home directory is created by sss_useradd(8)" msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:467 @@ -672,15 +559,11 @@ #. The ldap domain section #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:480 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:485 -msgid "" -"Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD " -"should connect in the order of preference." +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:491 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:497 -msgid "" -"Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD " -"should connect in the order of preference to change the password of a user." +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference to change the password of a user." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:503 @@ -724,8 +607,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:553 -msgid "" -" The LDAP attribute that contains the name of the user's home directory." +msgid " The LDAP attribute that contains the name of the user's home directory." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:558 @@ -741,106 +623,67 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:573 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:778 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the " -"parent object." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the parent object." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:578 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (date of the last " -"password change)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (date of the last password change)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:583 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (minimum password " -"age)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (minimum password age)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:588 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (maximum password " -"age)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (maximum password age)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:593 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password warning " -"period)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password warning period)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:598 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password " -"inactivity period)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password inactivity period)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:603 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow or ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow, this " -"parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its " -"shadow(5) counterpart (account expiration date)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow or ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (account expiration date)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:608 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of " -"an LDAP attribute storing the date and time of last password change in " -"kerberos." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the date and time of last password change in kerberos." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:613 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of " -"an LDAP attribute storing the date and time when current password expires." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the date and time when current password expires." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:618 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name " -"of an LDAP attribute storing the expiration time of the account." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the expiration time of the account." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:623 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name " -"of an LDAP attribute storing the user account control bit field." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the user account control bit field." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:628 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds or equivalent, this parameter " -"determines if access is allowed or not." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds or equivalent, this parameter determines if access is allowed or not." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:633 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines if " -"access is allowed or not." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines if access is allowed or not." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:638 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines until " -"which date access is granted." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines until which date access is granted." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:643 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines the " -"hours of a day in a week when access is granted." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines the hours of a day in a week when access is granted." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:648 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the user's Kerberos User Principal Name " -"(UPN)." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the user's Kerberos User Principal Name (UPN)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:652 @@ -848,10 +691,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:657 -msgid "" -"Some directory servers, for example Active Directory, might deliver the " -"realm part of the UPN in lower case, which might cause the authentication to " -"fail." +msgid "Some directory servers, for example Active Directory, might deliver the realm part of the UPN in lower case, which might cause the authentication to fail." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:658 @@ -859,16 +699,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:663 -msgid "" -"Specifies how many seconds SSSD has to wait before refreshing its cache of " -"enumerated records." +msgid "Specifies how many seconds SSSD has to wait before refreshing its cache of enumerated records." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:668 -msgid "" -"Determine how often to check the cache for inactive entries (such as groups " -"with no members and users who have never logged in) and remove them to save " -"space." +msgid "Determine how often to check the cache for inactive entries (such as groups with no members and users who have never logged in) and remove them to save space." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:673 @@ -880,17 +715,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:683 -msgid "" -"If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=authorized_service, SSSD will " -"use the presence of the authorizedService attribute in the user's LDAP entry " -"to determine access privilege." +msgid "If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=authorized_service, SSSD will use the presence of the authorizedService attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access privilege." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:688 -msgid "" -"If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=host, SSSD will use the " -"presence of the host attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access " -"privilege." +msgid "If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=host, SSSD will use the presence of the host attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access privilege." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:698 @@ -918,30 +747,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:728 -msgid "" -" The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the " -"parent object." +msgid " The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the parent object." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:734 -msgid "" -"If ldap_schema is set to a schema format that supports nested groups (e.g. " -"RFC2307bis), then this option controls how many levels of nesting SSSD will " -"follow." +msgid "If ldap_schema is set to a schema format that supports nested groups (e.g. RFC2307bis), then this option controls how many levels of nesting SSSD will follow." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:740 -msgid "" -"This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific " -"feature which may speed up group lookup operations on deployments with " -"complex or deep nested groups." +msgid "This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific feature which may speed up group lookup operations on deployments with complex or deep nested groups." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:746 -msgid "" -"This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific " -"feature which might speed up initgroups operations (most notably when " -"dealing with complex or deep nested groups)." +msgid "This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific feature which might speed up initgroups operations (most notably when dealing with complex or deep nested groups)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:752 @@ -957,13 +775,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:768 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the (host, user, domain) netgroup triples." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the (host, user, domain) netgroup triples." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:773 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the UUID/GUID of an LDAP netgroup object." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the UUID/GUID of an LDAP netgroup object." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:783 @@ -971,9 +787,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:788 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the name of service attributes and their " -"aliases." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the name of service attributes and their aliases." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:793 @@ -981,52 +795,35 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:798 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the protocols understood by this service." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the protocols understood by this service." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:804 -msgid "" -"An optional base DN, search scope and LDAP filter to restrict LDAP searches " -"for this attribute type." +msgid "An optional base DN, search scope and LDAP filter to restrict LDAP searches for this attribute type." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:809 -msgid "" -" Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches are allowed to run " -"before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode " -"is entered)." +msgid " Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode is entered)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:814 -msgid "" -"Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches for user and group " -"enumerations are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results " -"are returned (and offline mode is entered)." +msgid "Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches for user and group enumerations are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode is entered)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:819 -msgid "" -"Specifies the timeout (in seconds) after which the poll(2)/select(2) " -"following a connect(2) returns in case of no activity." +msgid "Specifies the timeout (in seconds) after which the poll(2)/select(2) following a connect(2) returns in case of no activity." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:824 -msgid "" -"Specifies a timeout (in seconds) after which calls to synchronous LDAP APIs " -"will abort if no response is received." +msgid "Specifies a timeout (in seconds) after which calls to synchronous LDAP APIs will abort if no response is received." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:829 -msgid "" -"Specifies a timeout (in seconds) that a connection to an LDAP server will be " -"maintained." +msgid "Specifies a timeout (in seconds) that a connection to an LDAP server will be maintained." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:834 -msgid "" -"Specify the number of records to retrieve from LDAP in a single request. " -"Some LDAP servers enforce a maximum limit per-request." +msgid "Specify the number of records to retrieve from LDAP in a single request. Some LDAP servers enforce a maximum limit per-request." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:839 @@ -1034,33 +831,23 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:844 -msgid "" -"When communicating with an LDAP server using SASL, specify the minimum " -"security level necessary to establish the connection." +msgid "When communicating with an LDAP server using SASL, specify the minimum security level necessary to establish the connection." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:849 -msgid "" -"Specify the number of group members that must be missing from the internal " -"cache in order to trigger a dereference lookup." +msgid "Specify the number of group members that must be missing from the internal cache in order to trigger a dereference lookup." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:855 -msgid "" -"Specifies what checks to perform on server certificates in a TLS session, if " -"any." +msgid "Specifies what checks to perform on server certificates in a TLS session, if any." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:860 -msgid "" -"Specifies the file that contains certificates for all of the Certificate " -"Authorities that sssd will recognize." +msgid "Specifies the file that contains certificates for all of the Certificate Authorities that sssd will recognize." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:865 -msgid "" -"Specifies the path of a directory that contains Certificate Authority " -"certificates in separate individual files." +msgid "Specifies the path of a directory that contains Certificate Authority certificates in separate individual files." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:869 @@ -1076,16 +863,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:883 -msgid "" -"Specifies that the id_provider connection must also use tls to protect the " -"channel." +msgid "Specifies that the id_provider connection must also use tls to protect the channel." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:888 -msgid "" -"Specifies that SSSD should attempt to map user and group IDs from the " -"ldap_user_objectsid and ldap_group_objectsid attributes instead of relying " -"on ldap_user_uid_number and ldap_group_gid_number." +msgid "Specifies that SSSD should attempt to map user and group IDs from the ldap_user_objectsid and ldap_group_objectsid attributes instead of relying on ldap_user_uid_number and ldap_group_gid_number." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:892 @@ -1101,9 +883,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:907 -msgid "" -"If set to true, the LDAP library would perform a reverse lookup to " -"canonicalize the host name during a SASL bind." +msgid "If set to true, the LDAP library would perform a reverse lookup to canonicalize the host name during a SASL bind." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:912 @@ -1119,8 +899,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:927 -msgid "" -"Select the policy to evaluate the password expiration on the client side." +msgid "Select the policy to evaluate the password expiration on the client side." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:932 @@ -1132,28 +911,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:941 -msgid "" -"Specifies the service name to use to find an LDAP server which allows " -"password changes when service discovery is enabled." +msgid "Specifies the service name to use to find an LDAP server which allows password changes when service discovery is enabled." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:946 -msgid "" -"Specifies whether to update the ldap_user_shadow_last_change attribute with " -"days since the Epoch after a password change operation." +msgid "Specifies whether to update the ldap_user_shadow_last_change attribute with days since the Epoch after a password change operation." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:951 -msgid "" -"If using access_provider = ldap and ldap_access_order = filter (default), " -"this option is mandatory. It specifies an LDAP search filter criterion that " -"must be met for the user to be granted access on this host." +msgid "If using access_provider = ldap and ldap_access_order = filter (default), this option is mandatory. It specifies an LDAP search filter criterion that must be met for the user to be granted access on this host." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:956 -msgid "" -" With this option a client side evaluation of access control attributes can " -"be enabled." +msgid " With this option a client side evaluation of access control attributes can be enabled." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:962 @@ -1165,15 +935,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:972 -msgid "" -"Allows to retain local users as members of an LDAP group for servers that " -"use the RFC2307 schema." +msgid "Allows to retain local users as members of an LDAP group for servers that use the RFC2307 schema." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:995 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:999 -msgid "" -"Specifies the comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the " -"Kerberos servers to which SSSD should connect, in the order of preference." +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the Kerberos servers to which SSSD should connect, in the order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1004 @@ -1181,9 +947,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1009 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1014 -msgid "" -"If the change password service is not running on the KDC, alternative " -"servers can be defined here." +msgid "If the change password service is not running on the KDC, alternative servers can be defined here." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1019 @@ -1195,39 +959,27 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1029 -msgid "" -" Timeout in seconds after an online authentication request or change " -"password request is aborted." +msgid " Timeout in seconds after an online authentication request or change password request is aborted." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1034 -msgid "" -"Verify with the help of krb5_keytab that the TGT obtained has not been " -"spoofed." +msgid "Verify with the help of krb5_keytab that the TGT obtained has not been spoofed." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1039 -msgid "" -"The location of the keytab to use when validating credentials obtained from " -"KDCs." +msgid "The location of the keytab to use when validating credentials obtained from KDCs." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1044 -msgid "" -"Store the password of the user if the provider is offline and use it to " -"request a TGT when the provider comes online again." +msgid "Store the password of the user if the provider is offline and use it to request a TGT when the provider comes online again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1048 -msgid "" -"Request a renewable ticket with a total lifetime, given as an integer " -"immediately followed by a time unit." +msgid "Request a renewable ticket with a total lifetime, given as an integer immediately followed by a time unit." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1052 -msgid "" -"Request ticket with a with a lifetime, given as an integer immediately " -"followed by a time unit." +msgid "Request ticket with a with a lifetime, given as an integer immediately followed by a time unit." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1056 @@ -1235,9 +987,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1061 -msgid "" -"Enables flexible authentication secure tunneling (FAST) for Kerberos pre-" -"authentication." +msgid "Enables flexible authentication secure tunneling (FAST) for Kerberos pre-authentication." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1065 @@ -1254,16 +1004,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1087 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1091 -msgid "" -"The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the AD servers to " -"which SSSD should connect in order of preference." +msgid "The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the AD servers to which SSSD should connect in order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1095 -msgid "" -"Optional. May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the " -"fully qualified name used in the Active Directory domain to identify this " -"host." +msgid "Optional. May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully qualified name used in the Active Directory domain to identify this host." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1099 @@ -1271,15 +1016,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1112 -msgid "" -" Specifies the lower bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping " -"Active Directory user and group SIDs." +msgid " Specifies the lower bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active Directory user and group SIDs." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1117 -msgid "" -"Specifies the upper bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping " -"Active Directory user and group SIDs." +msgid "Specifies the upper bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active Directory user and group SIDs." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1122 @@ -1295,9 +1036,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1135 -msgid "" -"Changes the behavior of the ID-mapping algorithm to behave more similarly to " -"winbind's “idmap_autorid” algorithm." +msgid "Changes the behavior of the ID-mapping algorithm to behave more similarly to winbind's “idmap_autorid” algorithm." msgstr "" #. The Active Directory domain section @@ -1306,21 +1045,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1151 -msgid "" -"The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the IPA servers to " -"which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." +msgid "The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the IPA servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1155 -msgid "" -"May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully " -"qualified name." +msgid "May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully qualified name." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1160 -msgid "" -"This option tells SSSD to automatically update the DNS server built into " -"FreeIPA v2 with the IP address of this client." +msgid "This option tells SSSD to automatically update the DNS server built into FreeIPA v2 with the IP address of this client." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1165 @@ -1328,8 +1061,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1169 -msgid "" -"Choose the interface whose IP address should be used for dynamic DNS updates." +msgid "Choose the interface whose IP address should be used for dynamic DNS updates." msgstr "" #. end Export Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/auth-server.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/auth-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/auth-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:41+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:51+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" "Language-Team: none\n" @@ -24,31 +24,31 @@ #: src/clients/auth-server.rb:49 msgid "Enable/Disable the service" -msgstr "" +msgstr "啟用/停用此服務" #: src/clients/auth-server.rb:53 msgid "Add a new database" -msgstr "" +msgstr "加入新的資料庫" #: src/clients/auth-server.rb:60 msgid "Show a list of currently available databases" -msgstr "" +msgstr "顯示目前可用的資料庫清單" #: src/clients/auth-server.rb:64 msgid "Show a list of currently configured schemas" -msgstr "" +msgstr "顯示目前已組態的概要" #: src/clients/auth-server.rb:68 msgid "Add a schema to the list" -msgstr "" +msgstr "加入概要到清單中" #: src/clients/auth-server.rb:72 msgid "Enable the service" -msgstr "" +msgstr "啟用服務" #: src/clients/auth-server.rb:73 msgid "Disable the service" -msgstr "" +msgstr "服務服務" #: src/clients/auth-server.rb:75 msgid "Database type (\"hdb\" or \"bdb\")" @@ -56,27 +56,27 @@ #: src/clients/auth-server.rb:79 msgid "Base DN for the database" -msgstr "" +msgstr "資料庫的 Base DN" #: src/clients/auth-server.rb:83 msgid "DN for the administrator login" -msgstr "" +msgstr "管理者登入的 DN" #: src/clients/auth-server.rb:87 msgid "Administrator password" -msgstr "" +msgstr "管理密碼" #: src/clients/auth-server.rb:95 msgid "Directory for the database" -msgstr "" +msgstr "資料庫的目錄" #: src/clients/auth-server.rb:98 msgid "File" -msgstr "" +msgstr "檔案" #: src/clients/auth-server.rb:99 msgid "Position" -msgstr "" +msgstr "位置" #. map edb = LdapServer::ReadDatabase(); #. y2milestone("DBs: %1", edb); @@ -92,31 +92,27 @@ #. y2milestone("db-options : %1", db); #: src/clients/auth-server.rb:219 msgid "Error while adding the database" -msgstr "" +msgstr "加入資料庫時發生錯誤" #. error popup #. error popup #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:58 #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:228 -msgid "" -"The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings " -"later in the installed system." -msgstr "" +msgid "The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings later in the installed system." +msgstr "LDAP 資料庫已經建立。稍後在已安裝系統上可以變更設定。" #. y2error( "sysconfig var is '%1'", SCR::Read( .sysconfig.openldap.OPENLDAP_REGISTER_SLP ) ); #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:101 msgid "[root password]" -msgstr "" +msgstr "[根密碼]" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:103 msgid "[manually set]" -msgstr "" +msgstr "[手動方式設定]" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:106 -msgid "" -"Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to " -"continue." -msgstr "" +msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to continue." +msgstr "無法取回系統 root 密碼。請設定 LDAP 伺服器密碼繼續。" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:112 msgid "Setting up LDAP Master Server:" @@ -128,15 +124,15 @@ #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:121 msgid "Base DN: " -msgstr "" +msgstr "基礎 DN" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:125 msgid "Root DN: " -msgstr "" +msgstr "根 DN：" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:128 msgid "LDAP Password: " -msgstr "" +msgstr "LDAP 密碼：" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:135 msgid "Setting up LDAP Slave Server" @@ -149,40 +145,40 @@ #. all known interfaces for testing #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:185 msgid "Open Port in Firewall" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在防火牆中開啟埠" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:188 #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:203 msgid "YES" -msgstr "" +msgstr "是" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:190 #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:204 #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:212 msgid "NO" -msgstr "" +msgstr "否" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:194 msgid "Firewall is disabled" -msgstr "" +msgstr "防火牆已停用" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:200 msgid "Register at SLP Daemon: " -msgstr "" +msgstr "在 SLP 精靈註冊： " #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:212 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2192 msgid "Start LDAP Server: " -msgstr "" +msgstr "啟動 LDAP 伺服器：" #. Rich text title for LdapServer in proposals #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:253 msgid "OpenLDAP Server" -msgstr "" +msgstr "OpenLDAP 伺服器" #. Menu title for LdapServer in proposals #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:257 msgid "Open&LDAP Server" -msgstr "" +msgstr "OpenLDAP 伺服器(&L)" #. translators: error popup before aborting the module #. translators: error popup before aborting the module @@ -193,6 +189,9 @@ "YaST2 cannot continue the configuration\n" "without installing the package." msgstr "" +"套件 '%1' 無法使用。\n" +"YaST2 無法繼續設定組態，\n" +"因為沒有安裝套件。" #. translators: error popup before aborting the module #. translators: error popup before aborting the module @@ -202,11 +201,11 @@ "YaST2 cannot continue the configuration\n" "without installing the required packages." msgstr "" +"未安裝必要的套件，\n" +"YaST2 無法繼續設定組態。" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:309 -msgid "" -"OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has " -"finished." +msgid "OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has finished." msgstr "" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:344 @@ -214,6 +213,8 @@ "OpenLDAP Server: Common server certificate not available.\n" "StartTLS is disabled." msgstr "" +"OpenLDAP 伺服器：公用伺服器憑證無法使用。\n" +"StartTLS 已關閉。" #. Command line help text for the Xldap-server module #: src/clients/openldap-mirrormode.rb:36 @@ -227,17 +228,15 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:107 msgid "" -"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not " -"running.\n" -"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do " -"you \n" +"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not running.\n" +"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do you \n" "want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:112 #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:202 msgid "Restart" -msgstr "" +msgstr "重新啟動" #: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:114 #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:203 @@ -287,23 +286,23 @@ #. ******************** #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:48 msgid "General Settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "一般設定" #. list of valid encoding methods for password inputs, used by add database and edit database #. dialogs #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:52 src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:40 msgid "&Start LDAP Server" -msgstr "" +msgstr "啟動 LDAP 伺服器(&S)" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:77 src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:59 msgid "Register at an &SLP Daemon" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在 SLP 精靈註冊(&S)" #. `HWeight(1, `PushButton( `id( `pb_interface_ldaps), "Interfaces ...")), #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:88 #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:127 msgid "Firewall Settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "防火牆設定" #. create new item #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:198 @@ -311,9 +310,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:199 -msgid "" -"Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want " -"to create a new configuration from scratch?" +msgid "Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "" #. get helps page @@ -358,7 +355,7 @@ #. Button text #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:452 msgid "&Advanced Configuration" -msgstr "" +msgstr "進階組態(&A)" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:464 msgid "Kerberos Authentication" @@ -370,7 +367,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:494 msgid "Basic Kerberos Settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "基本 Kerberos 設定" #. TextEntry label: "Realm" is a typical kerberos phrase. #. Please think twice please before you translate this, @@ -390,7 +387,7 @@ #. caption #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:595 msgid "Advanced Kerberos Configuration" -msgstr "" +msgstr "進階 Kerberos 組態" #. tree widget label #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:623 @@ -402,12 +399,12 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:637 #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:729 msgid "Current Selection: " -msgstr "" +msgstr "目前選項：" #. tree widget headline #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:789 msgid "Configuration:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "配置：" #. ############## input handler ################ #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:913 @@ -432,7 +429,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:973 msgid "Browse" -msgstr "" +msgstr "瀏覽" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:980 msgid "Generate a Random Password" @@ -453,7 +450,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1068 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1679 msgid "Password" -msgstr "" +msgstr "密碼" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1073 msgid "Validate Password" @@ -480,7 +477,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1139 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1607 #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1702 msgid "Protocol" -msgstr "" +msgstr "協定" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1146 msgid "Provider Hostname" @@ -497,18 +494,18 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1171 #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:261 msgid "C&A Certificate File (PEM Format)" -msgstr "" +msgstr "CA 憑證檔案 (PEM 格式)(&A)" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1174 #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:264 msgid "Bro&wse..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "瀏覽(&W)..." #. file selection headline #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1231 #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:567 msgid "Select CA Certificate File" -msgstr "" +msgstr "選取 CA 憑證檔案" #. **************************** #. * tls handlers @@ -521,9 +518,7 @@ #. Doing these checks during installation will #. most probably fail #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1277 -msgid "" -"Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider " -"server.\n" +msgid "Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider server.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1280 @@ -561,15 +556,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1383 -msgid "" -"Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." +msgid "Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." msgstr "" #. 2. Verify that the binddn/credential combination acutally works #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1410 -msgid "" -"Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication " -"configuration on the provider server failed.\n" +msgid "Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication configuration on the provider server failed.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1413 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1971 @@ -596,8 +588,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1525 msgid "" "\n" -"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to " -"encrypted\n" +"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to encrypted\n" "LDAP Connections.)\n" msgstr "" @@ -610,7 +601,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1003 #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:405 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:219 msgid "&Validate Password" -msgstr "" +msgstr "驗證密碼(&V)" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1543 msgid "Prepare for MirrorMode replication (generates the serverId attribute)" @@ -628,10 +619,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:21 msgid "" "<p>Select <b>Yes</b> if the LDAP server should be started automatically as \n" -"part of the boot process. Select <b>No</b> if the LDAP server should not be " -"started. Note:\n" -"After selecting <b>No</b>, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.\n" +"part of the boot process. Select <b>No</b> if the LDAP server should not be started. Note:\n" +"After selecting <b>No</b>, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:26 @@ -644,18 +633,14 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:30 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAP</b> is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured " -"communication\n" -"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate " -"configured.</p>" +"<p><b>LDAP</b> is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured communication\n" +"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate configured.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:33 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAPS</b> enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL " -"protected\n" -"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate " -"configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" +"<p><b>LDAPS</b> enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL protected\n" +"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:36 @@ -682,17 +667,13 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:49 msgid "" -"<p>Choose the <b>Database</b> from <b>hdb</b> <b>bdb</b> and <b>mdb</b>. " -"<b>Hdb</b> is a\n" -"variant of the <b>bdb</b> backend that uses a hierarchical database layout " -"and\n" +"<p>Choose the <b>Database</b> from <b>hdb</b> <b>bdb</b> and <b>mdb</b>. <b>Hdb</b> is a\n" +"variant of the <b>bdb</b> backend that uses a hierarchical database layout and\n" "supports subtree renames. Otherwise it is identical to <b>bdb</b>. A\n" "<b>hdb</b>-Database needs a larger <b>idlcachesize</b> than a\n" "<b>bdb</b>-Database for a good search performance.\n" -"<b>mdb</b>-Database uses OpenLDAP's Lightning Memory-Mapped DB (LMDB) " -"library to store data.\n" -"It similar to the <b>hdb</b> backend but it is both more space-efficient and " -"more execution-efficient.</p>\n" +"<b>mdb</b>-Database uses OpenLDAP's Lightning Memory-Mapped DB (LMDB) library to store data.\n" +"It similar to the <b>hdb</b> backend but it is both more space-efficient and more execution-efficient.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:58 @@ -703,24 +684,18 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:61 msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Administrator DN</b> along with a <b>LDAP Administrator Password \n" -"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and " -"other \n" -"administrative limit restrictions. Checking <b>Append Base DN</b> appends " -"the \n" -"<b>Base DN</b> entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example," -"dc=com</tt>\n" -"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective " -"Administrator DN\n" +"<p>The <b>Administrator DN</b> along with a <b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> \n" +"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and other \n" +"administrative limit restrictions. Checking <b>Append Base DN</b> appends the \n" +"<b>Base DN</b> entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example,dc=com</tt>\n" +"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective Administrator DN\n" "of <tt>c=Admin,dc=example,dc=com</tt>.</p> " msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:69 msgid "" "<p>If this wizard was started during installation, the \n" -"<b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> is initially set to the system's root " -"password\n" +"<b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> is initially set to the system's root password\n" "entered earlier in the installation process.</p> " msgstr "" @@ -754,8 +729,7 @@ "click <b>Change Password</b>. \n" "A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the \n" "<b>Password Encryption</b>. \n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already " -"been \n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been \n" "set in the configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -769,35 +743,25 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:101 msgid "" -"<p>Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN " -"automatically\n" +"<p>Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN automatically\n" "with <b>Append Base DN</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:104 msgid "" -"<p>To change the password for the administrator account, click <b>Change " -"Password</b>.\n" -"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the <b>Password " -"Encryption</b>.\n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been " -"set in the configuration.</p>\n" +"<p>To change the password for the administrator account, click <b>Change Password</b>.\n" +"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the <b>Password Encryption</b>.\n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been set in the configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:109 msgid "" -"<p>With the <b>Entry Cache</b> and <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> you can " -"adjust\n" -"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The <b>Entry Cache</b> defines the " -"number of entries\n" -"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough " -"RAM) this number\n" -"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The <b>Index " -"Cache (IDL cache)</b> \n" -"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially " -"HDB-Databases require a\n" -"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the " -"entry cache as a rule of\n" +"<p>With the <b>Entry Cache</b> and <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> you can adjust\n" +"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The <b>Entry Cache</b> defines the number of entries\n" +"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough RAM) this number\n" +"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> \n" +"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially HDB-Databases require a\n" +"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the entry cache as a rule of\n" "thumbs).</p>" msgstr "" @@ -813,14 +777,10 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:122 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Hash Clear Text Passwords</b> to specify that the OpenLDAP " -"server\n" -"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests " -"before storing them\n" -"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, " -"but may be\n" -"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify " -"extended operation \n" +"<p>Check <b>Hash Clear Text Passwords</b> to specify that the OpenLDAP server\n" +"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests before storing them\n" +"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, but may be\n" +"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify extended operation \n" "to manage passwords.</p> " msgstr "" @@ -834,15 +794,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:136 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the name of the default policy object in <b>Default Policy Object " -"DN</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" +msgid "<p>Enter the name of the default policy object in <b>Default Policy Object DN</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>請在<b>「預設規則物件 DN」</b>中輸入預設規則物件的名稱。</p>" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:139 msgid "" -"<p>Create or change the default policy by clicking <b>Edit Policy</b>. You " -"may\n" +"<p>Create or change the default policy by clicking <b>Edit Policy</b>. You may\n" "be asked to enter the LDAP administrator password afterwards to allow the\n" "Policy Object being read from the server.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -856,33 +813,28 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:146 -msgid "" -"<p>The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index " -"defined.</p>" +msgid "<p>The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index defined.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:149 msgid "" "<p>Indexes are used by OpenLDAP to improve search performance on specific\n" "types of searches. Indexes should be configured corresponding to the most\n" -"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different " -"types\n" +"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different types\n" "of indexes.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:155 msgid "" "<p><b>Presence</b>: This index is used for searches with presence filters\n" -"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be " -"configured\n" +"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be configured\n" "for attributes that occur rarely in the database.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:160 msgid "" "<p><b>Equality</b>: This index is used for searches with equality filters \n" -"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An <b>Equality</b> " -"index\n" +"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An <b>Equality</b> index\n" "should always be configured with the <tt>objectclass</tt> attribute.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -901,11 +853,9 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:173 msgid "" -"<p>Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly " -"added\n" +"<p>Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly added\n" "indexes will get active on a database. After the configuration has been\n" -"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the " -"indexing\n" +"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the indexing\n" "information for the database.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -921,8 +871,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:185 msgid "" -"<p>For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a " -"more\n" +"<p>For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a more\n" "detailed view of a rule or to change one, select the rule in the table and\n" "click <b>Edit</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -935,11 +884,9 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:193 msgid "" -"<p>OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose " -"target\n" +"<p>OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose target\n" "definition (DN, filter and attributes) matches the entry being\n" -"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, " -"using\n" +"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, using\n" "the <b>Up</b> and <b>Down</b> buttons.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -949,8 +896,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:202 msgid "" -"<p>Select the \"<b>Enable ldapsync provider for this database</b>\" " -"checkbox, if you want to \n" +"<p>Select the \"<b>Enable ldapsync provider for this database</b>\" checkbox, if you want to \n" "be able to replicate the currently selected database to another server.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -960,16 +906,11 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:206 msgid "" -"<p>Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator " -"(stored\n" -"in the \"<i>contextCSN</i>\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is " -"synced\n" -"to the database after the number of write \"<i>Operations</i>\" you specify " -"or\n" -"after more than the specified \"<i>Minutes</i>\" have passed since the " -"indicator\n" -"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator " -"is\n" +"<p>Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator (stored\n" +"in the \"<i>contextCSN</i>\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is synced\n" +"to the database after the number of write \"<i>Operations</i>\" you specify or\n" +"after more than the specified \"<i>Minutes</i>\" have passed since the indicator\n" +"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator is\n" "only written after a clean shutdown. Writing it more often can result in\n" "a faster startup time after an unclean shutdown but might result in a small\n" "performance hit in environments with many LDAP write operations.</p>\n" @@ -981,14 +922,10 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:217 msgid "" -"<p>Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write " -"operations\n" -"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in " -"the session log. \n" -"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"<i>refreshOnly</i>\" " -"replication. In \n" -"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master " -"server.</p>" +"<p>Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write operations\n" +"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in the session log. \n" +"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"<i>refreshOnly</i>\" replication. In \n" +"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master server.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:223 @@ -997,8 +934,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:226 msgid "" -"<p>Select \"<b>This database is a Replication Consumer</b>\" if you want " -"the\n" +"<p>Select \"<b>This database is a Replication Consumer</b>\" if you want the\n" "database to be a replica of a database on another server.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1012,8 +948,7 @@ "server here. Select the protocol to use (<b>ldap</b> or <b>ldaps</b>) and\n" "enter the fully qualified hostname of the master server. It is important to\n" "use the fully qualified hostname to verify the master server's TLS/SSL\n" -"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-" -"standard\n" +"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-standard\n" "ldap ports.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1046,10 +981,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:252 msgid "" -"<p>Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to " -"authenticate against the master.\n" -"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated " -"database on the master.</p>\n" +"<p>Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to authenticate against the master.\n" +"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated database on the master.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:255 @@ -1060,10 +993,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>As the slave database is readonly, the slave server will answer write\n" "operations with an LDAP referral. \n" -"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can " -"configure a different update referral here.\n" -"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for " -"the\n" +"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can configure a different update referral here.\n" +"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for the\n" "slave server is as slave server too. </p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1077,6 +1008,8 @@ "<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>" msgstr "" +"<p><b><big>中止啟始化：</big></b><br>\n" +"要安全地中止組態公用程式，請按<b>「中止」</b>。</p>" #. Write dialog help #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:271 @@ -1104,15 +1037,11 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 1 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:289 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Start LDAP Server Yes or No</b>, start or stop the LDAP server. " +msgid "<p>With <b>Start LDAP Server Yes or No</b>, start or stop the LDAP server.</p> " msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:292 -msgid "" -"<p>If you select <b>Yes</b>, click <b>Next</b> to start the configuration " -"wizard.</p>" +msgid "<p>If you select <b>Yes</b>, click <b>Next</b> to start the configuration wizard.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:295 @@ -1123,15 +1052,12 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:299 -msgid "" -"<p>Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios " -"are available:</p>" +msgid "<p>Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios are available:</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:302 msgid "" -"<p><b>Stand-alone server</b>: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server " -"with\n" +"<p><b>Stand-alone server</b>: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server with\n" "no preparations for replication.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1143,8 +1069,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:308 msgid "" -"<p><b>Replica slave server</b>: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that " -"replicates all its data,\n" +"<p><b>Replica slave server</b>: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that replicates all its data,\n" "including configuration, from a master server.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1166,18 +1091,15 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:321 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface</b>, to enable the " -"server\n" +"<p>Check <b>Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface</b>, to enable the server\n" "to accept LDAPS connections on port 636. If not checked, OpenLDAP will only\n" -"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.\n" +"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:326 msgid "" "<p>If you already have a common server certificate installed using the\n" -"corresponding YaST Module, check <b>Use common Server Certificate</b> so " -"that\n" +"corresponding YaST Module, check <b>Use common Server Certificate</b> so that\n" "the OpenLDAP server uses this certificate.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1188,10 +1110,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:332 msgid "" "<p>If you have no common server certificate or you want OpenLDAP to use a\n" -"different certificate, enter the file names of the <b>CA Certificate File,\n" -"<b>Certificate File</b> and <b>Certificate Key File</b> into the " -"corresponding\n" +"different certificate, enter the file names of the <b>CA Certificate File</b>,\n" +"<b>Certificate File</b> and <b>Certificate Key File</b> into the corresponding\n" "textfields.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1204,31 +1124,26 @@ #. Tree Item Dialog "global" 1/1 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:342 msgid "<p>Below this item, configure some global parameters.</p>" -msgstr "" +msgstr "<p>在這個項目下，設定一些全域參數。</p>" #. Tree Item Dialog "schema" 1/ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:346 msgid "" -"<p>Add schema files in this dialog. Press <b>Add</b> to open a file dialog " -"in which to choose\n" -"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not " -"support the removal of \n" +"<p>Add schema files in this dialog. Press <b>Add</b> to open a file dialog in which to choose\n" +"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not support the removal of \n" "Schema Data</p>" msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "loglevel" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:352 msgid "" -"<p>Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and " -"statistics\n" +"<p>Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and statistics\n" "to syslog.</p>" msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "allow" 1/1 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:356 -msgid "" -"<p>Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or " -"disallow:</p>" +msgid "<p>Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or disallow:</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:359 @@ -1237,17 +1152,14 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:360 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAPv2 Bind Requests</b>: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind " -"requests.\n" +"<p><b>LDAPv2 Bind Requests</b>: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind requests.\n" "Note that OpenLDAP does not truly implement LDAPv2.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:363 msgid "" -"<p><b>Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty</b>: To allow anonymous bind " -"when \n" -"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not " -"present) </p>" +"<p><b>Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty</b>: To allow anonymous bind when \n" +"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not present) </p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:366 @@ -1258,8 +1170,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:369 msgid "" -"<p><b>Unauthenticated Update Operations to process</b>: To allow " -"unauthenticated\n" +"<p><b>Unauthenticated Update Operations to process</b>: To allow unauthenticated\n" "(anonymous) update operations to be processed. They are still subject to\n" "access controls and other administrative limits.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1277,16 +1188,14 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:380 msgid "" -"<p><b>Disable Simple Bind authentication</b>: Completely disable Simple " -"Bind\n" +"<p><b>Disable Simple Bind authentication</b>: Completely disable Simple Bind\n" "authentication</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:383 msgid "" "<p><b>Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation\n" -"receipt</b>: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection " -"back\n" +"receipt</b>: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection back\n" "to the anonymous state when receiving the StartTLS operation.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1301,100 +1210,76 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:394 msgid "" "<p>This lists shows all configured databases. The databases with the type\n" -"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The " -"\"Frontend\"\n" -"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and " -"overlays\n" -"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration " -"of\n" +"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The \"Frontend\"\n" +"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and overlays\n" +"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration of\n" "the LDAP server itself.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "databases" 2/2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:402 msgid "<p>To add a new database, press <b>Add Database...</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" +msgstr "<p>如果要新增資料庫，請按下<b>「新增資料庫...」</b>。</p>" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:403 msgid "" -"<p>To delete a database, select a database from the list and press <b>Delete " -"Database...</b>.\n" +"<p>To delete a database, select a database from the list and press <b>Delete Database...</b>.\n" "You cannot delete the \"config\" and \"frontend\" databases.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:406 msgid "" -"<p>Enter a password for the configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\") " -"here. This is required to make\n" +"<p>Enter a password for the configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\") here. This is required to make\n" "the configuration database accessible remotely.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:409 msgid "" -"<p>If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select " -"the \"<b>Prepare for MirrorMode replication</b>\"\n" -"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as " -"needed for MirrorMode replication.</p>\n" +"<p>If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select the \"<b>Prepare for MirrorMode replication</b>\"\n" +"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as needed for MirrorMode replication.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:412 msgid "" -"<p>To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master " -"server. Please enter the master\n" -"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"<i>ldap</i>\" or " -"\"<i>ldaps</i>\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" +"<p>To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master server. Please enter the master\n" +"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"<i>ldap</i>\" or \"<i>ldaps</i>\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" "for the master's configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\").</p>" msgstr "" #. ########## kerberos #. Help text: basic settings 1/2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:419 -msgid "" -"<p>Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your " -"Kerberos server.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your Kerberos server.</p>" msgstr "" #. Help text: basic settings 2/2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:423 -msgid "" -"<p>Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is " -"to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.</p>\n" +msgid "<p>Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. advanced item help: database_name #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:427 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this " -"realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help: acl_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:431 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file " -"that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database." +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help: admin_keytab #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:435 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to " -"authenticate to the database.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to authenticate to the database.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help: default_principal_expiration #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:439 -msgid "" -"<p>This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals " -"created in this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals created in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help principal_flags 1/13 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:443 -msgid "" -"<p>These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in " -"this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:446 @@ -1408,7 +1293,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:451 msgid "Allow forwardable" -msgstr "" +msgstr "允許轉遞" #. advanced item help principal_flags 3/13 :Allow forwardable #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:453 @@ -1426,7 +1311,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:461 msgid "Allow proxiable" -msgstr "" +msgstr "允許代理" #. advanced item help principal_flags 5/13 :Allow proxiable #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:463 @@ -1439,9 +1324,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 6/13 :Enable user-to-user authentication #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:466 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another " -"user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:469 @@ -1450,12 +1333,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 7/13 :Requires preauth #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:471 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to " -"preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this " -"flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will " -"only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket " -"set." +msgid "If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket set." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:474 @@ -1464,20 +1342,16 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 8/13 :Requires hwauth #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:476 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using " -"a hardware device before receiving any tickets." +msgid "If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using a hardware device before receiving any tickets." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:479 msgid "Allow service" -msgstr "" +msgstr "允許服務" #. advanced item help principal_flags 9/13 :Allow service #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:481 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this " -"principal." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this principal." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:484 @@ -1486,10 +1360,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 10/13 :Allow tgs request #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:486 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-" -"granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was " -"used to obtain the TGT." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was used to obtain the TGT." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:489 @@ -1498,15 +1369,12 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 11/13 :Allow tickets #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:491 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this " -"principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within " -"this realm." +msgid "Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within this realm." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:494 msgid "Need change" -msgstr "" +msgstr "需要變更" #. advanced item help principal_flags 12/13 :Needchange #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:496 @@ -1515,53 +1383,37 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:497 msgid "Password changing service" -msgstr "" +msgstr "密碼變更服務" #. advanced item help principal_flags 13/13 :Password changing service #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:499 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change " -"service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a " -"user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that " -"principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password " -"authentication." +msgid "If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password authentication." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : dict_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:503 -msgid "" -"<p>The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are " -"not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy " -"assigned to the principal, no check will be done.</p>" +msgid "<p>The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy assigned to the principal, no check will be done.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kadmind_port #. advanced item help : kpasswd_port #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:507 src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:511 -msgid "" -"<p>This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens " -"for this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : key_stash_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:515 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored " -"with kdb5_stash.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored with kdb5_stash.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdc_ports #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:519 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this " -"realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : master_key_name #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:523 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the " -"master key. The default value is K/M.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the master key. The default value is K/M.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : master_key_type @@ -1571,69 +1423,47 @@ #. advanced item help : max_life #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:531 -msgid "" -"<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"valid for in this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be valid for in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : max_renew_life #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:535 -msgid "" -"<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"renewed for in this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be renewed for in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : supported_enctypes #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:539 -msgid "" -"<p>A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt " -"combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdc_supported_enctypes #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:543 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this " -"realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : reject_bad_transit #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:547 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm " -"tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm " -"names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : ldap_conns_per_server #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:551 -msgid "" -"<p>This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be " -"maintained via the LDAP server.</p>" +msgid "<p>This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be maintained via the LDAP server.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : ldap_service_password_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:555 -msgid "" -"<p>This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed " -"passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers.</p>" +msgid "<p>This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_subtrees #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:559 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The " -"list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).<p>The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under " -"the subtree.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).</p><p>The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under the subtree.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_containerref #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:563 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a " -"realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a " -"realm, the principals will be created in the realm container.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a realm, the principals will be created in the realm container.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_maxtktlife @@ -1643,9 +1473,7 @@ #. advanced item help : kdb_maxrenewlife #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:571 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. ################################################################################# @@ -1659,33 +1487,33 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:49 #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1974 msgid "Advanced Settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "進階設定" #. Treeview list item #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:53 #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1885 msgid "Database Path" -msgstr "" +msgstr "資料庫路徑" #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:60 msgid "&Database Path" -msgstr "" +msgstr "資料庫路徑(&D)" #. Treeview list item #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:71 #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1889 msgid "ACL File" -msgstr "" +msgstr "ACL 檔案" #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:78 msgid "ACL &File" -msgstr "" +msgstr "ACL 檔案(&F)" #. Treeview list item #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:89 #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1893 msgid "Administrator Keytab" -msgstr "" +msgstr "管理員 Keytab" #. Treeview list item #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:107 @@ -1823,19 +1651,19 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:261 #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1911 msgid "Dictionary File" -msgstr "" +msgstr "字典檔案" #. Treeview list item #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:279 #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1916 msgid "Kadmin Daemon Port" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Kadmin 精靈埠" #. Treeview list item #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:297 #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1921 msgid "Kpasswd Daemon Port" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Kpasswd 精靈埠" #. Treeview list item #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:315 @@ -1847,19 +1675,19 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:333 #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1929 msgid "KDC Port" -msgstr "" +msgstr "KDC 埠" #. Treeview list item #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:351 #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1933 msgid "Master Key Name" -msgstr "" +msgstr "主要金鑰名稱" #. Treeview list item #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:369 #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1938 msgid "Master Key Type" -msgstr "" +msgstr "主要金鑰類型" #. Treeview list item #. Treeview list item @@ -1890,13 +1718,13 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:453 #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1953 msgid "Default Encryption Types" -msgstr "" +msgstr "預設加密類型" #. Treeview list item #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:471 #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1958 msgid "KDC Supported Encryption Types" -msgstr "" +msgstr "KDC 支援的加密類型" #. Treeview list item #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:489 @@ -1908,11 +1736,11 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:507 #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1983 msgid "Number of LDAP connections" -msgstr "" +msgstr "LDAP 連線數" #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:525 msgid "File for the LDAP password" -msgstr "" +msgstr "LDAP 密碼的檔案" #. Treeview list item #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:545 @@ -1943,7 +1771,7 @@ #. ldapitems = add(ldapitems, ); #: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:2016 msgid "Advanced LDAP Settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "進階 LDAP 設定" #. encoding: utf-8 #. File: include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.ycp @@ -1970,9 +1798,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:50 -msgid "" -"This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the " -"standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." +msgid "This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:85 @@ -1980,8 +1806,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:127 -msgid "" -"Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" +msgid "Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:130 @@ -2006,7 +1831,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/wizards.rb:204 #: src/include/auth-server/wizards.rb:297 msgid "Initializing..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "正在啟始化..." #. #-#-#-#-# auth-server.rxgettext.pot (PACKAGE VERSION) #-#-#-#-# #. **************************************** @@ -2019,17 +1844,17 @@ #. Tree item #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:62 msgid "Global Settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "全域設定" #. Tree item #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:67 msgid "Schema Files" -msgstr "" +msgstr "綱要檔案" #. Tree item #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:75 msgid "Log Level Settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "記錄層級設定" #. Tree item #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:83 @@ -2040,12 +1865,12 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:91 #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:218 msgid "TLS Settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "TLS 設定" #. Tree item #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:100 msgid "Databases" -msgstr "" +msgstr "資料庫" #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:108 msgid "Suffix DN" @@ -2069,12 +1894,12 @@ #. file dialog heading #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:265 msgid "Select New Schema File" -msgstr "" +msgstr "選擇新的綱要檔案" #. error popup #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:272 msgid "The schema file is already in the list." -msgstr "" +msgstr "綱要檔案已經在清單中。" #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:462 msgid "Select a valid Certificate File" @@ -2091,12 +1916,12 @@ #. file selection headline #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:575 msgid "Select Certificate File" -msgstr "" +msgstr "選取憑證檔案" #. file selection headline #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:583 msgid "Select Certificate Key File" -msgstr "" +msgstr "選取憑證金鑰檔案" #. **************************************** #. * handlers for database parent widget @@ -2118,12 +1943,12 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:750 #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:884 msgid "Unable to write settings for the current database." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法寫入目前資料庫的設定。" #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:804 #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:941 msgid "Unable to read settings for the current database." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法讀取目前資料庫的設定。" #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:959 #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1001 @@ -2135,7 +1960,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1007 #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:407 msgid "Password &Encryption" -msgstr "" +msgstr "密碼加密(&E)" #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1015 #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:368 @@ -2149,7 +1974,7 @@ #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2193 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2212 #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2213 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2214 msgid "No" -msgstr "" +msgstr "否" #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1043 #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1044 @@ -2157,7 +1982,7 @@ #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2193 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2212 #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2213 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2214 msgid "Yes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "是" #. skip attribute that already have an index defined #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1188 @@ -2173,7 +1998,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1298 msgid "Password Policy Configuration" -msgstr "" +msgstr "密碼規則組態" #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1307 msgid "Access Control Configuration" @@ -2197,7 +2022,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:100 msgid "LDAP" -msgstr "" +msgstr "LDAP" #. `HWeight(1, `PushButton( `id( `pb_interface_ldap), "Interfaces ...")), #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:112 @@ -2206,19 +2031,19 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:141 msgid "Included &Schema Files" -msgstr "" +msgstr "包含的綱要檔案(&S)" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:152 msgid "Select &Log Level Flags:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "選取記錄層級旗標(&L)：" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:154 msgid "Trace Function Calls" -msgstr "" +msgstr "追蹤函式呼叫" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:155 msgid "Debug Packet Handling" -msgstr "" +msgstr "除錯封包處理" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:156 msgid "Heavy Trace Debugging (function args)" @@ -2226,39 +2051,39 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:157 msgid "Connection Management" -msgstr "" +msgstr "連線管理" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:158 msgid "Print Packets Sent and Received" -msgstr "" +msgstr "傳送和接收的列印封包" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:159 msgid "Search Filter Processing" -msgstr "" +msgstr "搜尋過濾器處理" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:160 msgid "Configuration File Processing" -msgstr "" +msgstr "組態檔案處理" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:161 msgid "Access Control List Processing" -msgstr "" +msgstr "存取控制清單處理" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:162 msgid "Log Connections, Operations, and Result" -msgstr "" +msgstr "記錄連線、操作、和結果" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:163 msgid "Log Entries Sent" -msgstr "" +msgstr "已傳送的記錄項目" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:164 msgid "Print Communication with Shell Back-Ends" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用外圍程序後端工具列印通訊" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:165 msgid "Entry Parsing" -msgstr "" +msgstr "項目分析" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:166 msgid "LDAPSync Replication" @@ -2266,23 +2091,23 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:167 msgid "None" -msgstr "" +msgstr "無" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:174 msgid "Select &Allow Flags:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "選取允許旗標(&A)：" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:176 msgid "LDAPv2 Bind Requests" -msgstr "" +msgstr "LDAPv2 結合申請" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:179 msgid "Anonymous Bind when Credentials Not Empty" -msgstr "" +msgstr "證件不是空的時進行匿名結合" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:183 msgid "Unauthenticated Bind when DN Not Empty" -msgstr "" +msgstr "DN 不是空的時進行未驗證結合" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:187 msgid "Unauthenticated Update Operations to Process" @@ -2293,9 +2118,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:197 -msgid "" -"Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous " -"directory access)" +msgid "Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous directory access)" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:201 @@ -2303,8 +2126,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:204 -msgid "" -"Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" +msgid "Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:210 @@ -2313,7 +2135,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:221 msgid "Basic Settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "基本設定" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:227 msgid "Enable TLS" @@ -2329,15 +2151,15 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:254 msgid "Import Certificate" -msgstr "" +msgstr "匯入憑證" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:273 msgid "Certificate &File (PEM Format)" -msgstr "" +msgstr "憑證檔案 (PEM 格式)(&F)" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:276 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:234 msgid "&Browse..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "瀏覽(&B)..." #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:285 msgid "Certificate &Key File (PEM Format - Unencrypted)" @@ -2345,7 +2167,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:288 msgid "B&rowse..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "瀏覽(&R)..." #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:295 msgid "Launch CA Management Module" @@ -2353,15 +2175,15 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:301 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:178 msgid "&Base DN" -msgstr "" +msgstr "基本 DN(&B)" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:305 msgid "Administrator DN" -msgstr "" +msgstr "管理員 DN" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:307 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:81 msgid "&Append Base DN" -msgstr "" +msgstr "附加基礎 DN(&A)" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:309 msgid "Change Password" @@ -2405,7 +2227,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:374 msgid "Edit Database" -msgstr "" +msgstr "編輯資料庫" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:376 msgid "Database type not currently supported." @@ -2417,7 +2239,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:384 msgid "Attribute" -msgstr "" +msgstr "屬性" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:384 #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:452 @@ -2445,23 +2267,23 @@ #. encoding: utf-8 #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:40 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2239 msgid "Password Policy Settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "密碼規則設定" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:47 msgid "Enable Password Policies" -msgstr "" +msgstr "啟用密碼規則" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:55 msgid "Hash Clear Text Passwords" -msgstr "" +msgstr "雜湊純文字密碼" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:63 msgid "Disclose \"Account Locked\" Status" -msgstr "" +msgstr "顯示「帳戶已鎖定」狀態" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:73 msgid "Default Policy Object DN" -msgstr "" +msgstr "預設規則物件 DN" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:89 msgid "Edit Policy" @@ -2529,11 +2351,11 @@ #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:133 msgid "Read" -msgstr "" +msgstr "讀取" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:134 msgid "Write" -msgstr "" +msgstr "寫入" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:135 msgid "Manage (full access)" @@ -2550,11 +2372,11 @@ #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:189 msgid "&Administrator DN" -msgstr "" +msgstr "管理員 DN(&A)" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:197 msgid "A&ppend Base DN" -msgstr "" +msgstr "附加基礎 DN(&P)" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:211 msgid "LDAP Administrator &Password" @@ -2562,7 +2384,7 @@ #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:230 msgid "&Database Directory" -msgstr "" +msgstr "資料庫目錄(&D)" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:240 msgid "Use this database as the default for OpenLDAP clients" @@ -2570,12 +2392,12 @@ #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:311 msgid "Select Database Directory" -msgstr "" +msgstr "選取資料庫目錄" #. check values #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:350 msgid "Base DN must be set." -msgstr "" +msgstr "必須設定基礎 DN。" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:359 msgid "A database with this Base DN already exists." @@ -2583,11 +2405,11 @@ #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:399 msgid "Root DN must be set if a password is given." -msgstr "" +msgstr "如果提供密碼，必須設定根 DN。" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:405 msgid "Password validation failed." -msgstr "" +msgstr "驗證密碼失敗。" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:435 msgid "" @@ -2597,11 +2419,11 @@ #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:451 msgid "A directory must be specified." -msgstr "" +msgstr "必須指定目錄。" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:458 msgid "The directory does not exist. Create it?" -msgstr "" +msgstr "該目錄不存在。要建立嗎？" #. try to read the ppolicy from the server #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:637 @@ -2614,7 +2436,7 @@ #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:645 msgid "Try again?" -msgstr "" +msgstr "再試一次？" #. PasswordPolicyDialog only returns the changes made to the original #. Entry, try to merge them here @@ -2638,7 +2460,7 @@ #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:820 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:990 msgid "Select" -msgstr "" +msgstr "選取" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:826 msgid "Define the Access Level" @@ -2691,11 +2513,11 @@ #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1021 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1315 msgid "Attributes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "屬性" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1023 msgid "Edit" -msgstr "" +msgstr "編輯" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1029 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1041 msgid "Access Level" @@ -2707,7 +2529,7 @@ #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1040 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1315 msgid "DN" -msgstr "" +msgstr "DN" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1042 msgid "Flow Control" @@ -2715,11 +2537,11 @@ #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1047 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1319 msgid "Up" -msgstr "" +msgstr "向上" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1048 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1320 msgid "Down" -msgstr "" +msgstr "向下" #. FIXME: Validate attribute types #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1185 @@ -2736,7 +2558,7 @@ #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1315 msgid "Target" -msgstr "" +msgstr "目標" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1315 msgid "Filter" @@ -2758,7 +2580,7 @@ #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1619 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1716 msgid "Port" -msgstr "" +msgstr "埠" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1637 msgid "Replication Type" @@ -2770,19 +2592,19 @@ #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1647 msgid "Days" -msgstr "" +msgstr "日" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1651 msgid "Hours" -msgstr "" +msgstr "小時" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1655 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2118 msgid "Minutes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "分鐘" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1659 msgid "Seconds" -msgstr "" +msgstr "秒鐘" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1672 msgid "Authentication DN" @@ -2815,8 +2637,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1995 -msgid "" -"Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" +msgid "Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2094 @@ -2863,31 +2684,31 @@ #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:466 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1033 msgid "LDAP search failed." -msgstr "" +msgstr "LDAP 搜尋失敗。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:812 msgid "Invalid LDAP URI scheme." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無效的 LDAP URI 概要。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:828 msgid "LDAP initialization failed." -msgstr "" +msgstr "LDAP 啟始化失敗。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:854 msgid "LDAP bind failed." -msgstr "" +msgstr "LDAP Bind 失敗。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:877 msgid "Initializing LDAP schema failed." -msgstr "" +msgstr "啟始化 LDAP 概要失敗。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:888 msgid "Reading LDAP schema failed." -msgstr "" +msgstr "讀取 LDAP 概要失敗。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:898 msgid "Kerberos Schema unknown by the LDAP server." -msgstr "" +msgstr "LDAP 伺服器不認識 Kerberos 概要。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:975 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3482 #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3529 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3575 @@ -2896,19 +2717,19 @@ #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1005 msgid "Modifying the kerberos database failed." -msgstr "" +msgstr "修改 kerberos 資料庫失敗。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1046 msgid "LDAP modify failed." -msgstr "" +msgstr "LDAP 修改失敗。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1074 msgid "Incomplete data." -msgstr "" +msgstr "不完整的資料。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1101 msgid "Unsupported database type." -msgstr "" +msgstr "不支援的資料庫類型。" #. service was disabled during this session, just disable the service #. in the system, stop it and ignore any configuration changes. @@ -3041,9 +2862,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1830 -msgid "" -"Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take " -"some minutes)" +msgid "Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take some minutes)" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1831 @@ -3063,9 +2882,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1953 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to " -"finish.\n" +msgid "An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to finish.\n" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1954 @@ -3094,7 +2911,7 @@ #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2227 msgid "Not configured yet." -msgstr "" +msgstr "尚未設定。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2472 msgid "CA Certificate file does not exist." @@ -3107,7 +2924,7 @@ #. error message #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2482 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1752 msgid "Certificate key file does not exist." -msgstr "" +msgstr "憑證金鑰檔案不存在。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2489 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2523 msgid "Can not set a filesystem ACL on the private key." @@ -3167,24 +2984,22 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2860 -msgid "" -"A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its " -"own fully qualified hostname." +msgid "A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its own fully qualified hostname." msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3376 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3389 #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3402 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3415 #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3428 msgid "Cannot write krb5.conf." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法寫入 krb5.conf。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3514 msgid "Creating Kerberos database failed." -msgstr "" +msgstr "建立 Kerberos 資料庫失敗。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3560 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3606 msgid "Writing to password file failed." -msgstr "" +msgstr "寫入密碼檔案失敗。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3972 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3982 msgid "is not a valid LDAP DN." @@ -3200,15 +3015,13 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4027 -msgid "" -"The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-" -"letter code." +msgid "The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-letter code." msgstr "" #. parameter check failed #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4034 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:373 msgid "First part of suffix must be c=, st=, l=, o=, ou= or dc=." -msgstr "" +msgstr "字尾的第一部分必須是 c=、st=、l=、o=、ou=、或 dc=。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4046 #, perl-format @@ -3236,7 +3049,7 @@ #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4094 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:484 msgid "Could not create directory." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法建立目錄。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4871 #, perl-format @@ -3244,8 +3057,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4881 -msgid "" -"Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" +msgid "Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4882 @@ -3267,11 +3079,11 @@ #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4976 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4986 msgid "Writing to krb5.conf failed." -msgstr "" +msgstr "寫入 krb5.conf 失敗。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:5354 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:5363 msgid "Writing to kdc.conf failed." -msgstr "" +msgstr "寫入 kdc.conf 失敗。" #. error at paramter check #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:301 @@ -3282,22 +3094,22 @@ #. parameter check failed #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:347 msgid "The countryName must be an ISO-3166 country 2-letter code." -msgstr "" +msgstr "countryName 必須是 ISO-3166 國家兩個字母代碼。" #. parameter check failed #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:391 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:726 msgid "Invalid 'rootdn'." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無效的 'rootdn'。" #. parameter check failed #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:400 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:734 msgid "'rootdn' must be below the 'suffix'." -msgstr "" +msgstr "'rootdn' 必須在 'suffix' 之下。" #. parameter check failed #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:415 msgid "To set a password, you must define 'rootdn'." -msgstr "" +msgstr "若要設定密碼，必須定義 'rootdn'。" #. parameter check failed #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:422 @@ -3308,113 +3120,113 @@ #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:435 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:768 #, perl-format msgid "'%s' is an unsupported crypt method." -msgstr "" +msgstr "'%s' 是不支援的加密方法。" #. parameter check failed #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:475 msgid "Define 'directory'." -msgstr "" +msgstr "定義 'directory'。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:489 msgid "The directory does not exist." -msgstr "" +msgstr "該目錄不存在。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:511 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:526 msgid "Invalid cache size value." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無效的快取大小值。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:547 msgid "Invalid checkpoint value." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無效的檢查點值。" #. parameter check failed #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:753 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:758 msgid "Define 'passwd'." -msgstr "" +msgstr "定義 'passwd'。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:805 msgid "Database edit failed." -msgstr "" +msgstr "資料庫編輯失敗。" #. error message at parameter check #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:865 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:938 #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1086 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1129 msgid "Missing parameter 'suffix'." -msgstr "" +msgstr "遺失參數 'suffix'。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1533 msgid "Cannot restart the service." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法重新啟動服務。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1540 msgid "Cannot stop the service." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法停止服務。" #. error message #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1703 msgid "CA certificate file does not exist." -msgstr "" +msgstr "CA 憑證檔案不存在。" #. error message #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1719 msgid "CA certificate path does not exist." -msgstr "" +msgstr "CA 憑證路徑不存在。" #. error message #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1735 msgid "Certificate file does not exist." -msgstr "" +msgstr "憑證檔案不存在。" #. error message #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1770 msgid "Invalid value for 'TLSVerifyClient'." -msgstr "" +msgstr "'TLSVerifyClient' 的無效值。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1779 msgid "Writing failed." -msgstr "" +msgstr "寫入失敗。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1944 msgid "Missing 'ServerCertificateFile' parameter." -msgstr "" +msgstr "遺失 'ServerCertificateFile' 參數。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1950 msgid "Cannot read certificate file." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法讀取憑證檔案。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1955 msgid "Missing 'ServerCertificateData' parameter." -msgstr "" +msgstr "遺失 'ServerCertificateData' 參數。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1962 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1987 #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:2003 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:2012 msgid "Corrupt PEM data." -msgstr "" +msgstr "毀損的 PEM 資料。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1969 msgid "Missing 'ServerKeyFile' parameter." -msgstr "" +msgstr "遺失 'ServerCertificateFile' 參數。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1975 msgid "Cannot read key file." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法讀取金鑰檔案。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1980 msgid "Missing 'ServerKeyData' parameter." -msgstr "" +msgstr "遺失 'ServerKeyData' 參數。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1998 msgid "Cannot read CA certificate file." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法讀取 CA 憑證檔案。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:2021 msgid "Cannot write certificate file." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法寫入憑證檔案。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:2027 msgid "Cannot write key file." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法寫入金鑰檔案。" #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:2046 msgid "Cannot write CA certificate file." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法寫入 CA 憑證檔案。" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/autoinst.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/autoinst.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/autoinst.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: autoinst\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:41+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:51+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-28 11:50+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -124,8 +124,7 @@ #. if we get no argument or map of options we are not in command line #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:47 -msgid "" -"Client for creating an AutoYaST profile based on the currently running system" +msgid "Client for creating an AutoYaST profile based on the currently running system" msgstr "基於正在運作的系統上的 AutoYaST 組態設定客戶端" #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:57 @@ -150,8 +149,7 @@ #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:170 msgid "" "<p>Using this dialog, copy the contents of the file and specify the final\n" -"path on the installed system. YaST will copy this file to the specified " -"location.</p>" +"path on the installed system. YaST will copy this file to the specified location.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>使用此對話方塊，複製檔案的內容，並於安裝的系統中指定\n" "最後的路徑。YaST 會將此檔案複製到指定的位置。</p>" @@ -160,15 +158,12 @@ #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:177 msgid "" "<p>To protect copied files, set the owner and the permissions of the files.\n" -"Set the owner using the syntax <i>userid:groupid</i>. Permissions can be a " -"symbolic\n" -"representation of changes to make or an octal number representing the bit " -"pattern for the\n" +"Set the owner using the syntax <i>userid:groupid</i>. Permissions can be a symbolic\n" +"representation of changes to make or an octal number representing the bit pattern for the\n" "new permissions.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>若要保護複製的檔案，請設定檔案的擁有者與許可權。\n" -"請使用 <i>userid:groupid</i> 語法來設定擁有者。若要變更許可權，可變更代表許可" -"權的符號，\n" +"請使用 <i>userid:groupid</i> 語法來設定擁有者。若要變更許可權，可變更代表許可權的符號，\n" "或是變更代表許可權位元形式的八進位\n" "數字。</p>" @@ -243,10 +238,8 @@ #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:321 msgid "" "<p>For many applications and services, you might have prepared\n" -"a configuration file that should be copied in a complete form to a location " -"in the\n" -"installed system. For example, this is the case if you are installing a web " -"server\n" +"a configuration file that should be copied in a complete form to a location in the\n" +"installed system. For example, this is the case if you are installing a web server\n" "and have an httpd.conf configuration file prepared.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>對許多應用程式和服務而言，您可能已經準備了\n" @@ -296,22 +289,22 @@ msgid "Executing Post-Scripts" msgstr "正在執行安裝後程序檔" -#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:269 +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:268 #, fuzzy msgid "Restarting all running services" msgstr "正在判斷執行中的服務" -#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:289 +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:288 msgid "Activating systemd default target" msgstr "" #. Just in case, remove this file to avoid reconfiguring... -#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:302 +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:301 msgid "Finishing Configuration" msgstr "正在完成組態" #. NetworkInterfaces::Write( ".*" ); -#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:405 +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:404 msgid "Processing resource %1" msgstr "處理資源 %1" @@ -633,8 +626,7 @@ #: src/clients/report_auto.rb:213 msgid "" -"<p>Depending on your experience, you can skip, log, and show (with time-" -"out)\n" +"<p>Depending on your experience, you can skip, log, and show (with time-out)\n" "installation messages.</p> \n" msgstr "" "<p>視您的經驗而定，您可以跳過、記錄和顯示 (含逾時)\n" @@ -661,8 +653,7 @@ #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:88 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> " -"to add\n" +"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> to add\n" "more <b>add-on</b> selections and packages.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -679,8 +670,7 @@ msgstr "安裝來源的位置 (像是 http://myhost/11.3/DVD1/)" #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:128 -msgid "" -"The inst-source of this system (you can't create images if you choose this)" +msgid "The inst-source of this system (you can't create images if you choose this)" msgstr "此系統的安裝來源(如果選擇此項，將無法建立影像)" #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:164 @@ -696,12 +686,9 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Mount in /etc/fstab By:</b>\n" "\tNormally, a file system to mount is identified in /etc/fstab\n" -"\tby the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system " -"to mount\n" -"\tis found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems " -"can be\n" -"\tmounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not " -"possible.\n" +"\tby the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system to mount\n" +"\tis found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems can be\n" +"\tmounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not possible.\n" "\t" msgstr "" "<p><b>裝載於 /etc/fstab：</b>\n" @@ -715,8 +702,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:71 msgid "" "<p><b>Volume Label:</b>\n" -"\t The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually " -"makes sense only \n" +"\t The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" "\t when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" "\t A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" "\t " @@ -892,8 +878,7 @@ #. user selected this partition to be part of volgroup #: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:589 -msgid "" -"Size \"auto\" is only valid if mount point \"/boot\" or \"swap\" is selected." +msgid "Size \"auto\" is only valid if mount point \"/boot\" or \"swap\" is selected." msgstr "大小設定 \"自動\" 只適用在如果已選擇 \"/boot\" 或 \"swap\" 載掛點。" #: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:597 @@ -1369,9 +1354,7 @@ #. @param list menu items #. @return [Symbol] #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:565 -msgid "" -"Do you really want to apply the settings of the module '%1' to your current " -"system?" +msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the module '%1' to your current system?" msgstr "您確定要套用模組'%1'設定到您現在的系統嗎？" #. opening/parsing the xml file failed @@ -1386,9 +1369,7 @@ #. FIXME: sucks sucks sucks sucks sucks #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:740 -msgid "" -"Do you really want to apply the settings of the profile to your current " -"system?" +msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the profile to your current system?" msgstr "您確定要套用 profile 的設定到您現在的系統嗎？ " #. EXIT @@ -1528,8 +1509,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:348 msgid "" "Kickstart file was imported.\n" -"Check the imported syntax and make sure the package selection and " -"partitioning\n" +"Check the imported syntax and make sure the package selection and partitioning\n" "were imported correctly." msgstr "" "已輸入 Kickstart 檔案。\n" @@ -1663,8 +1643,7 @@ "The installation confirmation option is selected by default\n" "to avoid unwanted installation. It stops the system\n" "during installation and shows a summary of requested operations in the\n" -"usual proposal screen. Uncheck this option to install automatically without " -"interruption.\n" +"usual proposal screen. Uncheck this option to install automatically without interruption.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" "<P>\n" @@ -1677,14 +1656,12 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:155 msgid "" "<P>\n" -"If you turn off the second stage of AutoYaST, the installation continues in " -"manual mode\n" +"If you turn off the second stage of AutoYaST, the installation continues in manual mode\n" "after the first reboot (after package installation).\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" "<P>\n" -"若您關閉第二階段的 AutoYaST，安裝程序會在第一次重新開機後 (在套件安裝後) 繼續" -"以\n" +"若您關閉第二階段的 AutoYaST，安裝程序會在第一次重新開機後 (在套件安裝後) 繼續以\n" "手動模式進行。\n" " </P>\n" @@ -1828,8 +1805,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:17 msgid "" -"<p>This tool uses <em>xmllint</em> to validate the profile against the DTD " -"and\n" +"<p>This tool uses <em>xmllint</em> to validate the profile against the DTD and\n" "it checks for missing data. Some missing data might be intentional and any\n" "reported errors can be ignored, for example, when creating classes.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1863,8 +1839,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>This tool creates a reference profile by reading\n" "information from this system. Select the resources to read from this system\n" -"in addition to the default resources, like partitioning and package " -"selections.</p>\n" +"in addition to the default resources, like partitioning and package selections.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>此工具會從此系統讀取資訊，\n" "建立參考設定檔。從此系統選取要讀取的資源\n" @@ -1876,8 +1851,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:37 msgid "" -"<p>The table to the right shows the partitions to create on the target " -"system.\n" +"<p>The table to the right shows the partitions to create on the target system.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>右邊的表格會顯示要在其上建立分割區的目標系統。\n" @@ -1918,8 +1892,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:53 msgid "" "If no partitions are defined and the specified drive is also\n" -"the drive where the root partition should reside, the following partitions " -"are\n" +"the drive where the root partition should reside, the following partitions are\n" "created automatically:" msgstr "" "若未定義分割區，而且指定的磁碟機也是\n" @@ -1939,16 +1912,8 @@ msgstr "<p><b>進階選項</b></p>" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:62 -msgid "" -"By default, AutoYaST will create an extended partition and adds all new " -"partitions as logical devices. It is possible, however, to instruct AutoYaST " -"to create a certain partition as a primary partition or as extended " -"partition. Additionally, it is possible to specify the size of a partition " -"using sectors rather than size in MBytes." -msgstr "" -"AutoYaST 預設會建立延伸分割區，並將所有新的分割區新增為邏輯裝置。不過，您也可" -"以指示 AutoYaST 來建立特定分割區為主分割區或延伸分割區。此外，也可以使用磁區 " -"(而不是以 MB 為單位) 來指定分割區的大小。" +msgid "By default, AutoYaST will create an extended partition and adds all new partitions as logical devices. It is possible, however, to instruct AutoYaST to create a certain partition as a primary partition or as extended partition. Additionally, it is possible to specify the size of a partition using sectors rather than size in MBytes." +msgstr "AutoYaST 預設會建立延伸分割區，並將所有新的分割區新增為邏輯裝置。不過，您也可以指示 AutoYaST 來建立特定分割區為主分割區或延伸分割區。此外，也可以使用磁區 (而不是以 MB 為單位) 來指定分割區的大小。" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:65 msgid "" @@ -1962,8 +1927,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "For LVM and RAID setup, consult the documentation and add the configuration\n" -"to an existing control file. You can only create unformatted LVM and RAID " -"partitions as\n" +"to an existing control file. You can only create unformatted LVM and RAID partitions as\n" "a preparation.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2068,8 +2032,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<h3>Postinstallation Scripts</h3>\n" -"<P>You can also add commands to execute on the system after the " -"installation\n" +"<P>You can also add commands to execute on the system after the installation\n" "is completed. These scripts are run outside the chroot environment.\n" "</P>" msgstr "" @@ -2087,8 +2050,7 @@ "<P>For your postinstallation script to run inside the chroot\n" "environment, choose the <i>chroot scripts</i> options. Those scripts are\n" "run before the system reboots for the first time. By default, the chroot \n" -"scripts are run in the installation system. To access files in the " -"installed \n" +"scripts are run in the installation system. To access files in the installed \n" "system, always use the mount point \"/mnt\" in your scripts.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2106,8 +2068,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p>It is possible to run chroot scripts in a later stage after\n" -"the boot loader has been configured using the special boolean tag \"chrooted" -"\".\n" +"the boot loader has been configured using the special boolean tag \"chrooted\".\n" "This runs the scripts in the installed system. \n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2143,8 +2104,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<H3>Interpreter:</H3>\n" -"<P>Preinstallation scripts can only be shell scripts. Do not use <i>Perl</i> " -"or \n" +"<P>Preinstallation scripts can only be shell scripts. Do not use <i>Perl</i> or \n" "<i>Python</i> for preinstallation scripts.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2160,12 +2120,9 @@ "<H3>Network Access:</H3>\n" "<P>While executing postinstallation scripts, the network is disabled and\n" "requires initialization in the scripts to make the network accessible. An\n" -"alternative for postinstallation scripts with network is using init scripts, " -"which\n" -"guarantee a fully configured system when running the scripts. If you did an " -"installation\n" -"over a network, you can use the <b>Network</b> option for the postscript, " -"too.\n" +"alternative for postinstallation scripts with network is using init scripts, which\n" +"guarantee a fully configured system when running the scripts. If you did an installation\n" +"over a network, you can use the <b>Network</b> option for the postscript, too.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" "\n" @@ -2181,16 +2138,13 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<H3>Feedback and Debug:</H3>\n" -"<P>All scripts except the init scripts can show STDOUT+STDERR in a pop-up " -"box as feedback.\n" -"If you turn on debugging, you get more output in the feedback dialog that " -"might help\n" +"<P>All scripts except the init scripts can show STDOUT+STDERR in a pop-up box as feedback.\n" +"If you turn on debugging, you get more output in the feedback dialog that might help\n" "you to debug your script.</P>\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<H3>回饋與除錯：</H3>\n" -" <P>除了 init 程序檔以外的所有程序檔，都能在快顯方塊中顯示 STDOUT+STDERR，當" -"作意見回饋。\n" +" <P>除了 init 程序檔以外的所有程序檔，都能在快顯方塊中顯示 STDOUT+STDERR，當作意見回饋。\n" " 若您開啟除錯功能，就會在回饋對話方塊中收到較多的輸出，可協助\n" "您對程序檔進行除錯。</P>\n" @@ -2279,8 +2233,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:474 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"By adding scripts to the autoinstallation process, customize the " -"installation for\n" +"By adding scripts to the autoinstallation process, customize the installation for\n" "your needs and take control in different stages of the installation.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -2312,9 +2265,7 @@ #. @return [Boolean] true on success #. autoyast has read the autoyast configuration file but something went wrong #: src/modules/AutoInstallRules.rb:909 src/modules/Profile.rb:722 -msgid "" -"The XML parser reported an error while parsing the autoyast profile. The " -"error message is:\n" +msgid "The XML parser reported an error while parsing the autoyast profile. The error message is:\n" msgstr "XML 剖析程式報告在剖析 autoyast 設定檔時發生錯誤。錯誤訊息為：\n" #. backdoor for merging problems. @@ -2394,10 +2345,8 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:450 msgid "" -"<p>Most of the modules used to create the configuration are identical to " -"those available\n" -"through the YaST Control Center. Instead of configuring this system, the " -"data\n" +"<p>Most of the modules used to create the configuration are identical to those available\n" +"through the YaST Control Center. Instead of configuring this system, the data\n" "entered is collected and exported to the control file that can be used to\n" "install another system using AutoYaST.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -2411,8 +2360,7 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:457 msgid "" "<p>In addition to the existing and familiar modules,\n" -"new interfaces were created for special and complex configurations, " -"including\n" +"new interfaces were created for special and complex configurations, including\n" "partitioning, general options, and software.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>除了現有的常見模組之外，\n" @@ -2606,9 +2554,7 @@ #. Install #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:360 -msgid "" -"Image creation failed while pattern installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image." -"log" +msgid "Image creation failed while pattern installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" msgstr "在安裝樣式過程中影像建立失敗。 請查看 /tmp/ay_image.log" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:368 @@ -2616,9 +2562,7 @@ msgstr "建立影像 - 正在安裝套件" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:378 -msgid "" -"Image creation failed while package installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image." -"log" +msgid "Image creation failed while package installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" msgstr "當安裝套件時影響建立失敗。請查看 /tmp/ay_image.log" #. Popup::Message( _("in the next file dialog you have to choose the target directory to save the image") ); @@ -2631,8 +2575,7 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:418 msgid "" "You can do changes to the image now in %1/\n" -"If you press the ok-button, the image will be compressed and can't be " -"changed anymore." +"If you press the ok-button, the image will be compressed and can't be changed anymore." msgstr "" "您可以對此影像進行變更在 %1/\n" "如果您按下確定按鈕，此影像將被壓縮且不再允許變更。" @@ -2680,8 +2623,7 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:613 msgid "" -"You can do changes to the ISO now in %1, like adding a complete different " -"AutoYaST XML file.\n" +"You can do changes to the ISO now in %1, like adding a complete different AutoYaST XML file.\n" "If you press the ok-button, the iso will be created." msgstr "" "您現在可以對 ISO 進行變更在 %1, 像是新增完全不同的 AutoYaST XML 檔。\n" @@ -2726,16 +2668,12 @@ #. Solve dependencies #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:903 -msgid "" -"The package resolver run failed. Please check your software section in the " -"autoyast profile." +msgid "The package resolver run failed. Please check your software section in the autoyast profile." msgstr "套件解析器執行失敗。 請檢查您在 autoyast 設定檔中的軟體區段。" #. 1 cyl buffer per partition #: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:494 -msgid "" -"The partition plan configured in your XML profile does not fit on the hard " -"disk. %1MB missing" +msgid "The partition plan configured in your XML profile does not fit on the hard disk. %1MB missing" msgstr "在您的 XML 設定檔中規劃的分割區不符合此磁碟機。遺失 %1MB" #: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:922 @@ -2831,26 +2769,18 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "\n" #~ "<P>Enter the partition information according to your\n" -#~ "needs. To reuse an existing partition, enter the partition number of the " -#~ "existing partition to reuse (counting starts with partition number 1) and " -#~ "no size.</P>\n" +#~ "needs. To reuse an existing partition, enter the partition number of the existing partition to reuse (counting starts with partition number 1) and no size.</P>\n" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "For partitions that are part of a volume group (not the logical " -#~ "partitions inside a volume group), set the partition ID to 0x8e then " -#~ "choose the volume group. The volume group must already be set up with " -#~ "AutoYaST.\n" +#~ "For partitions that are part of a volume group (not the logical partitions inside a volume group), set the partition ID to 0x8e then choose the volume group. The volume group must already be set up with AutoYaST.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ "<P>For more information, refer to the online documentation.\n" #~ "</P>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "\n" #~ "<P>根據您的需要，輸入分割區\n" -#~ "資訊。若要重新使用現有分割區，請輸入要重新使用的現有分割區的分割區編號 (分" -#~ "割區的編號會從 1 開始計算)，不輸入大小。</P>\n" +#~ "資訊。若要重新使用現有分割區，請輸入要重新使用的現有分割區的分割區編號 (分割區的編號會從 1 開始計算)，不輸入大小。</P>\n" #~ " <p>\n" -#~ " 以屬於磁碟區群組部分的分割區 (不是磁碟區群組內的邏輯分割區) 來說，請把分" -#~ "割區 ID 設定成 0x8e，然後選擇磁碟區群組。您必須已經用 AutoYaST 設定磁碟區" -#~ "群組。\n" +#~ " 以屬於磁碟區群組部分的分割區 (不是磁碟區群組內的邏輯分割區) 來說，請把分割區 ID 設定成 0x8e，然後選擇磁碟區群組。您必須已經用 AutoYaST 設定磁碟區群組。\n" #~ " </p>\n" #~ " <P>如需詳細資訊，請參閱線上文件。\n" #~ " </P>\n" @@ -2909,15 +2839,12 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "\n" #~ "<P>\n" -#~ "Create and edit your volume groups here. After that, assign physical " -#~ "partitions to this volume group in the partition dialog of a physical " -#~ "hard disk. Set the partition ID to 0x8e for those partitions.\n" +#~ "Create and edit your volume groups here. After that, assign physical partitions to this volume group in the partition dialog of a physical hard disk. Set the partition ID to 0x8e for those partitions.\n" #~ "</P>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "\n" #~ "<P>\n" -#~ " 在此建立並編輯您的磁碟區群組。之後請在實體硬碟的分割對話方塊中，指定本磁" -#~ "碟區群組的實體分割區， 然後把這些分割區的分割區 ID 設定成 0x8e。\n" +#~ " 在此建立並編輯您的磁碟區群組。之後請在實體硬碟的分割對話方塊中，指定本磁碟區群組的實體分割區， 然後把這些分割區的分割區 ID 設定成 0x8e。\n" #~ " </P>\n" #~ msgid "Configure Volume Groups" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/base.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/base.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/base.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: base\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-08-07 13:28+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-01-16 09:57+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -234,21 +234,13 @@ #. error message - command line option xmlfile is missing #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:944 -msgid "" -"Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use " -"xmlfile= command line option." -msgstr "" -"遺失目標檔案名稱 ('xmlfile' 選項)。使用 xmlfile= 指令行選" -"項。" +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use xmlfile= command line option." +msgstr "遺失目標檔案名稱 ('xmlfile' 選項)。使用 xmlfile= 指令行選項。" #. error message - command line option xmlfile is missing #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:956 -msgid "" -"Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is empty. Use xmlfile= " -"command line option." -msgstr "" -"目標檔案名稱 ('xmlfile' 選項) 是空白的。使用 xmlfile= 指令行" -"選項。" +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is empty. Use xmlfile= command line option." +msgstr "目標檔案名稱 ('xmlfile' 選項) 是空白的。使用 xmlfile= 指令行選項。" #. translators: fallback name for a module at command line #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:1096 @@ -990,11 +982,7 @@ #. NCurses Control Center help 2/10 #: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:334 -msgid "" -"<p>Tree navigation is also done by arrow keys. To open or close a branch use " -"[SPACE]. For modules showing a tree (might look like a list) of " -"configuration items on the left side use [ENTER] to get corresponding dialog " -"on the right.</p>" +msgid "<p>Tree navigation is also done by arrow keys. To open or close a branch use [SPACE]. For modules showing a tree (might look like a list) of configuration items on the left side use [ENTER] to get corresponding dialog on the right.</p>" msgstr "" #. NCurses Control Center help 3/10 @@ -1046,8 +1034,7 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p>3) <i>Function Keys</i><br>\n" -"F keys provide a quick access to main functions. The function key bindings " -"for the current dialog are shown in the bottom line.</p>" +"F keys provide a quick access to main functions. The function key bindings for the current dialog are shown in the bottom line.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>3) <i>功能鍵</i><br>\n" "F 鍵提供主要功能的快速存取。\n" @@ -1514,6 +1501,19 @@ msgid "Failed to install required packages." msgstr "安裝需要的套件失敗。" +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:265 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Updating configuration..." +msgid "Updating system configuration..." +msgstr "正在更新組態..." + +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:269 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "This may take a while" +msgid "This may take a while." +msgstr "這可能需要一些時間" + #. Get information about the OS release #. Throws exception Yast::OSReleaseFileMissingError if release file #. is missing. @@ -1833,14 +1833,12 @@ #: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:286 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Create a new GPG key</b></big><br>\n" -"<tt>gpg --gen-key</tt> is started, see <tt>gpg</tt> manual pager for more " -"information.\n" +"<tt>gpg --gen-key</tt> is started, see <tt>gpg</tt> manual pager for more information.\n" "Press Ctrl+C to cancel.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>建立新的 GPG 金鑰</b></big><br>\n" -"<tt>gpg --gen-key</tt> 已經啟動，如需詳細資訊，請參閱 <tt>gpg</tt> 手冊頁" -"面。\n" +"<tt>gpg --gen-key</tt> 已經啟動，如需詳細資訊，請參閱 <tt>gpg</tt> 手冊頁面。\n" " 如要取消請按下 Ctrl+C。\n" " </p>" @@ -2165,15 +2163,15 @@ #. pppN must be tried before pN, modem before netcard #. Device type label #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:401 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1202 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1213 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:405 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1206 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1217 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:108 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:198 msgid "Modem" msgstr "數據機" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:406 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:410 msgid "Network Card" msgstr "網路卡" @@ -2181,21 +2179,21 @@ #. Device type label #. Device type label #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:411 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1147 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1185 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1191 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1206 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:415 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1151 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1189 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1195 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1210 msgid "ISDN" msgstr "ISDN" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:416 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1154 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:420 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1158 msgid "DSL" msgstr "DSL" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:418 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:422 #: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:485 #: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:486 #: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:746 @@ -2211,326 +2209,326 @@ #. are represented as its sub-interfaces. #. And also we frequently confuse "device" and "interface" #. :-( -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1123 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1127 msgid "Additional Address" msgstr "其他位址" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1128 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1132 msgid "ARCnet" msgstr "ARCnet" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1128 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1132 msgid "ARCnet Network Card" msgstr "ARCnet 網路卡" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1131 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1135 msgid "ATM" msgstr "ATM" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1132 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1136 msgid "Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)" msgstr "非同步轉送模式 (ATM)" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1136 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1140 msgid "Bluetooth" msgstr "藍芽" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1137 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1141 msgid "Bluetooth Connection" msgstr "藍芽連線" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1140 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1144 msgid "Bond" msgstr "Bond" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1140 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1144 msgid "Bond Network" msgstr "Bond 網路" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1143 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1147 msgid "CLAW" msgstr "CLAW" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1144 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1148 msgid "Common Link Access for Workstation (CLAW)" msgstr "工作站公用連結存取 (CLAW)" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1147 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1151 msgid "ISDN Card" msgstr "ISDN 卡" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1150 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1154 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:223 msgid "CTC" msgstr "CTC" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1151 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1155 msgid "Channel to Channel Interface (CTC)" msgstr "通道對通道介面 (CTC)" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1154 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1158 msgid "DSL Connection" msgstr "DSL 連接" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1156 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1160 msgid "Dummy" msgstr "虛構" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1156 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1160 msgid "Dummy Network Device" msgstr "虛擬網路設備" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1159 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1163 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:227 msgid "ESCON" msgstr "ESCON" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1160 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1164 msgid "Enterprise System Connector (ESCON)" msgstr "企業系統連接器 (ESCON)" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1164 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1168 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:220 msgid "Ethernet" msgstr "乙太網路" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1165 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1169 msgid "Ethernet Network Card" msgstr "乙太網路卡" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1168 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1172 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:222 msgid "FDDI" msgstr "FDDI" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1168 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1172 msgid "FDDI Network Card" msgstr "FDDI 網路卡" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1171 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1175 msgid "FICON" msgstr "FICON" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1172 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1176 msgid "Fiberchannel System Connector (FICON)" msgstr "光纖通道系統連接器 (FICON)" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1176 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1180 msgid "HIPPI" msgstr "HIPPI" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1177 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1181 msgid "HIgh Performance Parallel Interface (HIPPI)" msgstr "高效能平行介面 (HIPPI)" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1181 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1185 msgid "Hipersockets" msgstr "Hipersockets" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1182 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1186 msgid "Hipersockets Interface (HSI)" msgstr "Hipersockets 介面 (HSI)" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1185 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1191 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1206 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1189 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1195 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1210 msgid "ISDN Connection" msgstr "ISDN 連線" #. Device type label #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1187 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1189 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1191 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1193 msgid "IrDA" msgstr "IrDA" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1187 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1191 msgid "Infrared Network Device" msgstr "紅外線網路裝置" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1189 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1193 msgid "Infrared Device" msgstr "紅外線裝置" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1194 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1198 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:224 msgid "IUCV" msgstr "IUCV" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1195 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1199 msgid "Inter User Communication Vehicle (IUCV)" msgstr "內部使用者通訊處 (IUCV)" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1198 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1202 msgid "OSA LCS" msgstr "OSA LCS" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1198 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1202 msgid "OSA LCS Network Card" msgstr "OSA LCS 網路卡" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1200 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1204 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:219 msgid "Loopback" msgstr "迴路" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1200 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1204 msgid "Loopback Device" msgstr "回送設備" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1204 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1208 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:228 msgid "Myrinet" msgstr "Myrinet" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1204 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1208 msgid "Myrinet Network Card" msgstr "Myrinet 網路卡" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1209 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1213 msgid "Parallel Line" msgstr "平行線" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1210 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1214 msgid "Parallel Line Connection" msgstr "平行線連接" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1216 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1220 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:226 msgid "QETH" msgstr "QETH" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1217 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1221 msgid "OSA-Express or QDIO Device (QETH)" msgstr "OSA-Express 或 QDIO 裝置 (QETH)" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1221 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1225 msgid "IPv6-in-IPv4" msgstr "IPv6-in-IPv4" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1222 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1226 msgid "IPv6-in-IPv4 Encapsulation Device" msgstr "IPv6-in-IPv4 封裝裝置" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1226 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1230 msgid "Serial Line" msgstr "序列線" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1227 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1231 msgid "Serial Line Connection" msgstr "序列線連接" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1231 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1235 msgid "Token Ring" msgstr "記號環" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1232 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1236 msgid "Token Ring Network Card" msgstr "記號環網路卡" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1235 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1239 msgid "USB" msgstr "USB" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1235 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1239 msgid "USB Network Device" msgstr "USB 網路裝置" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1237 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1241 msgid "VMWare" msgstr "VMWare" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1237 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1241 msgid "VMWare Network Device" msgstr "VMWare 網路裝置" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1240 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1244 msgid "Wireless" msgstr "無線" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1241 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1245 msgid "Wireless Network Card" msgstr "無線網路卡" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1244 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1248 msgid "XPNET" msgstr "XPNET" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1244 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1248 msgid "XP Network" msgstr "XP 網路" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1246 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1250 msgid "VLAN" msgstr "VLAN" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1246 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1250 msgid "Virtual LAN" msgstr "虛擬網路" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1248 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1252 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:89 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:101 msgid "Bridge" msgstr "橋接器" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1248 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1252 msgid "Network Bridge" msgstr "網路橋接" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1250 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1254 msgid "TUN" msgstr "TUN" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1250 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1254 msgid "Network TUNnel" msgstr "網路通道" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1252 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1256 msgid "TAP" msgstr "TAP" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1252 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1256 msgid "Network TAP" msgstr "網路 TAP" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1254 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1258 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:152 msgid "InfiniBand" msgstr "InfiniBand" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1254 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1258 msgid "InfiniBand Device" msgstr "無限寬頻裝置" @@ -2593,7 +2591,7 @@ msgstr "輸出的目錄(&E)" #. TRANSLATORS: pop-up question when reading the service configuration -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkService.rb:294 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkService.rb:281 msgid "" "Your network interfaces are currently controlled by NetworkManager\n" "but the service to configure might not work well with it.\n" @@ -2608,7 +2606,7 @@ #. If there is network running, return true. #. Otherwise show error popup depending on Stage and return false #. @return true if network running -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkService.rb:362 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkService.rb:349 #, fuzzy msgid "" "No running network detected.\n" @@ -2616,7 +2614,7 @@ "or continue without network." msgstr "重新啟動安裝並在 Linuxrc 設定網路" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkService.rb:368 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkService.rb:355 #, fuzzy msgid "" "No running network detected.\n" @@ -2802,43 +2800,32 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Proposal informative text "Firewall is enabled (disable)" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:582 -msgid "" -"Firewall is enabled (disable</a>)" -msgstr "" -"防火牆已啟用 (停用</a>)" +msgid "Firewall is enabled (disable</a>)" +msgstr "防火牆已啟用 (停用</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Proposal informative text "Firewall is disabled (enable)" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:587 -msgid "" -"Firewall is disabled (enable</a>)" -msgstr "" -"防火牆已停用 (啟用</a>)" +msgid "Firewall is disabled (enable</a>)" +msgstr "防火牆已停用 (啟用</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:621 -msgid "" -"SSH port is open (close</a>)" -msgstr "" -"SSH 連接埠為開啟 (關閉</a>)" +msgid "SSH port is open (close</a>)" +msgstr "SSH 連接埠為開啟 (關閉</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:626 -msgid "" -"SSH port is blocked (open</a>)" -msgstr "" -"SSH 連接埠為關閉 (開啟</a>)" +msgid "SSH port is blocked (open</a>)" +msgstr "SSH 連接埠為關閉 (開啟</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:646 msgid "" -"SSH port is open (close</a>), " -"but\n" +"SSH port is open (close</a>), but\n" "there are no network interfaces configured" msgstr "" "SSH 埠為開啟 (關閉</a>)，但\n" @@ -2846,36 +2833,24 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation over SSH without SSH allowed on firewall #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:661 -msgid "" -"You are installing a system over SSH, but you have not opened the SSH port " -"on the firewall." +msgid "You are installing a system over SSH, but you have not opened the SSH port on the firewall." msgstr "您正在 SSH 上安裝系統，但是您沒有開啟防火牆上的 SSH 埠。" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text "Remote Administration (VNC) is enabled" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:703 -msgid "" -"Remote Administration (VNC) ports are open (close</a>)" -msgstr "" -"遠端管理 (VNC) 埠為開啟 (關閉)" +msgid "Remote Administration (VNC) ports are open (close</a>)" +msgstr "遠端管理 (VNC) 埠為開啟 (關閉</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text "Remote Administration (VNC) is disabled" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:708 -msgid "" -"Remote Administration (VNC) ports are blocked (open</a>)" -msgstr "" -"遠端管理 (VNC) 埠為關閉 (開啟)" +msgid "Remote Administration (VNC) ports are blocked (open</a>)" +msgstr "遠端管理 (VNC) 埠為關閉 (開啟</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation over VNC without VNC allowed on firewall #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:718 -msgid "" -"You are installing a system using remote administration (VNC), but you have " -"not opened the VNC ports on the firewall." +msgid "You are installing a system using remote administration (VNC), but you have not opened the VNC ports on the firewall." msgstr "您正在使用遠端管理 (VNC) 安裝系統，但是您沒有開啟防火牆上的 VNC 埠。" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text @@ -2890,9 +2865,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation to iSCSI without iSCSI allowed on firewall #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:746 -msgid "" -"You are installing a system using iSCSI Target, but you have not opened the " -"needed ports on the firewall." +msgid "You are installing a system using iSCSI Target, but you have not opened the needed ports on the firewall." msgstr "您正在使用 iSCSI 目標安裝系統，但是您沒有開啟防火牆上所需的通訊埠。" #. Returns service definition. @@ -3066,8 +3039,7 @@ #: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:667 msgid "" "Ignoring a package failure may result in a broken system.\n" -"The system should be later verified by running the Software Management " -"module." +"The system should be later verified by running the Software Management module." msgstr "" "忽略可能造成系統破壞的失敗套件。\n" "應在稍後執行軟體管理模組檢查系統。" @@ -3076,10 +3048,8 @@ #: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:790 msgid "" "<p>The repository at the specified URL now provides a different media ID.\n" -"If the URL is correct, this indicates that the repository content has " -"changed. To \n" -"continue using this repository, start <b>Installation Repositories</b> " -"from \n" +"If the URL is correct, this indicates that the repository content has changed. To \n" +"continue using this repository, start <b>Installation Repositories</b> from \n" "the YaST control center and refresh the repository.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>位於指定 URL 的來源現在提供不同的媒體 ID。\n" @@ -3584,8 +3554,7 @@ "<p><b><big>License Confirmation</big></b><br>\n" "The package in the headline of the dialog requires an explicit confirmation\n" "of acceptance of its license.\n" -"If you reject the license of the package, the package will not be " -"installed.\n" +"If you reject the license of the package, the package will not be installed.\n" "<br>\n" "To accept the license of the package, click <b>I Agree</b>.\n" "To reject the license of the package, click <b>I Disagree</b></p>." @@ -3602,10 +3571,8 @@ #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:331 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"\t\t This dialog allows you to define this system's tasks and what software " -"to install.\n" -"\t\t Available tasks and software for this system are shown by category in " -"the left\n" +"\t\t This dialog allows you to define this system's tasks and what software to install.\n" +"\t\t Available tasks and software for this system are shown by category in the left\n" "\t\t column. To view a description for an item, select it in the list.\n" "\t\t </p>" msgstr "" @@ -3644,8 +3611,7 @@ #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:351 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"\t\t The disk usage display in the lower right corner shows the remaining " -"disk space\n" +"\t\t The disk usage display in the lower right corner shows the remaining disk space\n" "\t\t after all requested changes will have been performed.\n" "\t\t Hard disk partitions that are full or nearly full can degrade\n" "\t\t system performance and in some cases even cause serious problems.\n" @@ -3706,7 +3672,7 @@ #. Table headings for CD statistics during installation #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:552 -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:554 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:545 msgid "Packages" msgstr "套件" @@ -3759,9 +3725,7 @@ #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:669 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<P><BIG><B>Installation Report</B></BIG><BR>Here is a summary of installed " -"or removed packages.</P>" +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Installation Report</B></BIG><BR>Here is a summary of installed or removed packages.</P>" msgstr "<P><BIG><B>安裝摘要</B><BIG><BR>這是已安裝套件的摘要。</P>" #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:677 @@ -3868,8 +3832,7 @@ msgid "" "No checksum for file %1 was found in the repository.\n" "This means that the file is part of the signed repository,\n" -"but the list of checksums in this repository does not mention this file. " -"Using the file\n" +"but the list of checksums in this repository does not mention this file. Using the file\n" "may put the integrity of your system at risk.\n" "\n" "Use it anyway?" @@ -4110,8 +4073,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>A warning dialog opens for every package that\n" "is not signed by a trusted (imported) key. If you do not trust the key,\n" -"the packages or repositories created by the owner of the key will not be " -"used.</p>" +"the packages or repositories created by the owner of the key will not be used.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>每個未經受信任 (已匯入) 金鑰簽署的套件\n" "都會顯示警告對話方塊。如果您不信任該金鑰，\n" @@ -4193,8 +4155,7 @@ "but the expected checksum is not known.\n" "\n" "This means that the origin and integrity of the file\n" -"cannot be verified. Using the file puts the integrity of your system at " -"risk.\n" +"cannot be verified. Using the file puts the integrity of your system at risk.\n" "\n" "Use it anyway?\n" msgstr "" @@ -4217,86 +4178,79 @@ #. Return the description for the current stage. #. @return [String] localized string description #. translators: default global progress bar label -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:153 -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:154 -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:328 -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:349 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:151 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:152 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:326 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:347 msgid "Installing..." msgstr "正在安裝..." #. Table headings for CD statistics during installation -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:550 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:541 msgid "Media" msgstr "媒體" #. Table headings for CD statistics during installation - keep as short as possible! -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:552 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:543 #, fuzzy msgid "Remaining" msgstr "剩餘的套件" #. Table headings for CD statistics during installation -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:556 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:547 msgid "Time" msgstr "時間" #. Construct widgets for the "details" page #. #. @return A term describing the widgets -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:572 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:563 msgid "Actions performed:" msgstr "執行的動作：" #. Help text while software packages are being installed (displayed only in rare cases) -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:656 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:647 msgid "<p>Packages are being installed.</p>" msgstr "<p>套件已被安裝。</p>" -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:657 -msgid "" -"<P><B>Aborting Installation</B> Package installation can be aborted using " -"the <B>Abort</B> button. However, the system then can be in an inconsistent " -"or unusable state or it may not boot if the basic system component is not " -"installed.</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P><B>中止安裝</B> 您可以中止套件的安裝，要中止請按 <B>中止</B> 按鈕。 然而，" -"系統可能會處在不一致或不穩定的狀態，如果基礎系統元件未安裝則可能無法開機。" +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:648 +msgid "<P><B>Aborting Installation</B> Package installation can be aborted using the <B>Abort</B> button. However, the system then can be in an inconsistent or unusable state or it may not boot if the basic system component is not installed.</P>" +msgstr "<P><B>中止安裝</B> 您可以中止套件的安裝，要中止請按 <B>中止</B> 按鈕。 然而，系統可能會處在不一致或不穩定的狀態，如果基礎系統元件未安裝則可能無法開機。</P>" #. Translators: Tab name, keep short, %s is product name, e.g. SLES -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:675 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:666 #, fuzzy msgid "%s Release Notes" msgstr "版本說明(&N)" #. tab -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:687 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:678 msgid "Slide Sho&w" msgstr "投影片介紹(&W)" #. tab -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:689 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:680 msgid "&Details" msgstr "詳細資訊(&D)" #. Dialog heading - software packages are being upgraded -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:728 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:719 msgid "Performing Upgrade" msgstr "" #. Dialog heading - software packages are being installed -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:731 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:722 #, fuzzy msgid "Performing Installation" msgstr "執行安裝" #. Dialog heading while software packages are being installed -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:768 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:759 msgid "Package Installation" msgstr "套件安裝" #. popup yes-no -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:844 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:835 msgid "" "Do you really want\n" "to quit the installation?" @@ -4305,17 +4259,17 @@ "結束安裝嗎？" #. Mode::update (), Stage::cont () -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:856 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:847 msgid "Aborted" msgstr "已中止" #. read file content #: library/system/src/clients/view_anymsg.rb:187 msgid "File not found." -msgstr "" +msgstr "找不到檔案。" #. Fill the LogView with file content -#: library/system/src/clients/view_anymsg.rb:193 +#: library/system/src/clients/view_anymsg.rb:199 msgid "System Log (%1)" msgstr "系統記錄 (%1)" @@ -5029,7 +4983,7 @@ #. KiloByte abbreviated #: library/types/src/modules/String.rb:146 msgid "KiB" -msgstr "" +msgstr "KiB" #. MegaByte abbreviated #: library/types/src/modules/String.rb:148 @@ -5795,8 +5749,7 @@ "\n" "A valid reverse IPv4 consists of four integers in the range 0-255\n" "separated by a dot then followed by the string '.in-addr.arpa.'.\n" -"For example, '1.32.168.192.in-addr.arpa.' for the IPv4 address " -"'192.168.32.1'.\n" +"For example, '1.32.168.192.in-addr.arpa.' for the IPv4 address '192.168.32.1'.\n" msgstr "" "反向 IPv4 位址 %1 無效。\n" "\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/bootloader.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/bootloader.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/bootloader.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: bootloader\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-30 10:10+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-01-16 11:22+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -133,25 +133,22 @@ msgstr "系統現在將重新開機..." #. warning text in the summary richtext -#: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:108 -msgid "" -"No boot loader is selected for installation. Your system might not be " -"bootable." +#: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:116 +msgid "No boot loader is selected for installation. Your system might not be bootable." msgstr "未選取要安裝的開機載入器。您的系統可能無法開機。" #. error in the proposal -#: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:118 -msgid "" -"Because of the partitioning, the bootloader cannot be installed properly" +#: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:126 +msgid "Because of the partitioning, the bootloader cannot be installed properly" msgstr "因為分割區因素，所以無法正確安裝開機載入器" #. proposal part - bootloader label -#: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:217 +#: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:225 msgid "Booting" msgstr "開機" #. menubutton entry -#: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:219 +#: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:227 msgid "&Booting" msgstr "開機(&B)" @@ -160,12 +157,12 @@ #. Run dialog to adjust installation on i386 and AMD64 #. @return [Symbol] for wizard sequencer #: src/include/bootloader/grub/dialogs.rb:41 -#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:217 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:221 msgid "Disk Order" msgstr "磁碟順序" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/dialogs.rb:50 -#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:226 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:230 msgid "Disk order settings" msgstr "磁碟順序設定" @@ -176,10 +173,9 @@ msgstr "開機功能表" #. `VSpacing(1), -#. Run dialog for loader installation details for Grub2 -#. @return [Symbol] for wizard sequencer +#. Window title #: src/include/bootloader/grub/dialogs.rb:106 -#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:139 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:143 msgid "Boot Loader Options" msgstr "開機載入器選項" @@ -204,10 +200,8 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:24 msgid "" "<p><b>Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition</b><br>\n" -"To activate the partition which contains the boot loader. The generic MBR " -"code will then\n" -"boot the active partition. Older BIOSes require one partition to be active " -"even\n" +"To activate the partition which contains the boot loader. The generic MBR code will then\n" +"boot the active partition. Older BIOSes require one partition to be active even\n" "if the boot loader is installed in the MBR.</p>" msgstr "" "<b>在分割表中設定啟用旗標，以做為開機分割區</b><br>\n" @@ -233,8 +227,7 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/common_helps.rb:23 msgid "" "<p><b>Timeout in Seconds</b><br>\n" -"Specifies the time the bootloader will wait until the default kernel is " -"loaded.</p>\n" +"Specifies the time the bootloader will wait until the default kernel is loaded.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>逾時秒數</b><br>\n" "指定開啟載入起在預設核心載入前等待多久時間。</p>\n" @@ -257,18 +250,15 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:41 msgid "" -"<p><b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b> replace the master boot record of " -"your disk with generic code (OS independent code which\n" +"<p><b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b> replace the master boot record of your disk with generic code (OS independent code which\n" "boots the active partition).</p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>將一般開機碼寫入 MBR</b>將您的磁碟的主要開機記錄取代為一般碼 (獨立於作" -"業系統外的程式碼，\n" +"<p><b>將一般開機碼寫入 MBR</b>將您的磁碟的主要開機記錄取代為一般碼 (獨立於作業系統外的程式碼，\n" "可讓啟用中的分割區開機)。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:44 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Boot Partition</b> is one of the recommended options, the " -"other is\n" +"<p><b>Boot from Boot Partition</b> is one of the recommended options, the other is\n" "<b>Boot from Root Partition</b>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>「從開機分割區開機」</b>是其中一個建議的選項，而另一個是\n" @@ -276,18 +266,15 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:47 msgid "" -"<p><b>Use Trusted Grub</b> means install trusted grub and use it. Option " -"<i>Graphical Menu File</i> will be ignored.\n" +"<p><b>Use Trusted Grub</b> means install trusted grub and use it. Option <i>Graphical Menu File</i> will be ignored.\n" "It is recommended to install grub to MBR</p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>使用受信任的 Grub</b> 表示安裝受信任的 grub 並使用它。選項 <i>圖形選單" -"檔案</i> 將被忽略。\n" +"<p><b>使用受信任的 Grub</b> 表示安裝受信任的 grub 並使用它。選項 <i>圖形選單檔案</i> 將被忽略。\n" "推薦安裝 grub 到 MBR</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:50 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Master Boot Record</b> is not recommended if you have " -"another operating system\n" +"<p><b>Boot from Master Boot Record</b> is not recommended if you have another operating system\n" "installed on your computer</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>「從主開機記錄開機」</b>，當您在電腦上安裝了其他的作業系統，\n" @@ -295,26 +282,27 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:53 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Root Partition</b> is the recommended option whenever there " -"is a suitable\n" -"partition. Either select <b>Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot " -"Partition</b> and <b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b>\n" -"in <b>Boot Loader Options</b> to update the master boot record if that is " -"needed or configure your other boot manager\n" +"<p><b>Boot from Root Partition</b> is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" +"partition. Either select <b>Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition</b> and <b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b>\n" +"in <b>Boot Loader Options</b> to update the master boot record if that is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" "to start this section.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>「從根分割區開機」</b>是每當有合適分割區時的\n" -"建議選項。 請視需要選取<b>「開機載入器選項」</b>中的<b>「在分割區表中設定使用" -"中旗標，以做為開機分割區」</b>和<b>「將一般開機碼寫入 MBR」</b>\n" +"建議選項。 請視需要選取<b>「開機載入器選項」</b>中的<b>「在分割區表中設定使用中旗標，以做為開機分割區」</b>和<b>「將一般開機碼寫入 MBR」</b>\n" "來更新主開機記錄，或請設定您其他的開機管理員\n" "來啟動此區段。</p>" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:60 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:59 msgid "" -"<p><b>Custom Boot Partition</b> lets you choose a partition to boot from.</p>" +"<p><b>Boot from Extended Partition</b> should be selected if your root partition is on \n" +"logical partition and the /boot partition is missing</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:62 +msgid "<p><b>Custom Boot Partition</b> lets you choose a partition to boot from.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>「自定開機分割區」</b>可讓您選擇要用來開機的分割區</p>" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:63 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:65 msgid "" "<p>MD array is build from 2 disks. <b>Enable Redundancy for MD Array</b>\n" "enable to write GRUB to MBR of both disks.</p>" @@ -322,72 +310,60 @@ "<p>MD 陣列是由 2 磁碟組成。 <b>啟用 MD 磁碟陣列</b>\n" "啟用已寫入 GRUB 到兩個磁碟的 MBR。</p>" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:66 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:68 msgid "" "<p><b>Use Serial Console</b> lets you define the parameters to use\n" -"for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub) for details.</p>" +"for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub</code>) for details.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>使用序列主控台</b>可讓您設定參數以\n" -"使用序列控制台。 如需詳細資訊，請參閱 grub 文件 (<code>info grub</code>)。" +"使用序列控制台。 如需詳細資訊，請參閱 grub 文件 (<code>info grub</code>)。</p>" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:69 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:71 msgid "" "<p><b>Terminal Definition</b></p><br>\n" -"Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (eg. a " -"serial console),\n" -"you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console to the\n" -"command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which " -"you\n" +"Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (eg. a serial console),\n" +"you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console</code> to the\n" +"command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which you\n" "press any key will be selected as a GRUB terminal.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>終端機定義</b></p><br>\n" "可定義您想使用的終端機類型。 若是序列終端機 (例如序列主控台)，\n" "您則需指定 <code>serial</code>。 您也可以將 <code>console</code> 傳送給\n" -"指令，做為 <code>serial console</code>。 在這種情況下，讓您在其中按下任意鍵的" -"終端機，\n" +"指令，做為 <code>serial console</code>。 在這種情況下，讓您在其中按下任意鍵的終端機，\n" "將獲選為 GRUB 終端機。</p>" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:76 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:78 msgid "" -"<p><b>Fallback Sections if default Fails</b> contains a list of section " -"numbers\n" +"<p><b>Fallback Sections if default Fails</b> contains a list of section numbers\n" "that will be used for booting in case the default section is unbootable.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>「預設區段失敗時採用後援區段」</b>包含區段號碼清單，可在\n" "預設區段無法開機時用來開機。</p>" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:79 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:81 msgid "<p>Selecting <b>Hide Menu on Boot</b> will hide the boot menu.</p>" msgstr "<p>選取<b>「開機時隱藏功能表」</b>可以隱藏開機功能表</p>" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:82 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Graphical Menu File</b> defines the file to use for the graphical boot " -"menu.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>「圖形化功能表檔案」</b>可定義檔案，使其用於圖形化開機功能表。</p>" +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:84 +msgid "<p><b>Graphical Menu File</b> defines the file to use for the graphical boot menu.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>「圖形化功能表檔案」</b>可定義檔案，使其用於圖形化開機功能表。</p>" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:85 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:87 msgid "<p><b>Enable Acoustic Signals</b> turn on/off acoustic signals.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>啟用聽覺信號</b> 開啟/關閉聽覺信號。</p>" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:88 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:90 msgid "" "<p><b>Protect Boot Loader with Password</b><br>\n" -"Define the password that will be required to access the boot menu. YaST will " -"only accept the password if you repeat\n" +"Define the password that will be required to access the boot menu. YaST will only accept the password if you repeat\n" "it in <b>Retype Password</b>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>以密碼保護開機載入器</b><br>\n" -"定義當存取開機選單時所需的密碼。 只有當您在<b>「再次輸入密碼」</b>中輸入密碼" -"時，\n" +"定義當存取開機選單時所需的密碼。 只有當您在<b>「再次輸入密碼」</b>中輸入密碼時，\n" "YaST 才會接受該密碼。</p>" #. help text 1/5 -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:95 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:97 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Disks Order</b></big><br>\n" "To specify the order of the disks according to the order in BIOS, use\n" @@ -401,72 +377,72 @@ "要新增磁碟，按 <b>新增</b>。\n" "要移除磁碟，按 <b>移除</b>。</p>" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:106 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:108 msgid "Boot Loader Locations" msgstr "開機載入器位置" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:107 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:109 msgid "Set &active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition" msgstr "在分割區表中設定啟用旗標以做為開機分割區(&A)" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:110 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:112 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/common_helps.rb:29 msgid "&Timeout in Seconds" msgstr "逾時秒數(&T)" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:111 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:113 msgid "&Default Boot Section" msgstr "預設開機區段(&D)" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:112 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:114 msgid "Write &generic Boot Code to MBR" msgstr "將一般開機碼寫入 MBR(&G)" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:113 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:115 msgid "Use &Trusted Grub" msgstr "使用受信任的 Grub(&T)" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:114 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:116 msgid "Custom Boot Partition" msgstr "自定開機分割區" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:115 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:117 msgid "Boot from Master Boot Record" msgstr "從主開機記錄開機" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:116 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:118 msgid "Boot from Root Partition" msgstr "從根分割區開機" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:117 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:119 msgid "Boot from Boot Partition" msgstr "從開機分割區開機" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:118 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:120 msgid "Boot from Extended Partition" msgstr "從擴充分割區開機" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:119 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:121 msgid "Serial Connection &Parameters" msgstr "序列主控台參數(&P)" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:120 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:122 msgid "Fallback Sections if Default fails" msgstr "預設區段失敗時採用後援區段" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:121 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:123 msgid "&Hide Menu on Boot" msgstr "開機時隱藏選單(&H)" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:122 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:124 msgid "Graphical &Menu File" msgstr "圖形化選單檔案(&M)" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:123 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:125 msgid "Pa&ssword for the Menu Interface" msgstr "選單介面的密碼(&S)" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:124 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:126 msgid "Debugg&ing Flag" msgstr "除錯旗標(&I)" @@ -552,82 +528,82 @@ #. Create Frame "Boot Loader Location" #. #. @return [Yast::Term] with widgets +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:740 +msgid "Boot from &Root Partition" +msgstr "從 Root 分割區開機(&R)" + #: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:741 -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:770 -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:805 -msgid "Boot Loader Location" -msgstr "開機載入器位置" +msgid "Boo&t from Boot Partition" +msgstr "從開機分割區開機(&T)" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:747 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:749 #: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:776 #: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:811 +msgid "Boot Loader Location" +msgstr "開機載入器位置" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:755 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:782 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:817 msgid "Boot from &Master Boot Record" msgstr "從主開機記錄開機(&M)" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:750 -msgid "Boot from &Root Partition" -msgstr "從 Root 分割區開機(&R)" - -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:751 -msgid "Boo&t from Boot Partition" -msgstr "從開機分割區開機(&T)" - -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:756 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:762 msgid "Boot from &Extended Partition" msgstr "從擴充分割區開機(&E)" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:782 -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:823 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:788 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:829 msgid "C&ustom Boot Partition" msgstr "自定開機分割區(&U)" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:816 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:822 msgid "Enable Red&undancy for MD Array" msgstr "啟用 MD 磁碟陣列(&U)" #. push button #. push button -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:875 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:881 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:831 msgid "Boot Loader Installation &Details" msgstr "開機載入器安裝詳細資訊(&D)" -#. Cache for genericWidgets function -#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:56 +#. Title in tab +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:57 #, fuzzy msgid "Boot Code Options" msgstr "開機載入器選項" -#. there is no graphic adapter on s390 (bnc#874010) -#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:80 +#. Title in tab +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:82 #, fuzzy msgid "Kernel Parameters" msgstr "新增的 Kernel 參數：%1" -#. there is no os prober on s390(bnc#868909) -#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:99 +#. Title in tab +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:102 #, fuzzy msgid "Bootloader Options" msgstr "開機載入器選項" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:179 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:183 #, fuzzy msgid "Secure Boot" msgstr "安全" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:185 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:189 #, fuzzy msgid "Enable &Secure Boot Support" msgstr "啟用限額支援(&Q)" #. TRANSLATORS: place where boot code is installed -#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:258 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:262 #, fuzzy msgid "Boot &Loader Location" msgstr "開機載入器位置" #. help text -#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:277 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:281 msgid "Choose partition where is boot sequence installed." msgstr "" @@ -647,61 +623,55 @@ #. $Id: helps.ycp 58279 2009-08-04 16:01:51Z juhliarik $ #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:23 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:33 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Optional Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define additional " -"parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>「選擇性的核心指令行參數」</b>可讓您定義其他要傳送到核心的參數。</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Optional Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define additional parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>「選擇性的核心指令行參數」</b>可讓您定義其他要傳送到核心的參數。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:26 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:30 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Vga Mode</b> defines the VGA mode the kernel should set the " -"<i>console</i> to when booting.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>「VGA 模式」</b>可定義<i></i>主控台在核心開機時所使用的 VGA 模式</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Vga Mode</b> defines the VGA mode the kernel should set the <i>console</i> to when booting.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>「VGA 模式」</b>可定義<i></i>主控台在核心開機時所使用的 VGA 模式</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:29 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Failsafe Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define failsafe " -"parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>Failsafe 核心指令行參數</b>可讓您定義其他要傳送到 failsafe 核心的參數。" -"</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Failsafe Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define failsafe parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>Failsafe 核心指令行參數</b>可讓您定義其他要傳送到 failsafe 核心的參數。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:32 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Probe Foreign OS</b> by means of os-prober for multiboot with other " -"foreign distribution </p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>偵測外來作業系統</b> 藉由 os-prober 和外來的發行版本進行多重開機 </p>" +msgid "<p><b>Probe Foreign OS</b> by means of os-prober for multiboot with other foreign distribution </p>" +msgstr "<p><b>偵測外來作業系統</b> 藉由 os-prober 和外來的發行版本進行多重開機 </p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:35 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Protective MBR flag</b> is expert only settings, that is needed only " -"on exotic hardware. For details see Protective MBR in GPT disks. Do not " -"touch if you are not sure.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Protective MBR flag</b> is expert only settings, that is needed only on exotic hardware. For details see Protective MBR in GPT disks. Do not touch if you are not sure.</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:41 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:38 +msgid "<p><b>Distributor</b> specifies name of distributor of kernel used to create boot entry name. </p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:44 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:99 msgid "O&ptional Kernel Command Line Parameter" msgstr "選擇性的核心指令行參數(&P)" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:42 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:45 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Distribution:" +msgid "D&istributor" +msgstr "配送：" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:46 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:98 msgid "&Vga Mode" msgstr "Vga 模式(&V)" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:43 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:47 msgid "&Failsafe Kernel Command Line Parameter" msgstr "Failsafe 核心指令行參數(&F)" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:44 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:48 msgid "Probe Foreign OS" msgstr "偵測外來作業系統" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:45 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:49 msgid "Protective MBR flag" msgstr "" @@ -745,7 +715,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: remove flag from disk #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:104 msgid "remove" -msgstr "" +msgstr "移除" #. TRANSLATORS: do not change flag on disk #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:106 @@ -776,6 +746,11 @@ msgid "&Console theme" msgstr "主控台主題(&C)" +#. FIXME this should be better handled by exception and show it properly, but it require too big change now +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/autoinstall.rb:169 +msgid "Unsupported bootloader '%s'. Adapt your AutoYaST profile accordingly." +msgstr "" + #. file open popup caption #. file open popup caption #. file open popup caption @@ -789,7 +764,7 @@ #. kokso: additional warning that root partition is nfs type -> bootloader will not be installed #. F#300779 - Install diskless client (NFS-root) #. kokso: additional warning that root partition is nfs type -> bootloader will not be installed -#: src/include/bootloader/routines/dialogs.rb:90 src/modules/Bootloader.rb:269 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/dialogs.rb:90 src/modules/Bootloader.rb:270 msgid "The boot partition is of type NFS. Bootloader cannot be installed." msgstr "此根分割區為 NFS 類型。開機載入器無法安裝。" @@ -1120,10 +1095,8 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:58 msgid "" "<P>From <B>Other</B>,\n" -"you can manually edit the boot loader configuration files, clear the " -"current \n" -"configuration and propose a new configuration, start from scratch, or " -"reread\n" +"you can manually edit the boot loader configuration files, clear the current \n" +"configuration and propose a new configuration, start from scratch, or reread\n" "the configuration saved on your disk. %1</P>" msgstr "" "<P>透過<B>「其他」</B>按鈕，\n" @@ -1213,8 +1186,7 @@ "- In the <b>Boot Sector</b> of the <tt>/boot</tt> or <tt>/</tt> (root) \n" "partition. This is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" "partition. Either set <b>Activate Boot Loader Partition</b> and\n" -"<b>Replace MBR with Generic Code</b> in <b>Boot Loader Installation Details\n" +"<b>Replace MBR with Generic Code</b> in <b>Boot Loader Installation Details</b>\n" "to update the master boot record\n" "if it is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" "to start &product;.</p>" @@ -1223,8 +1195,7 @@ "- 使用 <tt>/boot</tt> 或 <tt>/</tt> (根) 分割區的\n" "<b>「開機磁區」</b>。若有合適的\n" "分割區，建議您使用此選項。\n" -"若有必要，您可以在<b>開機載入器安裝詳細資訊</b>中設定<b>「啟用開機載入分割" -"區」</b>和\n" +"若有必要，您可以在<b>開機載入器安裝詳細資訊</b>中設定<b>「啟用開機載入分割區」</b>和\n" " <b>「將 MBR 取代為一般碼」</b>\n" "，更新主要開機記錄，或是設定其他開機管理員\n" " 以啟動 &product;。</p>" @@ -1328,8 +1299,7 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:244 msgid "" "<p><b>Section Name</b><br>\n" -"Use <b>Section Name</b> to specify the boot loader section name. The " -"section\n" +"Use <b>Section Name</b> to specify the boot loader section name. The section\n" "name must be unique.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>區段名稱</b><br>\n" @@ -1388,8 +1358,7 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:278 msgid "" "<p>Select <b>Menu Section</b> to add a section that \n" -"loads configuration file (the list of boot sections) from a partition of the " -"disk. This is used for\n" +"loads configuration file (the list of boot sections) from a partition of the disk. This is used for\n" "booting other operating systems.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>選取<b>選單區段</b>，以新增一個區段\n" @@ -1622,74 +1591,48 @@ msgstr "<p><b>影像區段</b></p>" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:24 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Kernel Image</b> defines the kernel to boot. Either enter the name " -"directly or choose via <b>Browse</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>「核心影像」</b>可定義要開機的核心。 請直接輸入名稱，或透過<b>「瀏覽」" -"</b>進行選擇</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Kernel Image</b> defines the kernel to boot. Either enter the name directly or choose via <b>Browse</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>「核心影像」</b>可定義要開機的核心。 請直接輸入名稱，或透過<b>「瀏覽」</b>進行選擇</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:27 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Root Device</b> sets the device to pass to the kernel as root device." +msgid "<p><b>Root Device</b> sets the device to pass to the kernel as root device.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>「根設備」</b>可設定要將哪個設備傳送到核心做為根設備。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:36 msgid "" -"<p><b>Initial RAM Disk</b>, if not empty, defines the initial ramdisk to " -"use. Either enter the path and file name\n" +"<p><b>Initial RAM Disk</b>, if not empty, defines the initial ramdisk to use. Either enter the path and file name\n" "directly or choose by using <b>Browse</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b>「起始的 RAM 磁碟」</b>在不為空白時會定義要使用的起始 RAM 磁碟。 請直接" -"輸入路徑和檔案名稱，或使用\n" +"<p><b>「起始的 RAM 磁碟」</b>在不為空白時會定義要使用的起始 RAM 磁碟。 請直接輸入路徑和檔案名稱，或使用\n" "<b>「瀏覽」</b>進行選擇。</p>\n" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:39 -msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Chainloader Section</b> if you want to define a section for " -"booting an OS other than Linux.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>「Chainloader 區段」</b>，當您想為 Linux 之外的某個作業系統設定開機區段" -"時，請選擇此選項。</p>" +msgid "<p>Select <b>Chainloader Section</b> if you want to define a section for booting an OS other than Linux.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>「Chainloader 區段」</b>，當您想為 Linux 之外的某個作業系統設定開機區段時，請選擇此選項。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:42 -msgid "" -"<p>Setting <b>Use Password Protection</p> will require a password to select " -"this section.</p>" +msgid "<p>Setting <b>Use Password Protection</p> will require a password to select this section.</p>" msgstr "<p>設定<b>「使用密碼保護」</p>以後便需要使用密碼才能選取這個區段。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:45 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Other System</b> lets you choose among the non-Linux operating systems " -"found on your computer.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>「其他系統」</b>可讓您在電腦上所安裝的所有非 Linux 作業系統中進行選擇。" -"</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Other System</b> lets you choose among the non-Linux operating systems found on your computer.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>「其他系統」</b>可讓您在電腦上所安裝的所有非 Linux 作業系統中進行選擇。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:48 -msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Activate this Partition when selected for Boot</b> if your BIOS " -"needs this flag set in order to boot it</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>「將此分割區設定為開機分割區時加以啟用」</b>，當您的 BIOS 需要這個旗標" -"設定才能開機時，便使用這個選項</p>" +msgid "<p>Select <b>Activate this Partition when selected for Boot</b> if your BIOS needs this flag set in order to boot it</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>「將此分割區設定為開機分割區時加以啟用」</b>，當您的 BIOS 需要這個旗標設定才能開機時，便使用這個選項</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:51 msgid "" -"<p><b>Block Offset for Chainloading</b> lets you specify the list of blocks " -"to boot. In most cases you want\n" -"to specify <code>+1</code> here. For specifics on blocklist notation see the " -"grub documentation.</p>\n" +"<p><b>Block Offset for Chainloading</b> lets you specify the list of blocks to boot. In most cases you want\n" +"to specify <code>+1</code> here. For specifics on blocklist notation see the grub documentation.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b>「Chainloading 的區段偏移」</b>可讓您指定要開機的區段清單。 在大部分情" -"況下，您可以在這裡\n" +"<p><b>「Chainloading 的區段偏移」</b>可讓您指定要開機的區段清單。 在大部分情況下，您可以在這裡\n" "指定 <code>+1</code>。 如需區段清單標記的規格，請參閱 Grub 文件。</p>\n" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:54 msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Xen Section</b> if you want to add a new Linux kernel or other " -"image \n" +"<p>Select <b>Xen Section</b> if you want to add a new Linux kernel or other image \n" "and start it in a Xen environment.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>選取<b>「Xen 區段」</b>來新增 Linux 核心或其他影像，\n" @@ -1700,12 +1643,8 @@ msgstr "<p><b>「Hypervisor」</b>可指定要使用的 Hypervisor。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:60 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Additional Xen Hypervisor Parameters</b> lets you define additional " -"parameters to pass to the xen hypervisor.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>其他的 Xen Hypervisor 參數</b>可讓您定義其他要傳送到 xen hypervisor 的" -"參數。</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Additional Xen Hypervisor Parameters</b> lets you define additional parameters to pass to the xen hypervisor.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>其他的 Xen Hypervisor 參數</b>可讓您定義其他要傳送到 xen hypervisor 的參數。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:63 msgid "<p><b>Menu Section</b></p>" @@ -1717,27 +1656,19 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:65 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p><b>Menu Description File</b> specifies path on root device from which is " -"loaded menu file.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Menu Description File</b> specifies path on root device from which is loaded menu file.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>選單描述檔</b> 指定載入選單檔在根裝置的路徑。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:68 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Map Section to the First Disk from Device Map</b> Windows usually need " -"to be on the first disk.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>Map Section to the First Disk from Device Map</b> Windows 通常需要在第" -"一個磁碟。</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Map Section to the First Disk from Device Map</b> Windows usually need to be on the first disk.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>Map Section to the First Disk from Device Map</b> Windows 通常需要在第一個磁碟。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:71 msgid "" -"<p><b>Measures</b> includes measured files with PCR. Change table is " -"possible via buttons: <b>Add</b> , \n" +"<p><b>Measures</b> includes measured files with PCR. Change table is possible via buttons: <b>Add</b> , \n" "<b>Edit</b> and <b>Delete</b></p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>測量</b> 包含用 PCR 測量的檔案。可用下列按鍵來變更表格： <b>新增 , \n" +"<p><b>測量</b> 包含用 PCR 測量的檔案。可用下列按鍵來變更表格： <b>新增</b> , \n" "<b>編輯</b> 以及 <b>刪除</b></p>" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:74 @@ -1776,12 +1707,10 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:88 msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Enable SELinux</b> to add the needed kernel boot parameters to " -"enable the SELinux security framework. \n" +"<p>Select <b>Enable SELinux</b> to add the needed kernel boot parameters to enable the SELinux security framework. \n" "Please note that this will also disable AppArmor.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>選擇 <b>啟用 SELinux</b> 加入所需的核心開機參數來啟用 SELinux 保全框" -"架。 \n" +"<p>選擇 <b>啟用 SELinux</b> 加入所需的核心開機參數來啟用 SELinux 保全框架。 \n" "請注意這也會停用 AppArmor。</p>" #. radio button @@ -1951,8 +1880,7 @@ #. error report #: src/include/bootloader/routines/wizards.rb:36 -msgid "" -"Because of the partitioning, the boot loader cannot be installed properly." +msgid "Because of the partitioning, the boot loader cannot be installed properly." msgstr "因為分割區因素，所以無法正確安裝開機載入器。" #. FATE#303643 Enable one-click changes in bootloader proposal @@ -1961,47 +1889,38 @@ #. FIXME identical code in BootGRUB module #: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:657 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:189 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into MBR (do not install</a>)" +msgid "Install bootcode into MBR (do not install</a>)" msgstr "已啟用由 MBR 開機 (停用</a>" #: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:661 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:193 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into MBR (install</a>)" +msgid "Do not install bootcode into MBR (install</a>)" msgstr "已停用由 MBR 開機 (啟用</a>" #. check for separated boot partition, use root otherwise #. check for separated boot partition, use root otherwise -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:673 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:205 +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:673 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:206 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into /boot partition (do not " -"install</a>)" +msgid "Install bootcode into /boot partition (do not install</a>)" msgstr "已啟用由 /boot 分割區開機 (停用</a>" -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:677 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:209 +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:677 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:210 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into /boot partition (install</a>)" +msgid "Do not install bootcode into /boot partition (install</a>)" msgstr "已停用由 /boot 分割區開機 (啟用</a>" -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:683 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:215 +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:683 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:216 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into \"/\" partition (do not " -"install</a>)" +msgid "Install bootcode into \"/\" partition (do not install</a>)" msgstr "已啟用由 \"/\" 分割區開機 (停用</a>" -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:687 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:219 +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:687 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:220 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (install</a>)" +msgid "Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (install</a>)" msgstr "已停用由 \"/\" 分割區開機 (啟用</a>" -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:695 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:227 +#. TRANSLATORS: title for list of location proposals +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:695 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:238 #, fuzzy msgid "Change Location: %s" msgstr "變更位置： %1" @@ -2011,8 +1930,8 @@ #. @return a list of summary lines #. Display bootloader summary #. @return a list of summary lines -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:708 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:237 -#: src/modules/BootGRUB2EFI.rb:86 +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:708 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:248 +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2EFI.rb:94 msgid "Boot Loader Type: %1" msgstr "開機載入器類型：%1" @@ -2022,7 +1941,7 @@ msgstr " (\"/boot\")" #. TRANSLATORS: extended is here for extended partition. Keep translation short. -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:724 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:248 +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:724 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:259 msgid " (extended)" msgstr " (extended)" @@ -2032,12 +1951,12 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: MBR is acronym for Master Boot Record, if nothing locally specific #. is used in your language, then keep it as it is. -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:736 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:256 +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:736 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:267 msgid " (MBR)" msgstr " (MBR)" #. FIXME: should we translate all devices to names and add MBR suffixes? -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:750 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:263 +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:750 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:274 msgid "Status Location: %1" msgstr "狀態位置： %1" @@ -2060,125 +1979,129 @@ msgid "Propose and &Merge with Existing GRUB Menus" msgstr "建議與現有 GRUB 功能表合併(&M)" -#: src/modules/BootGRUB2EFI.rb:94 +#. no location chosen, so warn user that it is problem unless he is sure +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:230 +msgid "Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected.Unless you know what you are doing please select above location." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2EFI.rb:102 #, fuzzy msgid "Enable Secure Boot: %1" msgstr "啟用 GSS 安全性(&G)" #. Check that bootloader is known and supported -#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:68 +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:70 msgid "Unknown bootloader: %1" msgstr "不明的開機載入器： %1" #. grub2 is sooo cool... -#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:99 +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:101 msgid "Unsupported combination of hardware platform %1 and bootloader %2" msgstr "不支援硬體平台 %1 和開機載入器 %2 的組合" #. TODO add more devices -#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:126 +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:128 msgid "Partition number > 3 is being used for booting with GPT partition table" msgstr "分割區數字 > 3 已被用來使用 GPT 分割表開機" +#. TRANSLATORS: description of technical problem. Do not translate technical terms unless native language have well known translation. +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:153 +msgid "Boot from MBR does not work together with btrfs filesystem and GPT disk label without bios_grub partition.To fix this issue, create bios_grub partition or use any ext filesystem for boot partition or do not install stage 1 to MBR." +msgstr "" + #. check if boot device is on raid0 -#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:159 +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:181 msgid "The boot device is on raid type: %1. System will not boot." msgstr "開機裝置在磁碟陣列種類: %1. 系統可能無法開機。" #. bnc#501043 added check for valid configuration -#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:179 -msgid "" -"The boot device is on software RAID1. Select other bootloader location, e.g. " -"Master Boot Record" +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:201 +msgid "The boot device is on software RAID1. Select other bootloader location, e.g. Master Boot Record" msgstr "開機裝置在軟體 RAID1。 選擇其他開機載入器位置，例如，主要開機紀錄" #. s390 do not have bios boot order (bnc#874106) -#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:234 +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:256 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"YaST could not determine the exact boot order of disks needed for the device " -"map. Review and possibly adjust the boot order of disks in \"Boot Loader " -"Installation Details\"" -msgstr "" -"對裝置地圖而言，很難正確判定磁碟的順序。 磁碟的順序可以在 \"開機載入器安裝細" -"節\" 變更" +msgid "YaST could not determine the exact boot order of disks needed for the device map. Review and possibly adjust the boot order of disks in \"Boot Loader Installation Details\"" +msgstr "對裝置地圖而言，很難正確判定磁碟的順序。 磁碟的順序可以在 \"開機載入器安裝細節\" 變更" -#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:251 +#. if partitioning worked before upgrade, it will keep working (bnc#886604) +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:276 msgid "Missing ext partition for booting. Cannot install boot code." msgstr "" #. progress stage, text in dialog (short, infinitiv) -#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:169 +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:170 msgid "Check boot loader" msgstr "檢查開機載入器" #. progress stage, text in dialog (short, infinitiv) -#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:171 +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:172 msgid "Read partitioning" msgstr "讀取分割區" #. progress stage, text in dialog (short, infinitiv) -#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:173 +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:174 msgid "Load boot loader settings" msgstr "載入開機載入器設定" #. progress step, text in dialog (short) -#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:177 +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:178 msgid "Checking boot loader..." msgstr "正在檢查開機載入器..." #. progress step, text in dialog (short) -#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:179 +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:180 msgid "Reading partitioning..." msgstr "正在讀取分割區..." #. progress step, text in dialog (short) -#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:181 +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:182 msgid "Loading boot loader settings..." msgstr "正在載入開機載入器設定..." #. dialog header -#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:185 +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:186 msgid "Initializing Boot Loader Configuration" msgstr "正在啟始化開機載入器組態" #. part of summary, %1 is a part of kernel command line -#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:306 +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:307 msgid "Added Kernel Parameters: %1" msgstr "新增的 Kernel 參數：%1" #. progress stage, text in dialog (short) -#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:366 +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:367 msgid "Create initrd" msgstr "建立 initrd" #. progress stage, text in dialog (short) -#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:368 +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:369 msgid "Save boot loader configuration files" msgstr "儲存開機載入器組態檔案" #. progress stage, text in dialog (short) -#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:370 +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:371 msgid "Install boot loader" msgstr "安裝開機載入器" #. progress step, text in dialog (short) -#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:374 +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:375 msgid "Creating initrd..." msgstr "正在建立 initrd..." #. progress step, text in dialog (short) -#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:376 +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:377 msgid "Saving boot loader configuration files..." msgstr "正在儲存開機載入器組態檔案..." #. progress step, text in dialog (short) -#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:378 +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:379 msgid "Installing boot loader..." msgstr "正在安裝開機載入器..." #. progress line -#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:384 +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:385 msgid "Saving Boot Loader Configuration" msgstr "正在儲存開機載入器組態" @@ -2230,47 +2153,34 @@ #~ msgid "_Vendor Diagnostics" #~ msgstr "廠商診斷(_V)" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "The bootloader is installed on a partition that does not lie entirely " -#~ "below %1 GB. The system might not boot if BIOS support only lba24 (result " -#~ "is error 18 during install grub MBR)." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "開機載入器安裝在非完全位於 %1 GB 的分割區。如果 BIOS 只支援 lba24 此系統將" -#~ "無法開機(結果是在安裝 grub MBR 過程造成 error 18)。" +#~ msgid "The bootloader is installed on a partition that does not lie entirely below %1 GB. The system might not boot if BIOS support only lba24 (result is error 18 during install grub MBR)." +#~ msgstr "開機載入器安裝在非完全位於 %1 GB 的分割區。如果 BIOS 只支援 lba24 此系統將無法開機(結果是在安裝 grub MBR 過程造成 error 18)。" #~ msgid "" #~ "Configure a valid boot loader location before continuing.<br/>\n" -#~ "The device map includes more than 8 devices and the boot device is out of " -#~ "range.\n" -#~ "The range is limited by BIOS to the first 8 devices. Adjust BIOS boot " -#~ "order ( or if it already set, then correct order in bootloader " -#~ "configuration)" +#~ "The device map includes more than 8 devices and the boot device is out of range.\n" +#~ "The range is limited by BIOS to the first 8 devices. Adjust BIOS boot order ( or if it already set, then correct order in bootloader configuration)" #~ msgstr "" #~ "在繼續進行之前，請先設定有效的開機載入器位置。<br/>\n" #~ "裝置地圖包含了 8 個以上的裝置，且開機裝置超出範圍。\n" -#~ "範圍是由 BIOS 所限制必須為前 8 個裝置。調整 BIOS 開機順序(如果已經設定，請" -#~ "調整開機載入器設定的順序)" +#~ "範圍是由 BIOS 所限制必須為前 8 個裝置。調整 BIOS 開機順序(如果已經設定，請調整開機載入器設定的順序)" #~ msgid "The LILO is not supported now." #~ msgstr "現在已不支援 LILO 了。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "The selected boot path will not be activated for your installation. Your " -#~ "system may not be bootable." +#~ msgid "The selected boot path will not be activated for your installation. Your system may not be bootable." #~ msgstr "將不會為您的安裝啟用選取的開機路徑。您的系統可能無法開機。" #~ msgid "" #~ "Configure a valid boot loader location before continuing.<br>\n" -#~ "In case that no selection can be made it may be necessary to create a " -#~ "small primary Apple HFS partition." +#~ "In case that no selection can be made it may be necessary to create a small primary Apple HFS partition." #~ msgstr "" #~ "在繼續之前要先設定可用的開機載入器位置。<br>\n" #~ "如果沒有可用的區段，需要先建立一個小的主要 Apple HFS 分割區。 " #~ msgid "" #~ "Configure a valid boot loader location before continuing.<br>\n" -#~ "In case that no selection can be made it may be necessary to create a " -#~ "PReP Boot partition." +#~ "In case that no selection can be made it may be necessary to create a PReP Boot partition." #~ msgstr "" #~ "在繼續進行之前，請先設定有效的開機載入器位置。<br>\n" #~ "如果沒有可用選項，就必須建立 PReP 開機分割區。" @@ -2281,9 +2191,7 @@ #~ msgid "Convert Settings and Install &GRUB" #~ msgstr "轉換設定並安裝 GRUB(&G)" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "LILO is not supported. The recommended option is select convert LILO to " -#~ "GRUB" +#~ msgid "LILO is not supported. The recommended option is select convert LILO to GRUB" #~ msgstr "LILO 已不支援，推薦的選項是轉換 LILO 為 GRUB" #~ msgid "&ELILO Global Options" @@ -2321,22 +2229,17 @@ #~ "詳細層級。</p>" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>Append string for.global options to pass to kernel command line<br>\n" -#~ "Lets you define additional global parameters to pass to the kernel. These " -#~ "are\n" +#~ "<p><b>Append string for.global options to pass to kernel command line</b><br>\n" +#~ "Lets you define additional global parameters to pass to the kernel. These are\n" #~ "used if no 'append' appears in a given section.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>將連續選項附加至核心指令行</b><br>\n" -#~ "可讓您定義額外的全域參數來傳送到核心。 如果給定的區段中沒有顯示「附" -#~ "加」，\n" +#~ "可讓您定義額外的全域參數來傳送到核心。 如果給定的區段中沒有顯示「附加」，\n" #~ "則使用此選項。</p>\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>Name of the default initrd file</b>, if not empty, defines the " -#~ "initial\n" -#~ "ramdisk to use. Either enter the path and file name directly or choose by " -#~ "using\n" +#~ "<p><b>Name of the default initrd file</b>, if not empty, defines the initial\n" +#~ "ramdisk to use. Either enter the path and file name directly or choose by using\n" #~ "<b>Browse</b></p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>「initrd 檔案的名稱」</b>在不為空白時會定義要使用的\n" @@ -2345,8 +2248,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Name of default image file</b>, if not empty, defines the image\n" -#~ "file to use. Either enter the path and file name directly or choose by " -#~ "using\n" +#~ "file to use. Either enter the path and file name directly or choose by using\n" #~ "<b>Browse</b></p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>預設影像檔案名稱</b>，若不為空白，定義要使用的\n" @@ -2362,8 +2264,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Prevent EDD30 mode</b><br>\n" -#~ "By default, if EDD30 is off, ELILO will try and set the variable to " -#~ "TRUE.\n" +#~ "By default, if EDD30 is off, ELILO will try and set the variable to TRUE.\n" #~ "However, some controllers do not support EDD30 and forcing the variable\n" #~ "may cause problems. Therefore, as of elilo-3.2, there is an option to \n" #~ "avoid forcing the variable.</p>\n" @@ -2451,9 +2352,7 @@ #~ msgid "Boot Image Location" #~ msgstr "開機影像位置" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Delay to wait before auto booting in seconds (used if not in interactive " -#~ "mode)" +#~ msgid "Delay to wait before auto booting in seconds (used if not in interactive mode)" #~ msgstr "延遲時自動開機程序啟動前的等待秒數 (當不是互動模式時使用)" #~ msgid "Force interactive mode" @@ -2519,9 +2418,7 @@ #~ msgid "&Set the User Interface for ELILO (\"simple\" or \"textmenu\")" #~ msgstr "指定 ELILO 的使用者介面 (\"simple\" or \"textmenu\")(&S)" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "&Delay to Wait before Auto Booting in Seconds (Used if not in Interactive " -#~ "Mode)" +#~ msgid "&Delay to Wait before Auto Booting in Seconds (Used if not in Interactive Mode)" #~ msgstr "自動開機程序啟動前的等待延遲秒數 (當不是互動模式時使用)(&D)" #~ msgid "Display the Content of a File by Function &Keys" @@ -2577,22 +2474,17 @@ #~ "此資料夾將被祝福並標示為可開機。</p>" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>Append String for Global Options to Pass to Kernel Command Line<br>\n" -#~ "Lets you define additional global parameters to pass to the kernel. These " -#~ "are\n" +#~ "<p><b>Append String for Global Options to Pass to Kernel Command Line</b><br>\n" +#~ "Lets you define additional global parameters to pass to the kernel. These are\n" #~ "used if no 'append' appears in a given section.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>全域選項附加字串至核心指令行</b><br>\n" -#~ "可讓您定義額外的全域參數來傳送到核心。 如果給定的區段中沒有顯示「附" -#~ "加」，\n" +#~ "可讓您定義額外的全域參數來傳送到核心。 如果給定的區段中沒有顯示「附加」，\n" #~ "則使用此選項。</p>\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>Name of the Default Initrd File</b>, if not empty, defines the " -#~ "initial\n" -#~ "ramdisk to use. Either enter the path and file name directly or choose by " -#~ "using\n" +#~ "<p><b>Name of the Default Initrd File</b>, if not empty, defines the initial\n" +#~ "ramdisk to use. Either enter the path and file name directly or choose by using\n" #~ "<b>Browse</b></p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>預設 initrd 檔案的名稱」</b>若不為空白，定義要使用的\n" @@ -2601,8 +2493,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Name of Default Image File</b>, if not empty, defines the image\n" -#~ "file to use. Either enter the path and file name directly or choose by " -#~ "using\n" +#~ "file to use. Either enter the path and file name directly or choose by using\n" #~ "<b>Browse</b></p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>預設影像檔案名稱</b>若不為空白，定義要使用的\n" @@ -2620,8 +2511,7 @@ #~ "<p><b>Partition for Boot Loader Duplication</b>\n" #~ "specifies other Linux device nodes where the bootinfo should be stored.\n" #~ "If this option is given, the boot partition will be converted to FAT. \n" -#~ "The intend of this option is to write the boot files to all members of a " -#~ "RAID1 or RAID5 system.</p>" +#~ "The intend of this option is to write the boot files to all members of a RAID1 or RAID5 system.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>開機載入器傾印分割區</b>\n" #~ "指定其他 Linux 裝置節點讓開機資訊儲存。\n" @@ -2631,8 +2521,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Change Boot Device in NV-RAM</b>\n" #~ "this option will tell lilo to update the OpenFirmware \"boot-device\" \n" -#~ "variable with the full OpenFirmware path pointing to the device specified " -#~ "in\n" +#~ "variable with the full OpenFirmware path pointing to the device specified in\n" #~ "\"boot=\". If this option is missing, the system may not boot.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>在 NV-RAM 變更開機裝置</b>\n" @@ -2642,22 +2531,18 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Do not Use OS-chooser</b>\n" -#~ " will tell lilo to use yaboot as boot file instead of a Forth script " -#~ "named \"os-chooser\". \n" -#~ "The OpenFirmware driver in the nVidia graphics card as shipped with Apple " -#~ "G5 systems \n" +#~ " will tell lilo to use yaboot as boot file instead of a Forth script named \"os-chooser\". \n" +#~ "The OpenFirmware driver in the nVidia graphics card as shipped with Apple G5 systems \n" #~ "will crash if there is no monitor attached.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>不要使用 OS-選擇器</b>\n" -#~ " 將告訴 lilo 使用 yaboot 為開機檔案以取代較先進的名為 \"os-chooser\" 的程" -#~ "序。 \n" +#~ " 將告訴 lilo 使用 yaboot 為開機檔案以取代較先進的名為 \"os-chooser\" 的程序。 \n" #~ "搭載於 Apple G5 系統的 nVidia 顯示卡的 OpenFirmware 驅動 \n" #~ "如果沒有接上顯示器就會崩潰。</p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Timeout in Seconds for MacOS/Linux</b>\n" -#~ "It contains the timeout between MacOS/Linux in seconds until Linux boots " -#~ "automatically \n" +#~ "It contains the timeout between MacOS/Linux in seconds until Linux boots automatically \n" #~ "if no key is pressed to boot MacOS</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>MacOS/Linux 的逾時秒數</b>\n" @@ -2666,10 +2551,8 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Always Boot from FAT Partition</b>\n" -#~ "Normally the lilo script would automatically select the boot partition " -#~ "format\n" -#~ "to either be a PReP boot partition or a FAT formatted file system for " -#~ "more\n" +#~ "Normally the lilo script would automatically select the boot partition format\n" +#~ "to either be a PReP boot partition or a FAT formatted file system for more\n" #~ "complex setups. This option forces the lilo script to use\n" #~ "the FAT formatted file system</p>" #~ msgstr "" @@ -2682,8 +2565,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Install Boot Loader Even on Errors</b>\n" #~ "Install the bootloader even if it is unsure whether your firmware is\n" -#~ "buggy so that next boot will fail. This results in an unsupported setup." +#~ "buggy so that next boot will fail. This results in an unsupported setup.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>即使遭遇錯誤仍安裝開機啟動器</b>\n" #~ "安裝開機啟動器，即使不確定您的韌體\n" @@ -2950,8 +2832,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "You chose to install the boot loader to the hard disk.\n" -#~ "The menu of the boot loader contains an entry to boot from the hard " -#~ "disk.\n" +#~ "The menu of the boot loader contains an entry to boot from the hard disk.\n" #~ "Replace it with an entry to boot from the floppy?" #~ msgstr "" #~ "您選擇將開機載入器安裝到硬碟。\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ca-management.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ca-management.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ca-management.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: ca-management\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-10-05 20:46+0800\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -99,8 +99,7 @@ msgstr "CA 密碼 (安全性：應該由環境變數提供)" #: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:100 -msgid "" -"P12 password (Security: This should be given by an environment variable)" +msgid "P12 password (Security: This should be given by an environment variable)" msgstr "P12 密碼 (安全性：應該由環境變數提供)" #: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:112 @@ -117,11 +116,9 @@ #: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:172 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"YaST generates a default CA and certificate automatically. This CA and " -"certificate\n" +"YaST generates a default CA and certificate automatically. This CA and certificate\n" "is used for communicating with the Apache server.\n" -"Here, change the settings of this CA and certificate or import a CA and " -"certificate from a file.\n" +"Here, change the settings of this CA and certificate or import a CA and certificate from a file.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -371,9 +368,7 @@ #. #. Proposal function dispatcher for CA Management #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:107 -msgid "" -"Cannot evaluate the name of the local machine. Change the values of Server " -"Name and E-Mail." +msgid "Cannot evaluate the name of the local machine. Change the values of Server Name and E-Mail." msgstr "無法分析本機的名稱。變更「伺服器名稱」與「電子郵件」的值。" #. new handling of force reset because of (#238754) @@ -395,16 +390,14 @@ msgstr "是否刪除舊設定？" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:296 src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:338 -msgid "" -"Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set a CA password to continue." +msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set a CA password to continue." msgstr "無法取回系統 root 密碼。請設定 CA 密碼繼續。" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:325 #, fuzzy msgid "" "The password is too short to use for the certificates. \n" -"Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate " -"creation.\n" +"Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate creation.\n" msgstr "" "此密碼太短，不能當成憑證的密碼使用。\n" " 輸入憑證的有效密碼，或停用建立憑證的功能。\n" @@ -462,10 +455,8 @@ #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:406 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"The root password is too short for use as the password for the " -"certificates.\n" -" Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate " -"creation.\n" +"The root password is too short for use as the password for the certificates.\n" +" Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate creation.\n" msgstr "" "root 密碼太短，不能當成憑證的密碼使用。\n" " 輸入憑證的有效密碼，或停用建立憑證的功能。\n" @@ -479,12 +470,8 @@ msgstr "從檔案匯入 CA 與憑證" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:427 -msgid "" -"<p>Is the default hostname <b>linux</b> really unique? The certificate is " -"only valid if the hostname is correct.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>預設主機名稱 <b>linux</b> 真的是唯一的嗎？ 只有當主機名稱正確時，憑證才有" -"效。</p>" +msgid "<p>Is the default hostname <b>linux</b> really unique? The certificate is only valid if the hostname is correct.</p>" +msgstr "<p>預設主機名稱 <b>linux</b> 真的是唯一的嗎？ 只有當主機名稱正確時，憑證才有效。</p>" #. menu title #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:468 @@ -521,8 +508,7 @@ #: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:103 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"In this frame, select the desired installation method for <b>CAs</b> and " -"<b>certificates</b>\n" +"In this frame, select the desired installation method for <b>CAs</b> and <b>certificates</b>\n" "while completing the installation.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -534,8 +520,7 @@ #: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:112 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"You also have the possibility of creating the default CA and certificate in " -"the installed system \n" +"You also have the possibility of creating the default CA and certificate in the installed system \n" "if you do not want to create or import it now.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -635,8 +620,7 @@ #: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:388 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"YaST generates a <b>default CA and certificate</b> automatically. This CA " -"and certificate\n" +"YaST generates a <b>default CA and certificate</b> automatically. This CA and certificate\n" "is used for communicating with the <b>Apache server</b>.\n" "Here, change these <b>default settings</b>.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -668,56 +652,38 @@ #. help text 1/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:77 -msgid "" -"<p>A Server Certificate is used by services which provide SSL/TLS encrypted " -"network connections.</p>" +msgid "<p>A Server Certificate is used by services which provide SSL/TLS encrypted network connections.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:84 -msgid "" -"<p>The purpose of the <b>Common Server Certificate</b> is, to provide a " -"certificate for several services running on this host. " +msgid "<p>The purpose of the <b>Common Server Certificate</b> is, to provide a certificate for several services running on this host. " msgstr "" #. help text 3/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:92 -msgid "" -"Some YaST modules provide the capability to use this certificate during " -"configuration of such a service.</p>" +msgid "Some YaST modules provide the capability to use this certificate during configuration of such a service.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 4/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:100 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>With the <b>Import/Replace</b> button you can add a new server " -"certificate or replace the current one.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>使用 <b>匯入/取代</b> 按鈕，您可以加入一個新的伺服器憑證或取代現有的。</p>" +msgid "<p>With the <b>Import/Replace</b> button you can add a new server certificate or replace the current one.</p>" +msgstr "<p>使用 <b>匯入/取代</b> 按鈕，您可以加入一個新的伺服器憑證或取代現有的。</p>" #. help text 5/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:108 -msgid "" -"<p>You can remove the Certificates by clicking the <b>Remove</b> button. But " -"make sure, that it is not used anymore by other services.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>您可以用 <b>移除</b>按鈕移除憑證。但請您確定這再也不會被其他服務用到。</p>" +msgid "<p>You can remove the Certificates by clicking the <b>Remove</b> button. But make sure, that it is not used anymore by other services.</p>" +msgstr "<p>您可以用 <b>移除</b>按鈕移除憑證。但請您確定這再也不會被其他服務用到。</p>" #. help text 6/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:116 -msgid "" -"<p>Certificates can be written to a file using <b>Export to File</b> in " -"section <b>Certificate</b> in the <b>CA Management</b> module.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>若要將憑證寫入檔案，可在 <b>CA Management</b> 模組中的「<b>憑證</b>」區" -"段，使用「<b>輸出至檔案</b>」。</p>" +msgid "<p>Certificates can be written to a file using <b>Export to File</b> in section <b>Certificate</b> in the <b>CA Management</b> module.</p>" +msgstr "<p>若要將憑證寫入檔案，可在 <b>CA Management</b> 模組中的「<b>憑證</b>」區段，使用「<b>輸出至檔案</b>」。</p>" #. help text 7/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:124 -msgid "" -"<p>Certificates to import from disk must have been written in <b>PKCS12 " -"format with CA chain</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Certificates to import from disk must have been written in <b>PKCS12 format with CA chain</b>.</p>" msgstr "<P>從磁片匯入的憑證必須以<b>「具有 CA 鏈的 PKCS12 格式」</b>寫入。</P>" #. help text 8/8 @@ -781,12 +747,8 @@ #. help text 2/2 #: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:70 -msgid "" -"<p>Special information about the current CA is provided by <b>Certificates, <b>CRL</b>, and <b>Advanced</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<P>關於目前 CA 的特殊資訊是由<b>「憑證」</b>、<b>CRL</b> 和<b>「進階」</b>所" -"提供。</P>" +msgid "<p>Special information about the current CA is provided by <b>Certificates</b>, <b>CRL</b>, and <b>Advanced</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<P>關於目前 CA 的特殊資訊是由<b>「憑證」</b>、<b>CRL</b> 和<b>「進階」</b>所提供。</P>" #. getDescriptionCA - description of a CA #. @param CA name @@ -913,9 +875,7 @@ #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:51 -msgid "" -"<p>When creating a new subCA or certificate, the system suggests some " -"default values.</p>" +msgid "<p>When creating a new subCA or certificate, the system suggests some default values.</p>" msgstr "<P>建立新 subCA 或憑證時，系統會建議某些預設值。</P>" #. help text 2/4 @@ -927,19 +887,13 @@ #. help text 3/3 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:62 #: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:153 -msgid "" -"<p>However, the modified settings will be used for <b>new</B> entries only." +msgid "<p>However, the modified settings will be used for <b>new</B> entries only.</p>" msgstr "<P>不過，修改的設定值將只用在<b>「新」</B>項目。</P>" #. help text 4/4 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:69 -msgid "" -"<p>You can edit the default settings for <b>subCAs</b>, <b>client " -"certificates</b>, and <b>server certificates</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<P>您可以編輯 <b>subCAs</b>、<b>用戶端憑證</b>和<b>伺服器憑證</b>的預設值。" +msgid "<p>You can edit the default settings for <b>subCAs</b>, <b>client certificates</b>, and <b>server certificates</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<P>您可以編輯 <b>subCAs</b>、<b>用戶端憑證</b>和<b>伺服器憑證</b>的預設值。</P>" #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:79 msgid "Default Settings for:" @@ -959,9 +913,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:136 -msgid "" -"<p>This frame gives an overview of all default settings before they are " -"saved.</p>" +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all default settings before they are saved.</p>" msgstr "<P>在儲存所有預設值之前，這個框架提供這些值的綜覽。</P>" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1075,13 +1027,8 @@ #. help text 1/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:46 -msgid "" -"<p>First, see a list view with all available certificates from this CA. The " -"columns are the DN of the certificates including the e-mail address and the " -"state of the certificate (such as valid or revoked).</p>" -msgstr "" -"<P>首先，從這個 CA 查看所有可用憑證的檢視清單。該欄是憑證的 DN，包括電子郵件" -"地址和憑證的狀態 (如有效或已撤銷)。</P>" +msgid "<p>First, see a list view with all available certificates from this CA. The columns are the DN of the certificates including the e-mail address and the state of the certificate (such as valid or revoked).</p>" +msgstr "<P>首先，從這個 CA 查看所有可用憑證的檢視清單。該欄是憑證的 DN，包括電子郵件地址和憑證的狀態 (如有效或已撤銷)。</P>" #. help text 2/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:52 @@ -1090,18 +1037,13 @@ #. help text 3/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:57 -msgid "" -"<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete " -"certificate.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete certificate.</p>" msgstr "<P><b>「檢視」</b>可開啟以文字表示的完整憑證視窗。</P>" #. help text 4/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:64 -msgid "" -"<p>Furthermore, you can <b>Revoke</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a " -"certificate.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<P>此外，您可以<b>「撤銷」</b>、<b>「刪除」</b>或<b>「輸出」</b>憑證。</P>" +msgid "<p>Furthermore, you can <b>Revoke</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a certificate.</p>" +msgstr "<P>此外，您可以<b>「撤銷」</b>、<b>「刪除」</b>或<b>「輸出」</b>憑證。</P>" #. help text 5/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:71 @@ -1110,9 +1052,7 @@ #. help text 6/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:78 -msgid "" -"<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected " -"certificate.</p>" +msgid "<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected certificate.</p>" msgstr "<P>在下面的區域中，可查看選取憑證最重要的值。</P>" #. popup window header @@ -1442,8 +1382,7 @@ #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:142 -msgid "" -"<p>When creating a new CRL, the system suggests some default values.</p>" +msgid "<p>When creating a new CRL, the system suggests some default values.</p>" msgstr "<p>建立新 CRL 時，系統會建議一些預設值。</p>" #. help text 2/3 @@ -1480,14 +1419,8 @@ #. Translators: long help text - security information #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:111 -msgid "" -"Warning!<br>Activating the automatic creation and export of a CRL will write " -"the CA password to a configuration file on disk. The password will be stored " -"there in plain text as it is needed to create a CRL. The file will only be " -"readable for the root user." -msgstr "" -"警告：<br>啟用自動建立與匯出 CRL 會將 CA 密碼寫入到磁碟中的設定檔。建立 CRL " -"必須將密碼用純文字儲存在該處。此檔案會被設定只有 root 使用者才能讀取。" +msgid "Warning!<br>Activating the automatic creation and export of a CRL will write the CA password to a configuration file on disk. The password will be stored there in plain text as it is needed to create a CRL. The file will only be readable for the root user." +msgstr "警告：<br>啟用自動建立與匯出 CRL 會將 CA 密碼寫入到磁碟中的設定檔。建立 CRL 必須將密碼用純文字儲存在該處。此檔案會被設定只有 root 使用者才能讀取。" #. Editing CRL defaults of a selected CA #. @param selected CA @@ -1503,25 +1436,12 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:384 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>To set up a repeated recreation of the CRL, select <b>Repeated recreation " -"and export</b>. In this case, set the interval for the recreation in " -"<b>Periodic interval</b>. If you set the interval to 24 hours, you can " -"additionally select the hour for the export. Make sure you read and " -"understand the <b>Security Information</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>選擇<b>重複再建立及匯出</b>來設定重複再建立 CRL。此時請在<b>周期間隔</b>設" -"定再建立的時間間隔。如果您設定 24 小時，您可以附帶選擇匯出的時間。請確認您已" -"讀過並了解<b>安全資訊</b>。</p>" +msgid "<p>To set up a repeated recreation of the CRL, select <b>Repeated recreation and export</b>. In this case, set the interval for the recreation in <b>Periodic interval</b>. If you set the interval to 24 hours, you can additionally select the hour for the export. Make sure you read and understand the <b>Security Information</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>選擇<b>重複再建立及匯出</b>來設定重複再建立 CRL。此時請在<b>周期間隔</b>設定再建立的時間間隔。如果您設定 24 小時，您可以附帶選擇匯出的時間。請確認您已讀過並了解<b>安全資訊</b>。</p>" #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:387 -msgid "" -"<p>You can activate an export of the CRL to a local file or to an LDAP " -"server or both. Set up the respective parameters in <b>Export to local file and <b>Export to LDAP</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>您可以啟用匯出 CRL 到本機檔案或 LDAP 伺服器或兩者。請在<b>匯出到本機檔案和<b>匯出到 LDAP</b>中設定個別的參數。</p>" +msgid "<p>You can activate an export of the CRL to a local file or to an LDAP server or both. Set up the respective parameters in <b>Export to local file</b> and <b>Export to LDAP</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>您可以啟用匯出 CRL 到本機檔案或 LDAP 伺服器或兩者。請在<b>匯出到本機檔案</b>和<b>匯出到 LDAP</b>中設定個別的參數。</p>" #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:401 msgid "Export once" @@ -1698,43 +1618,30 @@ #. help text 5/7 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:117 -msgid "" -"<p><b>CA Name</b> is the name of a CA certificate. Use only the characters, " -"\"a-z\", \"A-Z\", \"-\", and \"_\".</p>" -msgstr "" -"<P><b>「CA 名稱」</b>是 CA 憑證的名稱。請使用 \"a-z\", \"A-Z\", \"-\", 和 \"_" -"\"。</P>" +msgid "<p><b>CA Name</b> is the name of a CA certificate. Use only the characters, \"a-z\", \"A-Z\", \"-\", and \"_\".</p>" +msgstr "<P><b>「CA 名稱」</b>是 CA 憑證的名稱。請使用 \"a-z\", \"A-Z\", \"-\", 和 \"_\"。</P>" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:123 msgid "<p><b>Common Name</b> is the name of the CA.</p>" msgstr "<P><b>「公用名稱」</b>是 CA 的名稱。</P>。" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:129 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Common Name</b> is the name of the user for whom to create the " -"certificate.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Common Name</b> is the name of the user for whom to create the certificate.</p>" msgstr "<P><b>「公用名稱」</b>是建立憑證的使用者名稱。</P>" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:136 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Common Name</b> is the fully qualified domain name of the server.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Common Name</b> is the fully qualified domain name of the server.</p>" msgstr "<P><b>「公用名稱」</b>是完全合格的領域名稱。</P>" #. help text 6/7 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:145 -msgid "" -"<p><b>E-Mail Addresses</b> are valid e-mail addresses of the user or server " -"administrator.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<P><b>「電子郵件地址」</b>是有效的使用者或伺服器管理員的電子郵件地址。</P>" +msgid "<p><b>E-Mail Addresses</b> are valid e-mail addresses of the user or server administrator.</p>" +msgstr "<P><b>「電子郵件地址」</b>是有效的使用者或伺服器管理員的電子郵件地址。</P>" #. help text 7/7 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:152 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Organization</b>, <b>Organizational Unit</b>, <b>Locality</b>, and " -"<b>State</b> are often optional.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>組織</b>、<b>組織單位</b>、<b>地區</b>與<b>州</b>通常是選擇性的。</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Organization</b>, <b>Organizational Unit</b>, <b>Locality</b>, and <b>State</b> are often optional.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>組織</b>、<b>組織單位</b>、<b>地區</b>與<b>州</b>通常是選擇性的。</p>" #. To translators: pushbutton label #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:173 @@ -1765,31 +1672,18 @@ #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:469 -msgid "" -"<p>The private key of the CA needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length " -"of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field." -msgstr "" -"<p>CA 的私密金鑰需要<B>密碼</B>，最短長度為五個字元。為了驗證，請在下一個欄位" -"重新輸入。</p>" +msgid "<p>The private key of the CA needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</p>" +msgstr "<p>CA 的私密金鑰需要<B>密碼</B>，最短長度為五個字元。為了驗證，請在下一個欄位重新輸入。</p>" #. help text 2/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:476 -msgid "" -"<p>Each CA has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use " -"certificates need special key lengths.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>每個 CA 都有自己的<b>金鑰長度</b>。某些使用憑證的應用程式，需要特殊的金鑰" -"長度。</p>" +msgid "<p>Each CA has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" +msgstr "<p>每個 CA 都有自己的<b>金鑰長度</b>。某些使用憑證的應用程式，需要特殊的金鑰長度。</p>" #. help text 3/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:484 -msgid "" -"<p>The CA is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). Enter the " -"time frame in days.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>CA 只在特定的期間內有效 (<b>有效期間</b>)。請以天數為單位輸入時間範圍。" +msgid "<p>The CA is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). Enter the time frame in days.</p>" +msgstr "<p>CA 只在特定的期間內有效 (<b>有效期間</b>)。請以天數為單位輸入時間範圍。</p>" #. help text 4/4 #. help text 4/4 @@ -1797,60 +1691,33 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:492 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:521 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:543 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Advanced Options</b> are very special options. If you change these " -"options, SUSE cannot guarantee that the generated certificate will work " -"correctly.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>「進階選項」</b>是非常特別的選項。如果您變更這些選項，SUSE 不保證產生的" -"憑證可以正確運作。</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Advanced Options</b> are very special options. If you change these options, SUSE cannot guarantee that the generated certificate will work correctly.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>「進階選項」</b>是非常特別的選項。如果您變更這些選項，SUSE 不保證產生的憑證可以正確運作。</p>" #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:498 -msgid "" -"<p>The private key of the certificate needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum " -"length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next " -"field.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<P>該憑證私密金鑰的<B>密碼</B>，最小長度為 5 個字元。為了確認的原因，請在下一" -"個欄位重新輸入。</P>" +msgid "<p>The private key of the certificate needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</p>" +msgstr "<P>該憑證私密金鑰的<B>密碼</B>，最小長度為 5 個字元。為了確認的原因，請在下一個欄位重新輸入。</P>" #. help text 2/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:505 -msgid "" -"<p>Each certificate has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that " -"use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<P>每個憑證都有自己的<b>「金鑰長度」</b>。某些使用憑證的應用程式，需要特殊的" -"金鑰長度。</P>" +msgid "<p>Each certificate has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" +msgstr "<P>每個憑證都有自己的<b>「金鑰長度」</b>。某些使用憑證的應用程式，需要特殊的金鑰長度。</P>" #. help text 3/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:513 -msgid "" -"<p>The certificate is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). " -"Enter the time frame in days.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<P>憑證僅於特定期間 (<b>「有效期間」</b>) 是有效的。以日為單位，輸入時間框" -"架。</P>" +msgid "<p>The certificate is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). Enter the time frame in days.</p>" +msgstr "<P>憑證僅於特定期間 (<b>「有效期間」</b>) 是有效的。以日為單位，輸入時間框架。</P>" #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:528 -msgid "" -"<p>The private key of the request needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum " -"length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next " -"field.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>要求的私密金鑰需要<B>密碼</B>，最短長度為五個字元。為了確認的原因，請在下" -"一個欄位重新輸入。</p>" +msgid "<p>The private key of the request needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</p>" +msgstr "<p>要求的私密金鑰需要<B>密碼</B>，最短長度為五個字元。為了確認的原因，請在下一個欄位重新輸入。</p>" #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:535 -msgid "" -"<p>Each request has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use " -"certificates need special key lengths.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>每個要求都有自己的<b>金鑰長度</b>。某些使用憑證的應用程式，需要特殊的金鑰" -"長度。</p>" +msgid "<p>Each request has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" +msgstr "<p>每個要求都有自己的<b>金鑰長度</b>。某些使用憑證的應用程式，需要特殊的金鑰長度。</p>" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:561 msgid "&Use CA Password as Certificate Password" @@ -1884,9 +1751,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:700 -msgid "" -"<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the CA that will be " -"created.</p>" +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the CA that will be created.</p>" msgstr "<p>此框架提供將要建立之 CA 的所有設定概觀。</p>" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1896,9 +1761,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:710 -msgid "" -"<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the certificate that " -"will be created.</p>" +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the certificate that will be created.</p>" msgstr "<P>這個框架提供將要建立憑證的所有設定值綜覽。</P>" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1908,9 +1771,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:721 -msgid "" -"<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be " -"created.</p>" +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be created.</p>" msgstr "<p>此框架提供將要建立之要求的所有設定概觀。</p>" #. help text 2/2 @@ -2024,15 +1885,8 @@ #. Creating a new CA/Certificate #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:55 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<P>This frame shows further attributes and OpenSSL X509v3 extensions that " -"can be set. If you are not familiar with these extensions, refer to the " -"file /usr/share/doc/packages/openssl-doc/openssl.txt (package openssl-doc)." -msgstr "" -"<P>這個框架顯示其他可以設定的屬性和 OpenSSL X509v3 延伸。如果您不熟悉這些延" -"伸，請參閱檔案 /usr/share/doc/packages/openssl-doc/openssl.txt (套件 openssl-" -"doc)。</P>" +msgid "<P>This frame shows further attributes and OpenSSL X509v3 extensions that can be set. If you are not familiar with these extensions, refer to the file /usr/share/doc/packages/openssl-doc/openssl.txt (package openssl-doc).</P>" +msgstr "<P>這個框架顯示其他可以設定的屬性和 OpenSSL X509v3 延伸。如果您不熟悉這些延伸，請參閱檔案 /usr/share/doc/packages/openssl-doc/openssl.txt (套件 openssl-doc)。</P>" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:61 msgid "<P>Wrong entries can make the certificate unusable.</P>" @@ -2097,12 +1951,8 @@ #. help text 1/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:47 -msgid "" -"<p>First, see a list view with all available requests of this CA. The " -"columns are the DN of the request including the e-mail address.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>首先會看到清單檢視，內有本 CA 的所有可用要求。裡面的欄是要求的 DN，包括電" -"子郵件地址。</p>" +msgid "<p>First, see a list view with all available requests of this CA. The columns are the DN of the request including the e-mail address.</p>" +msgstr "<p>首先會看到清單檢視，內有本 CA 的所有可用要求。裡面的欄是要求的 DN，包括電子郵件地址。</p>" #. help text 2/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:53 @@ -2111,29 +1961,22 @@ #. help text 3/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:58 -msgid "" -"<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete " -"request.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete request.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>檢視</b>會開啟一個視窗，以文字顯示完整的要求。</p>" #. help text 4/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:65 -msgid "" -"<p>You can also <b>Sign</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a request.</p>" +msgid "<p>You can also <b>Sign</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a request.</p>" msgstr "<p>您亦可<b>簽名</b>、<b>刪除</b>、或<b>輸出</b>要求。</p>" #. help text 5/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:72 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Import</b>, read a new request. With <b>Add</b>, generate a new " -"request.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>Import</b>, read a new request. With <b>Add</b>, generate a new request.</p>" msgstr "<p>請用<b>匯入</b>功能讀取新要求。請用<b>新增</b>功能產生新要求。</p>" #. help text 6/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:79 -msgid "" -"<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected request." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected request.</p>" msgstr "<p>您可在下列區域看到選定要求最重要的值。</p>" #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:326 @@ -2226,14 +2069,12 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:708 -msgid "" -"<p>The request has special request extensions, which you can accept.</p>" +msgid "<p>The request has special request extensions, which you can accept.</p>" msgstr "<p>此要求有您可以接受的特殊要求延伸。</p>" #. help text 3/3 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:715 -msgid "" -"<p>If you reject these extensions, the default values are taken instead.</p>" +msgid "<p>If you reject these extensions, the default values are taken instead.</p>" msgstr "<p>若您拒絕這些延伸，就會採用預設值。</p>" #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:731 @@ -2246,9 +2087,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:777 -msgid "" -"<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be " -"signed.</p>" +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be signed.</p>" msgstr "<p>此框架提供將要簽名之要求的所有設定概觀。</p>" #. help text 2/2 @@ -2302,15 +2141,13 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:149 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Create Root CA</b> generates a new root certificate authority.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Create Root CA</b> generates a new root certificate authority.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>建立根 CA</b> 會產生新的根證書權限。</p>" #. help text 3/3 #: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:156 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>For more information about CA Management, please read the manual.</p>" +msgid "<p>For more information about CA Management, please read the manual.</p>" msgstr "<p>有關 CA 管理的詳細資訊，請閱讀手冊。</p>" #. To translators: pushbutton label @@ -2525,8 +2362,7 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1216 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Importing Common Server Certificate (PKCS12 + CA Chain Format)\n" -" from Disk:</big></b> Select one file name and press <b>Next</b> to continue." -"</p>\n" +" from Disk:</big></b> Select one file name and press <b>Next</b> to continue.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<P><b><big>正在匯入公用伺服器憑證 (PKCS12 + CA 鏈格式)\n" "從硬碟：</big></b>選取一個檔案名稱，並按<b>「下一步」</b>以繼續。</P>\n" @@ -2534,12 +2370,8 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1222 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Import a server certificate and corresponding CA and copy them to a place " -"where other YaST modules look for such a common certificate." -msgstr "" -"匯入伺服器憑證和對應的 CA，並將他們複製到其他 YaST 模組尋找這種公用憑證的位" -"置。" +msgid "Import a server certificate and corresponding CA and copy them to a place where other YaST modules look for such a common certificate." +msgstr "匯入伺服器憑證和對應的 CA，並將他們複製到其他 YaST 模組尋找這種公用憑證的位置。" #. help text 3/3 #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1230 @@ -2582,8 +2414,7 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1369 msgid "" "The hostname of this server (command: hostname --long) have to match \n" -"either the common name of the certificate (CN) or on of the values in " -"subject alternative names." +"either the common name of the certificate (CN) or on of the values in subject alternative names." msgstr "" #. popup window header @@ -2652,8 +2483,7 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1658 msgid "" "Key Password is required. \n" -"It must be the password for the encrypted key or a new one in case of a not " -"encrypted key." +"It must be the password for the encrypted key or a new one in case of a not encrypted key." msgstr "" "需要金鑰密碼。\n" "它必須是加密金鑰的密碼，如果是非加密金鑰，輸入新的密碼。" @@ -3260,9 +3090,7 @@ #~ msgid "Currently not supported." #~ msgstr "目前不支援。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>The <b>Common Server Certificate</b> will be used by other YaST " -#~ "modules.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>The <b>Common Server Certificate</b> will be used by other YaST modules.</p>" #~ msgstr "<P><b>「公用伺服器憑證」</b>將由其他 YaST 模組使用。</P>" #~ msgid "Invalid value'%s' for parameter '%s'." Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/cio.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/cio.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/cio.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" "Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" "Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" @@ -36,19 +36,19 @@ #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:132 msgid "Device" -msgstr "" +msgstr "裝置" #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:132 msgid "Used" -msgstr "" +msgstr "已使用" #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:142 msgid "no" -msgstr "" +msgstr "否" #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:142 msgid "yes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "是" #. filter can be empty if dialog is not yet created #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:160 @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:162 msgid "&Select All" -msgstr "" +msgstr "全選(&S)" #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:163 msgid "&Clear selection" @@ -87,8 +87,7 @@ #: src/lib/iochannel/unban_dialog.rb:106 msgid "" "List of ranges of channels to unban separated by comma.\n" -"Range can be channel, part of channel which will be filled to zero or range sp" -"ecified with dash.\n" +"Range can be channel, part of channel which will be filled to zero or range specified with dash.\n" "Example value: 0.0.0001, AA00, 0.1.0100-200" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/cluster.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/cluster.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/cluster.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2001-06-05 18:04+02:00\n" "Last-Translator: 裴寒牧 \n" "Language-Team: 中華 \n" @@ -144,8 +144,10 @@ msgstr "叢集" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:481 -msgid "expected votes:" -msgstr "" +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Expected MD5: %1" +msgid "Expected Votes:" +msgstr "預期的 MD5：%1" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:485 msgid "rrp mode:" @@ -171,15 +173,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:737 -msgid "" -"For newly created cluster, push the button below to generate /etc/corosync/" -"authkey." +msgid "For a newly created cluster, push the button below to generate /etc/corosync/authkey." msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:742 -msgid "" -"To join an existing cluster, please copy /etc/corosync/authkey from other " -"nodes manually." +msgid "To join an existing cluster, please copy /etc/corosync/authkey from other nodes manually." msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:847 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:917 @@ -320,8 +318,7 @@ #. SaveCsync2(); #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1380 msgid "" -"Conntrackd is a daemon which helps to duplicate firewall status between " -"cluster nodes.\n" +"Conntrackd is a daemon which helps to duplicate firewall status between cluster nodes.\n" "YaST can help to configure some basic aspects of conntrackd.\n" "You need to start it with the ocf:heartbeat:conntrackd." msgstr "" @@ -345,113 +342,52 @@ #. All helps are here #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:35 msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Bind Network Address</big></b><br>This specifies the address " -"which the openais executive should bind. This address should always end in " -"zero. If the totem traffic should be routed over 192.168.5.92, set " -"bindnetaddr to 192.168.5.0.<br>This may also be an IPV6 address, in which " -"case IPV6 networking will be used. In this case, the full address must be " -"specified and there is no automatic selection of the network interface " -"within a specific subnet as with IPv4. If IPv6 networking is used, the " -"nodeid field must be specified.<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>This is the multicast address used " -"by openais executive. The default should work for most networks, but " -"the network administrator should be queried about a multicast address " -"to use. Avoid 224.x.x.x because this is a \"config\" multicast address." -"<br>This may also be an IPV6 multicast address, in which case IPV6 " -"networking will be used. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must " -"be specified.</p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Port</big></b><br>This specifies the UDP port number. It is " -"possible to use the same multicast address on a network with the openais " -"services configured for different UDP ports.<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Member Address</big></b><br>This list specifies all the nodes in " -"the cluster by IP address. This could be configurable when using udpu <br>\n" -"<p><b><big>Node ID</big></b><br>This configuration option is optional " -"when using IPv4 and required when using IPv6. This is a 32 bit value " -"specifying the node identifier delivered to the cluster membership service. " -"If this is not specified with IPv4, the node id will be determined from " -"the 32 bit IP address the system to which the system is bound with ring " -"identifier of 0. The node identifier value of zero is reserved and should " -"not be used.<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>rrp_mode</big></b><br>This specifies the mode of redundant ring, " -"which may be none, active, or passive. Active replication offers " -"slightly lower latency from transmit to delivery in faulty network " -"environments but with less performance. Passive replication may nearly " -"double the speed of the totem protocol if the protocol doesn't become " -"cpu bound. The final option is none, in which case only one network " -"interface will be used to operate the totem protocol. If only one " -"interface directive is specified, none is automatically chosen. If multiple " -"interface directives are specified, only active or passive may be chosen." -"<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Bind Network Address</big></b><br>This specifies the address which the openais executive should bind. This address should always end in zero. If the totem traffic should be routed over 192.168.5.92, set bindnetaddr to 192.168.5.0.<br>This may also be an IPV6 address, in which case IPV6 networking will be used. In this case, the full address must be specified and there is no automatic selection of the network interface within a specific subnet as with IPv4. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>This is the multicast address used by openais executive. The default should work for most networks, but the network administrator should be queried about a multicast address to use. Avoid 224.x.x.x because this is a \"config\" multicast address.<br>This may also be an IPV6 multicast address, in which case IPV6 networking will be used. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified.</p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Port</big></b><br>This specifies the UDP port number. It is possible to use the same multicast address on a network with the openais services configured for different UDP ports.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Member Address</big></b><br>This list specifies all the nodes in the cluster by IP address. This could be configurable when using udpu <br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Node ID</big></b><br>This configuration option is optional when using IPv4 and required when using IPv6. This is a 32 bit value specifying the node identifier delivered to the cluster membership service. If this is not specified with IPv4, the node id will be determined from the 32 bit IP address the system to which the system is bound with ring identifier of 0. The node identifier value of zero is reserved and should not be used.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>rrp_mode</big></b><br>This specifies the mode of redundant ring, which may be none, active, or passive. Active replication offers slightly lower latency from transmit to delivery in faulty network environments but with less performance. Passive replication may nearly double the speed of the totem protocol if the protocol doesn't become cpu bound. The final option is none, in which case only one network interface will be used to operate the totem protocol. If only one interface directive is specified, none is automatically chosen. If multiple interface directives are specified, only active or passive may be chosen.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Expected votes</big></b><br>Expect vote number for voting quorum. Will be automatically calculated when the nodelist {} section is present in corosync.conf or can be specified in the quorum {} section.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Auto Generate Node ID</big></b><br>Nodeid is required when using IPv6. Auto node ID enabled will generate nodeid automatically.<br></p>\n" msgstr "" -#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:43 +#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:45 msgid "" "\n" -"<p><b><big>Threads</big></b><br>This directive controls how many threads are " -"used to encrypt and send multicast messages. If secauth is off, the " -"protocol will never use threaded sending. If secauth is on, this " -"directive allows systems to be configured to use multiple threads to " -"encrypt and send multicast messages. A thread directive of 0 indicates " -"that no threaded send should be used. This mode offers best performance for " -"non-SMP systems. The default is 0. <br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Enable Security Auth</big></b><br>This specifies that HMAC/SHA1 " -"authentication should be used to authenticate all messages. It further " -"specifies that all data should be encrypted with the sober128 " -"encryption algorithm to protect data from eavesdropping. Enabling this " -"option adds a 36 byte header to every message sent by totem which reduces " -"total throughput. Encryption and authentication consume 75% of CPU cycles " -"in aisexec as measured with gprof when enabled. For 100mbit networks " -"with 1500 MTU frame transmissions: A throughput of 9mb/sec is possible " -"with 100% cpu utilization when this option is enabled on 3ghz cpus. A " -"throughput of 10mb/sec is possible wth 20% cpu utilization when this option " -"is disabled on 3ghz cpus. For gig-e networks with large frame " -"transmissions: A throughput of 20mb/sec is possible when this option is " -"enabled on 3ghz cpus. A throughput of 60mb/sec is possible when this " -"option is disabled on 3ghz cpus. The default is on. <br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Threads</big></b><br>This directive controls how many threads are used to encrypt and send multicast messages. If secauth is off, the protocol will never use threaded sending. If secauth is on, this directive allows systems to be configured to use multiple threads to encrypt and send multicast messages. A thread directive of 0 indicates that no threaded send should be used. This mode offers best performance for non-SMP systems. The default is 0. <br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Enable Security Auth</big></b><br>This specifies that HMAC/SHA1 authentication should be used to authenticate all messages. It further specifies that all data should be encrypted with the sober128 encryption algorithm to protect data from eavesdropping. Enabling this option adds a 36 byte header to every message sent by totem which reduces total throughput. Encryption and authentication consume 75% of CPU cycles in aisexec as measured with gprof when enabled. For 100mbit networks with 1500 MTU frame transmissions: A throughput of 9mb/sec is possible with 100% cpu utilization when this option is enabled on 3ghz cpus. A throughput of 10mb/sec is possible wth 20% cpu utilization when this option is disabled on 3ghz cpus. For gig-e networks with large frame transmissions: A throughput of 20mb/sec is possible when this option is enabled on 3ghz cpus. A throughput of 60mb/sec is possible when this option is disabled on 3ghz cpus. The default i s on. <br></p>\n" msgstr "" -#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:48 +#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:50 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t\t<p><b><big>Booting</big></b><br>Starting openais service during boot " -"or not</p>\n" +"\t\t\t<p><b><big>Booting</big></b><br>Starting corosync service during boot or not</p>\n" +"\t\t\t<p><b><big>Firewall Settings</big></b><br>Enable the port when Firewall is enabled</p>\n" "\t\t\t" msgstr "" -#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:53 +#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:56 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync Host</big></b><br>The hostnames used here must be the " -"local hostnames of the cluster nodes. That means you must use exactly the " -"same string as printed out by the hostname command.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync File</big></b><br>The full absolute filename to be " -"synced.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Pre-Shared-Keys</big></b><br>Authentication is performed " -"using the IP addresses and pre-shared-keys in Csync2. The key file is " -"generated with csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup. The file key_hagroup " -"should be copied to all members of the cluster manually after it's created.\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync Host</big></b><br>The hostnames used here must be the local hostnames of the cluster nodes. That means you must use exactly the same string as printed out by the hostname command.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync File</big></b><br>The full absolute filename to be synced.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Pre-Shared-Keys</big></b><br>Authentication is performed using the IP addresses and pre-shared-keys in Csync2. The key file is generated with csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup. The file key_hagroup should be copied to all members of the cluster manually after it's created.</p>\n" "\t" msgstr "" -#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:60 +#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:63 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Dedicated Interface</big></b><br>A dedicated network " -"interface for syncing. The interface must support multicast, and is UP for " -"using. You may have to have it pre-configured. </p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>IP</big></b><br>The IPv4 address assigned to the dedicated " -"network interface. This is detected automatically.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>The multicast address to be " -"used for syncing.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Group Number</big></b><br>A numeric ID indicate the group for " -"syncing.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Dedicated Interface</big></b><br>A dedicated network interface for syncing. The interface must support multicast, and is UP for using. You may have to have it pre-configured. </p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>IP</big></b><br>The IPv4 address assigned to the dedicated network interface. This is detected automatically.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>The multicast address to be used for syncing.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Group Number</big></b><br>A numeric ID indicate the group for syncing.</p>\n" "\t" msgstr "" #. Read dialog help 1/2 -#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:69 +#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:72 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b><big>Initializing cluster Configuration</big></b><br>\n" @@ -461,7 +397,7 @@ "請稍候...</p>" #. Read dialog help 2/2 -#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:73 +#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:76 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" @@ -470,7 +406,7 @@ "按下<b>「中止」</b>，以安全地中止組態公用程式。</p>\n" #. Write dialog help 1/2 -#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:77 +#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:80 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b><big>Saving cluster Configuration</big></b><br>\n" @@ -480,7 +416,7 @@ "</p>\n" #. Write dialog help 2/2 -#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:81 +#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:84 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" "Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" @@ -574,7 +510,7 @@ msgstr "無法偵測裝置。" #. Cluster read dialog caption -#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:501 +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:502 #, fuzzy msgid "Saving cluster Configuration" msgstr "正在儲存組態" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/control-center.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/control-center.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/control-center.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 08:16+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-07-01 01:17+0800\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/control.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/control.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/control.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: control\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-17 08:53+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -449,13 +449,10 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "openSUSE offers you a choice of user interfaces. The two major complete \n" -#~ "desktops are KDE and GNOME. Both provide an easy-to-use desktop with a " -#~ "full \n" -#~ "suite of applications including email, a file manager, games and " -#~ "utilities. \n" +#~ "desktops are KDE and GNOME. Both provide an easy-to-use desktop with a full \n" +#~ "suite of applications including email, a file manager, games and utilities. \n" #~ " \n" -#~ "As desktop selection is a matter of taste, we do not give a " -#~ "recommendation." +#~ "As desktop selection is a matter of taste, we do not give a recommendation." #~ msgstr "" #~ "openSUSE 提供您使用者介面的選擇。主要的兩個完整桌面是\n" #~ "KDE 和 GNOME。 兩者都提供了非常簡易使用的桌面，並伴隨\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/country.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/country.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/country.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: country\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-01-16 11:27+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -53,8 +53,7 @@ #. error message (%1 is given layout); do not translate 'list' #: keyboard/src/clients/keyboard.rb:179 -msgid "" -"Keyboard layout '%1' is invalid. Use a 'list' command to see possible values." +msgid "Keyboard layout '%1' is invalid. Use a 'list' command to see possible values." msgstr "鍵盤配置 '%1' 無效。使用 'list' 指令查看可能值。" #. summary item @@ -89,12 +88,8 @@ #. help text for keyboard expert screen cont. #: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:60 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>Settings made here apply only to the console keyboard. Configure the " -"keyboard for the graphical user interface with another tool.</p>\n" -msgstr "" -"<p>這裡所完成的設定，只會套用到主控台鍵盤。請使用例如 SaX 的其他工具，設定圖" -"形化使用者介面的鍵盤。</p>\n" +msgid "<p>Settings made here apply only to the console keyboard. Configure the keyboard for the graphical user interface with another tool.</p>\n" +msgstr "<p>這裡所完成的設定，只會套用到主控台鍵盤。請使用例如 SaX 的其他工具，設定圖形化使用者介面的鍵盤。</p>\n" #. heading text #: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:78 @@ -175,8 +170,7 @@ "Choose the <b>Keyboard Layout</b> to use for\n" "installation and in the installed system. \n" "Test the layout in <b>Test</b>.\n" -"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select <b>Expert " -"Settings</b>.\n" +"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select <b>Expert Settings</b>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -202,10 +196,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "Choose the <b>Keyboard Layout</b> to use in the system.\n" -"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select <b>Expert " -"Settings</b>.</p>\n" -"<p>Find more options as well as more layouts in the keyboard layout tool of " -"your desktop environment.</p>\n" +"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select <b>Expert Settings</b>.</p>\n" +"<p>Find more options as well as more layouts in the keyboard layout tool of your desktop environment.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "選擇使用在此系統的<b>鍵盤配置</b>。\n" @@ -343,8 +335,7 @@ #. error message (%1 is given layout); do not translate 'list' #: language/src/clients/language.rb:303 -msgid "" -"%1 is not a valid language. Use the list command to see possible values." +msgid "%1 is not a valid language. Use the list command to see possible values." msgstr "%1 不是有效的語言。請使用 list 指令查看可能值。" #. label text @@ -391,8 +382,7 @@ #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:231 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Additional packages with support for the selected primary and secondary " -"languages will be installed. Packages no longer needed will be removed.\n" +"Additional packages with support for the selected primary and secondary languages will be installed. Packages no longer needed will be removed.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -476,17 +466,13 @@ #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:300 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Check <b>Adapt Keyboard Layout</b> to change the keyboard layout to the " -"primary language.\n" -"Check <b>Adapt Time Zone</b> to change the current time zone according to " -"the primary language. If the keyboard layout or time zone is already adapted " -"to the default language setting, the respective option is disabled.\n" +"Check <b>Adapt Keyboard Layout</b> to change the keyboard layout to the primary language.\n" +"Check <b>Adapt Time Zone</b> to change the current time zone according to the primary language. If the keyboard layout or time zone is already adapted to the default language setting, the respective option is disabled.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "核取<b>「調整鍵盤配置」</b>，將鍵盤配置調整成主要語言。\n" -"核取<b>「調整時區」</b>，根據主要語言來變更目前時區。如果鍵盤配置或時區已經調" -"整成預設語言設定，則對應的選項將停用。\n" +"核取<b>「調整時區」</b>，根據主要語言來變更目前時區。如果鍵盤配置或時區已經調整成預設語言設定，則對應的選項將停用。\n" "</p>\n" #. help text when "multiple languages" are suported 2/2 @@ -545,8 +531,7 @@ #. help text for langauge expert screen #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:592 msgid "" -"<p><b>ctype Only</b>: root has the same LC_CTYPE as a normal user. Other " -"values\n" +"<p><b>ctype Only</b>: root has the same LC_CTYPE as a normal user. Other values\n" "are unset.<br>\n" "<b>Yes</b>: root has the same locale settings as normal user.<br>\n" "<b>No</b>: root has all locale variables unset.\n" @@ -560,13 +545,8 @@ #. help text for langauge expert screen #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:601 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Detailed Locale Setting</b> to set a locale for the primary " -"language that is not offered in the list in the main dialog. Translation may " -"not be available for the selected locale.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>使用<b>「詳細的地區設定」</b>，為主對話方塊清單中沒有提供的主要語言，設定" -"地區設定。選取的地區設定可能沒有可用的翻譯。</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Detailed Locale Setting</b> to set a locale for the primary language that is not offered in the list in the main dialog. Translation may not be available for the selected locale.</p>" +msgstr "<p>使用<b>「詳細的地區設定」</b>，為主對話方塊清單中沒有提供的主要語言，設定地區設定。選取的地區設定可能沒有可用的翻譯。</p>" #. heading text #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:634 @@ -634,8 +614,7 @@ #: language/src/modules/Language.rb:1287 msgid "" "Only minimal support for the selected language is included on this media.\n" -"Add the Language add-on CD as an additional repository in order to get the " -"appropriate support\n" +"Add the Language add-on CD as an additional repository in order to get the appropriate support\n" "for this language.\n" msgstr "" "此媒體中只包含所選取語言的最小支援。\n" @@ -734,15 +713,12 @@ #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:105 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Specify whether your machine is set to local time or UTC in <b>Hardware " -"Clock Set To</b>.\n" -"Most PCs that also have other operating systems installed (such as " -"Microsoft\n" +"Specify whether your machine is set to local time or UTC in <b>Hardware Clock Set To</b>.\n" +"Most PCs that also have other operating systems installed (such as Microsoft\n" "Windows) use local time.\n" "Machines that have only Linux installed are usually\n" "set to Universal Time Coordinated (UTC).\n" -"If the hardware clock is set to UTC, your system can switch from standard " -"time\n" +"If the hardware clock is set to UTC, your system can switch from standard time\n" "to daylight saving time and back automatically.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -777,14 +753,11 @@ #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:131 msgid "" "\n" -"You selected local time, but only Linux seems to be installed on your " -"system.\n" +"You selected local time, but only Linux seems to be installed on your system.\n" "In such case, it is strongly recommended to use UTC, and to click Cancel.\n" "\n" -"If you want to keep local time, you must adjust the CMOS clock twice the " -"year\n" -"because of Day Light Saving switches. If you miss to adjust the clock, " -"backups may fail,\n" +"If you want to keep local time, you must adjust the CMOS clock twice the year\n" +"because of Day Light Saving switches. If you miss to adjust the clock, backups may fail,\n" "your mail system may drop mail messages, etc.\n" "\n" "If you use UTC, Linux will adjust the time automatically.\n" @@ -805,12 +778,8 @@ #. help text for set time dialog #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:187 -msgid "" -"<p>The current system time and date are displayed. If required, change them " -"to the correct values manually or use Network Time Protocol (NTP).</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>目前的系統時間和日期會顯示出來。如果有需要，請自行將它們變更為正確的值，或" -"使用網路時間協定 (NTP)。</p>" +msgid "<p>The current system time and date are displayed. If required, change them to the correct values manually or use Network Time Protocol (NTP).</p>" +msgstr "<p>目前的系統時間和日期會顯示出來。如果有需要，請自行將它們變更為正確的值，或使用網路時間協定 (NTP)。</p>" #. help text, cont. #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:191 @@ -937,8 +906,7 @@ #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:814 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"To select the time zone to use in your system, first select the <b>Region.\n" +"To select the time zone to use in your system, first select the <b>Region</b>.\n" "In <b>Time Zone</b>, then select the appropriate time zone, country, or \n" "region from those available.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -1234,13 +1202,11 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "For <b>Devices for Lock</b>, enter a space-separated list of devices to " -#~ "which to apply the Scroll Lock, Num Lock, and Caps Lock settings.\n" +#~ "For <b>Devices for Lock</b>, enter a space-separated list of devices to which to apply the Scroll Lock, Num Lock, and Caps Lock settings.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "針對<b>「要鎖定的設備」</b>，請輸入以空格區隔的設備清單，並在其中套用 " -#~ "Scroll Lock、Num Lock 和 Caps Lock 等設定。\n" +#~ "針對<b>「要鎖定的設備」</b>，請輸入以空格區隔的設備清單，並在其中套用 Scroll Lock、Num Lock 和 Caps Lock 等設定。\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgid "Ca&ps Lock On" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/crowbar.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/crowbar.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/crowbar.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2001-06-05 18:04+02:00\n" "Last-Translator: 裴寒牧 \n" "Language-Team: 中華 \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/dhcp-server.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/dhcp-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/dhcp-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: dhcp-server\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:38+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-08-18 12:43+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-18 13:19+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -519,7 +519,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: table header item #. Table header item - IP of the host #: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:455 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1651 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1650 msgid "IP" msgstr "IP" @@ -540,17 +540,21 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: popup error, DHCP Server needs to run on one or more interfaces, #. currently no one is selected -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:609 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:608 msgid "At least one network interface must be selected." msgstr "至少必須選取一個網路介面。" #. TRANSLATORS: popup error, DHCP Server requires selected interface to have #. at least minimal configuration -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:617 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:616 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "" +#| "The selected network interface is not configured (no assigned IP address \n" +#| "and netmask). Using it in the DHCP server configuration may not work.\n" +#| "Really use this interface?\n" msgid "" -"The selected network interface is not configured (no assigned IP address \n" -"and netmask). Using it in the DHCP server configuration may not work.\n" -"Really use this interface?\n" +"One or more selected network interfaces is not configured (no assigned IP address \n" +"and netmask)." msgstr "" "選取的網路介面目前沒有組態 (未指定 IP 位址和\n" "網路遮罩)。 在 DHCP 伺服器組態中使用該介面可能無法正常運作。\n" @@ -558,60 +562,60 @@ #. configuration will be saved in ldap? #. check box -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:633 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:632 #: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1079 msgid "&LDAP Support" msgstr "LDAP 支援(&L)" #. FATE #227, comments #5 and #17 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:640 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:639 msgid "DHCP Server &Name (optional)" msgstr "DHCP 伺服器名稱 (選擇性)(&N)" #. Textentry with name of the domain -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:653 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:652 msgid "&Domain Name" msgstr "領域名稱(&D)" #. Textentry with IP address of primary name server -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:655 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:654 msgid "&Primary Name Server IP" msgstr "主要名稱伺服器 IP(&P)" #. Textentry with IP address of secondary name server -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:658 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:657 msgid "&Secondary Name Server IP" msgstr "次要名稱伺服器 IP(&S)" #. Textentry with IP address of default router -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:661 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:660 msgid "Default &Gateway (Router) " msgstr "預設閘道 (路由器)(&G) " #. Textentry with IP address of time server -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:666 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:665 msgid "NTP &Time Server" msgstr "NTP 時間伺服器(&T)" #. Textentry with IP address of print server -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:668 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:667 msgid "&Print Server" msgstr "列印伺服器(&P)" #. Textentry with IP address of WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service) server -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:670 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:669 msgid "&WINS Server" msgstr "WINS 伺服器(&W)" #. Textentry with default lease time of IP address from dhcp server -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:675 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:674 msgid "Default &Lease Time" msgstr "預設租用時間(&L)" #. Units for defaultleasetime #. Combobox - type of units for lease time -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:684 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1140 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:683 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1139 msgid "&Units" msgstr "單位(&U)" @@ -619,48 +623,48 @@ #. error popup #. error popup #. error popup -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1018 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1030 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1042 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1054 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1017 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1029 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1041 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1053 msgid "The specified value is not a valid hostname or IP address." msgstr "指定值不是有效的主機或是 IP 位址。" #. frame -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1068 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1067 msgid "Subnet Information" msgstr "子網路資訊" #. TRANSLATORS: informative text entry (filled up, disabled) -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1074 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1073 msgid "Current &Network" msgstr "目前網路(&N)" #. TRANSLATORS: informative text entry (filled up, disabled) -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1079 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1078 msgid "Current Net&mask" msgstr "目前網路遮罩(&M)" #. TRANSLATORS: informative text entry (filled up, disabled) -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1084 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1083 msgid "Netmask Bi&ts" msgstr "網路遮罩位元(&T)" #. text entry #. TRANSLATORS: text entry -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1091 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1090 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:81 msgid "Min&imum IP Address" msgstr "最小 IP 位址(&I)" #. text entry #. TRANSLATORS: text entry -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1096 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1095 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:83 msgid "Ma&ximum IP Address" msgstr "最大 IP 位址(&X)" -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1104 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1103 msgid "IP Address Range" msgstr "IP 位址範圍" @@ -668,7 +672,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: text entry #. TRANSLATORS: text entry #. TRANSLATORS: text entry -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1110 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1109 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:93 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:356 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:917 @@ -679,7 +683,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: text entry #. TRANSLATORS: text entry #. TRANSLATORS: text entry -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1115 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1114 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:95 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:358 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:919 @@ -687,53 +691,53 @@ msgstr "最後一個 IP 位址(&L)" #. checkbox -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1119 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1118 #: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:1094 msgid "Allow Dynamic &BOOTP" msgstr "允許動態 BOOTP(&B)" #. frame label -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1125 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1124 msgid "Lease Time" msgstr "租用時間" #. Textentry label - lease time for IPs in the range -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1131 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1130 msgid "&Default" msgstr "預設(&D)" #. TextEntryLabel - max. time for leasing of IPs from the range -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1149 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1148 msgid "&Maximum" msgstr "最大(&M)" #. Combobox - type of units for max lease time -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1159 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1158 msgid "Uni&ts" msgstr "單位(&T):" #. zone is not maintained by the DNS server #. zone is maintained and it is a 'master' -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1361 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1370 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1360 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1369 msgid "Create New DNS Zone from Scratch" msgstr "重新建立新 DNS 區域" -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1372 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1371 msgid "Edit Current DNS Zone" msgstr "編輯目前的 DNS 區域" #. zone is maintained but it is not a 'master' -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1378 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1377 msgid "Get Current Zone Information" msgstr "取得目前的區域資訊" -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1386 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1385 msgid "&Synchronize DNS Server..." msgstr "同步化 DNS 伺服器(&S)..." #. Show DNS Zone Information -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1415 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1414 msgid "" "DNS zone %1 is not a master zone.\n" "Therefore, you cannot change it here.\n" @@ -743,8 +747,8 @@ #. A popup error text #. A popup error text -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1548 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1556 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1547 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1555 msgid "Enter values for both ends of the IP address range." msgstr "輸入 IP 位址範圍的最小最大值。" @@ -752,8 +756,8 @@ #. %1 is the tested IP which should match network %2 and netmask %3 #. TRANSLATORS: popup error message #. %1 is the tested IP which should match network %2 and netmask %3 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1595 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1618 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1594 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1617 msgid "" "The dynamic DHCP address range must be in the same network as the DHCP server.\n" "IP %1 does not match the network %2/%3." @@ -762,127 +766,127 @@ "IP %1 與 %2/%3 網路不相符。" #. Label of the registered hosts table -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1643 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1642 msgid "Registered Host" msgstr "註冊的主機" #. Table header item - Name of the host -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1649 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1648 msgid "Name" msgstr "名稱" #. MAC address of the host -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1653 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1652 msgid "Hardware Address" msgstr "硬體位址" #. Network type of the host -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1655 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1654 msgid "Type" msgstr "類型" #. Frame label - configuration of particular host -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1662 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1661 msgid "List Setup" msgstr "清單設定" #. Textentry label - name of the host -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1670 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1669 msgid "&Name" msgstr "名稱(&N)" #. Textentry label - IP address of the host #. TRANSLATORS: text entry -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1675 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1674 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:229 msgid "&IP Address" msgstr "IP 位址(&I)" #. Textentry label - hardware (mac) address of the host -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1683 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1682 msgid "&Hardware Address" msgstr "硬體位址(&H)" #. Radiobutton label - network type of the host -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1690 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1689 msgid "&Ethernet" msgstr "乙太網路(&E)" -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1692 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1691 msgid "&Token Ring" msgstr "記號環(&T)" #. Pushbutton label - change host in list -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1707 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1706 msgid "C&hange in List" msgstr "清單中的變更(&H)" #. Pushbutton label - delete host from list -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1710 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1709 msgid "Dele&te from List" msgstr "自清單中刪除(&T)" #. now, fill the dialog #. combo box entry, networking technology name -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1811 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1810 #: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:1039 msgid "Ethernet" msgstr "乙太網路" #. combo box entry, networking technology name -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1812 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1811 #: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:1041 msgid "Token Ring" msgstr "記號環" #. error popup #. error popup -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1886 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1885 #: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:935 msgid "The hardware address is invalid.\n" msgstr "硬體位址無效。\n" #. error popup -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1932 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1931 msgid "The hardware address must be unique." msgstr "硬體位址必須是唯一的。" #. error popup -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1942 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1941 msgid "The hostname cannot be empty." msgstr "主機名稱不能是空白。" #. error popup, %1 is host name -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1952 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1951 msgid "A host named %1 already exists." msgstr "名為 %1 的主機已經存在。" #. error popup #. FIXME: text? -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1970 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2034 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1969 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2033 msgid "Enter a host IP." msgstr "輸入主機 IP。" #. error popup -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1985 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1984 msgid "The hardware address must be defined." msgstr "必須定義硬體位址。" #. error popup #. yes-no popup -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2006 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2021 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2005 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2020 msgid "Select a host first." msgstr "請先選取主機。" #. checking new MAC -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2048 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2047 msgid "The input value must be defined." msgstr "必須定義輸入值。" #. yes-no popup -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2087 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2086 msgid "" "If you enter the expert settings, you cannot return \n" "to this dialog. You may be able to display this dialog \n" @@ -903,15 +907,15 @@ "要繼續嗎？" #. remove leading '-' -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2134 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2133 msgid "\"-%1\" is not a valid DHCP server commandline option" msgstr "\"-%1\" 不是有效的 DHCP 伺服器指令行選項" -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2145 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2144 msgid "DHCP server commandline option \"-%1\" requires an argument" msgstr "DHCP 伺服器指令行選項 \"-%1\" 需要引數" -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2156 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2155 msgid "" "You have specified an alternate configuration file for the DHCP server.\n" "\n" @@ -930,7 +934,7 @@ "確定繼續？\n" #. dialog caption, %1 is step number -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2237 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2236 msgid "DHCP Server Wizard (%1 of 4)" msgstr "DHCP 伺服器精靈 (%1/4)" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/dns-server.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/dns-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/dns-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: dns-server\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-18 13:22+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -560,15 +560,13 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #: src/clients/dns-server.rb:1180 src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:294 -msgid "" -"Name server (in fully qualified format finished with a dot or relative name)" +msgid "Name server (in fully qualified format finished with a dot or relative name)" msgstr "名稱伺服器 (以半形句點為結尾的完全合格格式，或相對名稱)" #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #: src/clients/dns-server.rb:1187 src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:301 -msgid "" -"Mail server (in fully qualified format finished with a dot or relative name)" +msgid "Mail server (in fully qualified format finished with a dot or relative name)" msgstr "郵件伺服器 (以半形句點為結尾的完全合格格式，或相對名稱)" #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command @@ -629,8 +627,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #: src/clients/dns-server.rb:1257 src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:371 -msgid "" -"DNS resource record value, such as 192.0.34.166 for example.org's A record" +msgid "DNS resource record value, such as 192.0.34.166 for example.org's A record" msgstr "DNS 資源記錄值，例如，example.org 的 A 記錄為 192.0.34.166" #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command @@ -1530,8 +1527,7 @@ #. %{type} replaced with record type (TXT or SPF) #: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1916 msgid "" -"Invalid %{type} record key. It should consist of printable US-ASCII " -"characters excluding '='\n" +"Invalid %{type} record key. It should consist of printable US-ASCII characters excluding '='\n" "and must be at least one character long." msgstr "" @@ -1625,8 +1621,7 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2612 msgid "" "Current zone records are automatically generated from %1 zone.\n" -"To change records manually disable the Automatically Generate Records From " -"feature." +"To change records manually disable the Automatically Generate Records From feature." msgstr "" "目前的區域紀錄是自動從 %1 區域產生。\n" "要手動變更紀錄，停用\"自動產生紀錄從\"的功能。" @@ -1864,10 +1859,8 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:99 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Master Servers</big></b><br>\n" -"Set the IP addresses of the master name servers for this zone. Use <b>Add\n" -"to add a new master name server. Select an existing one then click " -"<b>Delete</b>\n" +"Set the IP addresses of the master name servers for this zone. Use <b>Add</b>\n" +"to add a new master name server. Select an existing one then click <b>Delete</b>\n" "to remove an existing one.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>主伺服器</big></b><br>\n" @@ -1880,8 +1873,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Zone Type</big></b><br>\n" "To make this name server the primary source of the data of the zone,\n" -"select <b>Master</b>. To make it the secondary name server, select <b>Slave\n" +"select <b>Master</b>. To make it the secondary name server, select <b>Slave</b>\n" "or <b>Stub</b>, so the data of the zone will be mirrored from the master\n" "server.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1896,8 +1888,7 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b><big>Zone Direction</big></b><br>\n" -"DNS is used both for translating from domain names to IP addresses and " -"back.\n" +"DNS is used both for translating from domain names to IP addresses and back.\n" "Select if this zone will be used to translate from domain names to IP\n" "addresses (<b>Forward</b>) or from IP addresses to domain names\n" "(<b>Reverse</b>).</p>\n" @@ -1977,8 +1968,7 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:153 msgid "" "<p><b>Serial</b> number is used for determining if the zone has changed on\n" -"the master servers (so that slave servers do not always need to synchronize " -"the\n" +"the master servers (so that slave servers do not always need to synchronize the\n" "entire zone).</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>「序號」</b>會用來判定主伺服器上的區域是否\n" @@ -2033,10 +2023,8 @@ "<p><b><big>TSIG Key Management</big></b><br>\n" "Define TSIG keys used for dynamic zone updates.\n" "To add a new TSIG key, use the \n" -"<b>File Name</b> text field or the <b>Browse</b> button then click <b>Add.\n" -"To delete an existing TSIG key, select it in the list and click <b>Delete.\n" +"<b>File Name</b> text field or the <b>Browse</b> button then click <b>Add</b>.\n" +"To delete an existing TSIG key, select it in the list and click <b>Delete</b>.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>TSIG 金鑰管理</big></b><br>\n" @@ -2147,14 +2135,11 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:242 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Select <b>Log to System Log</b> to save DNS server log messages to the " -"system log. \n" +"Select <b>Log to System Log</b> to save DNS server log messages to the system log. \n" "To save the DNS server log messages to a separate file, select \n" -"<b>Log to File</b> and set the <b>Filename</b> to which to save the log " -"and \n" +"<b>Log to File</b> and set the <b>Filename</b> to which to save the log and \n" "the <b>Maximum Size</b> of the log file.\n" -"The DNS server automatically rotates the log files. Use <b>Maximum Versions\n" +"The DNS server automatically rotates the log files. Use <b>Maximum Versions</b>\n" "to specify how many log files should be saved.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -2226,13 +2211,11 @@ "<p>To add an already created key, set the <b>Filename</b>\n" "(or use the <b>Browse</b> button to select it) and click <b>Add</b>.\n" "To generate a new key, enter the <b>Filename</b> and the <b>Key ID</b>\n" -"then click <b>Generate</b>. The new key will be generated and also added.\n" +"then click <b>Generate</b>. The new key will be generated and also added.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>若要新增已建立的金鑰，請設定<b>「檔案名稱」</b>\n" "(或是使用<b>「瀏覽」</b>按鈕來選取)，再按一下<b>「新增」</b>。\n" -" 若要產生新的金鑰，請輸入<b>「檔名」</b>和<b>「金鑰 ID」</b>然後按一下<b>「產" -"生」</b>。這樣就可產生並加入新金鑰。</p>\n" +" 若要產生新的金鑰，請輸入<b>「檔名」</b>和<b>「金鑰 ID」</b>然後按一下<b>「產生」</b>。這樣就可產生並加入新金鑰。</p>\n" #. Expert Mode Configuration - Keys 3/3 #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:288 @@ -2255,8 +2238,7 @@ #. Expert Mode Configuration - Zones #2 #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:298 msgid "" -"<p>To add a new zone, enter its <b>Zone Name</b>, select the <b>Zone Type,\n" +"<p>To add a new zone, enter its <b>Zone Name</b>, select the <b>Zone Type</b>,\n" "and click <b>Add</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>若要新增區域，輸入它的<b>「區域名稱」</b>，選擇 <b>區域類型</b>，\n" @@ -2265,16 +2247,13 @@ #. Expert Mode Configuration - Zones #3 #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:302 msgid "" -"<p>To add a new IPv4 reverse zone, enter a part of the reverse IPv4 address " -"followed by\n" +"<p>To add a new IPv4 reverse zone, enter a part of the reverse IPv4 address followed by\n" "<tt>.in-addr.arpa</tt> as its <b>Zone Name</b> (for example, zone name\n" -"<tt>0.168.192.in-addr.arpa</tt> for network <tt>192.168.0.0/24</tt>), " -"select\n" +"<tt>0.168.192.in-addr.arpa</tt> for network <tt>192.168.0.0/24</tt>), select\n" "the <b>Zone Type</b>, and click <b>Add</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>若要新增 IPv4 反向區域，請輸入反向 IPv4 位址的一部分，後面加上\n" -"<tt>.in-addr.arpa</tt> 做為其<b>「區域名稱」</b> (例如，網路 " -"<tt>192.168.0.0/24</tt> 的區域名稱為 \n" +"<tt>.in-addr.arpa</tt> 做為其<b>「區域名稱」</b> (例如，網路 <tt>192.168.0.0/24</tt> 的區域名稱為 \n" "<tt>0.168.192.in-addr.arpa</tt> )，選取\n" "<b>「區域類型」</b>，並按一下<b>「新增」</b>。</p>\n" @@ -2282,10 +2261,8 @@ #. %1, %2, %3, and %4 are replaced with examples #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:311 msgid "" -"<p>To add a new IPv6 reverse zone, enter a part of the reverse IPv6 address " -"followed by\n" -"<tt>%1</tt> as its <b>Zone Name</b>. Several formats for entering the zone " -"name are\n" +"<p>To add a new IPv6 reverse zone, enter a part of the reverse IPv6 address followed by\n" +"<tt>%1</tt> as its <b>Zone Name</b>. Several formats for entering the zone name are\n" "supported: Standard form: <tt>%2</tt>;\n" "Forward form: <tt>%3</tt>;\n" "Forward form without netmask bits: <tt>%4</tt>\n" @@ -2313,8 +2290,7 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:334 msgid "" "<p><b><big>DDNS and Zone Transport</big></b><br>\n" -"Use this dialog to change dynamic DNS settings of the zone and control " -"access\n" +"Use this dialog to change dynamic DNS settings of the zone and control access\n" "to the zone.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>DDNS 和區域傳輸</big></b><br>\n" @@ -2370,8 +2346,7 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:371 msgid "" "<p><b><big>NS Records</big></b><br>\n" -"To add a new name server, enter the name server address and click <b>Add.\n" +"To add a new name server, enter the name server address and click <b>Add</b>.\n" "To remove one of the listed name servers, select it and click\n" "<b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2401,8 +2376,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Serial</b> is the number used for determining if the zone has \n" "changed on\n" -"the master servers (then slave servers do not always need to synchronize " -"the\n" +"the master servers (then slave servers do not always need to synchronize the\n" "entire zone).</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>「序號」</b>數字，可以用來判斷\n" @@ -2487,8 +2461,7 @@ "an A record.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>CNAME：領域名稱的別名</b>：\n" -"<b>「記錄金鑰」</b>是和目前區域相關的主機名稱，或是後面跟著半形句號的完全合" -"格\n" +"<b>「記錄金鑰」</b>是和目前區域相關的主機名稱，或是後面跟著半形句號的完全合格\n" "主機名稱。\n" "<b>「值」</b>是和目前區域相關的主機名稱，或是後面跟著半形句號的完全\n" "合格主機名稱。它必須以\n" @@ -2499,8 +2472,7 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:452 src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:479 msgid "" "<p><b>NS: Name Server</b>:\n" -"<b>Record Key</b> is a zone name relative to the current zone or an " -"absolute\n" +"<b>Record Key</b> is a zone name relative to the current zone or an absolute\n" "domain name followed by a dot.\n" "<b>Value</b> is a hostname relative to the current zone or fully qualified\n" "hostname followed by a dot. It must be represented by an A record.</p>\n" @@ -2532,8 +2504,7 @@ "<p><b>PTR: Reverse Translation</b>:\n" "<b>Record Key</b> is a full reverse zone name (derived from the IP address)\n" "followed by a dot\n" -"(such as <tt>1.0.168.192.in-addr.arpa.</tt> for IP address <tt>192.168.0.1)\n" +"(such as <tt>1.0.168.192.in-addr.arpa.</tt> for IP address <tt>192.168.0.1</tt>)\n" " or a part of reverse zone name relative to the current zone\n" "(such as <tt>1</tt> for IP address <tt>192.168.0.1</tt> in zone\n" "<tt>0.168.192.in-addr.arpa.</tt>).\n" @@ -2542,8 +2513,7 @@ "<p><b>PTR：反向轉譯</b>：\n" "<b>「記錄金鑰」</b>是後面跟著半形句號的\n" "完全反向區域名稱 (從 IP 位址所衍生)\n" -"(例如，IP 位址 <tt>192.168.0.1</tt> 的反向位址為 <tt>1.0.168.192.in-addr." -"arpa.</tt>)，\n" +"(例如，IP 位址 <tt>192.168.0.1</tt> 的反向位址為 <tt>1.0.168.192.in-addr.arpa.</tt>)，\n" "或是目前區域相關反向區域名稱的一部分\n" "(例如在區域 <tt>0.168.192.in-addr.arpa.</tt>中，\n" "IP 位址 <tt>192.168.0.1</tt> 的 <tt>1</tt>)。\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/drbd.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/drbd.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/drbd.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-28 16:07+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -226,110 +226,74 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:66 src/include/drbd/helps.rb:72 -#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:84 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:85 #, fuzzy msgid "<p><b><big>Resource Configuration of DRBD</big></b></p>" msgstr "<p><b><big>DRBD 全域設定</big></b></p>" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:69 msgid "" -"<p>Clicking \"Add\", \"Edit\", \"Delete\" button to add, edit or delete a " -"resource</p>\n" +"<p>Clicking \"Add\", \"Edit\", \"Delete\" button to add, edit or delete a resource</p>\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:75 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Name\" is mandatory and must match the Linux host name (uname -n) " -"of one of the nodes</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Address:Port\": A resource needs one IP address per device, which " -"is used to wait for incoming connections from the partner device " -"respectively to reach the partner device. Each DRBD resource needs a TCP " -"port which is used to connect to the node's partner device.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Device\": The name of the block device node of the resource " -"being described. You must use this device with your application (file " -"system) and you must not use the low level block device which is specified " -"with the disk parameter.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Disk\": DRBD uses this block device to actually store and retrieve " -"the data. Never access such a device while DRBD is running on top of it.\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Meta-disk\": internal. Internal means that the last part of the " -"backing device is used to store the meta-data.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Name\" is mandatory and must match the Linux host name (uname -n) of one of the nodes</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Address:Port\": A resource needs one IP address per device, which is used to wait for incoming connections from the partner device to reach the device. Each DRBD resource needs a TCP port which is used to connect to the node's partner device.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Device\": The name of the block device node of the resource being described. You must use this device with your application (file system) and you must not use the low level block device which is specified with the disk parameter,following its minor number.\n" +"\t\tLike: '/dev/drbd_r0 minor 0'</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Disk\": DRBD uses this block device to actually store and retrieve the data. Never access such a device while DRBD is running on top of it.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Meta-disk\": internal. Internal means that the last part of the backing device is used to store the meta-data.</p>\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" -#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:87 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:88 msgid "" "\n" "\t\t<p><b>Protocol</b></p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol A: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached " -"local disk and local TCP send buffer.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol B: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached " -"local disk and remote buffer cache.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol C: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached both " -"local and remote disk.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol A: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local disk and local TCP send buffer.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol B: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local disk and remote buffer cache.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol C: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached both local and remote disk.</p>\n" "\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t \n" "\t\t<p><b>wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>degr-wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout, if this node " -"was a degraded cluster</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>degr-wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout, if this node was a degraded cluster</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>on-io-error</b>: What to do when the lower level device reports io-" -"error to the upper layers</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>on-io-error</b>: What to do when the lower level device reports io-error to the upper layers</p>\n" "\t\t<p><b>sndbuf-size</b>: The size of the TCP socket send buffer</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>max-buffers</b>: Maximum number of requests to be allocated by " -"DRBD</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>max-buffers</b>: Maximum number of requests to be allocated by DRBD</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>timeout</b>: If the partner node fails to send an expected " -"response packet within time 10ths of a second, the partner node is " -"considered dead and therefore the TCP/IP connection is abandoned. This must " -"be lower than connect-int and ping-int. The default value is 60 = 6 seconds, " -"the unit 0.1 seconds.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>connect-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-" -"alive packet. In case the peer's reply is not received within this time " -"period, it is considered as dead. The default value is 500ms, the default " -"unit is 100ms</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>ping-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive " -"packet</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>timeout</b>: If the partner node fails to send an expected response packet within time 10ths of a second, the partner node is considered dead and therefore the TCP/IP connection is abandoned. This must be lower than connect-int and ping-int. The default value is 60 = 6 seconds, the unit 0.1 seconds.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>connect-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive packet. In case the peer's reply is not received within this time period, it is considered as dead. The default value is 500ms, the default unit is 100ms</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>ping-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive packet</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>max-epoch-size</b>: The highest number of data blocks between two " -"write barriers</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>ko-count</b>: the secondary node fails to complete a single write " -"request for count times the timeout, it is expelled from the cluster. The " -"default value is 0, which disables this feature.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>rate</b>: To ensure a smooth operation of the application on top " -"of DRBD, it is possible to limit the bandwidth which may be used by " -"background synchronizations. The default is 250 KB/sec, the default unit is " -"KB/sec.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>al-extents</b>: parameter you control how big the hot area (= " -"active set) can get. The default number of extents is 127. (Minimum: 7, " -"Maximum: 3843)</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>max-epoch-size</b>: The highest number of data blocks between two write barriers</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>ko-count</b>: the secondary node fails to complete a single write request for count times the timeout, it is expelled from the cluster. The default value is 0, which disables this feature.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>rate</b>: To ensure a smooth operation of the application on top of DRBD, it is possible to limit the bandwidth which may be used by background synchronizations. The default is 250 KB/sec, the default unit is KB/sec.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>al-extents</b>: parameter you control how big the hot area (= active set) can get. The default number of extents is 127. (Minimum: 7, Maximum: 3843)</p>\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" -#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:111 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:112 msgid "<p><b><big>Global Configuration of DRBD</big></b></p>" msgstr "<p><b><big>DRBD 全域設定</big></b></p>" -#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:114 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>\"Disable IP Verification\"</b> to disable one of drbdadm's " -"sanity check</p>" +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:115 +msgid "<p>Check <b>\"Disable IP Verification\"</b> to disable one of drbdadm's sanity check</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:117 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:118 msgid "" -"<p><b>Dialog Refresh:</b> The user dialog counts and displays the seconds it " -"waited so\n" +"<p><b>Dialog Refresh:</b> The user dialog counts and displays the seconds it waited so\n" " far. You might want to disable this if you have the console\n" " of your server connected to a serial terminal server with\n" " limited logging capacity.\n" -" The Dialog will print the count each 'dialog-refresh' " -"seconds,\n" +" The Dialog will print the count each 'dialog-refresh' seconds,\n" " set it to 0 to disable redrawing completely. </p>" msgstr "" -#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:125 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:126 msgid "" "<p><b>Minor Count:</b>\n" " use this if you want to define more resources later\n" @@ -339,7 +303,7 @@ msgstr "" #. Summary dialog help 1/3 -#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:133 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:134 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b><big>DRBD Configuration</big></b><br>\n" @@ -349,7 +313,7 @@ "在此設定 drbd 組態。<br></p>\n" #. Summary dialog help 2/3 -#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:137 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:138 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b><big>Adding a drbd:</big></b><br>\n" @@ -363,7 +327,7 @@ "然後按 <b>設定</b>。</p>\n" #. Summary dialog help 3/3 -#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:144 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:145 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting:</big></b><br>\n" "If you press <b>Edit</b>, an additional dialog in which to change\n" @@ -374,7 +338,7 @@ "組態。</p>\n" #. Ovreview dialog help 1/3 -#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:150 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:151 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b><big>DRBD Configuration Overview</big></b><br>\n" @@ -386,7 +350,7 @@ "編輯其組態。<br></p>\n" #. Ovreview dialog help 2/3 -#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:156 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:157 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b><big>Adding a drbd:</big></b><br>\n" @@ -396,7 +360,7 @@ "按 <b>新增</b>以設定 drbd。</p>" #. Ovreview dialog help 3/3 -#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:160 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:161 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting:</big></b><br>\n" @@ -408,7 +372,7 @@ "然後視需要按 <b>編輯</b>或 <b>刪除</b>。</p>\n" #. Configure1 dialog help 1/2 -#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:166 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:167 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Configuration Part One</big></b><br>\n" "Press <b>Next</b> to continue.\n" @@ -420,7 +384,7 @@ #. Configure1 dialog help 2/2 #. Configure2 dialog help 2/2 -#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:172 src/include/drbd/helps.rb:184 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:173 src/include/drbd/helps.rb:185 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Selecting Something</big></b><br>\n" "It is not possible. You must code it first. :-)\n" @@ -431,7 +395,7 @@ " </p>" #. Configure2 dialog help 1/2 -#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:178 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:179 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Configuration Part Two</big></b><br>\n" "Press <b>Next</b> to continue.\n" @@ -600,61 +564,61 @@ msgid "Reading daemon status..." msgstr "正在讀取精靈狀態..." -#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:149 src/modules/Drbd.rb:491 +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:149 src/modules/Drbd.rb:492 msgid "Finished" msgstr "已完成" #. new_map = remove(new_map, key); -#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:411 +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:412 msgid "Failed to backup drbd.conf" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:420 +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:421 msgid "Failed to clean drbd.conf for drbdadm test" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:444 +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:445 msgid "" "Invalid configuration of resource %1\n" "%2" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:463 +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:464 msgid "Failed to bring drbd.conf back" msgstr "" #. DRBD write dialog caption -#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:473 +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:474 msgid "Writing DRBD Configuration" msgstr "正在寫入 DRBD 組態" #. if (!modified) return true; #. We do not set help text here, because it was set outside -#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:483 +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:484 msgid "Write global settings" msgstr "寫入全域設定" -#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:484 +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:485 msgid "Write resources" msgstr "寫入資源" -#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:485 +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:486 msgid "Set daemon status" msgstr "設定精靈狀態" -#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:488 +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:489 msgid "Writing global settings..." msgstr "正在寫入全域設定..." -#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:489 +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:490 msgid "Writing resources..." msgstr "正在寫入資源..." -#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:490 +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:491 msgid "Setting daemon status..." msgstr "正在設定精靈狀態..." -#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:501 +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:502 msgid "Failed to make directory /etc/drbd.d" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/fcoe-client.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/fcoe-client.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/fcoe-client.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-29 01:00+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -42,12 +42,12 @@ #. setting of config value is 'yes' #: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:48 msgid "yes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "是" #. setting of config value is 'no' #: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:50 msgid "no" -msgstr "" +msgstr "否" #. text of an error popup #: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:102 @@ -71,17 +71,17 @@ #. the flag is 'true' #: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:203 msgid "true" -msgstr "" +msgstr "真" #. the flag is 'false' #: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:205 msgid "false" -msgstr "" +msgstr "假" #. the flag is not set at all #: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:207 msgid "not set" -msgstr "" +msgstr "未設定" #. headline of the edit dialog - configuration of values for a certain network interface #: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:306 @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ #: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:230 #: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:241 msgid "Yes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "是" #: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:110 #: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:118 @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ #: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:230 #: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:241 msgid "No" -msgstr "" +msgstr "否" #. combo box label: require DCB (yes/no) #: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:117 @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ #: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:188 msgid "Driver" -msgstr "" +msgstr "驅動程式" #: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:189 msgid "Flag FCoE" @@ -404,9 +404,7 @@ #. Services dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:71 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Starting of services</big><br></b><br>Enable or disable the start " -"of the services <b>fcoe</b> and <b>lldpad</b> at boot time.</p>" +msgid "<p><b><big>Starting of services</big><br></b><br>Enable or disable the start of the services <b>fcoe</b> and <b>lldpad</b> at boot time.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>啟動服務</big><br></b><br>\n" "啟用或停用在開機時啟動 <b>fcoe</b> 和 <b>lldpad</b> 服務。</p>\n" @@ -414,10 +412,7 @@ #. Services dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:76 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>Starting the service <b>fcoe</b> means starting the <i>Fibre Channel over " -"Ethernet</i> service daemon <i>fcoemon</i> which controls the FCoE " -"interfaces and establishes a connection with the daemon <i>lldpad</i>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Starting the service <b>fcoe</b> means starting the <i>Fibre Channel over Ethernet</i> service daemon <i>fcoemon</i> which controls the FCoE interfaces and establishes a connection with the daemon <i>lldpad</i>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>啟動服務 <b>fcoe</b> 意即啟動 <i>Fibre Channel over\n" "Ethernet</i> 服務精靈 <i>fcoemon</i> ，這是用來控制 FCoE 介面 並\n" @@ -425,14 +420,8 @@ #. Services dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:82 -msgid "" -"<p>The <b>lldpad</b> service provides the <i>Link Layer Discovery Protocol agent daemon <i>lldpad</i>, which informs <i>fcoemon</i> about DCB (Data " -"Center Bridging) features and configuration of the interfaces.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>lldpad</b> 服務提供 <i>Link Layer Discovery Protocol</i> 代理精靈 " -"<i>lldpad</i>，這個精靈會提示 <i>fcoemon</i> 關於 DCB (Data Center Bridging) " -"功能以及介面的設定。</p>" +msgid "<p>The <b>lldpad</b> service provides the <i>Link Layer Discovery Protocol</i> agent daemon <i>lldpad</i>, which informs <i>fcoemon</i> about DCB (Data Center Bridging) features and configuration of the interfaces.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>lldpad</b> 服務提供 <i>Link Layer Discovery Protocol</i> 代理精靈 <i>lldpad</i>，這個精靈會提示 <i>fcoemon</i> 關於 DCB (Data Center Bridging) 功能以及介面的設定。</p>" #. Interfaces dialog help 1/5 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:88 @@ -442,48 +431,28 @@ #. Interfaces dialog help 2/5 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:92 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>The interfaces dialog shows all detected netcards including the status of " -"VLAN and FCoE configuration.<br>FCoE is possible if a VLAN interface is " -"configured for FCoE on the switch.<br>For every netcard (network interface), " -"this is shown in column <i>FCoE VLAN Interface</i>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>此介面對話框顯示所已偵測到的網卡，包含 VLAN 的狀態及 FCoE 組態。<br>如果一" -"個交換器上的 VLAN 介面已經為 FCoe 組態，則可以使用 FCoE。 這會顯示在每個網卡" -"(網路介面)的 <i>FCoE VLAN 介面</i> 的欄位中。</p>" +msgid "<p>The interfaces dialog shows all detected netcards including the status of VLAN and FCoE configuration.<br>FCoE is possible if a VLAN interface is configured for FCoE on the switch.<br>For every netcard (network interface), this is shown in column <i>FCoE VLAN Interface</i>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>此介面對話框顯示所已偵測到的網卡，包含 VLAN 的狀態及 FCoE 組態。<br>如果一個交換器上的 VLAN 介面已經為 FCoe 組態，則可以使用 FCoE。 這會顯示在每個網卡(網路介面)的 <i>FCoE VLAN 介面</i> 的欄位中。</p>" #. Interfaces dialog help 3/5 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:99 -msgid "" -"<p>It's possible to retry the check for FCoE services by using <b>Retry " -"Detection</b>(might be required for interfaces needing some time to get up)." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>It's possible to retry the check for FCoE services by using <b>Retry Detection</b>(might be required for interfaces needing some time to get up).</p>" msgstr "" #. Interfaces dialog help 4/5 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:103 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>The values for <i>FCoE VLAN Interface</i> in detail:<br><b>not available: Fibre Channel over Ethernet is not possible (must be enabled on the " -"switch first).<br><b>not configured</b>: FCoE is possible but not yet " -"activated.<br>Press <b>Create FCoE VLAN Interface</b> to activate.<br>If the " -"FCoE VLAN interface has already been created, the name is shown in the " -"column, e.g. eth3.200.</p>" +msgid "<p>The values for <i>FCoE VLAN Interface</i> in detail:<br><b>not available</b>: Fibre Channel over Ethernet is not possible (must be enabled on the switch first).<br><b>not configured</b>: FCoE is possible but not yet activated.<br>Press <b>Create FCoE VLAN Interface</b> to activate.<br>If the FCoE VLAN interface has already been created, the name is shown in the column, e.g. eth3.200.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>詳細關於 <i>FCoE VLAN 介面</i> 的值：<br>\n" -"<b>不可用</b>： Fibre Channel over Ethernet 不可使用 (必須先在交換機啟用)。" -"<br>\n" -"<b>未組態</b>： FCoE 可以用但尚未啟用。請按 <b>建立 FCoE VLAN 介面</b> 來啟" -"用。<br>\n" +"<b>不可用</b>： Fibre Channel over Ethernet 不可使用 (必須先在交換機啟用)。<br>\n" +"<b>未組態</b>： FCoE 可以用但尚未啟用。請按 <b>建立 FCoE VLAN 介面</b> 來啟用。<br>\n" " 如果 FCoE VLAN 介面已經被建立，他的名稱會顯示在欄位中，例如 eth3.200。</p>\n" #. Interfaces dialog help 4/5 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:113 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>To change the configuration of a FCoE VLAN interface, click on <b>Change " -"Settings</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>To change the configuration of a FCoE VLAN interface, click on <b>Change Settings</b>.</p>" msgstr "<p>要變更一個已存在的 FCoE VLAN 介面組態，請按<b>變更設定</b>。</p>" #. Configuration dialog help 1/3 @@ -493,28 +462,21 @@ #. Configuration dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:121 -msgid "" -"<p>Configure the general settings for the FCoE system service. The settings " -"are written to '/etc/fcoe/config'.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>設定 FCoE 系統服務的一般設定。此設定會寫入到 '/etc/fcoe/config'。</p>" +msgid "<p>Configure the general settings for the FCoE system service. The settings are written to '/etc/fcoe/config'.</p>" +msgstr "<p>設定 FCoE 系統服務的一般設定。此設定會寫入到 '/etc/fcoe/config'。</p>" #. Configuration dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:125 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p>The values are:<br>\n" -"<b>Debug</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>This is used to enable or disable " -"debugging messages from the fcoe service script and <i>fcoemon</i>." -"<br><b>Use syslog</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>Messages are sent to the " -"system log if set to <i>yes</i> (data are logged to /var/log/messages).</p>" +"<b>Debug</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>This is used to enable or disable debugging messages from the fcoe service script and <i>fcoemon</i>.<br><b>Use syslog</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>Messages are sent to the system log if set to <i>yes</i> (data are logged to /var/log/messages).</p>" msgstr "" "<p>此值為：<br>\n" "<b>偵錯</b>： <i>yes</i> 或 <i>no</i><br>\n" "這是用來啟用或停用由 fcoe 服務程序和 <i>fcoemon</i> 而來的偵錯訊息。<br>\n" "<b>使用 syslog</b>： <i>yes</i> 或 <i>no</i><br>\n" -"如果設成 <i>yes</i> ，訊息會被傳送到系統紀錄 (資料會紀錄到 /var/log/" -"messages)。</p>" +"如果設成 <i>yes</i> ，訊息會被傳送到系統紀錄 (資料會紀錄到 /var/log/messages)。</p>" #. edit dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:133 @@ -524,10 +486,7 @@ #. Edit dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:137 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>The daemon <i>fcoemon</i> reads these configuration files on " -"initialization.<br>There is a file for every interface and the values " -"indicate whether FCoE instances should be created and if DCB is required.</p>" +msgid "<p>The daemon <i>fcoemon</i> reads these configuration files on initialization.<br>There is a file for every interface and the values indicate whether FCoE instances should be created and if DCB is required.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><i>fcoemon</i> 精靈會在初始化時讀取這些組態檔。\n" " 每個介面會有一個檔案，其值會標示是否 FCoE 事件\n" @@ -536,12 +495,7 @@ #. Edit dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:143 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>The values are:<br><b>FCoE Enable</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>Enable " -"or disable the creation of FCoE instances.<br><b>DCB Required</b>: <i>yes or <i>no</i><br>The default is <i>yes</i>, DCB is usually required." -"<br><b>AUTO VLAN</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>If set to <i>yes</i> " -"'fcoemon' will create the VLAN interfaces automatically.</p>" +msgid "<p>The values are:<br><b>FCoE Enable</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>Enable or disable the creation of FCoE instances.<br><b>DCB Required</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>The default is <i>yes</i>, DCB is usually required.<br><b>AUTO VLAN</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>If set to <i>yes</i> 'fcoemon' will create the VLAN interfaces automatically.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>這些值是：<br> \n" "<b>FCoE 啟用</b>： <i>yes</i> 或 <i>no</i><br>\n" @@ -594,9 +548,7 @@ #. don't check interactively for packages (bnc#367300) -> comment from iscsi-client #. skip it during initial and second stage or when create AY profile #: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:413 -msgid "" -"<p>To continue the FCoE configuration, the <b>%1</b> package must be " -"installed.</p>" +msgid "<p>To continue the FCoE configuration, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" msgstr "<p>要繼續 FCoE 的組態，必須安裝 <b>%1</b> 套件。</p>" #: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:416 Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/firewall-services.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/firewall-services.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/firewall-services.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: firewall-services\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:32+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:54+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-29 01:13+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/firewall.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/firewall.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/firewall.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: firewall\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-29 23:54+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -265,12 +265,10 @@ "\n" "<p>To allow a service, select the <b>Zone</b> and the\n" "<b>Service to Allow</b> then press <b>Add</b>.\n" -"To remove an allowed service, select the <b>Zone</b> and the <b>Allowed " -"Service</b> then press <b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" +"To remove an allowed service, select the <b>Zone</b> and the <b>Allowed Service</b> then press <b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" "\n" "<p>By deselecting <b>Protect Firewall from Internal Zone</b>, you remove\n" -"protection from the zone. All services and ports in your internal network " -"will\n" +"protection from the zone. All services and ports in your internal network will\n" "be unprotected.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>允許的服務</big></b>\n" @@ -279,8 +277,7 @@ "\n" "<p>若要允許服務，請選取<b>「區域」</b>與\n" "<b>「要允許的服務」</b>，然後按下<b>「新增」</b>。\n" -"若要移除允許的服務，請選取<b>「區域」</b>與<b>「允許的服務」<b>，然後按" -"<b>「移除」</b>。</p>\n" +"若要移除允許的服務，請選取<b>「區域」</b>與<b>「允許的服務」<b>，然後按<b>「移除」</b>。</p>\n" "\n" "<p>若取消選取<b>「從內部區域保護防火牆」</b>移除\n" "此區域的保護。此區域的所有服務與埠將不會受到\n" @@ -290,13 +287,11 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:89 msgid "" "<p>Additional settings can be configured using <b>Advanced</b>.\n" -"Entries must be separated by a space. There you can allow TCP, UDP, and RPC " -"ports and\n" +"Entries must be separated by a space. There you can allow TCP, UDP, and RPC ports and\n" "IP protocols.</p>\n" "<p>TCP and UDP ports can be entered as port names (<tt>ftp-data</tt>),\n" "port numbers (<tt>3128</tt>), and port ranges (<tt>8000:8520</tt>).\n" -"RPC ports must be entered as service names (<tt>portmap</tt> or " -"<tt>nlockmgr</tt>).\n" +"RPC ports must be entered as service names (<tt>portmap</tt> or <tt>nlockmgr</tt>).\n" "Enter IP protocols as the protocol name (<tt>esp</tt>).\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -313,10 +308,8 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:100 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Masquerading</big></b>\n" -"<br>Masquerading is a function that hides your internal network behind your " -"firewall and allows\n" -"your internal network to access the external network, such as the Internet, " -"transparently. Requests\n" +"<br>Masquerading is a function that hides your internal network behind your firewall and allows\n" +"your internal network to access the external network, such as the Internet, transparently. Requests\n" "from the external network to the internal one are blocked.\n" "Select <b>Masquerade Networks</b> to masquerade your networks\n" "to the external network.</p>\n" @@ -332,44 +325,33 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:109 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Although requests from the external network cannot reach your internal " -"network, it is possible to\n" -"transparently redirect any requested ports on your firewall to any internal " -"IP. \n" -"To add a new redirect rule, press <b>Add</b> and complete the redirect form." -"</p>\n" +"Although requests from the external network cannot reach your internal network, it is possible to\n" +"transparently redirect any requested ports on your firewall to any internal IP. \n" +"To add a new redirect rule, press <b>Add</b> and complete the redirect form.</p>\n" "\n" -"<p>To removed any redirect rule, select it in the table and press <b>Delete.</p>\n" +"<p>To removed any redirect rule, select it in the table and press <b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "雖然來自外部網路的要求無法到達內部網路，但是能夠\n" "將防火牆上任何要求的埠重新指向至任何內部 IP。\n" "若要新增新的重新指向規則，請按下<b>「新增」</b>並完成重新指向表格。</p>\n" "\n" -"<p>若要移除任何重新指向規則，請在表格中選取該規則並按下<b>「移除」</b>。\n" +"<p>若要移除任何重新指向規則，請在表格中選取該規則並按下<b>「移除」</b>。</p>\n" #. TRANSLATORS: Simple broadcast configuration dialog help #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Broadcast Configuration</big></b>\n" -"<br>Broadcast packets are special UDP packets sent to the whole network to " -"find \n" +"<br>Broadcast packets are special UDP packets sent to the whole network to find \n" "neighboring computers or send information to each computer in the network.\n" -"For example, CUPS servers provide information about their printing queues " -"using broadcast packets.</p>\n" +"For example, CUPS servers provide information about their printing queues using broadcast packets.</p>\n" "\n" -"<p>SuSEfirewall2 services selected in allowed interfaces automatically add " -"needed broadcast\n" -"ports here. To remove any or add any others, edit lists of space-separated " -"ports for\n" +"<p>SuSEfirewall2 services selected in allowed interfaces automatically add needed broadcast\n" +"ports here. To remove any or add any others, edit lists of space-separated ports for\n" "particular zones.</p>\n" "\n" -"<p>Other dropped broadcast packets are logged. It could be quite a lot of " -"packets in wider networks.\n" -"To suppress logging of these packets, deselect <b>Log Not Accepted Broadcast " -"Packets</b>\n" +"<p>Other dropped broadcast packets are logged. It could be quite a lot of packets in wider networks.\n" +"To suppress logging of these packets, deselect <b>Log Not Accepted Broadcast Packets</b>\n" "for the desired zones.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>廣播組態</big></b>\n" @@ -388,15 +370,11 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:132 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Broadcast Reply</big></b><br>\n" -"Firewall usually drops packets that are sent by another machines as their " -"reply\n" -"to broadcast packets sent by your system, e.g., Samba browsing or SLP " -"browsing.</p>\n" +"Firewall usually drops packets that are sent by another machines as their reply\n" +"to broadcast packets sent by your system, e.g., Samba browsing or SLP browsing.</p>\n" "\n" -"<p>Here you can configure which packets are allowed to pass through the " -"firewall. Use <b>Add</b>\n" -"button to add a new rule. You will have to choose the firewall zone and also " -"choose from\n" +"<p>Here you can configure which packets are allowed to pass through the firewall. Use <b>Add</b>\n" +"button to add a new rule. You will have to choose the firewall zone and also choose from\n" "some already defined services or set your rule completely manually.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>廣播回應</big></b><br>\n" @@ -411,18 +389,15 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:142 msgid "" "<p><b><big>IPsec Support</big></b>\n" -"<br>IPsec is an encrypted communication between trusted hosts or networks " -"through untrusted networks, such as\n" +"<br>IPsec is an encrypted communication between trusted hosts or networks through untrusted networks, such as\n" "the Internet. This dialog opens IPsec for an external zone using\n" "<b>Enabled</b>.</p>\n" "\n" "<p><b>Details</b> configures how to handle successfully decrypted\n" -"IPsec packets. For example, they could be handled as if they were from the " -"internal zone.</p>\n" +"IPsec packets. For example, they could be handled as if they were from the internal zone.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>IPsec 支援</big></b>\n" -"<br>IPsec 是在信任的主機或網路之間通過不信任網路 (例如網際網路) 的一種加密的" -"通訊\n" +"<br>IPsec 是在信任的主機或網路之間通過不信任網路 (例如網際網路) 的一種加密的通訊\n" "方式。此對話方塊會開啟使用\n" "<b>「已啟用」</b>的外部區域 IPsec。</p>\n" "\n" @@ -433,25 +408,19 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:152 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Logging Level</big></b>\n" -"<br>This is a base configuration dialog for IP packet logging settings. " -"Here,\n" -"configure logging for incoming connection packets. Outgoing ones are not " -"logged at all.</p>\n" +"<br>This is a base configuration dialog for IP packet logging settings. Here,\n" +"configure logging for incoming connection packets. Outgoing ones are not logged at all.</p>\n" "\n" -"<p>There are two groups of logged IP packets: <b>Accepted Packets</b> and " -"<b>Not Accepted Packets</b>.\n" -"You can choose from three levels of logging for each group: <b>Log All</b> " -"for logging every\n" -"packet, <b>Log Only Critical</b> for logging only interesting ones, or <b>Do " -"Not Log Any</b>\n" +"<p>There are two groups of logged IP packets: <b>Accepted Packets</b> and <b>Not Accepted Packets</b>.\n" +"You can choose from three levels of logging for each group: <b>Log All</b> for logging every\n" +"packet, <b>Log Only Critical</b> for logging only interesting ones, or <b>Do Not Log Any</b>\n" "for no logging. You should log at least critical accepted packets.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>記錄層級</big></b>\n" "<br>這是 IP 封裝記錄設定的基礎組態對話方塊。在此，\n" "可以為內送的連線封包設定記錄。完全不記錄外送的連線封包。</p>\n" " \n" -" <p>有兩種群組的記錄 IP 封包：<b>「接受的封包」</b>與<b>「不接受的封包」。\n" +" <p>有兩種群組的記錄 IP 封包：<b>「接受的封包」</b>與<b>「不接受的封包」</b>。\n" " 您可以為每個群組從三種記錄層級選取：<b>「記錄所有」</b>以記錄每個\n" "封包，<b>「只記錄關鍵」</b>以記錄有興趣的封包，或<b>「完全不記錄」</b>\n" "不記錄封包。您至少應該記錄關鍵的接受封包。</p>\n" @@ -461,23 +430,18 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Summary</big></b>\n" "<br>Here, find a summary of your configuration settings.\n" -"This summary is divided into general configuration and parts for each " -"firewall zone.\n" +"This summary is divided into general configuration and parts for each firewall zone.\n" "Every existing zone is summarized here.</p>\n" "\n" "<p><b>Firewall Starting</b> shows whether the firewall is started in the\n" "<b>boot process</b> or only <b>manually</b>.</p>\n" "\n" -"<p>Firewall zones must have a network interface assigned to list the " -"following items in the summary:</p>\n" +"<p>Firewall zones must have a network interface assigned to list the following items in the summary:</p>\n" "\n" -"<p><b>Interfaces</b>: All interfaces are listed using their configuration " -"name and device name.</p>\n" +"<p><b>Interfaces</b>: All interfaces are listed using their configuration name and device name.</p>\n" "\n" -"<p><b>Open Services, Ports, and Protocols</b>: This lists all allowed " -"network services, additional\n" -"TCP (Transmission Control Protocol), UDP (User Datagram Protocol), and RPC " -"(Remote Procedure Call)\n" +"<p><b>Open Services, Ports, and Protocols</b>: This lists all allowed network services, additional\n" +"TCP (Transmission Control Protocol), UDP (User Datagram Protocol), and RPC (Remote Procedure Call)\n" "ports, and IP (Internet Protocol) protocols.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>摘要</big></b>\n" @@ -522,8 +486,7 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:193 msgid "" "<p><b>RPC Ports</b> is a list of RPC services, such as\n" -"<tt>nlockmgr</tt>, <tt>ypbind</tt>, or <tt>portmap</tt>, separated by spaces." -"</p>" +"<tt>nlockmgr</tt>, <tt>ypbind</tt>, or <tt>portmap</tt>, separated by spaces.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>RPC 埠</b>是 RPC 服務的清單，例如 \n" "<tt>nlockmgr</tt>、<tt>ypbind</tt> 或 <tt>portmap</tt>，以空白分隔。</p>" @@ -546,8 +509,7 @@ #. please, do not modify examples #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:206 msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Port Range</b> consists of two colon-separated numbers that " -"represent\n" +"<p>The <b>Port Range</b> consists of two colon-separated numbers that represent\n" "all numbers inside the range including the numbers themselves.\n" "The first port number must be lower than the second one,\n" "for example, <tt>200:215</tt>.</p>" @@ -572,8 +534,7 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:219 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Firewall</big></b><br />\n" -"A firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network " -"attacks.</p>\n" +"A firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network attacks.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>防火牆</big></b><br />\n" "防火牆是一種防護機制，能保護您的電腦免於來自網路的攻擊。</p>\n" @@ -1169,12 +1130,8 @@ msgstr "%1 客製規則被定義" #: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:486 -msgid "" -"Network: <i>%1</i>, Protocol: <i>%2</i>, Destination port: <i>%3</i>, Source " -"port: <i>%4</i>, Options: <i>%5</i>" -msgstr "" -"網路： <i>%1</i>, 協定： <i>%2</i>, 目的埠： <i>%3</i>, 來源埠： <i>%4</i>，" -"選項：<i>%5</i>" +msgid "Network: <i>%1</i>, Protocol: <i>%2</i>, Destination port: <i>%3</i>, Source port: <i>%4</i>, Options: <i>%5</i>" +msgstr "網路： <i>%1</i>, 協定： <i>%2</i>, 目的埠： <i>%3</i>, 來源埠： <i>%4</i>，選項：<i>%5</i>" #: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:489 src/include/firewall/summary.rb:492 #: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:499 src/include/firewall/summary.rb:504 @@ -1213,8 +1170,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Summary text item #: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:622 -msgid "" -"Firewall <b>will be stopped</b> after the configuration has been written" +msgid "Firewall <b>will be stopped</b> after the configuration has been written" msgstr "在組態寫入後，防火牆 <b>將被停止</b>" #. TRANSLATORS: Summary text item @@ -1341,8 +1297,7 @@ #. (!IsThisExpertConfiguration() ? #. TRANSLATORS: informative label #: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1035 -msgid "" -"Masquerading needs at least one external interface and one other interface." +msgid "Masquerading needs at least one external interface and one other interface." msgstr "偽裝至少需要一個外部介面與一個其他介面。" #. TRANSLATORS: popup message Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/firstboot.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/firstboot.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/firstboot.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: firstboot\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:56+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-18 13:24+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ftp-server.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ftp-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ftp-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: ftp-server\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:38+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-30 11:15+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/geo-cluster.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/geo-cluster.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/geo-cluster.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" "Language-Team: none\n" @@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ #. GeoCluster configure2 dialog caption #. Initialization dialog caption #: src/include/geo-cluster/complex.rb:83 -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:310 -#: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:97 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:430 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:140 msgid "GeoCluster Configuration" msgstr "" @@ -72,92 +72,297 @@ #. #. $Id: dialogs.ycp 27914 2006-02-13 14:32:08Z locilka $ #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:51 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Read configuration file" +msgid "configuration file" +msgstr "讀取組態檔案" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:59 msgid "arbitrator ip" msgstr "" -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:57 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:65 msgid "transport" msgstr "" -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:63 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:71 msgid "port" -msgstr "" +msgstr "埠" -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:68 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:76 msgid "site" msgstr "" -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:71 src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:81 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:79 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:653 msgid "Add" -msgstr "" +msgstr "新增" -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:72 src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:82 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:80 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:654 msgid "Edit" -msgstr "" +msgstr "編輯" -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:73 src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:83 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:81 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:655 msgid "Delete" -msgstr "" +msgstr "刪除" -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:78 -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:144 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:87 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:178 msgid "ticket" msgstr "" #. return `cacel or a string -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:104 -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:150 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:98 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:120 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:197 msgid "OK" -msgstr "" +msgstr "確定" -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:105 -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:151 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:99 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:121 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:198 msgid "Cancel" -msgstr "" +msgstr "取消" -#. parser value first -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:142 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:135 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Enter a valid e-mail address" +msgid "Please enter valid ip address" +msgstr "請輸入有效的電子郵件地址" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:176 msgid "Enter ticket and timeout" msgstr "" -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:145 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:182 msgid "timeout" msgstr "" -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:164 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:184 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "NFS entries" +msgid "retries" +msgstr "NFS 項目" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:186 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Height" +msgid "weights" +msgstr "高度" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:188 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Expired" +msgid "expire" +msgstr "過期" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:190 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Required patterns" +msgid "acquire-after" +msgstr "需要的樣式" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:192 +msgid "before-acquire-handler" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:229 msgid "timeout is no valid" msgstr "" -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:166 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:231 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "' is not valid." +msgid "expire is no valid" +msgstr "' 無效。" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:233 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "URL entered is not valid" +msgid "acquireafter is no valid" +msgstr "輸入的位址無效" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:235 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "URL entered is not valid" +msgid "retries is no valid" +msgstr "輸入的位址無效" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:237 +msgid "retries values lower than 3 is illegal" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:239 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "' is not valid." +msgid "weights is no valid" +msgstr "' 無效。" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:241 msgid "ticket can not be null" msgstr "" +#. fill confs with global_files +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:332 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Software to be installed:" +msgid "site have to be filled" +msgstr "將被安裝的軟體：" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:337 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Software to be installed:" +msgid "ticket have to be filled" +msgstr "將被安裝的軟體：" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:344 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:582 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Gateway IP address is invalid." +msgid "arbitrator IP address is invalid!" +msgstr "閘道 IP 位址無效。" + #. servie:geo-cluster is the name of /etc/sysconfig/SuSEfirewall2.d/services/geo-cluster -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:278 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:389 msgid "Geo Cluster(geo-cluster) firewall configure" msgstr "" #. Wizard::SetContentsButtons(caption, contents, HELPS["c2"]:"", #. Label::BackButton(), Label::NextButton()); -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:317 +#. FIXME ugly work. Better use alias and function, see yast2 drbd. +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:439 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:669 msgid "Geo Cluster configure" msgstr "" -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:330 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:494 msgid "Enter an IP address of your site" msgstr "" -#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:343 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:505 msgid "Edit IP address of your site" msgstr "" +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:527 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "The target already exists" +msgid "Ticket name already exist!" +msgstr "目標已存在" + +#. abort? +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:573 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Configuration name cannot be empty." +msgid "Configuration name can not be null" +msgstr "組態名稱不能是空白。" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:576 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Configuration name cannot be empty." +msgid "Configuration name can not be duplicated." +msgstr "組態名稱不能是空白。" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:589 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Key is invalid." +msgid "port is invalid!" +msgstr "金鑰無效。" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:595 +msgid "transport have to be filled!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:600 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Software to be installed:" +msgid "site have to be filled!" +msgstr "將被安裝的軟體：" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:605 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Software to be installed:" +msgid "ticket have to be filled!" +msgstr "將被安裝的軟體：" + +#. GeoCluster choose configure dialog caption +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:644 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Host Configuration Summary:" +msgid "GeoCluster Configuration Select" +msgstr "主機組態摘要：" + +#. Wizard::SetContentsButtons(caption, contents, HELPS["c2"]:"", +#. Label::BackButton(), Label::NextButton()); +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:650 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Read configuration file" +msgid "Choose configuration file:" +msgstr "讀取組態檔案" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: include/geo-cluster/wizards.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of geo-cluster +#. Summary: Wizards definitions +#. Authors: Dongmao Zhang +#. +#. $Id: wizards.ycp 27914 2006-02-13 14:32:08Z locilka $ +#: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:46 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Printer Configurations" +msgid "GeoCluster Configurations" +msgstr "印表機組態" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:47 +msgid "Firewall Configuration" +msgstr "防火牆組態" + #. Initialization dialog contents -#: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:99 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:142 msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "正在啟始化..." + +#. Not necessary to use remove_list_quote? +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:224 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Cannot write general settings." +msgid "Cannot write global conf settings." +msgstr "無法寫入一般設定。" + +#. List like site +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:242 +msgid "Cannot write global settings." msgstr "" +#. Empty (all Int) ticket will be ignore by ag_booth +#. Create a ticket item +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:266 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Cannot write general settings." +msgid "Cannot write global ticket settings." +msgstr "無法寫入一般設定。" + #. GeoCluster read dialog caption -#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:168 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:129 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:273 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:129 msgid "Initializing geo-cluster Configuration" msgstr "" @@ -166,120 +371,108 @@ #. We do not set help text here, because it was set outside #. #-#-#-#-# geo-cluster.xgettext.pot #-#-#-#-# #. Progress stage 2/3 -#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:182 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:143 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:286 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:143 msgid "Read the previous settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "讀取先前的設定" -#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:182 src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:185 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:286 src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:289 msgid "Read SuSEFirewall Settings" msgstr "" #. #-#-#-#-# geo-cluster.xgettext.pot #-#-#-#-# #. Progress step 2/3 -#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:184 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:150 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:288 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:150 msgid "Reading the previous settings..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "正在讀取先前的設定..." #. Progress finished -#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:186 src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:282 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:290 src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:358 #: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:154 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:232 msgid "Finished" -msgstr "" +msgstr "已完成" +#. #-#-#-#-# geo-cluster.rxgettext.pot (PACKAGE VERSION) #-#-#-#-# +#. GeoCluster write dialog caption +#. #-#-#-#-# geo-cluster.xgettext.pot #-#-#-#-# #. GeoCluster read dialog caption -#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:255 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:211 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:332 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:211 msgid "Saving geo-cluster Configuration" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 1/2 -#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:272 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:223 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:348 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:223 msgid "Write the settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "寫入設定" #. Progress stage 2/2 -#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:274 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:350 msgid "Write the SuSEfirewall settings" msgstr "" #. Progress step 1/2 -#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:278 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:228 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:354 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:228 msgid "Writing the settings..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "正在寫入設定..." #. Progress step 2/2 -#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:280 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:356 msgid "Writing the SuSEFirewall settings" msgstr "" -#. read sites -#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:311 -msgid "Cannot write global settings." -msgstr "" - -#. write site -#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:315 -msgid "Cannot write sites settings." -msgstr "" - -#. write ticket -#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:318 -msgid "Cannot write ticket settings." -msgstr "" - #. #-#-#-#-# geo-cluster.rxgettext.pot (PACKAGE VERSION) #-#-#-#-# #. Error message -#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:324 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:242 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:379 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:242 msgid "Cannot write settings." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法寫入設定。" #. TODO FIXME: your code here... #. Configuration summary text for autoyast -#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:374 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:440 msgid "Configuration summary..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "組態摘要..." #. Progress stage 1/3 #: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:141 msgid "Read the database" -msgstr "" +msgstr "讀取資料庫" #. Progress stage 3/3 #: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:145 msgid "Detect the devices" -msgstr "" +msgstr "偵測裝置" #. Progress step 1/3 #: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:148 msgid "Reading the database..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "正在讀取資料庫..." #. Progress step 3/3 #: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:152 msgid "Detecting the devices..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "正在偵測裝置..." #: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:164 msgid "Cannot read the database1." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法讀取資料庫 1。" #: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:173 msgid "Cannot read the database2." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法讀取資料庫2。" #: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:191 msgid "Cannot detect devices." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法偵測裝置。" #. Progress stage 2/2 #: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:225 msgid "Run SuSEconfig" -msgstr "" +msgstr "執行 SuSEconfig" #. Progress step 2/2 #: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:230 msgid "Running SuSEconfig..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "正在執行 SuSEconfig..." #: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:295 msgid "Configuration summary ..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "組態摘要..." Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/gtk.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/gtk.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/gtk.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-30 11:27+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -185,11 +185,11 @@ #: src/YGUtils.cc:643 msgid "Back" -msgstr "" +msgstr "上一步" #: src/YGUtils.cc:644 msgid "Next" -msgstr "" +msgstr "下一步" #: src/ygtksteps.c:75 msgid "Current step" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/http-server.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/http-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/http-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: http-server\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:38+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-18 13:33+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/inetd.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/inetd.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/inetd.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: inetd\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-18 13:33+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/installation.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/installation.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/installation.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: installation\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-09-03 16:45+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-01-16 09:21+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -39,14 +39,10 @@ #: src/clients/clone_proposal.rb:39 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Clone System Settings</b> if you want to create an AutoYaST " -"profile.\n" -"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user " -"interaction. AutoYaST\n" -"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this " -"option is\n" -"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst." -"xml</tt>.</p>" +"<p>Use <b>Clone System Settings</b> if you want to create an AutoYaST profile.\n" +"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user interaction. AutoYaST\n" +"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this option is\n" +"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>若您要建立一個 AutoYaST 的設定檔，請使用<b>複製</b>。\n" "AutoYaST 是一種不需與使用者互動就能自動完成 SUSE Linux 安裝的方法。AutoYaST\n" @@ -68,9 +64,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: src/clients/clone_proposal.rb:98 -msgid "" -"The AutoYaST profile will be written under /root/autoinst.xml (do not write it</a>)." +msgid "The AutoYaST profile will be written under /root/autoinst.xml (do not write it</a>)." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview @@ -84,7 +78,7 @@ msgstr "" #. progress step title -#: src/clients/copy_files_finish.rb:78 +#: src/clients/copy_files_finish.rb:81 msgid "Copying files to installed system..." msgstr "正在複製檔案到已安裝的系統..." @@ -116,9 +110,7 @@ msgstr "由影像安裝" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:119 -msgid "" -"Here you can choose to use Novell pre-defined images to speed up RPM " -"installation." +msgid "Here you can choose to use Novell pre-defined images to speed up RPM installation." msgstr "在此您可以選擇使用 Novell 預先定義的影像以加速 RPM 的安裝。" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:133 @@ -130,9 +122,7 @@ msgstr "不要由影像安裝(&D)" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:153 -msgid "" -"Custom images deployment - this needs a URL to be configured as installation " -"source" +msgid "Custom images deployment - this needs a URL to be configured as installation source" msgstr "自訂影像佈署 - 這需要設定一個 URL 作為安裝來源" #. Image name, Image location @@ -141,15 +131,11 @@ msgstr "在此您可以建立自訂的影像。\n" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:163 -msgid "" -"You have to configure the software selection first before you can create an " -"image here" +msgid "You have to configure the software selection first before you can create an image here" msgstr "在此建立影像之前，您必須先設定軟體選擇" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:174 -msgid "" -"Create an image file (AutoYaST will fetch it from the given location during " -"installation)" +msgid "Create an image file (AutoYaST will fetch it from the given location during installation)" msgstr "建立影像檔案(AutoYaST 將在安裝過程中由指定位置取得它)" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:181 @@ -174,8 +160,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Installation from Images</b> is used to speed the installation up.\n" "Images contain compressed snapshots of an installed system matching your\n" -"selection of patterns. The rest of the packages which are not contained in " -"the\n" +"selection of patterns. The rest of the packages which are not contained in the\n" "images will be installed from packages the standard way.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>由影像安裝</b> 是用來加快安裝速度的。\n" @@ -186,12 +171,9 @@ #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:233 msgid "" "<p><b>Creating own Images</b> is used if you\n" -"want to skip the complete step of RPM installation. Instead AutoYaST will " -"dump an\n" -"image on the harddisk which is a lot faster and can be pre-configured " -"already.\n" -"Everything else than RPM installation is done like during a normal auto-" -"installation.</p>" +"want to skip the complete step of RPM installation. Instead AutoYaST will dump an\n" +"image on the harddisk which is a lot faster and can be pre-configured already.\n" +"Everything else than RPM installation is done like during a normal auto-installation.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>將使用<b>建立自己的影像</b>，如果您想要\n" "跳過 RPM 安裝的完整步驟。取而代之是 AutoYaST 將在硬碟傾印一個影像\n" @@ -205,10 +187,8 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:76 msgid "" -"<p>Note that when installing from images, the time stamps of all packages " -"originating from the images will\n" -"not match the installation date but rather the date the image was created." +"<p>Note that when installing from images, the time stamps of all packages originating from the images will\n" +"not match the installation date but rather the date the image was created.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>注意，當由影像安裝時，套件的時間標記將不會符合安裝時間，\n" "而是使用影像建立的日期。</p>" @@ -262,7 +242,7 @@ msgstr "由影像安裝已停用 (啟用</a>)。" #. progress step title -#: src/clients/desktop_finish.rb:73 +#: src/clients/desktop_finish.rb:70 msgid "Initializing default window manager..." msgstr "初始化預設的視窗管理員..." @@ -297,6 +277,7 @@ msgstr "更新 %1 %2" #: src/clients/inst_addon_update_sources.rb:173 +#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:301 msgid "Unknown Product" msgstr "未知的產品" @@ -355,7 +336,7 @@ #. this type of contents will be shown only for initial installation dialog #. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption #: src/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:137 -#: src/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:312 +#: src/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:318 msgid "License Agreement" msgstr "授權合約" @@ -383,8 +364,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "The license must be accepted before the installation continues.\n" -"Use <b>License Translations...</b> to show the license in all available " -"translations.\n" +"Use <b>License Translations...</b> to show the license in all available translations.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -429,7 +409,20 @@ "安裝程序。\n" "</p>\n" -#: src/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:336 +#. In case of going back, Release Notes button may be shown, retranslate it (bnc#886660) +#. Assure that relnotes have been downloaded first +#. exit codes (see "man curl"): +#. 7 = Failed to connect to host. +#. 28 = Operation timeout. +#. push button +#: src/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:230 +#: src/clients/inst_download_release_notes.rb:139 +#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:299 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Re&lease Notes..." +msgstr "發行摘要" + +#: src/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:342 msgid "You must accept the license to install this product" msgstr "" @@ -511,12 +504,9 @@ #: src/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:214 msgid "" "<p>Use <b>Clone</b> if you want to create an AutoYaST profile.\n" -"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user " -"interaction. AutoYaST\n" -"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this " -"option is\n" -"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst." -"xml</tt>.</p>" +"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user interaction. AutoYaST\n" +"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this option is\n" +"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>若您要建立一個 AutoYaST 的設定檔，請使用<b>複製</b>。\n" "AutoYaST 是一種不需與使用者互動就能自動完成 SUSE Linux 安裝的方法。AutoYaST\n" @@ -533,8 +523,7 @@ #. #187558 #. Load Add-On products configured in the fist stage #: src/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:308 -msgid "" -"<p>To clone the current system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" +msgid "<p>To clone the current system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" msgstr "<p>若要複製目前系統，則必須安裝 <b>%1</b> 套件。</p>" #: src/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:311 @@ -548,7 +537,7 @@ #. OEM image if target disk is defined #: src/clients/inst_deploy_image.rb:46 msgid "The system will reboot now..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "系統現在將重新開機..." #. bnc #395030 #. Use less memory @@ -575,8 +564,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_deploy_image.rb:199 msgid "" "Debugging has been turned on.\n" -"YaST will open a software manager for you to check the current status of " -"packages." +"YaST will open a software manager for you to check the current status of packages." msgstr "" "偵錯已被開啟。\n" "YaST 將為您開啟套件管理員以檢查目前套件的狀態。" @@ -613,9 +601,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/inst_disk_for_image.rb:93 -msgid "" -"Select the disk, which the image will be deployed to. All data on the disk " -"will be lost and the disk will be partitioned as defined in the image." +msgid "Select the disk, which the image will be deployed to. All data on the disk will be lost and the disk will be partitioned as defined in the image." msgstr "" #: src/clients/inst_disk_for_image.rb:100 @@ -644,11 +630,11 @@ msgid "Configure &FCoE Interfaces" msgstr "設定 FCoE(&F) 介面" -#: src/clients/inst_disks_activate.rb:112 +#: src/clients/inst_disks_activate.rb:111 msgid "Configure &iSCSI Disks" msgstr "設定 iSCSI 磁碟組態(&I)" -#: src/clients/inst_disks_activate.rb:113 +#: src/clients/inst_disks_activate.rb:112 #, fuzzy msgid "Change Net&work Configuration" msgstr "正在儲存網路組態..." @@ -670,14 +656,22 @@ msgid "<p>Installation is just about to start!</p>" msgstr "<p>安裝即將開始！</p>" -#. download release notes now -#. push button -#: src/clients/inst_download_release_notes.rb:135 -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:356 -#, fuzzy -msgid "Re&lease Notes..." -msgstr "發行摘要" +#. Set the UI content to show some progress. +#. TODO FIXME: use a better title (reused existing texts because of text freeze) +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#. bug #302384 +#: src/clients/inst_download_release_notes.rb:147 +#: src/clients/inst_initialization.rb:56 +#: src/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:151 +msgid "Initializing" +msgstr "初始化中" +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog progress message +#: src/clients/inst_download_release_notes.rb:147 +#: src/clients/inst_initialization.rb:44 +msgid "Initializing the installation..." +msgstr "正在初始化安裝程序..." + #. popup message, list of repositores is appended to the text #: src/clients/inst_extrasources.rb:150 msgid "Package updates have been found in these additional repositories:" @@ -696,64 +690,64 @@ #. Adjust a SlideShow dialog if not configured #. kilobytes #. just make it longer than inst_finish, TODO: better value later -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:85 src/clients/inst_prepareprogress.rb:139 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:88 src/clients/inst_prepareprogress.rb:139 #: src/clients/inst_prepareprogress.rb:157 msgid "Finishing Basic Installation" msgstr "完成基本安裝" #. Might be left from the previous stage -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:111 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:114 msgid "Creating list of finish scripts to call..." msgstr "正在建立要呼叫的結束程序清單..." #. progress stage -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:127 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:213 msgid "Copy files to installed system" msgstr "複製檔案到已安裝的系統" #. progress stage -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:142 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:220 msgid "Save configuration" msgstr "儲存組態" #. progress stage -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:168 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:227 msgid "Save installation settings" msgstr "儲存安裝設定" #. progress stage -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:187 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:236 msgid "Install boot manager" msgstr "安裝開機管理員" #. progress stage -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:199 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:243 msgid "Prepare system for initial boot" msgstr "準備第一次啟動系統" #. merge steps from add-on products #. bnc #438678 -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:304 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:348 msgid "Checking stage: %1..." msgstr "正在檢查階段： %1 ..." #. a fallback busy message -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:393 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:437 msgid "Calling step %1..." msgstr "正在呼叫步驟 %1..." #. use as ' * %1' -> ' * One of the finish steps...' in the SlideShow log -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:413 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:457 msgid " * %1" msgstr " * %1" #. Anything else -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:450 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:494 msgid "Finished" msgstr "已完成" #. get the latest errors -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:581 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:625 msgid "Installation Error" msgstr "安裝錯誤" @@ -772,11 +766,6 @@ msgid "Installation is being initialized." msgstr "安裝程序已完成初始化。" -#. TRANSLATORS: dialog progress message -#: src/clients/inst_initialization.rb:44 -msgid "Initializing the installation..." -msgstr "正在初始化安裝程序..." - #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help #. help for the dialog - busy message #: src/clients/inst_initialization.rb:48 @@ -789,13 +778,6 @@ msgid "Preparing the initial system configuration..." msgstr "正在準備初始系統組態..." -#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption -#. bug #302384 -#: src/clients/inst_initialization.rb:56 -#: src/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:151 -msgid "Initializing" -msgstr "初始化中" - #. dialog caption #: src/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:83 #, fuzzy @@ -842,8 +824,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:208 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"To install an add-on product from separate media together with &product;, " -"select\n" +"To install an add-on product from separate media together with &product;, select\n" "<b>Include Add-on Products from Separate Media</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -852,9 +833,7 @@ #. help text: additional help for installation #: src/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:211 -msgid "" -"<p>If you need specific hardware drivers for installation, see <i>http://" -"drivers.suse.com</i> site.</p>" +msgid "<p>If you need specific hardware drivers for installation, see <i>http://drivers.suse.com</i> site.</p>" msgstr "" #. Error message @@ -911,8 +890,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_network_check.rb:145 msgid "" "<p>A configured network is needed for using remote repositories\n" -"or add-on products. If you do not use remote repositories, skip the " -"configuration.</p>\n" +"or add-on products. If you do not use remote repositories, skip the configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>要使用遠端的安裝來源或是附加的產品需要有已經設定好的網路。\n" "如果您不使用任何的遠端安裝來源，您可以跳過設定的步驟。</p>\n" @@ -929,10 +907,8 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text, part 1 #: src/clients/inst_new_desktop.rb:57 msgid "" -"<p>At Linux <b>choice</b> is a top priority. <i>openSUSE</i> offers a " -"number \n" -"of different desktop environments. Below you see a list of the 2 major " -"ones \n" +"<p>At Linux <b>choice</b> is a top priority. <i>openSUSE</i> offers a number \n" +"of different desktop environments. Below you see a list of the 2 major ones \n" "<b>GNOME</b> and <b>KDE</b>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>在 Linux <b>選擇</b> 是最優先的。 <i>openSUSE</i> 提供了\n" @@ -942,12 +918,9 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text, part 3 #: src/clients/inst_new_desktop.rb:63 msgid "" -"<p>You may select alternative desktop environments (or one of minimal " -"installation patterns)\n" -"that could fit your needs better using the <b>Other</b> option . Later in " -"the software \n" -"selection or after installation, you can change your selection or add " -"additional desktop \n" +"<p>You may select alternative desktop environments (or one of minimal installation patterns)\n" +"that could fit your needs better using the <b>Other</b> option . Later in the software \n" +"selection or after installation, you can change your selection or add additional desktop \n" "environments. This screen allows you to set the default.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>您可以選擇另類的桌面環境 (或最小安裝樣式之一)\n" @@ -1128,8 +1101,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:1217 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Select <b>Install</b> to perform a new installation with the values " -"displayed.\n" +"Select <b>Install</b> to perform a new installation with the values displayed.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -1377,62 +1349,45 @@ msgid "Probing hard disks..." msgstr "正在偵測硬碟..." -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:127 -msgid "Search for Linux partitions" -msgstr "搜尋 Linux 分割區" - -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:128 -msgid "Searching for Linux partitions..." -msgstr "正在搜尋 Linux 分割區..." - #. FATE #302980: Simplified user config during installation -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:132 +#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:128 msgid "Search for system files" msgstr "搜尋系統檔案" -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:133 +#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:129 msgid "Searching for system files..." msgstr "正在搜尋系統檔案..." -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:136 +#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:132 msgid "Initialize software manager" msgstr "初始化軟體管理員" -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:137 +#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:133 msgid "Initializing software manager..." msgstr "正在初始化軟體管理員..." -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:140 -msgid "Evaluate update possibility" -msgstr "評估更新的可能性" - -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:141 -msgid "Evaluating update possibility..." -msgstr "正在評估更新的可能性..." - #. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:146 +#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:138 msgid "System Probing" msgstr "系統偵測" #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:152 +#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:144 msgid "YaST is probing computer hardware and installed systems now." msgstr "YaST 現在正在偵測電腦硬體與已安裝的系統。" #. additonal error when HW was not found -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:255 +#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:241 #, fuzzy msgid "" "\n" -"Check 'drivers.suse.com' if you need specific hardware drivers for " -"installation." +"Check 'drivers.suse.com' if you need specific hardware drivers for installation." msgstr "" "未發現要進行安裝的硬碟。\n" "請檢查您的硬體！\n" #. pop-up error report -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:269 +#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:255 #, fuzzy msgid "" "No hard disks were found for the installation.\n" @@ -1442,7 +1397,7 @@ "未發現要進行安裝的硬碟。\n" "請檢查您的硬體！\n" -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:279 +#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:265 msgid "" "No hard disks were found for the installation.\n" "During an automatic installation, they might be detected later.\n" @@ -1453,7 +1408,7 @@ "(尤其在 S/390 或 iSCSI 系統)\n" #. pop-up error report -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:290 +#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:276 #, fuzzy msgid "" "No hard disks and no hard disk controllers were\n" @@ -1466,7 +1421,7 @@ "請檢查您的硬體。\n" #. popup message -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:343 +#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:318 msgid "" "Failed to initialize the software repositories.\n" "Aborting the installation." @@ -1531,8 +1486,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:245 msgid "" "<p>Here you see all software repositories found\n" -"on the system you are upgrading. Enable the ones you want to include in the " -"upgrade process.</p>" +"on the system you are upgrading. Enable the ones you want to include in the upgrade process.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>在這裡您可以看到在您正升級的系統中發現的\n" "所有軟體套件庫，您可以啟用那些您想包含在升級程序中的套件庫。</p>" @@ -1758,47 +1712,47 @@ msgstr "正在儲存代理組態..." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:134 +#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:136 msgid "Saving time zone..." msgstr "正在儲存時區..." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:143 +#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:145 msgid "Saving language..." msgstr "正在儲存語言設定..." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:148 +#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:150 msgid "Saving console configuration..." msgstr "正在儲存主控台組態..." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:167 +#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:169 msgid "Saving keyboard configuration..." msgstr "正在儲存鍵盤組態..." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:172 +#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:174 msgid "Saving product information..." msgstr "正在儲存產品資訊..." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:177 +#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:179 msgid "Saving automatic installation settings..." msgstr "正在儲存自動安裝設定..." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:183 +#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:185 msgid "Saving security settings..." msgstr "正在儲存安全性設定..." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:192 +#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:208 msgid "Saving boot scripts settings..." msgstr "正在開機 script 設定..." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_hw_status_finish.rb:70 +#: src/clients/save_hw_status_finish.rb:67 msgid "Saving hardware configuration..." msgstr "正在儲存硬體組態..." @@ -2058,9 +2012,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:78 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Blacklist devices</b> if you want to create blacklist channels to " -"such devices which will reduce kernel memory footprint.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Blacklist devices</b> if you want to create blacklist channels to such devices which will reduce kernel memory footprint.</p>" msgstr "" #. progress step title @@ -2075,6 +2027,15 @@ msgid "Shrinking PREP partition..." msgstr "正在搜尋 Linux 分割區..." +#. Text to display +#. +#. @return String +#: src/lib/installation/remote_finish_client.rb:68 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Remote Administration" +msgid "Enabling remote administration..." +msgstr "遠端管理" + #. checking whether images are supported #. BNC #409927 #. Checking files for signatures @@ -2111,6 +2072,18 @@ "安裝程序無法自動解決套件相依性問題。\n" "軟體管理員將開啟讓您能手動解決這些問題。" +#~ msgid "Search for Linux partitions" +#~ msgstr "搜尋 Linux 分割區" + +#~ msgid "Searching for Linux partitions..." +#~ msgstr "正在搜尋 Linux 分割區..." + +#~ msgid "Evaluate update possibility" +#~ msgstr "評估更新的可能性" + +#~ msgid "Evaluating update possibility..." +#~ msgstr "正在評估更新的可能性..." + #~ msgid "License needs to be accepted" #~ msgstr "您必須接受授權合約" @@ -2198,8 +2171,7 @@ #~ msgid "Hardware Information of the Selected Network Card" #~ msgstr "所選取網路卡的硬體資訊" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Here you can configure your network cards to be used immediately.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Here you can configure your network cards to be used immediately.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>您可以在這裡設定您馬上要用的網路卡。</p>" #~ msgid "" @@ -2406,9 +2378,7 @@ #~ msgid "Writing Network Setup..." #~ msgstr "正在寫入網路設定..." -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Please, wait while network configuration is being written and tested..." -#~ "</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Please, wait while network configuration is being written and tested...</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>請稍候，正在寫入組態檔與測試...</p>" #~ msgid "" @@ -2498,8 +2468,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "Select <b>New Installation</b> if there is no existing Linux system on " -#~ "your\n" +#~ "Select <b>New Installation</b> if there is no existing Linux system on your\n" #~ "machine or if you want to replace an existing Linux system completely,\n" #~ "discarding all its configuration data.\n" #~ "</p>\n" @@ -2525,8 +2494,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "Select <b>Use Automatic Configuration</b> to let the installation " -#~ "program\n" +#~ "Select <b>Use Automatic Configuration</b> to let the installation program\n" #~ "configure your network and hardware automatically. Otherwise you will\n" #~ "be offered a configuration proposal with the possibility to tune all the\n" #~ "settings manually. Inexperienced users are advised to use automatic\n" @@ -2668,8 +2636,7 @@ #~ msgid "Connecting to the inst-sys failed. Debugger cannot continue." #~ msgstr "連線到 inst-sys 失敗，除錯程式無法繼續。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>To access the X11 system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>To access the X11 system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>若要存取 X11 系統，則必須安裝 <b>%1</b> 套件。</p>" #~ msgid "<p>Do you want to install it now?</p>" @@ -2685,8 +2652,7 @@ #~ "found for the installation.\n" #~ "Check your hardware.\n" #~ "\n" -#~ "Check 'drivers.suse.com' if you need specific hardware drivers for " -#~ "installation.\n" +#~ "Check 'drivers.suse.com' if you need specific hardware drivers for installation.\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "沒有發現任何硬碟及硬碟控制器\n" #~ "可供安裝。\n" @@ -2741,12 +2707,9 @@ #~ msgstr "初始化字型..." #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>Installation from Images</b> is used to speed the installation " -#~ "up. \n" -#~ "Images contain compressed snapshots of installed system matching your " -#~ "selection \n" -#~ "of patterns. The rest of packages which are not in images will be " -#~ "installed from \n" +#~ "<p><b>Installation from Images</b> is used to speed the installation up. \n" +#~ "Images contain compressed snapshots of installed system matching your selection \n" +#~ "of patterns. The rest of packages which are not in images will be installed from \n" #~ "packages the standard way.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>由影像安裝</b> 是用來加快安裝速度的。\n" @@ -2754,15 +2717,12 @@ #~ "剩下不在影像中的套件將使用標準的\n" #~ "方法安裝。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Installation is currently writing the automatic configuration. Please " -#~ "wait...</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Installation is currently writing the automatic configuration. Please wait...</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>安裝程式目前正在寫入全自動組態。請稍候...</p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "Select <b>New Installation</b> if there is no existing Linux system on " -#~ "your\n" +#~ "Select <b>New Installation</b> if there is no existing Linux system on your\n" #~ "machine or if you want to replace an existing Linux system completely,\n" #~ "abandoning all its configuration data.\n" #~ "</p>" @@ -2775,8 +2735,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "To install an add-on product from separate media together with &product;, " -#~ "select\n" +#~ "To install an add-on product from separate media together with &product;, select\n" #~ "<b>Include Add-On Products from Separate Media</b>.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" @@ -2788,8 +2747,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "Your hard disk has not been modified in any way, so you can still safely " -#~ "abort.\n" +#~ "Your hard disk has not been modified in any way, so you can still safely abort.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" @@ -2818,8 +2776,7 @@ #~ msgstr "修復已安裝的系統(&P)" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Select <b>Repair Installed System</b> if you have a damaged Linux " -#~ "system on\n" +#~ "<p>Select <b>Repair Installed System</b> if you have a damaged Linux system on\n" #~ "your hard disk. This option can try to fix problems automatically.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/instserver.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/instserver.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/instserver.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: instserver\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:36+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-17 09:50+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/iplb.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/iplb.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/iplb.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" "Language-Team: none\n" @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ #. Main file for iplb configuration. Uses all other files. #: src/include/iplb/common.rb:44 msgid "Global Configuration" -msgstr "" +msgstr "全域組態" #: src/include/iplb/common.rb:45 msgid "Virtual Servers Configuration" @@ -94,11 +94,11 @@ #. ids of widget of global dialog #: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:61 msgid "yes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "是" #: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:61 msgid "no" -msgstr "" +msgstr "否" #: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:68 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:226 msgid "&Global Configuration" @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ #: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:87 msgid "Execute" -msgstr "" +msgstr "執行" #: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:91 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:186 msgid "Email Alert" @@ -177,151 +177,88 @@ "</p><p>Default: 10 seconds\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>check timeout</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the " -"timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"</p><p>If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. " -"negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-" -"virtual setting.\n" -"</p><p>If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"</p><p>Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"</p><p>If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "</p><p>Default: 5 seconds\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>failure count</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by " -"a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 " -"will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A " -"successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: 1\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>negotiate timeout</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" "</p><p>Timeout in seconds for negotiate checks.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"</p><p>If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout " -"is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" -"</p><p>If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"</p><p>If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "</p><p>Default: 30 seconds\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>fallback</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|" -"sercvicename]</i> [<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b>]\n" -"</p><p>the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers " -"are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p><b><big>fallback</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|sercvicename]</i> [<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b>]\n" +"</p><p>the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>log file</big> = \"</b><i>/path/to/logfile</i><b>\"</b>|" -"syslog_facility\n" -"</p><p>An alternative logfile might be specified with this directive. If the " -"logfile does not have a leading '/', it is assumed to be a <b>syslog</a></b>(3) facility name.\n" +"</p><p><b><big>log file</big> = \"</b><i>/path/to/logfile</i><b>\"</b>|syslog_facility\n" +"</p><p>An alternative logfile might be specified with this directive. If the logfile does not have a leading '/', it is assumed to be a <b>syslog</a></b>(3) facility name.\n" "</p><p>Default: log directly to the file <i>/var/log/ldirectord.log</i>.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>email alert</big> = \"</b><i>emailaddress</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection " -"status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option " -"requires perl\n" -"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using " -"any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on " -"methods.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option requires perl\n" +"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on methods.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>email alert freq</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real " -"server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero " -"seconds will\n" -"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is " -"dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval " -"configuration\n" +"</p><p>Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero seconds will\n" +"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval configuration\n" "option.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: 0\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>email alert status</big> = all</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>starting|<b>running</b>|<b>stopping</b>|<b>reloading</b>,...\n" -"</p><p>Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be " -"sent. <b>all</b> is a short-hand for\n" -"\"<b>starting</b>,<b>running</b>,<b>stopping</b>,<b>reloading</b>\". If " -"<b>none</b> is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise " -"options are ORed\n" +"</p><p><b><big>email alert status</big> = all</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>starting</b>|<b>running</b>|<b>stopping</b>|<b>reloading</b>,...\n" +"</p><p>Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be sent. <b>all</b> is a short-hand for\n" +"\"<b>starting</b>,<b>running</b>,<b>stopping</b>,<b>reloading</b>\". If <b>none</b> is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise options are ORed\n" "with each other.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: all\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>callback</big> = \"</b><i>/path/to/callback</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>If this directive is defined, <b>ldirectord</b> automatically calls " -"the executable <i>/path/to/callback</i> after the configuration file has " -"changed on\n" -"disk. This is useful to update the configuration file through <b>scp</b> on " -"the other heartbeated host. The first argument to the callback is the name " -"of the\n" +"</p><p>If this directive is defined, <b>ldirectord</b> automatically calls the executable <i>/path/to/callback</i> after the configuration file has changed on\n" +"disk. This is useful to update the configuration file through <b>scp</b> on the other heartbeated host. The first argument to the callback is the name of the\n" "configuration.\n" -"</p><p>This directive might also be used to restart <b>ldirectord</b> " -"automatically after the configuration file changed on disk. However, if " -"<b>autoreload</b> is\n" +"</p><p>This directive might also be used to restart <b>ldirectord</b> automatically after the configuration file changed on disk. However, if <b>autoreload</b> is\n" "set to yes, the configuration is reloaded anyway.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>execute</big> = \"</b><i>configuration</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>Use this directive to start an instance of ldirectord for the named " -"<i>configuration</i>.\n" +"</p><p>Use this directive to start an instance of ldirectord for the named <i>configuration</i>.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>auto reload</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" -"</p><p>Defines if <ldirectord> should continuously check the " -"configuration file for modification. If this is set to 'yes' and the " -"configuration file changed\n" -"on disk and its modification time (mtime) is newer than the previous " -"version, the configuration is automatically reloaded.\n" +"</p><p>Defines if <ldirectord> should continuously check the configuration file for modification. If this is set to 'yes' and the configuration file changed\n" +"on disk and its modification time (mtime) is newer than the previous version, the configuration is automatically reloaded.\n" "</p><p>Default: no\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>quiescent</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" -"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then when real or failback servers are determined to " -"be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> " -"table.\n" -"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will " -"be accepted.\n" -"</p><p>This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent " -"connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be " -"routed to the\n" -"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more " -"information on persistant connections.\n" +"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then when real or failback servers are determined to be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table.\n" +"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will be accepted.\n" +"</p><p>This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be routed to the\n" +"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more information on persistant connections.\n" "</p><p>This side-effect can be avoided by running the following:\n" "</p><p>echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/vs/expire_quiescent_template\n" -"</p><p>If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel " -"doesn't have lvs support, <small>LVS</small> support isn't loaded, or the " -"kernel is too\n" -"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load <small>LVS into the kernel if it is possible.\n" -"</p><p>If <i>no</i>, then the real or failback servers will be removed from " -"the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table. The default is <i>yes</i>.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel doesn't have lvs support, <small>LVS</small> support isn't loaded, or the kernel is too\n" +"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load <small>LVS</small> into the kernel if it is possible.\n" +"</p><p>If <i>no</i>, then the real or failback servers will be removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table. The default is <i>yes</i>.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: <i>yes</i>\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>fork</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" -"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then ldirectord will spawn a child proccess for every " -"virtual server, and run checks against the real servers from them. This will " -"increase\n" -"response times to changes in real server status in configurations with many " -"virtual servers. This may also use less memory then running many seperate " -"instances\n" +"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then ldirectord will spawn a child proccess for every virtual server, and run checks against the real servers from them. This will increase\n" +"response times to changes in real server status in configurations with many virtual servers. This may also use less memory then running many seperate instances\n" "of ldirectord. Child processes will be automaticly restarted if they die.\n" "</p><p>Default: <i>no</i>\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>supervised</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" -"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then ldirectord does not go into background mode. All " -"log-messages are redirected to stdout instead of a logfile. This is useful " -"to run\n" -"<b>ldirectord</b> supervised from daemontools. See http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/ or http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html\">http://cr.yp.to/" -"daemontools.html</a> for details.\n" +"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then ldirectord does not go into background mode. All log-messages are redirected to stdout instead of a logfile. This is useful to run\n" +"<b>ldirectord</b> supervised from daemontools. See http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/\">http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/</a> or http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html\">http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html</a> for details.\n" "</p><p>Default: <i>no</i>\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -329,87 +266,42 @@ #: src/include/iplb/helps.rb:127 msgid "" "\n" -"<p><b><big>virtual server</big> =</b> <i>(ip_address|hostname:portnumber|" -"servicename)|firewall-mark</i>\n" -"</p><p>Defines a virtual service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or " -"servicename) or firewall-mark. A firewall-mark is an integer greater than " -"zero. The\n" -"configuration of marking packets is controled using the <tt>\"-m\"</tt> " -"option to <b>ipchains</b>(8). All real services and flags for a virtual " -"service\n" +"<p><b><big>virtual server</big> =</b> <i>(ip_address|hostname:portnumber|servicename)|firewall-mark</i>\n" +"</p><p>Defines a virtual service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or servicename) or firewall-mark. A firewall-mark is an integer greater than zero. The\n" +"configuration of marking packets is controled using the <tt>\"-m\"</tt> option to <b>ipchains</b>(8). All real services and flags for a virtual service\n" "must follow this line immediately and be indented.\n" "\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>real servers</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[->" -"ip_address|hostname][:portnumber|servicename</i>]\n" -"<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b> [<i>weight</i>] [<b>\"</b><i>request<b>\", \"</b><i>receive</i><b>\"</b>]\n" -"</p><p>Defines a real service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or " -"servicename). If the port is omitted then a 0 will be used, this is intended " -"primarily for\n" -"fwmark services where the port for real servers is ignored. Optionally a " -"range of <small>IP</small> addresses (or two hostnames) may be given, in " -"which case\n" -"each <small>IP</small> address in the range will be treated as a real server " -"using the given port. The second argument defines the forwarding method, " -"must be\n" -"<b>gate</b>, <b>ipip</b> or <b>masq</b>. The thrid argument is optional and " -"defines the weight for that real server. If omitted then a weight of 1 will " -"be\n" -"used. The last two arguments are also optional. They define a request-" -"receive pair to be used to check if a server is alive. They override the " -"request-receive\n" -"pair in the virtual server section. These two strings must be quoted. If the " -"request string starts with http://... the IP-address and port of the real\n" -"server is overridden, otherwise the IP-address and port of the real server " -"is used.\n" -"</p><p>For <small>TCP</small> and <small>UDP</small> (non fwmark) virtual " -"services, unless the forwarding method is masq and the <small>IP</small> " -"address of a\n" -"real server is non-local (not present on a interface on the host running " -"ldirectord) then the port of the real server will be set to that of its " -"virtual\n" -"service. That is, port-mapping is only available to if the real server is " -"another machine and the forwarding method is masq. This is due to the way " -"that the\n" +"</p><p><b><big>real servers</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[->ip_address|hostname][:portnumber|servicename</i>]\n" +"<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b> [<i>weight</i>] [<b>\"</b><i>request</i><b>\", \"</b><i>receive</i><b>\"</b>]\n" +"</p><p>Defines a real service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or servicename). If the port is omitted then a 0 will be used, this is intended primarily for\n" +"fwmark services where the port for real servers is ignored. Optionally a range of <small>IP</small> addresses (or two hostnames) may be given, in which case\n" +"each <small>IP</small> address in the range will be treated as a real server using the given port. The second argument defines the forwarding method, must be\n" +"<b>gate</b>, <b>ipip</b> or <b>masq</b>. The thrid argument is optional and defines the weight for that real server. If omitted then a weight of 1 will be\n" +"used. The last two arguments are also optional. They define a request-receive pair to be used to check if a server is alive. They override the request-receive\n" +"pair in the virtual server section. These two strings must be quoted. If the request string starts with http://... the IP-address and port of the real\n" +"server is overridden, otherwise the IP-address and port of the real server is used.\n" +"</p><p>For <small>TCP</small> and <small>UDP</small> (non fwmark) virtual services, unless the forwarding method is masq and the <small>IP</small> address of a\n" +"real server is non-local (not present on a interface on the host running ldirectord) then the port of the real server will be set to that of its virtual\n" +"service. That is, port-mapping is only available to if the real server is another machine and the forwarding method is masq. This is due to the way that the\n" "underlying <small>LVS</small> code in the kernel functions.\n" -"</p><p>More than one of these entries may be inside a virtual section. The " -"checktimeout, negotiatetimeout, failurecount, fallback, emailalert, " -"emailalertfreq and\n" -"quiescent options listed above may also appear inside a virtual section, in " -"which case the global setting is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>More than one of these entries may be inside a virtual section. The checktimeout, negotiatetimeout, failurecount, fallback, emailalert, emailalertfreq and\n" +"quiescent options listed above may also appear inside a virtual section, in which case the global setting is overridden.\n" "\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>check type</big> = connect</b>|<b>external</b>|<b>negotiate|<b>off</b>|<b>on</b>|<b>ping</b>|<b>checktimeout</b><i>N</i>\n" -"</p><p>Type of check to perform. Negotiate sends a request and matches a " -"receive string. Connect only attemts to make a <small>TCP/IP</small> " -"connection, thus the\n" -"request and receive strings may be omitted. If checktype is a number then " -"negotiate and connect is combined so that after each N connect attempts one " -"negotiate\n" -"attempt is performed. This is useful to check often if a service answers and " -"in much longer intervalls a negotiating check is done. Ping means that\n" -"<small>ICMP</small> ping will be used to test the availability of real " -"servers. Ping is also used as the connect check for <small>UDP</small> " -"services. Off\n" -"means no checking will take place and no real or fallback servers will be " -"activated. On means no checking will take place and real servers will always " -"be\n" +"</p><p><b><big>check type</big> = connect</b>|<b>external</b>|<b>negotiate</b>|<b>off</b>|<b>on</b>|<b>ping</b>|<b>checktimeout</b><i>N</i>\n" +"</p><p>Type of check to perform. Negotiate sends a request and matches a receive string. Connect only attemts to make a <small>TCP/IP</small> connection, thus the\n" +"request and receive strings may be omitted. If checktype is a number then negotiate and connect is combined so that after each N connect attempts one negotiate\n" +"attempt is performed. This is useful to check often if a service answers and in much longer intervalls a negotiating check is done. Ping means that\n" +"<small>ICMP</small> ping will be used to test the availability of real servers. Ping is also used as the connect check for <small>UDP</small> services. Off\n" +"means no checking will take place and no real or fallback servers will be activated. On means no checking will take place and real servers will always be\n" "activated. Default is <i>negotiate</i>.\n" "\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>service</big> = dns</b>|<b>ftp</b>|<b>http</b>|<b>https</b>|" -"<b>imap</b>|<b>imaps</b>|<b>ldap</b>|<b>mysql</b>|<b>nntp</b>|<b>none</b>|" -"<b>oracle</b>|<b>pgsql</b>|<b>pop</b>|<b>pops</b>|<b>radius</b>|" -"<b>simpletcp</b>|<b>sip</b>|<b>smtp</b>\n" -"</p><p>The type of service to monitor when using checktype=negotiate. None " -"denotes a service that will not be monitored.\n" -"</p><p>simpletcp sends the <b>request</b> string to the server and tests it " -"against the <b>receive</b> regexp. The other types of checks connect to the " -"server\n" -"using the specified protocol. Please see the <b>request</b> and <b>receive sections for protocol specific information.\n" +"</p><p><b><big>service</big> = dns</b>|<b>ftp</b>|<b>http</b>|<b>https</b>|<b>imap</b>|<b>imaps</b>|<b>ldap</b>|<b>mysql</b>|<b>nntp</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>oracle</b>|<b>pgsql</b>|<b>pop</b>|<b>pops</b>|<b>radius</b>|<b>simpletcp</b>|<b>sip</b>|<b>smtp</b>\n" +"</p><p>The type of service to monitor when using checktype=negotiate. None denotes a service that will not be monitored.\n" +"</p><p>simpletcp sends the <b>request</b> string to the server and tests it against the <b>receive</b> regexp. The other types of checks connect to the server\n" +"using the specified protocol. Please see the <b>request</b> and <b>receive</b> sections for protocol specific information.\n" "</p><p>Default:\n" "</p>

\n" "<dt>* Virtual server port is 21: ftp\n" @@ -432,9 +324,7 @@ "\n" "\n" "</dt><dt><b><big>check command</big> = \"</b><i>path to script</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"<p>This setting is used if checktype is external and is the command to be " -"run to check the status of a real server. It should exit with status 0 if " -"everything\n" +"<p>This setting is used if checktype is external and is the command to be run to check the status of a real server. It should exit with status 0 if everything\n" "is ok, or non-zero otherwise.\n" "</p><p>Four parameters are passed to the script:\n" "</p></dt><dt>* virtual server ip/firewall mark\n" @@ -445,105 +335,68 @@ "\n" "\n" "<p><b><big>check port</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>Number of port to monitor. Sometimes check port differs from service " -"port.\n" +"</p><p>Number of port to monitor. Sometimes check port differs from service port.\n" "</p><p>Default: port specified for each real server\n" "\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>request</big> = \"</b><i>uri to requested object</i><b>\"\n" -"</p><p>This object will be requested each checkinterval seconds on each real " -"server. The string must be inside quotes. Note that this string may be " -"overridden by\n" +"</p><p><b><big>request</big> = \"</b><i>uri to requested object</i><b>\"</b>\n" +"</p><p>This object will be requested each checkinterval seconds on each real server. The string must be inside quotes. Note that this string may be overridden by\n" "an optional per real-server based request-string.\n" -"</p><p>For a <small>DNS</small> check this should the name of an A record, " -"or the address of a <small>PTR</small> record to look up.\n" -"</p><p>For a MySQL, Oracle or PostgeSQL check, this should be an <small>SQL query. The data returned is not checked, only that the answer is one " -"or more\n" +"</p><p>For a <small>DNS</small> check this should the name of an A record, or the address of a <small>PTR</small> record to look up.\n" +"</p><p>For a MySQL, Oracle or PostgeSQL check, this should be an <small>SQL</small> query. The data returned is not checked, only that the answer is one or more\n" "rows. This is a required setting.\n" -"</p><p>For a simpletcp check, this string is sent verbatim except any " -"occurances of \n" +"</p><p>For a simpletcp check, this string is sent verbatim except any occurances of \n" " are replaced with a new line character.\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>receive</big> = \"</b><i>regexp to compare</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>If the requested result contains this <i>regexp to compare</i>, the " -"real server is declared alive. The regexp must be inside quotes. Keep in " -"mind that\n" -"regexps are not plain strings and that you need to escape the special " -"characters if they should as literals. Note that this regexp may be " -"overridden by an\n" +"</p><p>If the requested result contains this <i>regexp to compare</i>, the real server is declared alive. The regexp must be inside quotes. Keep in mind that\n" +"regexps are not plain strings and that you need to escape the special characters if they should as literals. Note that this regexp may be overridden by an\n" "optional per real-server based receive regexp.\n" -"</p><p>For a <small>DNS</small> check this should be any one the A record's " -"addresses or any one of the <small>PTR</small> record's names.\n" +"</p><p>For a <small>DNS</small> check this should be any one the A record's addresses or any one of the <small>PTR</small> record's names.\n" "</p><p>For a MySQL check, the receive setting is not used.\n" "\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>http method</big> = <small>GET</small></b> | <b><small>HEAD</b>\n" -"</p><p>Sets the <small>HTTP</small> method which should be used to fetch the " -"<small>URI</small> specified in the request-string. <small>GET</small> is " -"the\n" -"method used by default if the parameter is not set. If <small>HEAD</small> " -"is used, the receive-string should be unset.\n" +"</p><p><b><big>http method</big> = <small>GET</small></b> | <b><small>HEAD</small></b>\n" +"</p><p>Sets the <small>HTTP</small> method which should be used to fetch the <small>URI</small> specified in the request-string. <small>GET</small> is the\n" +"method used by default if the parameter is not set. If <small>HEAD</small> is used, the receive-string should be unset.\n" "</p><p>Default: <small>GET</small>\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>virtual host</big> = \"</b><i>hostname</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>Used when using a negotiate check with <small>HTTP</small> or " -"<small>HTTPS</small> . Sets the host header used in the <small>HTTP</small> " -"request. In the\n" -"case of <small>HTTPS</small> this generally needs to match the common name " -"of the <small>SSL</small> certificate. If not set then the host header will " -"be\n" -"derived from the request url for the real server if present. As a last " -"resort the <small>IP</small> address of the real server will be used.\n" +"</p><p>Used when using a negotiate check with <small>HTTP</small> or <small>HTTPS</small> . Sets the host header used in the <small>HTTP</small> request. In the\n" +"case of <small>HTTPS</small> this generally needs to match the common name of the <small>SSL</small> certificate. If not set then the host header will be\n" +"derived from the request url for the real server if present. As a last resort the <small>IP</small> address of the real server will be used.\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>login</big> = \"</b><i>username</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>For <small>FTP</small> , <small>IMAP</small> , <small>LDAP</small> , " -"MySQL, Oracle, <small>POP</small> and PostgreSQL, the username used to log " -"in.\n" +"</p><p>For <small>FTP</small> , <small>IMAP</small> , <small>LDAP</small> , MySQL, Oracle, <small>POP</small> and PostgreSQL, the username used to log in.\n" "</p><p>For Radius the passwd is used for the attribute User-Name.\n" -"</p><p>For <small>SIP</small> , the username is used as both the to and from " -"address for an <small>OPTIONS</small> query.\n" +"</p><p>For <small>SIP</small> , the username is used as both the to and from address for an <small>OPTIONS</small> query.\n" "</p><p>Default:\n" "</p></dt><dt>* <small>FTP:</small> Anonymous\n" -"</dt><dt>* MySQL Oracle, and PostgreSQL: Must be specified in the " -"configuration\n" -"</dt><dt>* <small>SIP:</small> ldirectord@<hostname>, hostname is " -"derived as per the passwd option below.\n" -"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string, which denotes that case authentication " -"will not be attempted.\n" +"</dt><dt>* MySQL Oracle, and PostgreSQL: Must be specified in the configuration\n" +"</dt><dt>* <small>SIP:</small> ldirectord@<hostname>, hostname is derived as per the passwd option below.\n" +"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string, which denotes that case authentication will not be attempted.\n" "\n" "\n" "</dt><dt><b><big>password</big> = \"</b><i>password</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"<p>Password to use to login to <small>FTP</small> , <small>IMAP</small> , " -"<small>LDAP</small> , MySQL, Oracle, <small>POP</small> , PostgreSQL and\n" +"<p>Password to use to login to <small>FTP</small> , <small>IMAP</small> , <small>LDAP</small> , MySQL, Oracle, <small>POP</small> , PostgreSQL and\n" "<small>SIP</small> servers.\n" "</p><p>For Radius the passwd is used for the attribute User-Password.\n" "</p><p>Default:\n" -"</p></dt><dt>* <small>FTP:</small> ldirectord@<hostname>, where " -"hostname is the environment variable <small>HOSTNAME</small> evaluated at " -"run time, or sourced\n" +"</p></dt><dt>* <small>FTP:</small> ldirectord@<hostname>, where hostname is the environment variable <small>HOSTNAME</small> evaluated at run time, or sourced\n" "from uname if unset.\n" -"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string. In the case of <small>LDAP</small> , " -"MySQL, Oracle, and PostgreSQL this means that authentication will not be " -"performed.\n" +"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string. In the case of <small>LDAP</small> , MySQL, Oracle, and PostgreSQL this means that authentication will not be performed.\n" "\n" "\n" "</dt><dt><b><big>database name</big> = \"</b><i>databasename</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"<p>Database to use for MySQL, Oracle and PostgreSQL servers, this is the " -"database that the query (set by <b>receive</b> above) will be performed " -"against. This\n" +"<p>Database to use for MySQL, Oracle and PostgreSQL servers, this is the database that the query (set by <b>receive</b> above) will be performed against. This\n" "is a required setting.\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>radius secret</big> = \"</b><i>radiussecret</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>Secret to use for Radius servers, this is the secret used to perform " -"an Access-Request with the username (set by <b>login</b> above) and passwd " -"(set by\n" +"</p><p>Secret to use for Radius servers, this is the secret used to perform an Access-Request with the username (set by <b>login</b> above) and passwd (set by\n" "<b>passwd</b> above).\n" "</p><p>Default: empty string\n" "\n" @@ -557,120 +410,73 @@ "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>scheduler</big> =</b> <i>scheduler_name</i>\n" -"</p><p>Scheduler to be used by <small>LVS</small> for loadbalancing. For an " -"information on the available sehedulers please see the <b>ipvsadm</a></b>(8) man page.\n" +"</p><p>Scheduler to be used by <small>LVS</small> for loadbalancing. For an information on the available sehedulers please see the <b>ipvsadm</a></b>(8) man page.\n" "</p><p>Default: \"wrr\"\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>protocol</big> = tcp</b>|<b>udp</b>|<b>fwm</b>\n" -"</p><p>Protocol to be used. If the virtual is specified as an <small>IP address and port then it must be one of tcp or udp. If a firewall " -"mark then the\n" +"</p><p>Protocol to be used. If the virtual is specified as an <small>IP</small> address and port then it must be one of tcp or udp. If a firewall mark then the\n" "protocol must be fwm.\n" "</p><p>Default:\n" -"</p></dt><dt>* Virtual is an <small>IP</small> address and port, and the " -"port is not 53: tcp\n" -"</dt><dt>* Virtual is an <small>IP</small> address and port, and the port is " -"53: udp\n" +"</p></dt><dt>* Virtual is an <small>IP</small> address and port, and the port is not 53: tcp\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual is an <small>IP</small> address and port, and the port is 53: udp\n" "</dt><dt>* Virtual is a firewall mark: fwm\n" "</dt></dl>\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>check timeout</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the " -"timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"</p><p>If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. " -"negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-" -"virtual setting.\n" -"</p><p>If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"</p><p>Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"</p><p>If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "</p><p>Default: 5 seconds\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>negotiate timeout</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" "</p><p>Timeout in seconds for negotiate checks.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"</p><p>If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout " -"is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" -"</p><p>If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"</p><p>If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "</p><p>Default: 30 seconds\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>failure count</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by " -"a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 " -"will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A " -"successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: 1\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>email alert</big> = \"</b><i>emailaddress</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection " -"status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option " -"requires perl\n" -"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using " -"any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on " -"methods.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option requires perl\n" +"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on methods.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>email alert freq</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real " -"server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero " -"seconds will\n" -"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is " -"dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval " -"configuration\n" +"</p><p>Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero seconds will\n" +"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval configuration\n" "option.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: 0\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>email alert status</big> = all</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>starting|<b>running</b>|<b>stopping</b>|<b>reloading</b>,...\n" -"</p><p>Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be " -"sent. <b>all</b> is a short-hand for\n" -"\"<b>starting</b>,<b>running</b>,<b>stopping</b>,<b>reloading</b>\". If " -"<b>none</b> is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise " -"options are ORed\n" +"</p><p><b><big>email alert status</big> = all</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>starting</b>|<b>running</b>|<b>stopping</b>|<b>reloading</b>,...\n" +"</p><p>Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be sent. <b>all</b> is a short-hand for\n" +"\"<b>starting</b>,<b>running</b>,<b>stopping</b>,<b>reloading</b>\". If <b>none</b> is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise options are ORed\n" "with each other.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: all\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>fallback</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|" -"sercvicename]</i> [<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b>]\n" -"</p><p>the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers " -"are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p><b><big>fallback</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|sercvicename]</i> [<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b>]\n" +"</p><p>the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>quiescent</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" -"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then when real or failback servers are determined to " -"be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> " -"table.\n" -"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will " -"be accepted.\n" -"</p><p>This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent " -"connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be " -"routed to the\n" -"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more " -"information on persistant connections.\n" +"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then when real or failback servers are determined to be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table.\n" +"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will be accepted.\n" +"</p><p>This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be routed to the\n" +"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more information on persistant connections.\n" "</p><p>This side-effect can be avoided by running the following:\n" "</p><p>echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/vs/expire_quiescent_template\n" -"</p><p>If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel " -"doesn't have lvs support, <small>LVS</small> support isn't loaded, or the " -"kernel is too\n" -"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load <small>LVS into the kernel if it is possible.\n" -"</p><p>If <i>no</i>, then the real or failback servers will be removed from " -"the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table. The default is <i>yes</i>.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel doesn't have lvs support, <small>LVS</small> support isn't loaded, or the kernel is too\n" +"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load <small>LVS</small> into the kernel if it is possible.\n" +"</p><p>If <i>no</i>, then the real or failback servers will be removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table. The default is <i>yes</i>.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: <i>yes</i>\n" "\n" "\n" @@ -688,7 +494,7 @@ #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:151 msgid "Service" -msgstr "" +msgstr "服務" #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:152 msgid "Check Command" @@ -700,7 +506,7 @@ #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:160 msgid "Request" -msgstr "" +msgstr "要求" #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:162 msgid "Receive" @@ -712,11 +518,11 @@ #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:177 msgid "Login" -msgstr "" +msgstr "登入" #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:178 msgid "Password" -msgstr "" +msgstr "密碼" #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:180 msgid "Database Name" @@ -732,7 +538,7 @@ #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:200 msgid "Netmask" -msgstr "" +msgstr "網路遮罩" #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:202 msgid "Scheduler" @@ -740,7 +546,7 @@ #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:211 msgid "Protocol" -msgstr "" +msgstr "協定" #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:231 msgid "Virtual Servers" @@ -748,15 +554,15 @@ #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:234 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:301 msgid "Add" -msgstr "" +msgstr "新增" #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:235 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:303 msgid "Edit" -msgstr "" +msgstr "編輯" #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:236 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:302 msgid "Delete" -msgstr "" +msgstr "刪除" #. disable the delete & edit button if vserver box is empty #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:296 @@ -782,11 +588,11 @@ #. return `cacel or a string #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:342 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:427 msgid "OK" -msgstr "" +msgstr "確定" #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:343 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:428 msgid "Cancel" -msgstr "" +msgstr "取消" #. split the real server ip value; #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:411 @@ -824,7 +630,7 @@ #. Initialization dialog contents #: src/include/iplb/wizards.rb:142 msgid "Initializing..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "正在啟始化..." #. Read all iplb settings #. @return true on success @@ -851,7 +657,7 @@ #: src/modules/Iplb.rb:225 src/modules/Iplb.rb:330 msgid "Finished" -msgstr "" +msgstr "已完成" #. Write all iplb settings #. @return true on success @@ -861,19 +667,19 @@ #: src/modules/Iplb.rb:326 msgid "Write the settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "寫入設定" #: src/modules/Iplb.rb:326 msgid "Run SuSEconfig" -msgstr "" +msgstr "執行 SuSEconfig" #: src/modules/Iplb.rb:328 msgid "Writing the settings..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "正在寫入設定..." #: src/modules/Iplb.rb:329 msgid "Running SuSEconfig..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "正在執行 SuSEconfig..." #. write global conf #. check for ipv6 address to decide whether to add "6=" or "=" @@ -883,10 +689,10 @@ #. to check whether it is an ipv6 address; #: src/modules/Iplb.rb:355 src/modules/Iplb.rb:392 src/modules/Iplb.rb:405 msgid "Cannot write settings." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法寫入設定。" #. TODO FIXME: your code here... #. Configuration summary text for autoyast #: src/modules/Iplb.rb:441 msgid "Configuration summary..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "組態摘要..." Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/iscsi-client.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/iscsi-client.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/iscsi-client.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: iscsi-client\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-18 13:36+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -336,8 +336,7 @@ #. table of connected targets #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:90 msgid "" -"List of current sessions. To add a new target, select it and press <b>Add.\n" +"List of current sessions. To add a new target, select it and press <b>Add</b>.\n" "To remove it, press <b>Log Out</b>.\n" "To change the start-up status, press <b>Toggle</b>.\n" msgstr "" @@ -352,58 +351,41 @@ msgstr "<h1>警告</h1>" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:97 src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:115 -msgid "" -"<p>When accessing an iSCSI device <b>READ</b>/<b>WRITE</b>, make sure that " -"this access is exclusive. Otherwise there is a potential risk of data " -"corruption.</p>\n" -msgstr "" -"<p>以 <b>讀</b>/<b>寫 </b>權限存取 iSCSI 設備時，請確定這是專用存取動作。否則" -"就有損毀資料的風險。</p>\n" +msgid "<p>When accessing an iSCSI device <b>READ</b>/<b>WRITE</b>, make sure that this access is exclusive. Otherwise there is a potential risk of data corruption.</p>\n" +msgstr "<p>以 <b>讀</b>/<b>寫 </b>權限存取 iSCSI 設備時，請確定這是專用存取動作。否則就有損毀資料的風險。</p>\n" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:100 msgid "" -"<p><b>InitiatorName</b> is a value from <tt>/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi. \n" -"In case you have iBFT, this value will be added from there and you are only " -"able to change it in the BIOS setup.</p>" +"<p><b>InitiatorName</b> is a value from <tt>/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi</tt>. \n" +"In case you have iBFT, this value will be added from there and you are only able to change it in the BIOS setup.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>啟動器名稱</b> 是來自 <tt>/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi</tt> 的值。\n" -"如果您有 iBFT，則此值將從該處取代，而您將無法進行變更 (請在 BIOS 設定中進" -"行)。</p>" +"如果您有 iBFT，則此值將從該處取代，而您將無法進行變更 (請在 BIOS 設定中進行)。</p>" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:103 msgid "" -"If you want to use <b>iSNS</b> (Internet Storage Name Service) for " -"discovering targets instead of the default SendTargets method,\n" -"fill in the IP address of the iSNS server and port. The default port should " -"be 3205.\n" +"If you want to use <b>iSNS</b> (Internet Storage Name Service) for discovering targets instead of the default SendTargets method,\n" +"fill in the IP address of the iSNS server and port. The default port should be 3205.\n" msgstr "" -"若您想要使用 <b>iSNS</b> (網際網路儲存名稱服務) 來發現目標而非預設的 " -"SendTargets 方法，\n" +"若您想要使用 <b>iSNS</b> (網際網路儲存名稱服務) 來發現目標而非預設的 SendTargets 方法，\n" "填入iSNS 伺服器的 IP 位址與埠號。預設的埠號應為 3205。\n" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:108 msgid "" "Enter the <b>IP Address</b> of the discovered server.\n" -"Only change <b>Port</b> if needed. For authentication, use <b>Username</b> " -"and <b>Password</b>. If you do not need authentication,\n" +"Only change <b>Port</b> if needed. For authentication, use <b>Username</b> and <b>Password</b>. If you do not need authentication,\n" "select <b>No Authentication</b>.\n" msgstr "" "輸入所發現伺服器的<b>「IP 位址」</b>。\n" -"僅在必要時變更<b>「埠」</b>。如需驗證，請使用<b>「使用者名稱」</b>和<b>「密" -"碼」</b>。若您不需要驗證，\n" +"僅在必要時變更<b>「埠」</b>。如需驗證，請使用<b>「使用者名稱」</b>和<b>「密碼」</b>。若您不需要驗證，\n" "請選取<b>「無驗證」</b>。\n" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:122 -msgid "" -"List of nodes offered by the iSCSI target. Select one item and click " -"<b>Connect</b>. " +msgid "List of nodes offered by the iSCSI target. Select one item and click <b>Connect</b>. " msgstr "iSCSI 目標所提供的節點清單。選取一個項目，並按一下<b>「連線」</b>。" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:129 -msgid "" -"Select the type of authentication and enter the <b>Username</b> and " -"<b>Password</b>." +msgid "Select the type of authentication and enter the <b>Username</b> and <b>Password</b>." msgstr "選取驗證類型，並輸入<b>「使用者名稱」</b>和<b>「密碼」</b>。" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:132 @@ -414,11 +396,9 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>manual</b> is for iSCSI targets which are not to be connected by\n" "default, the user needs to connect them manually</p>\n" -"<p><b>onboot</b> is for iSCSI targets to be connected during boot, i.e. " -"when\n" +"<p><b>onboot</b> is for iSCSI targets to be connected during boot, i.e. when\n" "root is on iSCSI. As such it will be evaluated by the initrd.</p>\n" -"<p><b>automatic</b> is for iSCSI targets to be connected when the iSCSI " -"service\n" +"<p><b>automatic</b> is for iSCSI targets to be connected when the iSCSI service\n" "starts up.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>手動</b>iSCSI 目標預設是不進行連線的，使用者必須手動進行連線</p>\n" @@ -429,9 +409,7 @@ #. list of discovered targets #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:142 -msgid "" -"List of discovered targets. Start a new <b>Discovery</b> or <b>Connect</b> " -"to any target." +msgid "List of discovered targets. Start a new <b>Discovery</b> or <b>Connect</b> to any target." msgstr "發現的目標清單。啟動新<b>「搜索」</b>作業，或<b>「連線」</b>任何目標。" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:145 @@ -503,12 +481,12 @@ "iqn.2007-04.cz.server:storage.disk.sdb\n" #. brackets needed around IPv6 -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:626 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:625 msgid "Insert the IP address." msgstr "插入 IP 位址。" #. validate port number -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:632 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:631 msgid "Insert the port." msgstr "插入埠。" @@ -516,39 +494,36 @@ #. ******************* target table ************************* #. initialize dialog for all targets from portal (connected/disconnected) #. enable/disable connect button according target is or not already connected -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:734 -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:839 -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:867 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:733 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:838 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:866 msgid "True" msgstr "真" -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:734 -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:839 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:733 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:838 msgid "False" msgstr "假" #. check if not already connected #. check if not already connected -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:772 -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:892 -msgid "" -"The target with this TargetName is already connected. Make sure that " -"multipathing is enabled to prevent data corruption." -msgstr "" -"已連線擁有此 TargetName 的目標。 請確定已啟用「多重路徑」來避免資料毀損。" +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:771 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:891 +msgid "The target with this TargetName is already connected. Make sure that multipathing is enabled to prevent data corruption." +msgstr "已連線擁有此 TargetName 的目標。 請確定已啟用「多重路徑」來避免資料毀損。" -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:775 -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:895 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:774 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:894 msgid "Continue" msgstr "繼續" -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:776 -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:896 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:775 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:895 msgid "Cancel" msgstr "取消" #. check if is not already connected -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:886 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:885 msgid "The target is already connected." msgstr "目標已經連線。" @@ -565,9 +540,7 @@ #. don't check interactively for packages (bnc#367300) #. skip it during second stage or when create AY profile #: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:96 -msgid "" -"<p>To configure the iSCSI initiator, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>To configure the iSCSI initiator, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" msgstr "<p>若要設定 iSCSI 啟動器的組態，必須安裝 <b>%1</b> 套件。</p>" #: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:99 @@ -637,10 +610,10 @@ #: src/modules/IscsiClientLib.rb:73 msgid "all" -msgstr "" +msgstr "全部" #. } -#: src/modules/IscsiClientLib.rb:679 +#: src/modules/IscsiClientLib.rb:694 msgid "" "InitiatorName from iBFT and from <tt>/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi</tt>\n" "differ. The old initiator name will be replaced by the value of iBFT and a \n" @@ -653,6 +626,6 @@ "請在 BIOS 中變更。\n" #. do discovery first -#: src/modules/IscsiClientLib.rb:1132 +#: src/modules/IscsiClientLib.rb:1147 msgid "Configuration summary..." msgstr "組態摘要..." Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/iscsi-lio-server.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/iscsi-lio-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/iscsi-lio-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2001-06-05 18:04+02:00\n" "Last-Translator: 裴寒牧 \n" "Language-Team: 中華 \n" @@ -406,52 +406,31 @@ #. discovery authentication #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:119 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Select the type of authentication. Use <b>No Authentication</b> or one of " -"<b>Incoming</b> and <b>Outgoing</b> (can be both together). Then insert " -"<b>User</b> and <b>Password</b>." -msgstr "" -"選取驗證類型。使用<b>「無驗證」</b>或<b>「內送」</b>和<b>「外送」</b>其中之" -"一 (亦可兩者皆用)。然後插入<b>「使用者」</b>和<b>「密碼」</b>。\n" +msgid "Select the type of authentication. Use <b>No Authentication</b> or one of <b>Incoming</b> and <b>Outgoing</b> (can be both together). Then insert <b>User</b> and <b>Password</b>." +msgstr "選取驗證類型。使用<b>「無驗證」</b>或<b>「內送」</b>和<b>「外送」</b>其中之一 (亦可兩者皆用)。然後插入<b>「使用者」</b>和<b>「密碼」</b>。\n" #. target client setup. #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:124 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Add</b> to give a client access for a LUN imported from target " -"portal group. Specify which client is allowed to access it (client name is " -"<i>InitiatorName</i> in '/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi' on iscsi " -"initiator). <b>Delete</b> will remove the client access to the LUN.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Add</b> to give a client access for a LUN imported from target portal group. Specify which client is allowed to access it (client name is <i>InitiatorName</i> in '/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi' on iscsi initiator). <b>Delete</b> will remove the client access to the LUN.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:130 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Edit LUN</b> one can modify the LUN mapping. Please note that LUN " -"target number must be unique.<br>After pressing <b>Edit Auth</b>, select the " -"type of authentication. Use <b>Incoming</b>, <b>Outgoing</b> or both " -"together. Then insert <b>User</b> and <b>Password</b>. If <b>Use " -"Authentication</b> is disabled in previous dialog, <b>Edit Auth</b> is " -"disabled here.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>Edit LUN</b> one can modify the LUN mapping. Please note that LUN target number must be unique.<br>After pressing <b>Edit Auth</b>, select the type of authentication. Use <b>Incoming</b>, <b>Outgoing</b> or both together. Then insert <b>User</b> and <b>Password</b>. If <b>Use Authentication</b> is disabled in previous dialog, <b>Edit Auth</b> is disabled here.</p>" msgstr "" -"選取驗證類型。 使用<b>「無驗證」</b>或<b>「內送」</b>和<b>「外送」</b>其中之" -"一 (亦可兩者皆用)。 然後插入<b>「使用者」</b>和<b>「密碼」</b>。 \n" -"內送驗證可以<b>「新增」</b>更多使用者和密碼組合，也可以<b>「編輯」</b>和" -"<b>「刪除」</b>。" +"選取驗證類型。 使用<b>「無驗證」</b>或<b>「內送」</b>和<b>「外送」</b>其中之一 (亦可兩者皆用)。 然後插入<b>「使用者」</b>和<b>「密碼」</b>。 \n" +"內送驗證可以<b>「新增」</b>更多使用者和密碼組合，也可以<b>「編輯」</b>和<b>「刪除」</b>。" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:136 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Copy</b> offers the possibility to give an additional client access to " -"the LUN.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Copy</b> offers the possibility to give an additional client access to the LUN.</p>" msgstr "" #. target dialog #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:138 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"List of offered targets and target portal groups. Create a new target by " -"clicking <b>Add</b>.\n" -"To delete or modify an item, select it and press <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete." +"List of offered targets and target portal groups. Create a new target by clicking <b>Add</b>.\n" +"To delete or modify an item, select it and press <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b>." msgstr "" "提供的目標清單。 按一下<b>「新增」</b>建立新目標。 \n" "若要刪除或修改，請選取項目，並按<b>「修改」</b>或<b>「刪除」</b>。" @@ -466,11 +445,9 @@ #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:146 msgid "" -"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a " -"<b>LUN</b>.\n" +"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a <b>LUN</b>.\n" "You have to provide <b>path</b> to either block devices or file. \n" -"The <b>LUN name</b> is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the <b>LUN. \n" +"The <b>LUN name</b> is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the <b>LUN</b>. \n" "The name needs to be unique within the target portal group. If the user\n" "does not provide a name for LUN, it is generated automatically." msgstr "" @@ -478,8 +455,7 @@ #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:153 #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:172 msgid "" -"<p>Under <b>Ip Address</b> and <b>Port Number</b> you specify under which " -"address\n" +"<p>Under <b>Ip Address</b> and <b>Port Number</b> you specify under which address\n" "and port the service will be available. Default for port number is 3260.\n" "Only ip addresses assigned to one of the network cards are possible." msgstr "" @@ -491,32 +467,25 @@ #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:165 msgid "" -"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a " -"lun.\n" +"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a lun.\n" "You have to provide <b>path</b> to either block devices or file. \n" -"The <b>LUN name</b> is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the <b>LUN. \n" +"The <b>LUN name</b> is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the <b>LUN</b>. \n" "The name needs to be unique within the target portal group. If the user\n" "does not provide a name for LUN, it is generated automatically." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:179 -msgid "" -"It is possible to <b>add</b>, <b>edit</b> or <b>delete</b> all additional " -"configuration options." +msgid "It is possible to <b>add</b>, <b>edit</b> or <b>delete</b> all additional configuration options." msgstr "您可<b>新增</b>、<b>編輯</b>或<b>刪除</b>所有額外的組態選項。" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:184 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"Edit <b>LUN</b> number if needed, set <b>Type</b> (nullio is for testing " -"purposes).\n" -"If Type=fileio set <b>Path</b> to disk device or file.<b>SCSI ID</b> and " -"<b>Sectors</b> are optional." +"Edit <b>LUN</b> number if needed, set <b>Type</b> (nullio is for testing purposes).\n" +"If Type=fileio set <b>Path</b> to disk device or file.<b>SCSI ID</b> and <b>Sectors</b> are optional." msgstr "" "必要時編輯 <b>LUN</b> 數、設定<b>「類型」</b> (nullio 僅供測試用途)。 \n" -"如果 Type=fileio，請將<b>「路徑」</b>設為磁碟設備或檔案。<b>「SCSI ID」</b>與" -"<b>「磁區」</b>是選擇性，非必要設定。" +"如果 Type=fileio，請將<b>「路徑」</b>設為磁碟設備或檔案。<b>「SCSI ID」</b>與<b>「磁區」</b>是選擇性，非必要設定。" #. save discovery authentication or authentication for given target #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:145 Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/iscsi-server.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/iscsi-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/iscsi-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: iscsi-server\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-27 15:58+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-18 13:37+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/isns.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/isns.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/isns.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-30 11:31+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -197,57 +197,29 @@ "設定 iSNS 伺服器組態。<br></p>\n" #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:39 -msgid "" -"<b><big>iSNS Server location</big></b><br>The DNS name or the IP address of " -"the iSNS service can be entered as the iSNS address.\n" -msgstr "" -"<b><big>iSNS 伺服器位置</big></b><br> DNS 名稱或 iSNS 服務的 IP 位址可輸入作" -"為 iSNS 位址。\n" +msgid "<b><big>iSNS Server location</big></b><br>The DNS name or the IP address of the iSNS service can be entered as the iSNS address.\n" +msgstr "<b><big>iSNS 伺服器位置</big></b><br> DNS 名稱或 iSNS 服務的 IP 位址可輸入作為 iSNS 位址。\n" #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:42 -msgid "" -"<p>The list of all available iSCSI nodes registered with the iSNS service " -"are displayed.</p> <p>Nodes are registered by iSCSI initiators and iSCSI " -"targets.</p> <p> It is only possible to <b>delete</b> them. Deleting a node " -"removes it from the iSNS database.</p>" +msgid "<p>The list of all available iSCSI nodes registered with the iSNS service are displayed.</p> <p>Nodes are registered by iSCSI initiators and iSCSI targets.</p> <p> It is only possible to <b>delete</b> them. Deleting a node removes it from the iSNS database.</p>" msgstr "" #. discovery domains #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:46 -msgid "" -"A list of all discovery domains is displayed. It is possible to <b>Create a discovery domain or <b>Delete</b> one. <p>Deleting a domain removes the " -"members from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node members.</p>" +msgid "A list of all discovery domains is displayed. It is possible to <b>Create</b> a discovery domain or <b>Delete</b> one. <p>Deleting a domain removes the members from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node members.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:49 -msgid "" -"A list of all iSCSI nodes are displayed by discovery domain. Selecting " -"another discovery domain refreshes the list with members from that discovery " -"domain. It is possible to <b>Add</b> an iSCSI node to a discovery domain or " -"<b>Delete</b> the node. <p>Deleting a node removes it from the domain but " -"does not delete the iSCSI node</p> <p>Creating an iSCSI node allows a not " -"yet registered node to be added as a member of the discovery domain. When " -"the initiator or target registers this node then it becomes part of this " -"domain</p> <p>When an iSCSI initiator does a discovery request, the iSNS " -"service returns all iSCSI node targets that are members of the same " -"Discovery Domains.</p> " +msgid "A list of all iSCSI nodes are displayed by discovery domain. Selecting another discovery domain refreshes the list with members from that discovery domain. It is possible to <b>Add</b> an iSCSI node to a discovery domain or <b>Delete</b> the node. <p>Deleting a node removes it from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node</p> <p>Creating an iSCSI node allows a not yet registered node to be added as a member of the discovery domain. When the initiator or target registers this node then it becomes part of this domain</p> <p>When an iSCSI initiator does a discovery request, the iSNS service returns all iSCSI node targets that are members of the same Discovery Domains.</p> " msgstr "" #. dds table dialog #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:53 -msgid "" -"At the top a list of all Discovery Domain Sets are displayed. Discovery " -"Domains belong to Discovery Domain Sets. <p>A Discovery Domain must be a " -"member of a Discovery Domain Set in order to be active. </p><p>In an iSNS " -"database, a Discovery Domain Set contains Discovery Domains and Discovery " -"Domains contain iSCSI Node members.</p>" +msgid "At the top a list of all Discovery Domain Sets are displayed. Discovery Domains belong to Discovery Domain Sets. <p>A Discovery Domain must be a member of a Discovery Domain Set in order to be active. </p><p>In an iSNS database, a Discovery Domain Set contains Discovery Domains and Discovery Domains contain iSCSI Node members.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:56 -msgid "" -"<p>The discovery domain set members list is refreshed whenever a different " -"discovery domain set is selected.</p>" +msgid "<p>The discovery domain set members list is refreshed whenever a different discovery domain set is selected.</p>" msgstr "" #. **************** global funcions and variables ***** @@ -323,9 +295,7 @@ #. test if required package ("open-isns") is installed #: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:172 -msgid "" -"<p>To configure the isns service, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed." +msgid "<p>To configure the isns service, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" msgstr "<p>若要設定 isns 服務的組態，必須安裝 <b>%1</b> 套件。</p>" #: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:175 Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/kdump.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/kdump.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/kdump.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: kdump\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-10-05 11:30+0800\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -52,23 +52,17 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:116 -msgid "" -"The naming scheme is:/boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] Please enter only " -"\"kernel_string\"." +msgid "The naming scheme is:/boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] Please enter only \"kernel_string\"." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:127 -msgid "" -"The kdump commandline is the command line that needs to be passed off to the " -"kdump kernel." +msgid "The kdump commandline is the command line that needs to be passed off to the kdump kernel." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:138 -msgid "" -"Set this variable if you only want to _append_ values to the default command " -"line string." +msgid "Set this variable if you only want to _append_ values to the default command line string." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -101,9 +95,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:189 -msgid "" -"SMTP password for sending notification messages. Path of file which includes " -"password (plain text file)." +msgid "SMTP password for sending notification messages. Path of file which includes password (plain text file)." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -149,9 +141,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:254 -msgid "" -"Dump target includes type of target from: file (local filesystem), ftp, ssh, " -"nfs, cifs" +msgid "Dump target includes type of target from: file (local filesystem), ftp, ssh, nfs, cifs" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -191,9 +181,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:302 -msgid "" -"The naming scheme is: /boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] kernel means " -"only \"kernel_string\"." +msgid "The naming scheme is: /boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] kernel means only \"kernel_string\"." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -203,9 +191,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:316 -msgid "" -"Option means runlevel to boot the kdump kernel. Only values such as 1,2,3,5 " -"or s are allowed" +msgid "Option means runlevel to boot the kdump kernel. Only values such as 1,2,3,5 or s are allowed" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -388,8 +374,8 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text #. Popup::Message(crash_value); #. delete crashkernel paramter from bootloader -#: src/clients/kdump.rb:751 src/clients/kdump.rb:756 src/modules/Kdump.rb:558 -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:577 +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:751 src/clients/kdump.rb:756 src/modules/Kdump.rb:559 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:578 msgid "To apply changes a reboot is necessary." msgstr "要套用變更需要重開機。" @@ -436,8 +422,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:809 -msgid "" -"Option can include only \"none\", \"ELF\", \"compressed\" or \"lzo\" value." +msgid "Option can include only \"none\", \"ELF\", \"compressed\" or \"lzo\" value." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message @@ -524,15 +509,6 @@ msgid "&Kdump" msgstr "停用 Kdump(&D)" -#. checking if packages are available -#: src/include/kdump/complex.rb:101 src/include/kdump/complex.rb:103 -msgid "Package for kexec-tools is not available." -msgstr "kexec-tool 的套件無法使用。" - -#: src/include/kdump/complex.rb:113 src/include/kdump/complex.rb:115 -msgid "Package for kdump is not available." -msgstr "kdump 套件無法使用。" - #. TRANSLATORS: RadioButtonGroup Label #: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:53 msgid "Enable/Disable Kdump" @@ -775,8 +751,7 @@ #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:36 msgid "" "<p><b>Enable/Disable Kdump</b><br>\n" -" Enable or disable kdump. The boot option crashkernel parameter is added/" -"removed. \n" +" Enable or disable kdump. The boot option crashkernel parameter is added/removed. \n" " To apply changes, a reboot is necessary.<br></p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -792,12 +767,7 @@ #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:46 msgid "" "<p><b>Firmware-Assisted Dump</b><br>\n" -" Dumps are not generated before the partition is reinitialized but take " -"place when the partition is restarting. When performing a firmware-" -"assisted dump, system memory is frozen and the partition rebooted, which " -"allows a new instance of the operating system to dump data from the " -"previous kernel crash. This feature is suitable only when the system has " -"more than 1.5 GB of memory.</p>" +" Dumps are not generated before the partition is reinitialized but take place when the partition is restarting. When performing a firmware-assisted dump, system memory is frozen and the partition rebooted, which allows a new instance of the operating system to dump data from the previous kernel crash. This feature is suitable only when the system has more than 1.5 GB of memory.</p>" msgstr "" #. Kdump Memor&y [MB] - IntField 1/1 @@ -815,10 +785,8 @@ "<p><b>Dump Format</b><br>\n" " <i>No Dump</i> - Only save the kernel log.<br>\n" " <i>ELF Format</i> - Create dump file in the ELF format.<br>\n" -" <i>Compressed Format</i> - Compress dump data by each page with gzip." -"<br>\n" -" <i>LZO Compressed Format</i> - Slightly bigger files but much faster." -"<br>\n" +" <i>Compressed Format</i> - Compress dump data by each page with gzip.<br>\n" +" <i>LZO Compressed Format</i> - Slightly bigger files but much faster.<br>\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -826,8 +794,7 @@ #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:72 msgid "" "<p><b>Saving Target for Kdump Image</b><br>\n" -" The target for saving kdump images. Select type of target for saving " -"dumps.<br></p>" +" The target for saving kdump images. Select type of target for saving dumps.<br></p>" msgstr "" #. Dump Format - RadioButtons 2/6 @@ -835,8 +802,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Local Filestem</b> - Save kdump image in the local filesystem.\n" " <i>Directory for Saving Dumps</i> - The path for saving kdump images.\n" -" Selecting directory for saving kdump images via dialog by pressing " -"<i>Browse</i>\n" +" Selecting directory for saving kdump images via dialog by pressing <i>Browse</i>\n" " <br></p>" msgstr "" @@ -848,8 +814,7 @@ " <i>Port</i> - The port number for connection.\n" " <i>Directory on Server</i> - The path for saving kdump images.\n" " <i>Enable Anonymous FTP</i> enables anonymous connection to server.\n" -" <i>User Name</i> for ftp connection. <i>Password</i> for ftp connection." -"<br></p>" +" <i>User Name</i> for ftp connection. <i>Password</i> for ftp connection.<br></p>" msgstr "" #. Dump Format - RadioButtons 4/6 @@ -920,8 +885,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Enable Delete Old Dump Images</b> - \n" " Enable Delete Old Dump Images. If the number of dump files in \n" -" <i>Number of Old Dumps</i> exceeds this number, older dumps are removed." -"<br></p>" +" <i>Number of Old Dumps</i> exceeds this number, older dumps are removed.<br></p>" msgstr "" #. Enable Copy Ke&rnel into the Dump Directory - CheckBox 1/1 @@ -936,48 +900,39 @@ #. SMTP Server #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:151 -msgid "" -"<p><b>SMTP Server</b> used for sending a notification email after a dump.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>SMTP Server</b> used for sending a notification email after a dump.</p>" msgstr "" #. SMTP User Name #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:155 msgid "" "<p><b>User Name</b> for SMTP authetication when <i>SMTP Server</i> is\n" -" set. This is optional. If you do not specifiy a username and password, " -"plain SMTP will be used.</p>\n" +" set. This is optional. If you do not specifiy a username and password, plain SMTP will be used.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. SMTP Password #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:159 msgid "" -"<p><b>Password</b> for SMTP authetication when <i>SMTP Server</i> is set. " -"This\n" -" is optional. If you do not specify a username and password, plain SMTP " -"will be used.</p>\n" +"<p><b>Password</b> for SMTP authetication when <i>SMTP Server</i> is set. This\n" +" is optional. If you do not specify a username and password, plain SMTP will be used.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Notification To (email addresses) #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:163 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Notification To</b> Specify the email address to which a notification " -"email will be sent when a dump has been saved.</p>\n" +msgid "<p><b>Notification To</b> Specify the email address to which a notification email will be sent when a dump has been saved.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Notification CC (email addresses) #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:167 msgid "" -"<p><b>Notification CC</b> Specify a list of space-separated email addresses " -"to\n" -" which a notification email will be sent via cc if a dump has been saved.\n" +"<p><b>Notification CC</b> Specify a list of space-separated email addresses to\n" +" which a notification email will be sent via cc if a dump has been saved.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Number of Old Dumps (number) #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:171 msgid "" -"<p><b>Number of Old Dumps</b> specifies how many old dumps are kept. If the " -"number of dump files \n" +"<p><b>Number of Old Dumps</b> specifies how many old dumps are kept. If the number of dump files \n" "exceeds this number, older dumps are removed.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1176,91 +1131,91 @@ #. See FATE#315780 #. See https://www.suse.com/support/kb/doc.php?id=7012786 #. FIXME what about dracut? -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:483 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:484 msgid "" "Error updating initrd while calling '%{cmd}'.\n" "See %{log} for details." msgstr "" #. Kdump read dialog caption -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:593 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:594 msgid "Initializing kdump Configuration" msgstr "正在啟始化 kdump 組態" #. Progress stage 1/4 #. Progress step 1/4 -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:602 src/modules/Kdump.rb:610 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:603 src/modules/Kdump.rb:611 msgid "Reading the config file..." msgstr "正在讀取設定檔..." #. Progress stage 3/4 -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:604 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:605 msgid "Reading kernel boot options..." msgstr "讀取核心開機選項..." #. Progress stage 4/4 #. Progress finished 3/4 -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:606 src/modules/Kdump.rb:614 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:607 src/modules/Kdump.rb:615 msgid "Reading available memory..." msgstr "正在讀取可用的記憶體..." #. Progress step 2/4 -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:612 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:613 msgid "Reading partitions of disks..." msgstr "正在讀取磁碟分割區..." #. Error message -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:626 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:627 msgid "Cannot read config file /etc/sysconfig/kdump" msgstr "無法讀取設定檔 /etc/sysconfig/kdump" #. Error message -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:634 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:635 msgid "Cannot read kernel boot options." msgstr "無法讀取核心開機選項。" #. Error message -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:641 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:642 msgid "Cannot read available memory." msgstr "無法讀取可用的記憶體。" #. Kdump read dialog caption -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:667 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:668 msgid "Saving kdump Configuration" msgstr "正在儲存 kdump 組態" #. Progress stage 1/2 -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:696 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:697 msgid "Write the settings" msgstr "寫入設定" #. Progress stage 2/2 -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:698 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:699 msgid "Update boot options" msgstr "更新開機選項" #. Progress step 1/2 -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:702 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:703 msgid "Writing the settings..." msgstr "正在寫入設定..." #. Progress step 2/2 -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:704 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:705 msgid "Updating boot options..." msgstr "正在更新開機選項..." #. Progress finished -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:706 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:707 msgid "Finished" msgstr "已完成" #. Error message -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:716 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:717 msgid "Cannot write settings." msgstr "無法寫入設定。" #. Error message -#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:725 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:726 msgid "Adding crashkernel parameter to bootloader fault." msgstr "加入 crashkernel 參數到開機啟動器錯誤。" @@ -1301,6 +1256,12 @@ "It is not supported on this hardware." msgstr "" +#~ msgid "Package for kexec-tools is not available." +#~ msgstr "kexec-tool 的套件無法使用。" + +#~ msgid "Package for kdump is not available." +#~ msgstr "kdump 套件無法使用。" + #~ msgid "ENABLED" #~ msgstr "啟用" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/kerberos-server.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/kerberos-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/kerberos-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: kerberos-server\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-30 21:53+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -541,16 +541,13 @@ #. Help text: ask for database backend 2/4 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:59 -msgid "" -"<p><big>Local Database</big> will create a local database for storing the " -"credentials.</p>" +msgid "<p><big>Local Database</big> will create a local database for storing the credentials.</p>" msgstr "<p><big>本地資料庫</big> 將建立一個本機資料庫以儲存憑證。</p>" #. Help text: ask for database backend 3/4 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:63 msgid "" -"<p><big>Set Up New LDAP Server as Database Back-End</big> will set up a new " -"LDAP server\n" +"<p><big>Set Up New LDAP Server as Database Back-End</big> will set up a new LDAP server\n" "on this machine and use it as database back-end.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><big>設定新的 LDAP 伺服器作為資料庫後端</big> 將在此機器上設定一個\n" @@ -567,20 +564,13 @@ #. Help text: basic settings 1/2 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:71 -msgid "" -"<p>Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your " -"Kerberos server.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>為您的 Kerberos 伺服器指定 <big>領域</big> 和 <big>主密碼</big> 。</p>" +msgid "<p>Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your Kerberos server.</p>" +msgstr "<p>為您的 Kerberos 伺服器指定 <big>領域</big> 和 <big>主密碼</big> 。</p>" #. Help text: basic settings 2/2 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:75 -msgid "" -"<p>Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is " -"to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.</p>\n" -msgstr "" -"<p>雖然您的 Kerberos 領域可以是任何 ASCII 字串，習慣上是使用大寫字母，如在您" -"的網域名稱一樣。</p>\n" +msgid "<p>Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.</p>\n" +msgstr "<p>雖然您的 Kerberos 領域可以是任何 ASCII 字串，習慣上是使用大寫字母，如在您的網域名稱一樣。</p>\n" #. Help text: Use existing LDAP server 1/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:79 @@ -600,27 +590,22 @@ #. Help text: New LDAP server 2/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:87 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:107 -msgid "" -"<p>With <big>LDAP Base DN</big> you can change the base DN of the LDAP " -"server.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <big>LDAP Base DN</big> you can change the base DN of the LDAP server.</p>" msgstr "<p>使用 <big>LDAP 基礎 DN</big> 您可以變更 LDAP 伺服器的基礎 DN。</p>" #. Help text: Use existing LDAP server 4/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:91 msgid "" -"<p>The <big>Kerberos Container DN</big> specifies the container where the " -"Kerberos server should create \n" +"<p>The <big>Kerberos Container DN</big> specifies the container where the Kerberos server should create \n" "the principals and other informational data by default.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p><big>Kerberos 容器 DN</big> 指定 Kerberos 伺服器的容器，預設用以建立 " -"principal \n" +"<p><big>Kerberos 容器 DN</big> 指定 Kerberos 伺服器的容器，預設用以建立 principal \n" "和其他資訊資料容器。</p>" #. Help text: Use existing LDAP server 5/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:95 msgid "" -"<p><big>KDC Bind DN</big> is the DN that KDC uses to authenticate to the " -"LDAP server.\n" +"<p><big>KDC Bind DN</big> is the DN that KDC uses to authenticate to the LDAP server.\n" "Only read access is required for this account.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><big>KDC 綁定 DN</big> 是 KDC 用來在 LDAP 伺服器認証的 DN。\n" @@ -629,8 +614,7 @@ #. Help text: Use existing LDAP server 6/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:99 msgid "" -"<p><big>Kadmin Bind DN</big> is the DN that Kadmind uses to authenticate to " -"the LDAP server.\n" +"<p><big>Kadmin Bind DN</big> is the DN that Kadmind uses to authenticate to the LDAP server.\n" "This account also needs write access.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><big>Kadmin 綁定 DN</big> 是 Kadmind 用來在 LDAP 伺服器認証的 DN。\n" @@ -644,12 +628,10 @@ #. Help text: New LDAP server 3/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:111 msgid "" -"<p>The <big>Kerberos Container DN</big> specifies the container where the " -"Kerberos server should create \n" +"<p>The <big>Kerberos Container DN</big> specifies the container where the Kerberos server should create \n" "the principals and other informational data by default.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><big>Kerberos 容器 DN</big> 指定 Kerberos 伺服器的容器，預設用以建立 " -"principal \n" +"<p><big>Kerberos 容器 DN</big> 指定 Kerberos 伺服器的容器，預設用以建立 principal \n" "和其他資訊資料容器。</p>\n" #. Help text: New LDAP server 4/6 @@ -660,8 +642,7 @@ #. Help text: New LDAP server 5/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:117 msgid "" -"<p>If you select the checkbox <big>Use Previously Entered Password</big>, " -"the password you entered\n" +"<p>If you select the checkbox <big>Use Previously Entered Password</big>, the password you entered\n" "as the KDC Master password is also used for the LDAP administrator. \n" msgstr "" "<p>如果您選擇核取 <big>使用之前輸入的密碼</big>， 您之前為 KDC 主要密碼\n" @@ -669,15 +650,12 @@ #. Help text: New LDAP server 6/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:121 -msgid "" -"When the checkbox is not set, you can enter a different password for the " -"LDAP administrator.</p>" +msgid "When the checkbox is not set, you can enter a different password for the LDAP administrator.</p>" msgstr "當此選項未核取，您可以為 LDAP 管理員設定不同的密碼。</p>" #. Help text: Summary 1/3 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:125 -msgid "" -"<p>This is a short summary about your Kerberos server configuration.</p>" +msgid "<p>This is a short summary about your Kerberos server configuration.</p>" msgstr "<p>這是一份關於您的 Kerberos 伺服器組態的簡短摘要。</p>" #. Help text: Summary 2/3 @@ -687,48 +665,33 @@ #. Help text: Summary 3/3 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:133 -msgid "" -"<p>You can change some values of your configuration by clicking the <b>Edit button.</p>" +msgid "<p>You can change some values of your configuration by clicking the <b>Edit</b> button.</p>" msgstr "<p>按<b>「啟動」</b>按鈕，您可以變更設定中的某些值。</p>" #. ============================================================================== #. advanced item help: database_name #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:139 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this " -"realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this realm.</p>" msgstr "<p>此字串指定此領域中 Kerberos 資料庫的位置。</p>" #. advanced item help: acl_file #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:143 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file " -"that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database." -msgstr "" -"<p>此字串指定存取控制清單 (ACL) 檔案的位置， kadmin 用來決定在資料庫中 " -"principal 的許可權。</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database.</p>" +msgstr "<p>此字串指定存取控制清單 (ACL) 檔案的位置， kadmin 用來決定在資料庫中 principal 的許可權。</p>" #. advanced item help: admin_keytab #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:147 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to " -"authenticate to the database.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to authenticate to the database.</p>" msgstr "<p>這個字串指定 kadmin 用來認証資料庫的 keytab 檔案 所在的位置。</p>" #. advanced item help: default_principal_expiration #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:151 -msgid "" -"<p>This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals " -"created in this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals created in this realm.</p>" msgstr "<p>這個絕對時間指定預設在此領域建立的 principal 的逾期天數。</p>" #. advanced item help principal_flags 1/13 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:155 -msgid "" -"<p>These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in " -"this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in this realm.</p>" msgstr "<p>這些旗標指定在此領域建立的 principal 的預設屬性。</p>" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:158 @@ -773,12 +736,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 6/13 :Enable user-to-user authentication #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:178 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another " -"user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." -msgstr "" -"啟用此旗標允許 principal 收到其他使用者的會期金鑰， 准許此 principal 使用者對" -"使用者認証。" +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." +msgstr "啟用此旗標允許 principal 收到其他使用者的會期金鑰， 准許此 principal 使用者對使用者認証。" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:181 msgid "Requires preauth" @@ -786,16 +745,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 7/13 :Requires preauth #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:183 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to " -"preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this " -"flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will " -"only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket " -"set." -msgstr "" -"如果此旗標在一個客戶端 principal 被啟用，該 principal 在收到任何票據前 會被要" -"求事先認証到 KDC 。如果您啟用這個期標在伺服器端 principal， 此 principal 的服" -"務票據將僅會被有 一個預先認証票據組的 TGT 的客戶端索取。" +msgid "If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket set." +msgstr "如果此旗標在一個客戶端 principal 被啟用，該 principal 在收到任何票據前 會被要求事先認証到 KDC 。如果您啟用這個期標在伺服器端 principal， 此 principal 的服務票據將僅會被有 一個預先認証票據組的 TGT 的客戶端索取。" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:186 msgid "Requires hwauth" @@ -803,11 +754,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 8/13 :Requires hwauth #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:188 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using " -"a hardware device before receiving any tickets." -msgstr "" -"如果此旗標被啟用， principal 在收到任何票據之前 會被要求使用硬體設備認証。" +msgid "If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using a hardware device before receiving any tickets." +msgstr "如果此旗標被啟用， principal 在收到任何票據之前 會被要求使用硬體設備認証。" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:191 msgid "Allow service" @@ -815,9 +763,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 9/13 :Allow service #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:193 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this " -"principal." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this principal." msgstr "啟用此旗標允許 KDC 為此 principal 要求服務票據。" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:196 @@ -826,13 +772,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 10/13 :Allow tgs request #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:198 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-" -"granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was " -"used to obtain the TGT." -msgstr "" -"啟用此旗標允許 principal 得到基於 票據換票據 (ticket-granting-ticket) 的票" -"據， 而不會重複獲取 TGT 的認証程序。" +msgid "Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was used to obtain the TGT." +msgstr "啟用此旗標允許 principal 得到基於 票據換票據 (ticket-granting-ticket) 的票據， 而不會重複獲取 TGT 的認証程序。" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:201 msgid "Allow tickets" @@ -840,13 +781,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 11/13 :Allow tickets #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:203 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this " -"principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within " -"this realm." -msgstr "" -"啟用此旗標表示 KDC 將為此 principal 要求票據。停用此旗標基本上是停用了 在此領" -"域內的 principal。" +msgid "Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within this realm." +msgstr "啟用此旗標表示 KDC 將為此 principal 要求票據。停用此旗標基本上是停用了 在此領域內的 principal。" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:206 msgid "Need change" @@ -863,53 +799,34 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 13/13 :Password changing service #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:211 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change " -"service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a " -"user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that " -"principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password " -"authentication." -msgstr "" -"如果此旗標被啟用，他標示此 principal 為一個密碼變更服務。 這應該僅用在特殊的" -"情況，例如，如果使用者的密碼已經過期， 使用者必須取得票據讓 principal 可以去" -"變更它而不用重新經過 一般的密碼認証。" +msgid "If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password authentication." +msgstr "如果此旗標被啟用，他標示此 principal 為一個密碼變更服務。 這應該僅用在特殊的情況，例如，如果使用者的密碼已經過期， 使用者必須取得票據讓 principal 可以去變更它而不用重新經過 一般的密碼認証。" #. advanced item help : dict_file #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:215 -msgid "" -"<p>The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are " -"not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy " -"assigned to the principal, no check will be done.</p>" +msgid "<p>The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy assigned to the principal, no check will be done.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kadmind_port #. advanced item help : kpasswd_port #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:219 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:223 -msgid "" -"<p>This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens " -"for this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens for this realm.</p>" msgstr "<p>此埠號指定 kadmind 精靈在這個領域 監聽的埠。</p>" #. advanced item help : key_stash_file #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:227 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored " -"with kdb5_stash.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored with kdb5_stash.</p>" msgstr "<p>此字串指定已被用 kdb5_stash 儲存的主要金鑰的 存放位置。</p>" #. advanced item help : kdc_ports #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:231 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this " -"realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this realm.</p>" msgstr "<p>此字串指定 KDC 在此領域監聽的 埠號清單。</p>" #. advanced item help : master_key_name #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:235 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the " -"master key. The default value is K/M.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the master key. The default value is K/M.</p>" msgstr "<p>此字串指定和主要金鑰結合的 principal 的名稱。 預設值是 K/M。</p>" #. advanced item help : master_key_type @@ -919,70 +836,48 @@ #. advanced item help : max_life #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:243 -msgid "" -"<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"valid for in this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be valid for in this realm.</p>" msgstr "<p>這個時間差指定對此領域票據可適用的 最大時間間距。</p>" #. advanced item help : max_renew_life #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:247 -msgid "" -"<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"renewed for in this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be renewed for in this realm.</p>" msgstr "<p>這個時間差指定對此領域票據可被刷新的 最大時間間距。</p>" #. advanced item help : supported_enctypes #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:251 -msgid "" -"<p>A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt " -"combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdc_supported_enctypes #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:255 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this " -"realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : reject_bad_transit #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:259 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm " -"tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm " -"names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : ldap_conns_per_server #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:263 -msgid "" -"<p>This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be " -"maintained via the LDAP server.</p>" +msgid "<p>This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be maintained via the LDAP server.</p>" msgstr "<p>此 LDAP 指定標籤標示經由 LDAP 伺服器維護的 連線數目。</p>" #. advanced item help : ldap_service_password_file #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:267 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed " -"passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers.</p>" +msgid "<p>This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers.</p>" msgstr "<p>此 LDAP 指定標籤標示經由 LDAP 伺服器維護的 連線數目。</p>" #. advanced item help : kdb_subtrees #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:271 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The " -"list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).<p>The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under " -"the subtree.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).</p><p>The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under the subtree.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_containerref #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:275 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a " -"realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a " -"realm, the principals will be created in the realm container.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a realm, the principals will be created in the realm container.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_maxtktlife @@ -992,9 +887,7 @@ #. advanced item help : kdb_maxrenewlife #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:283 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm.</p>" msgstr "<p>指定在此領域的 principals 最大的票據可刷新生存期。</p>" #. Initialization dialog contents Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/kerberos.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/kerberos.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/kerberos.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: kerberos\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:56+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-30 21:58+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/languages_db.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/languages_db.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/languages_db.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: languages_db\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:32+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2009-08-27 23:49+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ldap-client.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ldap-client.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ldap-client.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: ldap-client\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-30 22:23+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -239,19 +239,14 @@ #. help text 2/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:535 -msgid "" -"<p>To authenticate your users with an OpenLDAP server, select <b>Use LDAP. NSS and PAM will be configured accordingly.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>若要使用 OpenLDAP 伺服器驗證您的使用者，請選取<b>「使用 LDAP」</b>。會相應" -"地設定 NSS 和 PAM。</p>" +msgid "<p>To authenticate your users with an OpenLDAP server, select <b>Use LDAP</b>. NSS and PAM will be configured accordingly.</p>" +msgstr "<p>若要使用 OpenLDAP 伺服器驗證您的使用者，請選取<b>「使用 LDAP」</b>。會相應地設定 NSS 和 PAM。</p>" #. help text 3/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:539 msgid "" "<p>To deactivate LDAP services, click <b>Do Not Use LDAP</b>.\n" -"If you deactivate LDAP, the current LDAP entry for passwd in /etc/nsswitch." -"conf\n" +"If you deactivate LDAP, the current LDAP entry for passwd in /etc/nsswitch.conf\n" "will be removed. The PAM configuration will be modified and the LDAP entry\n" "removed.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -262,58 +257,37 @@ #. help text 3.5/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:546 -msgid "" -"<p>To activate LDAP but forbid users from logging in to this machine, select " -"<b>Enable LDAP Users but Disable Logins</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>若要啟動 LDAP，但禁止使用者登入此機器，請選取<b>「啟用 LDAP 使用者但停用登" -"入」</b>。</p>" +msgid "<p>To activate LDAP but forbid users from logging in to this machine, select <b>Enable LDAP Users but Disable Logins</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>若要啟動 LDAP，但禁止使用者登入此機器，請選取<b>「啟用 LDAP 使用者但停用登入」</b>。</p>" #. help text #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:550 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Use System Security Services Daemon</b> if you want the system " -"to use SSSD instead of nss_ldap.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>核取 <b>使用系統安全服務精靈</b> 如果您的系統想用 SSSD 代替 nss_ldap。</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Use System Security Services Daemon</b> if you want the system to use SSSD instead of nss_ldap.</p>" +msgstr "<p>核取 <b>使用系統安全服務精靈</b> 如果您的系統想用 SSSD 代替 nss_ldap。</p>" #. help text 4/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:554 msgid "" -"<p>Enter the LDAP server's address (such as ldap.example.com or 10.20.0.2) " -"in <b>Addresses</b> and the distinguished name of the search base (<b>Base " -"DN</b>, such as dc=example,dc=com). Specify multiple servers\n" -"by separating their addresses with spaces. It must be possible to resolve " -"the\n" -"addresses without using LDAP. You can also specify the port on which the " -"server is running using the syntax \"server:port\", for example, <tt>ldap." -"example.com:379</tt>.\n" +"<p>Enter the LDAP server's address (such as ldap.example.com or 10.20.0.2) in <b>Addresses</b> and the distinguished name of the search base (<b>Base DN</b>, such as dc=example,dc=com). Specify multiple servers\n" +"by separating their addresses with spaces. It must be possible to resolve the\n" +"addresses without using LDAP. You can also specify the port on which the server is running using the syntax \"server:port\", for example, <tt>ldap.example.com:379</tt>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>請在<b>「位址」</b>中輸入 LDAP 伺服器的位址 (例如 ldap.example.com 或 " -"10.20.0.2) 與搜尋基礎的可辨識名稱 (<b>「基礎 DN」</b>，例如 dc=example," -"dc=com)。 如果要指定多個伺服器，\n" +"<p>請在<b>「位址」</b>中輸入 LDAP 伺服器的位址 (例如 ldap.example.com 或 10.20.0.2) 與搜尋基礎的可辨識名稱 (<b>「基礎 DN」</b>，例如 dc=example,dc=com)。 如果要指定多個伺服器，\n" "請以空格分開各個位址。 即使不用 LDAP 也必須\n" -"能解析這些位址。 您也可以使用「server:port」語法指定該伺服器要在哪個連接埠上" -"執行，例如 <tt>ldap.example.com:379</tt>。\n" +"能解析這些位址。 您也可以使用「server:port」語法指定該伺服器要在哪個連接埠上執行，例如 <tt>ldap.example.com:379</tt>。\n" " </p>\n" #. help text 5/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:561 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Find</b>, select the LDAP server from the list provided by the " -"service location protocol (SLP). Using <b>Fetch DN</b>, read the base DN " -"from server.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>使用<b>「尋找」</b>，由服務位址協定 (SLP) 所提供的清單選取 LDAP 伺服器。使" -"用<b>「取得 DN」</b>，從伺服器讀取基礎 DN。</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>Find</b>, select the LDAP server from the list provided by the service location protocol (SLP). Using <b>Fetch DN</b>, read the base DN from server.</p>" +msgstr "<p>使用<b>「尋找」</b>，由服務位址協定 (SLP) 所提供的清單選取 LDAP 伺服器。使用<b>「取得 DN」</b>，從伺服器讀取基礎 DN。</p>" #. help text 6/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:565 msgid "" "<p>Some LDAP servers support StartTLS (RFC2830).\n" -"If your server supports it and it is configured, activate <b>LDAP TLS/SSL\n" +"If your server supports it and it is configured, activate <b>LDAP TLS/SSL</b>\n" "to encrypt your communication with the LDAP server. You may download a CA\n" "certificate file in PEM format from a given URL.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -324,28 +298,19 @@ #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:571 msgid "" -"<p>A TLS session may require special client configuration. One of the " -"config\n" -" options is TLS_REQCERT which specifies what checks to perform on " -"server certificates.\n" -" The value is the <b>level</b> that can be specified with keywords " -"<i>never</i>, <i>allow</i>,\n" -" <i>try</i> and <i>demand</i>. In the <b>SSL/TLS Configuration</b> " -"dialog there is\n" -" the option <b>Request server certificate</b> which will set the " -"TLS_REQCERT\n" -" configuration option to <i>demand</i> if it's enabled or to " -"<i>allow</i> if it's disabled.</p>\n" +"<p>A TLS session may require special client configuration. One of the config\n" +" options is TLS_REQCERT which specifies what checks to perform on server certificates.\n" +" The value is the <b>level</b> that can be specified with keywords <i>never</i>, <i>allow</i>,\n" +" <i>try</i> and <i>demand</i>. In the <b>SSL/TLS Configuration</b> dialog there is\n" +" the option <b>Request server certificate</b> which will set the TLS_REQCERT\n" +" configuration option to <i>demand</i> if it's enabled or to <i>allow</i> if it's disabled.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:579 msgid "" -"<p>In addition to LDAP URLs and TLS/SSL encryption, LDAP supports LDAPS " -"URLs.\n" -" LDAPS URLs use SSL connections instead of plain connections. They " -"have a syntax\n" -" similar to LDAP URLs except the schemes are different and the " -"default port for LDAPS URLs\n" +"<p>In addition to LDAP URLs and TLS/SSL encryption, LDAP supports LDAPS URLs.\n" +" LDAPS URLs use SSL connections instead of plain connections. They have a syntax\n" +" similar to LDAP URLs except the schemes are different and the default port for LDAPS URLs\n" " is 636 instead of 389.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -364,8 +329,7 @@ #. help text 9/9 (additional) #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:591 msgid "" -"<p><b>Automounter</b> is a daemon that automatically mounts directories, " -"such\n" +"<p><b>Automounter</b> is a daemon that automatically mounts directories, such\n" "as users' home directories. Its configuration files (auto.*) should already\n" "exist locally or over LDAP. If the automounter is not installed yet but you\n" "want to use it, it will be installed automatically.</p>\n" @@ -516,8 +480,7 @@ #. yes/no question #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:970 msgid "" -"The security connection is enabled, but server certificate verification is " -"disabled.\n" +"The security connection is enabled, but server certificate verification is disabled.\n" "Enable certificate checks now?" msgstr "" "安全連線已啟用，但伺服器憑證確認已停用。\n" @@ -531,12 +494,9 @@ #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1017 msgid "" -"<p>If Kerberos authentication should be used, specify the <b>realm</b> and " -"<b>KDC Address</b>.\n" -"Determine if user credentials should be cached locally by checking <b>SSSD " -"Offline Authentication</b>.\n" -"For more info about SSSD settings, check the man page of <tt>sssd.conf</tt>." -"</p>\n" +"<p>If Kerberos authentication should be used, specify the <b>realm</b> and <b>KDC Address</b>.\n" +"Determine if user credentials should be cached locally by checking <b>SSSD Offline Authentication</b>.\n" +"For more info about SSSD settings, check the man page of <tt>sssd.conf</tt>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>如果 Kerberos 驗證要被使用，指定 <b>領域</b> 和 <b>KDC 位址</b>。\n" "檢查 <b>SSSD 離線驗證</b>決定使用者憑證是否要本地快取。\n" @@ -545,13 +505,10 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1023 msgid "" -"<p><b>Password Change Protocol</b> refers to the pam_password attribute of " -"the\n" -"<tt>/etc/ldap.conf</tt> file. See <tt>man pam_ldap</tt> for an explanation " -"of its values.</p>" +"<p><b>Password Change Protocol</b> refers to the pam_password attribute of the\n" +"<tt>/etc/ldap.conf</tt> file. See <tt>man pam_ldap</tt> for an explanation of its values.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>「密碼變更通訊協定」</b>是指 <tt>/etc/ldap.conf</tt> 檔案的 " -"pam_password 屬性。\n" +"<p><b>「密碼變更通訊協定」</b>是指 <tt>/etc/ldap.conf</tt> 檔案的 pam_password 屬性。\n" " 有關其設定值的意義，請參閱 <tt>man pam_ldap</tt>。</p>" #. help text 3/3, %1 is attribute name @@ -566,8 +523,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1034 msgid "" "<p>If secure connection requires certificate checking, specify where your\n" -"certificate file is located. Enter either a directory containing " -"certificates\n" +"certificate file is located. Enter either a directory containing certificates\n" "or the explicit path to one certificate file.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>如果安全連線需要檢查憑證，指定您的憑證檔案\n" @@ -595,23 +551,19 @@ msgid "" "<p>To access the data stored on the server, enter the\n" "<b>Administrator DN</b>.\n" -"You can enter the full DN (for example, cn=Administrator,dc=mydomain,dc=com) " -"or \n" -"the relative DN (for example, cn=Administrator). The LDAP base DN is " -"appended automatically if the appropriate option is checked.</p>\n" +"You can enter the full DN (for example, cn=Administrator,dc=mydomain,dc=com) or \n" +"the relative DN (for example, cn=Administrator). The LDAP base DN is appended automatically if the appropriate option is checked.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>若要存取儲存在伺服器的資料，請輸入\n" "<b>「管理員 DN」</b>。\n" " 您可以輸入完整的 DN (例如，cn=Administrator,dc=mydomain,dc=com) 或輸入\n" -"相對 DN (例如，cn=Administrator)。 如果已核取適當的選項，便會自動附加 LDAP 基" -"礎 DN。</p>\n" +"相對 DN (例如，cn=Administrator)。 如果已核取適當的選項，便會自動附加 LDAP 基礎 DN。</p>\n" #. help text 3/4 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1057 msgid "" "<p>To create the default configuration objects for LDAP users and groups,\n" -"check <b>Create Default Configuration Objects</b>. The objects are only " -"created when they do not already exist.</p>\n" +"check <b>Create Default Configuration Objects</b>. The objects are only created when they do not already exist.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>如果要建立 LDAP 使用者及群組的預設組態物件，\n" "請選取<b>「建立預設組態物件」</b>。只有在物件還沒有存在時才會建立。</p>\n" @@ -620,8 +572,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1061 msgid "" "<p>Press <b>Configure</b> to configure settings stored on the\n" -"LDAP server. You will be asked for the password if you are not connected yet " -"or\n" +"LDAP server. You will be asked for the password if you are not connected yet or\n" "have changed your configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>按<b>「設定」</b>可設定儲存在\n" @@ -632,13 +583,10 @@ #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1068 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<p>Specify the search bases to use for specific maps (users or groups) if " -"they are different from the base DN. These values are\n" -"set to the ldap_user_search_base, ldap_group_search_base and " -"ldap_autofs_search_base attributes in /etc/sssd/sssd.conf file.</p>\n" +"<p>Specify the search bases to use for specific maps (users or groups) if they are different from the base DN. These values are\n" +"set to the ldap_user_search_base, ldap_group_search_base and ldap_autofs_search_base attributes in /etc/sssd/sssd.conf file.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>如果用於特定映射的「搜尋基礎」(使用者、密碼和群組) 與基礎 DN 不同，請指定" -"這些搜尋基礎。這些值將在 /etc/ldap.conf 檔案中\n" +"<p>如果用於特定映射的「搜尋基礎」(使用者、密碼和群組) 與基礎 DN 不同，請指定這些搜尋基礎。這些值將在 /etc/ldap.conf 檔案中\n" "設為 nss_base_passwd、nss_base_shadow \n" "以及 nss_base_group 屬性。</p>\n" @@ -883,8 +831,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1897 msgid "" "<p>Edit the values of attributes in the table with <b>Edit</b>.\n" -"Some values have special meanings, for example, changing the <b>cn</b> value " -"renames the\n" +"Some values have special meanings, for example, changing the <b>cn</b> value renames the\n" "current module.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>使用<b>「編輯」</b>編輯表格中的屬性值。\n" @@ -939,13 +886,8 @@ #~ msgid "<p>Browse the LDAP tree in the left part of the dialog.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>在左邊的對話框瀏覽 LDAP 樹狀結構。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Once the LDAP object is selected in the tree, the table shows the " -#~ "object data. Use <b>Edit</b> to change the value of the selected " -#~ "attribute. Use <b>Save</b> to save your changes to LDAP.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>一旦 LDAP 物件在樹狀結構中選定，表格會顯示物件資料。使用<b>「編輯」</b>" -#~ "變更所選屬性的值。使用<b>「儲存」</b>儲存您對 LDAP 的變更。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Once the LDAP object is selected in the tree, the table shows the object data. Use <b>Edit</b> to change the value of the selected attribute. Use <b>Save</b> to save your changes to LDAP.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>一旦 LDAP 物件在樹狀結構中選定，表格會顯示物件資料。使用<b>「編輯」</b>變更所選屬性的值。使用<b>「儲存」</b>儲存您對 LDAP 的變更。</p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "There are unsaved changes in the current entry.\n" @@ -989,8 +931,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "Failed to establish TLS encryption.\n" -#~ "Verify that the correct CA Certificate is installed and the Server " -#~ "Certificate is valid." +#~ "Verify that the correct CA Certificate is installed and the Server Certificate is valid." #~ msgstr "" #~ "建立 TLS 加密失敗。\n" #~ "確認正確的 CA 憑證已安裝且伺服器憑證正確。" @@ -1176,8 +1117,7 @@ #~ "<p>If the attribute can have more values, add new entries\n" #~ "with <b>Add Value</b>. Sometimes the button contains the list of\n" #~ "possible values to use for the current attribute.\n" -#~ "If the value of the edited attribute should be a distinguished name " -#~ "(DN),\n" +#~ "If the value of the edited attribute should be a distinguished name (DN),\n" #~ "it is possible to choose it from the LDAP tree using <b>Browse</b>.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -1234,8 +1174,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>Here, set the values of attributes belonging\n" -#~ "to an object using the current template. Such values are used as defaults " -#~ "when\n" +#~ "to an object using the current template. Such values are used as defaults when\n" #~ "the new object is created.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>可在此處設定屬性值，該值屬於\n" @@ -1244,10 +1183,8 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>You can use special syntax to create attribute\n" -#~ "values from existing ones. The expression <i>%attr_name</i> will be " -#~ "replaced\n" -#~ "with the value of attribute \"attr_name\" (for example, use \"/home/%uid" -#~ "\"\n" +#~ "values from existing ones. The expression <i>%attr_name</i> will be replaced\n" +#~ "with the value of attribute \"attr_name\" (for example, use \"/home/%uid\"\n" #~ "as a value of \"homeDirectory\").</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>可使用特殊語法，從現有屬性值中\n" @@ -1273,114 +1210,50 @@ #~ msgid "There was a problem with writing data to the LDAP server." #~ msgstr "將資料寫入 LDAP 伺服器時發生問題。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Select the <b>Password Change Policies</b>, <b>Password Aging " -#~ "Policies</b>, and <b>Lockout Policies</b> tabs to choose LDAP password " -#~ "policy groups of attributes to configure.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>選取<b>「密碼變更規則」</b>、<b>「密碼期限規則」</b>和<b>「鎖定規則」標籤，以選擇要設定的屬性 LDAP 密碼規則群組。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Select the <b>Password Change Policies</b>, <b>Password Aging Policies</b>, and <b>Lockout Policies</b> tabs to choose LDAP password policy groups of attributes to configure.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>選取<b>「密碼變更規則」</b>、<b>「密碼期限規則」</b>和<b>「鎖定規則」</b>標籤，以選擇要設定的屬性 LDAP 密碼規則群組。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Specify the <b>Maximum Number of Passwords Stored in History</b> to " -#~ "set how many previously used passwords should be saved. Saved passwords " -#~ "may not be used.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>指定<b>「歷程中儲存的最多密碼數」</b>以設定要儲存幾個已經使用過的密" -#~ "碼。 儲存過的密碼不得再使用。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Specify the <b>Maximum Number of Passwords Stored in History</b> to set how many previously used passwords should be saved. Saved passwords may not be used.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>指定<b>「歷程中儲存的最多密碼數」</b>以設定要儲存幾個已經使用過的密碼。 儲存過的密碼不得再使用。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Check <b>User Must Change Password after Reset</b> to force users to " -#~ "change their passwords after the the password is reset or changed by an " -#~ "administrator.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>核取<b>「重設後使用者必須變更密碼」</b>，強迫使用者在密碼重設或管理員變" -#~ "更其密碼後，必須變更自己的密碼。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Check <b>User Must Change Password after Reset</b> to force users to change their passwords after the the password is reset or changed by an administrator.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>核取<b>「重設後使用者必須變更密碼」</b>，強迫使用者在密碼重設或管理員變更其密碼後，必須變更自己的密碼。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Check <b>User Can Change Password</b> to allow users to change their " -#~ "passwords.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Check <b>User Can Change Password</b> to allow users to change their passwords.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>核取<b>「使用者可變更密碼」</b>以允許使用者變更自己的密碼。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>If the existing password must be provided along with the new password, " -#~ "check <b>Old Password Required for Password Change</b>.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>如果既有密碼與新密碼都必須輸入，請核取<b>「變更密碼時需要舊密碼」</b>。" -#~ "</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>If the existing password must be provided along with the new password, check <b>Old Password Required for Password Change</b>.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>如果既有密碼與新密碼都必須輸入，請核取<b>「變更密碼時需要舊密碼」</b>。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Select whether the password quality should be verified while passwords " -#~ "are modified or added. Select <b>No Checking</b> if passwords should not " -#~ "be checked at all. With <b>Accept Uncheckable Passwords</b>, passwords " -#~ "are accepted even if the check cannot be performed, for example, if the " -#~ "user has provided an encrypted password. With <b>Only Accept Checked " -#~ "Passwords</b> passwords are refused if the quality test fails or the " -#~ "password cannot be checked.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>選取修改或新增密碼時，是否要驗證密碼品質。 如果完全不要檢查密碼，請選取" -#~ "<b>「不檢查」</b>。 設定<b>「接受不可檢查的密碼」</b>時，即使無法檢查密碼 " -#~ "(例如使用者提供加密過的密碼)，也可以接受。 設定<b>「僅接受檢查過的密碼」時，如果密碼品質測試失敗或無法檢查密碼，該密碼就會遭到拒絕。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Select whether the password quality should be verified while passwords are modified or added. Select <b>No Checking</b> if passwords should not be checked at all. With <b>Accept Uncheckable Passwords</b>, passwords are accepted even if the check cannot be performed, for example, if the user has provided an encrypted password. With <b>Only Accept Checked Passwords</b> passwords are refused if the quality test fails or the password cannot be checked.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>選取修改或新增密碼時，是否要驗證密碼品質。 如果完全不要檢查密碼，請選取<b>「不檢查」</b>。 設定<b>「接受不可檢查的密碼」</b>時，即使無法檢查密碼 (例如使用者提供加密過的密碼)，也可以接受。 設定<b>「僅接受檢查過的密碼」</b>時，如果密碼品質測試失敗或無法檢查密碼，該密碼就會遭到拒絕。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Set the minimum number of characters that must be used in a password in " -#~ "<b>Minimum Password Length</b>.</p>" +#~ msgid "Set the minimum number of characters that must be used in a password in <b>Minimum Password Length</b>.</p>" #~ msgstr "在<b>「密碼最短長度」</b>中設定密碼必須使用的最少字元數。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>Minimum Password Age</b> sets how much time must pass between " -#~ "modifications to the password.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p><b>Minimum Password Age</b> sets how much time must pass between modifications to the password.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p><b>「密碼最短壽命」</b>可設定必須隔多久時間才能修改密碼。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>Maximum Password Age</b> sets how long after modification a " -#~ "password expires.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p><b>Maximum Password Age</b> sets how long after modification a password expires.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p><b>「密碼最長壽命」</b>可設定密碼修改多久後就會過期。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>In <b>Time before Password Expiration to Issue Warning</b> set how " -#~ "long before a password is due to expire that an expiration warning " -#~ "messages should be given to an authenticating user.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>在<b>「密碼過期前多久需發出警告」</b>中設定要在密碼到期前多久，向正在驗" -#~ "證的使用者顯示警告訊息。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>In <b>Time before Password Expiration to Issue Warning</b> set how long before a password is due to expire that an expiration warning messages should be given to an authenticating user.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>在<b>「密碼過期前多久需發出警告」</b>中設定要在密碼到期前多久，向正在驗證的使用者顯示警告訊息。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Set the number of times an expired password can be used to " -#~ "authenticate in <b>Allowed Uses of an Expired Password</b>.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>在<b>「過期密碼的允許使用次數」</b>中設定過期密碼還能用來驗證的次數。" +#~ msgid "<p>Set the number of times an expired password can be used to authenticate in <b>Allowed Uses of an Expired Password</b>.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>在<b>「過期密碼的允許使用次數」</b>中設定過期密碼還能用來驗證的次數。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Check <b>Enable Password Locking</b> to forbid use of a password after " -#~ "a specified number of consecutive failed bind attempts.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>核取<b>「啟用密碼鎖定」</b>可在嘗試結合但連續失敗達指定次數後，禁止使用" -#~ "某密碼。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Check <b>Enable Password Locking</b> to forbid use of a password after a specified number of consecutive failed bind attempts.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>核取<b>「啟用密碼鎖定」</b>可在嘗試結合但連續失敗達指定次數後，禁止使用某密碼。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Set the number of consecutive failed bind attempts after which the " -#~ "password may not be used to authenticate in <b>Bind Failures to Lock the " -#~ "Password</b>.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>在<b>「結合失敗幾次後需鎖定密碼？」</b>中設定嘗試結合但連續失敗達幾次" -#~ "後，即不得使用該密碼進行驗證。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Set the number of consecutive failed bind attempts after which the password may not be used to authenticate in <b>Bind Failures to Lock the Password</b>.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>在<b>「結合失敗幾次後需鎖定密碼？」</b>中設定嘗試結合但連續失敗達幾次後，即不得使用該密碼進行驗證。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Set how long the password cannot be used in <b>Password Lock Duration.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>在<b>「密碼鎖定持續時間」</b>中設定不得使用該密碼的時間長度。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Set how long the password cannot be used in <b>Password Lock Duration</b>.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>在<b>「密碼鎖定持續時間」</b>中設定不得使用該密碼的時間長度。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>Bind Failures Cache Duration</b> sets how long before password " -#~ "failures are purged from the failure counter even though no successful " -#~ "authentication has occurred.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p><b>「結合失敗快取持續時間」</b>可設定密碼失敗多久後 (即使沒有任何一次驗" -#~ "證成功)，即需清除失敗計數器。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p><b>Bind Failures Cache Duration</b> sets how long before password failures are purged from the failure counter even though no successful authentication has occurred.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p><b>「結合失敗快取持續時間」</b>可設定密碼失敗多久後 (即使沒有任何一次驗證成功)，即需清除失敗計數器。</p>" #~ msgid "&Password Change Policies" #~ msgstr "密碼變更規則(&P)" @@ -1466,15 +1339,12 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>Some LDAP servers support StartTLS (RFC2830).\n" -#~ "If your server supports it and it is configured, activate <b>LDAP TLS/" -#~ "SSL</b>\n" -#~ "to encrypt your communication with the LDAP server. You may download CA " -#~ "certificate file in PEM format from given URL.</p>\n" +#~ "If your server supports it and it is configured, activate <b>LDAP TLS/SSL</b>\n" +#~ "to encrypt your communication with the LDAP server. You may download CA certificate file in PEM format from given URL.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>某些 LDAP 伺服器支援 StartTLS (RFC2830)。\n" #~ "如果您的伺服器支援此功能且也已經設定，請啟用 <b>LDAP TLS/SSL</b>\n" -#~ " 以使用 LDAP 伺服器為通訊作業加密。您可以由指定位址下載 PEM 格式的 CA 憑證" -#~ "檔。</p>\n" +#~ " 以使用 LDAP 伺服器為通訊作業加密。您可以由指定位址下載 PEM 格式的 CA 憑證檔。</p>\n" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>For configuration of advanced LDAP settings, click\n" @@ -1526,22 +1396,11 @@ #~ "\n" #~ "已複製到 '%2' 目錄" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>Password Change Protocol</b> refers to the pam_password attribute " -#~ "of the <tt>/etc/ldap.conf</tt> file. See <tt>man pam_ldap</tt> for the " -#~ "meaning of its values.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p><b>「密碼變更通訊協定」</b>是指 <tt>/etc/ldap.conf</tt> 檔案的 " -#~ "pam_password 屬性。 有關其設定值的意義，請參閱 <tt>man pam_ldap</tt>。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p><b>Password Change Protocol</b> refers to the pam_password attribute of the <tt>/etc/ldap.conf</tt> file. See <tt>man pam_ldap</tt> for the meaning of its values.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p><b>「密碼變更通訊協定」</b>是指 <tt>/etc/ldap.conf</tt> 檔案的 pam_password 屬性。 有關其設定值的意義，請參閱 <tt>man pam_ldap</tt>。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>If secure connection requires certificate checking, you may specify " -#~ "where is your certificate file located. It is possible to enter either " -#~ "directory with certificates, or the explicit path to one certificate file." -#~ "</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>如果安全連線需要檢查憑證，您可以指定您的憑證檔案位在何處。可以輸入有憑" -#~ "證的目錄或指明該憑證檔的路徑。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>If secure connection requires certificate checking, you may specify where is your certificate file located. It is possible to enter either directory with certificates, or the explicit path to one certificate file.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>如果安全連線需要檢查憑證，您可以指定您的憑證檔案位在何處。可以輸入有憑證的目錄或指明該憑證檔的路徑。</p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>Normally, the LDAP version 3 protocol is used. If you have\n" @@ -1554,8 +1413,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>First, set <b>Configuration Base DN</b>.\n" -#~ "It is the base for storing your configuration data, which is saved on the " -#~ "LDAP\n" +#~ "It is the base for storing your configuration data, which is saved on the LDAP\n" #~ "server.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>首先，請設定<b>「組態基礎 DN」</b>。\n" @@ -1565,27 +1423,21 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>To access the data stored on the server, enter the\n" #~ "<b>Administrator DN</b>.\n" -#~ "You can enter the full DN (for example, cn=Administrator,dc=mydomain," -#~ "dc=com) or just\n" -#~ "the relative DN (for example, cn=Administrator). The LDAP base DN is " -#~ "appended automatically if the appropriate option is checked.</p>\n" +#~ "You can enter the full DN (for example, cn=Administrator,dc=mydomain,dc=com) or just\n" +#~ "the relative DN (for example, cn=Administrator). The LDAP base DN is appended automatically if the appropriate option is checked.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>若要存取儲存在伺服器的資料，請輸入\n" #~ "<b>「管理員 DN」</b>。\n" -#~ " 您可以輸入完整的 DN (例如，cn=Administrator,dc=mydomain,dc=com) 或只輸" -#~ "入\n" -#~ "相對 DN (例如，cn=Administrator)。 如果已核取適當的選項，便會自動附加 " -#~ "LDAP 基礎 DN。</p>\n" +#~ " 您可以輸入完整的 DN (例如，cn=Administrator,dc=mydomain,dc=com) 或只輸入\n" +#~ "相對 DN (例如，cn=Administrator)。 如果已核取適當的選項，便會自動附加 LDAP 基礎 DN。</p>\n" #~ msgid "<p><b>Home Directories</b></p>" #~ msgstr "<p><b>主目錄</b></p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>If home directories of users should be stored on this machine,\n" -#~ "check the appropriate option. Changing this value does not cause any " -#~ "direct\n" -#~ "action. It is only information for the YaST users module, which can " -#~ "manage\n" +#~ "check the appropriate option. Changing this value does not cause any direct\n" +#~ "action. It is only information for the YaST users module, which can manage\n" #~ "user home directories.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>如果使用者的主目錄應該儲存在此機器中，\n" @@ -1597,12 +1449,10 @@ #~ msgstr "<p><b>密碼規則</b></p>" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Configure the selected password policy with <b>Edit</b>. Use <b>Add to add a new password policy. The configuration is only possible,\n" +#~ "<p>Configure the selected password policy with <b>Edit</b>. Use <b>Add</b> to add a new password policy. The configuration is only possible,\n" #~ " if the password policies are already enabled on the LDAP server.</p>" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>請以<b>「編輯」</b>設定已選取的密碼規則。 請使用<b>「新增」</b>加入新的" -#~ "密碼規則。\n" +#~ "<p>請以<b>「編輯」</b>設定已選取的密碼規則。 請使用<b>「新增」</b>加入新的密碼規則。\n" #~ "只有在 LDAP 伺服器已啟用密碼規則時才能進行組態。</p>" #~ msgid "&Password Map" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ldap-server.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ldap-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ldap-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: ldap-server\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-31 22:40+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -102,9 +102,7 @@ #. error popup #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:58 #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:228 -msgid "" -"The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings " -"later in the installed system." +msgid "The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings later in the installed system." msgstr "LDAP 資料庫已經建立。稍後在已安裝系統上可以變更設定。" #. y2error( "sysconfig var is '%1'", SCR::Read( .sysconfig.openldap.OPENLDAP_REGISTER_SLP ) ); @@ -117,9 +115,7 @@ msgstr "[手動方式設定]" #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:106 -msgid "" -"Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to " -"continue." +msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to continue." msgstr "無法取回系統 root 密碼。請設定 LDAP 伺服器密碼繼續。" #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:112 @@ -214,9 +210,7 @@ "YaST2 無法繼續設定組態。" #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:309 -msgid "" -"OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has " -"finished." +msgid "OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has finished." msgstr "" #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:344 @@ -240,10 +234,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/complex.rb:105 msgid "" -"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not " -"running.\n" -"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do " -"you \n" +"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not running.\n" +"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do you \n" "want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "" "您有一個已存在的組態，但目前 LDAP 伺服器未運作。\n" @@ -327,9 +319,7 @@ msgstr "LDAP 伺服器尚未執行。" #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:198 -msgid "" -"Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want " -"to create a new configuration from scratch?" +msgid "Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "您要立刻啟動它來重新讀取組態資料，或您要重新建立一個新的組態？" #. get helps page @@ -490,9 +480,7 @@ #. Doing these checks during installation will #. most probably fail #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:972 -msgid "" -"Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider " -"server.\n" +msgid "Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider server.\n" msgstr "開啟連線到提供者伺服器的 \"cn=config\" 資料庫 失敗。\n" #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:975 @@ -534,15 +522,12 @@ "已經扮演了仿製消費者的角色。\n" #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:1078 -msgid "" -"Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." +msgid "Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." msgstr "目前不支援設定 cn=config 的串聯仿製。" #. 2. Verify that the binddn/credential combination acutally works #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:1105 -msgid "" -"Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication " -"configuration on the provider server failed.\n" +msgid "Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication configuration on the provider server failed.\n" msgstr "檢查在提供者伺服器上仿製組態的 驗證憑據失敗。\n" #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:1108 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1971 @@ -571,8 +556,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:1220 msgid "" "\n" -"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to " -"encrypted\n" +"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to encrypted\n" "LDAP Connections.)\n" msgstr "" "\n" @@ -606,10 +590,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:21 msgid "" "<p>Select <b>Yes</b> if the LDAP server should be started automatically as \n" -"part of the boot process. Select <b>No</b> if the LDAP server should not be " -"started. Note:\n" -"After selecting <b>No</b>, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.\n" +"part of the boot process. Select <b>No</b> if the LDAP server should not be started. Note:\n" +"After selecting <b>No</b>, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>選擇 <b>是</b> 如果 LDAP 伺服器應該自動啟動成為 \n" "開機過程的一部份。選擇 <b>否</b> 如果 LDAP 伺服器不要啟動。 注意：\n" @@ -625,20 +607,16 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:30 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAP</b> is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured " -"communication\n" -"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate " -"configured.</p>" +"<p><b>LDAP</b> is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured communication\n" +"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate configured.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>LDAP</b> 是在埠號 389 的標準 LDAP 介面。TLS/SSL 安全通訊\n" "可以用 StartTLS 操作，如果您一個伺服器憑證組態。</p>" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:33 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAPS</b> enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL " -"protected\n" -"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate " -"configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" +"<p><b>LDAPS</b> enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL protected\n" +"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>LDAPS</b> 啟用 \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" 介面作為 SSL 保護連線\n" "在埠號 636。這只能在您有伺服器憑證組態 (請參閱 \"全域設定\"/\"TLS 設定\")。\n" @@ -672,10 +650,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:49 msgid "" -"<p>Choose the <b>Database</b> from <b>hdb</b> and <b>bdb</b>. <b>Hdb</b> is " -"a\n" -"variant of the <b>bdb</b> backend that uses a hierarchical database layout " -"and\n" +"<p>Choose the <b>Database</b> from <b>hdb</b> and <b>bdb</b>. <b>Hdb</b> is a\n" +"variant of the <b>bdb</b> backend that uses a hierarchical database layout and\n" "supports subtree renames. Otherwise it is identical to <b>bdb</b>. A\n" "<b>hdb</b>-Database needs a larger <b>idlcachesize</b> than a\n" "<b>bdb</b>-Database for a good search performance.</p>\n" @@ -697,30 +673,23 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:59 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Administrator DN</b> along with a <b>LDAP Administrator Password \n" -"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and " -"other \n" -"administrative limit restrictions. Checking <b>Append Base DN</b> appends " -"the \n" -"<b>Base DN</b> entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example," -"dc=com</tt>\n" -"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective " -"Administrator DN\n" +"<p>The <b>Administrator DN</b> along with a <b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> \n" +"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and other \n" +"administrative limit restrictions. Checking <b>Append Base DN</b> appends the \n" +"<b>Base DN</b> entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example,dc=com</tt>\n" +"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective Administrator DN\n" "of <tt>c=Admin,dc=example,dc=com</tt>.</p> " msgstr "" "<p>每個 <b>Root DN</b> 都會有一個 <b>Root 密碼</b> 可用來\n" "驗證資料庫的超級使用者、所有 ACL 和其他\n" " 管理限制。檢查<b>「附加基礎 DN」</b>是否附加上述已輸入的\n" " <b>「基礎 DN」</b>，例如，<tt>dc=com</tt> 的基礎 DN 和 \n" -" <tt>c=Admin</tt> 的root DN 會結合成有效的 <tt>c=Admin,dc=com</tt>root DN。" -"<p>\n" +" <tt>c=Admin</tt> 的root DN 會結合成有效的 <tt>c=Admin,dc=com</tt>root DN。<p>\n" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:67 msgid "" "<p>If this wizard was started during installation, the \n" -"<b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> is initially set to the system's root " -"password\n" +"<b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> is initially set to the system's root password\n" "entered earlier in the installation process.</p> " msgstr "" "<p>如果此精靈是在安裝時啟動， \n" @@ -759,8 +728,7 @@ "click <b>Change Password</b>. \n" "A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the \n" "<b>Password Encryption</b>. \n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already " -"been \n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been \n" "set in the configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -774,8 +742,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:99 msgid "" -"<p>Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN " -"automatically\n" +"<p>Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN automatically\n" "with <b>Append Base DN</b>.</p>" msgstr "" "輸入完整的 DN 或僅輸入第一部分，然後 使用\n" @@ -783,12 +750,9 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:102 msgid "" -"<p>To change the password for the administrator account, click <b>Change " -"Password</b>.\n" -"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the <b>Password " -"Encryption</b>.\n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been " -"set in the configuration.</p>\n" +"<p>To change the password for the administrator account, click <b>Change Password</b>.\n" +"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the <b>Password Encryption</b>.\n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been set in the configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>要變更管理員帳戶的密碼，請按 <b>變更 密碼</b>。\n" "一個跳出視窗將提示您輸入新的密碼並選擇 <b>密碼 加密</b>。\n" @@ -796,18 +760,12 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:107 msgid "" -"<p>With the <b>Entry Cache</b> and <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> you can " -"adjust\n" -"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The <b>Entry Cache</b> defines the " -"number of entries\n" -"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough " -"RAM) this number\n" -"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The <b>Index " -"Cache (IDL cache)</b> \n" -"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially " -"HDB-Databases require a\n" -"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the " -"entry cache as a rule of\n" +"<p>With the <b>Entry Cache</b> and <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> you can adjust\n" +"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The <b>Entry Cache</b> defines the number of entries\n" +"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough RAM) this number\n" +"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> \n" +"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially HDB-Databases require a\n" +"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the entry cache as a rule of\n" "thumbs).</p>" msgstr "" "<p>使用 <b>項目快取</b> 和 <b>索引快取 (IDL 快取)</b> 您可以調整\n" @@ -832,14 +790,10 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:120 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Hash Clear Text Passwords</b> to specify that the OpenLDAP " -"server\n" -"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests " -"before storing them\n" -"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, " -"but may be\n" -"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify " -"extended operation \n" +"<p>Check <b>Hash Clear Text Passwords</b> to specify that the OpenLDAP server\n" +"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests before storing them\n" +"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, but may be\n" +"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify extended operation \n" "to manage passwords.</p> " msgstr "" "<p>核取<b>「雜湊純文字密碼」</b>即可指定 OpenLDAP 伺服器\n" @@ -862,15 +816,12 @@ "站點不應該啟用本選項。</p>\n" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:134 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the name of the default policy object in <b>Default Policy Object " -"DN</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter the name of the default policy object in <b>Default Policy Object DN</b>.</p>" msgstr "<p>請在<b>「預設規則物件 DN」</b>中輸入預設規則物件的名稱。</p>" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:137 msgid "" -"<p>Create or change the default policy by clicking <b>Edit Policy</b>. You " -"may\n" +"<p>Create or change the default policy by clicking <b>Edit Policy</b>. You may\n" "be asked to enter the LDAP administrator password afterwards to allow the\n" "Policy Object being read from the server.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -884,33 +835,28 @@ msgstr "<p>變更一個 hdb 或 bdb 資料庫索引選項。</p>" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:144 -msgid "" -"<p>The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index " -"defined.</p>" +msgid "<p>The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index defined.</p>" msgstr "<p>此表格顯示目前有索引定義的屬性清單。</p>" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:147 msgid "" "<p>Indexes are used by OpenLDAP to improve search performance on specific\n" "types of searches. Indexes should be configured corresponding to the most\n" -"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different " -"types\n" +"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different types\n" "of indexes.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:153 msgid "" "<p><b>Presence</b>: This index is used for searches with presence filters\n" -"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be " -"configured\n" +"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be configured\n" "for attributes that occur rarely in the database.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:158 msgid "" "<p><b>Equality</b>: This index is used for searches with equality filters \n" -"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An <b>Equality</b> " -"index\n" +"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An <b>Equality</b> index\n" "should always be configured with the <tt>objectclass</tt> attribute.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -933,11 +879,9 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:171 msgid "" -"<p>Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly " -"added\n" +"<p>Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly added\n" "indexes will get active on a database. After the configuration has been\n" -"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the " -"indexing\n" +"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the indexing\n" "information for the database.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -954,8 +898,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:183 msgid "" -"<p>For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a " -"more\n" +"<p>For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a more\n" "detailed view of a rule or to change one, select the rule in the table and\n" "click <b>Edit</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -972,11 +915,9 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:191 msgid "" -"<p>OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose " -"target\n" +"<p>OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose target\n" "definition (DN, filter and attributes) matches the entry being\n" -"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, " -"using\n" +"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, using\n" "the <b>Up</b> and <b>Down</b> buttons.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -986,8 +927,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:200 msgid "" -"<p>Select the \"<b>Enable ldapsync provider for this database</b>\" " -"checkbox, if you want to \n" +"<p>Select the \"<b>Enable ldapsync provider for this database</b>\" checkbox, if you want to \n" "be able to replicate the currently selected database to another server.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -998,16 +938,11 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:204 msgid "" -"<p>Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator " -"(stored\n" -"in the \"<i>contextCSN</i>\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is " -"synced\n" -"to the database after the number of write \"<i>Operations</i>\" you specify " -"or\n" -"after more than the specified \"<i>Minutes</i>\" have passed since the " -"indicator\n" -"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator " -"is\n" +"<p>Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator (stored\n" +"in the \"<i>contextCSN</i>\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is synced\n" +"to the database after the number of write \"<i>Operations</i>\" you specify or\n" +"after more than the specified \"<i>Minutes</i>\" have passed since the indicator\n" +"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator is\n" "only written after a clean shutdown. Writing it more often can result in\n" "a faster startup time after an unclean shutdown but might result in a small\n" "performance hit in environments with many LDAP write operations.</p>\n" @@ -1019,14 +954,10 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:215 msgid "" -"<p>Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write " -"operations\n" -"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in " -"the session log. \n" -"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"<i>refreshOnly</i>\" " -"replication. In \n" -"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master " -"server.</p>" +"<p>Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write operations\n" +"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in the session log. \n" +"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"<i>refreshOnly</i>\" replication. In \n" +"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master server.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:221 @@ -1035,8 +966,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:224 msgid "" -"<p>Select \"<b>This database is a Replication Consumer</b>\" if you want " -"the\n" +"<p>Select \"<b>This database is a Replication Consumer</b>\" if you want the\n" "database to be a replica of a database on another server.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1050,8 +980,7 @@ "server here. Select the protocol to use (<b>ldap</b> or <b>ldaps</b>) and\n" "enter the fully qualified hostname of the master server. It is important to\n" "use the fully qualified hostname to verify the master server's TLS/SSL\n" -"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-" -"standard\n" +"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-standard\n" "ldap ports.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1084,10 +1013,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:250 msgid "" -"<p>Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to " -"authenticate against the master.\n" -"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated " -"database on the master.</p>\n" +"<p>Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to authenticate against the master.\n" +"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated database on the master.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:253 @@ -1099,10 +1026,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>As the slave database is readonly, the slave server will answer write\n" "operations with an LDAP referral. \n" -"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can " -"configure a different update referral here.\n" -"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for " -"the\n" +"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can configure a different update referral here.\n" +"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for the\n" "slave server is as slave server too. </p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1148,17 +1073,11 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 1 #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:287 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Start LDAP Server Yes or No</b>, start or stop the LDAP server. " -msgstr "" -"<p>使用<b>「啟動 LDAP 伺服器」的「是」或「否」</b>選項，啟動或停止 LDAP 伺服" -"器。</p> " +msgid "<p>With <b>Start LDAP Server Yes or No</b>, start or stop the LDAP server.</p> " +msgstr "<p>使用<b>「啟動 LDAP 伺服器」的「是」或「否」</b>選項，啟動或停止 LDAP 伺服器。</p> " #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:290 -msgid "" -"<p>If you select <b>Yes</b>, click <b>Next</b> to start the configuration " -"wizard.</p>" +msgid "<p>If you select <b>Yes</b>, click <b>Next</b> to start the configuration wizard.</p>" msgstr "<p>如果您選擇<b>是</b>，按 <b>下一步</b> 以啟動組態 精靈。</p>" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:293 @@ -1169,15 +1088,12 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 2 #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:297 -msgid "" -"<p>Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios " -"are available:</p>" +msgid "<p>Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios are available:</p>" msgstr "<p>選擇您想設定的 LDAP 伺服器類型。下列腳本可供選擇：</p>" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:300 msgid "" -"<p><b>Stand-alone server</b>: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server " -"with\n" +"<p><b>Stand-alone server</b>: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server with\n" "no preparations for replication.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>單獨伺服器</b>：設定單獨的 OpenLDAP 伺服器 沒有\n" @@ -1191,8 +1107,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:306 msgid "" -"<p><b>Replica slave server</b>: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that " -"replicates all its data,\n" +"<p><b>Replica slave server</b>: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that replicates all its data,\n" "including configuration, from a master server.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1214,18 +1129,15 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:319 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface</b>, to enable the " -"server\n" +"<p>Check <b>Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface</b>, to enable the server\n" "to accept LDAPS connections on port 636. If not checked, OpenLDAP will only\n" -"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.\n" +"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:324 msgid "" "<p>If you already have a common server certificate installed using the\n" -"corresponding YaST Module, check <b>Use common Server Certificate</b> so " -"that\n" +"corresponding YaST Module, check <b>Use common Server Certificate</b> so that\n" "the OpenLDAP server uses this certificate.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1236,10 +1148,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:330 msgid "" "<p>If you have no common server certificate or you want OpenLDAP to use a\n" -"different certificate, enter the file names of the <b>CA Certificate File,\n" -"<b>Certificate File</b> and <b>Certificate Key File</b> into the " -"corresponding\n" +"different certificate, enter the file names of the <b>CA Certificate File</b>,\n" +"<b>Certificate File</b> and <b>Certificate Key File</b> into the corresponding\n" "textfields.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1258,10 +1168,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:344 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<p>Add schema files in this dialog. Press <b>Add</b> to open a file dialog " -"in which to choose\n" -"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not " -"support the removal of \n" +"<p>Add schema files in this dialog. Press <b>Add</b> to open a file dialog in which to choose\n" +"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not support the removal of \n" "Schema Data</p>" msgstr "" "<p>在此對話方塊中新增或移除綱要檔案。按下<b>「新增」</b>。\n" @@ -1271,16 +1179,13 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:350 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<p>Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and " -"statistics\n" +"<p>Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and statistics\n" "to syslog.</p>" msgstr "<p>指定除錯陳述式及操作統計應該寫入 syslog 的層級。</p>" #. Tree Item Dialog "allow" 1/1 #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:354 -msgid "" -"<p>Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or " -"disallow:</p>" +msgid "<p>Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or disallow:</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:357 @@ -1289,17 +1194,14 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:358 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAPv2 Bind Requests</b>: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind " -"requests.\n" +"<p><b>LDAPv2 Bind Requests</b>: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind requests.\n" "Note that OpenLDAP does not truly implement LDAPv2.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:361 msgid "" -"<p><b>Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty</b>: To allow anonymous bind " -"when \n" -"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not " -"present) </p>" +"<p><b>Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty</b>: To allow anonymous bind when \n" +"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not present) </p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:364 @@ -1310,8 +1212,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:367 msgid "" -"<p><b>Unauthenticated Update Operations to process</b>: To allow " -"unauthenticated\n" +"<p><b>Unauthenticated Update Operations to process</b>: To allow unauthenticated\n" "(anonymous) update operations to be processed. They are still subject to\n" "access controls and other administrative limits.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1329,16 +1230,14 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:378 msgid "" -"<p><b>Disable Simple Bind authentication</b>: Completely disable Simple " -"Bind\n" +"<p><b>Disable Simple Bind authentication</b>: Completely disable Simple Bind\n" "authentication</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:381 msgid "" "<p><b>Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation\n" -"receipt</b>: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection " -"back\n" +"receipt</b>: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection back\n" "to the anonymous state when receiving the StartTLS operation.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1353,12 +1252,9 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:392 msgid "" "<p>This lists shows all configured databases. The databases with the type\n" -"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The " -"\"Frontend\"\n" -"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and " -"overlays\n" -"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration " -"of\n" +"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The \"Frontend\"\n" +"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and overlays\n" +"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration of\n" "the LDAP server itself.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1369,32 +1265,26 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:401 msgid "" -"<p>To delete a database, select a database from the list and press <b>Delete " -"Database...</b>.\n" +"<p>To delete a database, select a database from the list and press <b>Delete Database...</b>.\n" "You cannot delete the \"config\" and \"frontend\" databases.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:404 msgid "" -"<p>Enter a password for the configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\") " -"here. This is required to make\n" +"<p>Enter a password for the configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\") here. This is required to make\n" "the configuration database accessible remotely.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:407 msgid "" -"<p>If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select " -"the \"<b>Prepare for MirrorMode replication</b>\"\n" -"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as " -"needed for MirrorMode replication.</p>\n" +"<p>If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select the \"<b>Prepare for MirrorMode replication</b>\"\n" +"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as needed for MirrorMode replication.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:410 msgid "" -"<p>To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master " -"server. Please enter the master\n" -"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"<i>ldap</i>\" or " -"\"<i>ldaps</i>\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" +"<p>To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master server. Please enter the master\n" +"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"<i>ldap</i>\" or \"<i>ldaps</i>\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" "for the master's configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\").</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1419,9 +1309,7 @@ msgstr "伺服器 URI" #: src/include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:50 -msgid "" -"This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the " -"standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." +msgid "This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:85 @@ -1429,8 +1317,7 @@ msgstr "OpenLDAP 鏡像模式綜覽" #: src/include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:127 -msgid "" -"Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" +msgid "Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:130 @@ -1744,9 +1631,7 @@ msgstr "選取不允許旗標(&D)：" #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:175 -msgid "" -"Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous " -"directory access)" +msgid "Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous directory access)" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:179 @@ -1755,8 +1640,7 @@ msgstr "停用指紋驗證" #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:182 -msgid "" -"Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" +msgid "Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:188 @@ -2276,8 +2160,7 @@ msgstr "檢查 LDAPsync 能力到供應者失敗。" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1995 -msgid "" -"Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" +msgid "Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" msgstr "請確認目標伺服器可作為 LDAPsync 供應者" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2094 @@ -2425,9 +2308,7 @@ msgstr "正在更新預設密碼規則物件" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:883 -msgid "" -"Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take " -"some minutes)" +msgid "Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take some minutes)" msgstr "正在等候 OpenLDAP 背景索引工作完成 (這可能會 花上數分鐘)" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:884 @@ -2447,9 +2328,7 @@ msgstr "建立密碼規則物件失敗。" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:1006 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to " -"finish.\n" +msgid "An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to finish.\n" msgstr "當等候 OpenLDAP 資料庫索引結束時發生錯誤。\n" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:1007 @@ -2555,9 +2434,7 @@ msgstr "無法判斷自己的完整合格主機名稱。" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:1874 -msgid "" -"A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its " -"own fully qualified hostname." +msgid "A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its own fully qualified hostname." msgstr "仿製的主伺服器若不知道自己的完整合格主機名稱，則無法正常運作。" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:2510 src/modules/LdapServer.pm:2520 @@ -2574,9 +2451,7 @@ msgstr "\"，無法取出 RDN 值" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:2565 -msgid "" -"The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-" -"letter code." +msgid "The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-letter code." msgstr "\"c\" 屬性的值必須包含一個有效的 ISO-3166 國家兩個字母代碼。" #. parameter check failed @@ -2618,8 +2493,7 @@ msgstr "CA 憑證檔案不存在" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:3414 -msgid "" -"Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" +msgid "Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" msgstr "當嘗試確認提供伺服器的憑證時發生錯誤。\n" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:3415 @@ -2844,8 +2718,7 @@ #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" -#~ "Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>. An additional dialog " -#~ "informs whether it\n" +#~ "Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>. An additional dialog informs whether it\n" #~ "is safe to do so. </p> " #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b><big>中止儲存：</big></b><br>\n" @@ -2906,9 +2779,7 @@ #~ msgstr "新密碼(&N)" #, fuzzy -#~ msgid "" -#~ "You have an existing configuration but the LDAP Server is not currently " -#~ "running." +#~ msgid "You have an existing configuration but the LDAP Server is not currently running." #~ msgstr "您的電腦已設定為 LDAP 客戶端且 LDAP 伺服器非本地的。" #~ msgid "Delete a schema from the list" @@ -2978,18 +2849,15 @@ #~ "<br></p>\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Select a schema file in the list and press <b>Delete</b> to remove it " -#~ "from the\n" +#~ "<p>Select a schema file in the list and press <b>Delete</b> to remove it from the\n" #~ "configuration file.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>在清單中選取綱要檔案，然後按下<b>「刪除」</b>，將它從\n" #~ "組態檔案中移除。</p>" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>With the <b>Up</b> and <b>Down</b> buttons, change the position of " -#~ "the\n" -#~ "selected schema file. Keep in mind that some schema files depend on " -#~ "others. An incorrect\n" +#~ "<p>With the <b>Up</b> and <b>Down</b> buttons, change the position of the\n" +#~ "selected schema file. Keep in mind that some schema files depend on others. An incorrect\n" #~ "order causes the LDAP server not to start.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>使用<b>「向上」</b>與<b>「向下」</b>按鈕，變更選取的綱要檔案\n" @@ -3002,9 +2870,7 @@ #~ msgid "<p>If TLS is active, view the current settings here.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>如果啟動 TLS，在此處檢視目前的設定。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>With <b>Select Certificate...</b>, configure new certificates for this " -#~ "service.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>With <b>Select Certificate...</b>, configure new certificates for this service.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>使用<b>「選取憑證...」</b>，設定此服務新憑證的組態。</p>" #~ msgid "<p>In this dialog, edit some parameters of this database.<p>" @@ -3013,14 +2879,10 @@ #~ msgid "<p>With <b>Root DN</b>, change the DN for the administrator." #~ msgstr "<p>使<b>「根 DN」</b>，變更管理員的 DN。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>To change the password for the root account, enter a new one and " -#~ "select the <b>Encryption</b>.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>To change the password for the root account, enter a new one and select the <b>Encryption</b>.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>若要變更根帳戶的密碼，請輸入新密碼並選取<b>「加密」</b>。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>The password fields are initially empty, even if a password is already " -#~ "set in the configuration file.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>The password fields are initially empty, even if a password is already set in the configuration file.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>即使已經在組態檔案中設定密碼，密碼欄位一開始仍是空白的。</p>" #, fuzzy @@ -3051,18 +2913,15 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>The <b>Root Password</b> is initially set to the system root password\n" #~ "entered earlier in the installation process. Change it in the\n" -#~ "edit fields. Change the password encryption method in the relevant field." -#~ "</p>\n" +#~ "edit fields. Change the password encryption method in the relevant field.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>「根密碼」</b>一開始是設定為系統根密碼，\n" #~ "在安裝程序一開始時會輸入此資訊。在編輯欄位中\n" #~ "變更此值。在相關欄位中變更密碼加密方法。</p>\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Checking the <b>Activate StartTLS</b> option enables the LDAP server " -#~ "to\n" -#~ "process incoming StartTLS requests. This requires the common server " -#~ "certificate\n" +#~ "<p>Checking the <b>Activate StartTLS</b> option enables the LDAP server to\n" +#~ "process incoming StartTLS requests. This requires the common server certificate\n" #~ "that can be set up in the <b>CA Management</b> YaST module.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>選取<b>「啟動 StartTLS」</b>選項會開啟 LDAP 伺服器，\n" @@ -3086,8 +2945,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b><big>Adding an LDAP Server:</big></b><br>\n" #~ "Choose an LDAP server from the list of detected LDAP servers.\n" -#~ "If your LDAP server was not autodetected, use <b>Other (not detected).\n" +#~ "If your LDAP server was not autodetected, use <b>Other (not detected)</b>.\n" #~ "Then press <b>Configure</b>.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b><big>新增 LDAP 伺服器：</big></b><br>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ldap.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ldap.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ldap.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" "Language-Team: none\n" @@ -42,6 +42,8 @@ "\n" "The server could be down or unreachable.\n" msgstr "" +"\n" +"伺服器可能已經關機或無法連接。\n" #. error message: #: src/Ldap.rb:534 @@ -49,6 +51,8 @@ "\n" "The value of DN is missing or invalid.\n" msgstr "" +"\n" +"缺少 DN 的值或無效。\n" #. error message: #: src/Ldap.rb:538 @@ -56,6 +60,8 @@ "\n" "Attribute type not found.\n" msgstr "" +"\n" +"找不到屬性類型。\n" #. error message: #: src/Ldap.rb:540 @@ -63,23 +69,25 @@ "\n" "Object class not found.\n" msgstr "" +"\n" +"找不到物件類別。\n" #. error message, more specific description follows #. error message #. error message #: src/Ldap.rb:545 src/Ldap.rb:782 src/Ldap.rb:848 msgid "Connection to the LDAP server cannot be established." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法建立與 LDAP 伺服器的連接。" #. error message, more specific description follows #: src/Ldap.rb:549 msgid "A problem occurred while connecting to the LDAP server." -msgstr "" +msgstr "連接到 LDAP 伺服器時發生問題。" #. error message, more specific description follows #: src/Ldap.rb:553 msgid "A problem occurred while reading data from the LDAP server." -msgstr "" +msgstr "從 LDAP 伺服器讀取資料時發生問題。" #. error message, more specific description follows #: src/Ldap.rb:557 @@ -99,26 +107,26 @@ #. error message, more specific description follows #: src/Ldap.rb:569 msgid "A problem occurred while reading schema from the LDAP server." -msgstr "" +msgstr "從 LDAP 伺服器讀取綱要時發生問題。" #. default error message #: src/Ldap.rb:594 msgid "An unknown LDAP error occurred." -msgstr "" +msgstr "發生未知的 LDAP 錯誤。" #. checkbox label #. checkbox label #. checkbox label #: src/Ldap.rb:604 src/Ldap.rb:791 src/Ldap.rb:857 msgid "&Show Details" -msgstr "" +msgstr "顯示詳細資料(&S)" #. error message #. error message #. error message #: src/Ldap.rb:722 src/Ldap.rb:742 src/Ldap.rb:912 msgid "Unknown error. Perhaps 'yast2-ldap' is not available." -msgstr "" +msgstr "未知的錯誤。可能無法使用 'yast2-ldap'。" #. question following error message (yes/no buttons follow) #: src/Ldap.rb:800 @@ -133,6 +141,10 @@ "\n" "Retry connection without TLS/SSL?\n" msgstr "" +"有一個可能造成連線失敗的原因是您的客戶端\n" +"設定為 TLS/SSL，但伺服器不支援。\n" +"\n" +"不使用 TLS/SSL 重新連線嗎？\n" #. Asks user for bind_dn and password to LDAP server #. @param anonymous if anonymous access could be allowed @@ -145,17 +157,17 @@ #. password entering label #: src/Ldap.rb:975 src/ldap_browser.rb:155 msgid "&LDAP Server Password" -msgstr "" +msgstr "LDAP 伺服器密碼(&L)" #. label #: src/Ldap.rb:979 msgid "Server: %1:%2" -msgstr "" +msgstr "伺服器： %1:%2" #. button label #: src/Ldap.rb:988 msgid "&Anonymous Access" -msgstr "" +msgstr "匿名存取(&A)" #. error message, %1 is DN #: src/Ldap.rb:1330 @@ -164,6 +176,9 @@ "does not exist in the LDAP directory.\n" "The object with the selected DN cannot be created.\n" msgstr "" +"LDAP 目錄中沒有 DN '%1' 的\n" +"直接父項。\n" +"無法建立具有所選取 DN 的物件。\n" #. yes/no popup, %1 is value of DN #: src/Ldap.rb:1634 @@ -171,17 +186,19 @@ "No entry with DN '%1'\n" "exists on the LDAP server. Create it now?\n" msgstr "" +"LDAP 伺服器上沒有???? DN '%1'\n" +"的項目。現在要建立它嗎？\n" #. button label #. button label #: src/LdapPopup.rb:75 src/ldap_browser.rb:547 msgid "&Open" -msgstr "" +msgstr "開啟(&O)" #. help text 1/3 #: src/LdapPopup.rb:262 msgid "<p>Set the new value for the current attribute.</p>" -msgstr "" +msgstr "<p>為目前的屬性設定新值。</p>" #. help text 2/3 #: src/LdapPopup.rb:264 @@ -193,6 +210,12 @@ "it is possible to choose it from the LDAP tree using <b>Browse</b>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" +"<p>如果屬性可以有多個值，請\n" +"以<b>「新增值」</b>新增項目。 有時此按鈕包含目前屬性\n" +"可用值的清單。\n" +" 如果所編輯的屬性值應為可辨識名稱 (DN)，\n" +"便可使用<b>「瀏覽」</b>從 LDAP 樹狀結構中加以選擇。\n" +" </p>\n" #. help text 3/3, %1 is attribute name, description follows. #. The description will be not translated: maybe add a note @@ -203,79 +226,86 @@ #. "<p>The description (only in english) of attribute \"%1\":<br></p>" #: src/LdapPopup.rb:287 msgid "<p>The description of attribute \"%1\":<br></p>" -msgstr "" +msgstr "<p>屬性 \"%1\" 的描述：<br></p>" #. textentry label #: src/LdapPopup.rb:311 msgid "&Value of \"%1\" Attribute" -msgstr "" +msgstr "屬性 \"%1\" 的值(&V)" #. textentry label #: src/LdapPopup.rb:322 msgid "&Values of \"%1\" Attribute" -msgstr "" +msgstr "屬性 \"%1\" 的值(&V)" #. button label #. button label #: src/LdapPopup.rb:346 src/LdapPopup.rb:356 msgid "&Add Value" -msgstr "" +msgstr "新增值(&A)" #. menubutton item (default value) #: src/LdapPopup.rb:350 msgid "&Empty Entry" -msgstr "" +msgstr "清除項目(&E)" #: src/LdapPopup.rb:351 msgid "Bro&wse" -msgstr "" +msgstr "瀏覽(&W)" #. error popup -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:437 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:439 msgid "" "The value '%1' already exists.\n" "Please select another one." msgstr "" +"已有值 '%1'。\n" +"請選取另一個。" #. description of configuration object -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:465 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:467 msgid "Configuration of user management tools" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用者管理工具的組態" #. description of configuration object -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:469 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:471 msgid "Configuration of group management tools" -msgstr "" +msgstr "群組管理工具的組態" #. label -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:474 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:476 msgid "Object Class of New Module" -msgstr "" +msgstr "新模組的物件類別" #. textentry label, do not translate "cn" -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:502 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:504 msgid "&Name of New Module (\"cn\" Value)" -msgstr "" +msgstr "新模組的名稱 (「cn」值)(&N)" #. error popup -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:528 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:530 msgid "" "The entered value already exists.\n" "Select another one.\n" msgstr "" +"已有輸入的值。\n" +"請選取另一個。\n" #. error popup -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:534 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:536 msgid "Enter the module name." -msgstr "" +msgstr "輸入模組名稱。" #. help text 1/3 -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:553 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:555 msgid "" "<p>Here, set the values of attributes belonging\n" "to an object using the current template. Such values are used as defaults when\n" "the new object is created.</p>\n" msgstr "" +"<p>可在此處設定屬性值，該值屬於\n" +"使用目前樣板的物件。建立新物件時，\n" +"會將這類值做為預設值。</p>\n" #. // help text 2/3 do not translate "defaultObjectClass" #. _("<p>The list of attributes provided in <b>Attribute Name</b> is the @@ -283,33 +313,37 @@ #. entry of the current template.</p> #. ") + #. help text 3/3 do not translate "homedirectory" -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:565 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:567 msgid "" "<p>You can use special syntax to create attribute\n" "values from existing ones. The expression <i>%attr_name</i> will be replaced\n" "with the value of attribute \"attr_name\" (for example, use \"/home/%uid\"\n" "as a value of \"homeDirectory\").</p>\n" msgstr "" +"<p>可使用特殊語法，從現有屬性值中\n" +"建立屬性值。使用屬性 \"attr_name\" 的值\n" +"來取代表示式 <i>%attr_name</i> (例如，將 \"/home/%uid\"\n" +"做為 \"homeDirectory\" 的值)。</p>\n" #. combobox label -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:588 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:590 msgid "Attribute &Name" -msgstr "" +msgstr "屬性名稱(&N)" #. textentry label -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:594 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:596 msgid "Attribute &Value" -msgstr "" +msgstr "屬性值(&V)" #. general help text for LDAP browser #: src/ldap_browser.rb:62 msgid "<p>Browse the LDAP tree in the left part of the dialog.</p>" -msgstr "" +msgstr "<p>在左邊的對話框瀏覽 LDAP 樹狀結構。</p>" #. help text for LDAP browser #: src/ldap_browser.rb:64 msgid "<p>Once the LDAP object is selected in the tree, the table shows the object data. Use <b>Edit</b> to change the value of the selected attribute. Use <b>Save</b> to save your changes to LDAP.</p>" -msgstr "" +msgstr "<p>一旦 LDAP 物件在樹狀結構中選定，表格會顯示物件資料。使用<b>「編輯」</b>變更所選屬性的值。使用<b>「儲存」</b>儲存您對 LDAP 的變更。</p>" #. popup question (Continue/Cancel follows) #: src/ldap_browser.rb:69 @@ -317,47 +351,49 @@ "There are unsaved changes in the current entry.\n" "Discard these changes?\n" msgstr "" +"目前項目中有尚未儲存的變更。\n" +"是否要放棄這些變更？\n" #. dialog caption #: src/ldap_browser.rb:85 msgid "LDAP Browser" -msgstr "" +msgstr "LDAP 瀏覽器" #. combobox item #: src/ldap_browser.rb:101 msgid "Current LDAP Client settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "目前 LDAP 用戶端設定" #. combo box label #. combo box label #: src/ldap_browser.rb:135 src/ldap_browser.rb:747 msgid "LDAP Connections" -msgstr "" +msgstr "LDAP 連線" #. textentry label #: src/ldap_browser.rb:146 msgid "LDAP Server" -msgstr "" +msgstr "LDAP 伺服器" #. textentry label #: src/ldap_browser.rb:152 msgid "Administrator DN" -msgstr "" +msgstr "管理員 DN" #. check box label #: src/ldap_browser.rb:162 msgid "L&DAP TLS" -msgstr "" +msgstr "LDAP TLS(&D)" #. button label #: src/ldap_browser.rb:168 msgid "A&nonymous Access" -msgstr "" +msgstr "匿名存取(&N)" #. InputField label #: src/ldap_browser.rb:230 msgid "Enter the name of the new LDAP connection" -msgstr "" +msgstr "輸入新的 LDAP 連線的名稱。" #. error popup, %1 is attribute name #: src/ldap_browser.rb:452 @@ -365,18 +401,20 @@ "The \"%1\" attribute is mandatory.\n" "Enter a value." msgstr "" +"\"%1\" 是強制屬性。\n" +"請輸入值。" #. button label #: src/ldap_browser.rb:550 msgid "&Reload" -msgstr "" +msgstr "重新載入(&R)" #. table header 1/2 #: src/ldap_browser.rb:691 msgid "Attribute" -msgstr "" +msgstr "屬性" #. table header 2/2 #: src/ldap_browser.rb:693 msgid "Value" -msgstr "" +msgstr "值" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/live-installer.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/live-installer.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/live-installer.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: live-installer\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-17 09:52+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/lxc.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/lxc.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/lxc.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2001-06-05 18:04+02:00\n" "Last-Translator: 裴寒牧 \n" "Language-Team: 中華 \n" @@ -270,20 +270,15 @@ #: src/include/lxc/helps.rb:40 msgid "" "<p><b><big>LXC Overview</big></b><br>\n" -"Here, see the list of configured Linux Containers (LXC) with their current " -"status.\n" -"<p>Use <b>Create</b> to create new container. Delete existing one with " -"<b>Destroy</b>.\n" +"Here, see the list of configured Linux Containers (LXC) with their current status.\n" +"<p>Use <b>Create</b> to create new container. Delete existing one with <b>Destroy</b>.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" #. Overview dialog help, part 2 #: src/include/lxc/helps.rb:47 msgid "" -"<p>You can start selected container with <b>Start</b>. The container is " -"started in background. You can connect to it using <b>Connect</b> button or " -"manually using <tt>lxc-console</tt> command. Once in console, you can close " -"it from within or using the <b>Disconnect</b> button.</p>\n" +"<p>You can start selected container with <b>Start</b>. The container is started in background. You can connect to it using <b>Connect</b> button or manually using <tt>lxc-console</tt> command. Once in console, you can close it from within or using the <b>Disconnect</b> button.</p>\n" "<p>Note that <b>Connect</b> option is not available in text mode.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -297,29 +292,19 @@ #. Create dialog help, part 2 #: src/include/lxc/helps.rb:55 -msgid "" -"<p>Choose a <b>Name</b> for your container, select a base <b>Template</b>, " -"and enter desired network settings.</p>" +msgid "<p>Choose a <b>Name</b> for your container, select a base <b>Template</b>, and enter desired network settings.</p>" msgstr "" #. Create dialog help, part 3 #: src/include/lxc/helps.rb:59 -msgid "" -"<p>Use the value <tt>0.0.0.0</tt> as <b>IP Address</b> to have dynamic " -"address assigned by DHCP. If there's no bridge device configured yet, use " -"the <b>Configure Network</b> button and create one.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use the value <tt>0.0.0.0</tt> as <b>IP Address</b> to have dynamic address assigned by DHCP. If there's no bridge device configured yet, use the <b>Configure Network</b> button and create one.</p>" msgstr "" #. Create dialog help, part 4 #: src/include/lxc/helps.rb:63 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>Select a password to use for a system administrator ('root') in the " -"container. If no password is entered, the default value <tt>root</tt> will " -"be used.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>核取 <b>系統管理員使用此密碼</b> 如果 root 要使用和第一個使用者相同的密" -"碼。</p>" +msgid "<p>Select a password to use for a system administrator ('root') in the container. If no password is entered, the default value <tt>root</tt> will be used.</p>" +msgstr "<p>核取 <b>系統管理員使用此密碼</b> 如果 root 要使用和第一個使用者相同的密碼。</p>" #. Create dialog help, part 5 #: src/include/lxc/helps.rb:67 @@ -330,9 +315,7 @@ #. info label (try to keep the text short) #: src/modules/Lxc.rb:226 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Some problems with LXC configuration were found. Check the documentation for " -"details." +msgid "Some problems with LXC configuration were found. Check the documentation for details." msgstr "" "Samba 用戶端組態模組。\n" "請參閱 Samba 文件以取得詳細資訊。" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/mail.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/mail.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/mail.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: mail\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-18 13:54+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -108,8 +108,7 @@ #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:79 msgid "" "<p>If choosing <b>No Connection</b>, the mail server will be started.\n" -"However, only local mail transport is possible. The MTA listens to the " -"localhost.</p>\n" +"However, only local mail transport is possible. The MTA listens to the localhost.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>如果選擇 <b>無連線</b>，郵件伺服器將被啟動。\n" "然而，只能進行本地郵件傳遞。MTA 會傾聽本機。</p>\n" @@ -128,8 +127,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p>Some servers require authentication for sending mails. Here you can\n" -"enter information for this option. If you do not want to use " -"authentication,\n" +"enter information for this option. If you do not want to use authentication,\n" "simply leave these fields empty.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" @@ -142,8 +140,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p>The outgoing mail server is generally intended for dial-up connections.\n" -"Enter the Internet service provider's SMTP server, such as <b>smtp.provider." -"com</b>.</p>\n" +"Enter the Internet service provider's SMTP server, such as <b>smtp.provider.com</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<p>外送郵件伺服器一般是用於撥號連接。\n" @@ -153,8 +150,7 @@ #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:109 msgid "" "\n" -"<p>In the <b>User Name</b> field, enter the user name assigned by from your " -"provider.</p>\n" +"<p>In the <b>User Name</b> field, enter the user name assigned by from your provider.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<p>在<b>「使用者名稱」</b>欄位中，輸入提供者所指定的使用者名稱。</p>\n" @@ -198,8 +194,7 @@ "\n" "<p>This table redirects mail delivered locally.\n" "Redirect it to another local user (useful for system accounts,\n" -"especially for <b>root</b>), to a remote address, or to a list of addresses." -"</p>\n" +"especially for <b>root</b>), to a remote address, or to a list of addresses.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<p>這個表格重新指向在本地已傳遞的郵件。\n" @@ -687,8 +682,7 @@ #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:162 msgid "" "\n" -"<p><b>Enabling virus scanning (AMaViS)</b> checks incoming and outgoing " -"mail\n" +"<p><b>Enabling virus scanning (AMaViS)</b> checks incoming and outgoing mail\n" "with AMaViS.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" @@ -738,13 +732,10 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p>Enabling DKIM for outgoing emails requires additional actions. A SSL key\n" -"will be generated for the 'mydomain' value defined in Postfix. A new " -"service\n" -"'submission' will be configured in Postfix. After this is set up you can " -"send\n" +"will be generated for the 'mydomain' value defined in Postfix. A new service\n" +"'submission' will be configured in Postfix. After this is set up you can send\n" "email with this service 'submission' from 'mynetworks' with enabled SASL\n" -"authentication. Only the emails sent by this new service will be signed " -"with\n" +"authentication. Only the emails sent by this new service will be signed with\n" "the domain key.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -756,16 +747,14 @@ "Service. The public key will be saved as a DNS TXT record\n" "in <b>/var/db/dkim/[mydomain].public.txt</b> and needs to be deployed to an\n" "according Domain Name Service. If there is a name service\n" -"running on this server, which is the authoritative server for that domain, " -"the\n" +"running on this server, which is the authoritative server for that domain, the\n" "public key will be added as a TXT record to that domain zone\n" "automatically.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:215 -msgid "" -"If you enable DKIM support, the virus scanning (AMaViS) will be enabled too." +msgid "If you enable DKIM support, the virus scanning (AMaViS) will be enabled too." msgstr "如果您啟用 DKIM 支援，病毒掃描 (AMaViS) 也會被啟用。" #. Translators: text entry label @@ -810,12 +799,8 @@ #. help text #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:306 -msgid "" -"<p>The <b>delivery mode</b> is usually <b>Directly</b>, unless you do not " -"forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>除非不轉寄 root 的郵件或想要透過 IMAP 存取郵件，否則<b>「傳遞模式」</b>通" -"常是 <b>直接</b>。</p>" +msgid "<p>The <b>delivery mode</b> is usually <b>Directly</b>, unless you do not forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP.</p>" +msgstr "<p>除非不轉寄 root 的郵件或想要透過 IMAP 存取郵件，否則<b>「傳遞模式」</b>通常是 <b>直接</b>。</p>" #. LogView label. take a string from users? #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:345 @@ -1147,11 +1132,8 @@ #~ msgid "<P><B>Mail Server Configuration</B><BR>" #~ msgstr "<P><B>電子郵件伺服器組態</B><BR>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<P>This module will configure and start Postfix and, if necessary, the " -#~ "Cyrus IMAP server.</P>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<P>此模組將設定與啟動 Postfix 且，如果需要的話， Cyrus IMAP 伺服器。</P>" +#~ msgid "<P>This module will configure and start Postfix and, if necessary, the Cyrus IMAP server.</P>" +#~ msgstr "<P>此模組將設定與啟動 Postfix 且，如果需要的話， Cyrus IMAP 伺服器。</P>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<P><B>Warning:</B></P>\n" @@ -1180,34 +1162,22 @@ #~ msgid "Select configuration type according your needs." #~ msgstr "依照您的個人需求選擇設定的類型。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "If you want to use sendmail as your MTA, you have to use the Standard " -#~ "configuration." +#~ msgid "If you want to use sendmail as your MTA, you have to use the Standard configuration." #~ msgstr "如果您要使用 sendmail 當作 MTA，您必須使用標準組態。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "The Advanced configuration use LDAP as backend and will configure your " -#~ "system as LDAP-Client and setup an LDAP-Server if necessary." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "進階的設定使用 LDAP 作為後端，並會設定您的系統為 LDAP-客戶端，並設定一個 " -#~ "LDAP-伺服器(如果需要的話)。" +#~ msgid "The Advanced configuration use LDAP as backend and will configure your system as LDAP-Client and setup an LDAP-Server if necessary." +#~ msgstr "進階的設定使用 LDAP 作為後端，並會設定您的系統為 LDAP-客戶端，並設定一個 LDAP-伺服器(如果需要的話)。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "The running mail server configuration is based on the \"Standard\" type." +#~ msgid "The running mail server configuration is based on the \"Standard\" type." #~ msgstr "運作中的郵件伺服器是基於 \"標準\" 類型。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "It is possible to change to \"Advanced\" settings. This will overwrite " -#~ "all existing settings." +#~ msgid "It is possible to change to \"Advanced\" settings. This will overwrite all existing settings." #~ msgstr "您可以變更為 \"進階\"。這將覆寫所有既存的設定。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "The running mail server configuration is based on the \"Advanced\" type." +#~ msgid "The running mail server configuration is based on the \"Advanced\" type." #~ msgstr "運作中的郵件伺服器是基於 \"進階\" 類型。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "It is possible to change to \"Standard\" settings. This will overwrite " -#~ "all existing settings." +#~ msgid "It is possible to change to \"Standard\" settings. This will overwrite all existing settings." #~ msgstr "您可以變更為 \"標準\"。這將覆寫所有既存的設定。" #~ msgid "Standard" @@ -1255,39 +1225,26 @@ #~ msgid "We suggest you set up a local LDAP server for the mail server." #~ msgstr "我們建議您為郵件伺服器設定一個本地 LDAP 伺服器。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Create certificates for the LDAP and mail server in order to secure your " -#~ "system." +#~ msgid "Create certificates for the LDAP and mail server in order to secure your system." #~ msgstr "建立 LDAP 和郵件伺服器的驗證以確保您的系統安全。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Your computer is configured as an LDAP client and the LDAP server is " -#~ "local." +#~ msgid "Your computer is configured as an LDAP client and the LDAP server is local." #~ msgstr "您的電腦已設定為 LDAP 客戶端且 LDAP 伺服器是本地的。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "We suggest you adapt the LDAP server configuration for the mail server." +#~ msgid "We suggest you adapt the LDAP server configuration for the mail server." #~ msgstr "我們建議您為郵件伺服器調整 LDAP 伺服器。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "For this reason you have to know the password of the LDAP administrator " -#~ "account:" +#~ msgid "For this reason you have to know the password of the LDAP administrator account:" #~ msgstr "因此您必須知道 LDAP 管理者帳號的密碼：" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Your computer is configured as a LDAP client and the LDAP server is not " -#~ "local." +#~ msgid "Your computer is configured as a LDAP client and the LDAP server is not local." #~ msgstr "您的電腦已設定為 LDAP 客戶端且 LDAP 伺服器非本地的。" #~ msgid "We suggest you configure the LDAP server for the mail server." #~ msgstr "我們建議您為郵件伺服器設定 LDAP 伺服器。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Furthermore, the LDAP server has to contain the <b>suse-mailserver." -#~ "schema</b> and the corresponding index entries." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "此外， LDAP 伺服器必須包含 <b>suse-mailserver.schema</b> 及相對應的索引內" -#~ "容。" +#~ msgid "Furthermore, the LDAP server has to contain the <b>suse-mailserver.schema</b> and the corresponding index entries." +#~ msgstr "此外， LDAP 伺服器必須包含 <b>suse-mailserver.schema</b> 及相對應的索引內容。" #~ msgid "Create certificates." #~ msgstr "建立憑證。" @@ -1656,10 +1613,8 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b><big>Administrator Authorization</big></b><br>\n" #~ "To use the YaST mail server component, your system must use LDAP\n" -#~ "as a repository for the user and group accounts and for the DNS services." -#~ "<br>\n" -#~ "Some of the mail server settings will be stored in the LDAP repository, " -#~ "too.<br></p>\n" +#~ "as a repository for the user and group accounts and for the DNS services.<br>\n" +#~ "Some of the mail server settings will be stored in the LDAP repository, too.<br></p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b><big>管理員授權</big></b><br>\n" #~ "若要使用 YaST 郵件伺服器元件，您的系統必須使用 LDAP\n" @@ -1716,8 +1671,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b><big>Mail Size:</big></b><br>\n" -#~ "This parameter limits the total size in bytes of a mail (sending and " -#~ "getting),\n" +#~ "This parameter limits the total size in bytes of a mail (sending and getting),\n" #~ "including envelope information.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" @@ -1755,10 +1709,8 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b><big>SPAM Prevention</big></b><br>\n" -#~ "Postfix offers a variety of parameters that limit the delivery of " -#~ "unsolicited commercial e-mail (UCE).\n" -#~ "In this dialog, configure this settings. For example, set access lists " -#~ "or RBL\n" +#~ "Postfix offers a variety of parameters that limit the delivery of unsolicited commercial e-mail (UCE).\n" +#~ "In this dialog, configure this settings. For example, set access lists or RBL\n" #~ "(real-time blackhole list) name servers. \n" #~ "<br></p>\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -1770,45 +1722,31 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b><big>Start Virus Scanner AMAVIS:</big></b><br>\n" -#~ "If you start the virus scanner AMAVIS, your emails will be scanned for " -#~ "viruses and and for spam.\n" -#~ "The virus scanner engine <b>Clamavd</b> and the spam finder " -#~ "<b>SpamAssassin</b> will be installed \n" -#~ "and configured as well. You can also install other (commercial) virus " -#~ "scanner engines.\n" +#~ "If you start the virus scanner AMAVIS, your emails will be scanned for viruses and and for spam.\n" +#~ "The virus scanner engine <b>Clamavd</b> and the spam finder <b>SpamAssassin</b> will be installed \n" +#~ "and configured as well. You can also install other (commercial) virus scanner engines.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b><big>啟動防毒掃描軟體 AMAVIS:</big></b><br>\n" -#~ "如果你啟動了防毒掃描軟體 AMAVIS, 你的電子郵件將被進行病毒掃描和垃圾郵件檢" -#~ "查。\n" -#~ "防毒掃描引擎 <b>Clamavd</b> 與垃圾郵件檢查工具 <b>SpamAssassin</b> 將會被" -#~ "安裝 \n" +#~ "如果你啟動了防毒掃描軟體 AMAVIS, 你的電子郵件將被進行病毒掃描和垃圾郵件檢查。\n" +#~ "防毒掃描引擎 <b>Clamavd</b> 與垃圾郵件檢查工具 <b>SpamAssassin</b> 將會被安裝 \n" #~ "與組態。你也可以安裝其它（商業）的病毒掃描引擎。\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b><big>Configure Spam Learning Extension:</big></b><br>\n" -#~ "The spam learning extension can only be configured if the local delivery " -#~ "method is <b>cyrus imapd</b>.\n" -#~ "In this case the shared folders <b>NewSpam</b> and <b>NoSpam</b> will be " -#~ "created. Spam email \n" -#~ "which was not detected by <b>SpamAssassin</b> should be put into the " -#~ "folder <b>NewSpam</b>.\n" -#~ "If you want your spam finder to be most effective you should also put non-" -#~ "spam email into\n" -#~ "the folder <b>NoSpam</b>. The emails in this folder cannot be read by " -#~ "anyone.\n" +#~ "The spam learning extension can only be configured if the local delivery method is <b>cyrus imapd</b>.\n" +#~ "In this case the shared folders <b>NewSpam</b> and <b>NoSpam</b> will be created. Spam email \n" +#~ "which was not detected by <b>SpamAssassin</b> should be put into the folder <b>NewSpam</b>.\n" +#~ "If you want your spam finder to be most effective you should also put non-spam email into\n" +#~ "the folder <b>NoSpam</b>. The emails in this folder cannot be read by anyone.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b><big>配置垃圾郵件學習外掛:</big></b><br>\n" -#~ "垃圾郵件學習外掛當本地傳送方式設定為 <b>cyrus imapd</b>時,僅可以用來作為配" -#~ "置。\n" -#~ "在這種情況之下共享目錄 <b>NewSpam</b> 與<b>NoSpam</b> 將會被建立。這些垃圾" -#~ "郵件 \n" -#~ "若不是被 <b>SpamAssassin</b>偵測到時,將會被放置到<b>NewSpam</b>這個目錄" -#~ "內。\n" -#~ "如果你希望你的垃圾郵件檢查器可以更有效率的運作,你可以將這些非垃圾郵件的郵" -#~ "件放到\n" +#~ "垃圾郵件學習外掛當本地傳送方式設定為 <b>cyrus imapd</b>時,僅可以用來作為配置。\n" +#~ "在這種情況之下共享目錄 <b>NewSpam</b> 與<b>NoSpam</b> 將會被建立。這些垃圾郵件 \n" +#~ "若不是被 <b>SpamAssassin</b>偵測到時,將會被放置到<b>NewSpam</b>這個目錄內。\n" +#~ "如果你希望你的垃圾郵件檢查器可以更有效率的運作,你可以將這些非垃圾郵件的郵件放到\n" #~ "<b>NoSpam</b>這個目錄內。 在這個目錄內的郵件將不會被任何人進行閱讀。\n" #~ "</p>\n" @@ -1837,8 +1775,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b><big>Local Delivery Type</big></b><br>\n" #~ "In this frame, choose the local mail delivery method. \n" -#~ "For clients to be able to connect to your mail server via the POP or " -#~ "IMAP\n" +#~ "For clients to be able to connect to your mail server via the POP or IMAP\n" #~ "protocol, choose <b>Cyrus IMAP</p>. \n" #~ "<br></p>\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -1859,8 +1796,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b><big>Mail Fetching Scheduler</big></b><br>\n" -#~ "If you have mail boxes on an Internet provider, you can fetch this " -#~ "regularly\n" +#~ "If you have mail boxes on an Internet provider, you can fetch this regularly\n" #~ "at defined time intervals and by connecting to the Internet.\n" #~ "<br></p>\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -1891,8 +1827,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>Note: You can create and set up the domains with the YaST \n" -#~ "DNS server module. In the current module, you only can set the " -#~ "properties\n" +#~ "DNS server module. In the current module, you only can set the properties\n" #~ "concerning the mail server.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -2084,21 +2019,17 @@ #~ msgid "Invalid e-mail format." #~ msgstr "無效的電子郵件格式。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>In this dialog You can configure the mail settings of an user .</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>In this dialog You can configure the mail settings of an user .</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>在此對話方塊中，您可以設定使用者的郵件設定。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>First you can set the mail addresses and aliases for the user.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>First you can set the mail addresses and aliases for the user.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>首先，您可以設定使用者的郵件地址及別名。</p>" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>If you have selected \"cyrus\" for the local delivery of mails, you " -#~ "can set the size limit for the users mail box.\n" +#~ "<p>If you have selected \"cyrus\" for the local delivery of mails, you can set the size limit for the users mail box.\n" #~ " If you do not set any value the mail box size is unlimited.</p>" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>如果您已選取 \"cyrus\" 來傳送本機郵件，您可以設定使用者信箱的大小限" -#~ "制。\n" +#~ "<p>如果您已選取 \"cyrus\" 來傳送本機郵件，您可以設定使用者信箱的大小限制。\n" #~ " 如果未設定任何值，則信箱的大小不受限。</p>" #~ msgid "E-Mail Addresses " @@ -2202,10 +2133,8 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b><big>Administrator Authorization</big></b><br>\n" #~ "To use the YaST2 mail server component, your system must use LDAP\n" -#~ "as a repository for the user and group accounts and for the DNS services." -#~ "<br>\n" -#~ "Some of the mail server settings will be stored in the LDAP repository, " -#~ "too.<br></p>\n" +#~ "as a repository for the user and group accounts and for the DNS services.<br>\n" +#~ "Some of the mail server settings will be stored in the LDAP repository, too.<br></p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b><big>管理員授權</big></b><br>\n" #~ "若要使用 YaST2 郵件伺服器元件，您的系統必須使用 LDAP\n" @@ -2214,8 +2143,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b><big>Start Virus Scanner AMAVIS:</big></b><br>\n" -#~ "If you start the virus scanner AMAVIS, do not forget to install a virus " -#~ "scanner engine. \n" +#~ "If you start the virus scanner AMAVIS, do not forget to install a virus scanner engine. \n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b><big>啟動防毒掃描軟體 AMAVIS：</big></b><br>\n" @@ -2270,24 +2198,16 @@ #~ "內建在電子郵件應用程式的功能來\n" #~ "接收電子郵件。他們不需要此模組。</P>\n" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "The running mail server configuration is based on the <b>Standard</b> " -#~ "type." +#~ msgid "The running mail server configuration is based on the <b>Standard</b> type." #~ msgstr "運作中的郵件伺服器是基於 <b>標準</b> 類型。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "It is possible to change to <b>Advanced</b> settings. This will overwrite " -#~ "all existing settings." +#~ msgid "It is possible to change to <b>Advanced</b> settings. This will overwrite all existing settings." #~ msgstr "您可以變更為 <b>進階</b>。這將覆寫所有既存的設定。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "The running mail server configuration is based on the <b>Advanced</b> " -#~ "type." +#~ msgid "The running mail server configuration is based on the <b>Advanced</b> type." #~ msgstr "運作中的郵件伺服器是基於 <b>進階</b> 類型。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "It is possible to change to <b>Standard</b> settings. This will overwrite " -#~ "all existing settings." +#~ msgid "It is possible to change to <b>Standard</b> settings. This will overwrite all existing settings." #~ msgstr "您可以變更為 <b>標準</b>。這將覆寫所有既存的設定。" #~ msgid "" @@ -2297,9 +2217,5 @@ #~ "YaST2 僅可設定 Postfix 和 Sendmail，\n" #~ "但是這兩者均未安裝。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>The <b>delivery mode</b> is usually <b>procmail</b>, unless you do not " -#~ "forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p><b>除非不轉寄 root 的郵件或想要透過 IMAP 存取郵件，否則「傳遞模式」</b>" -#~ "通常是 <b>procmail</b>。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>The <b>delivery mode</b> is usually <b>procmail</b>, unless you do not forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p><b>除非不轉寄 root 的郵件或想要透過 IMAP 存取郵件，否則「傳遞模式」</b>通常是 <b>procmail</b>。</p>" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/multipath.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/multipath.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/multipath.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: multipath\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-10-05 21:27+0800\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -238,21 +238,17 @@ "\t\t\tStart or stop multipathd, check the multipath information.<br><br>\n" "\n" "\t\t\t<b><big>Stop/Start Multipathd</big></b><br>\n" -"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Use Multipath\"</b> to start multipathd. Click <b>\"Do not " -"use Multipath\"</b> to stop multipathd.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tMultipath status information can still be displayed when multipathd " -"stopped.<br><br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Use Multipath\"</b> to start multipathd. Click <b>\"Do not use Multipath\"</b> to stop multipathd.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tMultipath status information can still be displayed when multipathd stopped.<br><br>\n" "\n" "\t\t\t<b><big>Configure Multipath</big></b><br>\n" -"\t\t\tClick <b>Configure</b> Tab to make the multipath configurations.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>Configure</b> Tab to make the multipath configurations.<br></p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Multipath 狀態</big></b><br>\n" "\t\t\t啟動或關閉 multipathd, 檢查 multipath 訊息.<br><br>\n" "\n" "\t\t\t<b><big>關閉/啟動 Multipathd</big></b><br>\n" -"\t\t\t點選 <b>\"使用 Multipat\"</b> 啟動 multipathd. 點選 <b>\"不使用 " -"Multipath\"</b> 關閉 multipathd.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t點選 <b>\"使用 Multipat\"</b> 啟動 multipathd. 點選 <b>\"不使用 Multipath\"</b> 關閉 multipathd.<br>\n" "\t\t\tMultipath 狀態資訊當multipathd被關閉時, 仍可以持續進行顯示.<br><br>\n" "\n" "\t\t\t<b><big>組態 Multipath</big></b><br>\n" @@ -262,34 +258,22 @@ #: src/include/multipath/helps.rb:56 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"\t\t\tAll the content of /etc/multipath.conf can be configured here. There " -"are four sections in the configuration file:\n" -"\t\t\t<b>multipaths</b>, <b>defaults</b>, <b>blacklist</b>, " -"<b>blacklist_exception</b>, <b>devices.</b><br><br>\n" +"\t\t\tAll the content of /etc/multipath.conf can be configured here. There are four sections in the configuration file:\n" +"\t\t\t<b>multipaths</b>, <b>defaults</b>, <b>blacklist</b>, <b>blacklist_exception</b>, <b>devices.</b><br><br>\n" "\t\t\t<b>Multipaths:</b> list of multipaths finest-grained settings.<br>\n" "\t\t\t<b>Defaults:</b> multipath-tools default settings.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure Defaults\"</b> button to configure defaults " -"settings.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>Blacklist:</b> list of device names to be discard as not multipath " -"candidates.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure Blacklist\"</b> button to configure blacklist " -"settings.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>Blacklist Exceptions:</b> list of device names to be excluded from " -"blacklist.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure Blacklist Exceptions\"</b> button to configure " -"blacklist_exceptions settings.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>Devices:</b> list of per storage controller settings. Overrides " -"default settings, overridden by per multipath settings.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure devices\"</b> button to configure devices " -"settings.<br><br>\n" -"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Finish\"</b> button to save and update the configurations." -"<br><br></p>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure Defaults\"</b> button to configure defaults settings.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>Blacklist:</b> list of device names to be discard as not multipath candidates.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure Blacklist\"</b> button to configure blacklist settings.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>Blacklist Exceptions:</b> list of device names to be excluded from blacklist.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure Blacklist Exceptions\"</b> button to configure blacklist_exceptions settings.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>Devices:</b> list of per storage controller settings. Overrides default settings, overridden by per multipath settings.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure devices\"</b> button to configure devices settings.<br><br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Finish\"</b> button to save and update the configurations.<br><br></p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>組態</big></b><br>\n" -"\t\t\t所有位於 /etc/multipath.conf 檔案內容都可以於此進行組態. 這裡包含有四個" -"區段於組態檔案內:\n" -"\t\t\t<b>multipaths</b>, <b>預設值</b>, <b>黑名單</b>, <b>例外排除名單</b>, " -"<b>裝置.</b><br><br>\n" +"\t\t\t所有位於 /etc/multipath.conf 檔案內容都可以於此進行組態. 這裡包含有四個區段於組態檔案內:\n" +"\t\t\t<b>multipaths</b>, <b>預設值</b>, <b>黑名單</b>, <b>例外排除名單</b>, <b>裝置.</b><br><br>\n" "\t\t\t<b>Multipaths:</b> 列出multipaths 細微設定值內容.<br>\n" "\t\t\t<b>預設值:</b> multipath-tools 預設設定值.<br>\n" "\t\t\t點選 <b>\"組態預設值\"</b> 按鈕來進行預設值的設定.<br>\n" @@ -297,8 +281,7 @@ "\t\t\t點選<b>\"組態黑名單\"</b> 按鈕來進行黑名單的組態.<br>\n" "\t\t\t<b>例外排除名單:</b> 列出排除於黑名單之外的裝置名稱.<br>\n" "\t\t\t點選 <b>\"組態例外排除名單\"</b> 按鈕來進行例外排除名單的組態.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>裝置:</b> 列出每個儲存控制器的設定.會覆蓋原先的預設值與覆蓋每個 " -"multipath 設定.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>裝置:</b> 列出每個儲存控制器的設定.會覆蓋原先的預設值與覆蓋每個 multipath 設定.<br>\n" "\t\t\t點選 <b>\"組態裝置\"</b> 按鈕來進行裝置相關設定.<br><br>\n" "\t\t\t點選 <b>\"完成\"</b> 按鈕來進行儲存與更新設定檔案內容.<br><br></p>\n" @@ -307,45 +290,31 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Defaults Configuration</big></b><br>\n" "\t\t\tGlobal default settings can be configured and cleared here.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tAny default setting here will take effect in all multipath " -"configurations, unless a corresponding local setting overwrites it.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tIf a default setting here is cleared, multipath will take its own " -"value as default setting.<br></p>\n" +"\t\t\tAny default setting here will take effect in all multipath configurations, unless a corresponding local setting overwrites it.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tIf a default setting here is cleared, multipath will take its own value as default setting.<br></p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>預設組態</big></b><br>\n" "\t\t\t全域組態設定值可以在這個地方進行組態或是清除.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t這裡所設定的任何預設值將會於multipath組態中生效, 除非在其它地方存在相關" -"的設定值來進行覆蓋.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t如果清除這邊的預設值, multipath 將會以自己的配置來作為預設設定值進行運" -"作.<br></p>\n" +"\t\t\t這裡所設定的任何預設值將會於multipath組態中生效, 除非在其它地方存在相關的設定值來進行覆蓋.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t如果清除這邊的預設值, multipath 將會以自己的配置來作為預設設定值進行運作.<br></p>\n" #. dialog help for blacklist section configure tab 1/3 #: src/include/multipath/helps.rb:79 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Blacklist Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"\t\t\tDevice names listed here can be discarded as not multipath candidates." -"<br>\n" -"\t\t\tThere are three methods to identify a device name: <b>wwid</b>, " -"<b>devnode</b>, <b>device</b>.<br><br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>wwid</b>: The world wide ID identifying the device in blacklist." -"<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>devnode</b>: Regular expression can be used here to identify device " -"names in udev_dir (default in directory /dev). Common device names are " -"cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>device</b>: Used to identify a specific storage controller in " -"blacklist. A device can be specified by vendor and product name.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tDevice names listed here can be discarded as not multipath candidates.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tThere are three methods to identify a device name: <b>wwid</b>, <b>devnode</b>, <b>device</b>.<br><br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>wwid</b>: The world wide ID identifying the device in blacklist.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>devnode</b>: Regular expression can be used here to identify device names in udev_dir (default in directory /dev). Common device names are cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>device</b>: Used to identify a specific storage controller in blacklist. A device can be specified by vendor and product name.<br>\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>黑名單組態</big></b><br>\n" "\t\t\t列舉在此的裝置名稱將會被multipath拋棄不予使用.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t這裡提供三種方式來識別裝置名稱: <b>全球識別碼(wwid)</b>, <b>devnode, <b>裝置</b>.<br><br>\n" +"\t\t\t這裡提供三種方式來識別裝置名稱: <b>全球識別碼(wwid)</b>, <b>devnode</b>, <b>裝置</b>.<br><br>\n" "\t\t\t<b>全球識別碼(wwid)</b>: 這裝置的全球識別碼將會排除於黑名單之外.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>devnode</b>: 利用正規表示法來識別裝置名稱於 udev_dir (預設在/dev目" -"錄)內. 通常裝置名稱有 cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop." -"<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>裝置</b>:用於識別一個特定的存儲控制器例外的黑名單。一個設備可以指定" -"廠商與產品名稱.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>devnode</b>: 利用正規表示法來識別裝置名稱於 udev_dir (預設在/dev目錄)內. 通常裝置名稱有 cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>裝置</b>:用於識別一個特定的存儲控制器例外的黑名單。一個設備可以指定廠商與產品名稱.<br>\n" "</p>" #. dialog help for blacklist_exception section configure tab 1/3 @@ -353,41 +322,29 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Blacklist Exceptions Configuration</big></b><br>\n" "\t\t\tDevice names listed here are excluded from blacklist.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tThere are three methods to identify a device name: <b>wwid</b>, " -"<b>devnode</b>, <b>device</b>.<br><br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>wwid</b>: The world wide ID identifying the device excepted from " -"blacklist.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>devnode</b>: Regular expression can be used here to identify device " -"names in udev_dir (default in directory /dev). Common device names are " -"cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>device</b>: Used to identify a specific storage controller excepted " -"from blacklist. A device can be specified by vendor and product name.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tThere are three methods to identify a device name: <b>wwid</b>, <b>devnode</b>, <b>device</b>.<br><br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>wwid</b>: The world wide ID identifying the device excepted from blacklist.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>devnode</b>: Regular expression can be used here to identify device names in udev_dir (default in directory /dev). Common device names are cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>device</b>: Used to identify a specific storage controller excepted from blacklist. A device can be specified by vendor and product name.<br>\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>例外排除名單組態</big></b><br>\n" "\t\t\t裝置名稱在這裡被列出時將會排除於黑名單之外.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t這裡提供三種方式來識別裝置名稱: <b>全球識別碼(wwid)</b>, <b>devnode, <b>裝置</b>.<br><br>\n" +"\t\t\t這裡提供三種方式來識別裝置名稱: <b>全球識別碼(wwid)</b>, <b>devnode</b>, <b>裝置</b>.<br><br>\n" "\t\t\t<b>全球識別碼(wwid)</b>: 這裝置的全球識別碼將會排除於黑名單之外.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>devnode</b>: 利用正規表示法來識別裝置名稱於 udev_dir (預設在/dev目" -"錄)內. 通常裝置名稱有 cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop." -"<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>裝置</b>:用於識別一個特定的存儲控制器例外的黑名單。一個設備可以指定" -"廠商與產品名稱.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>devnode</b>: 利用正規表示法來識別裝置名稱於 udev_dir (預設在/dev目錄)內. 通常裝置名稱有 cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>裝置</b>:用於識別一個特定的存儲控制器例外的黑名單。一個設備可以指定廠商與產品名稱.<br>\n" "</p>" #. dialog help for devcies section configure tab 1/3 #: src/include/multipath/helps.rb:99 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Devices Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"\t\t\tPer storage controller settings are listed here, they override the " -"default settings and are overridden by per multipath settings.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tEach device is identified by <b>vendor</b> and <b>product</b> name." -"<br></p>\n" +"\t\t\tPer storage controller settings are listed here, they override the default settings and are overridden by per multipath settings.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tEach device is identified by <b>vendor</b> and <b>product</b> name.<br></p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>裝置組態</big></b><br>\n" -"\t\t\t每個儲存控制器設定都會條列於此,他們會覆蓋原先的預設值與覆蓋每個 " -"multipath 設定.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t每個儲存控制器設定都會條列於此,他們會覆蓋原先的預設值與覆蓋每個 multipath 設定.<br>\n" "\t\t\t每個裝置將以y <b>廠商</b> 與<b>產品</b> 名稱來進行識別.<br></p>\n" #. add quotes to configuration value, no matter how many words. Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ncurses-pkg.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ncurses-pkg.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ncurses-pkg.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: ncurses-pkg\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-30 11:52+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -55,8 +55,7 @@ msgstr "套件已經變更，以解決相依性：" #: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1297 -msgid "" -"You can choose to install anyway, but you risk getting a corrupted system." +msgid "You can choose to install anyway, but you risk getting a corrupted system." msgstr "您可以選擇無論如何都要安裝，但是您要承擔搞亂系統的風險。" #: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1298 @@ -122,29 +121,19 @@ msgstr "不需要的修補程式" #: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:203 -msgid "" -"This is a list of useful packages. They will be additionally installed if " -"recommeded by a newly installed package. To get packages recommeded by " -"already installed packages the option <b>Install Recommended Packages for " -"Already Installed Packages</b> from <b>Dependencies</b> menu has to be set." +msgid "This is a list of useful packages. They will be additionally installed if recommeded by a newly installed package. To get packages recommeded by already installed packages the option <b>Install Recommended Packages for Already Installed Packages</b> from <b>Dependencies</b> menu has to be set." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:207 -msgid "" -"It's suggested to install these packages because they fit to already " -"installed packages. The decision to install it is by the user." +msgid "It's suggested to install these packages because they fit to already installed packages. The decision to install it is by the user." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:211 -msgid "" -"The solver has detected that these packages are without a repository, i.e. " -"updates aren't possible." +msgid "The solver has detected that these packages are without a repository, i.e. updates aren't possible." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:215 -msgid "" -"These packages might be unneeded because former dependencies don't apply any " -"longer." +msgid "These packages might be unneeded because former dependencies don't apply any longer." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgFilterInstSummary.cc:65 @@ -178,9 +167,7 @@ #. Translators: %s is a locale code, e.g. en_GB #: src/NCPkgFilterLocale.cc:178 #, c-format -msgid "" -"Translations, dictionaries and other language-related files for <b>%s</b> " -"locale" +msgid "Translations, dictionaries and other language-related files for <b>%s</b> locale" msgstr "翻譯、字典與其他和 <b>%s</b> 地區環境語言相關的檔案" #. the label of the selections @@ -670,14 +657,7 @@ #. part1 of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:121 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p><b>Welcome to the package selector</b></p><p>This tool will help you to " -"manage the software on your system. You can install, update or remove single " -"packages, as well as patterns (sets of packages serving certain purpose) or " -"languages. Usually, you do not need to care about package dependencies when " -"installing or removing anything, the solver will do it for you. The package " -"selector consists of three main parts: <b>filters</b>, <b>package table</b> " -"and <b>menu</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Welcome to the package selector</b></p><p>This tool will help you to manage the software on your system. You can install, update or remove single packages, as well as patterns (sets of packages serving certain purpose) or languages. Usually, you do not need to care about package dependencies when installing or removing anything, the solver will do it for you. The package selector consists of three main parts: <b>filters</b>, <b>package table</b> and <b>menu</b>.</p>" msgstr "" "<h3>歡迎使用套件選擇器</h3><p>此工具將幫助您管理\n" "已安裝在電腦上的軟體。您可以安裝、更新、移除單一套件\n" @@ -688,12 +668,7 @@ #. part of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:129 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p><b>Filter</b> on left panel is designed for easy orientation in a large " -"amount of packages. Use filters to display only packages from a certain " -"repository or in a selected pattern (for example, Games or C/C++ " -"Development) or to search for particular keywords. More information on " -"filters can be found in <i>How to use filters</i>.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Filter</b> on left panel is designed for easy orientation in a large amount of packages. Use filters to display only packages from a certain repository or in a selected pattern (for example, Games or C/C++ Development) or to search for particular keywords. More information on filters can be found in <i>How to use filters</i>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>過濾器</b> (左邊面板) 讓您在大量的套件中能更輕鬆的找到方向。\n" "它們可以顯示，例如，僅某個套件庫的套件，或某個選定樣式中的套件\n" @@ -703,11 +678,7 @@ #. additional help text for post installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:136 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p><b>Package table</b> is the main component of the package selector. You " -"will see a list of packages matching the current filter (for example, the " -"selected RPM group or search result). Each line of the package table has " -"several columns:</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Package table</b> is the main component of the package selector. You will see a list of packages matching the current filter (for example, the selected RPM group or search result). Each line of the package table has several columns:</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>套件表</b> 是套件選擇器的主要部分。您可以在那看到符合\n" "目前過濾器的套件清單(例如，所選擇的 RPM 群組或搜尋結果)。\n" @@ -716,11 +687,7 @@ #. part2 of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:143 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<ol><li>Package status (for more information see <i>Package Status and " -"Symbols</i>)</li> <li>Package name</li><li>Package summary</li><li>Available " -"version (in some of the configured repositories)</li> <li>Installed " -"version(empty for not yet installed packages)</li> <li>Package size</li></ol>" +msgid "<ol><li>Package status (for more information see <i>Package Status and Symbols</i>)</li> <li>Package name</li><li>Package summary</li><li>Available version (in some of the configured repositories)</li> <li>Installed version(empty for not yet installed packages)</li> <li>Package size</li></ol>" msgstr "" "<ol><li>套件狀態 ( 要獲得更多資訊，參閱 <i>套件狀態與\n" "標示</i> )</li><li>套件名稱</li><li>套件摘要</li><li>可用\n" @@ -729,26 +696,13 @@ #. part3 of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:151 -msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Actions</b> menu below the table allows you to change the status " -"of a selected package (or all packages in the list), for example, to delete " -"a package or select an additional package for installation. The status " -"change can also be done directly by pressing the key specified in the menu " -"item (for detailed information about the package status, see <i>Package " -"Status and Symbols</i>).</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>表格下方的<b>動作</b> 選單提供了變更所選套件 (或清單中所有套件) 狀態的功" -"能，例如，刪除套件或選取要安裝的其他套件。要變更狀態可以直接按選單項目的指定" -"鍵 (如需套件狀態的詳細資訊，請參閱<i>套件狀態與標示</i>)。</p>" +msgid "<p>The <b>Actions</b> menu below the table allows you to change the status of a selected package (or all packages in the list), for example, to delete a package or select an additional package for installation. The status change can also be done directly by pressing the key specified in the menu item (for detailed information about the package status, see <i>Package Status and Symbols</i>).</p>" +msgstr "<p>表格下方的<b>動作</b> 選單提供了變更所選套件 (或清單中所有套件) 狀態的功能，例如，刪除套件或選取要安裝的其他套件。要變更狀態可以直接按選單項目的指定鍵 (如需套件狀態的詳細資訊，請參閱<i>套件狀態與標示</i>)。</p>" #. part4 of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:158 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p><b>Menu</b> provides functions related to the handling of package " -"dependencies. Display relevant information on packages or perform actions " -"like opening the repository editor. For more information, see <i>Useful " -"Functions in Menu</i>.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Menu</b> provides functions related to the handling of package dependencies. Display relevant information on packages or perform actions like opening the repository editor. For more information, see <i>Useful Functions in Menu</i>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>選單</b> 提供關於套件相依性處理的功能，顯示套件\n" "的相關資訊和其他有用的動作，像是開啟套件庫編輯器。要獲得\n" @@ -762,12 +716,7 @@ #. part 1 of help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:172 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>The package status can be changed using the <i>Actions</i> menu or the " -"keys specified in the menu items. For example, use '+' to install an " -"additional package.</p><p>The \"Taboo\" status means the package should " -"never be installed. On the contrary, the \"Locked\" status means that the " -"installed version of a package should always be kept.</p>" +msgid "<p>The package status can be changed using the <i>Actions</i> menu or the keys specified in the menu items. For example, use '+' to install an additional package.</p><p>The \"Taboo\" status means the package should never be installed. On the contrary, the \"Locked\" status means that the installed version of a package should always be kept.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>使用<i>動作</i>功能表或功能表項目中的指定鍵可以變更\n" "套件狀態。例如，使用 '+' 安裝其他套件。</p><p>\"禁用\"狀態\n" @@ -777,14 +726,10 @@ #. part 2 of help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:179 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>You can also use <b>RET</b> or <b>SPACE</b> to toggle the package status. " -"The <i>Actions</i> menu also allows you to change the status for all " -"packages in the list (select 'All Listed Packages').</p>" +msgid "<p>You can also use <b>RET</b> or <b>SPACE</b> to toggle the package status. The <i>Actions</i> menu also allows you to change the status for all packages in the list (select 'All Listed Packages').</p>" msgstr "" "<p>您也可以使用 <b>RET</b> 或 <b>SPACE</b>來切換套件的狀態。\n" -"<i>「動作」</i>功能表也可以變更清單中所有套件的狀態 (選取「所有列出的套" -"件」)。</p>" +"<i>「動作」</i>功能表也可以變更清單中所有套件的狀態 (選取「所有列出的套件」)。</p>" #. part 3 of help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:185 @@ -793,27 +738,13 @@ #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:192 -msgid "" -"<p><b> + </b>: package will be installed</p><p><b>a+ </b>: package will be " -"installed automatically</p><p><b> > </b>: package will be updated<p><b>a> </b>: package will be automatically updated</p><p><b> i </b>: " -"package is installed</p><p><b> - </b>: package will be deleted</p><p><b>---" -"</b>: never install this package (taboo)</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b> + </b>： 選取此套件進行安裝</p><p><b>a+ </b>： 套件將自動被安裝<p><b> > </b>： 更新此套件</p><p><b>a> </b>： 套件將自動被更新</p><p><b> i " -"</b>： 此套件已經安裝</p><p><b> - </b>： 將刪除套件</p><p><b>---</b>： 永遠" -"不要安裝此套件(禁用)</p>" +msgid "<p><b> + </b>: package will be installed</p><p><b>a+ </b>: package will be installed automatically</p><p><b> > </b>: package will be updated</p><p><b>a> </b>: package will be automatically updated</p><p><b> i </b>: package is installed</p><p><b> - </b>: package will be deleted</p><p><b>---</b>: never install this package (taboo)</p>" +msgstr "<p><b> + </b>： 選取此套件進行安裝</p><p><b>a+ </b>： 套件將自動被安裝</p><p><b> > </b>： 更新此套件</p><p><b>a> </b>： 套件將自動被更新</p><p><b> i </b>： 此套件已經安裝</p><p><b> - </b>： 將刪除套件</p><p><b>---</b>： 永遠不要安裝此套件(禁用)</p>" #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:199 -msgid "" -"<p><b>-i-</b>: keep the installed version and never update or delete it " -"( package locked )</p><p>Status information for pattern and languages:<p><b> i </b>: All requirements of this pattern/language are satisfied</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>-i-</b>：保留已安裝版本，而且永遠不要更新或刪除。(套件鎖定)</p><p> 關於" -"樣式/語言的狀態資訊：</p><b> i </b>: 此樣式/語言所需要的已滿足</p>" +msgid "<p><b>-i-</b>: keep the installed version and never update or delete it ( package locked )</p><p>Status information for pattern and languages:</p><p><b> i </b>: All requirements of this pattern/language are satisfied</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>-i-</b>：保留已安裝版本，而且永遠不要更新或刪除。(套件鎖定)</p><p> 關於樣式/語言的狀態資訊：</p><b> i </b>: 此樣式/語言所需要的已滿足</p>" #. label for an error popup #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:206 @@ -823,27 +754,15 @@ #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:213 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p><b>Filter</b> allow you to filter all available packages according to the " -"selected criteria. Package filters are based on package properties " -"(repository, RPM group), package \"containers\" (patterns, languages), " -"package classification or search results. Select the desired filter from the " -"drop-down menu. Specific filters are described below.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Filter</b> allow you to filter all available packages according to the selected criteria. Package filters are based on package properties (repository, RPM group), package \"containers\" (patterns, languages), package classification or search results. Select the desired filter from the drop-down menu. Specific filters are described below.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>除了所有可用的套件， <b>過濾器</b> 允許您過濾出您有興趣的套件。\n" -"套件過濾器是基於套件性質 (套件庫、RPM 群組)，套件\"容器\"(樣式、語言) 或搜尋" -"結果。由下拉選單中選擇您要的過濾器。特定過濾器將在下方詳述。</p>" +"套件過濾器是基於套件性質 (套件庫、RPM 群組)，套件\"容器\"(樣式、語言) 或搜尋結果。由下拉選單中選擇您要的過濾器。特定過濾器將在下方詳述。</p>" #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:220 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p><b>Patterns</b> describe the features and functions a system should have " -"(for example, X server or Console tools). Each pattern contains a set of " -"packages it requires (must have), recommends (should have) and suggests (may " -"have). If you select a pattern for installation, update, or deletion, the " -"solver will run and change the status of subordinate packages accordingly." +msgid "<p><b>Patterns</b> describe the features and functions a system should have (for example, X server or Console tools). Each pattern contains a set of packages it requires (must have), recommends (should have) and suggests (may have). If you select a pattern for installation, update, or deletion, the solver will run and change the status of subordinate packages accordingly.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>樣式</b> 描述系統應有的特性或功能 (例如，X 伺服器\n" "或主控台工具)。 每個樣式包含一組必須的(必須要有)，推薦的\n" @@ -853,14 +772,7 @@ #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:227 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p><b>Languages</b> are package containers very much like patterns. They " -"contain packages with translations, dictionaries and other language-specific " -"files for a selected language. <b>RPM Groups</b> are not package containers " -"that can be installed. Instead, membership in a certain RPM group is a " -"property of the package itself. They have a hierarchical (tree) structure. " -"The <b>Repositories</b> filter displays packages available from a specific " -"repository. </p>" +msgid "<p><b>Languages</b> are package containers very much like patterns. They contain packages with translations, dictionaries and other language-specific files for a selected language. <b>RPM Groups</b> are not package containers that can be installed. Instead, membership in a certain RPM group is a property of the package itself. They have a hierarchical (tree) structure. The <b>Repositories</b> filter displays packages available from a specific repository. </p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>語言</b> 是套件的容器，和樣式非常像。他們包含了\n" "翻譯、字典和其他與該選定語言相關的套件與檔案。\n" @@ -871,12 +783,7 @@ #. help text package search #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:234 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>To use the <b>Search</b> filter, enter a keyword (or part of keyword) for " -"the package search. For example, search for all 3D packages using the " -"expression \"3d\". You can also search in package descriptions, RPM provides " -"or requires. Select the appropriate check box and click the 'Search' button." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>To use the <b>Search</b> filter, enter a keyword (or part of keyword) for the package search. For example, search for all 3D packages using the expression \"3d\". You can also search in package descriptions, RPM provides or requires. Select the appropriate check box and click the 'Search' button.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>要使用 <b>搜尋</b> 過濾器，輸入套件搜尋的關鍵字(或部分的\n" "關鍵字)。例如，使用 \"3d\" 搜尋所有的 3D 套件。也可以在套件描述、\n" @@ -885,12 +792,7 @@ #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:241 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Installation summary</b> presents an overview of packages whose " -"status has changed during this session (e.g. marked for installation or " -"removal), either by the user or automatically by the solver. The filter " -"<b>Package Classification</b> provides information about <i>Recommended</i>, " -"<i>Suggested</i>, <i>Orphaned</i> and <i>Unneeded</i> packages.</p>" +msgid "<p>The <b>Installation summary</b> presents an overview of packages whose status has changed during this session (e.g. marked for installation or removal), either by the user or automatically by the solver. The filter <b>Package Classification</b> provides information about <i>Recommended</i>, <i>Suggested</i>, <i>Orphaned</i> and <i>Unneeded</i> packages.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>安裝摘要</b> 顯示套件的摘要，哪個套件的狀態\n" "在此工作階段有變更 (例如，被標示為安裝或移除)，不論是\n" @@ -903,31 +805,14 @@ #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:254 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p><b>Dependencies:</b><br> This menu offers various actions related to the " -"handling of package dependencies. By default, package dependencies are " -"checked with every status change. You will be informed about package " -"conflicts in a dialog proposing possible conflict resolutions. To resolve " -"the conflict, select one of the offered solutions and press 'OK -- Try " -"Again'.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Dependencies:</b><br> This menu offers various actions related to the handling of package dependencies. By default, package dependencies are checked with every status change. You will be informed about package conflicts in a dialog proposing possible conflict resolutions. To resolve the conflict, select one of the offered solutions and press 'OK -- Try Again'.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>相依性：</b> 此選單提供關於套件相依性處理的各種動作。\n" -"依預設，每次狀態變更時都會檢查套件依存度(<i>自動相依性檢查</i> 為啟用)。您將" -"被通知有關套件衝突的資訊，並在對話框中提供可能的衝突解決方案。要解決衝突，請" -"由其中選擇一個解決方案，然後按 '確定 -- 再試一次'。</p>" +"依預設，每次狀態變更時都會檢查套件依存度(<i>自動相依性檢查</i> 為啟用)。您將被通知有關套件衝突的資訊，並在對話框中提供可能的衝突解決方案。要解決衝突，請由其中選擇一個解決方案，然後按 '確定 -- 再試一次'。</p>" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:260 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>To disable dependency checking on every status change, toggle " -"<i>Automatic Dependency Check</i> OFF. You can check dependencies manually " -"by selecting <i>Check Dependencies Now</i>. The <i>Verify system</i> entry " -"will check the dependencies of already installed packages and resolve " -"conflicts non-interactively, marking missing packages for automatic " -"installation if necessary. For debugging purposes, use <i>Generate " -"Dependency Solver Testcase</i>. It will dump package dependencies data into " -"the directory <tt>/var/log/YaST2/solverTestcase</tt>. This is usually what " -"you need when asked for a \"solver testcase\" in Bugzilla.</p>" +msgid "<p>To disable dependency checking on every status change, toggle <i>Automatic Dependency Check</i> OFF. You can check dependencies manually by selecting <i>Check Dependencies Now</i>. The <i>Verify system</i> entry will check the dependencies of already installed packages and resolve conflicts non-interactively, marking missing packages for automatic installation if necessary. For debugging purposes, use <i>Generate Dependency Solver Testcase</i>. It will dump package dependencies data into the directory <tt>/var/log/YaST2/solverTestcase</tt>. This is usually what you need when asked for a \"solver testcase\" in Bugzilla.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>要停用每次狀態變更狀態時的相依性檢查，切換 <i>自動相依性\n" "檢查</i> 為關閉。在這種情形下，您可以選擇 <i>馬上檢查相依性</i> \n" @@ -938,67 +823,26 @@ "當您在 bugzilla 被要求提供 \"solver testcase\" 時您會需要這些。</p>" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:266 -msgid "" -"<p>Available options for dependency checking are:<br><i>Automatic Dependency " -"Check</i> (see above), <i>Install Recommended for Already Installed " -"Packages</i>: if ON, also recommended packages of already installed package " -"will be installed, <i>System Verification Mode</i>: repair dependencies of " -"installed packages and solve immediately. Please note: after checking the " -"system with <i>Verify System Now</i> the option <i>System Verification Mode is ON (uncheck the option, if desired). These options are saved in the " -"YaST configuration file <tt>/etc/sysconfig/yast2</tt>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Available options for dependency checking are:<br><i>Automatic Dependency Check</i> (see above), <i>Install Recommended for Already Installed Packages</i>: if ON, also recommended packages of already installed package will be installed, <i>System Verification Mode</i>: repair dependencies of installed packages and solve immediately. Please note: after checking the system with <i>Verify System Now</i> the option <i>System Verification Mode</i> is ON (uncheck the option, if desired). These options are saved in the YaST configuration file <tt>/etc/sysconfig/yast2</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:272 -msgid "" -"<p>Advanced options:<br> <i>Cleanup when deleting packages</i>: remove " -"dependent unused packages. <i>Allow vendor change</i>: package vendor may " -"differ from vendor of installed package. These options will not be saved, " -"they can only be set in the configuration file of the package library <tt>/" -"etc/zypp/zypp.conf</tt>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Advanced options:<br> <i>Cleanup when deleting packages</i>: remove dependent unused packages. <i>Allow vendor change</i>: package vendor may differ from vendor of installed package. These options will not be saved, they can only be set in the configuration file of the package library <tt>/etc/zypp/zypp.conf</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:278 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p><b>View:</b><br>Choose which information about the selected package will " -"be displayed in the window below the package table. Available options are: " -"package description, technical data (version, size, license etc.) package " -"versions (all available), file list (all files included in the package) and " -"dependencies (provides, requires etc.).</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>檢視：</b> 選擇哪些選定套件的資訊將顯示在套件表中。可用的選項為： 套件" -"描述、技術資料(版本、大小、授權等)、套件版本 (全部可用)、檔案列表 (所有包含在" -"此套件中的檔案) 和相依性資料(提供、需求等)。</p>" +msgid "<p><b>View:</b><br>Choose which information about the selected package will be displayed in the window below the package table. Available options are: package description, technical data (version, size, license etc.) package versions (all available), file list (all files included in the package) and dependencies (provides, requires etc.).</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>檢視：</b> 選擇哪些選定套件的資訊將顯示在套件表中。可用的選項為： 套件描述、技術資料(版本、大小、授權等)、套件版本 (全部可用)、檔案列表 (所有包含在此套件中的檔案) 和相依性資料(提供、需求等)。</p>" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:284 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Configuration:</b><br>This menu integrates package selector with the " -"rest of package management utils. From here, you can <b>Launch Repository " -"Manager</b> and edit configured repositories or register to update " -"repository and configure periodic download of available updates (<b>Launch " -"Online Update Configuration</b>). Also, you can pick one of the three " -"possible behaviours of package selector at exit - in <b>Action after Package " -"Installation</b> menu.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Configuration:</b><br>This menu integrates package selector with the rest of package management utils. From here, you can <b>Launch Repository Manager</b> and edit configured repositories or register to update repository and configure periodic download of available updates (<b>Launch Online Update Configuration</b>). Also, you can pick one of the three possible behaviours of package selector at exit - in <b>Action after Package Installation</b> menu.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:289 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p><b>Extras:</b><br>Miscellaneous functions reside here. <i>Export Package " -"List to File</i> will dump data on installed packages, patterns and " -"languages into specified XML file. This file can be later read by <i>Import " -"Package List from File</i> option e.g. on different computer. It will bring " -"the set of packages on the target computer into the same state as described " -"in provided XML file. <i>Show Available Disk Space</i> will show a popup " -"table displaying disk usage and free disk space on currently mounted " -"partition.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>其他：</b> 其他雜項功能於此。 <i>匯出套件列表到檔案</i> 會將已安裝套" -"件、樣式和語言的資料倒入指定的 XML 檔案。 此檔可被以後 <i>由檔案匯入套件列表" -"</i> 參數所讀取，例如您可用在其他電腦上。這將使目標電腦上的套件狀態和所提供" -"的 XML 檔案所描述的相同。 <i>顯示可用空間</i> 將顯示一個跳出表格顯示磁碟的使" -"用率前載掛分割區的可用空間。</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Extras:</b><br>Miscellaneous functions reside here. <i>Export Package List to File</i> will dump data on installed packages, patterns and languages into specified XML file. This file can be later read by <i>Import Package List from File</i> option e.g. on different computer. It will bring the set of packages on the target computer into the same state as described in provided XML file. <i>Show Available Disk Space</i> will show a popup table displaying disk usage and free disk space on currently mounted partition.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>其他：</b> 其他雜項功能於此。 <i>匯出套件列表到檔案</i> 會將已安裝套件、樣式和語言的資料倒入指定的 XML 檔案。 此檔可被以後 <i>由檔案匯入套件列表</i> 參數所讀取，例如您可用在其他電腦上。這將使目標電腦上的套件狀態和所提供的 XML 檔案所描述的相同。 <i>顯示可用空間</i> 將顯示一個跳出表格顯示磁碟的使用率前載掛分割區的可用空間。</p>" #. label of a frame with search settings #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:297 @@ -1195,21 +1039,13 @@ #. help text online udpate #. Do NOT translate 'recommended' and 'security'! because the patch kind is always shown as english text. #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:611 -msgid "" -"<p>General information about patches:</p><p>The patches of kind <b>security are solving security issues and we highly recommend to install it. You " -"should also install <b>recommended</b> patches, they usually contain " -"important bug-fixes. Install <b>feature</b> patches if you are interested in " -"the feature.</p>" +msgid "<p>General information about patches:</p><p>The patches of kind <b>security</b> are solving security issues and we highly recommend to install it. You should also install <b>recommended</b> patches, they usually contain important bug-fixes. Install <b>feature</b> patches if you are interested in the feature.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text online udpate continue #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:618 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>Patches for \"libzypp\" (Package, Patch, Pattern and Product Management) " -"will always get installed first. Other patches must be installed on a second " -"run.</p>" +msgid "<p>Patches for \"libzypp\" (Package, Patch, Pattern and Product Management) will always get installed first. Other patches must be installed on a second run.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\"libzypp\" (套件、修補程式、樣式與產品管理)的修補程式將\n" "先被安裝。其他修補程式則會在第二輪時安裝。</p>" @@ -1217,43 +1053,17 @@ #. help text online udpate continue #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:625 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>Meaning of the status flags:</p><p><b>a+ </b>: Patches concerning your " -"installation are preselected. They will be downloaded and installed on your " -"system. If you do not want a certain patch, deselect it with '-'.</p><p><b> " -"i </b>: All requirements of this patch are satisfied.</p><p><b> + </b>: You " -"have selected this patch for installation.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>狀態旗標的意義：</p><p><b>a+ </b>：預先選取與安裝有關的修補程式。將下載並" -"在系統上安裝這些修補程式。如果不要特定修補程式，請使用 '-' 取消選取。<p><b> i </b>： 所有此套件所需要的都已滿足。</p><p><b>+ </b>: 您已選擇此修" -"補程式要安裝。</p>" +msgid "<p>Meaning of the status flags:</p><p><b>a+ </b>: Patches concerning your installation are preselected. They will be downloaded and installed on your system. If you do not want a certain patch, deselect it with '-'.</p><p><b> i </b>: All requirements of this patch are satisfied.</p><p><b> + </b>: You have selected this patch for installation.</p>" +msgstr "<p>狀態旗標的意義：</p><p><b>a+ </b>：預先選取與安裝有關的修補程式。將下載並在系統上安裝這些修補程式。如果不要特定修補程式，請使用 '-' 取消選取。</p><p><b> i </b>： 所有此套件所需要的都已滿足。</p><p><b>+ </b>: 您已選擇此修補程式要安裝。</p>" #. help text online udpate continue #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:632 -msgid "" -"<p>More details about the status:<br>If there are several patches for a " -"package (or a set of packages) which aren't yet applied to the system all " -"got preselected and have status <b>a+</b>. If one of these patches is " -"deselected with '-' it might show the status <b>i</b> afterwards. This is " -"because any of the other patches concerning the same package(s) is still " -"selected. The newer version(s) of the package(s) will be installed and with " -"it this patch is satisfied. Deselecting of all patches is required if the " -"patches are not wanted.</p>" +msgid "<p>More details about the status:<br>If there are several patches for a package (or a set of packages) which aren't yet applied to the system all got preselected and have status <b>a+</b>. If one of these patches is deselected with '-' it might show the status <b>i</b> afterwards. This is because any of the other patches concerning the same package(s) is still selected. The newer version(s) of the package(s) will be installed and with it this patch is satisfied. Deselecting of all patches is required if the patches are not wanted.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text online udpate continue #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:639 -msgid "" -"<p>The menus:</p><p>The <b>Filter</b> menu allows to filter the patches, e." -"g. show the 'Installed' ones or list 'Security' patches. It also provides to " -"search for patches.<br>Use the <b>Actions</b> menu to change the status of a " -"patch.<br>The <b>View</b> menu offers the possibility to see which packages " -"are concerned by the patch. Please note: If the filter is 'All Patches' the " -"package list for some patches might be empty. This means no packages are " -"concerned because none of the patch packages is installed on the system." -"<br>The <b>Dependencies</b> menu contains dependencies checks and the " -"'Generate Solver Testcase' entry.</p>" +msgid "<p>The menus:</p><p>The <b>Filter</b> menu allows to filter the patches, e.g. show the 'Installed' ones or list 'Security' patches. It also provides to search for patches.<br>Use the <b>Actions</b> menu to change the status of a patch.<br>The <b>View</b> menu offers the possibility to see which packages are concerned by the patch. Please note: If the filter is 'All Patches' the package list for some patches might be empty. This means no packages are concerned because none of the patch packages is installed on the system.<br>The <b>Dependencies</b> menu contains dependencies checks and the 'Generate Solver Testcase' entry.</p>" msgstr "" #. label for a warning popup @@ -1294,9 +1104,7 @@ #. text for a Notify popup #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:714 -msgid "" -"<p>All changes in the package, patch or pattern selection will be lost." -"<br>Really exit?</p>" +msgid "<p>All changes in the package, patch or pattern selection will be lost.<br>Really exit?</p>" msgstr "<p>所有套件、修補程式與樣式的選擇變更將會遺失。<br>確定要離開嗎？</p>" #. the label of language table @@ -1345,18 +1153,8 @@ #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:783 -msgid "" -"<b>Update Problem List</b><br><p>The packages in the list cannot be updated " -"automatically.</p><p>Possible reasons:</p><p>They are obsoleted by other " -"packages.</p><p>There is no newer version to which to update on any " -"installation media.</p><p>They are third-party packages</p><p>Manually " -"select what to do with them. The safest course of action is to delete them." -msgstr "" -"<b>更新問題清單</b><br><p>清單中的套件無法自動更新。</p><p>可能的原因：<p>其他套件已作廢這些套件。</p><p>安裝媒體上沒有要更新的更新版本。</p><p>這" -"些套件是協力廠商的套件</p><p>手動選取處理這些套件的方式。最安全的動作是刪除它" -"們。</p>" +msgid "<b>Update Problem List</b><br><p>The packages in the list cannot be updated automatically.</p><p>Possible reasons:</p><p>They are obsoleted by other packages.</p><p>There is no newer version to which to update on any installation media.</p><p>They are third-party packages</p><p>Manually select what to do with them. The safest course of action is to delete them.</p>" +msgstr "<b>更新問題清單</b><br><p>清單中的套件無法自動更新。</p><p>可能的原因：</p><p>其他套件已作廢這些套件。</p><p>安裝媒體上沒有要更新的更新版本。</p><p>這些套件是協力廠商的套件</p><p>手動選取處理這些套件的方式。最安全的動作是刪除它們。</p>" #. column header source RPM installation (keep it short!) #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:790 @@ -1385,12 +1183,8 @@ #~ msgid "----- this patch is broken !!! -----" #~ msgstr "----- 這個修補程式檔損壞！ -----" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Kind \"recommended\" means you should install the patch. \"security\" " -#~ "is a security patch and we highly recommend to install it.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>好心的「推薦」表示您應該安裝修補程式。「安全性」是安全性修補程式，強烈" -#~ "建議您要安裝。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Kind \"recommended\" means you should install the patch. \"security\" is a security patch and we highly recommend to install it.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>好心的「推薦」表示您應該安裝修補程式。「安全性」是安全性修補程式，強烈建議您要安裝。</p>" #~ msgid "Search Packages on &Web" #~ msgstr "在網路搜尋套件(&W)" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ncurses.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ncurses.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ncurses.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: ncurses\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2008-05-16 18:55+0800\n" "Last-Translator: swyear \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/network.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/network.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/network.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: network\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-08-18 11:54+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-01-16 11:33+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -99,105 +99,57 @@ msgstr "內部錯誤" #. progress step title -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_finish.rb:67 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_finish.rb:63 msgid "Writing Firewall Configuration..." msgstr "寫入防火牆組態 ..." -#. Summary is visible only if installing over VNC -#. and if firewall is enabled - otherwise port could not be blocked -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:102 -#, fuzzy -msgid "VNC ports will be open (close</a>)" -msgstr "" -"SSH 連接埠為關閉 (開啟</a>)" - -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:104 -#, fuzzy -msgid "VNC ports will be blocked (open</a>)" -msgstr "" -"SSH 連接埠為關閉 (開啟</a>)" - -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:110 -#, fuzzy -msgid "Firewall will be enabled (disable</a>)" -msgstr "由影像安裝已啟用 (停用</a>)" - -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:114 -#, fuzzy -msgid "Firewall will be disabled (enable</a>)" -msgstr "由影像安裝已停用 (啟用</a>)" - -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:119 -#, fuzzy -msgid "SSH port will be open (block</a>)" -msgstr "" -"SSH 連接埠為關閉 (開啟</a>)" - -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:123 -#, fuzzy -msgid "SSH port will be blocked (open</a>)" -msgstr "" -"SSH 連接埠為關閉 (開啟</a>)" - -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:128 -#, fuzzy -msgid "SSH service will be enabled (disable</a>)" -msgstr "由影像安裝已啟用 (停用</a>)" - -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:132 -#, fuzzy -msgid "SSH service will be disabled (enable</a>)" -msgstr "由影像安裝已停用 (啟用</a>)" - #. Proposal title -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:218 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:133 msgid "Firewall and SSH" msgstr "防火牆及 SSH" #. Menu entry label -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:220 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:135 msgid "&Firewall and SSH" msgstr "防火牆及 SSH(&F)" -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:231 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:146 msgid "Basic Firewall and SSH Configuration" msgstr "基本防火牆與 SSH 組態" #. TRANSLATORS: check-box label -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:237 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:152 #, fuzzy msgid "Open &VNC Ports" msgstr "RPC 埠(&R)" #. frame label -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:245 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:160 msgid "Firewall and SSH service" msgstr "防火牆與 SSH 服務" #. TRANSLATORS: check-box label -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:256 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:171 msgid "Enable Firewall" msgstr "啟用防火牆" #. TRANSLATORS: check-box label -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:264 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:179 #, fuzzy msgid "Open SSH Port" msgstr "RPC 埠(&R)" #. TRANSLATORS: check-box label -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:272 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:187 #, fuzzy msgid "Enable SSH Service" msgstr "開啟 SSH 埠並啟用 SSH 服務" -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:284 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:199 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Firewall and SSH</big></b><br>\n" -"Firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network " -"attacks.\n" -"SSH is a service that allows logging into this computer remotely via " -"dedicated\n" +"Firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network attacks.\n" +"SSH is a service that allows logging into this computer remotely via dedicated\n" "SSH client</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>防火牆與 SSH</big></b><br />\n" @@ -205,22 +157,19 @@ "SSH 為允許遠端經由 SSH 客戶端登入此電腦\n" "的服務</p>" -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:290 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:205 msgid "" -"<p>Here you can choose whether the firewall will be enabled or disabled " -"after\n" +"<p>Here you can choose whether the firewall will be enabled or disabled after\n" "the installation. It is recommended to keep it enabled.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>您可以在此選擇安裝後是否啟用防火牆。\n" "推薦繼續保持啟用。</p>" -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:293 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:208 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<p>With enabled firewall, you can decide whether to open firewall port for " -"SSH\n" -"service and allow remote SSH logins. Independently you can also enable SSH " -"service (i.e. it\n" +"<p>With enabled firewall, you can decide whether to open firewall port for SSH\n" +"service and allow remote SSH logins. Independently you can also enable SSH service (i.e. it\n" "will be started on computer boot).</p>" msgstr "" "<p>在啟用防火牆時，您可以決定是否要為 SSH 服務\n" @@ -228,13 +177,56 @@ "電腦開機時啟動它)。</p>" #. TRANSLATORS: help text -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:300 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:215 msgid "" "<p>You can also open VNC ports in firewall. It will not enable\n" "the remote administration service on a running system but it is\n" "started by the installer automatically if needed.</p>" msgstr "" +#. anything but enabling the firewall closes this dialog +#. (VNC and SSH checkboxes do nothing) +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:292 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Firewall will be enabled (disable</a>)" +msgstr "由影像安裝已啟用 (停用</a>)" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:296 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Firewall will be disabled (enable</a>)" +msgstr "由影像安裝已停用 (啟用</a>)" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:301 +#, fuzzy +msgid "SSH service will be enabled (disable</a>)" +msgstr "由影像安裝已啟用 (停用</a>)" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:305 +#, fuzzy +msgid "SSH service will be disabled (enable</a>)" +msgstr "由影像安裝已停用 (啟用</a>)" + +#. Display vnc port only if installing over VNC +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:317 +#, fuzzy +msgid "VNC ports will be open (close</a>)" +msgstr "SSH 連接埠為關閉 (開啟</a>)" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:319 +#, fuzzy +msgid "VNC ports will be blocked (open</a>)" +msgstr "SSH 連接埠為關閉 (開啟</a>)" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:324 +#, fuzzy +msgid "SSH port will be open (block</a>)" +msgstr "SSH 連接埠為關閉 (開啟</a>)" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:328 +#, fuzzy +msgid "SSH port will be blocked (open</a>)" +msgstr "SSH 連接埠為關閉 (開啟</a>)" + #. Commandline help title #. configuration of hosts #. Hosts dialog caption @@ -381,8 +373,7 @@ #. Fallback for situation that mustn't exist #: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:892 -msgid "" -"No URL for the release notes defined. Internet test cannot be performed." +msgid "No URL for the release notes defined. Internet test cannot be performed." msgstr "沒有定義發行記事的 URL。無法完成網際網路測試。" #. popup informing user about the failure to retrieve release notes @@ -392,10 +383,8 @@ "Download of latest release notes failed due to server-side error. \n" "This does not necessarily imply a faulty network configuration.\n" "\n" -"Click 'Continue' to proceed to the next installation step. To skip any " -"steps\n" -"requiring an internet connection or to get back to your network " -"configuration,\n" +"Click 'Continue' to proceed to the next installation step. To skip any steps\n" +"requiring an internet connection or to get back to your network configuration,\n" "click 'Cancel'.\n" msgstr "" "因為伺服器端的錯誤，下載最新的發行記事失敗。 \n" @@ -519,9 +508,18 @@ msgid "Interfaces for Bridging" msgstr "橋接介面" -#. Lan::PrepareForAutoinst(); -#. Lan::Autoinstall(); -#: src/clients/lan_auto.rb:173 +#. copy the keys/values that are not existing in the XML +#. so we merge the inst-sys settings with the XML while XML +#. has higher priority +#. +#. bnc#796580 The problem with this is that due to compatibility with +#. older profiles, a missing element may have a different meaning than +#. "use what the filesystem/kernel currently uses". +#. In particular, a missing write_hostname [1] means +#. "use the product default from DVD1/control.xml". +#. Other elements may have similar problems, +#. to be fixed post-PTF for maintenance. +#: src/clients/lan_auto.rb:171 msgid "Configuration Error: uninitialized interface." msgstr "組態錯誤： 未啟始化的介面。" @@ -774,9 +772,7 @@ msgstr "必須指定目的地 IP 位址。" #: src/clients/routing.rb:354 -msgid "" -"At least one of the following parameters (gateway, netmask, device, options) " -"must be specified" +msgid "At least one of the following parameters (gateway, netmask, device, options) must be specified" msgstr "至少要指定下列參數之一(閘道，遮罩，裝置，選項)" #: src/clients/routing.rb:376 @@ -789,13 +785,13 @@ #. interface summary: WiFi without encryption #. interface summary: WiFi without encryption -#: src/include/network/complex.rb:101 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1348 +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:101 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1361 msgid "Warning: no encryption is used." msgstr "警告：未使用加密。" #. Hyperlink: Change the configuration of an interface #. Hyperlink: Change the configuration of an interface -#: src/include/network/complex.rb:107 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1350 +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:107 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1363 msgid "Change." msgstr "變更。" @@ -1417,12 +1413,9 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1414 msgid "" "<p><b><big>IFPLUGD PRIORITY</big></b></p> \n" -"<p> All interfaces configured with <b>On Cable Connection</b> and with " -"IFPLUGD_PRIORITY != 0 will be\n" -" used mutually exclusive. If more then one of these interfaces is <b>On " -"Cable Connection</b>\n" -" then we need a way to decide which interface to take up. Therefore we have " -"to\n" +"<p> All interfaces configured with <b>On Cable Connection</b> and with IFPLUGD_PRIORITY != 0 will be\n" +" used mutually exclusive. If more then one of these interfaces is <b>On Cable Connection</b>\n" +" then we need a way to decide which interface to take up. Therefore we have to\n" " set the priority of each interface. </p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>IFPLUGD 優先程度</big></b></p> \n" @@ -1436,10 +1429,8 @@ msgid "Network Card Setup" msgstr "網路卡設定" -#. when using wicked every device which can be bridged -#. can be set to BOOTPROTO=none. No workaround with -#. BOOTPROTO=static required anymore -#: src/include/network/lan/bridge.rb:89 +#. remove all aliases (bnc#590167) +#: src/include/network/lan/bridge.rb:103 #, fuzzy msgid "" "At least one selected device is already configured.\n" @@ -1629,9 +1620,7 @@ msgstr "使用 \"id\" 選項來決定設備。" #: src/include/network/lan/cmdline.rb:101 -msgid "" -"Value of \"id\" is out of range. Use \"list\" option to check max. value of " -"\"id\"." +msgid "Value of \"id\" is out of range. Use \"list\" option to check max. value of \"id\"." msgstr "\"id\" 值超出範圍。使用 \"list\" 選項檢查 \"id\" 的最大值。" #. Handler for action "add" @@ -1751,11 +1740,8 @@ msgstr "正在安裝韌體" #: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:234 -msgid "" -"For successful firmware installation, the 'install_bcm43xx_firmware' script " -"needs to be executed. Execute it now?" -msgstr "" -"為了成功安裝韌體，需要執行 'install_bcm43xx_firmware' 腳本。馬上執行嗎？ " +msgid "For successful firmware installation, the 'install_bcm43xx_firmware' script needs to be executed. Execute it now?" +msgstr "為了成功安裝韌體，需要執行 'install_bcm43xx_firmware' 腳本。馬上執行嗎？ " #: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:248 msgid "An error occurred during firmware installation." @@ -1839,8 +1825,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:98 msgid "" "<p><b>Udev Rules</b> are rules for the kernel device manager that allow\n" -"associating the MAC address or BusID of the network device with its name " -"(for\n" +"associating the MAC address or BusID of the network device with its name (for\n" "example, eth1, wlan0 ) and assures a persistent device name upon reboot.\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Udev 規則</b> 是核心設備管理員所使用的規則，\n" @@ -1849,10 +1834,8 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:104 msgid "" -"<p><b>Show visible port identification</b> allows you to physically identify " -"now configured NIC. \n" -"Set appropriate time, click <b>Blink</b> and LED diodes on you NIC will " -"start blinking for selected time.\n" +"<p><b>Show visible port identification</b> allows you to physically identify now configured NIC. \n" +"Set appropriate time, click <b>Blink</b> and LED diodes on you NIC will start blinking for selected time.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>顯示可見埠確認</b> 允許您實體上辨識現在設定的 NIC。\n" @@ -1863,24 +1846,19 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:117 msgid "" "<p><b>Kernel Module</b>. Enter the kernel module (driver) name \n" -"for your network device here. If the device is already configured, see if " -"there is more than one driver available for\n" -"your device in the drop-down list. If necessary, choose a driver from the " -"list, but usually the default value works.</p>\n" +"for your network device here. If the device is already configured, see if there is more than one driver available for\n" +"your device in the drop-down list. If necessary, choose a driver from the list, but usually the default value works.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>核心模組</b>. 在此為您的網路裝置輸入\n" "核心模組(驅動程式)名稱。若此裝置已組態，察看下拉選單中\n" -"是否有其他可用的的驅動程式。若有需要，從下拉選單中選一個。但通常使用預設值就" -"可以正常工作。</p>\n" +"是否有其他可用的的驅動程式。若有需要，從下拉選單中選一個。但通常使用預設值就可以正常工作。</p>\n" #. Manual networ card setup help 3/4 #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:124 msgid "" "<p>Additionally, specify <b>Options</b> for the kernel module. Use this\n" -"format: <i>option</i>=<i>value</i>. Each entry should be space-separated, " -"for example: <i>io=0x300 irq=5</i>. <b>Note:</b> If two cards are \n" -"configured with the same module name, the options will be merged while " -"saving.</p>\n" +"format: <i>option</i>=<i>value</i>. Each entry should be space-separated, for example: <i>io=0x300 irq=5</i>. <b>Note:</b> If two cards are \n" +"configured with the same module name, the options will be merged while saving.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>另外，您可以為核心模組指定<b>選項</b>。使用格式：\n" "<i>option</i>=<i>value</i>。每個項目應該用空格隔開，\n" @@ -1888,12 +1866,8 @@ "相同的模組名稱，則會在儲存時合併選項。</p>\n" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:130 -msgid "" -"<p>If you specify options via <b>Ethtool options</b>, ifup will call ethtool " -"with these options.</p>\n" -msgstr "" -"<p>如果您寫了一些東西到 <b>Ethtool 選項</b>, ifup 將使用這些選項呼叫 " -"ethtool。</p>\n" +msgid "<p>If you specify options via <b>Ethtool options</b>, ifup will call ethtool with these options.</p>\n" +msgstr "<p>如果您寫了一些東西到 <b>Ethtool 選項</b>, ifup 將使用這些選項呼叫 ethtool。</p>\n" #. Manual dialog help 4/4 #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:139 @@ -2091,29 +2065,19 @@ #. S/390 dialog help: QETH Options #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:966 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter any additional <b>Options</b> for this interface (separated by " -"spaces).</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter any additional <b>Options</b> for this interface (separated by spaces).</p>" msgstr "<p>輸入此介面其他的<b>「選項」</b>(以空格分隔)。</p>" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:969 -msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Enable IPA Takeover</b> if IP address takeover should be " -"enabled for this interface.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>選取<b>「啟用 IPA Takeover」</b>，如果此介面的 IP 位址 Takeover 應該啟用。" -"</p>" +msgid "<p>Select <b>Enable IPA Takeover</b> if IP address takeover should be enabled for this interface.</p>" +msgstr "<p>選取<b>「啟用 IPA Takeover」</b>，如果此介面的 IP 位址 Takeover 應該啟用。</p>" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:972 -msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Enable Layer 2 Support</b> if this card has been configured " -"with layer 2 support.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select <b>Enable Layer 2 Support</b> if this card has been configured with layer 2 support.</p>" msgstr "<p>如果這個卡已經以層 2 支援設定，請選取<b>「啟用層 2 支援」</b>。</p>" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:975 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the <b>Layer 2 MAC Address</b> if this card has been configured " -"with layer 2 support.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter the <b>Layer 2 MAC Address</b> if this card has been configured with layer 2 support.</p>" msgstr "<p>如果這個卡已經以層 2 支援設定，請輸入<b>「層 2 MAC 位址」</b>。</p>" #. TextEntry label @@ -2291,8 +2255,7 @@ "<p>Check <b>Enable IPv6</b> to enable the ipv6 module in the kernel.\n" "It is possible to use IPv6 together with IPv4. This is the default option.\n" "To disable IPv6, uncheck this option. This will blacklist the kernel \n" -"module for ipv6. If the IPv6 protocol is not used on your network, the " -"response \n" +"module for ipv6. If the IPv6 protocol is not used on your network, the response \n" "time can be faster.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>IPv6 協定設定</big></b></p>\n" @@ -2325,8 +2288,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>For each route, enter destination network IP address, gateway address,\n" "and netmask. To omit any of these values, use a dash sign \"-\". Select\n" -"the device through which the traffic to the defined network will be routed." -"\"-\" is an alias for any interface.</p>\n" +"the device through which the traffic to the defined network will be routed.\"-\" is an alias for any interface.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>對每一個路由，輸入目標網路 IP 位址、閘道位址和\n" "網路遮罩。要省略任何一個值，使用破折號 \"-\"。\n" @@ -2351,8 +2313,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:112 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<p><b>Important:</b> if the firewall is enabled, allowing forwarding alone " -"is not enough. \n" +"<p><b>Important:</b> if the firewall is enabled, allowing forwarding alone is not enough. \n" "You should enable masquerading and/or set at least one redirect rule in the\n" "firewall configuration. Use the YaST firewall module.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2366,12 +2327,9 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:117 msgid "" "<p>If you are using DHCP to get an IP address, check whether you get\n" -"also a hostname via DHCP. The hostname will be set automatically by the " -"DHCP client.\n" -"However, changing the hostname at runtime may confuse the graphical " -"desktop. \n" -"Therefore, disable this option if you connect to different networks that " -"assign \n" +"also a hostname via DHCP. The hostname will be set automatically by the DHCP client.\n" +"However, changing the hostname at runtime may confuse the graphical desktop. \n" +"Therefore, disable this option if you connect to different networks that assign \n" "different hostnames.</p> " msgstr "" "<p>如果您使用 DHCP 取得 IP 位址，請核取是否要透過 DHCP\n" @@ -2383,12 +2341,9 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:124 msgid "" "<p><b>Assign Hostname to Loopback IP</b> associates your hostname with \n" -"the IP address <tt>127.0.0.2</tt> (loopback) in <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>. This is " -"a \n" -"useful option if you want to have the hostname resolvable at all times, " -"even \n" -"without an active network. In all other cases, use it carefully, " -"especially \n" +"the IP address <tt>127.0.0.2</tt> (loopback) in <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>. This is a \n" +"useful option if you want to have the hostname resolvable at all times, even \n" +"without an active network. In all other cases, use it carefully, especially \n" "if this computer provides some network services.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>指定主機名稱到 Loopback IP</b>連結您的主機名稱用 \n" @@ -2421,8 +2376,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>Search domain is the domain name where hostname searching starts.\n" "The primary search domain is usually the same as the domain name of\n" -"your computer (for example, suse.de). There may be additional search " -"domains\n" +"your computer (for example, suse.de). There may be additional search domains\n" "(such as suse.com). Separate the domains with commas or white space.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>搜尋領域是啟動主機名稱搜尋的領域名稱。\n" @@ -2432,12 +2386,9 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:147 msgid "" -"<p>Enter the short name for this computer (e.g. <i>mymachine</i>) and the " -"DNS domain\n" -"(e.g. <i>example.com</i>) that it belongs to. The domain is especially " -"important if this \n" -"computer is a mail server. You can view the hostname of you computer using " -"the <i>hostname</i> \n" +"<p>Enter the short name for this computer (e.g. <i>mymachine</i>) and the DNS domain\n" +"(e.g. <i>example.com</i>) that it belongs to. The domain is especially important if this \n" +"computer is a mail server. You can view the hostname of you computer using the <i>hostname</i> \n" "command.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>輸入此電腦的名稱 (例如 <i>mymachine</i>) 以及它所屬的 DNS 網域\n" @@ -2448,20 +2399,16 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:153 msgid "" "<p>Select the way how the DNS configuration will be modified (name servers,\n" -"search list, the content of <i>/etc/resolv.conf</i>). Normally, it is " -"handled\n" +"search list, the content of <i>/etc/resolv.conf</i>). Normally, it is handled\n" "by the <i>netconfig</i> script, which merges statically defined data with\n" "dynamically obtained data (e.g. from the DHCP client, NetworkManager,\n" -"etc.). This is the default. <b>Use Default Policy</b> is sufficient for " -"most\n" +"etc.). This is the default. <b>Use Default Policy</b> is sufficient for most\n" "configurations.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>選擇設定 DNS 的方式 (名稱伺服器，搜尋清單， \n" -"<i>/etc/resolv.conf</i> 檔案的內容) 將會被修改。一般而言，它是被 " -"<i>netconfig</i>\n" +"<i>/etc/resolv.conf</i> 檔案的內容) 將會被修改。一般而言，它是被 <i>netconfig</i>\n" "程序合併在此定義的和那些由動態獲得的資料 (例如 從\n" -"DHCP 客戶端、NetworkManager 等)來處理。這是預設值， <b>使用預設政策</b> 選" -"項，\n" +"DHCP 客戶端、NetworkManager 等)來處理。這是預設值， <b>使用預設政策</b> 選項，\n" "在大部分的情況下設定都可適用。</p>\n" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:161 @@ -2476,11 +2423,9 @@ "policy.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>藉著選取 <b>僅手動</b> 選項， <i>netconfig</i> 將不再 被允許修改 \n" -"<i>/etc/resolv.conf</i>。 然而您可以手動編輯此檔案。藉由選取 <b>使用自訂政策" -"</b> \n" +"<i>/etc/resolv.conf</i>。 然而您可以手動編輯此檔案。藉由選取 <b>使用自訂政策</b> \n" "選項，您可以指定一個自訂政策字串，這是由 逗號分隔的介面名稱清單， \n" -"包含萬用字元，以及 STATIC 和 STATIC_FALLBACK 作為預先定義的 特殊值。需要更多" -"資訊， \n" +"包含萬用字元，以及 STATIC 和 STATIC_FALLBACK 作為預先定義的 特殊值。需要更多資訊， \n" "請參閱 <i>netconfig</i> 手冊頁。注意：保留區域空白 和使用 <b>\n" "僅手動</b> 政策是相同的。</p>\n" @@ -2489,8 +2434,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:174 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Address Setup</big></b></p>\n" -"<p>Select <b>No Address Setup</b> if you do not want to assign an IP address " -"to this device.\n" +"<p>Select <b>No Address Setup</b> if you do not want to assign an IP address to this device.\n" "This is particularly useful for bonding ethernet devices.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>位址設定</big></b></p>\n" @@ -2498,9 +2442,7 @@ "這在結合乙太網路裝置時特別有用。</p>\n" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:179 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>iBFT</b> if you want to keep the network configured in your BIOS." -"</p>\n" +msgid "<p>Check <b>iBFT</b> if you want to keep the network configured in your BIOS.</p>\n" msgstr "<p>核取 <b>iBFT</b> 如果您想要保持讓您的 BIOS 設定網路。</p>\n" #. Address dialog help 2/8 @@ -2527,10 +2469,8 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:193 msgid "" "<p>To search for an IP address and assign it statically, select \n" -"<b>Zeroconf</b>. To use DHCP and fall back to zeroconf, select <b>DHCP + " -"Zeroconf\n" -"</b>. Otherwise, the network addresses must be assigned <b>Statically</b>.\n" +"<b>Zeroconf</b>. To use DHCP and fall back to zeroconf, select <b>DHCP + Zeroconf\n" +"</b>. Otherwise, the network addresses must be assigned <b>Statically</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>要搜尋 IP 位址並靜態指定它，選擇 \n" "<b>Zeroconf</b>。 要使用 DHCP 和回復到 zeroconf，選擇 <b>DHCP + Zeroconf\n" @@ -2539,8 +2479,7 @@ #. Address dialog help 5/8 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:199 msgid "" -"<p>Enter the <b>IP Address</b> (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) for " -"your computer, and the \n" +"<p>Enter the <b>IP Address</b> (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) for your computer, and the \n" " <b>Remote IP Address</b> (for example: <tt>192.168.100.254</tt>)\n" "for your peer.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2551,16 +2490,12 @@ #. Address dialog help 6/8 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:205 msgid "" -"<p>For <b>Static Address Setup</b> enter the static IP address for your " -"computer (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) and\n" -"the network mask (usually <tt>255.255.255.0</tt> or just length of prefix " -"<tt>/24</tt>).Optionally, you can enter\n" -"a fully qualified hostname for this IP address. The hostname will be written " -"to <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>.</p>\n" +"<p>For <b>Static Address Setup</b> enter the static IP address for your computer (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) and\n" +"the network mask (usually <tt>255.255.255.0</tt> or just length of prefix <tt>/24</tt>).Optionally, you can enter\n" +"a fully qualified hostname for this IP address. The hostname will be written to <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>靜態位址設定</b>請輸入電腦的 IP 位址 (例如 <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>)\n" -"和網路遮罩 (通常是 <tt>255.255.255.0</tt> 或 lenght of prefix <tt>/24</tt>)。" -"您也可以為此 IP 位址\n" +"和網路遮罩 (通常是 <tt>255.255.255.0</tt> 或 lenght of prefix <tt>/24</tt>)。您也可以為此 IP 位址\n" "輸入完整的合格主機名稱。主機名稱將被寫入 <i>/etc/hosts</i>。</p>\n" #. Address dialog help 8/8 @@ -2599,11 +2534,8 @@ "則將停用防火牆。</p>" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:226 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Mandatory Interface</b> specifies whether the network service reports " -"failure if the interface fails to start at boot time.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>強制介面</b>可指定當介面無法在開機時啟動時，網路服務是否報告失敗。</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Mandatory Interface</b> specifies whether the network service reports failure if the interface fails to start at boot time.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>強制介面</b>可指定當介面無法在開機時啟動時，網路服務是否報告失敗。</p>" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:229 msgid "" @@ -2611,8 +2543,7 @@ "<p>Maximum transfer unit (<b>MTU</b>) is the maximum size of the packet,\n" "transferred over the network in one frame. Usually, you do not need to\n" "set a MTU, but using lower MTU values may improve the network performance,\n" -"especially on slow dial-up connections. Either select one of the " -"recommended\n" +"especially on slow dial-up connections. Either select one of the recommended\n" "values or define another one.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>最大傳輸單位</big></b></p>\n" @@ -2625,12 +2556,10 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:237 msgid "" "<p>Select the slave devices for the bond device.\n" -"Only devices with the device activation set to <b>Never</b> and with <b>No " -"Address Setup</b> are available.</p>" +"Only devices with the device activation set to <b>Never</b> and with <b>No Address Setup</b> are available.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>選取結合設備中的從屬設備。\n" -"您只能選擇「設備啟用」設定為<b>絕不</b>，且設定為<b>無位址設定</b>的設備。" +"您只能選擇「設備啟用」設定為<b>絕不</b>，且設定為<b>無位址設定</b>的設備。</p>" #. DHCP dialog help 1/7 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:242 @@ -2641,8 +2570,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:244 msgid "" "<p>The <b>DHCP Client Identifier</b>, if left empty, defaults to\n" -"the hardware address of the network interface. It must be different for " -"each\n" +"the hardware address of the network interface. It must be different for each\n" "DHCP client on a single network. Therefore, specify a unique free-form\n" "identifier here if you have several (virtual) machines using the same\n" "network interface and thus the same hardware address.</p>" @@ -2658,15 +2586,12 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p>The <b>Hostname to Send</b> specifies a string used for the\n" -"hostname option field when the DHCP client sends messages to the DHCP " -"server. Some \n" +"hostname option field when the DHCP client sends messages to the DHCP server. Some \n" "DHCP servers update name server zones (forward and reverse records) \n" "according to this hostname (dynamic DNS).</p>\n" "Some DHCP servers require the <b>Hostname to Send</b> option field to\n" -"contain a specific string in the DHCP messages from clients. Leave <b>AUTO\n" -"to send the current hostname (for example, the one defined in <tt>/etc/" -"HOSTNAME</tt>). \n" +"contain a specific string in the DHCP messages from clients. Leave <b>AUTO</b>\n" +"to send the current hostname (for example, the one defined in <tt>/etc/HOSTNAME</tt>). \n" "If you do not want to send a hostname, leave the field empty.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>「要傳送的主機名稱」</b>可指定當 dhcpcd 傳送訊息至 DHCP 伺服器時，\n" @@ -2702,21 +2627,15 @@ #. Aliases dialog help 3/4 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:272 msgid "" -"<p><b>IPv4 Address Label</b>, formerly known as Alias Name, is optional and " -"legacy. The total\n" -" length of interface name (inclusive of the colon and label) " -"is\n" -" limited to 15 characters and the obsolete ifconfig utility " -"truncates it after 9 characters.</p>" +"<p><b>IPv4 Address Label</b>, formerly known as Alias Name, is optional and legacy. The total\n" +" length of interface name (inclusive of the colon and label) is\n" +" limited to 15 characters and the obsolete ifconfig utility truncates it after 9 characters.</p>" msgstr "" #. Aliases dialog help 3/4, #83766 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:278 -msgid "" -"<p>Do not include the interface name in the alias name. For example, enter " -"<b>foo</b> instead of <b>eth0:foo</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>別名中請勿包含介面名稱。例如，輸入 <b>foo</b> 而非 <b>eth0:foo</b>。</p>" +msgid "<p>Do not include the interface name in the alias name. For example, enter <b>foo</b> instead of <b>eth0:foo</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>別名中請勿包含介面名稱。例如，輸入 <b>foo</b> 而非 <b>eth0:foo</b>。</p>" #. shared between WirelessDialog and WirelessKeyPopup #. this is suited to the button-switched key typing @@ -2743,8 +2662,7 @@ "個字元供 128 位元金鑰使用，最多可輸入 16 個字元供 156 位元金鑰使用，\n" "最多可輸入 29 個字元可供 256 位元金鑰使用。\n" "<br><b>16 進位</b>：直接輸入金鑰的 16 位元碼。輸入\n" -"10 個十六進位數字供 64 位元金鑰之用，26 個數字供 128 位元金鑰之用，32 個數" -"字\n" +"10 個十六進位數字供 64 位元金鑰之用，26 個數字供 128 位元金鑰之用，32 個數字\n" "供 156 位元金鑰之用，以及 58 個數字供 256 位元金鑰之用。您可以\n" "使用連字號 <tt>-</tt> 來分隔成對或成群的數字，\n" "例如，<tt>0a5f-41e6-48</tt>。\n" @@ -2780,8 +2698,7 @@ "<p>Set the <b>Network Name (ESSID)</b> used to identify\n" "cells that are part of the same virtual network. All stations in a\n" "wireless LAN need the same ESSID to communicate with each other. If\n" -"you choose the operation mode <b>Managed</b> and no <b>WPA</b> " -"authentication mode,\n" +"you choose the operation mode <b>Managed</b> and no <b>WPA</b> authentication mode,\n" "you can leave this field empty or set it to <tt>any</tt>. In this\n" "case, your WLAN card associates with the access point with the best\n" "signal strength.</p>\n" @@ -2808,8 +2725,7 @@ "NOTE: Shared key authentication makes it easier for a\n" "potential attacker to break into your network. Unless you have\n" "specific needs for shared key authentication, use the <b>Open</b>\n" -"mode. Because WEP has been proven insecure, <b>WPA</b> (Wi-Fi Protected " -"Access)\n" +"mode. Because WEP has been proven insecure, <b>WPA</b> (Wi-Fi Protected Access)\n" "was defined to close its security holes, but not all hardware supports\n" "WPA. If you want to use WPA, select <b>WPA-PSK</b> or <b>WPA-EAP</b> as the\n" "authentication mode. This is only possible in the operation mode\n" @@ -2826,8 +2742,7 @@ "注意：共用金鑰驗證較容易讓\n" "潛在的駭客侵入您的網路。除非您有\n" "特別需要使用共用金鑰驗證。否則請使用 <b>開放</b>\n" -"模式。由於 WEP 已被證實是不安全的，所以定義出 <b>WPA</b> (無線保護存取，Wi-" -"Fi Protected Access)\n" +"模式。由於 WEP 已被證實是不安全的，所以定義出 <b>WPA</b> (無線保護存取，Wi-Fi Protected Access)\n" "以關閉其安全漏洞，但是並非每個硬體都支援\n" "WPA。如要使用 WPA，請選取 <b>WPA-PSK</b> 或 <b>WPA-EAP</b> 作為\n" "驗證模式。這僅能運作於\n" @@ -2879,8 +2794,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>These values will be written to the interface configuration file\n" "'ifcfg-*' in '/etc/sysconfig/network'. If you need additional settings,\n" -"add them manually. Refer to the file 'wireless' in the same directory for " -"all\n" +"add them manually. Refer to the file 'wireless' in the same directory for all\n" "available options.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>這些值會寫入 '/etc/sysconfig/network' 的介面組態檔\n" @@ -2978,14 +2892,12 @@ "<p>For TTLS and PEAP, enter your <b>Identity</b>\n" "and <b>Password</b> as configured on the server.\n" "If you have special requirements to set the username used as\n" -"<b>Anonymous Identity</b>, you may set it here. This is usually not needed.\n" +"<b>Anonymous Identity</b>, you may set it here. This is usually not needed.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>對於 TTLS 與 PEAP，請在伺服器上設定時，輸入您的<b>身份</b>\n" "與<b>密碼</b>。\n" "若您對於要作為\n" -"<b>匿名身份</b>使用的使用者名稱設定有特別的需求，請在此處設定。但通常不需要。" -"</p>\n" +"<b>匿名身份</b>使用的使用者名稱設定有特別的需求，請在此處設定。但通常不需要。</p>\n" #. text entry label #: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:111 @@ -3006,8 +2918,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:128 msgid "" "<p>TLS uses a <b>Client Certificate</b> instead of a username and\n" -"password combination for authentication. It uses a public and private key " -"pair\n" +"password combination for authentication. It uses a public and private key pair\n" "to encrypt negotiation communication, therefore you will additionally need\n" "a <b>Client Key</b> file that contains your private key and\n" "the appropriate <b>Client Key Password</b> for that file.</p>\n" @@ -3244,8 +3155,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>To use your wireless LAN card in master or ad-hoc mode,\n" "set the <b>Channel</b> the card should use here. This is not needed\n" -"for managed mode--the card will hop through the channels searching for " -"access\n" +"for managed mode--the card will hop through the channels searching for access\n" "points in that case.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>若要在主要或臨機操作模式中使用無線網路卡，\n" @@ -3353,8 +3263,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1001 msgid "" "<p>In this dialog, define your WEP keys used\n" -"to encrypt your data before it is transmitted. You can have up to four " -"keys,\n" +"to encrypt your data before it is transmitted. You can have up to four keys,\n" "although only one key is used to encrypt the data. This is the default key.\n" "The other keys can be used to decrypt data. Usually you have only\n" "one key.</p>" @@ -3419,8 +3328,7 @@ #. validated in ValidateWpaEap #: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1281 msgid "" -"Not using a Certificate Authority (CA) certificate can result in " -"connections\n" +"Not using a Certificate Authority (CA) certificate can result in connections\n" "to insecure, rogue wireless networks. Continue without CA ?" msgstr "" "不使用憑證授權 (CA) 認証會導致連線到\n" @@ -3507,16 +3415,14 @@ "<p>If this feature is enabled, you can\n" "administer this machine remotely from another machine. Use a VNC\n" "client, such as krdc (connect to <tt><hostname>:%1</tt>), or\n" -"a Java-capable Web browser (connect to <tt>http://<hostname>:%2/).\n" +"a Java-capable Web browser (connect to <tt>http://<hostname>:%2/</tt>).\n" "This form of remote administration is less secure than using SSH.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>遠端管理設定</big></b></p>\n" "<p>如果開啟此功能，您能夠\n" "從另一台機器遠端管理此機器。使用 VNC\n" "用戶端，如 krdc (連線到 <tt><主機名稱>:%1</tt>)、或\n" -"可以使用 Java 相容的網頁瀏覽器 (連線到 <tt>http://<主機名稱>:%2/)。\n" +"可以使用 Java 相容的網頁瀏覽器 (連線到 <tt>http://<主機名稱>:%2/</tt>)。\n" "這種遠端管理型態的安全性比使用 SSH 低。</p>\n" #. Dialog frame title @@ -3525,12 +3431,12 @@ msgstr "遠端管理設定" #. Popup text -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:143 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:144 msgid "These packages need to be installed:" msgstr "需要安裝這些套件：" #. Popup text -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:161 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:162 msgid "" "The required packages are not installed.\n" "The configuration will be aborted.\n" @@ -3545,112 +3451,111 @@ #. Translators: Appended after a network card name to indicate that #. there is no carrier, no link to the network, the cable is not #. plugged in. Preferably a short string. -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:253 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:254 msgid "unplugged" msgstr "未插上" #. Table field (Unknown device) -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:259 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:260 msgid "Unknown" msgstr "未知的" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:287 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:288 msgid "Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "已經成功儲存組態" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:292 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:293 msgid "DNS Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "已成功儲存 DNS 組態" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:294 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:295 msgid "DSL Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "已成功儲存 DSL 組態" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:296 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:297 msgid "Hosts Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "已成功儲存主機組態" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:300 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:301 msgid "ISDN Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "已成功儲存 ISDN 組態" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:304 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:305 msgid "Network Card Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "已成功儲存網路卡組態" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:308 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:309 msgid "Modem Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "已成功儲存數據機組態" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:312 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:313 msgid "Proxy Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "已成功儲存代理組態" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:316 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:317 msgid "Provider Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "已成功儲存提供者組態" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:320 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:321 msgid "Routing Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "已成功儲存路由組態" #. Popup text -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:329 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:330 msgid "Configure mail now?" msgstr "要現在設定郵件嗎？" #. Popup text -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:334 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:335 msgid "Run configuration of %1?" msgstr "要執行 %1 的組態嗎？" +#. Disables all widgets which cannot be configured with current network service +#. +#. see bnc#433084 +#. if listed any items, disable them, if show_popup, show warning popup +#. +#. returns true if items were disabled +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1008 +msgid "" +"Network is currently handled by NetworkManager\n" +"or completely disabled. YaST is unable to configure some options." +msgstr "" + #. Confirmation: label text (detecting hardware: xxx) -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:682 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1067 msgid "Network Cards" msgstr "網路卡" #. Confirmation: label text (detecting hardware: xxx) -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:686 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1071 msgid "Modems" msgstr "數據機" #. Confirmation: label text (detecting hardware: xxx) -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:690 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1075 msgid "ISDN Cards" msgstr "ISDN 卡" #. Confirmation: label text (detecting hardware: xxx) -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:694 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1079 msgid "DSL Devices" msgstr "DSL 裝置" -#. Confirmation: label text (detecting hardware: xxx) -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:700 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1084 msgid "All Network Devices" msgstr "所有網路裝置" -#. Disables all widgets which cannot be configured with current network service -#. -#. see bnc#433084 -#. if listed any items, disable them, if show_popup, show warning popup -#. -#. returns true if items were disabled -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1109 -msgid "" -"Network is currently handled by an unsupported network service\n" -"or completely disabled. YaST is unable to configure some options." -msgstr "" - #. validation error popup #. Popup::Error text #: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:93 @@ -3755,11 +3660,8 @@ #. @param [Hash] event the event being handled #. @return whether valid #: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:502 -msgid "" -"It's not recommended to use .local as domainname due to Multicast DNS. Use " -"it at your own risk?" -msgstr "" -"不建議使用 .local 作為網域名稱導致 Multicast DNS。 自負風險 使用使用它嗎？" +msgid "It's not recommended to use .local as domainname due to Multicast DNS. Use it at your own risk?" +msgstr "不建議使用 .local 作為網域名稱導致 Multicast DNS。 自負風險 使用使用它嗎？" #. Popup::Error text #: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:527 @@ -3936,8 +3838,7 @@ #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:58 msgid "" "<p>When <b>Dial Prefix Regular Expression</b> is set, users can\n" -"change the dial prefix in KInternet provided that it matches the " -"expression.\n" +"change the dial prefix in KInternet provided that it matches the expression.\n" "A recommended value is <tt>[09]?</tt>, allowing <tt>0</tt>, <tt>9</tt>,\n" "and the empty prefix. If the expression is empty, users are not allowed\n" "to change the prefix.</p>\n" @@ -4052,22 +3953,18 @@ #. help text for Device Activation #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:152 msgid "" -"Using <b>On NFSroot</b> is similar to <tt>auto</tt>. Interfaces with this " -"startmode will never\n" -"be shut down via <tt>rcnetwork stop</tt>. <tt>ifdown <iface></tt> is still " -"available.\n" +"Using <b>On NFSroot</b> is similar to <tt>auto</tt>. Interfaces with this startmode will never\n" +"be shut down via <tt>rcnetwork stop</tt>. <tt>ifdown <iface></tt> is still available.\n" "Use this if you have an NFS or iSCSI root filesystem.\n" msgstr "" -"使用<b>「在 NFSroot 時」</b>與 <tt>「自動」</tt> 非常類似。 不過此啟動模式的" -"介面無法\n" +"使用<b>「在 NFSroot 時」</b>與 <tt>「自動」</tt> 非常類似。 不過此啟動模式的介面無法\n" "利用 <tt>rcnetwork stop</tt> 關閉。 <tt>ifdown <iface></tt> 仍然有用。\n" "若您有 NFS 或 iSCSI 根檔案系統時即可使用此選項。\n" #. help text for Device Activation #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:162 msgid "" -"Using <b>On NFSroot</b> is nearly like 'auto'. But interfaces with this " -"startmode will never\n" +"Using <b>On NFSroot</b> is nearly like 'auto'. But interfaces with this startmode will never\n" "be shut down via 'rcnetwork stop'. 'ifdown <iface>' still works.\n" "Use this when you have a nfs or iscsi root filesystem.\n" msgstr "" @@ -4086,8 +3983,7 @@ #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:201 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Device Activation</big></b></p> \n" -"<p>Choose when to bring up the network interface. <b>At Boot Time</b> " -"activates it during system boot, \n" +"<p>Choose when to bring up the network interface. <b>At Boot Time</b> activates it during system boot, \n" "<b>Never</b> does not start the device.\n" "%1</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -4182,7 +4078,7 @@ msgstr "IPv6 協定設定" #. enable ipv6 support -#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:418 src/modules/Lan.rb:815 +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:418 src/modules/Lan.rb:820 msgid "Enable IPv6" msgstr "啟用 IPv6" @@ -4227,9 +4123,7 @@ msgstr "確認網路重新啟動" #: src/lib/network/confirm_virt_proposal.rb:26 -msgid "" -"Because of the bridged network, YaST2 needs to restart the network to apply " -"the settings." +msgid "Because of the bridged network, YaST2 needs to restart the network to apply the settings." msgstr "因為橋接網路，YaST 需要重新啟動網路以套用設定。" #. Opens dialog for editing NIC name @@ -4269,7 +4163,7 @@ #. Progress stage 2 #. Progress stage 10 -#: src/modules/DNS.rb:373 src/modules/Lan.rb:538 +#: src/modules/DNS.rb:373 src/modules/Lan.rb:535 msgid "Update configuration" msgstr "更新組態" @@ -4342,62 +4236,62 @@ msgstr "正在更新 /etc/hosts ..." #. Read dialog caption -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:275 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:272 msgid "Initializing Network Configuration" msgstr "正在啟始化網路組態" #. Progress stage 1/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:288 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:285 msgid "Detect network devices" msgstr "偵測網路裝置" #. Progress stage 2/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:290 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:287 msgid "Read driver information" msgstr "讀取驅動程式資訊" #. Progress stage 3/9 - multiple devices may be present, really plural -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:292 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:289 msgid "Read device configuration" msgstr "讀取裝置組態" #. Progress stage 4/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:294 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:291 msgid "Read network configuration" msgstr "讀取網路組態" #. Progress stage 5/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:296 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:293 msgid "Read firewall settings" msgstr "讀取防火牆設定" #. Progress stage 6/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:298 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:295 msgid "Read hostname and DNS configuration" msgstr "讀取主機名稱和 DNS 組態" #. Progress stage 7/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:300 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:297 msgid "Read installation information" msgstr "讀取安裝資訊" #. Progress stage 8/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:302 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:299 msgid "Read routing configuration" msgstr "讀取路由組態" #. Progress stage 9/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:304 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:301 msgid "Detect current status" msgstr "偵測目前的狀態" #. Progress step 1/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:318 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:315 msgid "Detecting ndiswrapper..." msgstr "正在偵測 ndiswrapper..." #. modprobe ndiswrapper before hwinfo when needed (#343893) -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:337 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:334 msgid "" "Detected a ndiswrapper configuration,\n" "but the kernel module was not modprobed.\n" @@ -4407,7 +4301,7 @@ "但核心模組未啟用偵測。\n" "您想要核心偵測 ndiswrapper 嗎？\n" -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:345 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:342 msgid "" "ndiswrapper kernel module has not been loaded.\n" "Check configuration manually.\n" @@ -4416,140 +4310,140 @@ "請手動檢查組態。\n" #. Progress step 2/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:359 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:356 msgid "Detecting network devices..." msgstr "正在偵測網路裝置..." #. Progress step 3/9 - multiple devices may be present, really plural -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:367 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:364 msgid "Reading device configuration..." msgstr "正在讀取裝置組態..." #. Progress step 4/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:373 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:370 msgid "Reading network configuration..." msgstr "正在讀取網路組態..." #. Progress step 5/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:382 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:379 msgid "Reading firewall settings..." msgstr "正在讀取防火牆設定..." #. Progress step 6/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:390 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:387 msgid "Reading hostname and DNS configuration..." msgstr "正在讀取主機名稱和 DNS 組態..." #. Progress step 7/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:397 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:394 msgid "Reading installation information..." msgstr "正在讀取安裝資訊..." #. Progress step 8/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:403 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:400 msgid "Reading routing configuration..." msgstr "正在讀取路由組態..." #. Progress step 9/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:409 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:406 msgid "Detecting current status..." msgstr "正在偵測目前的狀態..." #. Final progress step #. Final progress step -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:415 src/modules/Lan.rb:651 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:412 src/modules/Lan.rb:651 msgid "Finished" msgstr "已完成" #. (a specialization used when a parameterless function is needed) #. @return Read(`cache) -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:441 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:438 msgid "To apply this change, a reboot is needed." msgstr "要套用此變更需要重開機。" #. Write dialog caption -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:510 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:507 msgid "Saving Network Configuration" msgstr "正在儲存網路組態" #. Progress stage 2 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:517 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:514 msgid "Write drivers information" msgstr "寫入驅動程式資訊" #. Progress stage 3 - multiple devices may be present,really plural -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:519 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:516 msgid "Write device configuration" msgstr "寫入裝置組態" #. Progress stage 4 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:521 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:518 msgid "Write network configuration" msgstr "寫入網路組態" #. Progress stage 5 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:523 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:520 msgid "Write routing configuration" msgstr "寫入路由組態" #. Progress stage 6 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:525 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:522 msgid "Write hostname and DNS configuration" msgstr "寫入主機名稱和 DNS 組態" #. Progress stage 7 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:527 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:524 msgid "Set up network services" msgstr "設定網路服務" #. Progress stage 8 #. Progress stage 1 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:531 src/modules/Remote.rb:289 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:528 src/modules/Remote.rb:289 msgid "Write firewall settings" msgstr "寫入防火牆設定" #. Progress stage 9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:535 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:532 msgid "Activate network services" msgstr "啟用網路服務" #. Progress step 2 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:552 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:549 msgid "Writing /etc/modprobe.conf..." msgstr "正在寫入 /etc/modprobe.conf..." #. Progress step 3 - multiple devices may be present, really plural -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:557 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:554 msgid "Writing device configuration..." msgstr "正在寫入裝置組態..." #. Progress step 4 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:563 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:560 msgid "Writing network configuration..." msgstr "正在寫入網路組態..." #. Progress step 5 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:569 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:566 msgid "Writing routing configuration..." msgstr "正在寫入路由組態..." #. Progress step 6 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:577 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:574 msgid "Writing hostname and DNS configuration..." msgstr "正在寫入主機名稱和 DNS 組態..." #. Progress step 7 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:590 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:587 msgid "Setting up network services..." msgstr "正在設定網路服務..." #. Progress step 8 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:598 src/modules/Remote.rb:303 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:595 src/modules/Remote.rb:303 msgid "Writing firewall settings..." msgstr "正在寫入防火牆設定..." #. Progress step 9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:608 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:605 msgid "Activating network services..." msgstr "正在啟用網路服務..." @@ -4557,97 +4451,104 @@ msgid "No network running" msgstr "沒有網路運作" +#. Import data +#. @param [Hash] settings settings to be imported +#. @return true on success +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:706 +msgid "AutoYaST setting networking/managed: NetworkManager is not available, Wicked will be used." +msgstr "" + #. Create a textual summary for the general network settings #. proposal (NetworkManager + ipv6) #. @return [rich text, links] -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:787 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:792 msgid "Network Mode" msgstr "網路模式" #. network mode: the interfaces are controlled by the user -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:792 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:797 msgid "Interfaces controlled by NetworkManager" msgstr "由 NetworkManager 控制介面" #. disable NetworkManager applet -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:794 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:799 msgid "Disable NetworkManager" msgstr "停用 NetworkManager" #. network mode -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:798 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:803 msgid "Traditional network setup with NetControl - ifup" msgstr "傳統網路設定使用 NetControl - ifup" #. enable NetworkManager applet #. for virtual network proposal (bridged) don't show hyperlink to enable networkmanager -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:801 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:806 msgid "Enable NetworkManager" msgstr "啟用 NetworkManager" #. ipv6 support is enabled -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:807 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:812 msgid "Support for IPv6 protocol is enabled" msgstr "已啟用 IPv6 通訊協定的支援" #. disable ipv6 support -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:809 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:814 msgid "Disable IPv6" msgstr "停用 IPv6" #. ipv6 support is disabled -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:813 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:818 msgid "Support for IPv6 protocol is disabled" msgstr "已停用 IPv6 通訊協定的支援" #. translators: a possible value for: IPoIB device mode -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:182 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:195 #, fuzzy msgid "connected" msgstr "未連線" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:183 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:196 msgid "datagram" msgstr "" #. summary description of STARTMODE=auto #. summary description of STARTMODE=auto #. summary description of STARTMODE=hotplug -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1238 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1242 -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1246 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1251 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1255 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1259 msgid "Started automatically at boot" msgstr "開機時自動啟動" #. summary description of STARTMODE=ifplugd -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1250 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1263 msgid "Started automatically on cable connection" msgstr "在電纜連線上自動啟動" #. summary description of STARTMODE=managed -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1254 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1267 msgid "Managed by NetworkManager" msgstr "由 NetworkManager 管理" #. summary description of STARTMODE=off -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1258 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1271 msgid "Will not be started at all" msgstr "完全不會啟動" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1263 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1276 msgid "Started manually" msgstr "手動啟動" #. do nothing -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1275 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1288 msgid "IP address assigned using" msgstr "指定 IP 位址使用" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1279 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1292 #, fuzzy msgid "IP address: %s/%s" msgstr "IP 位址： %1/%2" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1282 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1295 #, fuzzy msgid "IP address: %s, subnet mask %s" msgstr "IP 位址：%1，子網路遮罩 %2" @@ -4655,47 +4556,42 @@ #. FIXME: #. - side effect: sets @type. No reason for that. It should only build item #. overview. Check and remove. -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1313 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1326 msgid "Not configured" msgstr "未設定" #. display it only if we need it, don't duplicate "ifcfg_name" above -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1336 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1402 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1349 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1415 #, fuzzy msgid "Device Name: %s" msgstr "設備名稱：%1" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1356 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1369 msgid "Bonding slaves" msgstr "Bonding 從屬" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1370 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1383 msgid "enslaved in %s" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1371 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1384 msgid "Bonding master" msgstr "Bonding 主要" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1385 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1398 msgid "Not connected" msgstr "未連線" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1388 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1401 msgid "No hwinfo" msgstr "無硬體資訊" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1408 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1421 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Unable to configure the network card because the kernel device (eth0, wlan0) " -"is not present. This is mostly caused by missing firmware (for wlan " -"devices). See dmesg output for details." -msgstr "" -"<p>無法設定網路卡，因為核心裝置 (eth0, wlan0) 未出現。 這很可能是因為遺失韌" -"體 (無線網路裝置) 所造成的。請參考 dmesg 輸出獲得更多的細節。</p>" +msgid "Unable to configure the network card because the kernel device (eth0, wlan0) is not present. This is mostly caused by missing firmware (for wlan devices). See dmesg output for details." +msgstr "<p>無法設定網路卡，因為核心裝置 (eth0, wlan0) 未出現。 這很可能是因為遺失韌體 (無線網路裝置) 所造成的。請參考 dmesg 輸出獲得更多的細節。</p>" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1414 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1427 #, fuzzy msgid "" "The device is not configured. Press <b>Edit</b>\n" @@ -4704,11 +4600,11 @@ "<p>此裝置未組態。按 <b>編輯</b>\n" "來組態。</p>\n" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1421 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1434 msgid "Needed firmware" msgstr "需要韌體" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1421 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1434 msgid "unknown" msgstr "不明的" @@ -4805,17 +4701,17 @@ msgstr "IP 轉遞" #. item in combo box Firewall Zone -#: src/modules/SuSEFirewall4Network.rb:82 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewall4Network.rb:121 msgid "Automatically Assigned Zone" msgstr "自動指定區域" #. item in combo box Firewall Zone -#: src/modules/SuSEFirewall4Network.rb:84 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewall4Network.rb:123 msgid "Firewall Disabled" msgstr "防火牆已停用" #. TRANSLATORS: Part of combo box item -> "Internal Zone (Unprotected)" -#: src/modules/SuSEFirewall4Network.rb:96 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewall4Network.rb:135 msgid "(Unprotected)" msgstr "(未受保護)" @@ -4841,26 +4737,14 @@ #~ msgstr "設備名稱" #, fuzzy -#~| msgid "" -#~| "SSH service will be enabled, SSH port will be open (disable and close</a>)" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "SSH service will be enabled, SSH port will be open (disable and close</a>)" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "SSH 服務將被啟用，SSH 連接埠將被開啟 (停用並關閉</a>)" +#~| msgid "SSH service will be enabled, SSH port will be open (disable and close</a>)" +#~ msgid "SSH service will be enabled, SSH port will be open (disable and close</a>)" +#~ msgstr "SSH 服務將被啟用，SSH 連接埠將被開啟 (停用並關閉</a>)" #, fuzzy -#~| msgid "" -#~| "SSH service will be disabled, SSH port will be blocked (enable and open</a>)" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "SSH service will be disabled, SSH port will be blocked (enable and open</a>)" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "SSH 服務將被停用，SSH 連接埠將被關閉 (啟用並開啟</a>)" +#~| msgid "SSH service will be disabled, SSH port will be blocked (enable and open</a>)" +#~ msgid "SSH service will be disabled, SSH port will be blocked (enable and open</a>)" +#~ msgstr "SSH 服務將被停用，SSH 連接埠將被關閉 (啟用並開啟</a>)" #~ msgid "General &Network Settings" #~ msgstr "一般網路設定(&N)" @@ -4946,8 +4830,7 @@ #~ msgid "Bond slaves" #~ msgstr "Bond 從屬" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>The device is not configured. Press <b>Edit</b> for configuration.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>The device is not configured. Press <b>Edit</b> for configuration.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>此裝置未組態。按 <b>編輯</b> 來設定。</p>" #~ msgid "" @@ -5039,20 +4922,15 @@ #~ "<p>First, choose your <b>PPP mode</b>. This is either\n" #~ "<i>PPP over Ethernet</i> (PPPoE), <i>PPP over ATM</i> (PPPoATM),\n" #~ "<i>CAPI for ADSL</i> or <i>Point to Point Tunneling Protocol</i> (PPTP).\n" -#~ "Use <i>PPP over Ethernet</i> if your DSL modem is connected via ethernet " -#~ "to your computer.\n" -#~ "Use <i>Point to Point Tunneling Protocol</i> if you want to connect to a " -#~ "VPN server.\n" +#~ "Use <i>PPP over Ethernet</i> if your DSL modem is connected via ethernet to your computer.\n" +#~ "Use <i>Point to Point Tunneling Protocol</i> if you want to connect to a VPN server.\n" #~ "If you are not sure which mode to use, ask your provider. </p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>首先，請選擇<b>PPP 模式</b>。這可以是\n" #~ "<i>PPP over Ethernet</i> (PPPoE) 、 <i>PPP over ATM</i> (PPPoATM)、\n" -#~ "<i>CAPI for ADSL</i> 或 <i>Point to Point Tunneling Protocol</i> " -#~ "(PPTP)。\n" -#~ "使用 <i>PPP over Ethernet</i> 若您的 DSL 數據機是透過乙太網路連接至電" -#~ "腦，\n" -#~ "使用 <i>Point to Point Tunneling Protocol</i> 如果您想要連線到一台 VPN 伺" -#~ "服器。\n" +#~ "<i>CAPI for ADSL</i> 或 <i>Point to Point Tunneling Protocol</i> (PPTP)。\n" +#~ "使用 <i>PPP over Ethernet</i> 若您的 DSL 數據機是透過乙太網路連接至電腦，\n" +#~ "使用 <i>Point to Point Tunneling Protocol</i> 如果您想要連線到一台 VPN 伺服器。\n" #~ "若不確定要使用哪種模式，請詢問網路供應商。</p>" #~ msgid "" @@ -5063,10 +4941,8 @@ #~ "乙太網路卡。</p>" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>The <b>PPP Mode-Dependent Settings</b> are settings required to set " -#~ "up\n" -#~ "your DSL connection. <b>VPI/VCI</b> makes sense only for <i>PPP over ATM\n" +#~ "<p>The <b>PPP Mode-Dependent Settings</b> are settings required to set up\n" +#~ "your DSL connection. <b>VPI/VCI</b> makes sense only for <i>PPP over ATM</i>\n" #~ "connections, <b>Ethernet Card</b> is needed for <i>PPP over Ethernet</i>\n" #~ "connections.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -5221,8 +5097,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<P><B><BIG>Adding an ISDN Connection:</BIG></B><BR>\n" -#~ "If you press <B>Add</B>, you can configure an ISDN dial-up connection.\n" +#~ "If you press <B>Add</B>, you can configure an ISDN dial-up connection.</P>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<P><B><BIG>新增 ISDN 連線：</BIG></B><BR>\n" #~ "如果您按<B>「新增」</B>，可設定 ISDN 撥號連線。</P>\n" @@ -5249,8 +5124,7 @@ #~ msgstr "ISDN 詳細資訊設定" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>The <b>Remote Phone Number List</b> controls which remote machines " -#~ "are\n" +#~ "<p>The <b>Remote Phone Number List</b> controls which remote machines are\n" #~ "allowed to connect to this interface.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>「遠端電話號碼清單」</b>會控制允許哪些遠端機器\n" @@ -5264,34 +5138,29 @@ #~ "以允許所有的呼叫者 ID。</p>\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>If the callback mode is <b>off</b>, calls are handled normally " -#~ "without special \n" +#~ "<p>If the callback mode is <b>off</b>, calls are handled normally without special \n" #~ "processing.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>如果回呼模式為<b>「關閉」</b>，會正常處理呼叫而不需要做特別的\n" #~ "處理。</p>\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>If the callback mode is <b>server</b>, after getting an incoming call, " -#~ "a callback \n" +#~ "<p>If the callback mode is <b>server</b>, after getting an incoming call, a callback \n" #~ "is triggered.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>如果回呼模式是<b>「伺服器」</b>，在收到呼叫之後\n" #~ "會觸發回呼。</p>\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>If the callback mode is <b>client</b>, the local system does the " -#~ "initial call then \n" +#~ "<p>If the callback mode is <b>client</b>, the local system does the initial call then \n" #~ "waits for callback from the remote machine.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>如果回呼模式是<b>「用戶端」</b>，本地系統會處理起始呼叫，然後\n" #~ "等待遠端機器的回呼。</p>\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>Callback Delay</b> is the number of seconds between the initial " -#~ "call and the\n" -#~ "callback (server) or the hang-up (client). It should be greater on the " -#~ "server than on\n" +#~ "<p><b>Callback Delay</b> is the number of seconds between the initial call and the\n" +#~ "callback (server) or the hang-up (client). It should be greater on the server than on\n" #~ "the client.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>「回呼延遲」</b>是啟始呼叫與回呼 (伺服器) 或掛斷 (用戶端)\n" @@ -5333,8 +5202,7 @@ #~ msgstr "ISDN 服務選項" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>If you have a combined ISDN and DSL CAPI controller, configure your " -#~ "DSL\n" +#~ "<p>If you have a combined ISDN and DSL CAPI controller, configure your DSL\n" #~ "connection via <b>Add DSL CAPI Interface</b>. You can also do this later\n" #~ "in the DSL configuration dialog.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -5353,8 +5221,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>To switch between various Internet providers, an\n" -#~ "interface for each provider is not required. Simply add multiple " -#~ "providers to the\n" +#~ "interface for each provider is not required. Simply add multiple providers to the\n" #~ "same interface.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>若要在不同的網際網路供應商之間切換，\n" @@ -5400,20 +5267,15 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>My phone number -- As your own telephone number (MSN), put in your \n" -#~ "telephone number (without area code) if your ISDN card is connected " -#~ "directly\n" -#~ "to the phone company-provided socket. If it is connected to a PBX, put in " -#~ "the\n" -#~ "MSN stored in the PBX (e.g., your phone extension or the last digit or " -#~ "digits\n" -#~ "of your phone extension) . If this fails, try using 0, which normally " -#~ "means\n" +#~ "telephone number (without area code) if your ISDN card is connected directly\n" +#~ "to the phone company-provided socket. If it is connected to a PBX, put in the\n" +#~ "MSN stored in the PBX (e.g., your phone extension or the last digit or digits\n" +#~ "of your phone extension) . If this fails, try using 0, which normally means\n" #~ "the default MSN is actually used.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>我的電話號碼 -- 擁有電話號碼 (MSN) 時，如果 ISDN 卡直接連接到\n" #~ "電話公司提供的插槽中，\n" -#~ "則請加入此電話號碼 (不含區域號碼)。如果已連接到 PBX，請加入 PBX 中所儲存" -#~ "的 MSN\n" +#~ "則請加入此電話號碼 (不含區域號碼)。如果已連接到 PBX，請加入 PBX 中所儲存的 MSN\n" #~ "(例如，分機\n" #~ "或分機的最後一個數字)。若此作業失敗，請嘗試使用 0，此值一般表示\n" #~ "實際使用的預設 MSN。</p>" @@ -5439,18 +5301,15 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>Selecting <b>channel bundling</b> sets up a 128-kBit connection\n" -#~ "also known as Multilink PPP. To activate or deactivate the second " -#~ "channel,\n" +#~ "also known as Multilink PPP. To activate or deactivate the second channel,\n" #~ "use the following commands:\n" #~ "<tt>\n" #~ " <br> isdnctrl addlink ippp0\n" #~ " <br> isdnctrl removelink ippp0\n" #~ " <br>\n" #~ "</tt>\n" -#~ "You can also install the package <b>xibod</b> to have this happen " -#~ "automatically. If\n" -#~ "there is a demand for more bandwidth, it adds a channel. If the traffic " -#~ "goes down, it \n" +#~ "You can also install the package <b>xibod</b> to have this happen automatically. If\n" +#~ "there is a demand for more bandwidth, it adds a channel. If the traffic goes down, it \n" #~ "removes a channel.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -5471,8 +5330,7 @@ #~ "<p>Selecting\n" #~ "<b>External Firewall Interface</b> activates the firewall\n" #~ "and sets this interface as external.\n" -#~ "<b>Restart Firewall</b> restarts the firewall if a connection is " -#~ "established.\n" +#~ "<b>Restart Firewall</b> restarts the firewall if a connection is established.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>選取\n" @@ -5598,8 +5456,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>If you have an old legacy ISA card, you can enter values for\n" #~ "IO port or memory addresses and the used interrupt.\n" -#~ "For the correct values, check with your technical manual or contact your " -#~ "salesman.</p>\n" +#~ "For the correct values, check with your technical manual or contact your salesman.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>若擁有舊的舊式 ISA 卡，則可輸入\n" #~ "IO 埠或記憶體位址和所使用之岔斷的值。\n" @@ -5623,8 +5480,7 @@ #~ "<p>您的 ISDN 卡有多個驅動程式。\n" #~ "請從清單中選擇一個驅動程式。</p>\n" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>ISDN Protocol: </b>In most cases, the protocol is Euro-ISDN.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p><b>ISDN Protocol: </b>In most cases, the protocol is Euro-ISDN.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p><b>ISDN 協定：</b>在大部分的情況下，通訊協定是 Euro-ISDN。</p>" #~ msgid "" @@ -5636,17 +5492,13 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Dial Prefix: </b> If you need a prefix to get an public line, \n" -#~ "enter it here. This is only used on a internal S0 bus and the most common " -#~ "one is \"0\".</p>\n" +#~ "enter it here. This is only used on a internal S0 bus and the most common one is \"0\".</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>撥號前置號碼：</b>如果需要前置號碼才能連線公共線路，\n" #~ "請在此輸入。這僅用於內部 S0 匯流排，而最常用的是 \"0\"。</p>\n" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>If you do not want to log all your ISDN traffic, uncheck <b>Start ISDN " -#~ "Log</b>.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>若不想記錄所有的 ISDN 流量，請取消核取<b>「啟動 ISDN 記錄」</b>。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>If you do not want to log all your ISDN traffic, uncheck <b>Start ISDN Log</b>.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>若不想記錄所有的 ISDN 流量，請取消核取<b>「啟動 ISDN 記錄」</b>。</p>" #~ msgid "ISDN Protocol" #~ msgstr "ISDN 協定" @@ -5843,10 +5695,8 @@ #~ msgstr "<p>輸入所有數據機組態值。</p>" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>Modem Device</b> specifies to which port your modem is connected. " -#~ "ttyS0,\n" -#~ "ttyS1, etc., refer to serial ports and usually correspond to COM1, COM2, " -#~ "etc.,\n" +#~ "<p><b>Modem Device</b> specifies to which port your modem is connected. ttyS0,\n" +#~ "ttyS1, etc., refer to serial ports and usually correspond to COM1, COM2, etc.,\n" #~ "in DOS/Windows. ttyACM0 and ttyACM1 refer to USB ports.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>「數據機裝置」</b>指定數據機所連接的埠。ttyS0、\n" @@ -5862,12 +5712,9 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>Choose <b>Dial Mode</b> according to your phone link. Most telephone\n" -#~ "companies use <i>Tone Dial</i> as the <b>Dial Mode</b>. Check the " -#~ "additional\n" -#~ "check boxes to turn on your modem speaker (<i>Speaker On</i>) or for " -#~ "your\n" -#~ "modem to wait until it detects a dial tone (<i>Detect Dial Tone</i>).\n" +#~ "companies use <i>Tone Dial</i> as the <b>Dial Mode</b>. Check the additional\n" +#~ "check boxes to turn on your modem speaker (<i>Speaker On</i>) or for your\n" +#~ "modem to wait until it detects a dial tone (<i>Detect Dial Tone</i>).</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>選擇<b>「撥號模式」</b> (根據您的電話連結)。大部分的電話\n" #~ "公司使用<i>按鍵式撥號</i>來做為<b>撥號模式</b>。選取其他的\n" @@ -5966,18 +5813,14 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Dial on Demand</b> means that the Internet\n" -#~ "connection will be established automatically when data from the Internet " -#~ "is\n" -#~ "requested. To use this feature, specify at least one <i>name server</i>. " -#~ "Use\n" -#~ "this feature only if your Internet connection is inexpensive, because " -#~ "there are\n" +#~ "connection will be established automatically when data from the Internet is\n" +#~ "requested. To use this feature, specify at least one <i>name server</i>. Use\n" +#~ "this feature only if your Internet connection is inexpensive, because there are\n" #~ "programs that periodically request data from the Internet.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>「依需求撥號」</b>表示會在需要從網際網路取得\n" #~ "資料時，\n" -#~ "自動建立網際網路連接。若要使用此功能，請指定至少一個<i>名稱伺服器</i>。因" -#~ "為有許多程式會定期從網際網路取得資料，\n" +#~ "自動建立網際網路連接。若要使用此功能，請指定至少一個<i>名稱伺服器</i>。因為有許多程式會定期從網際網路取得資料，\n" #~ "所以只有在網路網際連接費用低廉時，\n" #~ "才可使用這個功能。</p>" @@ -5999,8 +5842,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Name Servers</b> are required to convert hostnames\n" -#~ "(such as www.suse.com) to IP addresses (for example, 213.95.15.200). You " -#~ "only\n" +#~ "(such as www.suse.com) to IP addresses (for example, 213.95.15.200). You only\n" #~ "need to specify the name servers if you enable dial on demand or\n" #~ "disable <b>DNS Modification</b> when connected.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -6010,10 +5852,8 @@ #~ "<b>「DNS 修改」</b>的情況下，才必須指定名稱伺服器。</p>\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>Ignore Prompts</b> disables the detection of any prompts from the " -#~ "dial-up\n" -#~ "server. If the connection build-up is slow or does not work at all, try " -#~ "this\n" +#~ "<p><b>Ignore Prompts</b> disables the detection of any prompts from the dial-up\n" +#~ "server. If the connection build-up is slow or does not work at all, try this\n" #~ "option.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>忽略提示</b> 會停止偵測從撥入\n" @@ -6033,8 +5873,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>The <b>Idle Time-Out</b> specifies the time after which an idle\n" -#~ "connection will be shut down (0 means the connection will not time-out).\n" +#~ "connection will be shut down (0 means the connection will not time-out).</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>「閒置逾時」</b>可指定多久時間之後會關閉閒置\n" #~ "連線 (0 表示連線不會逾時)。</p>\n" @@ -6102,10 +5941,8 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>Check <b>Dynamic IP Address</b>\n" -#~ "if your provider assigns one temporary address per connection. In this " -#~ "case,\n" -#~ "the outgoing address is unknown until the moment the link is " -#~ "established.\n" +#~ "if your provider assigns one temporary address per connection. In this case,\n" +#~ "the outgoing address is unknown until the moment the link is established.\n" #~ "This is the default with most providers.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>如果提供者為每個連接都指定一個暫時位址，\n" @@ -6115,10 +5952,8 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>Check <b>Use Peer DNS</b> to change\n" -#~ "your domain name servers after the connection is made. This replaces your " -#~ "static\n" -#~ "DNS configuration with the obtained DNS server IP addresses. Today, " -#~ "almost all\n" +#~ "your domain name servers after the connection is made. This replaces your static\n" +#~ "DNS configuration with the obtained DNS server IP addresses. Today, almost all\n" #~ "providers support <b>Use Peer DNS</b>.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>建立連線之後，請核取<b>「使用對等 DNS」</b>變更\n" @@ -6127,16 +5962,14 @@ #~ "提供者皆支援<b>使用對等 DNS</b>。</p>\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>If callback mode is off, calls are handled normally without " -#~ "special \n" +#~ "<p>If callback mode is off, calls are handled normally without special \n" #~ "processing.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>如果回呼模式為「關閉」，則會正常處理呼叫，而不需要做特別的\n" #~ "處理。</p>" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>If callback mode is server, after getting an incoming call, a " -#~ "callback \n" +#~ "<p>If callback mode is server, after getting an incoming call, a callback \n" #~ "is triggered.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>如果回呼模式為「伺服器」，則在收到呼叫之後\n" @@ -6151,8 +5984,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>Check <b>Default Route</b> to set the default\n" -#~ "route for this provider. This is most likely correct unless you want to " -#~ "reach\n" +#~ "route for this provider. This is most likely correct unless you want to reach\n" #~ "single machines or subnetworks through this provider.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>核取<b>「預設路由」</b>以設定這個提供者的\n" @@ -6306,8 +6138,7 @@ #~ msgstr "<p>輸入供應商的<b>「供應商名稱」</b>。</p>" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Enter a <b>Provider Name</b> for the provider and a <b>Phone Number\n" +#~ "<p>Enter a <b>Provider Name</b> for the provider and a <b>Phone Number</b>\n" #~ "to access your provider.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>輸入提供者的<b>「供應商名稱」</b>和<b>「電話號碼」</b>\n" @@ -6315,8 +6146,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>Select the type of packet encapsulation.\n" -#~ "<b>RawIP</b> means that MAC headers are stripped. <b>SyncPPP</b> stands " -#~ "for\n" +#~ "<b>RawIP</b> means that MAC headers are stripped. <b>SyncPPP</b> stands for\n" #~ "Synchronous PPP.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>選取封包封裝類型。\n" @@ -6343,8 +6173,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>The <b>User Name</b> will be extended\n" -#~ "with the <i>t-online-com/</i> at the start and with <i>@t-online-com.de\n" +#~ "with the <i>t-online-com/</i> at the start and with <i>@t-online-com.de</i>\n" #~ "at the end.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>延伸<b>「使用者名稱」</b>的方式是\n" @@ -6352,8 +6181,7 @@ #~ "</p>" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Check <b>Always Ask for Password</b> to be asked for the password " -#~ "every time.\n" +#~ "<p>Check <b>Always Ask for Password</b> to be asked for the password every time.\n" #~ "Your\n" #~ "Internet service provider might not allow passwords to be saved on\n" #~ "disk. If you enter the password here, it is saved in clear text on disk\n" @@ -6438,8 +6266,7 @@ #~ "使用 KInternet (無網路管理員) 或在系統上儲存密碼。\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "You have entered some characters that are not numbers in the phone " -#~ "field.\n" +#~ "You have entered some characters that are not numbers in the phone field.\n" #~ "\n" #~ "Continue?" #~ msgstr "" @@ -6453,8 +6280,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>In the <b>User Name</b> field, replace the blank space\n" #~ "(after the <b>/</b>) with your Kamp login. Then enter your password\n" -#~ "and click <b>Next</b>. Contact your provider if you have difficulties.\n" +#~ "and click <b>Next</b>. Contact your provider if you have difficulties.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>在<b>「使用者名稱」</b>欄位中，使用 Kamp 登入取代空格\n" #~ "(在 <b>/</b> 後面)。然後輸入密碼，\n" @@ -6465,14 +6291,10 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>In the <b>User Name</b> field, replace the blank space (before\n" -#~ "the <b>@</b>) with your AOL login. Then enter your password and click " -#~ "<b>Next</b>.\n" -#~ "If you are a new AOL customer and want to dial up for the first time, you " -#~ "need\n" -#~ "to enter your AOL PIN number once. If you have a Windows system, you can " -#~ "enter\n" -#~ "the PIN in the AOL dial-up software. If not, call the AOL hot line and " -#~ "request\n" +#~ "the <b>@</b>) with your AOL login. Then enter your password and click <b>Next</b>.\n" +#~ "If you are a new AOL customer and want to dial up for the first time, you need\n" +#~ "to enter your AOL PIN number once. If you have a Windows system, you can enter\n" +#~ "the PIN in the AOL dial-up software. If not, call the AOL hot line and request\n" #~ "the AOL staff to enter the PIN number for you.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>在<b>「使用者名稱」</b>欄位中，以您的 AOL 登入取代\n" @@ -6487,8 +6309,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>In the <b>User Name</b> field, replace the blank space (after\n" -#~ "the <b>/</b>) with your 1&1 login. Then enter your password and click " -#~ "<b>Next</b>.\n" +#~ "the <b>/</b>) with your 1&1 login. Then enter your password and click <b>Next</b>.\n" #~ "Contact your provider if you have difficulties.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>在<b>「使用者名稱」</b>欄位中，使用 1&1 登入取代空格 (\n" @@ -6510,8 +6331,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>In the <b>User Name</b> field, replace the blank space (after\n" -#~ "the <b>/</b>) with your T-Online Business login. Then enter your password " -#~ "and\n" +#~ "the <b>/</b>) with your T-Online Business login. Then enter your password and\n" #~ "click <b>Next</b>. Contact your provider if you have difficulties.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>在<b>「使用者名稱」</b>欄位中，使用 T-Online Business 登入取代空格 (\n" @@ -6527,16 +6347,13 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b><big>Device Control</big></b></p>\n" #~ "<p>Usually, only the system administrator is allowed to activate and\n" -#~ "deactivate a network interface. With <b>Enable Device Control for Non-" -#~ "root User\n" -#~ "Via QInternet</b>, any user may control the interface via QInternet.This " -#~ "will require\n" +#~ "deactivate a network interface. With <b>Enable Device Control for Non-root User\n" +#~ "Via QInternet</b>, any user may control the interface via QInternet.This will require\n" #~ "<b>smpppd</b> installed and running.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b><big>裝置控制</big></b></p>\n" #~ "<p>通常只有系統管理員可以啟動及\n" -#~ "停用網路介面。 使用 <b>允許非 root 使用者經由 QInternet 進行裝置控制</b>" -#~ "時，\n" +#~ "停用網路介面。 使用 <b>允許非 root 使用者經由 QInternet 進行裝置控制</b>時，\n" #~ "一般使用者可透過 QInternet 來控制介面。這需要 \n" #~ "安裝與運行 <b>smpppd</b>。</p>\n" @@ -6747,19 +6564,11 @@ #~ msgid "Firewall Settings" #~ msgstr "防火牆設定" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Firewall will be enabled (disable</a>)" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "防火牆將被啟用 (停用)" +#~ msgid "Firewall will be enabled (disable</a>)" +#~ msgstr "防火牆將被啟用 (停用</a>)" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Firewall will be disabled (enable</a>)" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "防火牆將被停用 (啟用)" +#~ msgid "Firewall will be disabled (enable</a>)" +#~ msgstr "防火牆將被停用 (啟用</a>)" #~ msgid "Password:" #~ msgstr "密碼：" @@ -6894,10 +6703,8 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>Configure your Internet proxy (caching) settings here.</p>\n" -#~ "<p><b>Note:</b> It is generally recommended to relogin for the settings " -#~ "to take effect, \n" -#~ "however in some cases the application may pick up new settings " -#~ "immediately. Please check \n" +#~ "<p><b>Note:</b> It is generally recommended to relogin for the settings to take effect, \n" +#~ "however in some cases the application may pick up new settings immediately. Please check \n" #~ "what your application (web browser, ftp client,...) supports. </p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>在此組態您的網際網路代理(快取)設定。</p>\n" @@ -6913,8 +6720,7 @@ #~ "全球資訊網 (WWW)。</p>\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>HTTPS Proxy URL</b> is the name of the proxy server for your " -#~ "secured access\n" +#~ "<p><b>HTTPS Proxy URL</b> is the name of the proxy server for your secured access\n" #~ "to the World Wide Web (WWW).</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>HTTPS 代理 URL</b> 是代理伺服器的名稱，用來安全地存取\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/nfs.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/nfs.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/nfs.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: nfs\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-31 09:06+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -169,8 +169,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>Each NFS share is identified by remote NFS server address and\n" "exported directory, local directory where the remote directory is mounted, \n" -"NFS type (either plain nfs or nfsv4) and mount options. For further " -"information \n" +"NFS type (either plain nfs or nfsv4) and mount options. For further information \n" "about mounting NFS and mount options, refer to <tt>man nfs.</tt></p>" msgstr "" "<p>每一個NFS資源分享是透過遠端NFS伺服器主機位址和\n" @@ -181,8 +180,7 @@ #. Help, part 3 of 3 #: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:68 msgid "" -"<p>To mount a new NFS share, click <B>Add</B>. To change the configuration " -"of\n" +"<p>To mount a new NFS share, click <B>Add</B>. To change the configuration of\n" "a currently mounted share, click <B>Edit</B>. Remove and unmount a selected\n" "share with <B>Delete</B>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -193,15 +191,12 @@ #: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:76 msgid "" "<p>If you need to access NFSv4 shares (NFSv4 is a newer version of the NFS\n" -"protocol), check the <b>Enable NFSv4</b> option. In that case, you might " -"need\n" -"to supply specific a <b>NFSv4 Domain Name</b> required for the correct " -"setting\n" +"protocol), check the <b>Enable NFSv4</b> option. In that case, you might need\n" +"to supply specific a <b>NFSv4 Domain Name</b> required for the correct setting\n" "of file/directory access rights.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>如果你欲存取NFSv4分享資源(NFSv4 是一個新的\n" -"NFS 協定版本), 請檢查 <b>啟用 NFSv4</b> 選項是否開啟. 在這個情況下, 你可能必" -"須要提供\n" +"NFS 協定版本), 請檢查 <b>啟用 NFSv4</b> 選項是否開啟. 在這個情況下, 你可能必須要提供\n" "具體的 <b>NFSv4 領域名稱 </b>, 需要正確的設定/目錄的存取\n" "權限.</p>\n" @@ -329,8 +324,7 @@ #: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:455 msgid "" "<p>\t\t\n" -"For <b>Mount Point</b>, enter the path in the local file system where the " -"directory should be mounted. With\n" +"For <b>Mount Point</b>, enter the path in the local file system where the directory should be mounted. With\n" "<b>Browse</b>, select your mount point\n" "interactively.</p>" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/nfs_server.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/nfs_server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/nfs_server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: nfs_server\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-31 09:22+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -65,9 +65,7 @@ #: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:113 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Domain specification for NFSv4 ID mapping, such as 'localdomain' or 'abc." -"com' etc." +msgid "Domain specification for NFSv4 ID mapping, such as 'localdomain' or 'abc.com' etc." msgstr "NFSv4 Idmapping 的指定領域，像是 'localdomain' 或 'abc.com' 等。" #: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:119 @@ -111,17 +109,12 @@ #. @param [Hash] options command options #. @return whether successful #: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:319 -msgid "" -"Domain cannot be set without enabling NFSv4. Use the 'set enablev4' command." +msgid "Domain cannot be set without enabling NFSv4. Use the 'set enablev4' command." msgstr "未啟用 NFSv4 無法設定領域。請使用 'set enablev4' 指令。" #: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:330 -msgid "" -"Command 'set' must be used in the form 'set option=value'. Use 'set help' to " -"get information about available options." -msgstr "" -"指令 'set' 必須使用 'set 選項=值' 的格式。 請使用 'set help' 取得關於選項的資" -"訊。" +msgid "Command 'set' must be used in the form 'set option=value'. Use 'set help' to get information about available options." +msgstr "指令 'set' 必須使用 'set 選項=值' 的格式。 請使用 'set help' 取得關於選項的資訊。" #. Then no need to check for conflict. #: src/include/nfs_server/routines.rb:205 @@ -242,9 +235,7 @@ #. Opening NFS server dialog #. @return `back, `abort, `next `or finish #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:272 -msgid "" -"Unable to read the /etc/idmapd.conf file. Setting the default setting for " -"the domain to 'localdomain'." +msgid "Unable to read the /etc/idmapd.conf file. Setting the default setting for the domain to 'localdomain'." msgstr "無法讀取 /etc/idmapd.conf 檔案。 將領域預設回「localdomain」。" #. Help, part 1 of 2 @@ -268,10 +259,8 @@ #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:311 msgid "" "<P>If the server needs to handle NFSv4 clients, check <B>Enable NFSv4</B>\n" -"and fill in the NFSv4 domain name you want the ID mapping daemon to use. " -"Leave\n" -"it as localdomain or refer to the man page for idmapd and idmapd.conf if you " -"are not sure.</P>\n" +"and fill in the NFSv4 domain name you want the ID mapping daemon to use. Leave\n" +"it as localdomain or refer to the man page for idmapd and idmapd.conf if you are not sure.</P>\n" msgstr "" "<P>如果伺服器必須處理 NFSv4 用戶端，請啟用<B>「啟用 NFSv4」</B>選項，\n" "並在文字項目中填入 NFSv4 領域名稱，讓 id 映射精靈使用。 請保留\n" @@ -281,13 +270,10 @@ #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:321 msgid "" "<P>If the server and client must authenticate using GSS library, check the\n" -"<B>Enable GSS Security</B> box. To use GSS API, you currently need to have " -"Kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils > 1.0.7) on your system.</P>\n" +"<B>Enable GSS Security</B> box. To use GSS API, you currently need to have Kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils > 1.0.7) on your system.</P>\n" msgstr "" -"<P>如果伺服器與用戶端必須使用 GSS 函式庫進行驗證，請啟用<B>「啟用 GSS 安全" -"性」</B>\n" -"的核取方塊。 如果要能使用 GSS API，系統上目前必須有 kerberos 與 gssapi (nfs-" -"utils > 1.0.7)。</P>\n" +"<P>如果伺服器與用戶端必須使用 GSS 函式庫進行驗證，請啟用<B>「啟用 GSS 安全性」</B>\n" +"的核取方塊。 如果要能使用 GSS API，系統上目前必須有 kerberos 與 gssapi (nfs-utils > 1.0.7)。</P>\n" #. frame label #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:331 @@ -340,8 +326,7 @@ #. Help, part 2 of 4 #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:495 msgid "" -"<P><b>Host Wild Card</b> sets which hosts can access the selected " -"directory.\n" +"<P><b>Host Wild Card</b> sets which hosts can access the selected directory.\n" "It can be a single host, groups, wild cards, or\n" "IP networks.</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -351,8 +336,7 @@ #. Help, part 3 of 4 #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:503 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter an asterisk (<tt>*</tt>) instead of a name to specify all hosts.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter an asterisk (<tt>*</tt>) instead of a name to specify all hosts.</p>" msgstr "<p>請輸入星號 (<tt>*</tt>) 取代名稱以指定所有主機。</p>" #. Help, part 4 of 4 @@ -467,11 +451,8 @@ #. FIXME svcgssd is gone! (only nfsserver is left) #: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:266 -msgid "" -"Unable to start svcgssd. Ensure your kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils) setup " -"is correct." -msgstr "" -"無法啟動 svcgssd。 請確定您的 kerberos 與 gssapi (nfs-utils) 設定無誤。" +msgid "Unable to start svcgssd. Ensure your kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils) setup is correct." +msgstr "無法啟動 svcgssd。 請確定您的 kerberos 與 gssapi (nfs-utils) 設定無誤。" #: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:275 #, fuzzy @@ -534,17 +515,12 @@ #~ msgid "Firewall" #~ msgstr "防火牆" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>NFSv4 is enabled. Make sure that only one exported filesystem is " -#~ "marked with the fsid=0 option for a particular client.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>前一頁已經啟用 NFSv4 選項。 請確定特定用戶端只有一個匯出的檔案系統標示" -#~ "了 fsid=0 選項。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>NFSv4 is enabled. Make sure that only one exported filesystem is marked with the fsid=0 option for a particular client.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>前一頁已經啟用 NFSv4 選項。 請確定特定用戶端只有一個匯出的檔案系統標示了 fsid=0 選項。</p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>In case of multiple exports to a NFSv4 client,\n" -#~ "you need to bind the exported paths with no fsid=0 to the one with " -#~ "fsid=0.\n" +#~ "you need to bind the exported paths with no fsid=0 to the one with fsid=0.\n" #~ "To export the server paths <tt>/Eve</tt> and <tt>/Adam</tt> as\n" #~ "<tt>/</tt> and <tt>/husband</tt>, respectively, use<br />\n" #~ "<pre>/Eve 10.0.0.1(fsid=0,crossmnt,ro,...)\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/nis.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/nis.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/nis.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: nis\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:56+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-31 09:15+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/nis_server.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/nis_server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/nis_server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: nis_server\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2009-09-04 11:19+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: \n" @@ -165,8 +165,7 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/nis_server/details.rb:73 msgid "" -"<p>Select if your <i>passwd</i> file should be merged with the <i>shadow\n" +"<p>Select if your <i>passwd</i> file should be merged with the <i>shadow</i>\n" "file (only possible if the <i>shadow</i> file exists).</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>選擇是否您的 <i>passwd</i> 檔應該與 <i>shadow</i>\n" @@ -223,12 +222,10 @@ #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/nis_server/master.rb:71 msgid "" -"<p>Enter a NIS <b>domain</b>. If this host is also a NIS client using this " -"machine as a server, check\n" +"<p>Enter a NIS <b>domain</b>. If this host is also a NIS client using this machine as a server, check\n" "the corresponding option.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>輸入 NIS <b>領域</b>。如果此主機也是使用此機器為伺服器的 NIS 用戶端，請選" -"取\n" +"<p>輸入 NIS <b>領域</b>。如果此主機也是使用此機器為伺服器的 NIS 用戶端，請選取\n" "對應選項。</p>\n" #. help text 2/3 @@ -325,8 +322,7 @@ "<p><b>Firewall Settings</b><br>\n" "To open the firewall to allow accessing the NIS server\n" "from remote computers, set <b>Open Port in Firewall</b>.\n" -"To select interfaces on which to open the port, click <b>Firewall Details.\n" +"To select interfaces on which to open the port, click <b>Firewall Details</b>.\n" "This option is only available if the firewall is enabled.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>防火牆設定</b><br>\n" @@ -409,18 +405,12 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/nis_server/slave.rb:62 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the NIS <b>domain</b> and the IP <b>address</b> or host name of the " -"master NIS server.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>輸入主 NIS 伺服器的 NIS<b>「領域」</b>和 IP<b>「位址」</b> 或主機名稱。" +msgid "<p>Enter the NIS <b>domain</b> and the IP <b>address</b> or host name of the master NIS server.</p>" +msgstr "<p>輸入主 NIS 伺服器的 NIS<b>「領域」</b>和 IP<b>「位址」</b> 或主機名稱。</p>" #. help text 2/2 #: src/include/nis_server/slave.rb:69 -msgid "" -"<p>If this host is also a NIS client using this machine as a server, check " -"the corresponding option.</p>" +msgid "<p>If this host is also a NIS client using this machine as a server, check the corresponding option.</p>" msgstr "<p>如果此主機也是使用此機器為伺服器的 NIS 用戶端，請選取對應選項。</p>" #. textentry label @@ -462,13 +452,8 @@ #. help text 1/1 #: src/include/nis_server/slaves.rb:175 -msgid "" -"<p>Here, enter the names of hosts to configure as NIS server slaves. Use " -"<i>Add</i> to add a new one, <i>Edit</i> to change an existing entry, and " -"<i>Delete</i> to remove an entry.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>在此處輸入要設定為 NIS 從屬伺服器的主機名稱。使用<i>「新增」</i>新增項目、" -"使用<i>「編輯」</i>變更現有的項目，以及使用<i>「刪除」</i>移除項目。</p>" +msgid "<p>Here, enter the names of hosts to configure as NIS server slaves. Use <i>Add</i> to add a new one, <i>Edit</i> to change an existing entry, and <i>Delete</i> to remove an entry.</p>" +msgstr "<p>在此處輸入要設定為 NIS 從屬伺服器的主機名稱。使用<i>「新增」</i>新增項目、使用<i>「編輯」</i>變更現有的項目，以及使用<i>「刪除」</i>移除項目。</p>" #. To translators: selection box label #: src/include/nis_server/slaves.rb:195 src/include/nis_server/slaves.rb:234 Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ntp-client.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ntp-client.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/ntp-client.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: ntp-client\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-09-03 16:51+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-31 09:28+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -27,37 +27,21 @@ #. help text #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:92 -msgid "" -"<p>Press <b>Synchronize Now</b>, to get your system time set correctly using " -"the selected NTP server. If you want to make use of NTP permanently, enable " -"the <b>Save NTP Configuration</b> option</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>按 <b>立刻同步</b>，使用選定的 NTP 伺服器來校正您的系統時間。如果您要持續" -"使用 NTP ，啟用 <b>儲存 NTP 設定</b>。</p>" +msgid "<p>Press <b>Synchronize Now</b>, to get your system time set correctly using the selected NTP server. If you want to make use of NTP permanently, enable the <b>Save NTP Configuration</b> option</p>" +msgstr "<p>按 <b>立刻同步</b>，使用選定的 NTP 伺服器來校正您的系統時間。如果您要持續使用 NTP ，啟用 <b>儲存 NTP 設定</b>。</p>" #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:98 -msgid "" -"<p>Enabling <b>Run NTP as daemon</b> option, the NTP service will be started " -"as daemon. Otherwise the system time will be synchronized periodically. The " -"default interval is 15 min. You can change it after installation with the " -"<b>yast2 ntp-client module</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>啟用 <b>執行 NTP 精靈</b> 選項， NTP 服務將自動啟動為精靈。否則系統時間將" -"週期性的同步。 預設時間間隔為 15 分鐘。在安裝 <b>yast2 ntp-client</b> 模組" -"後，您可以變更此選項。</p>" +msgid "<p>Enabling <b>Run NTP as daemon</b> option, the NTP service will be started as daemon. Otherwise the system time will be synchronized periodically. The default interval is 15 min. You can change it after installation with the <b>yast2 ntp-client module</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>啟用 <b>執行 NTP 精靈</b> 選項， NTP 服務將自動啟動為精靈。否則系統時間將週期性的同步。 預設時間間隔為 15 分鐘。在安裝 <b>yast2 ntp-client</b> 模組後，您可以變更此選項。</p>" #. help text, cont. #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:107 -msgid "" -"<p>Using the <b>Configure</b> button, open the advanced NTP configuration." +msgid "<p>Using the <b>Configure</b> button, open the advanced NTP configuration.</p>" msgstr "<p>使用 <b>設定</b> 按鈕，開啟進階 NTP 設定。</p>" #. help text, cont. #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:116 -msgid "" -"<p>Synchronization with the NTP server can be done only when the network is " -"configured.</p>" +msgid "<p>Synchronization with the NTP server can be done only when the network is configured.</p>" msgstr "<p>與 NTP 伺服器同步只有在網路已設定的情況才能進行。</p>" #. translators: error popup @@ -66,21 +50,20 @@ msgstr "無效的 NTP 伺服器主機名稱 %1" #. combo box label -#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:239 +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:240 msgid "&NTP Server Address" msgstr "NTP 伺服器位址(&N)" #. check box label -#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:249 +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:250 msgid "&Run NTP as daemon" msgstr "背景執行 NTP 精靈(&R)" #. check box label -#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:258 +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:259 msgid "&Save NTP Configuration" msgstr "儲存 NTP 組態(&S)" -#. try to line up the widgets horizontally #. push button label #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:269 msgid "S&ynchronize now" @@ -93,7 +76,7 @@ msgstr "設定組態(&C)..." #. Otherwise, prompt user for confirming pkg installation -#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:388 +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:386 #, fuzzy msgid "" "Synchronization with NTP server is not possible\n" @@ -103,20 +86,27 @@ "無法與 NTP 伺服器同步。\n" #. Only if network is running try to synchronize the ntp server -#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:399 +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:398 msgid "Synchronizing with NTP server..." msgstr "正在與 NTP 伺服器同步..." +#. update time widgets +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:443 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Connection to the LDAP server cannot be established." +msgid "Connection to selected NTP server failed." +msgstr "無法建立與 LDAP 伺服器的連接。" + #. Translators: yes-no popup, #. ntpdate is a command, %1 is the server address -#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:481 +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:474 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "'Test query to server '%1' failed. If server is not yet accessible or network is not configured click 'No' to ignore. Revisit NTP server configuration?" msgid "" -"'Test query to server '%1' failed. If server is not yet accessible or " -"network is not configured click 'No' to ignore. Revisit NTP server " -"configuration?" -msgstr "" -"'測試查詢伺服器 '%1' 失敗。如果伺服器上不可存取或網路尚未設定，請按 '否' 來忽" -"略。重新造訪 NTP 伺服器設定嗎？" +"Test query to server '%1' failed.\n" +"If server is not yet accessible or network is not configured\n" +"click 'No' to ignore. Revisit NTP server configuration?" +msgstr "'測試查詢伺服器 '%1' 失敗。如果伺服器上不可存取或網路尚未設定，請按 '否' 來忽略。重新造訪 NTP 伺服器設定嗎？" #. local clock type name #: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:17 @@ -627,10 +617,8 @@ "Select whether to start the NTP daemon now and on every system boot. \n" "The NTP daemon resolves host names when initializing. Your\n" "network connection must be started before the NTP daemon starts.</p>\n" -"Selecting <b>Synchronize without Daemon</b> the ntp daemon will not be " -"activated. \n" -"The system time will be set periodically. The interval is configurable. It " -"is 15 minutes by default.\n" +"Selecting <b>Synchronize without Daemon</b> the ntp daemon will not be activated. \n" +"The system time will be set periodically. The interval is configurable. It is 15 minutes by default.\n" " You can change this when the system was set up." msgstr "" "<p><b><big>自動啟動 NTP 精靈</big></b><br>\n" @@ -654,20 +642,14 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:51 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Secure NTP Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"By selecting <b>Restrict NTP Service to Configured Servers Only</b>, remote " -"hosts will not be able to view and modify NTP settings on your \n" -"computer. The NTP service is restricted to servers in the <tt>/etc/ntp.conf file and to localhost.<br> \n" -"Access control flags can be fine-tuded in the servers overview table. This " -"option is not available if NTP is configured via DHCP.</p>\n" +"By selecting <b>Restrict NTP Service to Configured Servers Only</b>, remote hosts will not be able to view and modify NTP settings on your \n" +"computer. The NTP service is restricted to servers in the <tt>/etc/ntp.conf</tt> file and to localhost.<br> \n" +"Access control flags can be fine-tuded in the servers overview table. This option is not available if NTP is configured via DHCP.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>安全 NTP 組態</big></b><br>\n" -"選擇 <b>限制 NTP 服務到已設定的伺服器</b>，遠端主機將無法檢視或修改在您電腦上" -"的 \n" -"NTP 設定。NTP 服務被限制在<tt>/etc/ntp.conf</tt> 檔案中的伺服器和本機。" -"<br> \n" -"存取控制旗標可以在伺服器概觀表格中微調。如果 NTP 是 經由 DHCP 設定，此選項不" -"可用。</p>\n" +"選擇 <b>限制 NTP 服務到已設定的伺服器</b>，遠端主機將無法檢視或修改在您電腦上的 \n" +"NTP 設定。NTP 服務被限制在<tt>/etc/ntp.conf</tt> 檔案中的伺服器和本機。<br> \n" +"存取控制旗標可以在伺服器概觀表格中微調。如果 NTP 是 經由 DHCP 設定，此選項不可用。</p>\n" #. help text 3/5 #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:58 @@ -689,8 +671,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Configured Servers</big></b><br>\n" "To adjust NTP servers, peers, local clocks, and NTP broadcasting,\n" -"select the appropriate line and click <b>Edit</b>. To add a new " -"synchronization\n" +"select the appropriate line and click <b>Edit</b>. To add a new synchronization\n" "peer, click <b>Add</b>. To delete an existing synchronization peer,\n" "select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -713,8 +694,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:78 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Advanced configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"To configure this host to synchronize against multiple remote hosts or " -"against\n" +"To configure this host to synchronize against multiple remote hosts or against\n" "a locally connected clock, use <b>Advanced Configuration</b>." msgstr "" "<p><b><big>進階組態</big></b><br>\n" @@ -745,8 +725,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:94 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Device</big></b><br>\n" -"To make the clock work, it may be necessary to create a special symbolic " -"link to \n" +"To make the clock work, it may be necessary to create a special symbolic link to \n" "the device to which the clock is connected. To do this, check\n" "<b>Create Symlink</b> and set the <b>Device</b>. To browse for the device,\n" "click <b>Browse</b>.\n" @@ -845,8 +824,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:148 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Options</big></b><br>\n" -"To fine-tune the synchronization source, enter the respective options in " -"the\n" +"To fine-tune the synchronization source, enter the respective options in the\n" "<b>Options</b> text field. For details, see\n" "<i>/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/confopt.htm</i>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -859,8 +837,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Access Control Options</big></b><br>\n" "Define the access control flags (<b><tt>restrict</tt></b> directive in\n" -"<i>/etc/ntp.conf</i>) for this server, indicating which types of actions the " -"remote\n" +"<i>/etc/ntp.conf</i>) for this server, indicating which types of actions the remote\n" "host can perform on your NTP daemon. By default, it is set to <i>notrap\n" "nomodify noquery</i>. This option is only available if you have checked the\n" "<b>Restrict NTP Service to Configured Servers Only</b> option in\n" @@ -958,8 +935,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:202 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Selecting a Public NTP Server</b></big><br>\n" -"Select the NTP server to use from the <b>Public NTP Servers</b> list. To " -"display\n" +"Select the NTP server to use from the <b>Public NTP Servers</b> list. To display\n" "NTP servers only for a particular country, select it in <b>Country</b>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>選取公用 NTP 伺服器</b></big><br>\n" @@ -1002,10 +978,8 @@ msgid "" "<p><big><b>Use Random Servers</b></big><br>\n" "This service is offered by pool.ntp.org. If you select this option,\n" -"three different servers are added to the configuration. The server names " -"are\n" -"permanent, but they change their DNS records (IPs) every hour. This means " -"that\n" +"three different servers are added to the configuration. The server names are\n" +"permanent, but they change their DNS records (IPs) every hour. This means that\n" "your NTP client is synchronized with different servers every hour.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>使用隨機伺服器</b></big><br>\n" @@ -1018,10 +992,8 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:238 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Clock Driver Calibration</b></big><br>\n" -"The clock driver may need to be calibrated. In this dialog, various " -"calibration\n" -"options can be set. The meaning of particular options depends on the " -"particular\n" +"The clock driver may need to be calibrated. In this dialog, various calibration\n" +"options can be set. The meaning of particular options depends on the particular\n" "driver. Some drivers do not use all the options.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>時鐘驅動程式校正</b></big><br>\n" @@ -1033,12 +1005,10 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:245 msgid "" "To learn more about available options, install the package\n" -"<i>ntp-doc</i> and see <i>/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/html/refclock.htm.</p>\n" +"<i>ntp-doc</i> and see <i>/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/html/refclock.htm</i>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "如需選項意義的詳細資訊，請安裝套件\n" -"<i>ntp-doc</i> 並參閱 <i>/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/html/refclock.htm。</p>\n" +"<i>ntp-doc</i> 並參閱 <i>/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/html/refclock.htm</i>。</p>\n" #. yes-no popup #: src/include/ntp-client/misc.rb:35 @@ -1383,117 +1353,120 @@ msgstr "正在讀取 NTP 設定..." #. progress step -#. error report +#. While calling "yast clone_system" it is possible that +#. the ntp server has not already been installed at that time. +#. (This would be done if yast2-ntp-client will be called in the UI) +#. In that case the error popup will not be shown. (bnc#889557) #. progress step -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:502 src/modules/NtpClient.rb:594 -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:755 src/modules/NtpClient.rb:906 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:502 src/modules/NtpClient.rb:597 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:758 src/modules/NtpClient.rb:909 msgid "Finished" msgstr "已完成" #. boolean update_dhcp = original_config_dhcp != config_dhcp; #. NtpClient read dialog caption -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:728 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:731 msgid "Saving NTP Client Configuration" msgstr "正在儲存 NTP 用戶端組態" #. progress stage -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:745 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:748 msgid "Write NTP settings" msgstr "寫入 NTP 設定" #. progress stage -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:747 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:750 msgid "Restart NTP daemon" msgstr "重新啟動 NTP 精靈" #. progress step -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:751 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:754 msgid "Writing the settings..." msgstr "正在寫入設定..." #. progress step -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:753 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:756 msgid "Restarting NTP daemon..." msgstr "正在重新啟動 NTP 精靈..." #. error message -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:838 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:841 msgid "Cannot update the dynamic configuration policy." msgstr "無法更新動態組態政策。" #. error report -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:876 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:879 msgid "Cannot restart the NTP daemon." msgstr "無法重新啟動 NTP 精靈。" #. summary string -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:970 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:973 msgid "The NTP daemon starts when starting the system." msgstr "啟動系統時會啟動 NTP 精靈。" #. summary string -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:976 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:979 msgid "The NTP daemon does not start automatically." msgstr "不會自動啟動 NTP 精靈。" #. summary string, %1 is list of addresses -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:982 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:985 msgid "Servers: %1" msgstr "伺服器： %1" #. summary string, %1 is list of addresses -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:986 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:989 msgid "Radio Clocks: %1" msgstr "無線電時鐘： %1" #. summary string, %1 is list of addresses -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:990 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:993 msgid "Peers: %1" msgstr "對等： %1" #. summary string, %1 is list of addresses -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:994 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:997 msgid "Broadcast time information to: %1" msgstr "廣播時間資訊的目標：%1" #. summary string, %1 is list of addresses -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:998 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1001 msgid "Accept broadcasted time information from: %1" msgstr "接受廣播時間資訊的來源：%1" #. summary string, FIXME -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1014 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1017 msgid "Combine static and DHCP configuration." msgstr "結合靜態與 DHCP 組態" #. summary string, FIXME -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1018 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1021 msgid "Static configuration only." msgstr "僅靜態組態。" #. summary string, FIXME -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1021 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1024 msgid "Custom configuration policy." msgstr "自訂組態政策。" #. An informative popup label diring the NTP server testings -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1054 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1057 msgid "Testing the NTP server..." msgstr "正在測試 NTP 伺服器..." #. message report - result of test of connection to NTP server -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1084 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1087 msgid "Server is reachable and responds properly." msgstr "可連接伺服器且伺服器正確回應。" #. error message - result of test of connection to NTP server #. report error instead of simple message (#306018) -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1088 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1091 msgid "Server is unreachable or does not respond properly." msgstr "無法連接伺服器或伺服器沒有正確回應。" #. if package is not installed (in the inst-sys, it is: bnc#399659) -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1106 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1109 msgid "" "Cannot search for NTP server in local network\n" "without package %1 installed.\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/oneclickinstall.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/oneclickinstall.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/oneclickinstall.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: oneclickinstall\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-22 14:20+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -39,9 +39,7 @@ msgstr "要放入含 YMP 內容的檔案" #: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:44 -msgid "" -"File containing internal representation of <b>One Click Install</b> " -"instructions" +msgid "File containing internal representation of <b>One Click Install</b> instructions" msgstr "包含 <b>單鍵安裝</b> 指引內容的檔案" #: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:65 @@ -124,8 +122,7 @@ msgstr "此精靈將安裝軟體在您的電腦上。" #: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:47 -msgid "" -"See <tt>http://en.opensuse.org/One_Click_Install</tt> for more information." +msgid "See <tt>http://en.opensuse.org/One_Click_Install</tt> for more information." msgstr "請參閱 http://en.opensuse.org/One_Click_Install 獲取進一步的資訊。" #. <region name="Define the UI components"> * @@ -199,41 +196,28 @@ msgstr "安裝步驟" #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:56 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while attempting to subscribe to the required " -"repositories. Review the yast2 logs for more information." +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to subscribe to the required repositories. Review the yast2 logs for more information." msgstr "嘗試訂閱所需的套件庫發生錯誤。請再看看 yast2 的記錄以得到更多訊息。" #. Remove any removals #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:96 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while attempting to remove the specified packages. Review " -"the yast2 logs for more information." +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to remove the specified packages. Review the yast2 logs for more information." msgstr "嘗試移除特定套件時發生錯誤。請再看看 yast2 的記錄以得到更多訊息。" #. if that was successful now try and install the patterns #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:113 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while attempting to install the specified patterns. Review " -"the yast2 logs for more information." +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to install the specified patterns. Review the yast2 logs for more information." msgstr "嘗試安裝特定樣式時發生錯誤。請再看看 yast2 的記錄以得到更多訊息。" #. if that was successful now try and install the packages #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:129 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while attempting to install the specified packages. Review " -"the yast2 logs for more information." +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to install the specified packages. Review the yast2 logs for more information." msgstr "嘗試安裝特定套件時發生錯誤。請再看看 yast2 的記錄以得到更多訊息。" #. If we don't want to remain subscribed, remove the repositories that were added for installation. #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:148 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while attempting to unsubscribe from the repositories that " -"were used to perform the installation. You can remove them manually in YaST " -"> Software Repositories. Review the yast2 logs for more information." -msgstr "" -"嘗試取消訂閱安裝時所用的套件庫時發生錯誤。您可以自行在 YaST > 軟體套件庫中移" -"除。請再看看 yast2 的記錄以得到更多訊息。" +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to unsubscribe from the repositories that were used to perform the installation. You can remove them manually in YaST > Software Repositories. Review the yast2 logs for more information." +msgstr "嘗試取消訂閱安裝時所用的套件庫時發生錯誤。您可以自行在 YaST > 軟體套件庫中移除。請再看看 yast2 的記錄以得到更多訊息。" #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:159 msgid "No error occurred." @@ -270,8 +254,7 @@ #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:71 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"The install link or file you opened does not contain instructions for %s." +msgid "The install link or file you opened does not contain instructions for %s." msgstr "您開啟的安裝連結/檔案未包含這個版本的 openSUSE 的指引。" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:81 @@ -301,9 +284,7 @@ msgstr "不要再問我這個問題" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:348 -msgid "" -"These repositories will only be added during installation. You will not " -"remain subscribed." +msgid "These repositories will only be added during installation. You will not remain subscribed." msgstr "這些套件庫只在安裝期間被加入，您不會繼續訂閱。" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:352 @@ -352,12 +333,8 @@ msgstr "安裝僅部份成功。" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:507 -msgid "" -"The installation has failed. For more information, see the log file at <tt>/" -"var/log/YaST2/y2log</tt>. Failure stage was: " -msgstr "" -"安裝失敗。請查看在 <tt>/var/log/YaST2/y2log</tt>的紀錄檔以獲得更多資訊。失敗" -"的步驟為：" +msgid "The installation has failed. For more information, see the log file at <tt>/var/log/YaST2/y2log</tt>. Failure stage was: " +msgstr "安裝失敗。請查看在 <tt>/var/log/YaST2/y2log</tt>的紀錄檔以獲得更多資訊。失敗的步驟為：" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:515 msgid "Error Message" @@ -424,9 +401,7 @@ msgstr "不明的" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerResponse.rb:13 -msgid "" -"Root privileges are required. Either they were not supplied, or an unknown " -"error occurred." +msgid "Root privileges are required. Either they were not supplied, or an unknown error occurred." msgstr "需要管理者 (root) 權限，可能是它未被提供或發生未知錯誤。" #~ msgid "Please wait while this software is being installed." Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/online-update-configuration.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/online-update-configuration.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/online-update-configuration.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:56+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-01-16 09:33+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/online-update.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/online-update.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/online-update.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: online-update\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-31 09:28+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -67,13 +67,8 @@ #. help text for online-update initialization #: src/clients/online_update.rb:130 -msgid "" -"<p>The system is initializing the installation and update repositories. " -"Software repositories can be altered in the <b>Installation Source</b> " -"module.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>系統正在啟始化安裝和更新套件庫。 您可以在<b>安裝來源</b>模組中變更軟體套件" -"庫。</p>" +msgid "<p>The system is initializing the installation and update repositories. Software repositories can be altered in the <b>Installation Source</b> module.</p>" +msgstr "<p>系統正在啟始化安裝和更新套件庫。 您可以在<b>安裝來源</b>模組中變更軟體套件庫。</p>" #. progress stage label #: src/clients/online_update.rb:137 @@ -167,9 +162,7 @@ #. help text for online update #: src/clients/online_update_install.rb:73 -msgid "" -"<p>If special messages associated with patches are available, they will be " -"shown in an extra dialog when the patch is installed.</p>\n" +msgid "<p>If special messages associated with patches are available, they will be shown in an extra dialog when the patch is installed.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>若出現與修補程式相關的特殊訊息，則於安裝修補程式後，\n" "這些訊息會顯示在額外的對話方塊中。</p>\n" @@ -286,8 +279,7 @@ #. continue/cancel popup text #: src/modules/OnlineUpdate.rb:76 msgid "" -"There are patches for package management available that require a restart of " -"YaST.\n" +"There are patches for package management available that require a restart of YaST.\n" "They should be installed first and all other patches after the restart.\n" "\n" "You selected some other patches to be installed now.\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/opensuse_mirror.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/opensuse_mirror.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/opensuse_mirror.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" "Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" "Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ #. you may find current contact information at www.suse.com #: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:119 msgid "Directory" -msgstr "" +msgstr "目錄" #: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:119 msgid "Mirrored" @@ -40,11 +40,11 @@ #: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:129 msgid "yes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "是" #: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:129 msgid "no" -msgstr "" +msgstr "否" #: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:139 msgid "&Exit" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/packager.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/packager.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/packager.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: packager\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-08-15 15:57+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-22 11:32+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_kickoff.rb:490 src/clients/inst_kickoff.rb:573 #: src/clients/inst_kickoff.rb:649 src/clients/inst_kickoff.rb:706 msgid "Backup of %1 failed. See %2 for details." -msgstr "" +msgstr "備份 %1 失敗。請參閱 %2 以取得詳細資訊。" #. dialog heading #: src/clients/inst_mediacopy.rb:49 @@ -390,16 +390,12 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help 2/3 (version for installation) #: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1266 -msgid "" -"<p>Select the online repositories you want to use then click <b>Next</b>.\n" +msgid "<p>Select the online repositories you want to use then click <b>Next</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "請選取您要用的線上套件庫，然後按<b>「下一步」</b>。</p>\n" #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help 2/3 (version for running system) #: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1270 -msgid "" -"<p>Select the online repositories you want to use then click <b>Finish</b>.\n" +msgid "<p>Select the online repositories you want to use then click <b>Finish</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "<p>選擇您想要使用線上套件庫，然後按 <b>結束</b>。</p>\n" #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help 3/3 @@ -501,9 +497,7 @@ #. Solve dependencies #: src/clients/inst_rpmcopy.rb:368 -msgid "" -"The package resolver run failed. Check your software section in the AutoYaST " -"profile." +msgid "The package resolver run failed. Check your software section in the AutoYaST profile." msgstr "套件解析器執行失敗。 請檢查您在 AutoYaST 設定檔中的軟體區段。" #. error message - displayed in a scrollable text area @@ -528,7 +522,7 @@ #. dialog caption #. dialog caption #: src/clients/key_manager.rb:70 src/clients/repositories.rb:1809 -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:668 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:683 msgid "Initializing..." msgstr "正在啟始化..." @@ -568,9 +562,7 @@ #. Command line help text for the repository module, %1 is "zypper" #: src/clients/repositories.rb:72 -msgid "" -"Installation Repositories - This module does not support the command line " -"interface, use '%1' instead." +msgid "Installation Repositories - This module does not support the command line interface, use '%1' instead." msgstr "安裝套件庫 - 此模組不支援指令行介面，請改用 '%1'代替。" #. pad to 3 characters @@ -593,7 +585,7 @@ #. label to be used instead of URL if not found #: src/clients/repositories.rb:328 src/clients/repositories.rb:361 -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1308 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1325 msgid "URL: %1" msgstr "URL： %1" @@ -737,23 +729,15 @@ "在此對話中，管理已設定的軟體套件庫與服務。</p>\n" #: src/clients/repositories.rb:880 -msgid "" -"<P>A <B>service</B> or <B>Repository Index Service (RIS) </B> is a protocol " -"for package repository management. A service can offer one or more software " -"repositories which can be dynamically changed by the service administrator." -msgstr "" -"<P><B>服務</B> 或 <B>套件庫索引服務 (RIS) </B> 是一個套件庫管理協定。服務可以" -"提供一個或多個軟體套件庫，他可以由服務管理員動態變更。</P>" +msgid "<P>A <B>service</B> or <B>Repository Index Service (RIS) </B> is a protocol for package repository management. A service can offer one or more software repositories which can be dynamically changed by the service administrator.</P>" +msgstr "<P><B>服務</B> 或 <B>套件庫索引服務 (RIS) </B> 是一個套件庫管理協定。服務可以提供一個或多個軟體套件庫，他可以由服務管理員動態變更。</P>" #: src/clients/repositories.rb:887 msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b>Adding a new Repository or a Service</b><br>\n" -"To add a new repository, use <b>Add</b> and specify the software repository " -"or service.\n" -"YaST will automatically detect whether a service or a repository is " -"available at the entered location.\n" +"To add a new repository, use <b>Add</b> and specify the software repository or service.\n" +"YaST will automatically detect whether a service or a repository is available at the entered location.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -801,11 +785,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b>Modifying Status of a Repository or a Service</b><br>\n" -"To change a repository location, use <b>Edit</b>. To remove a repository, " -"use\n" -"<b>Delete</b>. To enable or disable the repository or to change the refresh " -"status at initialization time, select the repository in the table and use " -"the check boxes below.\n" +"To change a repository location, use <b>Edit</b>. To remove a repository, use\n" +"<b>Delete</b>. To enable or disable the repository or to change the refresh status at initialization time, select the repository in the table and use the check boxes below.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -819,20 +800,14 @@ #: src/clients/repositories.rb:938 msgid "" "<P><B>Priority of a Repository</B><BR>\n" -"Priority of a repository is an integer value between 0 (the highest " -"priority) and 200 (the lowest priority). Default is 99. If a package is " -"available in more repositories, the repository with the highest priority is " -"used.</P>\n" +"Priority of a repository is an integer value between 0 (the highest priority) and 200 (the lowest priority). Default is 99. If a package is available in more repositories, the repository with the highest priority is used.</P>\n" msgstr "" "<P><B>套件庫的優先順序</B><BR>\n" -"套件庫的優先順序是介於 0 (最高優先) 到 200 (最低優先)的整數。預設的優先順序" -"是 99。 如果套件可由一個以上套件庫取得，將使用優先順序最高的。</P>\n" +"套件庫的優先順序是介於 0 (最高優先) 到 200 (最低優先)的整數。預設的優先順序是 99。 如果套件可由一個以上套件庫取得，將使用優先順序最高的。</P>\n" #. help text, continued #: src/clients/repositories.rb:946 -msgid "" -"<P>Select the appropriate option on top of the window for navigation in " -"repositories and services.</P>" +msgid "<P>Select the appropriate option on top of the window for navigation in repositories and services.</P>" msgstr "<P>在視窗上方選擇相應的選項在套件庫或服務導航。</P>" #. help text, continued @@ -840,20 +815,15 @@ msgid "" "<P><B>Keep Downloaded Packages</B><BR>Check this option to keep downloaded\n" "packages in a local cache so they can be reused later when the packages are\n" -"reinstalled. If not checked, the downloaded packages are deleted after " -"installation.</P>" +"reinstalled. If not checked, the downloaded packages are deleted after installation.</P>" msgstr "" "<P><B>保留下載的套件</B><BR>核取此選項保留下載的\n" "套件在本地快取，當套件需重新安裝時可以重複使用。\n" "如果未核取此選項，下載套件將在安裝後刪除。</P>" #: src/clients/repositories.rb:960 -msgid "" -"<P>The default local cache is located in directory <B>/var/cache/zypp/" -"packages</B>. Change the location in <B>/etc/zypp/zypp.conf</B> file.</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P>預設的本地快取位在目錄 <B>/var/cache/zypp/packages</B>，此位置可以在 <B>/" -"etc/zypp/zypp.conf</B> 檔案中更改。</P>" +msgid "<P>The default local cache is located in directory <B>/var/cache/zypp/packages</B>. Change the location in <B>/etc/zypp/zypp.conf</B> file.</P>" +msgstr "<P>預設的本地快取位在目錄 <B>/var/cache/zypp/packages</B>，此位置可以在 <B>/etc/zypp/zypp.conf</B> 檔案中更改。</P>" #. popup message part 1 #: src/clients/repositories.rb:1005 @@ -866,7 +836,7 @@ #. popup message part 2 followed by other info #. popup message, after message header, header of details -#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1011 src/modules/Packages.rb:1200 +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1011 src/modules/Packages.rb:1326 #: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:162 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:310 msgid "Details:" msgstr "詳細資訊：" @@ -874,7 +844,7 @@ #. popup message part 3 #. end of popup message, question #. end of popup message, question -#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1013 src/modules/Packages.rb:1208 +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1013 src/modules/Packages.rb:1334 #: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:164 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:312 msgid "Try again?" msgstr "再試一次？" @@ -982,8 +952,7 @@ #. warning text #: src/clients/software_proposal.rb:103 #: src/clients/software_simple_proposal.rb:58 -msgid "" -"Cannot solve dependencies automatically. Manual intervention is required." +msgid "Cannot solve dependencies automatically. Manual intervention is required." msgstr "無法自動解決相依性。必須手動介入。" #. this is a heading @@ -998,9 +967,7 @@ #. Command line help text for the software management module, %1 is "zypper" #: src/clients/sw_single.rb:64 -msgid "" -"Software Installation - This module does not support the command line " -"interface, use '%1' instead." +msgid "Software Installation - This module does not support the command line interface, use '%1' instead." msgstr "軟體安裝 - 此模組不支援指令行介面，請改用 '%1' 代替。" #. error message (%1 is a package file name) @@ -1141,8 +1108,7 @@ #. wrong MD5 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:126 -msgid "" -"<B>Error</B> -- MD5 sum does not match<BR>This medium should not be used." +msgid "<B>Error</B> -- MD5 sum does not match<BR>This medium should not be used." msgstr "<B>錯誤</B> -- MD5 總和不符<BR>不應使用此媒體。" #. the correct MD5 is unknown @@ -1169,8 +1135,7 @@ #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:304 msgid "" "<P>When you have a problem with\n" -"the installation and you are using a CD or DVD installation medium, you " -"should check\n" +"the installation and you are using a CD or DVD installation medium, you should check\n" "whether the medium is broken.</P>\n" msgstr "" "<P>當安裝出現問題，\n" @@ -1180,8 +1145,7 @@ #. help text - media check 3/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:310 msgid "" -"<P>Select a drive, insert a medium into the drive and press <B>Start Check\n" +"<P>Select a drive, insert a medium into the drive and press <B>Start Check</B>\n" "or use <B>Check ISO File</B> and select an ISO file.\n" "The check can take several minutes depending on speed of the\n" "drive and size of the medium. The check verifies the MD5 checksum.</P> " @@ -1194,10 +1158,8 @@ #. help text - media check 4/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:317 msgid "" -"<P>If the check of the medium fails, you should not continue the " -"installation.\n" -"It may fail or you may lose your data. Better replace the broken medium.\n" +"<P>If the check of the medium fails, you should not continue the installation.\n" +"It may fail or you may lose your data. Better replace the broken medium.</P>\n" msgstr "" "<P>若媒體的檢查失敗，請勿繼續安裝。這可能會造成安裝失敗，\n" "或造成您的資料遺失。您應該更換損毀的媒體。</P>\n" @@ -1213,25 +1175,19 @@ #. help text - media check 6/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:325 -msgid "" -"<P><B>Note:</B> You cannot change the medium while it is used by the system." -"</P>" +msgid "<P><B>Note:</B> You cannot change the medium while it is used by the system.</P>" msgstr "<P><B>注意：</B> 當媒體被系統使用時您無法變更他。</P>" #. help text - media check 7/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:329 -msgid "" -"<P>To check media before the installation, use the media check item in the " -"boot menu.</P>" +msgid "<P>To check media before the installation, use the media check item in the boot menu.</P>" msgstr "<P>要在開始安裝檢查媒體，請用使用開機選單中的媒體檢查項目。</P>" #. help text - media check 8/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:333 msgid "" -"<P>If you burn the media yourself, use the <B>pad</B> option in your " -"recording\n" -"software. It avoids read errors at the end of the media during the check.\n" +"<P>If you burn the media yourself, use the <B>pad</B> option in your recording\n" +"software. It avoids read errors at the end of the media during the check.</P>\n" msgstr "" "<P>若您自行燒錄媒體，請使用燒錄軟體的 <B>pad</B> 選項。\n" "它可以在檢查期間，避免在媒體結尾處發生讀取錯誤。</P>\n" @@ -1256,7 +1212,7 @@ msgid "&Start Check" msgstr "開始檢查(&S)" -#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:361 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:694 +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:361 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:684 msgid "&Eject" msgstr "退出(&E)" @@ -1504,7 +1460,7 @@ #. popup message part 1 #. Import GPG keys found in the inst-sys #: src/include/packager/repositories_include.rb:319 -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1195 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:306 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1321 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:306 msgid "" "Unable to create repository\n" "from URL '%1'." @@ -1542,76 +1498,75 @@ #. error report #. popup error #. popup error -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:502 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:604 -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:582 src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:773 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:517 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:619 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:538 src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:729 msgid "An error occurred while preparing the installation system." msgstr "準備安裝系統時發生錯誤。" #. error report -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:639 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:654 msgid "Control file %1 not found on media." msgstr "媒體上找不到控制檔案 %1。" #. TRANSLATORS: error report #. TRANSLATORS: error report -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1235 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1399 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1252 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1416 msgid "Unable to use additional products." msgstr "無法使用附加產品。" #. fill up internal map (used later when item selected) -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1286 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1292 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1303 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1309 msgid "%1, URL: %2" msgstr "%1, URL：%2" -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1302 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1319 msgid "URL: %1, Path: %2" msgstr "URL： %1，路徑： %2" #. TRANSLATORS: popup heading -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1333 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1350 msgid "Additional Products" msgstr "附加產品" #. TRANSLATORS: additional dialog information -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1339 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1356 msgid "" -"The installation repository also contains the listed additional " -"repositories.\n" +"The installation repository also contains the listed additional repositories.\n" "Select the ones you want to use.\n" msgstr "" "安裝套件庫也包含了列表中的附加套件庫。\n" "選擇您想要使用的。\n" -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1350 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1367 msgid "Additional Products to Select" msgstr "選擇其他產品" #. push button label -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1357 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1374 msgid "Add Selected &Products" msgstr "新增所選產品(&P)" #. %1 is either "CD" or "DVD" -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1488 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1505 #, fuzzy msgid "Insert the addon %1 medium" msgstr "插入附加產品 CD" #. %1 is the product name, %2 is either "CD" or "DVD" -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1493 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1510 #, fuzzy msgid "Insert the %1 %2 medium" msgstr "插入第一片安裝媒體。" #. TRANSLATORS: error message, %1 is replaced with product URL -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1545 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1562 msgid "Unable to add product %1." msgstr "無法新增產品 %1。" #. adding the product to the list of products (BNC #269625) #. no such products -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1737 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1743 -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:459 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1754 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1760 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:463 msgid "Unknown Product" msgstr "未知的產品" @@ -1697,7 +1652,7 @@ #. Add "Total" item - at the top so it is visible by default even if there are many items #. #. List column header for total remaining MB and time to install -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:989 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:924 msgid "Total" msgstr "全部" @@ -1706,168 +1661,195 @@ #. #. message in the installatino log, %1 is package name, #. %2 is package size -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1116 src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1368 -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1420 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1051 src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1303 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1355 msgid "Downloading %1 (download size %2)" msgstr "下載 %1 (下載大小 %2)" -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1146 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1081 msgid " (Remaining: %1%2 packages)" msgstr " (剩餘： %1%2 套件)" #. display download progress in DownloadInAdvance mode #. translations: progress message (part1) -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1179 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1114 msgid "Downloading Packages..." msgstr "正在下載套件..." #. progress message (part2) -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1182 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1117 msgid " (Downloaded %1 of %2 packages)" msgstr " (下載 %1 %2 套件)" #. Heading for the progress bar for the current package #. while it is deleted. "%1" is the package name. -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1318 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1253 msgid "Deleting %1" msgstr "正在刪除 %1" #. package installation - summary text #. %1 is RPM name, %2 is installed (unpacked) size (e.g. 6.20MB) -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1325 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1260 msgid "Installing %1 (installed size %2)" msgstr "正在安裝 %1 (安裝大小 %2)" #. message in the installatino log, %1 is package name, #. %2 is package size -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1403 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1338 msgid "Applying delta RPM: %1" msgstr "套用 delta RPM：%1" #. warning text -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:299 -msgid "" -"Your computer is a 64-bit x86-64 system, but you are trying to install a 32-" -"bit distribution." +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:303 +msgid "Your computer is a 64-bit x86-64 system, but you are trying to install a 32-bit distribution." msgstr "您的電腦為 64 位元 x86-64 系統，但您正在嘗試安裝 32 位元的發行版本。" #. help text for software proposal -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:315 -msgid "" -"<P>The pattern list states which functionality will be available after " -"installing the system.</P>" +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:319 +msgid "<P>The pattern list states which functionality will be available after installing the system.</P>" msgstr "<P>樣式清單說明安裝到系統後會有哪些功能。</P>" #. (see bnc#178357 why these numbers) #. translators: help text for software proposal -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:327 -msgid "" -"<P>The proposal reports the total size of files which will be installed to " -"the system. However, the system will contain some other files (temporary and " -"working files) so the used space will be slightly larger than the proposed " -"value. Therefore it is a good idea to have at least 25% (or about 300MB) " -"free space before starting the installation.</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P>此建議會報告將安裝到系統的檔案大小。然而系統會包含一些其他檔案(暫存和工作" -"檔)，所以使用的空間將會稍微比建議的數值多一些。因此在您開始安裝之前最好多預留" -"一些可用空間(最少 25% 或大約 300MB)。</P>" +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:331 +msgid "<P>The proposal reports the total size of files which will be installed to the system. However, the system will contain some other files (temporary and working files) so the used space will be slightly larger than the proposed value. Therefore it is a good idea to have at least 25% (or about 300MB) free space before starting the installation.</P>" +msgstr "<P>此建議會報告將安裝到系統的檔案大小。然而系統會包含一些其他檔案(暫存和工作檔)，所以使用的空間將會稍微比建議的數值多一些。因此在您開始安裝之前最好多預留一些可用空間(最少 25% 或大約 300MB)。</P>" #. help text for software proposal -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:332 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:336 msgid "" "<P>The total 'size to download' is the size of the packages which will be\n" -"downloaded from remote (network) repositories. This value is important if " -"the connection is slow or if there is a data limit for downloading.</P>\n" +"downloaded from remote (network) repositories. This value is important if the connection is slow or if there is a data limit for downloading.</P>\n" msgstr "" "<P> '下載大小' 的總和是從遠端(網路)套件庫的大小。此數值\n" "在網路連線緩慢或下載資料大小被限制時是很重要的。</P>\n" #. help text for software proposal - header -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:341 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:345 msgid "<P><B>Software Proposal</B></P>" msgstr "<P><B>軟體需求</B></P>" #. installation proposal - SW summary, %1 is name of the installed product #. (e.g. openSUSE 10.3, SUSE Linux Enterprise ...) -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:358 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:362 msgid "Product: %1" msgstr "產品： %1" #. installation proposal - SW summary, %1 is name of the selected desktop or system type (e.g. KDE) -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:372 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:376 msgid "System Type: %1" msgstr "系統類型： %1" -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:383 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:387 msgid "Patterns:<br>" msgstr "樣式：<br>" #. installation proposal - SW summary, %1 is size of the selected packages (in MB or GB) -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:393 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:397 msgid "Size of Packages to Install: %1" msgstr "要安裝套件的大小：%1" #. installation proposal - SW summary, %1 is download size of the selected packages #. which will be installed from an ftp or http repository (in MB or GB) -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:406 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:410 msgid "Downloading from Remote Repositories: %1" msgstr "由遠端套件庫下載： %1" -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:468 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:472 msgid "These add-on products have been marked for auto-removal: %1" msgstr "這些附加產品已被標示為自動移除：%1" #. Warning message when some add-ons are marked to be removed automatically -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:492 -msgid "" -"Contact the vendors of these add-ons to provide you with new installation " -"media." +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:496 +msgid "Contact the vendors of these add-ons to provide you with new installation media." msgstr "請連繫這些附加產品的供應商，請他提供新的安裝媒體。" #. Warning message when some add-ons are marked to be removed automatically -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:496 -msgid "" -"Contact the vendor of the add-on to provide you with a new installation " -"media." +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:500 +msgid "Contact the vendor of the add-on to provide you with a new installation media." msgstr "連繫附加產品供應商以提供新的安裝媒體。" #. error message: %1: e.g. "/usr", %2: "/dev/sda2" -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:537 -msgid "" -"Error: Cannot check free space in basic directory %1 (device %2), cannot " -"start installation." +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:541 +msgid "Error: Cannot check free space in basic directory %1 (device %2), cannot start installation." msgstr "錯誤：無法檢查目錄 %1(裝置 %2)的可用空間，無法開始安裝。" #. error message: %1: e.g. "/local", %2: "/dev/sda2" -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:557 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:561 msgid "Warning: Cannot check free space in directory %1 (device %2)." msgstr "警告：無法檢查目錄 %1 的可用空間 (裝置 %2)。" #. summary warning -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:600 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:604 msgid "Not enough disk space." msgstr "磁碟空間不足。" #. summary warning -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:602 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:606 msgid "Not enough disk space. Remove some packages in the single selection." msgstr "磁碟空間不足。請移除選擇中的某些套件。" #. add a backslash if it's missing -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:623 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:627 msgid "Only %1 (%2%%) free space available on partition %3.<BR>" msgstr "分割區 %3 上僅有 %1 (%2%%) 可用空間。<BR>" +#. newly installed products +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:696 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Package %1 will be installed" +msgid "New product <b>%s</b> will be installed" +msgstr "會安裝套件 %1" + +#. product update: %s is a product name +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:706 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "%1 packages will be updated" +msgid "Product <b>%s</b> will be updated" +msgstr "將更新 %1 個套件" + +#. product update: %{old_product} is an old product, %{new_product} is the new one +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:708 +msgid "Product <b>%{old_product}</b> will be updated to <b>%{new_product}</b>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:715 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Products that must be installed" +msgid "Product <b>%s</b> will stay installed" +msgstr "必須被安裝的產品" + +#. Removing another product might be an issue +#. (just warn if removed by user or by YaST) +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:725 +msgid "<b>Warning:</b> Product <b>%s</b> will be removed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:726 +msgid "<b>Error:</b> Product <b>%s</b> will be automatically removed.</font>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: update proposal warning, do NOT translate "-release", +#. it is part of a package name (like "sles-release") +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:752 +msgid "" +"<ul><li><b>Some products are marked for automatic removal.</b></li>\n" +"<ul><li>Contact the vendor of the removed add-on to provide you with a new\n" +"installation media</li><li>Or select the appropriate online extension or module\n" +"in the registration step</li><li>Or to continue with product upgrade go to the\n" +"software selection and mark the product (the -release package) for removal.\n" +"</li></ul></li></ul>" +msgstr "" + #. error in proposal, %1 is URL -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1216 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1342 msgid "No repository found at '%1'." msgstr "在 '%1' 找不到套件庫。" #. TRANSLATORS: beginning of the rich text with the release notes -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1489 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1615 msgid "" -"<p><b>The release notes for the initial release are part of the " -"installation\n" +"<p><b>The release notes for the initial release are part of the installation\n" "media. If an Internet connection is available during configuration, you can\n" "download updated release notes from the SUSE Linux Web server.</b></p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1876,31 +1858,31 @@ "伺服器下載更新的發行摘要。</b></p>\n" #. popup - information label -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1516 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1642 msgid "Integrating booted media..." msgstr "正在整合已開機的媒體..." #. close the popup in order to be able to ask about the license -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1538 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1664 msgid "Failed to integrate the service pack repository." msgstr "無法整合 Service Pack 套件庫。" #. popup - information label -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1571 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1697 msgid "Initializing repositories..." msgstr "正在啟始化套件庫..." #. message popup, %1 is product name -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1803 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1929 msgid "Insert %1 CD 1" msgstr "插入 %1 CD 1" -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1805 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1931 msgid "%1 CD 1 not found" msgstr "找不到 %1 CD 1" #. an error message -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1915 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2041 msgid "" "Error while initializing package descriptions.\n" "Check the log file %1 for more details." @@ -1909,7 +1891,7 @@ "請檢查記錄檔案 %1，以取得詳細資訊。" #. bnc #436925 -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2176 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2302 msgid "" "The software selection has been changed externally.\n" "Software proposal will be called again." @@ -1918,12 +1900,12 @@ "軟體需求將重新被呼叫。" #. popup label -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2194 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2320 msgid "Evaluating package selection..." msgstr "正在評估套件選項..." #. Error message, %{pattern_name} is replaced with the missing pattern name in runtime -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2469 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2595 msgid "" "Failed to select default product pattern %{pattern_name}.\n" "Pattern has not been found." @@ -1932,31 +1914,27 @@ #. Sets that the license (file) has been already accepted #. #. @param string filename -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:192 src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:199 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:148 src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:155 msgid "Cannot read license file %1" msgstr "無法讀取授權檔案 %1" -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:193 -msgid "" -"To show the product license properly, put the license.tar.gz file to the " -"root of the live media when building the image." -msgstr "" -"要正確顯示產品授權，當建構影像時，請將 license.tar.gz 檔案放在 live 媒體的根" -"目錄。" +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:149 +msgid "To show the product license properly, put the license.tar.gz file to the root of the live media when building the image." +msgstr "要正確顯示產品授權，當建構影像時，請將 license.tar.gz 檔案放在 live 媒體的根目錄。" #. combo box -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:337 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:293 msgid "&Language" msgstr "語言(&L)" #. check box label -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:389 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:345 #, fuzzy msgid "I &Agree to the License Terms." msgstr "是，我同意「授權合約」的內容(&Y)" #. %{license_url} is an URL where the displayed license can be found -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:429 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:385 #, fuzzy msgid "" "If you want to print this EULA, you can download it from\n" @@ -1967,7 +1945,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: addition license information #. %1 is replaced with the filename -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:435 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:391 msgid "" "If you want to print this EULA, you can find it\n" "on the first media in the file %1" @@ -1976,7 +1954,7 @@ "第一片媒體中找到 %1 檔" #. help text -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:451 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:407 msgid "" "<p>Read the license agreement carefully and select\n" "one of the available options. If you do not agree to the license agreement,\n" @@ -1988,17 +1966,17 @@ #. dialog title #. dialog caption -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:461 src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1290 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:417 src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1212 msgid "License Agreement" msgstr "授權合約" #. popup question -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1083 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1017 msgid "Really abort the add-on product installation?" msgstr "確定要中止安裝附加產品？" #. text asking whether to refuse a license (Yes-No popup) -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1103 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1041 msgid "" "Refusing the license agreement cancels the installation.\n" "Really refuse the agreement?" @@ -2007,7 +1985,7 @@ "確定要拒絕合約嗎？" #. text asking whether to refuse a license (Yes-No popup) -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1107 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1044 msgid "" "Refusing the license agreement cancels the add-on\n" "product installation. Really refuse the agreement?" @@ -2016,7 +1994,7 @@ "的安裝。確定要拒絕合約嗎？" #. timed ok/cancel popup -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1124 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1054 msgid "The system is shutting down..." msgstr "系統正在關閉..." @@ -2103,72 +2081,79 @@ #. radio button #: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:34 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Custom Registration Server" +msgid "&Extensions and Modules from Registration Server..." +msgstr "自訂註冊伺服器" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:36 msgid "Specify &URL..." msgstr "指定 URL(&U)..." #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:36 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:38 msgid "&FTP..." msgstr "FTP(&F)..." #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:38 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:40 msgid "&HTTP..." msgstr "HTTP(&H)..." #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:40 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:42 msgid "HTT&PS..." msgstr "HTTPS(&P)..." #. radio button #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:42 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1711 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:44 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1719 msgid "&SMB/CIFS" msgstr "SMB/CIFS(&S)" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:44 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:46 msgid "&NFS..." msgstr "NFS(&N)..." #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:46 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:48 msgid "&CD..." msgstr "CD(&C)..." #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:48 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:50 msgid "&DVD..." msgstr "DVD(&D)..." #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:50 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:52 msgid "&Hard Disk..." msgstr "硬碟(&H)..." #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:52 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:54 msgid "&USB Mass Storage (USB Stick, Disk)..." msgstr "USB 大量儲存裝置 ( USB 隨身碟、磁碟)(&U)..." #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:54 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:56 msgid "&Local Directory..." msgstr "本機目錄(&L)..." #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:56 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:58 msgid "&Local ISO Image..." msgstr "本機 ISO 影像..." #. check box -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:58 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:60 msgid "&Download repository description files" msgstr "下載套件庫描述檔(&D)" #. Help text suffix for some types of the media -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:106 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:109 msgid "" "<p>If the location is a file holding an ISO image\n" "of the media, set <b>ISO Image</b>.</p>" @@ -2177,7 +2162,7 @@ " ISO 影像的檔案，請設定 <b>ISO 影像</b>。</p>" #. Help text suffix for some types of the media -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:111 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:114 msgid "" "<p>If the repository is on multiple media,\n" "set the location of the first media of the set.</p>\n" @@ -2186,86 +2171,86 @@ "設定組合中第一個媒體的位置。</p>\n" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:120 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:128 msgid "&Server Name" msgstr "伺服器名稱(&M)" #. text entry #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:128 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1575 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:136 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1583 msgid "&Path to Directory or ISO Image" msgstr "目錄或 ISO 影像路徑(&P)" #. checkbox label -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:136 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:144 msgid "&ISO Image" msgstr "ISO 影像(&I)" #. checkbox label -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:138 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:146 msgid "N&FS v4 Protocol" msgstr "NFS v4 協定(&F)" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:144 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:152 msgid "Mount Options" msgstr "裝載選項" #. TRANSLATORS: "(default)" - is a combobox value and means default libzypp #. NFS mount option (users can change it to anything else, the field is editable) -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:148 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:156 msgid "(default)" msgstr "(預設)" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:159 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:167 msgid "URL of the Repository" msgstr "套件庫的 URL" #. frame -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:168 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:176 msgid "P&rotocol" msgstr "通訊協定(&R)" #. input field label -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:178 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:186 msgid "&URL of the Repository" msgstr "套件庫的 URL(&U)" #. label / dialog caption #. bugzilla #219759 #. service label can be empty (not defined) -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:193 src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:323 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:201 src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:323 msgid "Repository URL" msgstr "套件庫 URL" #. label / dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:195 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:203 msgid "NFS Server" msgstr "NFS 伺服器" #. label / dialog caption #. label / dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:197 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:199 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:205 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:207 msgid "CD or DVD Media" msgstr "CD 或 DVD 媒體" #. label / dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:201 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:209 msgid "Hard Disk" msgstr "硬碟" #. label / dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:203 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:211 msgid "USB Stick or Disk" msgstr "USB 隨身碟或磁碟" #. label / dialog caption #. dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:205 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:880 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:213 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:888 msgid "Local Directory" msgstr "本機目錄" #. label / dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:207 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:215 msgid "Local ISO Image" msgstr "本機 ISO 影像" @@ -2274,62 +2259,59 @@ #. label / dialog caption #. label / dialog caption #. label / dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:209 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:211 -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:213 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:215 -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:217 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:217 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:219 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:221 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:223 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:225 msgid "Server and Directory" msgstr "伺服器和目錄" #. popup message -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:432 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:440 msgid "The name of the repository cannot be empty." msgstr "套件庫名稱不能是空白。" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:444 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:452 msgid "&Repository Name" msgstr "套件庫名稱" #. help text -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:459 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:467 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Repository Name</b></big><br>\n" -"Use <b>Repository Name</b> to specify the name of the repository. If it is " -"empty, YaST will use the product name (if available) or the URL as the name." -"</p>\n" +"Use <b>Repository Name</b> to specify the name of the repository. If it is empty, YaST will use the product name (if available) or the URL as the name.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>套件庫名稱</b></big><br>\n" "使用 <b>套件庫名稱</b> 以指定套件庫的名稱。如果空白，\n" "YaST 將使用產品名稱(如果有)或 URL 來當成名稱。</p>\n" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:473 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:481 msgid "&Service Name" msgstr "服務名稱(&S)" #. help text -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:481 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:489 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Service Name</b></big><br>\n" -"Use <b>Service Name</b> to specify the name of the service. If it is empty, " -"YaST will use part of the service URL as the name.</p>\n" +"Use <b>Service Name</b> to specify the name of the service. If it is empty, YaST will use part of the service URL as the name.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>服務庫名稱</b></big><br>\n" "使用 <b>服務名稱</b> 以指定服務的名稱。如果空白，\n" "YaST 將使用服務 URL 的一部份來當成名稱。</p>\n" #. popup message -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:516 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:524 msgid "URL cannot be empty." msgstr "URL 不能是空白。" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:529 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:537 msgid "&URL" msgstr "URL(&U)" #. help text -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:543 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:551 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Repository URL</b></big><br>\n" "Use <b>URL</b> to specify the URL of the repository.</p>" @@ -2341,16 +2323,16 @@ #. @return widget description map #. Get widget description map #. @return widget description map -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:716 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1843 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:724 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1851 msgid "Edit Parts of the URL" msgstr "編輯部分 URL" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:723 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1850 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:731 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1858 msgid "Edit Complete URL" msgstr "編輯完整 URL" #. help text -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:735 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:743 msgid "" "<p><big><b>NFS Server</b></big><br>\n" "Use <b>Server Name</b> and <b>Path to Directory or ISO Image</b>\n" @@ -2360,26 +2342,25 @@ "使用<b>伺服器名稱</b>與<b>目錄或 ISO 影像路徑</b>\n" "來指定 NFS 伺服器主機名稱與伺服器上的路徑。<p>" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:742 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:750 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Mount Options</b></big><br>\n" "You can specify extra options used for mounting the NFS volume.\n" -"This is an expert option, keeping the default value is recommened. See " -"<b>man 5 nfs</b>\n" +"This is an expert option, keeping the default value is recommened. See <b>man 5 nfs</b>\n" "for details and the list of supported options." msgstr "" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:797 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:805 msgid "&CD-ROM" msgstr "CD-ROM(&C)" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:799 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:807 msgid "&DVD-ROM" msgstr "DVD-ROM(&D)" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:804 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:812 msgid "" "<p><big><b>CD or DVD Media</b></big><br>\n" "Set <b>CD-ROM</b> or <b>DVD-ROM</b> to specify the type of media.</p>" @@ -2388,12 +2369,12 @@ "設定 <b>CD-ROM</b> 或 <b>DVD-ROM</b> 來指定媒體類型。</p>" #. dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:895 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:903 msgid "ISO Image File" msgstr "ISO 影像檔" #. error popup - the entered path is not a directory -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:918 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:926 msgid "" "The entered path is not a directory\n" "or the directory does not exist.\n" @@ -2402,7 +2383,7 @@ "此目錄不存在。\n" #. error popup - the entered path is not a regular file -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:948 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:956 msgid "" "The entered path is not a file\n" "or the file does not exist.\n" @@ -2411,7 +2392,7 @@ "此檔案不存在。\n" #. continue/cancel popup, %1 is a file name -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:972 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:980 msgid "" "File '%1'\n" "does not seem to be an ISO image.\n" @@ -2422,17 +2403,17 @@ "無論如何要使用它嗎？\n" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:993 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1001 msgid "&Path to Directory" msgstr "目錄之路徑(&P)" #. checkbox label -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1001 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1259 -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1326 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1009 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1267 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1334 msgid "&Plain RPM Directory" msgstr "單純的 RPM 目錄(&P)" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1016 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1024 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Local Directory</b></big><br>\n" "Use <b>Path to Directory</b> to specify the path to the\n" @@ -2447,20 +2428,20 @@ "選項。</p>\n" #. `opt(`hstretch), -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1252 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1260 msgid "&USB Mass Storage Device" msgstr "USB 大量儲存裝置(&U)" #. the spacing is added to make the widget wider -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1257 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1324 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1265 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1332 msgid "&File System" msgstr "檔案系統(&F)" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1258 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1325 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1266 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1333 msgid "Dire&ctory" msgstr "目錄(&C)" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1263 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1271 msgid "" "<p><big><b>USB Stick or Disk</b></big><br>\n" "Select the USB device on which the repository is located.\n" @@ -2480,7 +2461,7 @@ #. 'auto' is a value in the combo box widget, do not translate it! #. 'auto' is a value in the combo box widget, do not translate it! -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1273 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1340 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1281 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1348 msgid "" "<p>The file system used on the device will be detected automatically\n" "if you select file system 'auto'. If the detection fails or you\n" @@ -2491,11 +2472,11 @@ "請從選單中選取。</p>\n" #. combobox title -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1323 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1331 msgid "&Disk Device" msgstr "磁碟裝置(&D)" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1330 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1338 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Disk</b></big><br>\n" "Select the disk on which the repository is located.\n" @@ -2514,12 +2495,12 @@ "選項。</p>\n" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1356 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1364 msgid "&Path to ISO Image" msgstr "ISO 影像的路徑(&P)" #. push button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1376 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1384 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Local ISO Image</b></big><br>\n" "Use <b>Path to ISO Image</b> to specify the path to the\n" @@ -2530,71 +2511,71 @@ "的路徑。</p>" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1557 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1565 msgid "Server &Name" msgstr "伺服器名稱(&N)" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1561 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1569 msgid "&Port" msgstr "埠(&P)" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1566 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1574 msgid "&Share" msgstr "共用(&S)" #. checkbox label -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1579 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1587 msgid "ISO &Image" msgstr "ISO 影像(&I)" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1582 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1590 msgid "&Directory on Server" msgstr "伺服器上的目錄(&D)" #. frame -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1587 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1595 msgid "Au&thentication" msgstr "驗證(&T)" #. check box -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1594 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1602 msgid "&Anonymous" msgstr "匿名(&A)" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1603 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1611 msgid "&Workgroup or Domain" msgstr "工作群組或領域(&W)" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1612 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1620 msgid "&User Name" msgstr "使用者名稱(&U)" #. password entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1619 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1627 msgid "&Password" msgstr "密碼(&P)" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1694 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1702 msgid "&FTP" msgstr "FTP(&F)" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1697 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1705 msgid "H&TTP" msgstr "HTTP(&T)" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1704 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1712 msgid "HTT&PS" msgstr "HTTPS(&P)" #. help text - server dialog -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1874 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1882 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Server and Directory</b></big><br>\n" "Use <b>Server Name</b> and <b>Path to Directory or ISO Image</b>\n" @@ -2602,8 +2583,7 @@ "To enable authentication, uncheck <b>Anonymous</b> and specify the\n" "<b>User Name</b> and the <b>Password</b>.</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"For the SMB/CIFS repository, specify <b>Share</b> name and <b>Path to " -"Directory\n" +"For the SMB/CIFS repository, specify <b>Share</b> name and <b>Path to Directory\n" "or ISO Image</b>. \n" "If the location is a file holding an ISO image\n" "of the media, set <b>ISO Image</b>.</p>\n" @@ -2620,10 +2600,9 @@ "ISO 影像的檔案，請設定 <b>ISO 影像</b>。</p>\n" #. help text - server dialog, there is a "Port" widget -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1887 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1895 msgid "" -"<p>It is possible to set the <b>Port</b> number for a HTTP/HTTPS " -"repository.\n" +"<p>It is possible to set the <b>Port</b> number for a HTTP/HTTPS repository.\n" "Leave it empty to use the default port.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>對 HTTP/HTTPS 套件庫可以設定<b>埠</b>號。\n" @@ -2632,12 +2611,12 @@ #. Returns whether Community Repositories are defined in the control file. #. #. @return [Boolean] whether defined -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1949 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1957 msgid "I would like to install an additional Add On Product" msgstr "" #. help text -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2067 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2076 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Media Type</b></big><br>\n" "The software repository can be located on CD, on a network server,\n" @@ -2648,7 +2627,7 @@ "或硬碟。</p>" #. help, continued -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2076 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2085 msgid "" "<p>\n" "To add <b>CD</b> or <b>DVD</b>,\n" @@ -2659,7 +2638,7 @@ "請準備好產品 CD 組或 DVD。</p>" #. help, continued -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2086 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2095 msgid "" "<p>\n" "The product CDs can be copied to the hard disk.\n" @@ -2674,7 +2653,7 @@ "則只需要基礎路徑。</p>\n" #. help, continued -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2098 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2107 msgid "" "<p>\n" "Network installation requires a working network connection.\n" @@ -2687,30 +2666,29 @@ "例如 /data1/CD1。</p>\n" #. error popup -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2113 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2122 msgid "Select the media type" msgstr "選取媒體類型" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2119 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2128 msgid "Insert the add-on product CD" msgstr "插入附加產品 CD" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2120 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2129 msgid "Insert the add-on product DVD" msgstr "插入附加產品 DVD" #. ask for a medium -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2138 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2147 msgid "No USB disk was detected." msgstr "偵測不到任何 USB 磁碟。" #. TODO: disable "download" option when CD or DVD source is selected -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2333 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2344 msgid "" "<p><b>Download Files</b><br>\n" "Each repository has description files which describe the content of the\n" -"repository. Check <b>Download repository description files</b> to download " -"the\n" +"repository. Check <b>Download repository description files</b> to download the\n" "files when closing this YaST module. If the option is unchecked, YaST will\n" "automatically download the files when it needs them later. </p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2721,12 +2699,12 @@ "自動下載此檔案。</p>\n" #. dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2552 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2563 msgid "Media Type" msgstr "媒體類型" #. dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2576 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2587 #, fuzzy msgid "Add On Product" msgstr "附加產品" @@ -2822,7 +2800,9 @@ msgid "Configured Repositories" msgstr "設定套件庫" -#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:680 +#. To adjust the width of the dialog, look for the more lengthy device label +#. (and add some extra space for the frame) +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:670 msgid "&Drive to eject" msgstr "要退出的磁碟機(&D)" @@ -2896,12 +2876,12 @@ "選取的套件庫無 URL。" #. progress information, %1 stands for number of services -#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:520 +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:493 msgid "Collecting information of %1 services found..." msgstr "正在收集所找到 %1 個服務的資訊..." #. error popup -#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:618 +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:591 msgid "" "No SLP repositories have been found on your network.\n" "This could be caused by a running SuSEfirewall2,\n" @@ -2912,7 +2892,7 @@ "SuSEfirewall2 很可能封鎖網路掃描。" #. error popup -#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:627 +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:600 msgid "No SLP repositories have been found on your network." msgstr "在您的網路上找不到 SLP 套件庫。" @@ -3010,19 +2990,15 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><big><b>Package Search</b></big><br>\n" -#~ "Use the functionality of <i>Webpin package search</i> to search in all " -#~ "known openSUSE build-service and openSUSE community repositories.</p>\n" +#~ "Use the functionality of <i>Webpin package search</i> to search in all known openSUSE build-service and openSUSE community repositories.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><big><b>套件搜尋</b></big><br>\n" -#~ "此 YaST 模組讓您能使用 <i>Webpin 套件搜尋</i>功能。它搜尋所有已知 " -#~ "openSUSE build-service 和 openSUSE 社群套件庫。</p>\n" +#~ "此 YaST 模組讓您能使用 <i>Webpin 套件搜尋</i>功能。它搜尋所有已知 openSUSE build-service 和 openSUSE 社群套件庫。</p>\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><big><b>Security</b></big><br> The software found is often not part of " -#~ "the\n" +#~ "<p><big><b>Security</b></big><br> The software found is often not part of the\n" #~ "distribution itself. You need to decide whether to trust the source of a\n" -#~ "package. We do not take any responsibility for installing such software.\n" +#~ "package. We do not take any responsibility for installing such software.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><big><b>保全</b></big><br>找到的軟體常常\n" #~ "不是此發行版本的一部份，是否值得信任取決於您自己。\n" @@ -3070,8 +3046,7 @@ #~ "遠端伺服器回應錯誤碼 %1" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Here you can see default online repositories downloaded from the " -#~ "Internet.\n" +#~ "<p>Here you can see default online repositories downloaded from the Internet.\n" #~ "Click on the repository to see its details.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>在此您可以看到從網路下載的預設線上套件庫。\n" @@ -3084,9 +3059,7 @@ #~ "<p>如果您想要使用線上套件庫，\n" #~ "選擇您想要的然後按 <b>下一步</b></p>\n" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Please wait while the repository manager downloads the repository " -#~ "details...</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Please wait while the repository manager downloads the repository details...</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>套件庫管理員正在下載套件庫詳細資料，請稍後...</p>" #~ msgid "Reading package information. One moment please..." @@ -3099,10 +3072,8 @@ #~ msgstr "搜尋範圍(&I)" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>These are the release notes made for the first initial release. " -#~ "They are\n" -#~ "part of the installation media. During the configuration steps, if a " -#~ "connection\n" +#~ "<p><b>These are the release notes made for the first initial release. They are\n" +#~ "part of the installation media. During the configuration steps, if a connection\n" #~ "to the Internet is available, you can download updated release notes\n" #~ "from the SUSE Linux Web server.</b></p>" #~ msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/pam.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/pam.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/pam.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:33+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2001-06-05 18:04+02:00\n" "Last-Translator: 裴寒牧 \n" "Language-Team: 中華 \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/pkg-bindings.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/pkg-bindings.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/pkg-bindings.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: pkg-bindings\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-07-01 01:01+0800\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -25,48 +25,26 @@ #. help text #: src/HelpTexts.h:36 -msgid "" -"<P><BIG><B>Loading Available Packages</B></BIG></P><P>Loading available " -"objects from the configured repositories is in progress. This may take a " -"while...</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P><BIG><B>正在載入可用的套件</B></BIG></P><P>正在由已組態的套件庫中載入可用" -"物件。這會花上一些時間...</P>" +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Loading Available Packages</B></BIG></P><P>Loading available objects from the configured repositories is in progress. This may take a while...</P>" +msgstr "<P><BIG><B>正在載入可用的套件</B></BIG></P><P>正在由已組態的套件庫中載入可用物件。這會花上一些時間...</P>" #. help text #: src/HelpTexts.h:42 -msgid "" -"<P><BIG><B>Loading Installed Packages</B></BIG></P><P>The package manager is " -"reading installed packages...</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P><BIG><B>正在載入已安裝的套件</B><BIG></P><P>套件管理員正在讀取已安裝套" -"件...</P>" +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Loading Installed Packages</B></BIG></P><P>The package manager is reading installed packages...</P>" +msgstr "<P><BIG><B>正在載入已安裝的套件</B><BIG></P><P>套件管理員正在讀取已安裝套件...</P>" #. help text #: src/HelpTexts.h:47 -msgid "" -"<P><BIG><B>Registering a New Repository</B></BIG></P><P>A new repository is " -"being registered. The package manager is reading the list of available " -"packages in the repository...</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P><BIG><B>註冊新的套件庫</B></BIG></P><P>已經註冊一個新的套件庫。套件管理員" -"正在讀取套件庫中可用套件的清單...</P>" +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Registering a New Repository</B></BIG></P><P>A new repository is being registered. The package manager is reading the list of available packages in the repository...</P>" +msgstr "<P><BIG><B>註冊新的套件庫</B></BIG></P><P>已經註冊一個新的套件庫。套件管理員正在讀取套件庫中可用套件的清單...</P>" #: src/HelpTexts.h:52 -msgid "" -"<P><BIG><B>Saving Repositories</B></BIG></P><P>The package manager is " -"updating configured repositories...</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P><BIG><B>正在儲存套件庫</B></BIG></P><P>套件管理員正在更新已設定的套件庫..." -"</P>" +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Saving Repositories</B></BIG></P><P>The package manager is updating configured repositories...</P>" +msgstr "<P><BIG><B>正在儲存套件庫</B></BIG></P><P>套件管理員正在更新已設定的套件庫...</P>" #: src/HelpTexts.h:55 -msgid "" -"<P><BIG><B>Refreshing the Repository</B></BIG></P><P>The package manager is " -"updating the repository content...</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P><BIG><B>正在重新整理套件庫</B></BIG></P><P>套件管理員正在更新套件庫內容..." -"</P>" +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Refreshing the Repository</B></BIG></P><P>The package manager is updating the repository content...</P>" +msgstr "<P><BIG><B>正在重新整理套件庫</B></BIG></P><P>套件管理員正在更新套件庫內容...</P>" #. error message #: src/Package.cc:651 Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/printer.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/printer.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/printer.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: printer\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-01-16 11:46+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -69,19 +69,16 @@ #. If cups is missing, there can be no local running cupsd which is #. mandatory to set up local print queues. #: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:92 -msgid "" -"Cannot configure printing (required package cups-client is not installed)." +msgid "Cannot configure printing (required package cups-client is not installed)." msgstr "無法設定印表機 (未安裝所需的套件 cups-client)。" #: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:102 -msgid "" -"Cannot configure local printers (required package cups is not installed)." +msgid "Cannot configure local printers (required package cups is not installed)." msgstr "無法設定本地印表機 (所需的套件 cups 未安裝)。" #. Skip automated queue setup when it is a client-only config: #: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:117 -msgid "" -"No local printer accessible (using remote CUPS server '%1' for printing)." +msgid "No local printer accessible (using remote CUPS server '%1' for printing)." msgstr "沒有可存取的本地印表機 (使用遠端 CUPS 伺服器 '%1' 來列印)。" #. Wait half a minute for a new started cupsd: @@ -186,17 +183,14 @@ #. Header for a dialog section where the user can #. specify if USB printers are configured automatically: #: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:61 -msgid "" -"Specify if automatic USB printer configuration should happen when plug in" +msgid "Specify if automatic USB printer configuration should happen when plug in" msgstr "指定當插入裝置時是否要進行自動 USB 印表機組態" #. CheckBox for automatic configuration of USB printers #. by installing or removing the RPM package udev-configure-printer. #. Do not change or translate "udev-configure-printer", it is a RPM package name. #: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:75 -msgid "" -"&Use the package udev-configure-printer for automatic USB printer " -"configuration" +msgid "&Use the package udev-configure-printer for automatic USB printer configuration" msgstr "使用套件 udev-configure-printer 進行自動 USB 印表機組態(&U)" #. where %1 will be replaced by the server name: @@ -215,9 +209,7 @@ #. PopupYesNoHeadline headline #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: #: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:101 -msgid "" -"A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with automatic configuration of " -"printers for the local system." +msgid "A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with automatic configuration of printers for the local system." msgstr "遠端 CUPS 伺服器設定和本地系統的印表機自動組態設定衝突。" #. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system @@ -504,9 +496,7 @@ #. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when a wrong queue name was entered: #: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:379 -msgid "" -"Only letters (a-z and A-Z), numbers (0-9), and the underscore '_' are " -"allowed for the queue name." +msgid "Only letters (a-z and A-Z), numbers (0-9), and the underscore '_' are allowed for the queue name." msgstr "佇列名稱僅能使用字母(a-z 和 A-Z), 數字 (0-9), 和底線 '_' 。" #. when a queue name is changed to be valid: @@ -529,12 +519,8 @@ #. The 'next dialog' is the overview dialog where the printer configurations are shown #. which has a 'Refresh List' button to update the shown printer configurations: #: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:430 src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:821 -msgid "" -"If the next dialog does not show the new printer configuration as expected, " -"wait some time and use the 'Refresh List' button." -msgstr "" -"如果下一個對話框未如預期的顯示新的印表機組態設定，稍候片刻並使用 '重新整理清" -"單' 按鈕。" +msgid "If the next dialog does not show the new printer configuration as expected, wait some time and use the 'Refresh List' button." +msgstr "如果下一個對話框未如預期的顯示新的印表機組態設定，稍候片刻並使用 '重新整理清單' 按鈕。" #. Only a simple message because before the RunHpsetup function was called #. and this function would have shown more specific messages. @@ -580,9 +566,7 @@ #. Do not change or translate "raw", it is a technical term when no driver is used. #. Do not change or translate "System V style interface script", it is a technical term. #: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:315 -msgid "" -"No driver is used (it is a 'raw' queue or a 'System V style interface " -"script' is used)" +msgid "No driver is used (it is a 'raw' queue or a 'System V style interface script' is used)" msgstr "未使用驅動程式(它是一個 'raw' 佇列或使用系統 V 類型介面程序)" #: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:323 @@ -634,11 +618,8 @@ #. The 'next dialog' is the overview dialog where the printer configurations are shown #. which has a 'Refresh List' button to update the shown printer configurations: #: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:823 -msgid "" -"If the next dialog does not show the expected modifications, wait some time " -"and use the 'Refresh List' button." -msgstr "" -"如果下一個對話框未如預期的顯示修改，稍候片刻並使用 '重新整理清單' 按鈕。" +msgid "If the next dialog does not show the expected modifications, wait some time and use the 'Refresh List' button." +msgstr "如果下一個對話框未如預期的顯示修改，稍候片刻並使用 '重新整理清單' 按鈕。" #. Exit this dialog in any case: #. Return at least a list with only a fallback string so that the user is informed: @@ -663,8 +644,7 @@ #. Do not change or translate "raw", it is a technical term #. when no driver is used for a print queue. #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:432 -msgid "" -"Keep the model or select a &manufacturer if no 'raw queue' should be set up" +msgid "Keep the model or select a &manufacturer if no 'raw queue' should be set up" msgstr "如果沒有設定 'raw 佇列'，保留型號或選擇一個印表機廠商(&M)" #. Header for a ComboBox to select the printer manufacturer: @@ -786,8 +766,7 @@ msgstr "停止位元(&T)" #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1076 -msgid "" -"To access a bluetooth printer, the RPM package bluez-cups must be installed." +msgid "To access a bluetooth printer, the RPM package bluez-cups must be installed." msgstr "要存取藍芽印表機，必須安裝 bluez-cups 套件。" #. The user can also decide during the actual installation not to install it @@ -868,9 +847,7 @@ msgstr "URI (參閱印表機手冊)[加密位址]" #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1402 -msgid "" -"To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be " -"installed." +msgid "To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be installed." msgstr "要存取 SMB 印表機分享，需要安裝 samba-client 套件。" #. The user can also decide during the actual installation not to install it @@ -1193,8 +1170,7 @@ msgstr "'space' parity 檢查僅被 7 資料位元支援。" #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2481 -msgid "" -"The 'mark' parity checking is only supported with 7 data bits and 1 stop bit." +msgid "The 'mark' parity checking is only supported with 7 data bits and 1 stop bit." msgstr "'mark' parity 檢查僅被 7 資料位元和 1 停止位元支援。" #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2523 @@ -1357,9 +1333,7 @@ #. Without a link name /usr/lib[64]/cups/backend/smb (which is provided by samba-client) #. the rest makes no sense (in particular the ln commands would create nonsense links in $PWD): #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:3245 -msgid "" -"To support Active Directory (R), the RPM package samba-krb-printing must be " -"installed." +msgid "To support Active Directory (R), the RPM package samba-krb-printing must be installed." msgstr "要支援 Active Directory (R)，需要安裝 samba-krb-printing 套件。" #. Show a user notification before it gets disabled: @@ -1551,8 +1525,7 @@ #. and there is nothing else to be done after this: #: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:679 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"The printer description file is not in compliance with the specification." +msgid "The printer description file is not in compliance with the specification." msgstr "印表機描述檔和規格不符。" #. when a PPD file is not in compliance: @@ -1563,8 +1536,7 @@ #. Body of a Popup::ContinueCancelHeadline #. when PPD file is not in compliance: #: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:699 -msgid "" -"A non-compliant printer description file can lead to arbitrary failures." +msgid "A non-compliant printer description file can lead to arbitrary failures." msgstr "不符合規格的印表機描述檔可能導致任意的錯誤。" #: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:716 @@ -1618,14 +1590,12 @@ "<b><big>Print Queue Overview</big></b><br>\n" "A printer device is not used directly but via a print queue.<br>\n" "When various applications submit print jobs simultaneously,\n" -"these jobs are put in a queue and are sent one after the other to the " -"printer\n" +"these jobs are put in a queue and are sent one after the other to the printer\n" "device.<br>\n" "It is possible to have several different print queues for the same printer\n" "device.\n" "For example a second queue with a monochrome-only driver for a color device\n" -"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL " -"printer.\n" +"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL printer.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -1637,8 +1607,7 @@ "同一台印表機裝置可能會有好幾個不同的\n" "列印佇列。\n" "例如，對一台彩色印表機有第二個只有單色驅動程式的佇列，\n" -"或一台 PostScript+PCL 印表機會有一個 PostScript 佇列和一個有 PCL 驅動程式的佇" -"列。\n" +"或一台 PostScript+PCL 印表機會有一個 PostScript 佇列和一個有 PCL 驅動程式的佇列。\n" "</p>" #. Overview dialog help 2/7: @@ -1764,19 +1733,14 @@ "<b><big>Set Up a New Queue for a Printer Device</big></b><br>\n" "A printer device is not used directly but via a print queue.<br>\n" "When various application programs submit print jobs simultaneously,\n" -"the jobs queue up and are sent one after the other to the printer device." -"<br>\n" -"It is possible to have several different print queues for the same printer " -"device.\n" -"Usually several print queues are needed when several different printer " -"drivers\n" +"the jobs queue up and are sent one after the other to the printer device.<br>\n" +"It is possible to have several different print queues for the same printer device.\n" +"Usually several print queues are needed when several different printer drivers\n" "should be used for the same printer device.\n" "For example a second queue with a monochrome-only driver\n" "to enforce black-only printout on a color device\n" -"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL " -"printer\n" -"because printing via the PCL driver is usually faster (but with less " -"quality).\n" +"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL printer\n" +"because printing via the PCL driver is usually faster (but with less quality).\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -1789,8 +1753,7 @@ "通常需要數個列印佇列。\n" "例如，在一台彩色印表機需要有第二個只有單色驅動程式的佇列\n" "來強迫列印單純的黑色。\n" -"或一台 PostScript+PCL 印表機會有一個 PostScript 佇列和一個有 PCL 驅動程式的佇" -"列，\n" +"或一台 PostScript+PCL 印表機會有一個 PostScript 佇列和一個有 PCL 驅動程式的佇列，\n" "因為經由 PCL 驅動程式列印通常比較快速(但品質較遜色)。\n" "</p>" @@ -1816,8 +1779,7 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p>\n" -"The <b>connection</b> determines which way data is sent to the printer " -"device.<br>\n" +"The <b>connection</b> determines which way data is sent to the printer device.<br>\n" "If a wrong connection is selected, no data can be sent to the device\n" "so that there cannot be any printout.<br>\n" "If a printer device is accessible via more than one connection type,\n" @@ -1825,10 +1787,8 @@ "In particular HP devices are often accessible both via the 'usb:/...'\n" "and the 'hp:/...' connection.\n" "The latter is provided by the HP driver package 'hplip'.\n" -"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything " -"else\n" -"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one " -"device)\n" +"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything else\n" +"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one device)\n" "the 'hp:/...' connection must be used.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1854,8 +1814,7 @@ "The <b>driver</b> determines that the right data is produced for the\n" "specific printer model.<br>\n" "If a wrong driver is assigned, wrong data is sent to the printer\n" -"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all." -"<br>\n" +"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all.<br>\n" "Initially the input field for the driver search string is preset\n" "with the autodetected model name of the currently selected connection\n" "and those drivers where the driver description matches to the model name\n" @@ -1880,8 +1839,7 @@ "and feel free to play around and modify the settings\n" "to what you know what works best for your printer.<br>\n" "If no driver description matches to the autodetected model name,\n" -"it does not necessarily mean that there is no driver available for the " -"model.\n" +"it does not necessarily mean that there is no driver available for the model.\n" "Often only the model name in the driver descriptions\n" "is different from the autodetected model name.\n" "Therefore you can enter whatever you like as driver search string\n" @@ -2034,8 +1992,7 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p>\n" -"The <b>connection</b> determines how data is sent to the printer device." -"<br>\n" +"The <b>connection</b> determines how data is sent to the printer device.<br>\n" "If a wrong connection is selected, no data can be sent to the device\n" "so that there cannot be any printout.<br>\n" "If a printer device is accessible via more than one connection type,\n" @@ -2043,10 +2000,8 @@ "In particular HP devices are often accessible both via the 'usb:/...'\n" "and the 'hp:/...' connection.\n" "The latter is provided by the HP driver package 'hplip'.\n" -"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything " -"else\n" -"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one " -"device)\n" +"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything else\n" +"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one device)\n" "the 'hp:/...' connection must be used.<br>\n" "When you exchange the currently used connection with another one,\n" "the input field for the driver search string is preset\n" @@ -2126,12 +2081,9 @@ "The <b>driver</b> determines that the right data is produced for the\n" "specific printer model.<br>\n" "If a wrong driver is assigned, wrong data is sent to the printer\n" -"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all." -"<br>\n" -"You can either select another driver and modify its driver option settings " -"later\n" -"or keep the currently used driver and modify its driver option settings now." -"<br>\n" +"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all.<br>\n" +"You can either select another driver and modify its driver option settings later\n" +"or keep the currently used driver and modify its driver option settings now.<br>\n" "Some driver option settings must match to your particular printer.\n" "For example the default paper size setting of the driver\n" "must match to the paper which is actually loaded in your printer.<br>\n" @@ -2140,8 +2092,7 @@ "should work for the particular driver.\n" "Nevertheless it may happen that your particular printer fails to print\n" "with high resolution. For example when you have a laser printer\n" -"which has insufficient built-in memory to process high resolution pages." -"<br>\n" +"which has insufficient built-in memory to process high resolution pages.<br>\n" "When you exchange the currently used driver by another one,\n" "you must first apply this change to the print queue\n" "so that the new driver is used for the queue\n" @@ -2149,8 +2100,7 @@ "and then in a second step you can adjust all driver options\n" "by using this dialog again.<br>\n" "Initially the input field for the driver search string is preset\n" -"with the description of the currently used driver when the connection was " -"not changed.\n" +"with the description of the currently used driver when the connection was not changed.\n" "This results usually only one single driver which matches\n" "so that you would have to enter a less specific driver search string\n" "to get also other drivers or you use the 'Find More' button.\n" @@ -2165,10 +2115,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "In contrast to connection and driver where you must select the right one,\n" -"you are free to enter arbitrary strings for <b>description</b> and " -"<b>location</b>.\n" -"Application programs often show description and location in the print " -"dialog.\n" +"you are free to enter arbitrary strings for <b>description</b> and <b>location</b>.\n" +"Application programs often show description and location in the print dialog.\n" "To make sure that those strings look correct in any language\n" "which a particular user of a particular application program may use,\n" "it is safe when you use only plain ASCII text without\n" @@ -2275,8 +2223,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Specify the Connection</big></b><br>\n" -"The <b>connection</b> determines how data is sent to the printer device." -"<br>\n" +"The <b>connection</b> determines how data is sent to the printer device.<br>\n" "If a wrong connection is used, no data can be sent to the device\n" "so that there cannot be any printout.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -2294,24 +2241,19 @@ "<p>\n" "<b><big>Printer Device URI</big></b><br>\n" "A connection is specified as so called <b>device URI</b>.<br>\n" -"Its first word (the so called URI scheme) specifies the kind of data-" -"transfer,\n" +"Its first word (the so called URI scheme) specifies the kind of data-transfer,\n" "for example 'parallel', 'usb', 'socket', 'lpd', or 'ipp'.<br>\n" "After the scheme there are more or less additional components\n" "which specify the details for this kind of data-transfer.<br>\n" "Space characters are not allowed in an URI.\n" "Therefore a space character in a value of an URI component\n" -"is encoded as '%20' (20 is the hexadecimal value of the space character)." -"<br>\n" +"is encoded as '%20' (20 is the hexadecimal value of the space character).<br>\n" "The components of an URI are separated by special reserved characters like\n" -"colon ':', slash '/', question mark '?', ampersand '&', or equals sign " -"'='.<br>\n" -"Finally there could be optional parameters (separated by a question mark " -"'?')\n" +"colon ':', slash '/', question mark '?', ampersand '&', or equals sign '='.<br>\n" +"Finally there could be optional parameters (separated by a question mark '?')\n" "of the form 'option1=value1&option2=value2&option3=value3' so that\n" "a full device URI could be for example:<br>\n" -"ipp://server.domain:631/printers/queuename?waitjob=false&" -"waitprinter=false<br>\n" +"ipp://server.domain:631/printers/queuename?waitjob=false&waitprinter=false<br>\n" "Some examples:<br>\n" "A USB printer model 'Fun Printer 1000+' made by 'ACME'\n" "with serial number 'A1B2C3' may have a device URI like:<br>\n" @@ -2429,10 +2371,8 @@ "Example device URIs:<br>\n" "serial:/dev/ttyS9?baud=9600+bits=8+parity=none+flow=soft+stop=1<br>\n" "bluetooth://1A2B3C4D5E6F<br>\n" -"To access a device via bluetooth, the RPM package bluez-cups must be " -"installed.\n" -"The package provides the CUPS backend 'bluetooth' which actually sends the " -"data\n" +"To access a device via bluetooth, the RPM package bluez-cups must be installed.\n" +"The package provides the CUPS backend 'bluetooth' which actually sends the data\n" "to a bluetooth printer.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -2441,8 +2381,7 @@ #: src/include/printer/helps.rb:586 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"<b><big>Device URIs to Access a Network Printer or a Printserver Box</big><br>\n" +"<b><big>Device URIs to Access a Network Printer or a Printserver Box</big></b><br>\n" "A printserver box is a small device with a network connection\n" "and a USB or parallel port connection to connect the actual printer.\n" "A network printer has such a device built-in.\n" @@ -2490,8 +2429,7 @@ "Ask your network administrator what which print server machine\n" "provides in your particular network:<br>\n" "<b>Windows (R) or Samba (SMB/CIFS)</b><br>\n" -"To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be " -"installed.\n" +"To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be installed.\n" "The package provides the CUPS backend 'smb' which is a link to\n" "the <tt>/usr/bin/smbspool</tt> program which actually sends the data\n" "to a SMB printer share.<br>\n" @@ -2534,8 +2472,7 @@ "the following device URI to access a 'Fun Printer 1000+' share:<br>\n" "smb://John%20Doe:%40home%21@MYGROUP/homeserver/Fun%20Printer%201000%2B<br>\n" "For <b>more information</b> have a look at <tt>man smbspool</tt> and<br>\n" -"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:" -"Printing_via_SMB_(Samba)_Share_or_Windows_Share<br>\n" +"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Printing_via_SMB_(Samba)_Share_or_Windows_Share<br>\n" "'Windows' and 'Active Directory' are registered trademarks\n" "of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.<br>\n" "<b>Traditional UNIX Server (LPR)</b><br>\n" @@ -2603,12 +2540,10 @@ "The last parameter is the original URI, which the queue had before.<br>\n" "Example:<br>\n" "beh:/1/3/5/socket://ip-address:port-number<br>\n" -"The beh backend tries to access a network printer 3 times with 5 second " -"delay\n" +"The beh backend tries to access a network printer 3 times with 5 second delay\n" "between the attempts. If access still fails, the queue is not disabled\n" "and the print job is lost.<br>\n" -"For <b>more information</b> have a look at <tt>/usr/lib[64]/cups/backend/" -"beh</tt> and<br>\n" +"For <b>more information</b> have a look at <tt>/usr/lib[64]/cups/backend/beh</tt> and<br>\n" "http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/OpenPrinting/Database/BackendErrorHandler\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -2618,8 +2553,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Printing Via Network</big></b><br>\n" -"Usually CUPS (Common Unix Printing System) is used to print via network." -"<br>\n" +"Usually CUPS (Common Unix Printing System) is used to print via network.<br>\n" "By default CUPS uses its so called 'Browsing' mode\n" "to make printers available via network.<br>\n" "In this case remote CUPS servers must publish their printers via network\n" @@ -2675,10 +2609,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "If you print only via network and if you use only one single CUPS server,\n" -"there is no need to use CUPS Browsing and have a CUPS daemon running on your " -"host.\n" -"Instead it is simpler to specify the CUPS server and access it directly." -"<br>\n" +"there is no need to use CUPS Browsing and have a CUPS daemon running on your host.\n" +"Instead it is simpler to specify the CUPS server and access it directly.<br>\n" "A possible drawback is that application programs may be delayed\n" "for some time (until a timeout happens) when they try\n" "to access the CUPS server but it is actually not available\n" @@ -2712,8 +2644,7 @@ "Usually CUPS (Common Unix Printing System) should be set up to use\n" "its so called 'Browsing' mode to make printers available via network.<br>\n" "In this case CUPS servers publish their local print queues via network\n" -"and accordingly on CUPS client systems the CUPS daemon process (cupsd) must " -"run\n" +"and accordingly on CUPS client systems the CUPS daemon process (cupsd) must run\n" "which is listening for incoming information about published printers.<br>\n" "CUPS Browsing information is received via UDP port 631.\n" "</p>" @@ -2733,17 +2664,14 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "First of all CUPS client systems must be allowed to access the CUPS server.\n" -"Then specify whether or not printers should be published to the clients." -"<br>\n" +"Then specify whether or not printers should be published to the clients.<br>\n" "In a local network the usual way to set up CUPS Browsing is\n" "to allow remote access for all hosts in the local network\n" "and to publish printers to all those hosts.<br>\n" "It is not required to publish printers in any case.<br>\n" -"If you have only one single CUPS server, there is no need to use CUPS " -"Browsing.\n" +"If you have only one single CUPS server, there is no need to use CUPS Browsing.\n" "Instead it is simpler to specify the CUPS server on the client systems\n" -"(via 'Printing Via Network') so that the clients access the server " -"directly.\n" +"(via 'Printing Via Network') so that the clients access the server directly.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -2854,8 +2782,7 @@ "<br>\n" "The following error policies exist:<br>\n" "Stop the printer and keep the job for future printing.<br>\n" -"Re-send the job from the beginning after waiting some time (30 seconds by " -"default).<br>\n" +"Re-send the job from the beginning after waiting some time (30 seconds by default).<br>\n" "Abort and delete the job and proceed with the next job.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -2988,8 +2915,7 @@ #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:128 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"A locally running CUPS daemon is required, but it seems to be not " -"accessible.\n" +"A locally running CUPS daemon is required, but it seems to be not accessible.\n" "Check with 'lpstat -h localhost -r' whether a local cupsd is accessible.\n" "A non-accessible cupsd leads to an endless sequence of further failures.\n" msgstr "" @@ -3041,8 +2967,7 @@ #. so that it is now no longer a real client-only config and #. therefore the Printerlib::client_* values must be determined anew: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:226 src/include/printer/overview.rb:237 -msgid "" -"A non-accessible server leads to an endless sequence of delays and failures." +msgid "A non-accessible server leads to an endless sequence of delays and failures." msgstr "一個無法存取的伺服器會導致無窮盡的延遲與失敗。" #. where %1 will be replaced by the CUPS server name. @@ -3070,8 +2995,7 @@ #. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when a remote queue was selected to be deleted: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:610 -msgid "" -"This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be deleted." +msgid "This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be deleted." msgstr "這是一個遠端設定。只有本地組態設定可被刪除。" #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:617 @@ -3080,9 +3004,7 @@ #. Body of a confirmation popup before a queue will be deleted: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:619 -msgid "" -"The selected configuration would be deleted immediately and cannot be " -"restored." +msgid "The selected configuration would be deleted immediately and cannot be restored." msgstr "所選定的組態設定會立刻被刪除且無法復原。" #. 'Yes' button label of a confirmation popup before a queue will be deleted: @@ -3138,9 +3060,7 @@ #. When this command fails for whatever reason, it is a safe fallback #. to assume that there are no pending jobs in the queue: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:731 -msgid "" -"There are pending print jobs which might be deleted before the testpage is " -"printed." +msgid "There are pending print jobs which might be deleted before the testpage is printed." msgstr "還有待列印的工作，這些可能需要刪除才能印出測試頁。" #. where %1 will be replaced by the queue name. @@ -3273,8 +3193,7 @@ msgstr "若需完整紀錄，請參閱 /var/log/cups/error_log 檔。" #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1051 -msgid "" -"CUPS log information while processing the testpage for %1 (English only)" +msgid "CUPS log information while processing the testpage for %1 (English only)" msgstr "進行測試列印 %1 時的 CUPS 紀錄資訊 (僅有英文)" #. but the test_print_cups_error_log was effectively empty, @@ -3285,9 +3204,7 @@ #. show a very generic info to the user to show at least something: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1078 -msgid "" -"When printing via a remote system fails, you may ask an admin of the remote " -"system." +msgid "When printing via a remote system fails, you may ask an admin of the remote system." msgstr "當經由遠端系統列印失敗，您可以詢問遠端系統的管理者。" #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: @@ -3301,8 +3218,7 @@ #. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when a remote queue was selected to be modified: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1164 -msgid "" -"This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be modified." +msgid "This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be modified." msgstr "這是遠端設定。只有本地設定可被修改。" #. An entry for a ComboBox from which the user can select that the CUPS error policy @@ -3359,9 +3275,7 @@ #. PopupYesNoHeadline headline #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: #: src/include/printer/policies.rb:139 -msgid "" -"A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with setting policies for the local " -"system." +msgid "A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with setting policies for the local system." msgstr "遠端 CUPS 伺服器設定和本地系統的設定政策衝突。" #. where %1 will be replaced by the print queue name. @@ -3604,8 +3518,7 @@ #. they are at least informend why there may be still remote queues: #: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:727 msgid "" -"When switching from 'accept printer announcements' to 'not accept " -"announcements'\n" +"When switching from 'accept printer announcements' to 'not accept announcements'\n" "or after 'request printer information from CUPS servers' was disabled\n" "it takes usually 5 minutes until already received information faded away..." msgstr "" @@ -3690,17 +3603,14 @@ #. TextEntry to allow remote access to local print queues #. for hosts and/or networks: #: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:180 -msgid "" -"Allow access from those IP addresses or &network/netmask (separated by space)" +msgid "Allow access from those IP addresses or &network/netmask (separated by space)" msgstr "允許從這些 IP 位址或網路/網路遮罩的存取 (用空白分隔)(&N)" #. TextEntry to publish local print queues #. to IP addresses and/or network broadcast addresses: #: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:192 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Publish to these IP addresses or network &broadcast addresses (separated by " -"space)" +msgid "Publish to these IP addresses or network &broadcast addresses (separated by space)" msgstr "公佈到這些 IP 位址或網路廣播位址 (用空白分隔)(&B)" #. A CheckBox label to publish local print queues by default @@ -3762,9 +3672,7 @@ #. PopupYesNoHeadline headline #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: #: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:643 -msgid "" -"A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with sharing local printer " -"configurations." +msgid "A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with sharing local printer configurations." msgstr "遠端 CUPS 伺服器設定和分享本地印表機設定衝突。" #. Only "Printing via Network" configuration of printer. @@ -4182,8 +4090,7 @@ #: src/modules/Printer.rb:2691 msgid "" "Launched hp-setup.\n" -"You must finish hp-setup before you can proceed with the printer " -"configuration.\n" +"You must finish hp-setup before you can proceed with the printer configuration.\n" msgstr "" "已啟動的 hp-setup。\n" "在您進行印表機組態之前必須先結束 hp-setup。\n" @@ -4203,15 +4110,12 @@ #. Is the package available to be installed? #. Package::Available returns nil if no package source is available. #: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:179 -msgid "" -"Required package %1 is not installed and there is no package repository " -"available." +msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and there is no package repository available." msgstr "未安裝需要的套件 %1，也沒有可用的套件庫來安裝此套件。" #. Message of a Popup::Error where %1 will be replaced by the package name: #: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:194 -msgid "" -"Required package %1 is not installed and not available in the repository." +msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and not available in the repository." msgstr "未安裝需要的套件 %1，也無法用套件庫安裝。" #. Only a simple message because: @@ -4386,22 +4290,17 @@ #~ msgid "not set" #~ msgstr "未設定" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Failed to set 'ConfigureNewPrinters=yes' in /etc/cups-autoconfig.conf" +#~ msgid "Failed to set 'ConfigureNewPrinters=yes' in /etc/cups-autoconfig.conf" #~ msgstr "在 /etc/cups-autoconfig.conf 設定 'ConfigureNewPrinters=yes' 失敗" #~ msgid "Failed to set 'ConfigureNewPrinters=no' in /etc/cups-autoconfig.conf" #~ msgstr "在 /etc/cups-autoconfig.conf 設定 'ConfigureNewPrinters=no' 失敗" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Failed to set 'DisablePrintersOnRemoval=yes' in /etc/cups-autoconfig.conf" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "在 /etc/cups-autoconfig.conf 設定 'DisablePrintersOnRemoval=yes' 失敗" +#~ msgid "Failed to set 'DisablePrintersOnRemoval=yes' in /etc/cups-autoconfig.conf" +#~ msgstr "在 /etc/cups-autoconfig.conf 設定 'DisablePrintersOnRemoval=yes' 失敗" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Failed to set 'DisablePrintersOnRemoval=no' in /etc/cups-autoconfig.conf" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "在 /etc/cups-autoconfig.conf 設定 'DisablePrintersOnRemoval=no' 失敗" +#~ msgid "Failed to set 'DisablePrintersOnRemoval=no' in /etc/cups-autoconfig.conf" +#~ msgstr "在 /etc/cups-autoconfig.conf 設定 'DisablePrintersOnRemoval=no' 失敗" #~ msgid "Failed to set 'DefaultCUPSPolicy=%1' in /etc/cups-autoconfig.conf" #~ msgstr "在 /etc/cups-autoconfig.conf 設定 'DefaultCUPSPolicy=%1' 失敗" @@ -4417,12 +4316,10 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "If there is no CUPS server in your network or if you must additionally " -#~ "use\n" +#~ "If there is no CUPS server in your network or if you must additionally use\n" #~ "another kind of print server (e.g. print via a Windows/SMB server\n" #~ "or print via a traditional Unix LPR server) or if you must access\n" -#~ "a network printer directly, you have to set up an appropriate print " -#~ "queue\n" +#~ "a network printer directly, you have to set up an appropriate print queue\n" #~ "on your host.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" @@ -4451,10 +4348,8 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "If you print only via network and if you use only one single CUPS " -#~ "server,\n" -#~ "there is no need to use CUPS Browsing and have a CUPS daemon running on " -#~ "your host.\n" +#~ "If you print only via network and if you use only one single CUPS server,\n" +#~ "there is no need to use CUPS Browsing and have a CUPS daemon running on your host.\n" #~ "Instead it is simpler to specify the CUPS server and access it directly.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/product-creator.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/product-creator.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/product-creator.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: product-creator\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-10-05 22:24+0800\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -540,17 +540,13 @@ #. help text #: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:787 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Edit</b> to change selected image configuration or create the " -"image.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Edit</b> to change selected image configuration or create the image.</p>" msgstr "<p>使用 <b>編輯</b> 以變更選定影像的組態或建立影像。</p>" #. help text #: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:791 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>Delete the directory with the selected configuration by selecting " -"<b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Delete the directory with the selected configuration by selecting <b>Delete</b>.</p>" msgstr "<p>刪除選定組態的目錄，使用 <b>刪除</b>.</p>" #. help text, %1 is directory @@ -849,8 +845,7 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1512 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> " -"to add\n" +"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> to add\n" "more <b>add-on</b> selections and packages.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -888,8 +883,7 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1830 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Sign</b></big><br>\n" -"To make it possible for users to verify your product, sign it with a GPG " -"key. \n" +"To make it possible for users to verify your product, sign it with a GPG key. \n" "This key is checked when the product is added as a repository.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>簽署</b></big><br>\n" @@ -901,15 +895,9 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1837 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<P>If the product is not signed, Yast automatically adds the option " -"'Insecure:\n" -"1' to the linuxrc configuration file, otherwise linuxrc would deny loading " -"an unsigned installation system at boot. See http://en.opensuse.org/Linuxrc " -"for more information.</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P>如果此產品未被簽署，YaST 會自動加入選項 'Insecure: 1' 到 linuxrc 設定檔" -"中， 否則 linuxrc 會在開機時拒絕載入未被簽署的安裝系統。請參閱 http://en." -"opensuse.org/Linuxrc 取得更多資訊。</P>" +"<P>If the product is not signed, Yast automatically adds the option 'Insecure:\n" +"1' to the linuxrc configuration file, otherwise linuxrc would deny loading an unsigned installation system at boot. See http://en.opensuse.org/Linuxrc for more information.</P>" +msgstr "<P>如果此產品未被簽署，YaST 會自動加入選項 'Insecure: 1' 到 linuxrc 設定檔中， 否則 linuxrc 會在開機時拒絕載入未被簽署的安裝系統。請參閱 http://en.opensuse.org/Linuxrc 取得更多資訊。</P>" #: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1846 msgid "Signing the Product on the Medium" @@ -977,8 +965,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>For example, \n" "configure the CD for automatic installations and specify the installation\n" -"source location. If you are not sure, leave the file untouched and the " -"original is used.</p>\n" +"source location. If you are not sure, leave the file untouched and the original is used.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>例如，\n" "設定光碟的自動安裝，並指定安裝\n" @@ -1056,16 +1043,13 @@ msgid "" "<p>Use <b>Create Product</b> to create the ISO image or installation\n" "repository directory with the selected product.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>使用 <b>建立影像</b> 使用您選擇的產品建立 ISO 影像或安裝套件庫目錄。</p>" +msgstr "<p>使用 <b>建立影像</b> 使用您選擇的產品建立 ISO 影像或安裝套件庫目錄。</p>" #. overview dialog help part 5 #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:85 msgid "" -"<p>Press <b>Create Image with KIWI</b> for additional configuration of " -"various\n" -"types of images, such as Live media or Xen images, with the KIWI image " -"system.</p>" +"<p>Press <b>Create Image with KIWI</b> for additional configuration of various\n" +"types of images, such as Live media or Xen images, with the KIWI image system.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>按 <b>使用 KIWI 建立影像</b> 以使用 KIWI 影像系統對各種\n" "類型的影像(像是 Live 媒體或 Xen 影像)進行進一步設定。</p>" @@ -1122,14 +1106,11 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:114 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Target Architecture</big></b><br>\n" -"It is possible to create a product for a different architecture than that " -"of\n" +"It is possible to create a product for a different architecture than that of\n" "the machine you are currently working on.\n" "All selected repositories must support the target architecture.<br>\n" -"<b>Note:</b> KIWI does not support different architectures yet, do not " -"change\n" -"the architecture if you intend to create a KIWI image from the current " -"configuration.</p>\n" +"<b>Note:</b> KIWI does not support different architectures yet, do not change\n" +"the architecture if you intend to create a KIWI image from the current configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Configure2 dialog help 1/2 @@ -1178,10 +1159,8 @@ #. help text - the base selection dialog 2/4 #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:147 msgid "" -"<p>One of the used repositories must be marked as the base product. The " -"base\n" -"product repository should be bootable to ensure the newly created product is " -"also\n" +"<p>One of the used repositories must be marked as the base product. The base\n" +"product repository should be bootable to ensure the newly created product is also\n" "bootable.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>其中一個使用的套件庫必須標示為基礎產品。\n" @@ -1190,16 +1169,13 @@ #. help text - the base selection dialog 3/4 #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:153 -msgid "" -"<p>The other repositories will be used as add-ons for the base repository." +msgid "<p>The other repositories will be used as add-ons for the base repository.</p>" msgstr "<p>其他套件庫將視為基礎套件庫的附加。</p>" #. help text - the base selection dialog 4/4 #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:157 msgid "" -"<p>The product creator solves dependencies of the selected products and " -"proposes\n" +"<p>The product creator solves dependencies of the selected products and proposes\n" "the base product. If the proposed value is wrong, select the right base\n" "repository from the list.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1377,16 +1353,12 @@ #. popup text #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1513 msgid "" -"<p>Packages from section '%1' are not available with selected repositories:\n" +"<p>Packages from section '%1' are not available with selected repositories:</p>\n" "<p>%2.</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"Either remove the packages from the section, check the detailed package " -"selection or ignore the situation.</p>\n" +"Either remove the packages from the section, check the detailed package selection or ignore the situation.</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"Going to detailed package selection and accepting the view without any " -"further changes results in removal of problematic packages from the " -"section.\n" +"Going to detailed package selection and accepting the view without any further changes results in removal of problematic packages from the section.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1515,9 +1487,7 @@ #. informative label #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2277 -msgid "" -"Editing of following files is disabled for configurations imported from " -"Studio." +msgid "Editing of following files is disabled for configurations imported from Studio." msgstr "" #. tab header @@ -1534,8 +1504,7 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2367 msgid "" "<p>Select the value for image <b>Compression</b>. This will modify the\n" -"<i>flags</i> value of the image type. Check the kiwi manual for an " -"explanation of available values.</p>" +"<i>flags</i> value of the image type. Check the kiwi manual for an explanation of available values.</p>" msgstr "" #. combo box label @@ -1555,11 +1524,8 @@ #. help text for "&Ignored software" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2424 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>For <b>ignored software</b>, enter each entry (like 'smtp_daemon') on a " -"new line.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>在 <b>忽略的軟體</b>， 輸入每一個內容 (像是 'smtp_daemon') 每行一個</p>" +msgid "<p>For <b>ignored software</b>, enter each entry (like 'smtp_daemon') on a new line.</p>" +msgstr "<p>在 <b>忽略的軟體</b>， 輸入每一個內容 (像是 'smtp_daemon') 每行一個</p>" #. label #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2431 @@ -1568,11 +1534,8 @@ #. help text for "&Ignored software" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2436 -msgid "" -"<p>Each entry of <b>Packages to Delete</b> is one package name to be " -"uninstalled from the target image.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>每個 <b>要刪除的套件</b> 的內容是將要從目標影像中反安裝的套件名稱。</p>" +msgid "<p>Each entry of <b>Packages to Delete</b> is one package name to be uninstalled from the target image.</p>" +msgstr "<p>每個 <b>要刪除的套件</b> 的內容是將要從目標影像中反安裝的套件名稱。</p>" #. textentry label #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2443 @@ -1592,8 +1555,7 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2461 msgid "" "<p>Set the image <b>Size</b> in the specified <b>Unit</b>.\n" -"If <b>Additive</b> is checked, the meaning of <b>Size</b> is different: it " -"is the minimal free space available on the image.</p>" +"If <b>Additive</b> is checked, the meaning of <b>Size</b> is different: it is the minimal free space available on the image.</p>" msgstr "" #. combo box label (MB/GB values) @@ -1614,9 +1576,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2489 -msgid "" -"<p>To create an encrypted file system, check <b>Encrypt Image with LUKS</b> " -"and enter the password.</p>" +msgid "<p>To create an encrypted file system, check <b>Encrypt Image with LUKS</b> and enter the password.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1644,13 +1604,8 @@ #. help text #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2531 -msgid "" -"<p>Define the path to the <b>Directory with System Configuration</b> (the " -"<tt>root</tt> directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of " -"the image tree using <tt>cp -a</tt>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>定義路徑指向 <b>系統組態的目錄</b> (即 <tt>root</tt> 目錄)。 輸入的目錄將" -"使用 <tt>cp -a</tt> 複製到影像樹的 root 。</p>" +msgid "<p>Define the path to the <b>Directory with System Configuration</b> (the <tt>root</tt> directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of the image tree using <tt>cp -a</tt>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>定義路徑指向 <b>系統組態的目錄</b> (即 <tt>root</tt> 目錄)。 輸入的目錄將使用 <tt>cp -a</tt> 複製到影像樹的 root 。</p>" #. label (above table) #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2551 @@ -1664,13 +1619,8 @@ #. help for table with users #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2561 -msgid "" -"<p>Configure the <b>Directory with System Configuration</b> (the <tt>root directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of the image " -"tree using <tt>cp -a</tt>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>設定 <b>系統組態的目錄</b> (即 <tt>root</tt> 目錄)。 輸入的目錄將使用 " -"<tt>cp -a</tt> 複製到影像樹的 root 。</p>" +msgid "<p>Configure the <b>Directory with System Configuration</b> (the <tt>root</tt> directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of the image tree using <tt>cp -a</tt>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>設定 <b>系統組態的目錄</b> (即 <tt>root</tt> 目錄)。 輸入的目錄將使用 <tt>cp -a</tt> 複製到影像樹的 root 。</p>" #. label (above table) #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2588 @@ -1684,13 +1634,8 @@ #. help for table with users #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2598 -msgid "" -"<p>Configure the <b>Directory with Scripts</b> (the <tt>config</tt> " -"directory). It contains scripts that are run after the installation of all " -"the image packages.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>設定 <b>程序檔目錄</b> (即 <tt>config</tt> 目錄)。 它包含了安裝所有影響套" -"件後要執行的程序。</p>" +msgid "<p>Configure the <b>Directory with Scripts</b> (the <tt>config</tt> directory). It contains scripts that are run after the installation of all the image packages.</p>" +msgstr "<p>設定 <b>程序檔目錄</b> (即 <tt>config</tt> 目錄)。 它包含了安裝所有影響套件後要執行的程序。</p>" #. textentry label #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2627 @@ -1710,13 +1655,8 @@ msgstr "影像組態程序檔(&M)" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2646 -msgid "" -"<p>Edit your <b>Image Configuration Script</b>, called <tt>config.sh</tt>. " -"This script is run at the end of the installation but before the package " -"scripts have run.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>編輯您的 <b>影像組態程序</b>， 取名為 <tt>config.sh</tt>。 這個程序將在安" -"裝完成後、套件程序前執行。</p>" +msgid "<p>Edit your <b>Image Configuration Script</b>, called <tt>config.sh</tt>. This script is run at the end of the installation but before the package scripts have run.</p>" +msgstr "<p>編輯您的 <b>影像組態程序</b>， 取名為 <tt>config.sh</tt>。 這個程序將在安裝完成後、套件程序前執行。</p>" #. textentry label #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2666 @@ -1724,13 +1664,8 @@ msgstr "含有程序檔的目錄路徑(&T)" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2667 -msgid "" -"<p>The optional <b>Directory with Scripts</b> (<tt>config</tt> directory) " -"contains scripts that are run after the installation of all the image " -"packages.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>選項 <b>程序目錄</b> (<tt>config</tt> 目錄) 包含了安裝所有影像套件之後要執" -"行的程序。</p>" +msgid "<p>The optional <b>Directory with Scripts</b> (<tt>config</tt> directory) contains scripts that are run after the installation of all the image packages.</p>" +msgstr "<p>選項 <b>程序目錄</b> (<tt>config</tt> 目錄) 包含了安裝所有影像套件之後要執行的程序。</p>" #. push button label #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2677 @@ -1743,12 +1678,8 @@ msgstr "清除程序檔(&L)" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2688 -msgid "" -"<p>Edit your <b>Cleanup Script</b> (<tt>images.sh</tt>). This script is run " -"at the beginning of the image creation process.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>編輯您的 <b>清理程序</b> (<tt>images.sh</tt>)。 這個程序將在影像建立步驟開" -"始時執行。</p>" +msgid "<p>Edit your <b>Cleanup Script</b> (<tt>images.sh</tt>). This script is run at the beginning of the image creation process.</p>" +msgstr "<p>編輯您的 <b>清理程序</b> (<tt>images.sh</tt>)。 這個程序將在影像建立步驟開始時執行。</p>" #. textentry label #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2698 @@ -1762,11 +1693,8 @@ #. help text for Author, Contact and Specification widgets #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2711 -msgid "" -"<p>Set the values for <b>Author</b> of the image, <b>Contact Information, and the image <b>Specification</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>設定此影像的 <b>作者</b> 、 <b>連絡資訊</b> 和影像的 <b>特色</b>。</p>" +msgid "<p>Set the values for <b>Author</b> of the image, <b>Contact Information</b>, and the image <b>Specification</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>設定此影像的 <b>作者</b> 、 <b>連絡資訊</b> 和影像的 <b>特色</b>。</p>" #. textentry label #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2724 @@ -1790,9 +1718,7 @@ #. help text for locale #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2762 -msgid "" -"<p>The value of <b>Locale</b> (e.g. <tt>en_US</tt>) defines the contents of " -"the RC_LANG variable in <t>/etc/sysconfig/language</tt>.</p>" +msgid "<p>The value of <b>Locale</b> (e.g. <tt>en_US</tt>) defines the contents of the RC_LANG variable in <t>/etc/sysconfig/language</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1802,9 +1728,7 @@ #. help text for keytable #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2778 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Keyboard Layout</b> specifies the name of the console keymap to use. " -"The value corresponds to a map file in <tt>/usr/share/kbd/keymaps</tt>.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Keyboard Layout</b> specifies the name of the console keymap to use. The value corresponds to a map file in <tt>/usr/share/kbd/keymaps</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1814,9 +1738,7 @@ #. help text for timezone #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2795 -msgid "" -"<p>It is possible to set a specific <b>Time zone</b>. Available time zones " -"are located in the <tt>/usr/share/zoneinfo</tt> directory.</p>" +msgid "<p>It is possible to set a specific <b>Time zone</b>. Available time zones are located in the <tt>/usr/share/zoneinfo</tt> directory.</p>" msgstr "" #. general help for users tab @@ -1858,8 +1780,7 @@ #. help for table with users #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2828 msgid "" -"<p>For each user, specify the <b>Name</b>, <b>Password</b>, <b>Home " -"Directory</b> and group\n" +"<p>For each user, specify the <b>Name</b>, <b>Password</b>, <b>Home Directory</b> and group\n" "to which the users belongs.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>為每位使用者指定 <b>名稱</b>，<b>密碼</b>， <b>家目錄</b>和使用者\n" @@ -1892,17 +1813,12 @@ #. help text for kiwi UI preparation #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2973 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the name of your image configuration. Base new configuration on " -"template from the list or on the directory with the existing configuration." -msgstr "" -"<p>輸入您的影像組態的名稱，基於從選單中的組態樣板或含有現存組態的目錄。</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter the name of your image configuration. Base new configuration on template from the list or on the directory with the existing configuration.</p>" +msgstr "<p>輸入您的影像組態的名稱，基於從選單中的組態樣板或含有現存組態的目錄。</p>" #. help text for kiwi UI preparation #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2980 -msgid "" -"<p>Place custom configuration templates under <tt>%1</tt> directory.</p>" +msgid "<p>Place custom configuration templates under <tt>%1</tt> directory.</p>" msgstr "<p>放置自訂組態樣板於 <tt>%1</tt>目錄。</p>" #. help text for kiwi UI preparation, cont. @@ -1917,13 +1833,8 @@ #. help text for kiwi UI preparation, cont. #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2994 -msgid "" -"<p>Modify the list of <b>Package Repositories</b> that will be used for " -"creating the image. Use <b>Add From System</b> to add one of the current " -"system repositories.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>修改將用來建立影像的 <b>套件庫</b> 列表。使用 <b>由系統中新增</b> 來新增一" -"個現存系統的套件庫。</p>" +msgid "<p>Modify the list of <b>Package Repositories</b> that will be used for creating the image. Use <b>Add From System</b> to add one of the current system repositories.</p>" +msgstr "<p>修改將用來建立影像的 <b>套件庫</b> 列表。使用 <b>由系統中新增</b> 來新增一個現存系統的套件庫。</p>" #. help text for kiwi UI preparation, cont. #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2999 @@ -1944,9 +1855,7 @@ #. error popup #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3123 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Selected directory does not contain valid description of system " -"configuration." +msgid "Selected directory does not contain valid description of system configuration." msgstr "選擇不包含可用系統組態描述的目錄" #. busy popup Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/proxy.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/proxy.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/proxy.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2001-06-05 18:04+02:00\n" "Last-Translator: 裴寒牧 \n" "Language-Team: 中華 \n" @@ -200,10 +200,8 @@ #: src/clients/proxy_proposal.rb:454 src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:404 msgid "" "<p>Configure your Internet proxy (caching) settings here.</p>\n" -"<p><b>Note:</b> It is generally recommended to relogin for the settings to " -"take effect, \n" -"however in some cases the application may pick up new settings immediately. " -"Please check \n" +"<p><b>Note:</b> It is generally recommended to relogin for the settings to take effect, \n" +"however in some cases the application may pick up new settings immediately. Please check \n" "what your application (web browser, ftp client,...) supports. </p>" msgstr "" @@ -221,8 +219,7 @@ #. Proxy dialog help 3/8 #: src/clients/proxy_proposal.rb:465 src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:415 msgid "" -"<p><b>HTTPS Proxy URL</b> is the name of the proxy server for your secured " -"access\n" +"<p><b>HTTPS Proxy URL</b> is the name of the proxy server for your secured access\n" "to the World Wide Web (WWW).</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>HTTPS 代理 URL</b> 是代理伺服器的名稱，用來安全地存取\n" @@ -276,8 +273,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>If you are using a proxy server with authorization, enter\n" "the <b>Proxy User Name</b> and <b>Proxy Password</b>. A valid username\n" -"consists of printable ASCII characters only (except for quotation marks).\n" +"consists of printable ASCII characters only (except for quotation marks).</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>如果您使用需要權限的代理伺服器，請輸入\n" "<b>「代理使用者名稱」</b>和<b>「代理密碼」</b>。有效的使用者名稱\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/qt-pkg.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/qt-pkg.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/qt-pkg.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: qt-pkg\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-10-05 22:32+0800\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -306,20 +306,12 @@ msgstr "取消(&A)" #: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1455 -msgid "" -"<p><small>Cancel switching</a> system " -"packages to versions in repository %2</small></p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><small>取消切換</a> 系統套件到套件庫 " -"%2 的版本</small></p>" +msgid "<p><small>Cancel switching</a> system packages to versions in repository %2</small></p>" +msgstr "<p><small>取消切換</a> 系統套件到套件庫 %2 的版本</small></p>" #: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1474 -msgid "" -"<p>Switch system packages</a> to the " -"versions in this repository (%2)</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>切換系統套件</a> 到此套件庫 (%2) 的版本" +msgid "<p>Switch system packages</a> to the versions in this repository (%2)</p>" +msgstr "<p>切換系統套件</a> 到此套件庫 (%2) 的版本</p>" #: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1697 msgid "Added Subpackages:" @@ -349,15 +341,8 @@ msgstr "錯誤：磁碟空間不足！" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:186 -msgid "" -"<p>You can choose to install anyway if you know what you are doing, but you " -"risk getting a corrupted system that requires manual repairs. If you are not " -"absolutely sure how to handle such a case, press <b>Cancel</b> now and " -"deselect some packages.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>如果您知道如何進行，可以選擇繼續安裝，但是可能會造成系統毀損而需要手動修" -"復。如果您不是完全確定如何處理這類問題，立即按<b>「取消」</b>並取消選取一些套" -"件。</p>" +msgid "<p>You can choose to install anyway if you know what you are doing, but you risk getting a corrupted system that requires manual repairs. If you are not absolutely sure how to handle such a case, press <b>Cancel</b> now and deselect some packages.</p>" +msgstr "<p>如果您知道如何進行，可以選擇繼續安裝，但是可能會造成系統毀損而需要手動修復。如果您不是完全確定如何處理這類問題，立即按<b>「取消」</b>並取消選取一些套件。</p>" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:194 msgid "C&ontinue Anyway" @@ -381,9 +366,7 @@ msgstr "自動變更" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:301 -msgid "" -"In addition to your manual selections, the following packages have been " -"changed to resolve dependencies:" +msgid "In addition to your manual selections, the following packages have been changed to resolve dependencies:" msgstr "除了手動的選項外，已變更下列套件，以解決依存度：" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:305 src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:326 @@ -397,9 +380,7 @@ msgstr "不支援的套件" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:322 -msgid "" -"Please realize that the following selected software is either unsupported or " -"requires an additional customer contract for support." +msgid "Please realize that the following selected software is either unsupported or requires an additional customer contract for support." msgstr "請您瞭解，下列所選的軟體為不支援的，或是需要額外的客戶連絡來尋求支援。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:421 @@ -413,9 +394,7 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:65 -msgid "" -"<b>Note:</b> This is a just a short overview. Refer to the manual for " -"details." +msgid "<b>Note:</b> This is a just a short overview. Refer to the manual for details." msgstr "<b>注意事項：</b>這僅是簡短綜覽。請參閱手冊瞭解詳細資訊。" #. Help specific to online update mode @@ -424,174 +403,92 @@ msgstr "您可以在此對話方塊中選取要下載、安裝的修補程式。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:73 -msgid "" -"The list on the left side contains available patches along with the " -"respective patch kind (security, recommended, or optional) and the " -"(estimated) download size." -msgstr "" -"左邊的清單包含可用的修補程式，以及相關的修補程式類型 (安全性、建議或選擇性項" -"目) 和 (預估) 下載大小。" +msgid "The list on the left side contains available patches along with the respective patch kind (security, recommended, or optional) and the (estimated) download size." +msgstr "左邊的清單包含可用的修補程式，以及相關的修補程式類型 (安全性、建議或選擇性項目) 和 (預估) 下載大小。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:76 -msgid "" -"This list normally contains only those patches that are not installed on " -"your system yet. You can change that with the <b>Include Installed Patches check box below the list." -msgstr "" -"此清單通常僅包含系統中尚未安裝的修補程式。使用清單底下的<b>「包含已安裝的修補" -"程式」</b>核取方塊，可以變更清單內容。" +msgid "This list normally contains only those patches that are not installed on your system yet. You can change that with the <b>Include Installed Patches</b> check box below the list." +msgstr "此清單通常僅包含系統中尚未安裝的修補程式。使用清單底下的<b>「包含已安裝的修補程式」</b>核取方塊，可以變更清單內容。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:78 -msgid "" -"The <b>Patch Description</b> field contains a longer explanation of the " -"currently selected patch. Click a patch in the list to view its description " -"here." -msgstr "" -"<b>「修補程式描述」</b>欄位包含目前所選修補程式較長的解說。按一下清單中的修補" -"程式，在此檢視它的描述。" +msgid "The <b>Patch Description</b> field contains a longer explanation of the currently selected patch. Click a patch in the list to view its description here." +msgstr "<b>「修補程式描述」</b>欄位包含目前所選修補程式較長的解說。按一下清單中的修補程式，在此檢視它的描述。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:80 -msgid "" -"The package list on the right side shows the contents of the currently " -"selected patch, i.e., the packages it contains. You cannot install or delete " -"individual packages from a patch, only the patch as a whole. This is " -"intentional to avoid system inconsistencies." -msgstr "" -"右邊的套件清單會顯示目前所選修補程式的內容，例如其所包含的套件。您無法安裝或" -"刪除修補程式中的個別套件，僅能安裝整個修補程式。這是為了避免造成系統不一致。" +msgid "The package list on the right side shows the contents of the currently selected patch, i.e., the packages it contains. You cannot install or delete individual packages from a patch, only the patch as a whole. This is intentional to avoid system inconsistencies." +msgstr "右邊的套件清單會顯示目前所選修補程式的內容，例如其所包含的套件。您無法安裝或刪除修補程式中的個別套件，僅能安裝整個修補程式。這是為了避免造成系統不一致。" #. Translators: Please keep the reference to "filter views" to distinguish between "filter views" that #. affect the amount of visible packages in the package list and "details views" ( below the package list ) #. that show details about the ( one ) currently selected package in the package list. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:88 -msgid "" -"In addition to <b>Patches</b>, you can also select one of the other filter " -"views from <b>Filter</b> at the upper left:" -msgstr "" -"除了<b>修補程式</b>，您還可以從左上方的「<b>過濾器</b>」的其他過濾器檢視中選" -"取其中一種：" +msgid "In addition to <b>Patches</b>, you can also select one of the other filter views from <b>Filter</b> at the upper left:" +msgstr "除了<b>修補程式</b>，您還可以從左上方的「<b>過濾器</b>」的其他過濾器檢視中選取其中一種：" #. Help specific to normal (non-online-update) mode #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:96 -msgid "" -"In this dialog, select which packages to install, update, or delete. You can " -"select individual packages or entire package \"selections\"." -msgstr "" -"在此對話方塊中，選取要安裝、更新或刪除的套件。您可以選取個別套件或整個套件" -"「選項」。" +msgid "In this dialog, select which packages to install, update, or delete. You can select individual packages or entire package \"selections\"." +msgstr "在此對話方塊中，選取要安裝、更新或刪除的套件。您可以選取個別套件或整個套件「選項」。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:98 -msgid "" -"Click the status icon for a package or selection to change the status or " -"right-click it to open a context menu." +msgid "Click the status icon for a package or selection to change the status or right-click it to open a context menu." msgstr "按一下套件或選項的狀態圖示變更狀態，或在上面按滑鼠右鍵開啟快顯功能表。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:100 -msgid "" -"Use the <b>Check Dependencies</b> button to resolve package dependencies. " -"Some packages require other packages to be installed. Some packages can only " -"be installed if certain other packages are not installed, too. This check " -"will automatically mark required packages for installation and it will warn " -"you if there are dependency conflicts." -msgstr "" -"使用<b>「檢查依存度」</b>按鈕可解決套件依存度。有些套件需要其他套件才能安裝。" -"而有些套件也只有在某些其他套件沒有安裝時才能安裝。此項檢查將自動標示安裝的必" -"要套件，而且如果有依存度衝突時，將會警告您。" +msgid "Use the <b>Check Dependencies</b> button to resolve package dependencies. Some packages require other packages to be installed. Some packages can only be installed if certain other packages are not installed, too. This check will automatically mark required packages for installation and it will warn you if there are dependency conflicts." +msgstr "使用<b>「檢查依存度」</b>按鈕可解決套件依存度。有些套件需要其他套件才能安裝。而有些套件也只有在某些其他套件沒有安裝時才能安裝。此項檢查將自動標示安裝的必要套件，而且如果有依存度衝突時，將會警告您。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:105 -msgid "" -"When you leave this dialog with <b>Accept</b>, this check will automatically " -"be performed." +msgid "When you leave this dialog with <b>Accept</b>, this check will automatically be performed." msgstr "以<b>「接受」</b>選項離開此對話方塊時，將會自動執行此檢查。" #. Translators: Please keep the reference to "filter views" to distinguish between "filter views" that #. affect the amount of visible packages in the package list and "details views" (below the package list) #. that show details about the (one) currently selected package in the package list. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:111 -msgid "" -"Select one of the available filter views with the <b>Filter</b> combo-box at " -"the upper left:" +msgid "Select one of the available filter views with the <b>Filter</b> combo-box at the upper left:" msgstr "使用左上角的<b>「過濾器」</b>組合方塊選取其中一個可用的過濾器檢視：" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:115 -msgid "" -"<b>Selections</b> shows some predefined sets of packages that logically " -"belong together." +msgid "<b>Selections</b> shows some predefined sets of packages that logically belong together." msgstr "<b>「選項」</b>會顯示一些邏輯上同屬之預先定義套件集。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:116 -msgid "" -"Use the check box next to the selection to select it as a whole. You can " -"also select or deselect individual packages in the package list at the right." -msgstr "" -"使用選項旁邊的核取方塊，選取全部。也可以在右邊的套件清單中選取或取消選取個別" -"的套件。" +msgid "Use the check box next to the selection to select it as a whole. You can also select or deselect individual packages in the package list at the right." +msgstr "使用選項旁邊的核取方塊，選取全部。也可以在右邊的套件清單中選取或取消選取個別的套件。" #. Help common to all modes: Description of the various filter views #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:124 -msgid "" -"<b>Package Groups</b> shows packages by category. You can expand and " -"collapse tree items to refine or generalize categories. Click any category " -"to display the packages in that category in the package list on the right " -"side." -msgstr "" -"<b>「套件群組」</b>會依類別顯示套件。您可以展開和摺疊樹目錄項目，縮小或歸納類" -"別。在右邊的套件清單中按一下任何類別，顯示其中的套件。" +msgid "<b>Package Groups</b> shows packages by category. You can expand and collapse tree items to refine or generalize categories. Click any category to display the packages in that category in the package list on the right side." +msgstr "<b>「套件群組」</b>會依類別顯示套件。您可以展開和摺疊樹目錄項目，縮小或歸納類別。在右邊的套件清單中按一下任何類別，顯示其中的套件。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:127 -msgid "" -" <b>Hint:</b> There is a \"zzz All\" entry at the very end of the list that " -"will show all packages. This may take a few seconds on slow machines." -msgstr "" -" <b>提示：</b> 清單最尾端有「zzz 全部」項目，表示將顯示所有套件。如果電腦較" -"慢，可能需費時幾秒鐘。" +msgid " <b>Hint:</b> There is a \"zzz All\" entry at the very end of the list that will show all packages. This may take a few seconds on slow machines." +msgstr " <b>提示：</b> 清單最尾端有「zzz 全部」項目，表示將顯示所有套件。如果電腦較慢，可能需費時幾秒鐘。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:130 -msgid "" -"<b>Search</b> allows you to search for packages that meet various criteria. " -"This is usually the easiest way to find a package if you know its name." -msgstr "" -"<b>「搜尋」</b>允許您搜尋符合各種標準的套件。如果知道套件名稱，通常最容易找到" -"套件。" +msgid "<b>Search</b> allows you to search for packages that meet various criteria. This is usually the easiest way to find a package if you know its name." +msgstr "<b>「搜尋」</b>允許您搜尋符合各種標準的套件。如果知道套件名稱，通常最容易找到套件。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:132 -msgid "" -"<b>Hint:</b> You can also use this to find out what package contains a " -"certain library. Search in the <b>Provides</b> RPM field." -msgstr "" -"<b>提示：</b>也可使用此方式找出包含特定文件庫的套件。在<b>「提供」</b> RPM 欄" -"位中搜尋。" +msgid "<b>Hint:</b> You can also use this to find out what package contains a certain library. Search in the <b>Provides</b> RPM field." +msgstr "<b>提示：</b>也可使用此方式找出包含特定文件庫的套件。在<b>「提供」</b> RPM 欄位中搜尋。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:135 -msgid "" -"<b>Installation Summary</b> by default shows the changes to your system -- " -"what packages will be installed, deleted, or updated." -msgstr "" -"<b>「安裝摘要」</b>預設會顯示系統的變更 -- 將安裝、刪除或更新哪些套件。" +msgid "<b>Installation Summary</b> by default shows the changes to your system -- what packages will be installed, deleted, or updated." +msgstr "<b>「安裝摘要」</b>預設會顯示系統的變更 -- 將安裝、刪除或更新哪些套件。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:137 -msgid "" -"It is generally a good idea to use <b>Check Dependencies</b> then switch to " -"<b>Installation Summary</b> before clicking <b>Accept</b>. This way you can " -"see all changes that will be made to your system." -msgstr "" -"通常比較好的做法為使用<b>「檢查依存度」</b>、切換到<b>「安裝摘要」</b>後，再" -"按一下<b>「接受」</b>。這樣您可以看到將對系統做的所有變更。" +msgid "It is generally a good idea to use <b>Check Dependencies</b> then switch to <b>Installation Summary</b> before clicking <b>Accept</b>. This way you can see all changes that will be made to your system." +msgstr "通常比較好的做法為使用<b>「檢查依存度」</b>、切換到<b>「安裝摘要」</b>後，再按一下<b>「接受」</b>。這樣您可以看到將對系統做的所有變更。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:140 -msgid "" -"You can also explicitly select what packages with what status to see here; " -"use the check boxes at the left side." +msgid "You can also explicitly select what packages with what status to see here; use the check boxes at the left side." msgstr "您也可以明確選取在此所見的套件及其狀態；請使用左邊的核取方塊。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:142 -msgid "" -"<b>Hint:</b> You can also reverse the effect of this filter. You can see " -"what packages remain the same on your system. Simply check <b>Keep</b> and " -"uncheck everything else." -msgstr "" -"<b>提示：</b>您也可以回復此過濾器的作用。您會看到系統上哪些套件會維持相同狀" -"態；只需選取<b>「保留」</b>並取消選取所有其他項目。" +msgid "<b>Hint:</b> You can also reverse the effect of this filter. You can see what packages remain the same on your system. Simply check <b>Keep</b> and uncheck everything else." +msgstr "<b>提示：</b>您也可以回復此過濾器的作用。您會看到系統上哪些套件會維持相同狀態；只需選取<b>「保留」</b>並取消選取所有其他項目。" #. Make sure all images used here are specified in #. helpimages_DATA in include/Makefile.am ! @@ -641,9 +538,7 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:186 -msgid "" -"This package is already installed. Update it or reinstall it (if the " -"versions are the same)." +msgid "This package is already installed. Update it or reinstall it (if the versions are the same)." msgstr "這個套件已經安裝。更新或重新安裝它 (如果版本相同)。" #. Translators: Package status short (!) description @@ -666,18 +561,11 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:199 -msgid "" -"This package is not installed and should not be installed under any " -"circumstances, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other " -"packages might have or get." -msgstr "" -"未安裝此套件，而且任何情況下都不要安裝，因為其他套件可能擁有或取得未解決的依" -"存度。" +msgid "This package is not installed and should not be installed under any circumstances, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get." +msgstr "未安裝此套件，而且任何情況下都不要安裝，因為其他套件可能擁有或取得未解決的依存度。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:203 src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:316 -msgid "" -"Packages set to \"taboo\" are treated as if they did not exist on any " -"installation media." +msgid "Packages set to \"taboo\" are treated as if they did not exist on any installation media." msgstr "設定為「禁用」的套件會視為不存在於任何安裝媒體上。" #. Translators: Package status short (!) description @@ -687,16 +575,11 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:209 -msgid "" -"This package is installed and should not be modified, especially not " -"because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get." -msgstr "" -"已安裝此套件，而且不應該修改，因為其他套件可能擁有或取得未解決的依存度。" +msgid "This package is installed and should not be modified, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get." +msgstr "已安裝此套件，而且不應該修改，因為其他套件可能擁有或取得未解決的依存度。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:213 -msgid "" -"Use this status for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by " -"newer versions that may come with the distribution." +msgid "Use this status for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by newer versions that may come with the distribution." msgstr "對於不應該由隨附的較新版本覆寫的協力廠商套件，請使用此狀態。" #. Translators: Package status short (!) description @@ -707,14 +590,11 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:220 -msgid "" -"This package will be installed automatically because some other package " -"needs it." +msgid "This package will be installed automatically because some other package needs it." msgstr "將自動安裝此套件，因為有些其他套件需要它。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:222 -msgid "" -"<b>Hint:</b> You may have to use \"taboo\" to get rid of such a package." +msgid "<b>Hint:</b> You may have to use \"taboo\" to get rid of such a package." msgstr "<b>提示：</b> 您可能需要使用「禁用」來移除這類套件。" #. Translators: Package status short (!) description @@ -725,9 +605,7 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:228 -msgid "" -"This package is already installed, but some other package needs a newer " -"version, so it will automatically be updated." +msgid "This package is already installed, but some other package needs a newer version, so it will automatically be updated." msgstr "已安裝此套件，但是有些其他套件需要較新版本，因此會自動更新。" #. Translators: Package status short (!) description @@ -738,9 +616,7 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:235 -msgid "" -"This package is already installed, but package dependencies require that it " -"is deleted." +msgid "This package is already installed, but package dependencies require that it is deleted." msgstr "已安裝此套件，但是套件依存度要求刪除它。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:236 @@ -765,12 +641,8 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:278 -msgid "" -"Get this package. Install it if it is not installed yet. Update it to the " -"latest version if it is installed and there is a newer version." -msgstr "" -"取得此套件。如果尚未安裝它，請安裝。如果已安裝且有更新版本，則請更新為最新版" -"本。" +msgid "Get this package. Install it if it is not installed yet. Update it to the latest version if it is installed and there is a newer version." +msgstr "取得此套件。如果尚未安裝它，請安裝。如果已安裝且有更新版本，則請更新為最新版本。" #. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:285 @@ -779,18 +651,12 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:287 -msgid "" -"Get rid of this package. Mark it as \"do not install\" if it is not " -"installed yet. Delete it if it is installed." -msgstr "" -"移除此套件。如果尚未安裝它，則將其標示為「不要安裝」。如果已安裝，則請刪除" -"它。" +msgid "Get rid of this package. Mark it as \"do not install\" if it is not installed yet. Delete it if it is installed." +msgstr "移除此套件。如果尚未安裝它，則將其標示為「不要安裝」。如果已安裝，則請刪除它。" #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:295 -msgid "" -"Update this package if it is installed and there is a newer version. Ignore " -"packages that are not installed." +msgid "Update this package if it is installed and there is a newer version. Ignore packages that are not installed." msgstr "如果已安裝此套件但有更新版本時，請更新它。忽略沒有安裝的套件。" #. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description @@ -800,22 +666,13 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:304 -msgid "" -"Undo the effect of \">\" above: Set package to \"keep\" if it is currently " -"set to \"update\". Ignore all other packages." -msgstr "" -"復原上述 \">\" 的作用：如果套件目前是設定為「更新」，則將其設定為「保留」。忽" -"略所有其他套件。" +msgid "Undo the effect of \">\" above: Set package to \"keep\" if it is currently set to \"update\". Ignore all other packages." +msgstr "復原上述 \">\" 的作用：如果套件目前是設定為「更新」，則將其設定為「保留」。忽略所有其他套件。" #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:312 -msgid "" -"Set this package to \"taboo\" if it is not installed: make sure this package " -"does not get installed, especially not because of unresolved dependencies " -"that other packages might have or get. " -msgstr "" -"若尚未安裝此套件，請將其設定為「禁用」：確定不會安裝此套件，因為其他套件可能" -"擁有或取得未解決的依存度。" +msgid "Set this package to \"taboo\" if it is not installed: make sure this package does not get installed, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get. " +msgstr "若尚未安裝此套件，請將其設定為「禁用」：確定不會安裝此套件，因為其他套件可能擁有或取得未解決的依存度。" #. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:322 @@ -824,18 +681,11 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:324 -msgid "" -"Set this package to \"protected\" if it is installed: make sure this package " -"will not be modified, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that " -"other packages might have or get. " -msgstr "" -"如果尚未安裝此套件，請將其設定為「保護的」：確定不會修改此套件，因為其他套件" -"可能擁有或取得未解決的依存度。" +msgid "Set this package to \"protected\" if it is installed: make sure this package will not be modified, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get. " +msgstr "如果尚未安裝此套件，請將其設定為「保護的」：確定不會修改此套件，因為其他套件可能擁有或取得未解決的依存度。" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:328 -msgid "" -"Use this for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by newer " -"versions that may come with the distribution." +msgid "Use this for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by newer versions that may come with the distribution." msgstr "對於不應該由隨附的較新版本覆寫的協力廠商套件，請使用此狀態。" #: src/YQPatternSelector.cc:180 src/YQPatternSelector.cc:248 @@ -896,12 +746,8 @@ msgstr "建立相依性解析程式測試個案" #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:391 -msgid "" -"<p>Use this to generate extensive logs to help tracking down bugs in the " -"dependency resolver. The logs will be stored in directory <br><tt>%1</tt></p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>使用此功能產生大量記錄以協助追蹤相依性解析程式中的錯誤。記錄會存放在目錄 " -"<br><tt>%1</tt> 中</p>" +msgid "<p>Use this to generate extensive logs to help tracking down bugs in the dependency resolver. The logs will be stored in directory <br><tt>%1</tt></p>" +msgstr "<p>使用此功能產生大量記錄以協助追蹤相依性解析程式中的錯誤。記錄會存放在目錄 <br><tt>%1</tt> 中</p>" #. parent #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:395 @@ -909,12 +755,8 @@ msgstr "解析程式測試個案" #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:410 -msgid "" -"<p>Dependency resolver test case written to <br><tt>%1</tt></p><p>Prepare " -"<tt>y2logs.tgz tar</tt> archive to attach to Bugzilla?</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>相依性解析程式測試個案寫入 <br><tt>%1</tt></p><p>準備將 <tt>y2logs.tgz " -"tar</tt> 歸檔附加至 Bugzilla？</p>" +msgid "<p>Dependency resolver test case written to <br><tt>%1</tt></p><p>Prepare <tt>y2logs.tgz tar</tt> archive to attach to Bugzilla?</p>" +msgstr "<p>相依性解析程式測試個案寫入 <br><tt>%1</tt></p><p>準備將 <tt>y2logs.tgz tar</tt> 歸檔附加至 Bugzilla？</p>" #. parent #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:413 @@ -923,12 +765,8 @@ #. caption #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:426 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Error</b> creating dependency resolver test case</p><p>Please check " -"disk space and permissions for <tt>%1</tt></p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>建立相依性解析程式時發生<b>錯誤</b></p><p>請檢查磁碟空間和 <tt>%1</tt> 的" -"許可權</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Error</b> creating dependency resolver test case</p><p>Please check disk space and permissions for <tt>%1</tt></p>" +msgstr "<p>建立相依性解析程式時發生<b>錯誤</b></p><p>請檢查磁碟空間和 <tt>%1</tt> 的許可權</p>" #. startsWith #. filter Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/qt.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/qt.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/qt.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: qt\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2009-10-24 10:21+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/rdp.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/rdp.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/rdp.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2001-06-05 18:04+02:00\n" "Last-Translator: 裴寒牧 \n" "Language-Team: 中華 \n" @@ -91,8 +91,7 @@ "<p>如果開啟此功能，您能夠\n" "從另一台機器遠端管理此機器。使用 VNC\n" "用戶端，如 krdc (連線到 <tt><主機名稱>:%1</tt>)、或\n" -"可以使用 Java 相容的網頁瀏覽器 (連線到 <tt>http://<主機名稱>:%2/)。\n" +"可以使用 Java 相容的網頁瀏覽器 (連線到 <tt>http://<主機名稱>:%2/</tt>)。\n" "這種遠端管理型態的安全性比使用 SSH 低。</p>\n" #. Dialog frame title Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/rear.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/rear.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/rear.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2001-06-05 18:04+02:00\n" "Last-Translator: 裴寒牧 \n" "Language-Team: 中華 \n" @@ -46,9 +46,7 @@ msgstr "此系統不支援 ACPI 或 APM。" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:90 -msgid "" -"Do NOT expect the created backup to be useful for system recovery if you " -"ignore this warning." +msgid "Do NOT expect the created backup to be useful for system recovery if you ignore this warning." msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:104 @@ -134,56 +132,35 @@ #. help text for Rear #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:419 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>Configure Rear Relax and Recover (<b>ReaR</b>) backup for your computer." +msgid "<p>Configure Rear Relax and Recover (<b>ReaR</b>) backup for your computer.</p>" msgstr "<p>在此設定電腦的紅外線介面 (<b>IrDA</b>)。</p>" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:422 -msgid "" -"<p>Decide how to start your <b>Recovery System</b>. Choose USB if you want " -"to boot from an USB stick, or ISO for CD-ROM respectively.</p>" +msgid "<p>Decide how to start your <b>Recovery System</b>. Choose USB if you want to boot from an USB stick, or ISO for CD-ROM respectively.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:425 -msgid "" -"<p>Choose where the <b>Backup</b> should be stored. Select NFS if you have " -"to use a server that offers Network File System. Please specify the location " -"as follows: <tt>nfs://hostname/directory</tt>. You can also choose USB to " -"store your backup on an USB stick or USB disk.</p>" +msgid "<p>Choose where the <b>Backup</b> should be stored. Select NFS if you have to use a server that offers Network File System. Please specify the location as follows: <tt>nfs://hostname/directory</tt>. You can also choose USB to store your backup on an USB stick or USB disk.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:428 -msgid "" -"<p>If no USB devices are shown, attach an USB stick or an USB disk and click " -"<b>Rescan USB Devices</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>If no USB devices are shown, attach an USB stick or an USB disk and click <b>Rescan USB Devices</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:431 -msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Keep old backup</b> if you don't want the previous backup copy " -"to be overwritten.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select <b>Keep old backup</b> if you don't want the previous backup copy to be overwritten.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:434 -msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Advanced</b> menu offers to add <b>additional directories to the " -"backup</b> and <b>additional kernel modules to the rescue system</b>. That's " -"only useful if your backup doesn't contain all the needed directories or the " -"rescue system doesn't boot due to missing kernel modules.</p>" +msgid "<p>The <b>Advanced</b> menu offers to add <b>additional directories to the backup</b> and <b>additional kernel modules to the rescue system</b>. That's only useful if your backup doesn't contain all the needed directories or the rescue system doesn't boot due to missing kernel modules.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:437 -msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Save and run rear now</b> button runs rear and shows rear's " -"output. <strong>Make sure to test if the created backup works as expected on " -"your system!</strong></p>" +msgid "<p>The <b>Save and run rear now</b> button runs rear and shows rear's output. <strong>Make sure to test if the created backup works as expected on your system!</strong></p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:440 -msgid "" -"<p><b>OK</b> saves the configuration and quits while <b>Cancel</b> closes " -"the configuration dialog without saving.<p>" +msgid "<p><b>OK</b> saves the configuration and quits while <b>Cancel</b> closes the configuration dialog without saving.<p>" msgstr "" #. prepare advanced menu @@ -256,9 +233,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:590 -msgid "" -"Your rear configuration file contains options this YaST2 module cannot " -"configure.\n" +msgid "Your rear configuration file contains options this YaST2 module cannot configure.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:595 Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/registration.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/registration.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/registration.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: registration\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-08-15 15:56+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-10-05 22:38+0800\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -22,80 +22,94 @@ "X-Generator: Lokalize 1.2\n" #. popup heading (in bold) -#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:34 +#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:35 #, fuzzy msgid "Local Registration Servers" msgstr "區域註冊伺服器" -#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:36 +#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:37 msgid "" "Select a detected registration server from the list\n" "or the default SUSE registration server." msgstr "" #. error popup -#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:63 +#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:65 #, fuzzy msgid "No registration server selected." msgstr "使用自訂註冊伺服器" #. %s is the default SCC URL -#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:98 +#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:100 #, fuzzy msgid "SUSE Customer Center (%s)" msgstr "Novell 客戶中心組態" #. popup message -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:55 +#. popup message +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:52 src/clients/scc_auto.rb:48 #, fuzzy msgid "Contacting the Registration Server" msgstr "區域註冊伺服器" #. reset the user input in case an exception is raised -#. register the system -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:149 src/clients/scc_auto.rb:164 +#. nil = use the default URL +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:147 src/clients/scc_auto.rb:169 msgid "Registering the System..." msgstr "" #. then register the product(s) -#. then register the product(s) #. %s is name of given product -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:158 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:201 -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:470 +#. register the base product +#. %s is name of given product +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:156 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:427 +#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:177 src/clients/scc_auto.rb:192 #, fuzzy msgid "Registering %s ..." msgstr "註冊代碼" +#. updating base product registration, %s is a new base product name +#. updating registered addon/extension, %s is an extension name +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:206 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:236 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Updating /etc/hosts ..." +msgid "Updating to %s ..." +msgstr "正在更新 /etc/hosts ..." + #. display the registration update dialog #. dialog title #. dialog title #. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:214 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:308 -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:555 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:587 -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:371 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:260 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:352 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:504 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:552 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:92 #, fuzzy msgid "Registration" msgstr "註冊代碼" -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:215 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:261 #, fuzzy msgid "Registration is being updated..." msgstr "組態名稱遺失。" +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:262 +#, fuzzy +msgid "The previous registration is being updated." +msgstr "組態名稱遺失。" + #. automatic registration refresh during system upgrade failed, register from scratch -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:230 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:275 msgid "" "Automatic registration upgrade failed.\n" "You can manually register the system from scratch." msgstr "" -#. TODO FIXME: still not the final text #. label text describing the registration (1/2) #. use \n to split to more lines if needed (use max. 76 chars/line) -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:245 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:289 msgid "" "Please enter a registration or evaluation code for this product and your\n" -"User Name/EMail from the SUSE Customer Center in the fields below.\n" +"User Name/E-mail address from the SUSE Customer Center in the fields below.\n" "Access to security and general software updates is only possible on\n" "a registered system." msgstr "" @@ -103,51 +117,55 @@ #. label text describing the registration (2/2), #. not displayed in installed system #. use \n to split to more lines if needed (use max. 76 chars/line) -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:257 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:301 msgid "" -"If you skip the registration now be sure to do so in the installed system." +"If you skip product registration now, remember to register after\n" +"installation has completed." msgstr "" -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:264 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:309 #, fuzzy msgid "Network Configuration..." msgstr "Novell 客戶中心組態" -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:273 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:542 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:318 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:491 msgid "The system is already registered." msgstr "" -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:280 src/clients/scc_auto.rb:373 -msgid "&Email" -msgstr "" +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:325 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:94 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "&Email Address:" +msgid "&E-mail Address" +msgstr "電子郵件地址 (&E)：" -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:282 src/clients/scc_auto.rb:239 -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:375 +#. handle nil specifically, it cannot be stored in XML profile +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:327 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:167 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:96 #, fuzzy msgid "Registration &Code" msgstr "註冊代碼" #. button label -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:288 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:332 #, fuzzy msgid "&Local Registration Server..." msgstr "區域註冊伺服器" #. button label -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:291 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:335 #, fuzzy msgid "&Skip Registration" msgstr "註冊" -#. TODO: improve the help text -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:300 -msgid "" -"Enter SUSE Customer Center credentials here to register the system to get " -"updates and add-on products." +#. help text +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:343 +msgid "Enter SUSE Customer Center credentials here to register the system to get updates and extensions." msgstr "" #. not set yet? -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:333 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:377 msgid "" "Registration added some update repositories.\n" "\n" @@ -155,35 +173,29 @@ "on-line updates during installation?" msgstr "" -#. round the half up (more items in the first column for odd number of items) -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:391 -msgid "The extension you selected needs a separate registration code." -msgid_plural "The extensions you selected need separate registration codes." -msgstr[0] "" - -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:396 -msgid "Enter the registration code into the field below." -msgid_plural "Enter the registration codes into the fields below." -msgstr[0] "" - #. cache the available addons -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:421 -msgid "Loading Available Add-on Products and Extensions..." -msgstr "" +#. create a new dialog for accepting and importing a SSL certificate and run it +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:406 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_workflow.rb:101 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Loading Available Extensions and Modules..." +msgstr "註冊模組說明" #. dialog title -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:503 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:458 #, fuzzy msgid "Register Extensions and Modules" msgstr "註冊模組說明" -#. dialog title -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:516 -msgid "Extension and Module Registration Codes" -msgstr "" +#. help text +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:462 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "<p>Please wait, while volumes are being detected.</p>" +msgid "<p>Extensions and Modules are being registered.</p>" +msgstr "<p>正在偵測區塊，請稍候。</p>" #. Popup question: confirm skipping the registration -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:531 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:480 msgid "" "If you do not register your system we will not be able\n" "to grant you access to the update repositories.\n" @@ -195,142 +207,89 @@ msgstr "" #. button label -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:545 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:494 #, fuzzy msgid "Register Again" msgstr "註冊新的使用者" #. button label -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:548 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:497 msgid "Select Extensions" msgstr "" +#. help text +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:507 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "<p>Your system is ready for use.</p>" +msgid "<p>The system is already registered.</p>" +msgstr "<p>您的系統已可使用。</p>" + +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:508 +msgid "<p>You can re-register it again or you can register additional extension or modules to enhance the functionality of the system.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:510 +msgid "<p>If you want to deregister your system you need to log into the SUSE Customer Center and remove the system manually there.</p>" +msgstr "" + #. error message -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:581 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:534 msgid "" "The base product was not found,\n" "check your system." msgstr "" -#. Command line help text for the repository module, %1 is "SUSEconnect" -#: src/clients/scc.rb:42 -msgid "Use '%s' instead of this YaST module." +#. TRANSLATORS: %s = bugzilla URL +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:538 +msgid "" +"The installation medium or the installer itself is seriously broken.\n" +"Report a bug at %s." msgstr "" -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:165 src/clients/scc_auto.rb:174 -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:194 -msgid "Contacting the SUSE Customer Center server" +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:541 +msgid "" +"Make sure a product is installed and /etc/products.d/baseproduct\n" +"is a symlink pointing to the base product .prod file." msgstr "" -#. register the base product -#. register addons -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:173 src/clients/scc_auto.rb:193 -#, fuzzy -msgid "Registering Product..." -msgid_plural "Registering Products..." -msgstr[0] "註冊代碼" +#. Command line help text for the repository module, %1 is "SUSEconnect" +#: src/clients/scc.rb:44 +msgid "Use '%s' instead of this YaST module." +msgstr "" #. popup message: registration finished properly -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:213 +#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:208 #, fuzzy msgid "Registration was successfull." msgstr "註冊成功。" -#. --------------------------------------------------------- -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:238 -msgid "Add-on &Name" +#. remove possible duplicates +#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:243 +msgid "SLP discovery failed, no server found" msgstr "" -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:267 -msgid "Really delete add-on '%s'?" -msgstr "" - -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:301 -msgid "Name" -msgstr "" - -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:301 +#. more than one server found: let the user select, we cannot automatically +#. decide which one to use, asking user in AutoYast mode is not nice +#. but better than aborting the installation... +#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:259 #, fuzzy -msgid "Registration Code" -msgstr "註冊代碼" +#| msgid "Downloading SMT certificate file failed" +msgid "Downloading SSL Certificate" +msgstr "下載 SMT 憑證檔案失敗" -#. TODO FIXME: add a help text -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:312 +#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:263 #, fuzzy -msgid "Register Optional Add-ons" -msgstr "註冊代碼" +#| msgid "Import Certificate" +msgid "Importing SSL Certificate" +msgstr "匯入憑證" -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:349 src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:5 +#. display the extension selection dialog and wait for a button click +#. @return [Symbol] user input (:import, :cancel) +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:5 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:49 msgid "Product Registration" msgstr "產品註冊" -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:351 -#, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>Product registration includes your product in SUSE Customer Center " -"database,\n" -"enabling you to get online updates and technical support.\n" -"To register while installing automatically, select <b>Run Product " -"Registration</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>產品註冊會將您的產品包含至 Novell 資料庫中，讓您可以取得線上更新和技術支" -"援。若要在自動安裝期間同時進行註冊，請選取<b>「執行產品註冊」</b>。若要簡化這" -"個程序，請使用<b>「硬體設定檔」</b>和<b>「選擇性資訊」</b>來包含您的系統資" -"訊。</p>" - -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:356 -#, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>If your network deploys a custom registration server, set the correct URL " -"of the server\n" -"and the location of the SMT certificate in <b>SMT Server Settings</b>. " -"Refer\n" -"to your SMT manual for further assistance.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>如果您的網路配置了自訂的 SMT 伺服器，請在 <b>SMT 伺服器設定</b>設定 SMT 伺" -"服器的 URL 和 SMT 認証位置。請參閱您的 SMT 手冊獲得更多幫助。</p>" - -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:364 -#, fuzzy -msgid "Register the Product" -msgstr "註冊代碼" - -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:379 -msgid "Install Available Patches from Update Repositories" -msgstr "" - -#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:387 -#, fuzzy -msgid "Server Settings" -msgstr "SMT 伺服器設定" - -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:391 -#, fuzzy -msgid "Find Registration Server Using SLP Discovery" -msgstr "區域註冊伺服器" - -#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:396 -msgid "Use Specific Server URL Instead of the Default" -msgstr "" - -#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:403 -#, fuzzy -msgid "Optional Server Certificate" -msgstr "伺服器 CA 憑證:" - -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:421 -#, fuzzy -msgid "Register Add-ons..." -msgstr "註冊代碼" - -#. remove possible duplicates -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:478 -msgid "SLP discovery failed, no server found" -msgstr "" - #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:9 #, fuzzy msgid "Run registration during autoinstallation" @@ -348,8 +307,9 @@ #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:17 #, fuzzy -msgid "Email: %s" -msgstr "詳細資料..." +#| msgid "&Email Address:" +msgid "E-mail Address: %s" +msgstr "電子郵件地址 (&E)：" #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:19 #, fuzzy @@ -357,8 +317,10 @@ msgstr "組態名稱遺失。" #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:23 -msgid "Install Available Patches" -msgstr "" +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Installed (Available)" +msgid "Install Available Updates" +msgstr "已安裝(可用)" #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:27 #, fuzzy @@ -377,235 +339,262 @@ #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:36 #, fuzzy -msgid "Server Certificate: %s" +msgid "SSL Server Certificate URL: %s" msgstr "SMT 憑證： %1" #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:40 #, fuzzy -msgid "Addon Products" -msgstr "未知的錯誤" +msgid "SSL Certificate Fingerprint: %s" +msgstr "SMT 憑證： %1" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:6 +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:48 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Extensions and Modules" +msgstr "註冊模組說明" + +#: src/data/registration/certificate_error.erb:6 msgid "Secure Connection Error" msgstr "" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:10 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_error.erb:10 #, fuzzy msgid "Details:" msgstr "詳細資料..." -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:14 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_error.erb:14 #, fuzzy msgid "Failed Certificate Details" msgstr "選取 SMT 憑證檔案" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:16 -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:153 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:4 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:35 msgid "Issued To" msgstr "" #. label followed by the SSL certificate identification -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:19 -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:28 -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:178 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:7 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:16 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:61 msgid "Common Name (CN): " msgstr "" #. label followed by the SSL certificate identification -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:20 -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:29 -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:180 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:8 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:17 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:63 msgid "Organization (O): " msgstr "" #. label followed by the SSL certificate identification -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:21 -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:30 -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:182 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:9 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:18 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:65 msgid "Organization Unit (OU): " msgstr "" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:25 -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:156 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:13 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:36 msgid "Issued By" msgstr "" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:34 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:22 #, fuzzy msgid "Validity" msgstr "有效期到：" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:38 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:26 msgid "Issued On: " msgstr "" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:41 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:29 msgid "WARNING: The certificate is not valid yet!" msgstr "" -#. label followed by the certificate expiration date -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:45 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:32 #, fuzzy msgid "Expires On: " msgstr "過期： %1" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:48 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:35 msgid "WARNING: The certificate has expired!" msgstr "" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:56 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:43 msgid "Serial Number: " msgstr "" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:57 -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:159 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:44 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:36 #, fuzzy msgid "SHA1 Fingerprint: " msgstr "指紋： " -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:59 -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:161 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:46 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:38 #, fuzzy msgid "SHA256 Fingerprint: " msgstr "指紋： " #. Error popup -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:65 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:71 msgid "" "Network is not configured, the registration server cannot be reached.\n" "Do you want to configure the network now?" msgstr "" -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:71 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:77 msgid "Network error, check the network configuration." msgstr "" #. Error popup -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:76 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:82 msgid "Connection time out." msgstr "" -#. Error popup -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:83 +#. TRANSLATORS: additional hint for an error message +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:90 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"The email address is not known or\n" -"the registration code is not valid." +msgid "Check that this system is known to the registration server." msgstr "目的地無效。" -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:85 +#. TRANSLATORS: additional hint for an error message +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:96 +msgid "" +"If you are upgrading from SLE11 make sure the SCC server\n" +"knows the old NCC registration. Synchronization from NCC to SCC\n" +"might take very long time.\n" +"\n" +"If the SLE11 system was installed recently you could log into\n" +"%s to speed up the synchronization process.\n" +"Just wait several minutes after logging in and then retry \n" +"the upgrade again." +msgstr "" + +#. add the hint to the error details +#. Error popup +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:110 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:113 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:119 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:167 #, fuzzy +msgid "Registration failed." +msgstr "註冊代碼" + +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:115 +#, fuzzy msgid "Registration client error." msgstr "註冊無法進行。" -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:87 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:117 msgid "" "Registration server error.\n" "Retry registration later." msgstr "" -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:89 -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:126 -#, fuzzy -msgid "Registration failed." -msgstr "註冊代碼" - -#. try to use a translatable message first, if not found then use -#. the original error message from openSSL -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:119 -msgid "Secure connection error: %s" +#. error message +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:158 +msgid "Received SSL Certificate does not match the expected certificate." msgstr "" #. %s are error details -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:143 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:184 #, fuzzy msgid "Details: %s" msgstr "詳細資料..." -#. label follwed by a certificate description -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:152 -#, fuzzy -msgid "Certificate:" -msgstr "SMT 憑證" - #. progress label -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:196 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:209 msgid "Importing the SSL certificate" msgstr "" -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:197 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:210 msgid "Importing '%s' certificate..." msgstr "" +#. try to use a translatable message first, if not found then use +#. the original error message from openSSL +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:228 +msgid "Secure connection error: %s" +msgstr "" + #. progress step title #: src/lib/registration/finish_dialog.rb:34 #, fuzzy msgid "Storing Registration Configuration..." msgstr "Novell 客戶中心組態" -#. return the boot command line parameter -#: src/lib/registration/helpers.rb:228 +#. this is just a placeholder for texts which will/might be needed after the text freeze +#. TODO FIXME: remove this file before GM! +#: src/lib/registration/new_messages.rb:8 #, fuzzy -msgid "Searching..." -msgstr "正在檢查..." +#| msgid "SMT Certificate" +msgid "SSL Certificate" +msgstr "SMT 憑證" -#: src/lib/registration/helpers.rb:228 +#. checkbox: use SLP discovery later again in the installed system +#: src/lib/registration/new_messages.rb:10 +msgid "Use SLP Discovery Also Later in Installed System" +msgstr "" + +#. indent size used in summary text +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:35 #, fuzzy -msgid "Looking up local registration servers..." -msgstr "使用區域註冊伺服器" +msgid "Certificate:" +msgstr "SMT 憑證" #. create UI label for a base product #. @param [Hash] Product (hash from pkg-bindings) #. @return [String] UI Label -#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:108 +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:119 #, fuzzy msgid "Unknown product" msgstr "未知的錯誤" #. error message -#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:139 +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:152 #, fuzzy msgid "Saving repository configuration failed." msgstr "正在開始註冊程序..." #. # error message -#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:177 +#. error message +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:190 src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:201 msgid "Updating service '%s' failed." msgstr "" #. error message -#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:183 +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:196 msgid "Adding service '%s' failed." msgstr "" #. error message -#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:190 +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:208 msgid "Saving service '%s' failed." msgstr "" #. error message -#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:195 +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:213 msgid "Refreshing service '%s' failed." msgstr "" #. dialog title -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:43 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:40 msgid "License Agreement" -msgstr "" +msgstr "授權合約" -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:44 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:41 msgid "Downloading Licenses..." msgstr "" #. ask user to accept an addon EULA #. @param addon [SUSE::Connect::Product] the addon -#. @return [Boolean] true if the EULA has been accepted -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:74 +#. @return [Symbol] :accepted, :back, :abort, :halt +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:73 msgid "Downloading License Agreement..." msgstr "" #. %s is an extension name, e.g. "SUSE Linux Enterprise Software Development Kit" -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:86 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:85 #, fuzzy msgid "" "Downloading the license for\n" @@ -614,91 +603,266 @@ msgstr "下載 SMT 憑證檔案失敗" #. %s is an extension name, e.g. "SUSE Linux Enterprise Software Development Kit" -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:96 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:94 msgid "%s License Agreement" msgstr "" #. dialog title +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:37 +msgid "Extension and Module Registration Codes" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:41 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter registration codes for the requested extensions or modules.</p>\n" +"<p>Registration codes are required for successfull registration.If you cannot provide a registration code then go back and deselect the respective extension or module.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. round the half up (more items in the first column for odd number of items) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:87 +msgid "The extension you selected needs a separate registration code." +msgid_plural "The extensions you selected need separate registration codes." +msgstr[0] "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:92 +msgid "Enter the registration code into the field below." +msgid_plural "Enter the registration codes into the fields below." +msgstr[0] "" + +#. dialog title #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:39 #, fuzzy msgid "Extension and Module Selection" msgstr "註冊模組說明" -#. FIXME make parameters -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:59 +#. help text (1/3) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:42 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "<p>Here you can see the list of TV stations defined for your system.</p>" +msgid "<p>Here you can select available extensions and modules for yoursystem.</p>" +msgstr "<p>在此可以查看您系統中定義的電視台清單。</p>" + +#. help text (2/3) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:45 +msgid "<p>Please note, that some extensions or modules might need specific registration code.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text (3/3) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:48 +msgid "<p>If you want to remove any extension or module you need to loginto the SUSE Customer Center and remove them manually there.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. always enable Back/Next, the dialog cannot be the first in workflow +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:67 msgid "Available Extensions and Modules" msgstr "" -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:61 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:69 #, fuzzy msgid "Details" msgstr "詳細資料..." -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:64 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:72 msgid "Select an extension or a module to show details here" msgstr "" #. checkbox label for an unavailable extension #. (%s is an extension name) -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:123 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:131 msgid "%s (not available)" msgstr "" #. check the addons requiring a reg. code -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:203 -msgid "YaST allows to select at most %s addons." +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:212 +msgid "YaST allows to select at most %s extensions or modules." msgstr "" +#. help text +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:33 +msgid "<p>Here you can select which extensions or moduleswill be registered together with the base product.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:36 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Register Optional Extensions or Modules" +msgstr "註冊模組說明" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:50 +msgid "Identifier" +msgstr "識別碼" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:51 +msgid "Version" +msgstr "版本" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:52 +msgid "Architecture" +msgstr "架構" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:53 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Rule Type" +msgid "Release Type" +msgstr "規則類型" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:54 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Registration Code" +msgstr "註冊代碼" + +#. button label +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:65 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Downloading installation system language extension..." +msgid "Download Available Extensions..." +msgstr "正在下載安裝系統語言擴充..." + +#. disable download on a non-registered system +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:119 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Really delete '%1'?" +msgid "Really delete '%s'?" +msgstr "確定刪除 '%1' 嗎？" + +#. replace the content +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:161 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Extension or Module &Identifier" +msgstr "註冊模組說明" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:162 +msgid "&Version" +msgstr "版本(&V)" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:163 +msgid "&Architecture" +msgstr "架構(&A)" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:164 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "&Release" +msgid "&Release Type" +msgstr "釋出(&R)" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:51 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"<p>Product registration includes your product in SUSE Customer Center database,\n" +"enabling you to get online updates and technical support.\n" +"To register while installing automatically, select <b>Run Product Registration</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>產品註冊會將您的產品包含至 Novell 資料庫中，讓您可以取得線上更新和技術支援。若要在自動安裝期間同時進行註冊，請選取<b>「執行產品註冊」</b>。若要簡化這個程序，請使用<b>「硬體設定檔」</b>和<b>「選擇性資訊」</b>來包含您的系統資訊。</p>" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:56 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"<p>If your network deploys a custom registration server, set the correct URL of the server\n" +"and the location of the SMT certificate in <b>SMT Server Settings</b>. Refer\n" +"to your SMT manual for further assistance.</p>" +msgstr "<p>如果您的網路配置了自訂的 SMT 伺服器，請在 <b>SMT 伺服器設定</b>設定 SMT 伺服器的 URL 和 SMT 認証位置。請參閱您的 SMT 手冊獲得更多幫助。</p>" + +#. FIXME the dialog should be created by external code before calling this +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:83 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Register the Product" +msgstr "註冊代碼" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:100 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Initializing Available Repositories" +msgid "Install Available Updates from Update Repositories" +msgstr "正在初始化可用的套件庫" + +#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:114 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Server Settings" +msgstr "SMT 伺服器設定" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:118 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Find Registration Server Using SLP Discovery" +msgstr "區域註冊伺服器" + +#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:123 +msgid "Use Specific Server URL Instead of the Default" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:130 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Optional SSL Server Certificate URL" +msgstr "伺服器 CA 憑證:" + +#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:139 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Optional SSL Server Certificate Fingerprint" +msgstr "伺服器 CA 憑證:" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:141 +msgid "none" +msgstr "無" + +#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:152 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Select Certificate File" +msgid "SSL Certificate Fingerprint" +msgstr "選取憑證檔案" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:173 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Register Extensions or Modules..." +msgstr "註冊模組說明" + #. SSL error message -#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:26 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:25 #, fuzzy +#| msgid "Certificate has been imported." +msgid "Certificate has expired" +msgstr "已經匯入憑證。" + +#. SSL error message +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:27 +#, fuzzy msgid "Self signed certificate" msgstr "伺服器 CA 憑證:" #. SSL error message -#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:28 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:29 msgid "Self signed certificate in certificate chain" msgstr "" #. push button -#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:95 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:90 msgid "&Trust and Import" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (1/5) -#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:124 -msgid "" -"<p>Secure connection (HTTPS) uses SSL certificates for verifying the " -"authenticity of the server and for encrypting the transferred data.</p>" +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:118 +msgid "<p>Secure connection (HTTPS) uses SSL certificates for verifying the authenticity of the server and for encrypting the transferred data.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (2/5) -#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:128 -msgid "" -"<p>You can choose to import the certificate it into the list of known " -"certificate autohorities (CA), meaning that you trust the subject and the " -"issuer of the unknown certificate.</p>" +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:122 +msgid "<p>You can choose to import the certificate it into the list of known certificate autohorities (CA), meaning that you trust the subject and the issuer of the unknown certificate.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (3/5) -#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:133 -msgid "" -"<p>Importing a certificate will allow to use for example a self-signed " -"certificate.</p>" +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:127 +msgid "<p>Importing a certificate will allow to use for example a self-signed certificate.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (4/5) -#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:137 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Important:</b> You should verify the fingerprint of the certificate to " -"be sure you import the genuine certificate from the requested server.</p>" +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:131 +msgid "<p><b>Important:</b> You should verify the fingerprint of the certificate to be sure you import the genuine certificate from the requested server.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (5/5) -#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:142 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Importing an unknown certificate without verification is a big " -"security risk.</b></p>" +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:136 +msgid "<p><b>Importing an unknown certificate without verification is a big security risk.</b></p>" msgstr "" #. error message, the entered URL is not valid @@ -712,7 +876,39 @@ msgid "&Local Registration Server URL" msgstr "區域註冊伺服器" +#. return the boot command line parameter +#: src/lib/registration/url_helpers.rb:205 #, fuzzy +msgid "Searching..." +msgstr "正在檢查..." + +#: src/lib/registration/url_helpers.rb:205 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Looking up local registration servers..." +msgstr "使用區域註冊伺服器" + +#, fuzzy +#~ msgid "Registering Product..." +#~ msgid_plural "Registering Products..." +#~ msgstr[0] "註冊代碼" + +#, fuzzy +#~ msgid "Register Optional Add-ons" +#~ msgstr "註冊代碼" + +#, fuzzy +#~ msgid "Register Add-ons..." +#~ msgstr "註冊代碼" + +#, fuzzy +#~ msgid "Email: %s" +#~ msgstr "詳細資料..." + +#, fuzzy +#~ msgid "Addon Products" +#~ msgstr "未知的錯誤" + +#, fuzzy #~| msgid "Novell Customer Center Configuration" #~ msgid "SUSE Customer Center Registration" #~ msgstr "Novell 客戶中心組態" @@ -878,30 +1074,24 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "Configure your system to enable online updates by registering it with " -#~ "Novell.\n" +#~ "Configure your system to enable online updates by registering it with Novell.\n" #~ "To do this now, select <b>Configure Now</b>. Delay the registration with\n" #~ "<b>Configure Later</b>.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" #~ "設定系統，以向 Novell 註冊來啟用線上更新。\n" -#~ " 若要現在執行這個動作，請選取<b>「立即設定」</b>。選取<b>「稍後設定」\n" +#~ " 若要現在執行這個動作，請選取<b>「立即設定」</b>。選取<b>「稍後設定」</b>\n" #~ " 便可延遲註冊。\n" #~ " </p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "To simplify the registration process, include information from your " -#~ "system\n" +#~ "To simplify the registration process, include information from your system\n" #~ "with <b>Optional Information</b> and <b>Hardware Profile</b>. \n" -#~ "<b>Details</b> shows the maximum amount of information that can be " -#~ "involved\n" -#~ " in your registration. To obtain this information, it contacts the " -#~ "Novell\n" -#~ "server to query what information is needed for your product. Only the " -#~ "identity\n" +#~ "<b>Details</b> shows the maximum amount of information that can be involved\n" +#~ " in your registration. To obtain this information, it contacts the Novell\n" +#~ "server to query what information is needed for your product. Only the identity\n" #~ "of the installed product is sent in this initial exchange.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" @@ -916,11 +1106,9 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "If you purchased your copy of this product, enable <b>Registration Code\n" +#~ "If you purchased your copy of this product, enable <b>Registration Code</b>\n" #~ "so you are prompted for your product code. \n" -#~ "This registers you for the installation support included with your " -#~ "product.\n" +#~ "This registers you for the installation support included with your product.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" @@ -932,12 +1120,9 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" #~ "No information is passed to anyone outside Novell. The data is used for\n" -#~ "statistical purposes and to enhance your convenience regarding driver " -#~ "support\n" -#~ "and your Web account. Find a detailed privacy policy in <b>Details</b>. " -#~ "View\n" -#~ "the transmitted information in the log file <tt>~/.suse_register.log.\n" +#~ "statistical purposes and to enhance your convenience regarding driver support\n" +#~ "and your Web account. Find a detailed privacy policy in <b>Details</b>. View\n" +#~ "the transmitted information in the log file <tt>~/.suse_register.log</tt>.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" @@ -949,11 +1134,9 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "<b>Regularly Synchronize with the Customer Center</b> checks that your " -#~ "update \n" +#~ "<b>Regularly Synchronize with the Customer Center</b> checks that your update \n" #~ "sources are still valid and adds any new ones that may be available.\n" -#~ "It additionally sends any modifications to your included data to Novell, " -#~ "such \n" +#~ "It additionally sends any modifications to your included data to Novell, such \n" #~ "as hardware information if <b>Hardware Information</b> is activated.\n" #~ "This option does not remove any sources added manually.\n" #~ "</p>" @@ -969,30 +1152,26 @@ #, fuzzy #~| msgid "" #~| "<p>\n" -#~| "The registration process will contact a Novell server (or a local " -#~| "registration server if your company provides one).\n" +#~| "The registration process will contact a Novell server (or a local registration server if your company provides one).\n" #~| "Please make sure that the network and proxy settings are correct.\n" #~| "You can step back to the network setup to check or change the settings.\n" #~| "</p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "The registration process will contact a Novell server (or a local " -#~ "registration server if your company provides one).\n" +#~ "The registration process will contact a Novell server (or a local registration server if your company provides one).\n" #~ "Make sure that the network and proxy settings are correct.\n" #~ "You can go back to the network setup to check or change the settings.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "註冊程序將連繫 Novell 伺服器(或是，如果您的公司有提供的話，區域註冊伺服" -#~ "器)。\n" +#~ "註冊程序將連繫 Novell 伺服器(或是，如果您的公司有提供的話，區域註冊伺服器)。\n" #~ "請確定您的網路和 proxy 設定正確。\n" #~ "您可以回到網路設定去檢查或變更網路設定。\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "Configure your system to enable online updates by registering it with " -#~ "Open-SLX.\n" +#~ "Configure your system to enable online updates by registering it with Open-SLX.\n" #~ "To do this now, select <b>Configure Now</b>. Delay the registration with\n" #~ "<b>Configure Later</b>.\n" #~ "</p>" @@ -1005,15 +1184,11 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "To simplify the registration process, include information from your " -#~ "system\n" +#~ "To simplify the registration process, include information from your system\n" #~ "with <b>Optional Information</b> and <b>Hardware Profile</b>. \n" -#~ "<b>Details</b> shows the maximum amount of information that can be " -#~ "involved\n" -#~ " in your registration. To obtain this information, it contacts the Open-" -#~ "SLX\n" -#~ "server to query what information is needed for your product. Only the " -#~ "identity\n" +#~ "<b>Details</b> shows the maximum amount of information that can be involved\n" +#~ " in your registration. To obtain this information, it contacts the Open-SLX\n" +#~ "server to query what information is needed for your product. Only the identity\n" #~ "of the installed product is sent in this initial exchange.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" @@ -1028,14 +1203,10 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "No information is passed to anyone outside Open-SLX. The data is used " -#~ "for\n" -#~ "statistical purposes and to enhance your convenience regarding driver " -#~ "support\n" -#~ "and your Web account. Find a detailed privacy policy in <b>Details</b>. " -#~ "View\n" -#~ "the transmitted information in the log file <tt>~/.suse_register.log.\n" +#~ "No information is passed to anyone outside Open-SLX. The data is used for\n" +#~ "statistical purposes and to enhance your convenience regarding driver support\n" +#~ "and your Web account. Find a detailed privacy policy in <b>Details</b>. View\n" +#~ "the transmitted information in the log file <tt>~/.suse_register.log</tt>.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" @@ -1047,11 +1218,9 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "<b>Regularly Synchronize with the Customer Center</b> checks that your " -#~ "update \n" +#~ "<b>Regularly Synchronize with the Customer Center</b> checks that your update \n" #~ "sources are still valid and adds any new ones that may be available.\n" -#~ "It additionally sends any modifications to your included data to Open-" -#~ "SLX, such \n" +#~ "It additionally sends any modifications to your included data to Open-SLX, such \n" #~ "as hardware information if <b>Hardware Information</b> is activated.\n" #~ "This option does not remove any sources added manually.\n" #~ "</p>" @@ -1066,15 +1235,13 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "The registration process will contact an Open-SLX server (or a local " -#~ "registration server if your company provides one).\n" +#~ "The registration process will contact an Open-SLX server (or a local registration server if your company provides one).\n" #~ "Please make sure that the network and proxy settings are correct.\n" #~ "You can step back to the network setup to check or change the settings.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "註冊程序將連繫 Open-SLX 伺服器(或是，如果您的公司有提供的話，區域註冊伺服" -#~ "器)。\n" +#~ "註冊程序將連繫 Open-SLX 伺服器(或是，如果您的公司有提供的話，區域註冊伺服器)。\n" #~ "請確定您的網路和 proxy 設定正確。\n" #~ "您可以回到網路設定去檢查或變更網路設定。\n" #~ "</p>" @@ -1163,8 +1330,7 @@ #~ msgid "The following package needs to be installed." #~ msgstr "下列的套件需要被安裝。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "To count this installation correctly the package %1 needs to be installed." +#~ msgid "To count this installation correctly the package %1 needs to be installed." #~ msgstr "要正確計算此次安裝，套件 %1 必須被安裝。" #~ msgid "Therefore the following package needs to be removed first." @@ -1173,9 +1339,7 @@ #~ msgid "The package %1 should have been installed and %2 removed." #~ msgstr "套件 %1 應被安裝，且 %2 應被移除。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Registration will continue now although the registration server may " -#~ "miscount this installation." +#~ msgid "Registration will continue now although the registration server may miscount this installation." #~ msgstr "現在註冊將繼續，雖然註冊伺服器可能會少算了此次安裝。" #~ msgid "Setting up online update source..." @@ -1223,36 +1387,18 @@ #~ msgid "Key is invalid." #~ msgstr "金鑰無效。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Get more information about the registration process with " -#~ "<tt>suse_register -h</tt>.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>使用 <tt>suse_register -h</tt>，取得更多有關註冊程序的詳細資訊。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Get more information about the registration process with <tt>suse_register -h</tt>.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>使用 <tt>suse_register -h</tt>，取得更多有關註冊程序的詳細資訊。</p>" #, fuzzy -#~| msgid "" -#~| "<p>Other information used for registration is shown in <b>Registration " -#~| "Data</b>.<br>Add a new key and value pair by pressing <b>Add</b> and " -#~| "then entering the appropriate values. These parameters are the ones that " -#~| "can be passed with <tt>suse_register -a</tt>.<br>Get more information " -#~| "about them with <tt>suse_register -p</tt>. Remove a pair with <b>Delete or modify an existing pair with <b>Edit</b>.</p>" +#~| msgid "<p>Other information used for registration is shown in <b>Registration Data</b>.<br>Add a new key and value pair by pressing <b>Add</b> and then entering the appropriate values. These parameters are the ones that can be passed with <tt>suse_register -a</tt>.<br>Get more information about them with <tt>suse_register -p</tt>. Remove a pair with <b>Delete</b> or modify an existing pair with <b>Edit</b>.</p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>Other information used for registration is shown in <b>Registration\n" -#~ "Data</b>.<br>To add a new key and value pair, press <b>Add</b> then enter " -#~ "the\n" -#~ "appropriate values. These parameters are the ones that can be passed with " -#~ "<tt>suse_register\n" -#~ "-a</tt>.<br>Get more information with <tt>suse_register -p</tt>. Remove " -#~ "a\n" -#~ "key-value pair with <b>Delete</b> or modify an existing pair with " -#~ "<b>Edit</b>.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>用於註冊的其他資訊將顯示於<b>「註冊資料」</b>。按下<b>「新增」</b>，然" -#~ "後輸入正確的值，便可新增成對的金鑰和設定值。這些參數便是 " -#~ "<tt>suse_register -a</tt> 將傳遞的內容。使用 <tt>suse_register -p</tt> 取" -#~ "得更多有關這些參數的詳細資訊。使用<b>「刪除」</b> 來移除或使用<b>「編輯」" -#~ "</b>來修改現有的成對值內容。</p>" +#~ "Data</b>.<br>To add a new key and value pair, press <b>Add</b> then enter the\n" +#~ "appropriate values. These parameters are the ones that can be passed with <tt>suse_register\n" +#~ "-a</tt>.<br>Get more information with <tt>suse_register -p</tt>. Remove a\n" +#~ "key-value pair with <b>Delete</b> or modify an existing pair with <b>Edit</b>.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>用於註冊的其他資訊將顯示於<b>「註冊資料」</b>。按下<b>「新增」</b>，然後輸入正確的值，便可新增成對的金鑰和設定值。這些參數便是 <tt>suse_register -a</tt> 將傳遞的內容。使用 <tt>suse_register -p</tt> 取得更多有關這些參數的詳細資訊。使用<b>「刪除」</b> 來移除或使用<b>「編輯」</b>來修改現有的成對值內容。</p>" #~ msgid "SMT Server" #~ msgstr "SMT 伺服器" @@ -1381,30 +1527,12 @@ #~ msgstr "請參閱說明得知細節。" #, fuzzy -#~| msgid "" -#~| "<p>To register this installation at a local registration server please " -#~| "configure the URL and optionally the server's CA certificate via the " -#~| "<b>Advanced</b> menu.</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>To register this installation at a local registration server, " -#~ "configure the URL and optionally the server's CA certificate via the " -#~ "<b>Advanced</b> menu.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>要在區域註冊伺服器上註冊此次安裝，請設定 URL 和(可選)經由 <b>進階</b> " -#~ "選單設定伺服器的 CA 憑證。</p>" +#~| msgid "<p>To register this installation at a local registration server please configure the URL and optionally the server's CA certificate via the <b>Advanced</b> menu.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>To register this installation at a local registration server, configure the URL and optionally the server's CA certificate via the <b>Advanced</b> menu.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>要在區域註冊伺服器上註冊此次安裝，請設定 URL 和(可選)經由 <b>進階</b> 選單設定伺服器的 CA 憑證。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>The registration server URL has to start with <i>https://</i> whereas " -#~ "the location of its CA certificate may be a URL of the format <i>http://, <i>https://</i> or <i>ftp://</i>. Furthermore valid locations are <i>/" -#~ "path/on/local/disk</i>, <b>floppy</b><i>/path/on/floppy-disk</i> and the " -#~ "keyword <i>done</i>. The latter indicates that no CA certificate handling " -#~ "needs to be done in order to trust the registration server.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>註冊伺服器的URL 必須以 <i>https://</i> 開頭，而它的 CA 憑證位置可能為這" -#~ "些格式 <i>http://</i>, <i>https://</i> or <i>ftp://</i>。更多可用的位置像" -#~ "是 <i>/path/on/local/disk</i>, <b>floppy</b><i>/path/on/floppy-disk</i> 以" -#~ "及關鍵字 <i>done</i>。後者表示信任註冊伺服器並不需要 CA 憑證處理。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>The registration server URL has to start with <i>https://</i> whereas the location of its CA certificate may be a URL of the format <i>http://</i>, <i>https://</i> or <i>ftp://</i>. Furthermore valid locations are <i>/path/on/local/disk</i>, <b>floppy</b><i>/path/on/floppy-disk</i> and the keyword <i>done</i>. The latter indicates that no CA certificate handling needs to be done in order to trust the registration server.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>註冊伺服器的URL 必須以 <i>https://</i> 開頭，而它的 CA 憑證位置可能為這些格式 <i>http://</i>, <i>https://</i> or <i>ftp://</i>。更多可用的位置像是 <i>/path/on/local/disk</i>, <b>floppy</b><i>/path/on/floppy-disk</i> 以及關鍵字 <i>done</i>。後者表示信任註冊伺服器並不需要 CA 憑證處理。</p>" #, fuzzy #~| msgid "Do you want to skip Registration?" @@ -1485,8 +1613,7 @@ #, fuzzy #~| msgid "" #~| "This certificate will be used to connect to the SMT server.\n" -#~| "You have to trust this certificate in order to continue with the " -#~| "Registration." +#~| "You have to trust this certificate in order to continue with the Registration." #~ msgid "" #~ "This certificate will be used to connect to the SMT server.\n" #~ "You have to trust this certificate to continue with the registration.\n" @@ -1565,13 +1692,8 @@ #~ msgid "<p>Find related actions in the <b>%1</b> menu.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>找尋相關動作在 <b>%1</b> 手冊。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>In <b>%1</b> set up the automatic online update. Choose the interval " -#~ "to use and if interactive patches should be ignored, otherwise the " -#~ "updater will use the default answers.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>在 <b>%1</b> 設定自動線上更新。選擇進行的間隔以及是否互動式修正要忽略，" -#~ "否則更新會使用預設值。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>In <b>%1</b> set up the automatic online update. Choose the interval to use and if interactive patches should be ignored, otherwise the updater will use the default answers.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>在 <b>%1</b> 設定自動線上更新。選擇進行的間隔以及是否互動式修正要忽略，否則更新會使用預設值。</p>" #~ msgid "Edit Software Repositories" #~ msgstr "編輯軟體套件庫" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/reipl.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/reipl.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/reipl.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: reipl\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2009-09-05 01:05+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: \n" @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ #: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:155 msgid "&Name" -msgstr "" +msgstr "名稱(&N)" #: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:175 msgid "reipl configuration" @@ -190,10 +190,8 @@ #. Configure dialog help 2 #: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:59 msgid "" -"<p>Choose one of the methods for rebooting your machine with the radio " -"buttons\n" -"listed inside <b>reipl methods</b>. Depending on what your machine " -"supports,\n" +"<p>Choose one of the methods for rebooting your machine with the radio buttons\n" +"listed inside <b>reipl methods</b>. Depending on what your machine supports,\n" "choose between CCW (channel command word) devices and SCSI devices,\n" "which are attached through zFCP (fibre channel protocol). Then fill out the\n" "necessary parameter entry fields for the respective method.</p>\n" @@ -203,10 +201,8 @@ #: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:67 msgid "" "<p>The <b>device</b> must be a valid device bus ID with lower case letters\n" -"in a sysfs compatible format 0.<i><subchannel set ID></i>.<i><" -"device ID></i>,\n" -"such as 0.0.5c51. Depending on the chosen method, this can either refer to a " -"DASD or to\n" +"in a sysfs compatible format 0.<i><subchannel set ID></i>.<i><device ID></i>,\n" +"such as 0.0.5c51. Depending on the chosen method, this can either refer to a DASD or to\n" "an FCP adapter.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -228,10 +224,8 @@ #. Configure dialog help 6 #: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:84 msgid "" -"<p>The <b>logical unit number</b> (LUN) must be entered with lowercase " -"letters\n" -"as a 16-digit hex value with all trailing zeros, such as 0x52ca000000000000." -"</p>" +"<p>The <b>logical unit number</b> (LUN) must be entered with lowercase letters\n" +"as a 16-digit hex value with all trailing zeros, such as 0x52ca000000000000.</p>" msgstr "" #. Configure dialog help 7 @@ -252,8 +246,7 @@ #. Configure dialog help 9 #: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:98 msgid "" -"<p>After confirmation of this dialog, you may trigger a reboot, e.g. by " -"shutdown,\n" +"<p>After confirmation of this dialog, you may trigger a reboot, e.g. by shutdown,\n" "and the system will automatically restart from your specified device.</p>" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/relocation-server.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/relocation-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/relocation-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2001-06-05 18:04+02:00\n" "Last-Translator: 裴寒牧 \n" "Language-Team: 中華 \n" @@ -246,11 +246,7 @@ "<p><b>Relocation Address</b><br>\n" "Address xend should listen on for relocation-socket connections</p>\n" "<p><b>Allowed Hosts</b><br>\n" -"The hosts allowed to talk to the relocation port. If this is empty, then all " -"connections are allowed. Otherwise, this should be a space-separated " -"sequence of regular expressions. Any host with a fully-qualified domain name " -"or an IP address that matches one of these regular expressions will be " -"accepted.</p>\n" +"The hosts allowed to talk to the relocation port. If this is empty, then all connections are allowed. Otherwise, this should be a space-separated sequence of regular expressions. Any host with a fully-qualified domain name or an IP address that matches one of these regular expressions will be accepted.</p>\n" "<p><b>SSL Key File/SSL Cert File</b><br>\n" "SSL key and certificate to use for the ssl relocation interface</p>" msgstr "" @@ -258,13 +254,9 @@ #: src/include/relocation-server/helps.rb:62 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Tunneled migration</big></b><br>\n" -"The source host libvirtd opens a direct connection to the destination host " -"libvirtd for sending migration data. This allows the option of encrypting " -"the data stream.</p>\n" +"The source host libvirtd opens a direct connection to the destination host libvirtd for sending migration data. This allows the option of encrypting the data stream.</p>\n" "<p><b><big>Plain migration</big></b><br>\n" -"The source host VM opens a direct unencrypted TCP connection to the " -"destination host for sending the migration data. Unless a port is manually " -"specified, libvirt will choose a migration port in the default range.</p>" +"The source host VM opens a direct unencrypted TCP connection to the destination host for sending the migration data. Unless a port is manually specified, libvirt will choose a migration port in the default range.</p>" msgstr "" #. Main workflow of the relocation-server configuration Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/s390.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/s390.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/s390.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: s390\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2009-08-30 09:57+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: \n" @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ #: src/include/s390/dasd/dialogs.rb:472 msgid "&Deselect All" -msgstr "" +msgstr "全部不選(&D)" #. error popup #. error popup @@ -428,8 +428,7 @@ #: src/include/s390/dasd/helps.rb:76 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<p>To perform actions on multiple disks at once, mark these disks. To select " -"all displayed disk (possibly after applying a filter), click\n" +"<p>To perform actions on multiple disks at once, mark these disks. To select all displayed disk (possibly after applying a filter), click\n" "<b>Select All</b> or <b>Deselect All</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>可以在多個磁碟上同時執行所有動作。若要選取磁碟\n" @@ -496,30 +495,24 @@ #. Dump dialog help 2/8 #: src/include/s390/dump/ui.rb:54 -msgid "" -"<p>Supported devices are ECKD DASD and ZFCP disks, while multi-volumes are " -"limited to DASD.<br>" +msgid "<p>Supported devices are ECKD DASD and ZFCP disks, while multi-volumes are limited to DASD.<br>" msgstr "" #. Dump dialog help 3/8 #: src/include/s390/dump/ui.rb:58 msgid "" "Only whole disks can be used, no partitions. If the device is incompatibly\n" -"formatted or partitioned, activate the checkbox <b>Force overwrite of disk.</p>" +"formatted or partitioned, activate the checkbox <b>Force overwrite of disk</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. Dump dialog help 4/8 #: src/include/s390/dump/ui.rb:62 -msgid "" -"<p>To use DASD and ZFCP devices activate them in the respective YaST DASD or " -"ZFCP dialog.<br>" +msgid "<p>To use DASD and ZFCP devices activate them in the respective YaST DASD or ZFCP dialog.<br>" msgstr "" #. Dump dialog help 5/8 #: src/include/s390/dump/ui.rb:66 -msgid "" -"Devices which are in use or have mounted partitions will not be shown.</p>" +msgid "Devices which are in use or have mounted partitions will not be shown.</p>" msgstr "" #. Dump dialog help 6/8 @@ -558,9 +551,7 @@ #. warn only in case of force #: src/include/s390/dump/ui.rb:193 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"The disk %1 will be formatted as a dump device. All data on this device will " -"be lost! Continue?" +msgid "The disk %1 will be formatted as a dump device. All data on this device will be lost! Continue?" msgstr "" "磁碟 %1 現在會格式化為傾印裝置。\n" "要繼續嗎？" @@ -589,17 +580,12 @@ msgstr "<p><b><big>共用</big></b></p>" #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:46 -msgid "" -"<p>TS-Shell allows to specify <b>Authorization</b> for every TS-Shell user " -"and group. The rights of a group are inherited by its members.</p>" +msgid "<p>TS-Shell allows to specify <b>Authorization</b> for every TS-Shell user and group. The rights of a group are inherited by its members.</p>" msgstr "" #. TS-Shell dialog help 2/5 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:50 -msgid "" -"<p>Each allowed z/VM ID can be selected manually under <b>Selection</b>, " -"defined by a <b>Regex</b> or loaded from a <b>File</b> which contains all " -"allowed z/VM IDs separated by line breaks.</p>" +msgid "<p>Each allowed z/VM ID can be selected manually under <b>Selection</b>, defined by a <b>Regex</b> or loaded from a <b>File</b> which contains all allowed z/VM IDs separated by line breaks.</p>" msgstr "" #. TS-Shell dialog help 3/5 @@ -612,16 +598,13 @@ #. TS-Shell dialog help 4/5 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:58 msgid "" -"<p>To add or remove groups from the TS-Shell authorization table or to " -"change\n" +"<p>To add or remove groups from the TS-Shell authorization table or to change\n" "the membership of users, go to <b>Manage Groups</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. TS-Shell dialog help 5/5 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:62 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Audited IDs</b> specify the z/VM IDs from which transcripts " -"should be gathered.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>Audited IDs</b> specify the z/VM IDs from which transcripts should be gathered.</p>" msgstr "" #. TS-Shell User creation dialog help 1/3 @@ -632,17 +615,13 @@ #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:69 msgid "" -"<p>To create new TS-Shell user the <b>Username</b>, <b>Home Directory</b> " -"and <b>Password</b> has to be provided.\n" -"\t<br>It is also possible to specify <b>Additional Groups</b> by selecting " -"them on the right.</p>" +"<p>To create new TS-Shell user the <b>Username</b>, <b>Home Directory</b> and <b>Password</b> has to be provided.\n" +"\t<br>It is also possible to specify <b>Additional Groups</b> by selecting them on the right.</p>" msgstr "" #. TS-Shell User creation dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:73 -msgid "" -"<p>To ensure that the user changes his password after the first login, " -"activate <b>Force Password Change</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>To ensure that the user changes his password after the first login, activate <b>Force Password Change</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. TS-Shell User creation dialog help 3/3 @@ -668,8 +647,7 @@ #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:88 msgid "" "<p>Existing groups can be added to or removed from the TS-Shell\n" -"authorization. Select the groups in the table and click on <b>Select or " -"Deselect</b>. The current status is shown in the column <b>TS-Auth</b>.</p>" +"authorization. Select the groups in the table and click on <b>Select or Deselect</b>. The current status is shown in the column <b>TS-Auth</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. TS-Shell Managing Groups dialog help 3/5 @@ -682,10 +660,8 @@ #. TS-Shell Managing Groups dialog help 4/5 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:96 msgid "" -"<p>New groups could be created by entering the name in the <b>New Group</b> " -"input field and confirming with <b>Create</b>.\n" -"\t<br>To delete previously created groups the <b>YaST users</b> dialog has " -"to be used.</p>" +"<p>New groups could be created by entering the name in the <b>New Group</b> input field and confirming with <b>Create</b>.\n" +"\t<br>To delete previously created groups the <b>YaST users</b> dialog has to be used.</p>" msgstr "" #. TS-Shell Managing Groups dialog help 5/5 @@ -701,17 +677,12 @@ msgstr "<p><b><big>連接組態</big></b></p>" #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:107 -msgid "" -"<p>IUCVConn on Login needs one user for every z/VM ID. To create these users " -"a <b>password</b> and <b>home directory</b> has to be provided." +msgid "<p>IUCVConn on Login needs one user for every z/VM ID. To create these users a <b>password</b> and <b>home directory</b> has to be provided." msgstr "" #. IUCVConn on Login dialog help 2/2 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:111 -msgid "" -"<p>It is possible to sync the users manually by clicking on <b>Sync</b> or " -"just confirming the changes with <b>Ok</b> while <b>IUCVConn on Login</b> is " -"enabled. </p>" +msgid "<p>It is possible to sync the users manually by clicking on <b>Sync</b> or just confirming the changes with <b>Ok</b> while <b>IUCVConn on Login</b> is enabled. </p>" msgstr "" #. Text approval @@ -978,13 +949,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/ui.rb:1032 -msgid "" -"Wrong z/VM ID \"%1\" in line %2, numbers at the beginning are not allowed." +msgid "Wrong z/VM ID \"%1\" in line %2, numbers at the beginning are not allowed." msgstr "" #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/ui.rb:1044 -msgid "" -"Wrong z/VM ID \"%1\" in line %2, more than eight characters are not allowed." +msgid "Wrong z/VM ID \"%1\" in line %2, more than eight characters are not allowed." msgstr "" #. only the last entry is allowed to be empty @@ -1020,9 +989,7 @@ #. Check the "Allowed Terminal Server list" field for validity. #. @return true for valid inputs #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:55 -msgid "" -"Wrong input, only lower case letters, numbers and for separation commas are " -"allowed." +msgid "Wrong input, only lower case letters, numbers and for separation commas are allowed." msgstr "" #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:60 @@ -1056,19 +1023,12 @@ #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 3/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:125 -msgid "" -"<p>Several <b>IUCVtty instances</b> can run to provide multiple terminal " -"devices. The instances are distinguished by a terminal ID, which is a " -"combination of the <b>Terminal ID Prefix</b> and the number of the instance." -"<br>" +msgid "<p>Several <b>IUCVtty instances</b> can run to provide multiple terminal devices. The instances are distinguished by a terminal ID, which is a combination of the <b>Terminal ID Prefix</b> and the number of the instance.<br>" msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 4/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:129 -msgid "" -"For example, if you define ten instances with the prefix "<i>lxterm", the terminal IDs from <i>lxterm0</i> to <i>lxterm9</i> are " -"available.</p>" +msgid "For example, if you define ten instances with the prefix "<i>lxterm</i>", the terminal IDs from <i>lxterm0</i> to <i>lxterm9</i> are available.</p>" msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 5/11 @@ -1079,47 +1039,34 @@ #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 6/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:135 -msgid "" -"<p>The z/VM IUCV HVC device driver is a kernel module and uses device nodes " -"to enable up to eight HVC terminal devices to communicate with getty and " -"login programs.</p>" +msgid "<p>The z/VM IUCV HVC device driver is a kernel module and uses device nodes to enable up to eight HVC terminal devices to communicate with getty and login programs.</p>" msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 7/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:139 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>restrict access</b>, allow only connections from certain " -"<b>terminal servers</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>restrict access</b>, allow only connections from certain <b>terminal servers</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 8/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:143 -msgid "" -"<p>Define the emulation for all instances at once or for each one separately." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>Define the emulation for all instances at once or for each one separately.</p>" msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 9/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:147 msgid "" -"<p>Activate <b>route kernel messages to hvc0</b> to route kernel messages " -"to\n" +"<p>Activate <b>route kernel messages to hvc0</b> to route kernel messages to\n" "the hvc0 device instead of ttyS0.<br>" msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 10/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:151 -msgid "" -"Should kernel messages still be shown on ttyS0, manually add " -"<b>console=ttyS0</b> to the current boot selection kernel parameter in the " -"<b>YaST bootloader module</b>.</p>" +msgid "Should kernel messages still be shown on ttyS0, manually add <b>console=ttyS0</b> to the current boot selection kernel parameter in the <b>YaST bootloader module</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 11/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:155 -msgid "" -"<h3>Warning: HVC Terminals stay logged on without a manual logout through " -"the shortcut: ctrl _ d</h3>" +msgid "<h3>Warning: HVC Terminals stay logged on without a manual logout through the shortcut: ctrl _ d</h3>" msgstr "" #. Dialog content @@ -1200,17 +1147,14 @@ #. OnPanic dialog help 1/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:112 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p><b>Configure the actions to be taken if a kernel panic occurs</b></p>" +msgid "<p><b>Configure the actions to be taken if a kernel panic occurs</b></p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>套件庫的組態</b><br>\n" "</p>\n" #. OnPanic dialog help 2/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:116 -msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Dumpconf</b> daemon needs to be enabled to influence the behavior " -"during kernel panics.</p>" +msgid "<p>The <b>Dumpconf</b> daemon needs to be enabled to influence the behavior during kernel panics.</p>" msgstr "" #. OnPanic dialog help 3/11 @@ -1236,8 +1180,7 @@ #. OnPanic dialog help 7/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:128 msgid "" -"<b>dump_reipl</b> Dump Linux and reboot system. This option is only " -"available\n" +"<b>dump_reipl</b> Dump Linux and reboot system. This option is only available\n" "on LPAR with z9(r) machines and later and on z/VMversion 5.3 and later.<br>" msgstr "" @@ -1248,26 +1191,17 @@ #. OnPanic dialog help 9/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:134 -msgid "" -"<p>The time defined in <b>Delay Minutes</b> defers activating the specified " -"panic action for a newly started system to prevent loops. If the system " -"crashes before the time has elapsed the default action (stop) is performed." +msgid "<p>The time defined in <b>Delay Minutes</b> defers activating the specified panic action for a newly started system to prevent loops. If the system crashes before the time has elapsed the default action (stop) is performed.</p>" msgstr "" #. OnPanic dialog help 10/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:138 -msgid "" -"<p>The device for dumping the memory can be set with <b>Dump Device</b>. If " -"no device is shown you have to create one with the <b>YaST Dump Devices</b> " -"dialog.</p>" +msgid "<p>The device for dumping the memory can be set with <b>Dump Device</b>. If no device is shown you have to create one with the <b>YaST Dump Devices</b> dialog.</p>" msgstr "" #. OnPanic dialog help 11/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:143 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>VMCMD</b> specify CP commands to be executed before the Linux " -"system is stopped. Only %1 lines and a total of %2 chars are allowed.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>VMCMD</b> specify CP commands to be executed before the Linux system is stopped. Only %1 lines and a total of %2 chars are allowed.</p>" msgstr "" #. radio button label @@ -1461,14 +1395,11 @@ #: src/include/s390/zfcp/helps.rb:78 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Channel ID</b> must be entered with lowercase letters in a sysfs " -"conforming\n" +"<p>The <b>Channel ID</b> must be entered with lowercase letters in a sysfs conforming\n" "format 0.0.<devno>, such as <tt>0.0.5c51</tt>.</p>\n" -"<p>The WWPN must be entered with lowercase letters as a 16-digit hex value, " -"such as\n" +"<p>The WWPN must be entered with lowercase letters as a 16-digit hex value, such as\n" "<tt>0x5005076300c40e5a</tt>.</p>\n" -"<p>The LUN must be entered with lowercase letters as a 16-digit hex value " -"with\n" +"<p>The LUN must be entered with lowercase letters as a 16-digit hex value with\n" "all trailing zeros, such as <tt>0x52ca000000000000</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>此「<b>通道號碼</b>」必須應用下面 sysfs 確認格式\n" @@ -2100,16 +2031,14 @@ #~| "ECKD DASD and zfcp disks. Set <b>Dump Device</b> to select the device\n" #~| "to format. If the device is already formatted\n" #~| "or configured, setting\n" -#~| "<b>Install Dump Record Even If Disk Already &Formatted</b> is required." +#~| "<b>Install Dump Record Even If Disk Already &Formatted</b> is required.</p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b><big>Add New Dump Device</big></b><br>\n" #~ "Prepare a device for use as an S/390 dump device. Supported devices are\n" #~ "ECKD DASD. Set <b>Dump Device</b> to select the device\n" #~ "to format. If the device is already formatted\n" #~ "or configured, setting\n" -#~ "<b>Install Dump Record Even If Disk Already &Formatted</b> is required." +#~ "<b>Install Dump Record Even If Disk Already &Formatted</b> is required.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b><big>新增新的傾印裝置</big></b><br>\n" #~ "在將設備當成 S/390 傾印裝置使用以前，進行準備工作。支援的設備是\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/samba-client.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/samba-client.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/samba-client.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: samba-client\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-22 14:26+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -164,12 +164,8 @@ #. help text, do not translate 'winbind uid', 'winbind gid' #: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:174 -msgid "" -"<p>Specify the <b>Range</b> for Samba user and group IDs (<tt>winbind uid and <tt>winbind gid</tt> values).</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>指定 Samba 使用者和群組 ID <b>範圍</b> (<tt>winbind uid </tt> 和 " -"<tt>winbind gid</tt> 值)。</p>" +msgid "<p>Specify the <b>Range</b> for Samba user and group IDs (<tt>winbind uid</tt> and <tt>winbind gid</tt> values).</p>" +msgstr "<p>指定 Samba 使用者和群組 ID <b>範圍</b> (<tt>winbind uid </tt> 和 <tt>winbind gid</tt> 值)。</p>" #. frame label #: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:235 @@ -400,8 +396,7 @@ #. continue/cancel popup #: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:808 msgid "" -"Configuring this system as a client for Active Directory resets the " -"following\n" +"Configuring this system as a client for Active Directory resets the following\n" "settings in smb.conf to the default values:\n" "%1" msgstr "" @@ -505,8 +500,7 @@ #. translators: Samba workgroup dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:59 msgid "" -"<p>A Linux client can be a member of a workgroup, NT domain, or Active " -"Directory domain.\n" +"<p>A Linux client can be a member of a workgroup, NT domain, or Active Directory domain.\n" "Specify the name of the membership.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Linux 用戶端可以是工作群組、NT 領域或作用中目錄領域的成員。\n" @@ -516,8 +510,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:63 msgid "" "<p><b>Use SMB Information for Linux Authentication</b> allows \n" -"verification of passwords with the NT server or the Kerberos server if " -"joining an AD domain.</p>\n" +"verification of passwords with the NT server or the Kerberos server if joining an AD domain.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>「使用 SMB 資訊進行 Linux 驗證」</b>允許\n" "在加入 AD 領域時用 NT 伺服器或 Kerberos 伺服器確認密碼。</p>\n" @@ -525,8 +518,7 @@ #. Samba role dialog help 2.5/3 #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:67 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Change primary DNS suffix</b> to add your AD server into the " -"list of name servers.\n" +"<p>Check <b>Change primary DNS suffix</b> to add your AD server into the list of name servers.\n" "This option is only available for static network setups.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -534,8 +526,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:71 msgid "" "<p>When you press <b>OK</b>, the system verifies the membership and,\n" -"if it is a NT or Active Directory domain, allows this host to join the " -"domain.</p>\n" +"if it is a NT or Active Directory domain, allows this host to join the domain.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>當您按<b>「完成」</b>，系統會確認成員，\n" "若系統為 NT 或 Active Directory 領域，則允許此主機加入領域。</p>\n" @@ -556,35 +547,18 @@ #. Samba membership dialog help (common part 1/4) #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:85 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Create Home Directory on Login</b> to have local home " -"directories created on the first login.</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Create Home Directory on Login</b> to have local home directories created on the first login.</p>" msgstr "<p>核取<b>「登入時建立家目錄」</b>，以便在第一次登入時建立家目錄。</p>" #. Samba membership dialog help (common part 2/4) #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:89 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Offline Authentication</b> enables the user to log in even if there is " -"no connection to the domain controller. For this option to work, you must " -"log in to your domain at least once. The user's credentials are then stored " -"encrypted on your computer and are reused for a domain login when no " -"connection to the domain controller can be established. This is especially " -"useful for mobile users." -msgstr "" -"<p><b>「離線驗證」</b>功能讓使用者即使沒有連接到網域控制器，也可以登入。若要" -"讓此選項有用，就必須登入領域至少一次。然後使用者的憑證就會以加密方式儲存在電" -"腦上，在無法與網域控制器建立連接時，重新使用此憑證登入領域。這對行動使用者來" -"說尤其有用。" +msgid "<p><b>Offline Authentication</b> enables the user to log in even if there is no connection to the domain controller. For this option to work, you must log in to your domain at least once. The user's credentials are then stored encrypted on your computer and are reused for a domain login when no connection to the domain controller can be established. This is especially useful for mobile users." +msgstr "<p><b>「離線驗證」</b>功能讓使用者即使沒有連接到網域控制器，也可以登入。若要讓此選項有用，就必須登入領域至少一次。然後使用者的憑證就會以加密方式儲存在電腦上，在無法與網域控制器建立連接時，重新使用此憑證登入領域。這對行動使用者來說尤其有用。" #. Samba membership dialog help (common part) #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:93 -msgid "" -"<p>Click <b>Expert Settings</b> to enable advanced features such as WINS " -"options or mounting server home directories from Active Directory domains." -msgstr "" -"<p>按 <b>專家設定</b> 來啟用進階功能，像是 WINS 選項或從 Active Directory 區" -"域掛載伺服器家目錄。</p>" +msgid "<p>Click <b>Expert Settings</b> to enable advanced features such as WINS options or mounting server home directories from Active Directory domains.</p>" +msgstr "<p>按 <b>專家設定</b> 來啟用進階功能，像是 WINS 選項或從 Active Directory 區域掛載伺服器家目錄。</p>" #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:97 @@ -594,24 +568,16 @@ #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:101 msgid "" -"<p>Set the <b>Username</b> and <b>Password</b> that should be used for " -"joining\n" -"the selected domain during autoinstallation. Note that the password will be " -"saved to the profile in cleartext (unencrypted) form.</p>" +"<p>Set the <b>Username</b> and <b>Password</b> that should be used for joining\n" +"the selected domain during autoinstallation. Note that the password will be saved to the profile in cleartext (unencrypted) form.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>設定在自動安裝過程中，加入所選領域時應使用的<b>「使用者名稱」</b>和<b>「密" -"碼」</b>。\n" +"<p>設定在自動安裝過程中，加入所選領域時應使用的<b>「使用者名稱」</b>和<b>「密碼」</b>。\n" "請注意，密碼會以純文字 (未加密) 的格式儲存在設定檔中。</p>" #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:105 -msgid "" -"<p>Specify the <b>Active Directory Server</b> to use for joining an Active " -"Directory domain. This is also used as the value for KDC in the Kerberos " -"configuration.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>指定加入作用中目錄領域時所使用的<b>「作用中目錄伺服器」</b>。這也用來做為 " -"Kerberos 組態中的 KDC 值。</p>" +msgid "<p>Specify the <b>Active Directory Server</b> to use for joining an Active Directory domain. This is also used as the value for KDC in the Kerberos configuration.</p>" +msgstr "<p>指定加入作用中目錄領域時所使用的<b>「作用中目錄伺服器」</b>。這也用來做為 Kerberos 組態中的 KDC 值。</p>" #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for possible NTP configuration #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:109 @@ -753,12 +719,8 @@ #. help text for "Use WINS for Hostname Resolution" check box label #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:395 -msgid "" -"<p>If you want to use Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) for " -"name resolution, check <b>Use WINS for Hostname Resolution</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>如果您想使用 Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) 作為名稱解析，" -"點選 <b>使用 WINS 作為主機名稱解析</b>。</p>" +msgid "<p>If you want to use Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) for name resolution, check <b>Use WINS for Hostname Resolution</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>如果您想使用 Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) 作為名稱解析，點選 <b>使用 WINS 作為主機名稱解析</b>。</p>" #. check box label #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:405 @@ -767,12 +729,8 @@ #. help text ("Retrieve WINS server via DHCP" is a checkbox label) #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:412 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Retrieve WINS server via DHCP</b> to use a WINS server provided " -"by DHCP.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>核取 <b>藉由 DHCP 檢索 WINS 伺服器</b> 使用 DHCP 所提供的 WINS 伺服器。" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Retrieve WINS server via DHCP</b> to use a WINS server provided by DHCP.</p>" +msgstr "<p>核取 <b>藉由 DHCP 檢索 WINS 伺服器</b> 使用 DHCP 所提供的 WINS 伺服器。</p>" #. frame label #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:432 @@ -806,68 +764,40 @@ #. membership dialog help (common part 3/4), %1 is separator (e.g. '\') #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:505 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Allow Users to Share Their Directories</b> enables members of the " -"group in <b>Permitted Group</b> to share directories they own with other " -"users. For example, <tt>users</tt> for a local scope or <tt>DOMAIN%1Users for a domain scope. The user also must make sure that the file system " -"permissions allow access.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>「允許使用者共享自己的目錄」</b>讓<b>「許可的群組」</b>中的群組成員，能" -"與其他使用者共享自己的目錄。例如：本地範圍的<tt>使用者</tt>或領域範圍的 " -"<tt>DOMAIN%1Users</tt>。 使用者也必須確定檔案系統的許可允許存取。</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Allow Users to Share Their Directories</b> enables members of the group in <b>Permitted Group</b> to share directories they own with other users. For example, <tt>users</tt> for a local scope or <tt>DOMAIN%1Users</tt> for a domain scope. The user also must make sure that the file system permissions allow access.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>「允許使用者共享自己的目錄」</b>讓<b>「許可的群組」</b>中的群組成員，能與其他使用者共享自己的目錄。例如：本地範圍的<tt>使用者</tt>或領域範圍的 <tt>DOMAIN%1Users</tt>。 使用者也必須確定檔案系統的許可允許存取。</p>" #. membership dialog help (common part 3/4) #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:511 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Maximum Number of Shares</b>, limit the total amount of shares " -"that may be created.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>Maximum Number of Shares</b>, limit the total amount of shares that may be created.</p>" msgstr "<p>請使用<b>「最多共享數」</b>限制可建立的共享總數量。</p>" #. membership dialog help common part #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:516 -msgid "" -"<p>To permit access to user shares without authentication, enable <b>Allow " -"Guest Access</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>若要許可使用者在沒有驗證的情況下存取使用者共享，請啟用<b>「允許訪客存取」" -"</b>。</p>" +msgid "<p>To permit access to user shares without authentication, enable <b>Allow Guest Access</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>若要許可使用者在沒有驗證的情況下存取使用者共享，請啟用<b>「允許訪客存取」</b>。</p>" #. help text for PAM Mount table #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:525 msgid "" "<p>In the table <b>Mount Server Directories</b>, you can specify server\n" -"directories (such as home directory) which should be locally mounted when " -"the\n" +"directories (such as home directory) which should be locally mounted when the\n" "user is logged in. If mounting should be user-specific, specify <b>User\n" -"Name</b> for the selected rule. Otherwise, the directory is mounted for each " -"user. For more information, see pam_mount.conf manual page.</p>" +"Name</b> for the selected rule. Otherwise, the directory is mounted for each user. For more information, see pam_mount.conf manual page.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>在表格 <b>掛載伺服器目錄</b>, 您可以指定伺服器目錄 (像是家目錄) \n" -"以便在使用者登入時被掛載。 如果掛載是針對特定使用者，指定 <b>使用者名稱 \n" +"以便在使用者登入時被掛載。 如果掛載是針對特定使用者，指定 <b>使用者名稱</b> \n" "作為選擇的規則。 否則，此目錄會為每一個使用者掛載。請參閱 pam_mount.conf \n" "手冊頁，以得到更多資訊。</p>" #. help text for PAM Mount table: example #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:532 -msgid "" -"<p>For example, you may use <tt>/home/%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> value for " -"<b>Remote Path</b>, <tt>~/</tt> value for <b>Local Mount Point</b> to mount " -"the home directory, together with a value <tt>user=%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> as a " -"part of <b>Options</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>例如，您可以使用 <tt>/home/%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> 的值作為 <b>遠端路徑</b>， " -"<tt>~/</tt> 的值作為 <b>本地掛載點</b> 來掛載家目錄，搭配使用值 <tt>user=" -"%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> 作為 <b>選項</b>的一部份。</p>" +msgid "<p>For example, you may use <tt>/home/%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> value for <b>Remote Path</b>, <tt>~/</tt> value for <b>Local Mount Point</b> to mount the home directory, together with a value <tt>user=%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> as a part of <b>Options</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>例如，您可以使用 <tt>/home/%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> 的值作為 <b>遠端路徑</b>， <tt>~/</tt> 的值作為 <b>本地掛載點</b> 來掛載家目錄，搭配使用值 <tt>user=%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> 作為 <b>選項</b>的一部份。</p>" #. help text for kerberos method option #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:540 -msgid "" -"<p>The value of <b>Kerberos Method</b> defines how kerberos tickets are " -"verified. When <b>Single Sing-on for SSH</b> is used, the default Kerberos " -"Method set by YaST is <tt>secrets and keytab</tt>. See smb.conf manual page " -"for details.</p>" +msgid "<p>The value of <b>Kerberos Method</b> defines how kerberos tickets are verified. When <b>Single Sing-on for SSH</b> is used, the default Kerberos Method set by YaST is <tt>secrets and keytab</tt>. See smb.conf manual page for details.</p>" msgstr "" #. translators: initialization dialog caption @@ -933,52 +863,52 @@ #. progress stage label #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:673 msgid "Install required packages" -msgstr "" +msgstr "安裝必要的套件" #. progress step label #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:675 msgid "Installing required packages..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "正在安裝必要的套件..." #. summary header #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:947 msgid "PAM Login" -msgstr "" +msgstr "PAM 登入" #. summary item #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:953 msgid "Use Kerberos" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用 Kerberos" #. summary item #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:955 msgid "Do Not Use Kerberos" -msgstr "" +msgstr "不使用 Kerberos" #. summary header #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:959 msgid "Default Realm" -msgstr "" +msgstr "預設範圍" #. summary header #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:966 msgid "Default Domain" -msgstr "" +msgstr "預設領域" #. summary header #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:973 msgid "KDC Server Address" -msgstr "" +msgstr "KDC 伺服器位址" #. summary header #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:977 msgid "Clock Skew" -msgstr "" +msgstr "時鐘誤差" #. summary text, %1 is value #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:993 msgid "<b>KDC Server</b>: %1<br>" -msgstr "" +msgstr "<b>KDC 伺服器</b>： %1<br>" #. summary text, %1 is value #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:998 @@ -989,7 +919,7 @@ #. summary text, %1 is value #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:1004 msgid "<b>Default Realm</b>: %1<br>" -msgstr "" +msgstr "<b>預設範圍</b>： %1<br>" #. summary text (yes/no follows) #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:1010 @@ -1020,6 +950,8 @@ "Clock skew is invalid.\n" "Try again.\n" msgstr "" +"時鐘誤差無效，\n" +"請再試一次。\n" #. error popup (wrong format of entered value) #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:1053 @@ -1027,6 +959,8 @@ "Lifetime is invalid.\n" "Try again." msgstr "" +"存留期無效，\n" +"請再試一次。" #. Samba-client read dialog caption #: src/modules/Samba.rb:621 Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/samba-server.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/samba-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/samba-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: samba-server\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-22 14:41+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -182,15 +182,12 @@ #. translators: command line help text for ldap_suffix option #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:298 -msgid "" -"The LDAP suffix DN for manipulating the user information on the LDAP server" +msgid "The LDAP suffix DN for manipulating the user information on the LDAP server" msgstr "操作 LDAP 伺服器上使用者資訊之LDAP 字尾 DN" #. translators: command line help text for ldap_admin_dn option #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:305 -msgid "" -"The LDAP DN for modifying contents of the LDAP server (for example, changing " -"passwords)" +msgid "The LDAP DN for modifying contents of the LDAP server (for example, changing passwords)" msgstr "修改LDAP 伺服器內容 (例如，變更密碼) 的LDAP DN" #. translators: error message for share command line action @@ -255,8 +252,7 @@ msgid "" "Because users are currently connected to this Samba server,\n" "the server configuration has been reloaded instead of restarted.\n" -"To confirm that all settings are applied despite possibly disconnecting the " -"users,\n" +"To confirm that all settings are applied despite possibly disconnecting the users,\n" "run '/etc/init.d/smb restart' and '/etc/init.d/nmb restart'" msgstr "" "因為目前有使用者連線到此 Samba 伺服器，\n" @@ -881,13 +877,11 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:56 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Workgroup or Domain Selection</big></b><br>\n" -"Select existing name of workgroup or domain or type your own new name and " -"click <b>Next</b>.\n" +"Select existing name of workgroup or domain or type your own new name and click <b>Next</b>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>工作群組或領域選取</big></b><br>\n" -"選擇已存在的工作群組或領域名稱，或輸入您自己的新名稱，然後按<b>「下一步」。\n" +"選擇已存在的工作群組或領域名稱，或輸入您自己的新名稱，然後按<b>「下一步」</b>。\n" "</p>\n" #. Samba select Samba Server type - Installation step 2 @@ -895,14 +889,10 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b><big>Samba Server Type</big></b></p>\n" -"<p>A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows NT " -"style domain.</p>\n" +"<p>A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows NT style domain.</p>\n" "<p>The backup controller uses another domain controller for validation.\n" -"The primary controller uses its own information about users and their " -"passwords.</p>\n" -"<p>The options available in the configuration dialogs depend on the settings " -"in this selection. Windows NT style domain controller functionality will be " -"phased out in future releases.</p>" +"The primary controller uses its own information about users and their passwords.</p>\n" +"<p>The options available in the configuration dialogs depend on the settings in this selection. Windows NT style domain controller functionality will be phased out in future releases.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Samba 伺服器類型</big></b></p>\n" "<p>領域控制器允許 Windows 用戶端登入 Windows 領域。</p>\n" @@ -914,8 +904,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:73 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Samba Server Type</big></b></p>\n" -"<p>A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain." -"</p>\n" +"<p>A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain.</p>\n" "<p>The options available in the configuration dialogs \n" "depend on the settings in this selection.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -993,17 +982,14 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:115 msgid "" "<p>The base settings set up the domain and the\n" -"server role. <b>Backup Domain Controller</b> and <b>Primary Domain " -"Controller</b> allow Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain. The " -"backup controller \n" +"server role. <b>Backup Domain Controller</b> and <b>Primary Domain Controller</b> allow Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain. The backup controller \n" "uses another domain controller for validation. The primary controller\n" "uses its own information about users and their passwords.\n" "If the server should not participate as a domain controller, choose the\n" "<b>Not a DC</b> value.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>基本設定會設定領域及\n" -"伺服器角色。<b>「備份領域控制器」</b>和<b>「主要領域控制器」</b>允許 Windows " -"用戶端登入至 Windows 領域。備份控制器使用其他領域控制器來驗證。\n" +"伺服器角色。<b>「備份領域控制器」</b>和<b>「主要領域控制器」</b>允許 Windows 用戶端登入至 Windows 領域。備份控制器使用其他領域控制器來驗證。\n" "主控制器使用本身的\n" "使用者和其密碼資訊。\n" "如果伺服器不需要參與領域控制器，\n" @@ -1052,8 +1038,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:144 msgid "" "<p><b>Advanced Settings</b> provides access to \n" -"detailed configuration, user authentication sources, and expert global " -"settings.</p>\n" +"detailed configuration, user authentication sources, and expert global settings.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>「進階設定」</b>提供存取\n" "詳細的組態，例如，LDAP 設定，使用者驗證來源和\n" @@ -1149,8 +1134,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:188 msgid "" "<p><b>Search Base DN</b> (distinguished name) is\n" -"the base at which to start searching the information. <b>Administration DN is used when\n" +"the base at which to start searching the information. <b>Administration DN</b> is used when\n" "creating new users and groups. If the administration DN requires\n" "a password for write access, set the password using\n" "<b>Set LDAP Administration Password</b>.</p>\n" @@ -1164,9 +1148,7 @@ #. Advanced SAMBA configuration dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:196 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Note:</b> Settings are saved before the LDAP administration password " -"is set.</p>\n" +msgid "<p><b>Note:</b> Settings are saved before the LDAP administration password is set.</p>\n" msgstr "<p><b>注意事項：</b> 設定 LDAP 管理密碼前，請先儲存設定。</p>\n" #. passdb backend configuration dialog help 1 @@ -1185,8 +1167,7 @@ #. passdb backend configuration dialog help 2 #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:207 msgid "" -"<p>If you want to change the user authentication source, remove the current " -"one first\n" +"<p>If you want to change the user authentication source, remove the current one first\n" "by pressing <b>Delete</b> and add a new one with <b>Add</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>如果您想要變更使用者驗證來源，請按 <b>「刪除」</b>先移除目前所使用的，\n" @@ -1298,21 +1279,11 @@ #. add new share dialog help #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:276 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Expose Snapshots</b> selected, Samba exposes snapshots created by " -"Snapper for access and manipulation by CIFS/SMB clients. This option is only " -"available if Samba offers Snapper support, and the Share Path corresponds to " -"a Btrfs backed Snapper configuration subvolume.<br> Relevant permissions " -"must also be granted, see Samba's <b>vfs_snapper(8)</b> man page for further " -"details.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>Expose Snapshots</b> selected, Samba exposes snapshots created by Snapper for access and manipulation by CIFS/SMB clients. This option is only available if Samba offers Snapper support, and the Share Path corresponds to a Btrfs backed Snapper configuration subvolume.<br> Relevant permissions must also be granted, see Samba's <b>vfs_snapper(8)</b> man page for further details.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:283 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Utilize Btrfs Features</b> instructs Samba to take advantage of " -"features specific to the Btrfs filesystem. This option is only available if " -"Samba offers Btrfs support, and the Share Path is a Btrfs subvolume. See " -"Samba's <b>vfs_btrfs(8)</b> man page for further details.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Utilize Btrfs Features</b> instructs Samba to take advantage of features specific to the Btrfs filesystem. This option is only available if Samba offers Btrfs support, and the Share Path is a Btrfs subvolume. See Samba's <b>vfs_btrfs(8)</b> man page for further details.</p>" msgstr "" #. help for LDAP Settings dialog @@ -1322,67 +1293,48 @@ "Here, determine the LDAP server to use for authentication.\n" "</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"Setting <b>LDAP Password Back-End</b> allows storing user information in the " -"LDAP tree specified by the URL. With <b>LDAP Idmap Back-End</b>, store SID/" -"uid/gid mapping tables in LDAP.\n" +"Setting <b>LDAP Password Back-End</b> allows storing user information in the LDAP tree specified by the URL. With <b>LDAP Idmap Back-End</b>, store SID/uid/gid mapping tables in LDAP.\n" "</p><p>\n" -"In the Authentication section, set the credentials for the LDAP server, " -"including full Administrator DN.\n" +"In the Authentication section, set the credentials for the LDAP server, including full Administrator DN.\n" "</p>\n" -"<b>Search Base DN</b> is the LDAP suffix appended to Samba-specific LDAP " -"objects.\n" +"<b>Search Base DN</b> is the LDAP suffix appended to Samba-specific LDAP objects.\n" "</p><p>\n" -"To test the connection to your LDAP server, click <b>Test Connection</b>. To " -"set expert LDAP settings or use default values, click <b>Advanced Settings.<p>" +"To test the connection to your LDAP server, click <b>Test Connection</b>. To set expert LDAP settings or use default values, click <b>Advanced Settings</b>.<p>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>LDAP 設定</big></b><br>\n" "在此決定用來驗證的 LDAP 伺服器。\n" "</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"設定 <b>LDAP 密碼後端</b> 允許儲存使用者資訊在指定 URL的 LDAP 樹。使用 " -"<b>LDAP Idmap 後端</b>, 儲存 SID/uid/gid 映射表在 LDAP。\n" +"設定 <b>LDAP 密碼後端</b> 允許儲存使用者資訊在指定 URL的 LDAP 樹。使用 <b>LDAP Idmap 後端</b>, 儲存 SID/uid/gid 映射表在 LDAP。\n" "</p><p>\n" "在驗證區段，選擇 LDAP 伺服器的證書，包含了完整的管理 DN。\n" "</p>\n" "<b>搜尋基礎 DN</b> 是 LDAP 後綴附加到 Samba-specific LDAP 物件。\n" "</p><p>\n" -"要測試您的 LDAP 伺服器連線，按 <b>測試連線</b>。 要設定專家 LDAP 設定或使用預" -"設值，請按 <b>進階設定</b>。<p>" +"要測試您的 LDAP 伺服器連線，按 <b>測試連線</b>。 要設定專家 LDAP 設定或使用預設值，請按 <b>進階設定</b>。<p>" #. help for SambaLDAPSettingsSuffixesWidget #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:303 -msgid "" -"<p><b>User Suffix</b> specifies where users are added to the LDAP tree. The " -"value is pre-pended to the value of <b>Search Base DN</b>. Similarly, " -"<b>Group Suffix</b> specifies the place for groups, <b>Machine Suffix</b> " -"for machines and <b>Idmap Suffix</b> for idmap mappings.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>User Suffix</b> specifies where users are added to the LDAP tree. The value is pre-pended to the value of <b>Search Base DN</b>. Similarly, <b>Group Suffix</b> specifies the place for groups, <b>Machine Suffix</b> for machines and <b>Idmap Suffix</b> for idmap mappings.</p>" msgstr "" #. help for SambaLDAPSettingsTimeoutsWidget #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:307 msgid "" -"<p><b>Replication Sleep</b> is the amount of milliseconds Samba will wait " -"after writing to the LDAP server, so LDAP replicas can catch up.</p>\n" -"<p><b>Time-Out</b> specifies the timeout for LDAP operations (in seconds)." +"<p><b>Replication Sleep</b> is the amount of milliseconds Samba will wait after writing to the LDAP server, so LDAP replicas can catch up.</p>\n" +"<p><b>Time-Out</b> specifies the timeout for LDAP operations (in seconds).</p>" msgstr "" #. help for SambaLDAPSettingsSecurityWidget #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:311 -msgid "" -"<p>Define whether to use SSL for LDAP connection with <b>Use SSL or TLS</b>." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>Define whether to use SSL for LDAP connection with <b>Use SSL or TLS</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help for SambaLDAPSettingsMiscWidget #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:315 msgid "" -"<p><b>Delete DN</b> specifies if the delete operation deletes the complete " -"LDAP entry or only the Samba-specific attributes.</p>\n" -"<p>With <b>Synchronize Passwords</b>, define possible synchronization of the " -"LDAP password with the NT and LM hashes. See the <tt>smb.conf</tt> manual " -"page for details.</p>" +"<p><b>Delete DN</b> specifies if the delete operation deletes the complete LDAP entry or only the Samba-specific attributes.</p>\n" +"<p>With <b>Synchronize Passwords</b>, define possible synchronization of the LDAP password with the NT and LM hashes. See the <tt>smb.conf</tt> manual page for details.</p>" msgstr "" #. translators: warning text @@ -1441,8 +1393,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:350 msgid "" "<p><b>Advanced Settings</b> provides access to \n" -"detailed configuration, such as LDAP settings, user authentication sources, " -"and\n" +"detailed configuration, such as LDAP settings, user authentication sources, and\n" "expert global settings.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>「進階設定」</b>提供存取\n" @@ -1891,8 +1842,7 @@ #~ msgstr "SSL" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Use <b>Add</b> to add a new configuration option, <b>Edit</b> to " -#~ "modify\n" +#~ "<p>Use <b>Add</b> to add a new configuration option, <b>Edit</b> to modify\n" #~ "an existing option, and <b>Delete</b> to delete an option.\n" #~ "Use <b>Up</b> and <b>Down</b> to change the order\n" #~ "of the back-ends.</p>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/samba-users.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/samba-users.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/samba-users.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: samba-users\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:41+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-22 14:43+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/scanner.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/scanner.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/scanner.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: scanner\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-22 14:49+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -269,11 +269,8 @@ #. Do not change or translate "epkowa", it is a driver name. #. Do not change or translate "i386", it is an architecture name. #: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:837 -msgid "" -"The epkowa driver is only available for i386-compatible architectures (32-" -"bit i386 and also 64-bit x86_64)." -msgstr "" -"epkowa 驅動程式只能供 i386 相容的架構使用 (32-bit i386 以及 64-bit x86_64)。" +msgid "The epkowa driver is only available for i386-compatible architectures (32-bit i386 and also 64-bit x86_64)." +msgstr "epkowa 驅動程式只能供 i386 相容的架構使用 (32-bit i386 以及 64-bit x86_64)。" #. when the epkowa driver was selected on x86_64: #: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:845 @@ -397,8 +394,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Scanner Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"Set up or change the scanner configuration and show the already active " -"scanners.\n" +"Set up or change the scanner configuration and show the already active scanners.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -412,8 +408,7 @@ "<p>\n" "To set up a new scanner, choose the scanner from the list of\n" "detected scanners and press <b>Edit</b>.\n" -"If your scanner has not been detected, use <b>Add</b> for a manual " -"configuration.\n" +"If your scanner has not been detected, use <b>Add</b> for a manual configuration.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -446,8 +441,7 @@ "configure the scanner unit with this tool.\n" "If you have difficulties configuring your scanner,\n" "check whether it appears in the output of <tt>lsusb</tt>.\n" -"If it is not listed there, the USB system cannot communicate with the " -"scanner.\n" +"If it is not listed there, the USB system cannot communicate with the scanner.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -476,8 +470,7 @@ "If difficulties arise proceeding with <b>Add</b>,\n" "check whether your scanner is shown by the command <tt>lsscsi</tt>.\n" "If not, the SCSI system cannot communicate with the scanner.\n" -"Verify that an appropriate kernel module for the SCSI host adapter has been " -"loaded.\n" +"Verify that an appropriate kernel module for the SCSI host adapter has been loaded.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -498,8 +491,7 @@ "Common parallel port scanners must be configured manually.\n" "To set up the scanner unit in a HP all-in-one device,\n" "which is connected to the parallel port,\n" -"you may have to run <tt>hp-setup</tt> via <b>Other</b> and <b>Run hp-setup\n" +"you may have to run <tt>hp-setup</tt> via <b>Other</b> and <b>Run hp-setup</b>\n" "before you can configure the scanner unit with this tool using <b>Add</b>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -532,10 +524,8 @@ "connected to another host in the network.\n" "To set up the scanner unit in a HP all-in-one device,\n" "which is connected via a built-in network interface,\n" -"you may have to run <tt>hp-setup</tt> via <b>Other</b> and <b>Run hp-setup\n" -"before it works to configure the scanner unit with this tool using <b>Add.\n" +"you may have to run <tt>hp-setup</tt> via <b>Other</b> and <b>Run hp-setup</b>\n" +"before it works to configure the scanner unit with this tool using <b>Add</b>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -566,8 +556,7 @@ "Press <b>Add</b> to select model and driver and enable it.\n" "Press <b>Edit</b> to select and enable a driver.\n" "Press <b>Delete</b> to disable the driver.\n" -"If you press <b>Other</b>, you can restart the detection, test enabled " -"drivers,\n" +"If you press <b>Other</b>, you can restart the detection, test enabled drivers,\n" "set up HP all-in-one devices, or set up scanning via network.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -596,8 +585,7 @@ #: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:166 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"If a driver is set up but no scanner is recognized by the driver, possible " -"reasons are:\n" +"If a driver is set up but no scanner is recognized by the driver, possible reasons are:\n" "The scanner is not connected or switched off,\n" "the driver is not the right one for the particular model\n" "(even small differences in model names or internal differences in\n" @@ -623,8 +611,7 @@ "<p>\n" "<b><big>Scanner Model Selection</big></b><br>\n" "All known scanner models, both supported and unsupported, are listed here.\n" -"Read all information carefully before selecting a model and pressing " -"<b>Next</b>.\n" +"Read all information carefully before selecting a model and pressing <b>Next</b>.\n" "The information is based on data of the SANE project at\n" "<tt>http://www.sane-project.org/</tt>.\n" "</p>" @@ -643,19 +630,13 @@ #: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:192 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"A model is supported if there is at least one appropriate scanner driver " -"available.\n" -"Most scanner drivers are from the SANE project and provided in the sane-" -"backends package.\n" -"The support status for a particular model varies from minimal to complete." -"<br>\n" -"When a driver is shown as 'unmaintained', it does not mean that the driver " -"does not work.\n" +"A model is supported if there is at least one appropriate scanner driver available.\n" +"Most scanner drivers are from the SANE project and provided in the sane-backends package.\n" +"The support status for a particular model varies from minimal to complete.<br>\n" +"When a driver is shown as 'unmaintained', it does not mean that the driver does not work.\n" "Even an unmaintained driver could work perfectly well.\n" -"But it means that there is no longer someone who knows about the driver " -"internals\n" -"so that there is usually no help if there are issues with an unmaintained " -"driver.\n" +"But it means that there is no longer someone who knows about the driver internals\n" +"so that there is usually no help if there are issues with an unmaintained driver.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -663,10 +644,8 @@ #: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:204 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Even if a model has no driver available, the manufacturer might have a " -"driver.\n" -"Therefore, you should ask the scanner manufacturer for a driver for an " -"unsupported scanner.\n" +"Even if a model has no driver available, the manufacturer might have a driver.\n" +"Therefore, you should ask the scanner manufacturer for a driver for an unsupported scanner.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -695,18 +674,12 @@ "<p>\n" "Use the <b>Search String</b> to find an appropriate entry quickly.\n" "To find some text anywhere in the table, enter it in the field.\n" -"A more complicated search using a case-insensitive regular expression is " -"also possible.\n" -"If the scanner was detected and the manufacturer name is available in this " -"list,\n" -"the search string is preset with the manufacturer name, such as <tt>^Epson." -"*</tt>.\n" -"To refine the search results, append model-specific details to the search " -"string.\n" -"For example, append a word that is part of the model name as in <tt>^Epson." -"*perfection</tt>\n" -"or append some digits that are part of the model name as in <tt>^Epson." -"*1200</tt>.\n" +"A more complicated search using a case-insensitive regular expression is also possible.\n" +"If the scanner was detected and the manufacturer name is available in this list,\n" +"the search string is preset with the manufacturer name, such as <tt>^Epson.*</tt>.\n" +"To refine the search results, append model-specific details to the search string.\n" +"For example, append a word that is part of the model name as in <tt>^Epson.*perfection</tt>\n" +"or append some digits that are part of the model name as in <tt>^Epson.*1200</tt>.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -726,8 +699,7 @@ "<p>\n" "<b><big>Scanner and Driver Setup</big></b><br>\n" "The driver is activated and the associated scanners are probed.\n" -"This may take a few seconds, so you must wait until you can press <b>Next.\n" +"This may take a few seconds, so you must wait until you can press <b>Next</b>.\n" "If you press <b>Back</b>, the driver is deactivated.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -785,14 +757,10 @@ "<b><big>HP All-in-One Devices</big></b><br>\n" "HP all-in-one devices may require a special setup.\n" "In this case, an appropriate dialog is shown.\n" -"There are two software packages that provide support for HP all-in-one " -"devices:\n" -"the outdated HPOJ software (package hp-officeJet which is no longer " -"available),\n" -"which provides the PTAL system (with the ptal service) to access HP all-in-" -"one devices,\n" -"and the up-to-date HPLIP software (package hplip), which provides the hpaio " -"driver.\n" +"There are two software packages that provide support for HP all-in-one devices:\n" +"the outdated HPOJ software (package hp-officeJet which is no longer available),\n" +"which provides the PTAL system (with the ptal service) to access HP all-in-one devices,\n" +"and the up-to-date HPLIP software (package hplip), which provides the hpaio driver.\n" "Both software packages can be installed at the same time\n" "but the ptal service and the hpaio driver cannot run together.\n" "Therefore either the patl service or the hpaio driver\n" @@ -809,8 +777,7 @@ "以及新的 HPLIP 軟體 (hplip 套件)，提供了 hpaio 驅動程式。\n" "您可以同時安裝這兩種軟體套件，\n" "但是不能同時執行 ptal 服務和 hpaio 驅動程式。\n" -"因此您必須在 ptal 服務或 hpaio 驅動程式中選擇一個，才能存取所有的 HP 多功能事" -"務機。\n" +"因此您必須在 ptal 服務或 hpaio 驅動程式中選擇一個，才能存取所有的 HP 多功能事務機。\n" "</p>" #. ConfigureNetworkScanning dialog help 1/5: @@ -839,12 +806,9 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Server Settings</big></b><br>\n" -"If you have locally connected scanners and want to make them accessible via " -"the network,\n" -"set up the saned network scanning daemon so that your host becomes a " -"server.\n" -"In <b>Permitted Clients</b>, enter which client hosts are permitted to " -"access saned on your server.\n" +"If you have locally connected scanners and want to make them accessible via the network,\n" +"set up the saned network scanning daemon so that your host becomes a server.\n" +"In <b>Permitted Clients</b>, enter which client hosts are permitted to access saned on your server.\n" "Enter a comma-separated list of client hosts (hostnames or IP addresses)\n" "or subnets (CIDR notation, such as 192.168.1.0/24).\n" "If no client hosts are permitted, saned is not activated.\n" @@ -855,8 +819,7 @@ "<b><big>伺服器設定</big></b><br>\n" "如果擁有連接到本機的掃描器並想透過網路供其他使用者存取，\n" "設定 saned 網路掃描精靈, 讓您的主機變成伺服器。\n" -"在<b>「授權的用戶端」</b>，輸入要授權的用戶主機，讓她們存取伺服器上的 " -"saned。\n" +"在<b>「授權的用戶端」</b>，輸入要授權的用戶主機，讓她們存取伺服器上的 saned。\n" "輸入以逗號分隔的用戶端主機清單(主機名稱或 IP 位址)\n" "或子遮罩 (CIDR 標記，如 192.168.1.0/24) 。\n" "如果沒有授權用戶端主機，將不會啟用 saned。\n" @@ -911,10 +874,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Client Settings</big></b><br>\n" -"If you want to access scanners connected to other hosts (servers) in the " -"network,\n" -"set up the net metadriver to access them via the daemon running on the " -"servers.\n" +"If you want to access scanners connected to other hosts (servers) in the network,\n" +"set up the net metadriver to access them via the daemon running on the servers.\n" "The saned and the firewall on the servers must permit the access.\n" "In <b>Servers Used</b>, enter which servers should be used.\n" "Enter a comma-separated list of servers (server names or IP addresses).\n" @@ -953,8 +914,7 @@ msgstr "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>「本機組態」</big></b><br>\n" -"藉由使用回送網路，即使在您的本機上，使用 saned 和網路 metadriver 仍然相當實" -"用。\n" +"藉由使用回送網路，即使在您的本機上，使用 saned 和網路 metadriver 仍然相當實用。\n" "在此狀況下，伺服器與用戶端位於同一部電腦 (localhost)。\n" "有些掃描器 (例如，並列埠掃描器) 需要 root 的權限。\n" "<br>當伺服器與用戶端皆輸入 localhost 時，\n" @@ -994,8 +954,7 @@ #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:399 msgid "" "The third-party Image Scan driver software from Epson/Avasys is required.\n" -"The Image Scan driver software is made and provided by Epson (formerly " -"Avasys)\n" +"The Image Scan driver software is made and provided by Epson (formerly Avasys)\n" "http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LXEpson\n" "(formerly Avasys http://avasys.jp/eng/linux_driver/)\n" "where RPM packages for 32-bit (i386) and 64-bit (x86_64) architecture\n" @@ -1013,15 +972,12 @@ #. Is the package available to be installed? #. Package::Available returns nil if no package source is available. #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:442 -msgid "" -"Required package %1 is not installed and there is no package repository " -"available." +msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and there is no package repository available." msgstr "未安裝需要的套件 %1，也沒有可用的套件庫來安裝此套件。" #. Message of a Popup::Error where %1 will be replaced by the package name: #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:457 -msgid "" -"Required package %1 is not installed and not available in the repository." +msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and not available in the repository." msgstr "未安裝需要的套件 %1，也無法用套件庫安裝。" #. Only a simple message because: @@ -1043,8 +999,7 @@ "with the network, the 'scanimage -L' command may not respond. For example,\n" "this may happen if communication with a server used by the net metadriver\n" "gets distorted because a firewall drops some network traffic.\n" -"In this case, disable the net metadriver until the issue in the network is " -"fixed.\n" +"In this case, disable the net metadriver until the issue in the network is fixed.\n" msgstr "" "決定啟用的掃描器失敗。\n" "當網路中繼驅動啟用而在網路上\n" @@ -1280,8 +1235,7 @@ #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1125 msgid "" "Launched hp-setup.\n" -"You must finish hp-setup before you can proceed with the scanner " -"configuration.\n" +"You must finish hp-setup before you can proceed with the scanner configuration.\n" msgstr "" "已啟動的 hp-setup。\n" "在您進行掃描器組態之前必須先結束 hp-setup。\n" @@ -1431,23 +1385,18 @@ #. Do not change or translate "SANE", it is a project name. #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1892 msgid "" -"A firmware file contains software that must be uploaded to the scanner's " -"memory.\n" +"A firmware file contains software that must be uploaded to the scanner's memory.\n" "Without firmware, the scanner cannot work.\n" "\n" -"Because firmware is licensed by the scanner manufacturer, we cannot " -"distribute it.\n" +"Because firmware is licensed by the scanner manufacturer, we cannot distribute it.\n" "Usually the firmware file is stored somewhere on the manufacturer's CD.\n" -"Alternatively, it may be possible to download it from the manufacturer's web " -"site.\n" -"Ask the manufacturer how to get the firmware file for your particular " -"scanner.\n" +"Alternatively, it may be possible to download it from the manufacturer's web site.\n" +"Ask the manufacturer how to get the firmware file for your particular scanner.\n" "Find additional useful information on the SANE web site at\n" "http://www.sane-project.org/.\n" "\n" "After you get the firmware file, you must configure the driver manually.\n" -"The man page of the driver describes how to configure it for firmware " -"upload.\n" +"The man page of the driver describes how to configure it for firmware upload.\n" "The following command shows the man page for your driver:\n" msgstr "" "韌體檔案包含必須上載至掃描器記憶體的軟體。\n" @@ -1489,19 +1438,16 @@ "The hpoj driver requires the PTAL system to be set up and running.\n" "In particular, the ptal service must be up and running.\n" "\n" -"Before the ptal service can be started, the PTAL system must be " -"initialized.\n" +"Before the ptal service can be started, the PTAL system must be initialized.\n" "Additionally, the ptal service should be activated for start when booting.\n" "The PTAL system and the hplip service exclude each other.\n" "Therefore a running hplip service would be stopped and deactivated\n" "before the the PTAL system is initialized, activated, and started.\n" "An automated initialization of the PTAL system is only safe for USB.\n" -"If you have a non-USB device or if the automated initialization for USB " -"fails,\n" +"If you have a non-USB device or if the automated initialization for USB fails,\n" "set up the PTAL system manually.\n" "If you have an all-in-one device (scanner+printer), note that\n" -"a running ptal service monopolizes the USB device file (e.g., /dev/usb/" -"lp0),\n" +"a running ptal service monopolizes the USB device file (e.g., /dev/usb/lp0),\n" "so the printer can no longer be addressed via the USB device file.\n" "\n" "Should the PTAL system for USB be initialized, activated, and started now?\n" @@ -1538,8 +1484,7 @@ "and all print queues that use the hplip service would no longer work.\n" "If the scanner is also supported by the hpaio driver, do not proceed.\n" "Instead use hpaio to set up the scanner.\n" -"Alternatively proceed and change the printer configuration to use the ptal " -"service.\n" +"Alternatively proceed and change the printer configuration to use the ptal service.\n" msgstr "" "至少有一個印表機組態使用 hplip 服務。\n" "您仍可繼續進行，但是會停止 hplip 服務，\n" @@ -1662,12 +1607,8 @@ #. Do not change or translate "ptal", it is a service name. #. Do not change or translate "CUPS", it is a subsystem name. #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2291 -msgid "" -"The driver hpoj is deactivated but the associated service ptal is not " -"deactivated because it is needed by the CUPS printing system." -msgstr "" -"驅動程式 hpoj 已被停用，但是相關的服務 ptal 並未被停用，因為 CUPS 列印系統需" -"要使用該服務。" +msgid "The driver hpoj is deactivated but the associated service ptal is not deactivated because it is needed by the CUPS printing system." +msgstr "驅動程式 hpoj 已被停用，但是相關的服務 ptal 並未被停用，因為 CUPS 列印系統需要使用該服務。" #. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). #. Do not change or translate "ptal", it is a service name. @@ -1908,8 +1849,7 @@ #~ "works only if also the scanning user frontend is 32-bit software.\n" #~ "You can use the special frontend /usr/bin/iscan for Epson scanners\n" #~ "which is included in the iscan package.\n" -#~ "If you like to use a standard frontend like scanimage, xscanimage, xsane, " -#~ "or kooka,\n" +#~ "If you like to use a standard frontend like scanimage, xscanimage, xsane, or kooka,\n" #~ "you must explicitly install the 32-bit package version\n" #~ "(i.e. get the package from the right media or repository).\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -1961,15 +1901,12 @@ #~ msgid "saned access from the external zone cannot be allowed." #~ msgstr "不允許從外部區域存取 saned。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Only a local host configuration works with firewall protection for the " -#~ "internal zone." +#~ msgid "Only a local host configuration works with firewall protection for the internal zone." #~ msgstr "只有一個本地主機組態可以與內部區域的防火牆保護搭配使用。" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "A model is supported if there is at least one appropriate scanner driver " -#~ "available.\n" +#~ "A model is supported if there is at least one appropriate scanner driver available.\n" #~ "Most scanner drivers are provided by the sane-backends package.\n" #~ "The support status varies from minimal to complete.\n" #~ "</p>" @@ -1983,12 +1920,9 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" #~ "<b><big>Server Settings</big></b><br>\n" -#~ "If you have locally connected scanners and want to make them accessible " -#~ "via the network,\n" -#~ "set up the saned network scanning daemon so that your host becomes a " -#~ "server.\n" -#~ "In <b>Permitted Clients</b>, enter which client hosts are permitted to " -#~ "access saned on your server.\n" +#~ "If you have locally connected scanners and want to make them accessible via the network,\n" +#~ "set up the saned network scanning daemon so that your host becomes a server.\n" +#~ "In <b>Permitted Clients</b>, enter which client hosts are permitted to access saned on your server.\n" #~ "Enter a comma-separated list of client hosts (hostnames or IP addresses)\n" #~ "or subnets (CIDR notation, such as 192.168.1.0/24).\n" #~ "If no client hosts are permitted, saned is not activated.\n" @@ -2010,8 +1944,7 @@ #~ "<b><big>伺服器設定</big></b><br>\n" #~ "如果您本機已經連接掃描器，而且您希望可以經由網路存取掃描器，\n" #~ "請設定 saned 網路掃描精靈，讓您的主機成為伺服器。\n" -#~ " 在<b>「授權的用戶端」</b>中，輸入哪些用戶端主機已獲授權，可存取您伺服器上" -#~ "的 saned。\n" +#~ " 在<b>「授權的用戶端」</b>中，輸入哪些用戶端主機已獲授權，可存取您伺服器上的 saned。\n" #~ " 輸入用戶端主機 (主機或 IP 位址)\n" #~ "或子網路 (CIDR 標記，像是 192.168.1.0/24) 以逗號分隔的清單。\n" #~ " 如果沒有用戶端主機獲得授權，就不會啟動 saned。\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/security.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/security.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/security.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: security\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-10-06 21:02+0800\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -248,9 +248,7 @@ #. richtext message: %1 = runlevel ("3" or "5"), %2 = list of services #: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:411 -msgid "" -"<P>These basic system services are not enabled in runlevel %1:<BR><B>%2</B>" +msgid "<P>These basic system services are not enabled in runlevel %1:<BR><B>%2</B></P>" msgstr "<P>這些基本系統服務未啟用在 runlevel %1:<BR><B>%2</B></P>" #: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:419 @@ -404,8 +402,7 @@ msgstr "" "<p><b>Ctrl + Alt + Del 的意義</b>：\n" "設定系統應如何回應\n" -"在主控台按下 CTRL + ALT + DEL 組合鍵時的回應。通常為系統重新開機。有時會希" -"望\n" +"在主控台按下 CTRL + ALT + DEL 組合鍵時的回應。通常為系統重新開機。有時會希望\n" "忽略這個事件。例如，當系統同時作為工作站\n" "和伺服器時。</p>" @@ -422,20 +419,16 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:72 msgid "" "<p><b>Hibernate System</b>:\n" -"Set the conditions for allowing users to hibernate the system. By default, " -"user on active console has such right.\n" -"Other options are allowing the action to any user or requiring " -"authentication in all cases.</p>\n" +"Set the conditions for allowing users to hibernate the system. By default, user on active console has such right.\n" +"Other options are allowing the action to any user or requiring authentication in all cases.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Main dialog help 1/8 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:78 msgid "" "<P><BIG><B>Configuring Local Security</B></BIG></P>\n" -"<p>Using predefined defaults, change the local security settings, which " -"include\n" -" booting, login, password, user creation, and file permissions. The " -"default\n" +"<p>Using predefined defaults, change the local security settings, which include\n" +" booting, login, password, user creation, and file permissions. The default\n" " settings can be modified as needed.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -492,12 +485,9 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:106 msgid "" "<p><b>Delay after Incorrect Login Attempt:</b>\n" -"It is advisable to wait some time after an incorrect login attempt to " -"prevent\n" -"password guessing. Make the time small enough that users do not need to wait " -"to\n" -"retry if a password is mistyped. A sensible value is three seconds (<tt>3).</p>" +"It is advisable to wait some time after an incorrect login attempt to prevent\n" +"password guessing. Make the time small enough that users do not need to wait to\n" +"retry if a password is mistyped. A sensible value is three seconds (<tt>3</tt>).</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>不正確登入次數後的延遲：</b>\n" "建議您在不正確的登入嘗試後，稍待一下以避免\n" @@ -510,8 +500,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Record Successful Login Attempts:</b> Logging successful login\n" "attempts is useful. It can warn you of unauthorized access to the\n" -"system (for example, a user logging in from a different location than " -"usual).\n" +"system (for example, a user logging in from a different location than usual).\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>記錄成功登入次數 ：</b> 記錄成功登入次數非常\n" @@ -523,8 +512,7 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:120 msgid "" "<p><b>Allow Remote Graphical Login:</b> Checking this allows access\n" -"to a graphical login screen for this machine over the network. Remote " -"access\n" +"to a graphical login screen for this machine over the network. Remote access\n" "to your machine using a display manager might be a security risk.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>允許遠端圖形登入：</b> 核取這個設定可讓您\n" @@ -542,8 +530,7 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:130 msgid "" "<p><b>Check New Passwords</b>: It is wise to choose a password that\n" -"cannot be found in a dictionary and is not a name or other simple, common " -"word.\n" +"cannot be found in a dictionary and is not a name or other simple, common word.\n" "By checking the box, enforce password checking in regard to these rules.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>檢查新密碼</b>：選擇在字典中\n" @@ -555,8 +542,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Minimum Acceptable Password Length:</b>\n" "The minimum acceptable size for the new password reduced by the number\n" -"of different character classes (other, upper, lower and digit) used in the " -"new\n" +"of different character classes (other, upper, lower and digit) used in the new\n" "password. See man pam_cracklib for a more detailed explanation.\n" "This option can only be modified when <b>Check New Passwords</b> is set.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -570,8 +556,7 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:144 msgid "" "<p><b>Passwords to Remember</b>:\n" -"Enter the number of user passwords to store and prevent the user from " -"reusing.\n" +"Enter the number of user passwords to store and prevent the user from reusing.\n" "Enter 0 if passwords should not be stored.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>要記住的密碼</b>：\n" @@ -587,8 +572,7 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:152 msgid "" "<p><b>DES</b>, the Linux default method, works in all network environments,\n" -"but it restricts you to passwords no longer than eight characters. If you " -"need\n" +"but it restricts you to passwords no longer than eight characters. If you need\n" "compatibility with other systems, use this method.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>DES</b> 為 Linux 預設方法，可使用於所有網路環境，\n" @@ -598,8 +582,7 @@ #. Password dialog help 5c/8 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:158 msgid "" -"<p><b>MD5</b> allows longer passwords and is supported by all current " -"Linux \n" +"<p><b>MD5</b> allows longer passwords and is supported by all current Linux \n" "distributions, but not by other systems or old software.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>MD5</b> 允許使用較長的密碼，現有的所有 Linux\n" @@ -608,12 +591,8 @@ #. Password dialog help 5d/8 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:162 -msgid "" -"<p><b>SHA-512</b> is the current standard hash method, using other " -"algorithms is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purpose.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>SHA-512</b> 是目前的標準 hash 方式，除非您為了相容的目的，否則 不建議使" -"用其他演算法。</p>" +msgid "<p><b>SHA-512</b> is the current standard hash method, using other algorithms is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purpose.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>SHA-512</b> 是目前的標準 hash 方式，除非您為了相容的目的，否則 不建議使用其他演算法。</p>" #. Password dialog help 7/8 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:166 @@ -628,8 +607,7 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:170 msgid "" "<p><b>Days before Password Expires Warning</b>: This entry sets the\n" -"number of days users are warned before their passwords expire. The longer " -"the\n" +"number of days users are warned before their passwords expire. The longer the\n" "time, the less likely it is that someone can guess passwords.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>密碼過期前發出警告的天數</b>：這個項目設定密碼過其前多少\n" @@ -667,8 +645,7 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:188 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Other Security Settings</b></big></P>\n" -"<p>In this dialog, change miscellaneous settings related to local security." +"<p>In this dialog, change miscellaneous settings related to local security.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>其他安全性設定</B></BIG><BR>\n" "可以在這個對話方塊變更與本機安全性相關的雜項設定。</P>" @@ -677,20 +654,15 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:192 msgid "" "<p><b>File Permissions</b>: Settings for the permissions\n" -"of certain system files are set according to the data in /etc/permissions." -"secure\n" +"of certain system files are set according to the data in /etc/permissions.secure\n" "or /etc/permissions.easy. Which file is used depends on this selection.\n" -"Launching SuSEconfig sets these permissions according to /etc/permissions." -"*.\n" -"This fixes files with incorrect permissions, whether this occurred " -"accidentally\n" +"Launching SuSEconfig sets these permissions according to /etc/permissions.*.\n" +"This fixes files with incorrect permissions, whether this occurred accidentally\n" "or by intruders.</p><p>\n" "With <b>Easy</b>, most of the system files that are only readable by root\n" "in Secure are modified so other users can also read these files.\n" -"Using <b>Secure</b>, certain system files, such as /var/log/messages, can " -"only\n" -"be viewed by the user root. Some programs can only be launched by root or " -"by\n" +"Using <b>Secure</b>, certain system files, such as /var/log/messages, can only\n" +"be viewed by the user root. Some programs can only be launched by root or by\n" "daemons, not by ordinary users.\n" "The most secure setting is <b>Paranoid</B>. With it, you must\n" "decide which users are able to run X applications and setuid programs.</p>\n" @@ -713,11 +685,9 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:208 msgid "" "<p><b>User Launching updatedb</b>: The program updatedb runs \n" -"once a day. It scans your entire file system and creates a database " -"(locatedb)\n" +"once a day. It scans your entire file system and creates a database (locatedb)\n" "that stores the location of every file. The database can be searched by the\n" -"program \"locate\". Here, set the user that runs this command: <b>nobody\n" +"program \"locate\". Here, set the user that runs this command: <b>nobody</b>\n" " (few files) or <b>root</b> (all files).</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>使用者啟動 updatedb</b>：程式 updatedb 每天\n" @@ -731,8 +701,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Current Directory in root's Path</b> On a DOS system,\n" "the system first searches for executable files (programs) in the current\n" -"directory then in the current path variable. In contrast, a UNIX-like " -"system\n" +"directory then in the current path variable. In contrast, a UNIX-like system\n" "searches for them exclusively via the search path (variable PATH).</p>" msgstr "" "<p>DOS 系統的<b>「根路徑中目前的目錄」</b>，\n" @@ -744,26 +713,22 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:223 msgid "" "<p><b>Current Directory in the Path of Regular Users</b><br> A DOS\n" -"system first searches for executable files (programs) in the current " -"directory\n" +"system first searches for executable files (programs) in the current directory\n" "then in the current path variable. In contrast, a UNIX-like system searches\n" "for them exclusively via the search path (variable PATH).</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>一般使用者路徑中目前的目錄</b><br> DOS\n" "系統會先在目前的目錄中搜尋可執行的檔案 (程式)，\n" -"然後才在目前的路徑變數中搜尋。相反的，像 UNIX 型系統則會完全透過搜尋路徑 (變" -"數 PATH) 進行搜尋。</p>" +"然後才在目前的路徑變數中搜尋。相反的，像 UNIX 型系統則會完全透過搜尋路徑 (變數 PATH) 進行搜尋。</p>" #. Misc dialog help 12/14 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:230 msgid "" "<p>Some systems set up a work-around by adding the dot (\".\") to the\n" "search path, enabling files in the current path to be found and executed.\n" -"This is highly dangerous because you may accidentally launch unknown " -"programs in\n" +"This is highly dangerous because you may accidentally launch unknown programs in\n" "the current directory instead of the usual systemwide files. As a result,\n" -"executing <i>Trojan Horses</i>, which exploit this weakness and invade your " -"system,\n" +"executing <i>Trojan Horses</i>, which exploit this weakness and invade your system,\n" "is rather easy if you set this option.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>某些系統會以新增點 (\".\") 到\n" @@ -795,8 +760,7 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:247 msgid "" "<p><b>Enable Magic SysRq Keys</b><br> If you check this option, you\n" -"will have some control over the system even if it crashes (for example, " -"during kernel\n" +"will have some control over the system even if it crashes (for example, during kernel\n" "debugging). For details, see /usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>「啟用魔術 SysRq 金鑰」</b><br> 如果您核取這個選項，您將可\n" @@ -806,122 +770,79 @@ #. help text: security overview dialog 1/ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:253 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<P><B>Security Overview</B><BR>This overview shows the most important " -"security settings.</P>" +msgid "<P><B>Security Overview</B><BR>This overview shows the most important security settings.</P>" msgstr "<P><B>安全性總覽</B><BR>這是最重要的安全性設定 的總覽。</P>" #. help text: security overview dialog 1/ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:257 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<P>To change the current value, click the link associated to the option.</P>" +msgid "<P>To change the current value, click the link associated to the option.</P>" msgstr "<P>要變更目前的值，按選項旁邊的連結。</P>" #. help text: security overview dialog 1/ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:261 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<P> A check mark in the <B>Security Status</B> column means that the current " -"value of the option is secure.</P>" +msgid "<P> A check mark in the <B>Security Status</B> column means that the current value of the option is secure.</P>" msgstr "<P>核取標記在 <B>安全性狀態</B> 欄位表示目前此選項的值 是安全的。</P>" #. an error message (rich text) #: src/include/security/helps.rb:265 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<P><B>The current value could not be read. The service is probably not " -"installed or the option is missing on the system.</B></P>" -msgstr "" -"<P><B>目前的值無法被讀取。所需的服務可能 尚未安裝或系統中遺失此選項。</B></P>" +msgid "<P><B>The current value could not be read. The service is probably not installed or the option is missing on the system.</B></P>" +msgstr "<P><B>目前的值無法被讀取。所需的服務可能 尚未安裝或系統中遺失此選項。</B></P>" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:271 msgid "" "<P>A display manager provides a graphical login screen and can be accessed\n" "across the network by an X server running on another system if so\n" "configured.</P><P>The windows that are being displayed would then transmit\n" -"their data across the network. If that network is not fully trusted, then " -"the\n" -"network traffic can be eavesdropped by an attacker, gaining access not only " -"to\n" -"the graphical content of the display, but also to usernames and passwords " -"that\n" -"are being used.</P><P>If you do not need <EM>XDMCP</EM> for remote " -"graphical\n" +"their data across the network. If that network is not fully trusted, then the\n" +"network traffic can be eavesdropped by an attacker, gaining access not only to\n" +"the graphical content of the display, but also to usernames and passwords that\n" +"are being used.</P><P>If you do not need <EM>XDMCP</EM> for remote graphical\n" "logins, then disable this option.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:281 msgid "" -"<P>Upon startup, the system time is being set from the hardware clock of " -"the\n" -"computer. As a consequence, setting the hardware clock before shutting down " -"is\n" -"necessary.</P><P>Consistent system time is essential for the system to " -"create\n" +"<P>Upon startup, the system time is being set from the hardware clock of the\n" +"computer. As a consequence, setting the hardware clock before shutting down is\n" +"necessary.</P><P>Consistent system time is essential for the system to create\n" "correct log messages.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:287 -msgid "" -"<P>Malfunctions in a system are usually detected by anomalies in its " -"behaviour. Syslog messages about events that reoccur on a regular basis are " -"important to find causes of problems. And the absence of a single record can " -"tell more than the absence of all log records.</P><P>Therefore, syslog " -"messages of system events are only useful if they are present.</P>" +msgid "<P>Malfunctions in a system are usually detected by anomalies in its behaviour. Syslog messages about events that reoccur on a regular basis are important to find causes of problems. And the absence of a single record can tell more than the absence of all log records.</P><P>Therefore, syslog messages of system events are only useful if they are present.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:290 -msgid "" -"<P>Chroot execution environments restrict a process to only access files " -"that it needs by placing them in a separate subdirectory and running the " -"process with a changed root (chroot) set to that directory.</P>" +msgid "<P>Chroot execution environments restrict a process to only access files that it needs by placing them in a separate subdirectory and running the process with a changed root (chroot) set to that directory.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:293 -msgid "" -"<P>The DHCP client daemon should run as the user <EM>dhcpd</EM> to minimize " -"a possible threat if the service is found vulnerable to a weakness in its " -"program code.</P><P>Note that dhcpd must never run as <EM>root</EM> or with " -"the <EM>CAP_SYS_CHROOT</EM> capability for the chroot execution confinement " -"to be effective.</P>" +msgid "<P>The DHCP client daemon should run as the user <EM>dhcpd</EM> to minimize a possible threat if the service is found vulnerable to a weakness in its program code.</P><P>Note that dhcpd must never run as <EM>root</EM> or with the <EM>CAP_SYS_CHROOT</EM> capability for the chroot execution confinement to be effective.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:296 -msgid "" -"<P>Administrators should never log on as <EM>root</EM> into an X Window " -"session to minimize the usage of the root privileges.</P><P>This option does " -"not help against careless administrators, but shall prevent attackers to be " -"able to log on as <EM>root</EM> via the display manager if they guess or " -"otherwise acquire the password.</P>" +msgid "<P>Administrators should never log on as <EM>root</EM> into an X Window session to minimize the usage of the root privileges.</P><P>This option does not help against careless administrators, but shall prevent attackers to be able to log on as <EM>root</EM> via the display manager if they guess or otherwise acquire the password.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:299 msgid "" -"<P>X Window clients, e.g. programs that open a window on your display, " -"connect\n" -"to the X server that runs on the physical machine. Programs can also run on " -"a\n" +"<P>X Window clients, e.g. programs that open a window on your display, connect\n" +"to the X server that runs on the physical machine. Programs can also run on a\n" "different system and display their content on the X server through network\n" -"connections.</P><P>When enabled, the X server listens on a port 6000 plus " -"the\n" -"display number. Since network traffic is transferred unencrypted and " -"therefore\n" +"connections.</P><P>When enabled, the X server listens on a port 6000 plus the\n" +"display number. Since network traffic is transferred unencrypted and therefore\n" "subject to network sniffing, and since the port held open by the X server\n" -"offers attack options, the secure setting is to disable it.</P><P>To display " -"X\n" -"Window clients across a network, we recommend the use of secure shell " -"(<EM>ssh</EM>), which allows the X Window clients to connect to the X server " -"through the encrypted ssh connection.</P>" +"offers attack options, the secure setting is to disable it.</P><P>To display X\n" +"Window clients across a network, we recommend the use of secure shell (<EM>ssh</EM>), which allows the X Window clients to connect to the X server through the encrypted ssh connection.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:309 msgid "" -"<P>The email delivery subsystem is always started. However, it does not " -"expose\n" -"itself outside the system by default, since it does not listen on the SMTP " -"network port 25.</P><P>If you do not deliver emails to your system through " -"the SMTP protocol, then disable this option.</P>" +"<P>The email delivery subsystem is always started. However, it does not expose\n" +"itself outside the system by default, since it does not listen on the SMTP network port 25.</P><P>If you do not deliver emails to your system through the SMTP protocol, then disable this option.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:312 @@ -930,8 +851,7 @@ "updated, the service is restarted after the files in the package have been\n" "installed.</P><P>This makes sense in most cases, and it is safe to do,\n" "considering that many services either need their binaries or configuration\n" -"files accessible in the file system. Otherwise these services would " -"continue\n" +"files accessible in the file system. Otherwise these services would continue\n" "to run until the services are stopped, e.g. running daemons are\n" "killed.</P><P>This setting should only be changed if there is a specific\n" "reason to do so.</P>" @@ -943,32 +863,18 @@ "uninstalled, the service is stopped before the files of the package are\n" "removed.</P><P>This makes sense in most cases, and it is safe to do,\n" "considering that many services either need their binaries or configuration\n" -"files accessible in the file system. Otherwise these services would " -"continue\n" +"files accessible in the file system. Otherwise these services would continue\n" "to run until they are stopped, e.g. running daemons are\n" "killed.</P><P>This setting should only be changed if there is a specific\n" "reason to do so.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:332 -msgid "" -"<P>A system can be overwhelmed with numerous connection attempts so that the " -"system runs out of memory, leading to a Denial of Service (DoS) " -"vulnerability.</P><P>The use of syncookies is a method that can help in such " -"situations. But in configurations with a very large number of legitimate " -"connection attempts from one source, the <EM>Enabled</EM> setting can cause " -"problems with denied TCP connections under high load.</P><P>Still, for most " -"environments, syncookies are the first line of defense against SYN flood DoS " -"attacks, so the secure setting is <EM>Enabled</EM>.</P>" +msgid "<P>A system can be overwhelmed with numerous connection attempts so that the system runs out of memory, leading to a Denial of Service (DoS) vulnerability.</P><P>The use of syncookies is a method that can help in such situations. But in configurations with a very large number of legitimate connection attempts from one source, the <EM>Enabled</EM> setting can cause problems with denied TCP connections under high load.</P><P>Still, for most environments, syncookies are the first line of defense against SYN flood DoS attacks, so the secure setting is <EM>Enabled</EM>.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:335 src/include/security/helps.rb:339 -msgid "" -"<P>IP forwarding means to pass on network packets that have been received, " -"but that are not destined for one of the system's configured network " -"interfaces, e.g. network interface addresses.</P><P>If a system forwards " -"network traffic on ISO/OSI layer 3, it is called a router. If you do not " -"need that routing functionality, then disable this option.</P>" +msgid "<P>IP forwarding means to pass on network packets that have been received, but that are not destined for one of the system's configured network interfaces, e.g. network interface addresses.</P><P>If a system forwards network traffic on ISO/OSI layer 3, it is called a router. If you do not need that routing functionality, then disable this option.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:338 @@ -981,37 +887,24 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:343 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<P>Magic SysRq Keys enable some control over the system even if it crashes " -"(e.g. during kernel debugging) or if the system does not respond.</P>" +msgid "<P>Magic SysRq Keys enable some control over the system even if it crashes (e.g. during kernel debugging) or if the system does not respond.</P>" msgstr "" "<p><b>啟用魔術 SysRq 金鑰</b><br> 若選取此選項，您\n" "將會擁有系統的部分控制權，即使系統損毀 (例如，核心\n" -"除錯期間)。如需詳細資訊，請參閱 <i>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</p>" +"除錯期間)。如需詳細資訊，請參閱 <i>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</i></p>" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:346 -msgid "" -"<P>There are predefined file permissions in /etc/permissions.* files. The " -"most restrictive file permissions are defined 'secure' or 'paranoid' file." +msgid "<P>There are predefined file permissions in /etc/permissions.* files. The most restrictive file permissions are defined 'secure' or 'paranoid' file.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:349 src/include/security/helps.rb:352 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<P>Basic system services must be enabled to provide system consistency and " -"to run the security-related services.</P>" +msgid "<P>Basic system services must be enabled to provide system consistency and to run the security-related services.</P>" msgstr "<P>基本系統服務必須啟用已提供系統的穩定性以及 執行相關安全性服務。</P>" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:355 src/include/security/helps.rb:358 -msgid "" -"<P>Every running service is a potential target of a security attack. " -"Therefore it is recommended to turn off all services which are not used by " -"the system.</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P>每個執行中的服務都是一個潛在安全攻擊的目標。 因此我們建議所有系統中不用的" -"服務 都要關閉。</P>" +msgid "<P>Every running service is a potential target of a security attack. Therefore it is recommended to turn off all services which are not used by the system.</P>" +msgstr "<P>每個執行中的服務都是一個潛在安全攻擊的目標。 因此我們建議所有系統中不用的服務 都要關閉。</P>" #. level name #: src/include/security/levels.rb:51 @@ -1348,10 +1241,8 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Blowfish</b> is similar to MD5, but uses a different algorithm\n" -#~ "to encrypt passwords. A lot of CPU power is needed to calculate the " -#~ "hash,\n" -#~ "which makes it difficult to crack passwords with the help of a dictionary." -#~ "</p>" +#~ "to encrypt passwords. A lot of CPU power is needed to calculate the hash,\n" +#~ "which makes it difficult to crack passwords with the help of a dictionary.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>「blowfish」</b> 類似 MD5，但它使用不同的演算法\n" #~ "來加密密碼。需要大量的 CPU 運算來計算雜湊，\n" @@ -1371,10 +1262,8 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Test for Complicated Passwords</b>: \n" -#~ "Passwords should be constructed using a mixture of characters. This makes " -#~ "the\n" -#~ "guessing of passwords very difficult. Check this box to enable " -#~ "additional\n" +#~ "Passwords should be constructed using a mixture of characters. This makes the\n" +#~ "guessing of passwords very difficult. Check this box to enable additional\n" #~ "checks.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>測試複雜的密碼</b>：\n" @@ -1418,8 +1307,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Custom Settings</b>: Create your own configuration.</p>\n" -#~ " <p><b>Details</b>: View and modify all configuration settings for " -#~ "the\n" +#~ " <p><b>Details</b>: View and modify all configuration settings for the\n" #~ " current configuration.</P>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>自訂設定</b>：要建立自己的組態嗎？</p>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/services-manager.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/services-manager.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/services-manager.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-08-18 16:19+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:35+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" "Language-Team: none\n" @@ -17,14 +17,224 @@ "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +#: src/clients/default_target_finish.rb:33 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Reading the default system settings..." +msgid "Saving default systemd target..." +msgstr "正在讀取預設系統設定..." + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:26 +msgid "VNC needs graphical system to be available" +msgstr "" + #. TODO implement behaviour if force_reset parameter provided +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:51 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Default system settings" +msgid "&Default systemd target" +msgstr "預設系統設定" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:52 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Default system settings" +msgid "Default systemd target" +msgstr "預設系統設定" + +#. create the proposal dialog and get the sequence symbol from block +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:116 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Default system settings" +msgid "Set Default Systemd Target" +msgstr "預設系統設定" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:134 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Reading the default system settings..." +msgid "Selecting the Default Systemd Target" +msgstr "正在讀取預設系統設定..." + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:136 +msgid "Systemd is a system and service manager for Linux. It consists of units whose job is to activate services and other units." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:139 +msgid "Default target unit is activated on boot by default. Usually it is a symlink located in path/etc/systemd/system/default.target . See more on systemd man page." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:143 +msgid "Multi-User target is for setting up a non-graphical multi-user system with network suitable for server (similar to runlevel 3)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:146 +msgid "Graphical target for setting up a graphical login screen with network which is typical for workstations (similar to runlevel 5)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:149 +msgid "When you are not sure what would be the best option for you then go with graphical target." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:160 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Available Shares" +msgid "Available Targets" +msgstr "可用的共用資源" + +#. Check if the user forced a particular target before; if he did and the +#. autodetection recommends a different one now, warn the user about this +#. and keep the default target unchanged. +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:219 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "The software proposal is reset to the default values." +msgid "The installer is recommending you the default target '%s' " +msgstr "軟體建議會被重設為預設值。" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:231 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "No package has been selected for installation." +msgid "X11 packages have been selected for installation" +msgstr "沒有選取要安裝的套件。" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:234 +msgid "Live Installation is typically used for full GUI in target system" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:237 +msgid "Serial connection does typically not support GUI" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:241 +msgid "Text mode installation assumes no GUI on the target system" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:244 +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:248 +msgid "Using VNC assumes a GUI on the target system" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:251 +msgid "SSH installation mode assumes no GUI on the target system" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:254 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "No package has been selected for installation." +msgid "X11 packages have not been selected for installation" +msgstr "沒有選取要安裝的套件。" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:257 +msgid "This recommendation is based on the analysis of other installation settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Default for double-click in the table +#. Default for double-click in the table +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:71 src/clients/services.rb:71 +msgid "Writing configuration..." +msgstr "正在寫入組態..." + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:76 src/clients/services.rb:76 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Writing the system configuration" +msgid "Writing the configuration failed:\n" +msgstr "正在寫入系統組態" + +#. Fills the dialog contents +#. Fills the dialog contents +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:91 src/clients/services.rb:91 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Default system settings" +msgid "Default System &Target" +msgstr "預設系統設定" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:99 src/clients/services.rb:99 +msgid "Service" +msgstr "服務" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:100 src/clients/services-manager.rb:130 +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:146 src/clients/services.rb:100 +#: src/clients/services.rb:130 src/clients/services.rb:146 +#: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:16 +msgid "Enabled" +msgstr "啟用" + +#. The current state matches the futural state +#. The current state matches the futural state +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:101 src/clients/services-manager.rb:131 +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:156 src/clients/services.rb:101 +#: src/clients/services.rb:131 src/clients/services.rb:156 +msgid "Active" +msgstr "作用中" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:102 src/clients/services.rb:102 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "描述" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:107 src/clients/services.rb:107 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "&Start" +msgid "&Start/Stop" +msgstr "啟動(&S)" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:109 src/clients/services.rb:109 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Enable/Disable Kdump" +msgid "&Enable/Disable" +msgstr "啟用/停用 Kdump" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:111 src/clients/services.rb:111 +msgid "Show &Details" +msgstr "顯示詳細資料(&D)" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:114 src/clients/services.rb:114 +#: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:5 +msgid "Services Manager" +msgstr "" + +#. Redraws the services dialog +#. Redraws the services dialog +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:126 src/clients/services.rb:126 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Reading the service status..." +msgid "Reading services status..." +msgstr "正在讀取服務狀態..." + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:130 src/clients/services-manager.rb:146 +#: src/clients/services.rb:130 src/clients/services.rb:146 +#: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:23 +msgid "Disabled" +msgstr "已停用" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:131 src/clients/services-manager.rb:156 +#: src/clients/services.rb:131 src/clients/services.rb:156 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "active" +msgid "Inactive" +msgstr "作用中" + +#. The current state differs the the futural state +#. The current state differs the the futural state +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:163 src/clients/services.rb:163 +msgid "Active (will start)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:163 src/clients/services.rb:163 +msgid "Inactive (will stop)" +msgstr "" + +#. Opens up a popup with details about the currently selected service +#. Opens up a popup with details about the currently selected service +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:190 src/clients/services.rb:190 +msgid "Service %{service} Full Info" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO implement behaviour if force_reset parameter provided #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:52 msgid "&Services" msgstr "" #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:53 +#: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:15 msgid "Services" -msgstr "" +msgstr "服務 " #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:116 msgid "" @@ -35,18 +245,14 @@ #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:121 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Services</b></big><br>\n" -"This installation proposal allows you to start and enable a service from " -"the \n" +"This installation proposal allows you to start and enable a service from the \n" " list of services.</p>\n" -"<p>It may also open ports in the firewall for a service if firewall is " -"enabled\n" +"<p>It may also open ports in the firewall for a service if firewall is enabled\n" "and a particular service requires opening them.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:145 -msgid "" -"Service %service will be %toggled and port in firewall will be %switched " -"%link" +msgid "Service %service will be %toggled and port in firewall will be %switched %link" msgstr "" #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:160 @@ -67,20 +273,80 @@ msgid "Cannot enable service %1" msgstr "" -#: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:5 -msgid "Services Manager" -msgstr "" - #: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:6 msgid "Default Target" msgstr "" -#: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:9 -msgid "Enabled Services" -msgstr "" - #. Name of the systemd default target unit. Suffix '.target' is optional. #. @return [String] if the target has been specified in the profile. Can be nil. #: src/lib/services-manager/services_manager_profile.rb:104 msgid "Unknown autoyast services profile schema for 'services-manager'" msgstr "" + +#. AutoYast summary +#: src/modules/services_manager.rb:29 +msgid "Not configured yet." +msgstr "尚未設定。" + +#. Do not start or stop services that are already in the desired state +#. they might be coming from AutoYast import and thus they are :modified. +#: src/modules/services_manager_service.rb:407 +msgid "Could not %{change} %{service} which is currently %{status}. " +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_service.rb:426 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "%1: Could not change state of the device" +msgid "Could not %{change} %{service}. " +msgstr "%1:無法變更設備的狀態" + +#. Default systemd target (previously: runlevel 5) option #1 +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:22 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Dial mode" +msgid "Graphical mode" +msgstr "撥號模式" + +#. Default systemd target (previously: runlevel 3) option #2 +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:24 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Text Mode" +msgid "Text mode" +msgstr "文字模式" + +#. Systemd targets +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:27 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "&Graphical interface" +msgid "Graphical Interface" +msgstr "圖形介面(&G)" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:28 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Select Mode" +msgid "Emergency Mode" +msgstr "選取模式" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:29 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Switch Mode" +msgid "Switch Root" +msgstr "切換模式" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:30 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Default Bridge" +msgid "Initrd Default Target" +msgstr "預設橋接器" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:31 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Other System" +msgid "Multi-User System" +msgstr "其他系統" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:32 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Required DMA Mode" +msgid "Rescue Mode" +msgstr "必要的 DMA 模式" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/slp-server.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/slp-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/slp-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:57+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-10-06 21:05+0800\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/snapper.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/snapper.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/snapper.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-10-14 13:58+0800\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -332,8 +332,7 @@ "<p>\n" "%2\n" "</p>\n" -"<p>Files existing in original snapshot will be copied to current system.\n" +"<p>Files existing in original snapshot will be copied to current system.</p>\n" "<p>Files that did not exist in the snapshot will be deleted.</p>Are you sure?" msgstr "" @@ -352,25 +351,15 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b><big>Snapshots Configuration</big></b><p>\n" -"<p>The table shows a list of root filesystem snapshots. There are three " -"types\n" -"of snapshots, <b>single</b>, <b>pre</b> and <b>post</b>. Single snapshots " -"are\n" -"used for storing the file system state in a certain time, while Pre and Post " -"are used to define the changes done by special operation performed between " -"taking those two snapshots. Pre and Post snapshots are coupled together in " -"the table.</p>\n" -"<p>Select a snapshot or snapshot couple and click <b>Show Changes</b> to see " -"the\n" +"<p>The table shows a list of root filesystem snapshots. There are three types\n" +"of snapshots, <b>single</b>, <b>pre</b> and <b>post</b>. Single snapshots are\n" +"used for storing the file system state in a certain time, while Pre and Post are used to define the changes done by special operation performed between taking those two snapshots. Pre and Post snapshots are coupled together in the table.</p>\n" +"<p>Select a snapshot or snapshot couple and click <b>Show Changes</b> to see the\n" "new file system changes in the specified snapshot.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>快照組態設定</big></b><p>\n" -"<p>此表格顯示了 root 檔案系統快照的清單。 有三種類型的快照， <b>單一</b>, <b>" -"之前</b> 和 <b>之後t</b>。 單一快照是用來儲存在某個時間的檔案系統狀態，而 '之" -"前' 和 '之後' 是用來定義某操作進行前後兩個快照所造成的變動。在此表格中， '之" -"前' 和 '之後' 的快照是耦合在一起。</p>\n" -"<p>選擇一個快照或快照耦合並按 <b>顯示變更</b> 來檢視檔案系統在特定快照的變" -"更。</p>\n" +"<p>此表格顯示了 root 檔案系統快照的清單。 有三種類型的快照， <b>單一</b>, <b>之前</b> 和 <b>之後t</b>。 單一快照是用來儲存在某個時間的檔案系統狀態，而 '之前' 和 '之後' 是用來定義某操作進行前後兩個快照所造成的變動。在此表格中， '之前' 和 '之後' 的快照是耦合在一起。</p>\n" +"<p>選擇一個快照或快照耦合並按 <b>顯示變更</b> 來檢視檔案系統在特定快照的變更。</p>\n" #. Show snapshot dialog help #: src/include/snapper/helps.rb:49 @@ -378,25 +367,18 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Snapshot Overview</big></b><p>\n" "<p>\n" -"The tree shows all the files that were modified between creating the first " -"('pre') and second ('post') snapshot. On the right side, you see the " -"description generated when the first snapshot was created and the time of " -"creation for both snapshots.\n" +"The tree shows all the files that were modified between creating the first ('pre') and second ('post') snapshot. On the right side, you see the description generated when the first snapshot was created and the time of creation for both snapshots.\n" "</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"When a file is selected in the tree, you see the changes done to it. By " -"default, changes between selected coupled snapshots are shown, but it is " -"possible to compare the file with different versions.\n" +"When a file is selected in the tree, you see the changes done to it. By default, changes between selected coupled snapshots are shown, but it is possible to compare the file with different versions.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>快照概觀</big></b><p>\n" "<p>\n" -"此樹狀結構顯示在第一次('之前')和第二次('之後')快照間被改變的所有檔案。在右" -"邊，您可以看到當第一個快照被建立時所產生的描述，以及兩個快照被建立的時間。\n" +"此樹狀結構顯示在第一次('之前')和第二次('之後')快照間被改變的所有檔案。在右邊，您可以看到當第一個快照被建立時所產生的描述，以及兩個快照被建立的時間。\n" "</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"當樹狀結構的檔案被選取，您可以看到在它身上的變更。預設會顯示所選擇耦合快照之" -"間的變更，但您也可以比較不同版本的檔案。\n" +"當樹狀結構的檔案被選取，您可以看到在它身上的變更。預設會顯示所選擇耦合快照之間的變更，但您也可以比較不同版本的檔案。\n" "</p>" #. Show snapshot dialog help, alternative for single snapshots @@ -405,19 +387,15 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Snapshot Overview</big></b><p>\n" "<p>\n" -"The tree shows all the files that differ in a selected snapshot and the " -"current system. On the right side, you see the snapshot description and time " -"of its creation.\n" +"The tree shows all the files that differ in a selected snapshot and the current system. On the right side, you see the snapshot description and time of its creation.\n" "</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"When a file is selected in the tree, you can see the its difference between " -"snapshot version and current system.\n" +"When a file is selected in the tree, you can see the its difference between snapshot version and current system.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>快照概觀</big></b><p>\n" "<p>\n" -"此樹狀結構顯示所選取快照與現在系統間所有不同的檔案。在右邊，您可以看到快照描" -"述和它的建立時間。\n" +"此樹狀結構顯示所選取快照與現在系統間所有不同的檔案。在右邊，您可以看到快照描述和它的建立時間。\n" "</p>\n" "<p>\n" "當在樹狀結構中的檔案被選取，您可以看到快照版本與目前系統之間的差別。\n" @@ -550,7 +528,5 @@ #~ msgid "File /etc/sysconfig/snapper is not available." #~ msgstr "檔案 /etc/sysconfig/snapper 無法使用" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "These files will be copied from snapshot '%1' to current system: <p>%2Are you sure?" +#~ msgid "These files will be copied from snapshot '%1' to current system: <p>%2</p>Are you sure?" #~ msgstr "這些檔案將被從快照 '%1' 複製到目前的系統：<p>%2</p>您確定嗎？" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/sound.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/sound.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/sound.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: sound\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:57+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2012-05-22 15:07+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/squid.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/squid.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/squid.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: squid\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2008-05-25 13:48+0800\n" "Last-Translator: swyear \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -588,9 +588,7 @@ #. Cache Dialog #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:70 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Refresh Patterns</b> define how Squid treats the objects in the cache." -"</p>\n" +msgid "<p><b>Refresh Patterns</b> define how Squid treats the objects in the cache.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:73 @@ -620,9 +618,7 @@ #. Cache 2 Dialog #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:88 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Cache memory</b> defines the ideal amount of memory to be used for " -"objects.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Cache memory</b> defines the ideal amount of memory to be used for objects.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:91 @@ -630,16 +626,14 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Max Object Size</b> defines the maximum size for objects to be stored\n" "on the disk. Objects larger than this size will not be saved on disk.</p>\n" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>最小物件大小：</b> 指定最小的物件尺寸，小於此將不會儲存到磁碟。</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>最小物件大小：</b> 指定最小的物件尺寸，小於此將不會儲存到磁碟。</p>" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:94 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>Min Object Size</b> specifies the minimum size for objects. Smaller \n" "objects will not be saved to the disk.</p>\n" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>最小物件大小：</b> 指定最小的物件尺寸，小於此將不會儲存到磁碟。</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>最小物件大小：</b> 指定最小的物件尺寸，小於此將不會儲存到磁碟。</p>" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:97 msgid "" @@ -653,11 +647,9 @@ #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:105 msgid "" -"<p><b>Cache Replacement Policy</b> determines which objects are to be " -"replaced\n" +"<p><b>Cache Replacement Policy</b> determines which objects are to be replaced\n" "when disk space is needed.\n" -"<b>Memory Replacement Policy</b> specifies the policy for object replacement " -"in\n" +"<b>Memory Replacement Policy</b> specifies the policy for object replacement in\n" "memory when space for new objects is not available.\n" "Policies could be:\n" "<table>\n" @@ -683,50 +675,40 @@ #. Cache Directory #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:132 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Directory Name</b> defines a top-level directory where cache swap " -"files will be stored.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Directory Name</b> defines a top-level directory where cache swap files will be stored.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:135 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Size</b> defines the amount of disk space (in MB) to use under this " -"directory.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Size</b> defines the amount of disk space (in MB) to use under this directory.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:138 msgid "" -"<p><b>Level 1 Directories</b> defines a number of first-level " -"subdirectories, \n" +"<p><b>Level 1 Directories</b> defines a number of first-level subdirectories, \n" "which will be created under the <b>Directory Name</b> directory.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:141 msgid "" -"<p><b>Level 2 Directories</b> defines a number of second-level " -"subdirectories,\n" +"<p><b>Level 2 Directories</b> defines a number of second-level subdirectories,\n" "which will be created under each first-level directory.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. ACL Groups #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:145 -msgid "" -"<p>Access to the Squid server can be controlled via <b>ACL Groups</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Access to the Squid server can be controlled via <b>ACL Groups</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:148 msgid "" -"<p><b>ACL Group</b> has various types and the description of ACL Group " -"depends\n" +"<p><b>ACL Group</b> has various types and the description of ACL Group depends\n" "on the particular type.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:151 msgid "" -"<p>In the <b>Access Control</b> table, access can be denied or allowed to " -"ACL Groups.\n" -"If there are more ACL Groups in one line, it means that access will be " -"allowed\n" +"<p>In the <b>Access Control</b> table, access can be denied or allowed to ACL Groups.\n" +"If there are more ACL Groups in one line, it means that access will be allowed\n" "or denied to members who belong to all ACL Groups at the same time.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -738,24 +720,19 @@ #. Logging and Timeouts Dialog #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:160 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Access Log</b> defines the file in which client activities are logged." -"</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Access Log</b> defines the file in which client activities are logged.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:163 msgid "" -"<p><b>Cache Log</b> defines the file in which general information about " -"your\n" +"<p><b>Cache Log</b> defines the file in which general information about your\n" "cache's behavior is logged.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:166 msgid "" -"<p><b>Cache Store Log</b> defines the location of the transaction log of " -"all\n" -"objects that are stored in the object store, as well as the time when an " -"object\n" +"<p><b>Cache Store Log</b> defines the location of the transaction log of all\n" +"objects that are stored in the object store, as well as the time when an object\n" "gets deleted. This option can be left empty.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -926,8 +903,7 @@ #. test if changed ACL is used in other option (not managed by thid module) #: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:467 -msgid "" -"If you change the name of this ACL Group, these options might be affected: \n" +msgid "If you change the name of this ACL Group, these options might be affected: \n" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:474 @@ -1251,9 +1227,7 @@ msgstr "目的地領域" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:148 -msgid "" -"This refers to the destination domain, i.e. the source domain where the " -"origin server is located." +msgid "This refers to the destination domain, i.e. the source domain where the origin server is located." msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:155 @@ -1315,8 +1289,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:213 -msgid "" -"Matches the URL path minus any protocol, port, and host name information" +msgid "Matches the URL path minus any protocol, port, and host name information" msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:220 @@ -1368,9 +1341,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:278 -msgid "" -"A regular expression that matches the client's browser type based on the " -"user agent header." +msgid "A regular expression that matches the client's browser type based on the user agent header." msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:288 @@ -1378,9 +1349,7 @@ msgstr "最大 HTTP 連線數" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:300 -msgid "" -"Matches when the client's IP address has more than the specified number of " -"HTTP connections established." +msgid "Matches when the client's IP address has more than the specified number of HTTP connections established." msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:307 @@ -1402,8 +1371,7 @@ #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:351 msgid "" -"Regular expression matching the mime type of the reply received by squid. " -"Can\n" +"Regular expression matching the mime type of the reply received by squid. Can\n" "be used to detect file download or some types of HTTP tunnelling requests.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1426,11 +1394,11 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: language name - combo box entry #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:53 msgid "Afrikaans" -msgstr "" +msgstr "南非荷蘭文" #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:54 msgid "Arabic" -msgstr "" +msgstr "阿拉伯" # AM #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:55 @@ -1479,7 +1447,7 @@ #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:66 msgid "Persian" -msgstr "" +msgstr "波斯文" #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:67 msgid "Finnish" @@ -1499,7 +1467,7 @@ #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:71 msgid "Indonesian" -msgstr "" +msgstr "印尼文" #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:72 msgid "Italian" @@ -1515,7 +1483,7 @@ #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:75 msgid "Latvian" -msgstr "" +msgstr "拉脫維亞文" #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:76 msgid "Lithuanian" @@ -1523,7 +1491,7 @@ #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:77 msgid "Malay" -msgstr "" +msgstr "馬來文" #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:78 msgid "Dutch" @@ -1580,7 +1548,7 @@ #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:90 msgid "Thai" -msgstr "" +msgstr "泰國" #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:91 msgid "Turkish" @@ -1593,11 +1561,11 @@ #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:93 msgid "Uzbek" -msgstr "" +msgstr "烏茲別克文" #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:94 msgid "Vietnamese" -msgstr "" +msgstr "越南" #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:95 msgid "Simplified Chinese" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/sshd.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/sshd.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/sshd.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: sshd\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-10-06 21:23+0800\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ #. Table header #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-start-complex.ycp:63 msgid "Number" -msgstr "" +msgstr "數目" #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-start-complex.ycp:63 msgid "Sshd" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/storage.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/storage.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/storage.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: storage\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-09-29 18:07+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2008-05-25 09:38+0800\n" "Last-Translator: swyear \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ msgstr "建立分割區設定...(&C)" #. popup text -#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:117 +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:123 #: src/clients/partitions_proposal.rb:105 msgid "" "No automatic proposal possible.\n" @@ -112,14 +112,14 @@ #. this is the resize case #. #. this is the normal case -#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:129 src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:164 +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:135 src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:164 #: src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:178 src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:185 #, fuzzy msgid "Edit Proposal Settings" msgstr "特殊設定" #. help on suggested partitioning -#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:159 +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:165 msgid "" "<p>\n" "Your hard disks have been checked. The partition setup\n" @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ #. help text continued #. %1 is replaced by button text -#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:169 +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:175 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p>\n" @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ "分割區程式對話中執行這些修改。</p>\n" #. help text continued -#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:182 +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:188 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p>\n" @@ -168,15 +168,21 @@ #. Attention! besides the testsuite, AutoYaST is using this to turn off #. the proposal screen too. See inst_autosetup.ycp -#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:226 +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:232 msgid "Impossible to create the requested proposal." msgstr "無法建立要求的建議。" -#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:230 src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:449 +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error message +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:238 +msgid "Not enough space available to propose snapshots for root volume." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error message +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:244 src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:449 msgid "Not enough space available to propose separate /home." msgstr "" -#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:314 +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:295 msgid "" "Computing this proposal will overwrite manual changes \n" "done so far. Continue with computing proposal?" @@ -665,8 +671,7 @@ #. normally the target is located on hard disks. Here no hard disks #. can be found. YaST2 cannot install. Update CD might have newer drivers. #: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:172 -msgid "" -"No disks found. Try using the update CD, if available, for installation." +msgid "No disks found. Try using the update CD, if available, for installation." msgstr "找不到磁碟。嘗試使用更新的CD，如果可能請安裝。" #. There are several hard disks found. Linux is completely installed on @@ -965,8 +970,7 @@ "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"如果您刪除 Windows，則執行安裝時將遺失此分割區的所有資料，且該資料<b>無法再恢" -"復原狀\n" +"如果您刪除 Windows，則執行安裝時將遺失此分割區的所有資料，且該資料<b>無法再恢復原狀\n" "</b>。縮小 Windows 時，<b>強烈\n" "建議您備份資料</b>，因為該資料必須重新組織。\n" "在極少數的狀況下，此作業有可能失敗。\n" @@ -975,7 +979,7 @@ #. Label text #. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text #: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:341 -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6229 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6230 msgid "Propose Separate &Home Partition" msgstr "建議個別主分割區(&H)" @@ -1165,34 +1169,9 @@ "要變更嗎？\n" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:436 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:433 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"Warning: With your current setup, your %1 installation\n" -"will encounter problems when booting, because you have no \"boot\"\n" -"partition and your \"root\" partition is an LVM logical volume.\n" -"This does not work.\n" -"\n" -"If you do not know exactly what you are doing, use a normal\n" -"partition for your files below /boot.\n" -"\n" -"Really use this setup?\n" -msgstr "" -"警告：以目前的設定，您的 %1 安裝\n" -"在開機時會有問題，因為您沒有 \"boot\"\n" -" 分割區，而您的 \"root\" 分割區是 LVM 邏輯卷冊。\n" -"這樣是行不通的。\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"如果您沒有執行的把握，請使用一般\n" -"分割區存放 /boot 下的檔案。\n" -"\n" -"要變更嗎？\n" - -#. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:457 -#, fuzzy -msgid "" "Warning: With your current setup, your %2 installation\n" "will encounter problems when booting, because you have no\n" "FAT partition mounted on %1.\n" @@ -1216,7 +1195,7 @@ "要變更嗎？\n" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:479 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:455 #, fuzzy msgid "" "Warning: With your current setup, your %2 installation will\n" @@ -1242,21 +1221,20 @@ "要變更嗎？\n" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:502 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:478 #, fuzzy msgid "Really use this setup?" msgstr "真的要使用此路徑？" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:510 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:486 #, fuzzy msgid "" "\n" "You have not assigned a swap partition. In most cases, we highly recommend \n" "to create and assign a swap partition.\n" "Swap partitions on your system are listed in the main window with the\n" -"type \"Linux Swap\". An assigned swap partition has the mount point \"swap" -"\".\n" +"type \"Linux Swap\". An assigned swap partition has the mount point \"swap\".\n" "You can assign more than one swap partition, if desired.\n" "\n" "Really use the setup without swap partition?\n" @@ -1272,7 +1250,7 @@ "要變更嗎？\n" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:526 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:502 #, fuzzy msgid "" "\n" @@ -1288,7 +1266,7 @@ "尤其遇到下列情況之一時：\n" #. continued popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:533 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:509 msgid "" "- if this is an existing ReiserFS partition\n" "- if this partition already contains a Linux distribution that will be\n" @@ -1301,12 +1279,11 @@ "- 若此分割區尚未包含檔案系統\n" #. continued popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:540 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:516 #, fuzzy msgid "" "If in doubt, better go back and mark this partition for\n" -"formatting, especially if it is assigned to one of the standard mount " -"points\n" +"formatting, especially if it is assigned to one of the standard mount points\n" "like /, /boot, /opt or /var.\n" msgstr "" "若有疑問，您可回到之前的步驟，將此分割區標示為進行\n" @@ -1314,7 +1291,7 @@ "如 /、/boot、/usr、/opt 或 /var。\n" #. continued popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:546 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:522 #, fuzzy msgid "" "If you decide to format the partition, all data on it will be lost.\n" @@ -1326,7 +1303,7 @@ "要變更您的設定嗎？\n" #. popup text %1 is replaced by a raid name e.g. md0 -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:601 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:577 msgid "" "The selected device belongs to the RAID (%1).\n" "Remove it from the RAID before editing it.\n" @@ -1335,7 +1312,7 @@ "編輯設備前，請先從 RAID 移除該設備。\n" #. popup text %1 is replaced by a name e.g. system -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:612 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:588 msgid "" "The selected device belongs to a volume group (%1).\n" "Remove it from the volume group before editing it.\n" @@ -1344,7 +1321,7 @@ "編輯設備前，請先從卷冊群組移除該設備。\n" #. popup text %1 is replaced by a name e.g. system -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:622 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:598 msgid "" "The selected device is used by volume (%1).\n" "Remove the volume before editing it.\n" @@ -1353,7 +1330,7 @@ "編輯設備前，請先移除該卷冊。\n" #. popup text %2 is a device name, %1 is the raid name -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:655 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:631 msgid "" "The device (%2) belongs to the RAID (%1).\n" "Remove it from the RAID before deleting it.\n" @@ -1362,7 +1339,7 @@ "刪除設備前，請先從 RAID 移除該設備。\n" #. popup text, %1 and %2 are device names -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:666 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:642 msgid "" "The device (%2) is used by %1.\n" "Remove %1 before deleting it.\n" @@ -1370,13 +1347,13 @@ "設備 (%2) 為 %1 使用。\n" "刪除設備前，請先移除 %1。\n" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:678 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:654 #, fuzzy msgid "It cannot be deleted while mounted." msgstr "無法刪除所選的綱要。" #. popup text, %1 is a device name -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:714 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:690 #, fuzzy msgid "" "The device (%1) cannot be removed since it is a logical partition and \n" @@ -1387,14 +1364,12 @@ "邏輯分割區正在使用中。\n" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:790 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:766 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"The selected extended partition contains partitions which are currently " -"mounted:\n" +"The selected extended partition contains partitions which are currently mounted:\n" "%1\n" -"We *strongly* recommend to unmount these partitions before you delete the " -"extended partition.\n" +"We *strongly* recommend to unmount these partitions before you delete the extended partition.\n" "Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" "您選取的延伸分割區所包含的分割區目前裝載於：\n" @@ -1403,7 +1378,7 @@ "除非您有執行的把握，否則請選擇「取消」。\n" #. popup text, Do not translate LVM. -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:808 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:784 msgid "" "\n" "The selected extended partition contains at least one LVM partition\n" @@ -1418,7 +1393,7 @@ "再刪除延伸分割區。\n" #. popup text, Do not translate RAID. -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:819 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:795 msgid "" "\n" "The selected extended partition contains at least one partition\n" @@ -1433,7 +1408,7 @@ "再刪除延伸分割區。\n" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:830 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:806 msgid "" "\n" "The selected extended partition contains at least one partition\n" @@ -1453,14 +1428,14 @@ #. label text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:75 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:672 -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6356 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:768 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6357 #, fuzzy msgid "Do not forget what you enter here!" msgstr "請不要忘記您在此處輸入的密碼。" #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:79 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:675 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:771 #, fuzzy msgid "Empty password allowed." msgstr "不允許空的密碼。" @@ -1492,7 +1467,7 @@ #. Label: get password for user root #. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:137 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:700 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:796 #, fuzzy msgid "&Enter a Password for your File System:" msgstr "為您的檔案系統輸入密碼(&E)：" @@ -1504,7 +1479,7 @@ #. Label: get same password again for verification #. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:148 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:684 src/modules/Storage.rb:3996 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:780 src/modules/Storage.rb:3998 #, fuzzy msgid "Reenter the Password for &Verification:" msgstr "重新輸入密碼以進行確認(&V)：" @@ -1529,7 +1504,7 @@ #. popup text #. popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:197 -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3952 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3954 msgid "" "You did not enter a password.\n" "Try again.\n" @@ -1540,7 +1515,7 @@ #. popup text #. popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:204 -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3960 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3962 msgid "" "The password must have at least %1 characters.\n" "Try again.\n" @@ -1575,14 +1550,12 @@ "Normally, a file system to mount is identified in /etc/fstab\n" "by the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system \n" "to mount is found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file \n" -"systems can be mounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is " -"disabled, \n" +"systems can be mounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, \n" "this is not possible.\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>裝載於 /etc/fstab，依據為：</b>\n" "一般而言，要裝載的檔案系統會根據裝置名稱，\n" -"由 /etc/fstab 中識別。因為此識別資料可加以變更，所以也可搜尋 UUID 或卷冊標" -"籤，\n" +"由 /etc/fstab 中識別。因為此識別資料可加以變更，所以也可搜尋 UUID 或卷冊標籤，\n" "來尋找要裝載的檔案系統。不是所有的檔案系統皆可以\n" "UUID 或卷冊標籤予以裝載。如果停用選項，就無法使用上述功能。\n" @@ -1590,8 +1563,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:480 msgid "" "<p><b>Volume Label:</b>\n" -"The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually " -"makes sense only \n" +"The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" "when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" "A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1844,8 +1816,7 @@ msgid "" "The selected device contains partitions that are currently mounted:\n" "%1\n" -"We *strongly* recommended to unmount these partitions before deleting the " -"partition table.\n" +"We *strongly* recommended to unmount these partitions before deleting the partition table.\n" "Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" "您選取的裝置所包含的分割區目前裝載於：\n" @@ -1937,7 +1908,7 @@ #. TRANSLATOR: checkbox text #. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1650 -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6210 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6211 msgid "Enable Snapshots" msgstr "" @@ -1949,23 +1920,23 @@ msgid "Subvolume Handling" msgstr "簽名處理" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1721 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1724 #, fuzzy msgid "Empty subvolume name not allowed." msgstr "不允許空的密碼。" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1725 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1728 msgid "" "Only subvolume names starting with \"%1\" currently allowed!\n" "Automatically prepending \"%1\" to name of subvolume." msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1734 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1738 #, fuzzy msgid "Subvolume name %1 already exists." msgstr "區域名稱 %1 已經存在。" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1765 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1767 msgid "Modifications done so far in this dialog will be lost." msgstr "" @@ -2008,12 +1979,11 @@ #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:87 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:612 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:708 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p>\n" -"This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/" -"tmp.\n" +"This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/tmp.\n" "If you leave the encryption password empty, the system will create\n" "a random password at system startup for you. This means, you will lose all\n" "data on these filesystems at system shutdown.\n" @@ -2029,11 +1999,10 @@ #. help text, continued #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:100 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:627 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:723 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"If you forget your password, you will lose access to the data on your file " -"system.\n" +"If you forget your password, you will lose access to the data on your file system.\n" "Choose your password carefully. A combination of letters and numbers\n" "is recommended. To ensure the password was entered correctly,\n" "enter it twice.\n" @@ -2049,11 +2018,10 @@ #. help text, continued #. helptext, %1 is replaced by integer #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:114 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:641 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:737 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"You must distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have " -"at\n" +"You must distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have at\n" "least %1 characters and, as a rule, not contain any special characters\n" "(e.g., letters with accents or umlauts).\n" "</p>\n" @@ -2082,7 +2050,7 @@ #. help text, continued #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:142 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:653 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:749 msgid "" "<p>\n" "Do not forget this password!\n" @@ -2108,8 +2076,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:159 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"If the encrypted file system does not contain any system file and therefore " -"is\n" +"If the encrypted file system does not contain any system file and therefore is\n" "not needed for the update, you may select <b>Skip</b>. In this case, the\n" "file system is not accessed during update.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -2246,8 +2213,7 @@ #. error popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:259 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Invalid character in mount point. Do not use \"`'!\"%#\" in a mount point." +msgid "Invalid character in mount point. Do not use \"`'!\"%#\" in a mount point." msgstr "裝載點中有無效的字元。請不要在裝載點中使用 \"`'!\"%#\"。" #. error popup text @@ -2316,12 +2282,12 @@ #. ////////////////////////////////////////////// #. modify map new -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:948 -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:975 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:954 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:981 msgid "The file system is currently mounted on %1." msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:953 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:959 msgid "" "You can try to unmount it now, continue without unmounting or cancel.\n" "Click Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing." @@ -2329,33 +2295,33 @@ #. button text #. button text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:964 -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:989 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:970 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:995 #, fuzzy msgid "Unmount" msgstr "裝載" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:980 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:986 msgid "" "You can try to unmount it now or cancel.\n" "Click Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing." msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1026 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1032 #, fuzzy msgid "It is not possible to shrink the file system while it is mounted." msgstr "" "無法調整分割區 %1 的大小，\n" "因為無法裝載檔案系統\n" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1039 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1045 #, fuzzy msgid "It is not possible to extend the file system while it is mounted." msgstr "" "無法調整分割區 %1 的大小，\n" "因為無法裝載檔案系統\n" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1050 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1056 #, fuzzy msgid "It is not possible to resize the file system while it is mounted." msgstr "" @@ -2801,24 +2767,61 @@ msgstr "磁碟裝置(&D)" #. helptext -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:38 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:39 #, fuzzy +msgid "<p>Choose the role of the device.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>\n" +"為您的 %1 分割區選擇新的大小。\n" +"</p>" + +#. radio button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:55 +msgid "Operating System" +msgstr "作業系統" + +#. radio button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:60 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Delta RPM Application Progress" +msgid "Data and ISV Applications" +msgstr "Delta RPM 應用程式進度" + +#. radio button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:65 +msgid "Swap" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:70 +msgid "Raw Volume (unformatted)" +msgstr "" + +#. heading for a frame in a dialog +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:78 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Role: %s" +msgid "Role" +msgstr "角色：%s" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:107 +#, fuzzy msgid "" "<p>First, choose whether the partition should be\n" "formatted and the desired file system type.</p>" msgstr "<p>首先，選擇分割區類型以及是否格式化此分割區。</p>" #. helptext -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:45 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:114 msgid "" "<p>If you want to encrypt all data on the\n" -"volume, select <b>Encrypt Device</b>. Changing the encryption on an " -"existing\n" +"volume, select <b>Encrypt Device</b>. Changing the encryption on an existing\n" "volume will delete all data on it.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. helptext -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:55 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:124 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p>Then, choose whether the partition should\n" @@ -2826,55 +2829,55 @@ msgstr "<p>接著，輸入裝載點 ( /、/boot、/usr、/var 等)。</p>" #. set globals -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:213 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:309 #, fuzzy msgid "Formatting Options" msgstr "記錄選項" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:221 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:317 #, fuzzy msgid "Format partition" msgstr "分割區的大小。" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:232 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:328 #, fuzzy msgid "Do not format partition" msgstr "不要格式化(&N)" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:248 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:344 #, fuzzy msgid "Do not mount partition" msgstr "要分割的磁碟" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:267 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:363 #, fuzzy msgid "Mounting Options" msgstr "裝載選項" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:275 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:371 #, fuzzy msgid "Mount partition" msgstr "正在裝載所有分割區..." #. Column header -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:281 src/modules/StorageFields.rb:144 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:377 src/modules/StorageFields.rb:144 msgid "Mount Point" msgstr "裝載點" #. button text -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:288 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:384 #, fuzzy msgid "Fs&tab Options..." msgstr "Fstab 選項(&T)" #. error popup -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:462 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:558 #, fuzzy msgid "Crypt files must be encrypted." msgstr "沒有選取規劃。" #. error popup -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:473 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:569 #, fuzzy msgid "" "You chose to create the crypt file, but did not specify\n" @@ -2888,19 +2891,19 @@ "您也要選取格式化選項。\n" #. error popup -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:489 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:585 #, fuzzy msgid "Crypt files require a mount point." msgstr "請提供裝載點。" #. error popup -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:503 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:599 #, fuzzy msgid "Tmpfs requires a mount point." msgstr "請提供裝載點。" #. helptext -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:587 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:683 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p>\n" @@ -2916,7 +2919,7 @@ " </p>\n" #. helptext -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:600 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:696 msgid "" "<p>\n" "The file system used for this volume is swap. You can leave the encryption \n" @@ -2925,22 +2928,22 @@ "</p>\n" msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:670 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:766 #, fuzzy msgid "All data stored on the volume will be lost!" msgstr "會遺失所有變更！" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:693 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:789 msgid "Password" msgstr "密碼" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:790 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:886 msgid "Resize not supported by underlying device." msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:795 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:891 msgid "" "\n" "You cannot resize the selected partition because the file system\n" @@ -2950,7 +2953,7 @@ "您無法重新調整選取分割區的大小，因為該分割區的檔案系統\n" "不支援調整大小。\n" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:819 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:915 #, fuzzy msgid "" "It is not possible to check whether a NTFS\n" @@ -2958,7 +2961,7 @@ msgstr "無法在 %1 建立分割區。" #. FIXME: Really? -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:838 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:934 #, fuzzy msgid "" "Partition %1 cannot be resized\n" @@ -2968,24 +2971,24 @@ "故無法調整分割區 %1 的大小。\n" #. Heading for dialog -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:865 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:961 #, fuzzy msgid "Resize Partition %1" msgstr "調整分割區的大小(&E)" #. Heading for dialog -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:886 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:982 #, fuzzy msgid "Resize Logical Volume %1" msgstr "調整邏輯卷冊的大小" #. size_k + min_size_k could be > max_size_k -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:918 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1014 #, fuzzy msgid "Current size: %1" msgstr "目前時區： %1" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:930 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1026 #, fuzzy msgid "Currently used: %1" msgstr "" @@ -2996,8 +2999,8 @@ #. input field label #. combo box label #. Column header -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:943 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:980 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1039 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1076 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:256 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:118 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:559 @@ -3009,7 +3012,7 @@ #. radio button text, %1 is replaced by size #. radio button text, %1 is replaced by size -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:953 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1049 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:242 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:535 #, fuzzy @@ -3017,14 +3020,14 @@ msgstr "最大大小 (MB)(&S)" #. radio button text, %1 is replaced by size -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:963 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1059 #, fuzzy msgid "Minimum Size (%1)" msgstr "最大大小 (MB)(&S)" #. radio button text #. radio button text -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:972 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1068 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:251 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:568 #, fuzzy @@ -3032,7 +3035,7 @@ msgstr "自訂大小(&S)" #. help text -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1006 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1102 #, fuzzy msgid "<p>Choose new size.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -3042,7 +3045,7 @@ #. error popup, %1 and %2 are replaced by sizes #. error popup, %1 and %2 are replaced by sizes -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1057 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1153 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:359 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:692 #, fuzzy @@ -3055,7 +3058,7 @@ #. after user tries to do that is stupid - in some cases #. we can tell beforehand, thus user should never get to this #. point (e.g. when the partition is mounted) -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1100 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1196 msgid "" "You are extending a mounted filesystem by %1 Gigabyte. \n" "This may be quite slow and can take hours. You might possibly want \n" @@ -3064,13 +3067,13 @@ msgstr "" #. label for log view -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1176 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1272 #, fuzzy msgid "Output of %1" msgstr "\t輸出目錄： %1" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1203 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1299 #, fuzzy msgid "Rescanning disks..." msgstr "讀取磁碟分割區..." @@ -3286,62 +3289,62 @@ msgstr "輸入的 WWPN 無效。" #. dialog title -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:537 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:548 #, fuzzy msgid "Add Partition on %1" msgstr "編輯分割區 %1" #. dialog title -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:583 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:594 msgid "Edit Partition %1" msgstr "編輯分割區 %1" #. error popup text, %1 is replace with name of partition -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:616 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:627 #, fuzzy msgid "No space to moved partition %1." msgstr "延伸分割區中無剩餘空間。" #. popup text, %1 is replace with name of partition -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:626 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:637 #, fuzzy msgid "Move partition %1 forward?" msgstr "新增分割區 %1 為交換分割區" #. popup text, %1 is replace with name of partition -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:635 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:646 msgid "Move partition %1 backward?" msgstr "" #. popup text, %1 is replace with name of partition -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:654 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:665 #, fuzzy msgid "Move partition %1?" msgstr "正在裝載所有分割區..." #. radio button text -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:656 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:667 msgid "Forward" msgstr "轉遞" #. radio button text -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:658 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:669 #, fuzzy msgid "Backward" msgstr "背景" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:714 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:725 #, fuzzy msgid "Confirm Deleting of All Partitions" msgstr "正在裝載所有分割區..." -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:716 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:727 msgid "" "The disk \"%1\" contains at least one partition.\n" "If you proceed, the following partitions will be deleted:" msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:721 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:732 #, fuzzy msgid "Really delete all partitions on \"%1\"?" msgstr "確定要刪除 %1上的所有分割區？" @@ -3356,7 +3359,7 @@ #. error popup #. TRANSLATORS: error popup -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:51 src/modules/Storage.rb:5162 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:51 src/modules/Storage.rb:5164 msgid "The disk is in use and cannot be modified." msgstr "" @@ -3902,8 +3905,7 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "\n" -"<p><b>Path Name of Loop File:</b><br>This must be an absolute path to the " -"file\n" +"<p><b>Path Name of Loop File:</b><br>This must be an absolute path to the file\n" "containing the data for the encrypted loop device to set up.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" @@ -3948,8 +3950,7 @@ "careful when providing the size and path name.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"<p><b>注意：</b>安裝時因為無法存取該檔案系統，所以無法針對檔案大小與路徑名稱" -"進行一致性檢查\n" +"<p><b>注意：</b>安裝時因為無法存取該檔案系統，所以無法針對檔案大小與路徑名稱進行一致性檢查\n" "。\n" "檔案會在安裝結束時建立。請留意\n" "您提供的大小和路徑名稱。</p>\n" @@ -4236,8 +4237,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:491 msgid "" "<p>Enter the size as well as the number and size\n" -"of stripes for the new logical volume. The number of stripes cannot be " -"higher\n" +"of stripes for the new logical volume. The number of stripes cannot be higher\n" "than the number of physical volumes of the volume group.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -4287,8 +4287,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:778 msgid "" "<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Normal Volume</b>.\n" -"This is the default and means plain LVM Volumes like all volumes were before " -"the feature of <b>Thin Provisioning</b> existed.\n" +"This is the default and means plain LVM Volumes like all volumes were before the feature of <b>Thin Provisioning</b> existed.\n" "If in doubt this is most probably the right choice</p>" msgstr "" @@ -4296,16 +4295,14 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:787 msgid "" "<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Thin Pool</b>.\n" -"This means <b>Thin Volumes</b> allocate their needed space on demand from " -"such a pool.</p>" +"This means <b>Thin Volumes</b> allocate their needed space on demand from such a pool.</p>" msgstr "" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:794 msgid "" "<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Thin Volume</b>.\n" -"This means the volume allocates needed space on demand from a <b>Thin Pool.</p>" +"This means the volume allocates needed space on demand from a <b>Thin Pool</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. heading for frame @@ -4351,13 +4348,13 @@ msgstr "使用者" #. dialog title, %1 is a volume group -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:1017 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:1028 #, fuzzy msgid "Add Logical Volume on %1" msgstr "編輯邏輯卷冊" #. dialog title - %1 is a logical volume name, %2 is a volume group -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:1064 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:1075 #, fuzzy msgid "Edit Logical Volume %1 on %2" msgstr "編輯邏輯卷冊" @@ -4367,8 +4364,7 @@ msgid "" "There are not enough suitable unused devices to create a volume group.\n" "\n" -"To use LVM, at least one unused partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83) or one " -"unused\n" +"To use LVM, at least one unused partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83) or one unused\n" "RAID device is required. Change your partition table accordingly." msgstr "" @@ -4619,9 +4615,7 @@ #. fallback dialog content #: src/include/partitioning/ep-nfs.rb:55 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"NFS configuration is not available. Check yast2-nfs-client package " -"installation." +msgid "NFS configuration is not available. Check yast2-nfs-client package installation." msgstr "在安裝過程中稍候會進行設定。" #. heading @@ -4657,8 +4651,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:87 msgid "" "<p><b>RAID 0:</b> This level increases your disk performance.\n" -"There is <b>NO</b> redundancy in this mode. If one of the drives crashes, " -"data recovery will not be possible.</p>\n" +"There is <b>NO</b> redundancy in this mode. If one of the drives crashes, data recovery will not be possible.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>RAID 0：</b>此等級可增加您的磁碟效能。\n" "此模式<b>沒有</b>備援。如果其中一個磁碟機損毀，將無法進行資料復原。</p>\n" @@ -4667,10 +4660,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:95 msgid "" "<p><b>RAID 1:</b> <br>This mode has the best redundancy. It can be\n" -"used with two or more disks. This mode maintains an exact copy of all data " -"on all\n" -"disks. As long as at least one disk is still working, no data is lost. The " -"partitions\n" +"used with two or more disks. This mode maintains an exact copy of all data on all\n" +"disks. As long as at least one disk is still working, no data is lost. The partitions\n" "used for this type of RAID should have approximately the same size.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>RAID 1：</b> <br>此模式有最好的備援。它可用於\n" @@ -4682,15 +4673,12 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:106 msgid "" "<p><b>RAID 5:</b> <br>This mode combines management of a larger number\n" -"of disks and still maintains some redundancy. This mode can be used on three " -"disks or more.\n" -"If one disk fails, all data is still intact. If two disks fail " -"simultaneously, all data is lost</p>\n" +"of disks and still maintains some redundancy. This mode can be used on three disks or more.\n" +"If one disk fails, all data is still intact. If two disks fail simultaneously, all data is lost</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>RAID 5：</b> <br>此模式統合管理了大量的磁碟，\n" "並保存了部份備援。此模式可用於三部或三部以上的磁碟。\n" -"即使一部磁碟失敗，所有的資料仍會完好無缺。但若兩部磁碟同時失敗，則會遺失所有" -"資料</p>\n" +"即使一部磁碟失敗，所有的資料仍會完好無缺。但若兩部磁碟同時失敗，則會遺失所有資料</p>\n" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:116 @@ -4705,10 +4693,8 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p>Add partitions to your RAID. According to\n" -"the RAID type, the usable disk size is the sum of these partitions (RAID0), " -"the size\n" -"of the smallest partition (RAID 1), or (N-1)*smallest partition (RAID 5).\n" +"the RAID type, the usable disk size is the sum of these partitions (RAID0), the size\n" +"of the smallest partition (RAID 1), or (N-1)*smallest partition (RAID 5).</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>將分割區加入 RAID。</b>根據 RAID 類型，\n" "可用的磁碟大小為這些分割區 (RAID0)、\n" @@ -4779,10 +4765,8 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>Chunk Size:</b><br>It is the smallest \"atomic\" mass\n" -"of data that can be written to the devices. A reasonable chunk size for RAID " -"5 is 128 kB. For RAID 0,\n" -"32 kB is a good starting point. For RAID 1, the chunk size does not affect " -"the array very much.</p>\n" +"of data that can be written to the devices. A reasonable chunk size for RAID 5 is 128 kB. For RAID 0,\n" +"32 kB is a good starting point. For RAID 1, the chunk size does not affect the array very much.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>區塊大小：</b><br>它是將資料寫入裝置的最小資料單位。\n" "RAID 5 的適當區塊大小為 128KB。至於 RAID 0，\n" @@ -4798,8 +4782,7 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "The parity algorithm to use with RAID5/6.\n" -"Left-symmetric is the one that offers maximum performance on typical disks " -"with rotating platters.\n" +"Left-symmetric is the one that offers maximum performance on typical disks with rotating platters.\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>同位演算法：</b><br>和 RAID5 搭配使用的同位演算法。\n" "左對稱 (left-symmetric) 是對轉盤式一般磁碟提供最大效能的一種方式。</p>\n" @@ -4837,19 +4820,19 @@ msgstr "<p>請選取要新增的宣告類型。</p>" #. dialog title -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:631 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:642 #, fuzzy msgid "Add RAID %1" msgstr "新增 RAID(&D)" #. dialog title -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:665 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:676 #, fuzzy msgid "Resize RAID %1" msgstr "移除 RAID(&V)" #. dialog title -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:711 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:722 #, fuzzy msgid "Edit RAID %1" msgstr "編輯 RAID(&E)" @@ -5094,11 +5077,9 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Default Mount by</b> gives the mount by\n" "method for newly created file systems. <i>Device Name</i> uses the kernel\n" -"device name, which is not persistent. <i>Device ID</i> and <i>Device Path\n" +"device name, which is not persistent. <i>Device ID</i> and <i>Device Path</i>\n" "use names generated by udev from hardware information. These should be\n" -"persistent but unfortunately this is not always true. Finally <i>UUID</i> " -"and\n" +"persistent but unfortunately this is not always true. Finally <i>UUID</i> and\n" "<i>Volume Label</i> use the file systems UUID and label.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -5116,9 +5097,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:217 msgid "" "<p><b>Alignment of Newly Created Partitions</b>\n" -"determines how created partitions are aligned. <b>cylinder</b> is the " -"traditional alignment at cylinder boundaries of the disk. <b>optimal</b> " -"aligns the \n" +"determines how created partitions are aligned. <b>cylinder</b> is the traditional alignment at cylinder boundaries of the disk. <b>optimal</b> aligns the \n" "partitions for best performance according to hints provided by the Linux \n" "kernel or tries to be compatible with Windows Vista and Win 7.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -5393,8 +5372,7 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:316 msgid "" "<p>This dialog is for defining classes for the raid devices\n" -"contained in the raid. Available classes are A, B, C, D and E but for many " -"cases\n" +"contained in the raid. Available classes are A, B, C, D and E but for many cases\n" "fewer classes are needed (e.g. only A and B). </p>" msgstr "" @@ -5402,12 +5380,9 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:325 msgid "" "<p>You can put a device into a class by right-clicking on the\n" -"device and choosing the appropriate class from context menu. By pressing " -"the \n" -"Ctrl or Shift key you can select multiple devices and put them into a class " -"in\n" -"one step. One can also use the buttons labeled \"%1\" to \"%2\" to put " -"currently \n" +"device and choosing the appropriate class from context menu. By pressing the \n" +"Ctrl or Shift key you can select multiple devices and put them into a class in\n" +"one step. One can also use the buttons labeled \"%1\" to \"%2\" to put currently \n" "selected devices into this class.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -5430,8 +5405,7 @@ msgid "" "<b>Interleaved</b> uses first device of class A, then first device of \n" "class B, then all the following classes with assigned devices. Then the \n" -"second device of class A, the second device of class B, and so on will " -"follow." +"second device of class A, the second device of class B, and so on will follow." msgstr "" #. dialog help text @@ -5446,16 +5420,12 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:379 msgid "" "By pressing button \"<b>%1</b>\" you can select a file that contains\n" -"lines with a regular expression and a class name (e.g. \"sda.* A\"). All " -"devices that match \n" -"the regular expression will be put into the class on this line. The regular " -"expression is \n" +"lines with a regular expression and a class name (e.g. \"sda.* A\"). All devices that match \n" +"the regular expression will be put into the class on this line. The regular expression is \n" "matched against the kernel name (e.g. /dev/sda1), \n" -"the udev path name (e.g. /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-" -"part1) and the\n" +"the udev path name (e.g. /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part1) and the\n" "the udev id (e.g. /dev/disk/by-id/ata-ST3500418AS_9VMN8X8L-part1). \n" -"The first match finally determines the class if a devices name matches more " -"then one\n" +"The first match finally determines the class if a devices name matches more then one\n" "regular expression.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -5494,8 +5464,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:295 msgid "" "<p><b>Tmpfs Size:</b>\n" -"Size may be either entered as a number followed by K,M,G for Kilo-, Mega- or " -"Gigabyte or\n" +"Size may be either entered as a number followed by K,M,G for Kilo-, Mega- or Gigabyte or\n" "as a number followed by a percent sign meaning percentage of memory.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -5519,31 +5488,30 @@ "請輸入交換優先程度。數字愈大，優先程度愈高。</p>\n" #. button text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:478 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:479 #, fuzzy msgid "Mount &Read-Only" msgstr "裝載唯讀(&R)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:482 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:483 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>Mount Read-Only:</b>\n" -"Writing to the file system is not possible. Default is false. During " -"installation\n" +"Writing to the file system is not possible. Default is false. During installation\n" "the file system is always mounted read-write.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>唯讀裝載：</b>\n" "無法對檔案系統進行寫入。預設為 False。</p>\n" #. button text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:494 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:495 #, fuzzy msgid "No &Access Time" msgstr "無存取時間(&A)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:498 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:499 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>No Access Time:</b>\n" @@ -5553,13 +5521,13 @@ "讀取檔案時不更新存取時間。預設為 False。</p>" #. button text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:508 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:509 #, fuzzy msgid "Mountable by &User" msgstr "可由使用者裝載(&U)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:512 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:513 msgid "" "<p><b>Mountable by User:</b>\n" "The file system may be mounted by an ordinary user. Default is false.</p>\n" @@ -5568,21 +5536,19 @@ "檔案系統可由一般使用者裝載。預設為 False。</p>\n" #. button text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:525 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:526 msgid "Do Not Mount at System &Start-up" msgstr "不要在系統啟動時裝載(&S)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:531 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:532 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>Do Not Mount at System Start-up:</b>\n" "The file system is not automatically mounted when the system starts.\n" "An entry in /etc/fstab is created and the file system is mounted\n" -"with the appropriate options when the command <tt>mount <mount point>\n" -"is entered (<mount point> is the directory to which the file system is " -"mounted). Default is false.</p>\n" +"with the appropriate options when the command <tt>mount <mount point></tt>\n" +"is entered (<mount point> is the directory to which the file system is mounted). Default is false.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>不要在系統啟動時裝載置：</b>\n" "不在系統啟動時自動裝載檔案系統。\n" @@ -5592,12 +5558,12 @@ "並以適當的選項裝載檔案系統。預設為 False。</p>\n" #. button text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:548 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:549 msgid "Enable &Quota Support" msgstr "啟用限額支援(&Q)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:554 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:555 msgid "" "<p><b>Enable Quota Support:</b>\n" "The file system is mounted with user quotas enabled.\n" @@ -5608,12 +5574,12 @@ "預設為不使用。</p>\n" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:573 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:574 msgid "Data &Journaling Mode" msgstr "資料日誌式模式(&J)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:582 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:583 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>Data Journaling Mode:</b>\n" @@ -5621,10 +5587,8 @@ "<tt>journal</tt> -- All data is committed to the journal prior to being\n" "written into the main file system. Highest performance impact.<br>\n" "<tt>ordered</tt> -- All data is forced directly out to the main file system\n" -"prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. Medium performance " -"impact.<br>\n" -"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Data ordering is not preserved. No performance impact." -"</p>\n" +"prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. Medium performance impact.<br>\n" +"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Data ordering is not preserved. No performance impact.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>資料日誌模式：</b>\n" "指定資料的日誌模式。\n" @@ -5635,12 +5599,12 @@ " <tt>回寫</tt> -- 不會保留資料排列的順序。</p>\n" #. button text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:603 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:604 msgid "&Access Control Lists (ACL)" msgstr "存取控制清單 (ACL)(&A)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:607 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:608 msgid "" "<p><b>Access Control Lists (ACL):</b>\n" "Enable access control lists on the file system.</p>\n" @@ -5649,12 +5613,12 @@ "啟用檔案系統上的存取控制清單。</p>\n" #. button text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:618 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:619 msgid "&Extended User Attributes" msgstr "延伸的使用者屬性(&E)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:622 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:623 msgid "" "<p><b>Extended User Attributes:</b>\n" "Allow extended user attributes on the file system.</p>\n" @@ -5663,24 +5627,21 @@ "允許在檔案系統中使用延伸的使用者屬性。</p>\n" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:639 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:640 #, fuzzy msgid "Arbitrary Option &Value" msgstr "任意的選項值(&V)" -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:644 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:645 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Invalid characters in arbitrary option value. Do not use spaces or tabs. Try " -"again." +msgid "Invalid characters in arbitrary option value. Do not use spaces or tabs. Try again." msgstr "裝載點中有無效的字元。請不要在裝載點中使用 \"`'!\"%#\"。" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:648 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:649 msgid "" "<p><b>Arbitrary Option Value:</b>\n" -"In this field, type any legal mount option allowed in the fourth field of /" -"etc/fstab.\n" +"In this field, type any legal mount option allowed in the fourth field of /etc/fstab.\n" "Multiple options are separated by commas.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>任意的選項值：</b>\n" @@ -5688,12 +5649,12 @@ "以逗號分隔多個選項。</p>\n" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:665 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:666 msgid "Char&set for file names" msgstr "檔案名稱的字元集(&S)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:686 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:687 msgid "" "<p><b>Charset for File Names:</b>\n" "Set the charset used for display of file names in Windows partitions.</p>\n" @@ -5702,68 +5663,63 @@ "設定在 Windows 分割區顯示檔案名稱時所使用的字元集。</p>\n" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:697 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:698 msgid "Code&page for short FAT names" msgstr "短 FAT 名稱的內碼頁(&P)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:703 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:704 msgid "" "<p><b>Codepage for Short FAT Names:</b>\n" -"This codepage is used for converting to shortname characters on FAT file " -"systems.</p>\n" +"This codepage is used for converting to shortname characters on FAT file systems.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>短 FAT 名稱的內碼頁：</b>\n" "此內碼頁會用於轉換 FAT 檔案系統上的短名稱字元。</p>\n" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:717 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:718 msgid "Number of &FATs" msgstr "FAT 數目(&F)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:723 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:724 msgid "" "<p><b>Number of FATs:</b>\n" -"Specify the number of file allocation tables in the file system. The default " -"is 2.</p>" +"Specify the number of file allocation tables in the file system. The default is 2.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>FAT 數目：</b>\n" "指定檔案系統中的檔案配置表數。預設為 2。</p>" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:732 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:733 #, fuzzy msgid "FAT &Size" msgstr "FAT 大小(&S)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:743 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:744 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>FAT Size:</b>\n" -"Specifies the type of file allocation tables used (12, 16, or 32-bit). If " -"auto is specified, YaST will automatically select the value most suitable " -"for the file system size.</p>\n" +"Specifies the type of file allocation tables used (12, 16, or 32-bit). If auto is specified, YaST will automatically select the value most suitable for the file system size.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>FAT 大小：</b>\n" -"指定所使用的檔案配置表類型 (12、16 或 32 位元)。若指定自動，YaST2 便會自動選" -"取最適合於檔案系統大小的值。</p>\n" +"指定所使用的檔案配置表類型 (12、16 或 32 位元)。若指定自動，YaST2 便會自動選取最適合於檔案系統大小的值。</p>\n" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:752 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:753 #, fuzzy msgid "Root &Dir Entries" msgstr "根目錄項目數(&D)" #. popup text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:760 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:761 #, fuzzy msgid "The minimum size for \"Root Dir Entries\" is 112. Try again." msgstr "「根目錄項目數」的最小值為 112。請再試一次。" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:764 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:765 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>Root Dir Entries:</b>\n" @@ -5773,72 +5729,63 @@ "選取根目錄中可使用的項目數。</p>" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:777 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:778 #, fuzzy msgid "Hash &Function" msgstr "雜湊功能(&F)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:784 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:785 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>Hash Function:</b>\n" -"This specifies the name of the hash function to use to sort the file names " -"in directories.</p>\n" +"This specifies the name of the hash function to use to sort the file names in directories.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>雜湊功能：</b>\n" "這會指定將雜湊功能名稱，以用於排序目錄中的檔案名稱。</p>" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:793 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:794 #, fuzzy msgid "FS &Revision" msgstr "FS 版本(&R)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:800 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:801 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>FS Revision:</b>\n" -"This option defines the reiserfs format revision to use. '3.5' is for " -"backwards compatibility with kernels of the 2.2.x series. '3.6' is more " -"recent, but can only be used with kernel versions greater than or equal to " -"2.4.</p>\n" +"This option defines the reiserfs format revision to use. '3.5' is for backwards compatibility with kernels of the 2.2.x series. '3.6' is more recent, but can only be used with kernel versions greater than or equal to 2.4.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>FS 版本：</b>\n" -"此選項會定義要使用的 reiserfs 格式版本。'3.5' 的目的在於提供 2.2.x 系列核心的" -"舊版相容性。'3.6' 是最新版本，但只可搭配 2.4 (含) 以上版本的核心一起使用。\n" +"此選項會定義要使用的 reiserfs 格式版本。'3.5' 的目的在於提供 2.2.x 系列核心的舊版相容性。'3.6' 是最新版本，但只可搭配 2.4 (含) 以上版本的核心一起使用。</p>\n" #. label text #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:813 src/modules/FileSystems.rb:977 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:814 src/modules/FileSystems.rb:978 #, fuzzy msgid "Block &Size in Bytes" msgstr "區塊大小 (位元組)(&S)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:820 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:821 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>Block Size:</b>\n" -"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 512, 1024, " -"2048 and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the standard block size " -"of 4096 is used.</p>\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the standard block size of 4096 is used.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>區塊大小：</b>\n" -"以位元組為單位指定區塊大小。有效的區塊大小值是每區塊 512、1024、2048 與 4096 " -"位元組。若選取自動，便會使用標準區塊大小 4096。</p>\n" +"以位元組為單位指定區塊大小。有效的區塊大小值是每區塊 512、1024、2048 與 4096 位元組。若選取自動，便會使用標準區塊大小 4096。</p>\n" #. label text #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:829 src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1059 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:830 src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1060 msgid "&Inode Size" msgstr "Inode 大小(&I)" #. help text, richtext format #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:835 src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1065 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:836 src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1066 msgid "" "<p><b>Inode Size:</b>\n" "This option specifies the inode size of the file system.</p>\n" @@ -5847,36 +5794,33 @@ "此選項會指定檔案系統的 inode 大小。</p>\n" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:844 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:845 #, fuzzy msgid "&Percentage of Inode Space" msgstr "Inode 空間的百分比(&P)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:872 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:873 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>Percentage of Inode Space:</b>\n" -"The option \"Percentage of Inode Space\" specifies the maximum percentage of " -"space in the file system that can be allocated to inodes.</p>\n" +"The option \"Percentage of Inode Space\" specifies the maximum percentage of space in the file system that can be allocated to inodes.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Inode 空間的百分比：</b>\n" -"「Inode 空間的百分比」選項會指定檔案系統上，可以配置給 Inode 之空間的最大百分" -"比。</p>\n" +"「Inode 空間的百分比」選項會指定檔案系統上，可以配置給 Inode 之空間的最大百分比。</p>\n" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:881 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:882 #, fuzzy msgid "Inode &Aligned" msgstr "Inode 校準(&A)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:887 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:888 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>Inode Aligned:</b>\n" -"The option \"Inode Aligned\" is used to specify whether inode allocation is " -"or\n" +"The option \"Inode Aligned\" is used to specify whether inode allocation is or\n" "is not aligned. By default inodes are aligned, which\n" "is usually more efficient than unaligned access.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -5886,13 +5830,13 @@ "的效率通常較高。</p>\n" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:917 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:918 #, fuzzy msgid "&Log Size in Megabytes" msgstr "記錄大小 (MB)(&L)" #. popup text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:926 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:927 #, fuzzy msgid "" "The \"Log Size\" value is incorrect.\n" @@ -5903,29 +5847,28 @@ #. xgettext: no-c-format #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:931 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:932 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>Log Size</b>\n" -"Set the log size (in megabytes). If auto, the default is 40% of the " -"aggregate size.</p>\n" +"Set the log size (in megabytes). If auto, the default is 40% of the aggregate size.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>記錄大小</b>\n" "設定記錄大小 (以 MB 為單位)。若設為自動，則預設值為結集大小的 40%。</p>" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:939 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:940 msgid "Invoke Bad Blocks List &Utility" msgstr "呼叫不良磁區清單公用程式(&U)" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:953 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:954 #, fuzzy msgid "Stride &Length in Blocks" msgstr "區塊中的步幅長度(&L)" #. popup text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:961 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:962 #, fuzzy msgid "" "The \"Stride Length in Blocks\" value is invalid.\n" @@ -5935,7 +5878,7 @@ "請選取大於 1 的值。" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:965 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:966 msgid "" "<p><b>Stride Length in Blocks:</b>\n" "Set RAID-related options for the file system. Currently, the only supported\n" @@ -5948,27 +5891,23 @@ "作為其引數。</p>\n" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:984 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:985 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>Block Size:</b>\n" -"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 1024, 2048, " -"and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the block size is determined " -"by the file system size and the expected use of the file system.</p>\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 1024, 2048, and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the block size is determined by the file system size and the expected use of the file system.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>區塊大小：</b>\n" -"以位元組為單位指定區塊大小。有效的區塊大小值是每區塊 1024、2048 與 4096 個位" -"元組。若選取自動，便會依據檔案系統大小與檔案系統的使用方式，決定區塊大小。\n" +"以位元組為單位指定區塊大小。有效的區塊大小值是每區塊 1024、2048 與 4096 個位元組。若選取自動，便會依據檔案系統大小與檔案系統的使用方式，決定區塊大小。</p>\n" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:993 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:994 #, fuzzy msgid "Bytes per &Inode" msgstr "每Inode 的位元組數(&I)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:999 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1000 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>Bytes per Inode:</b> \n" @@ -5977,26 +5916,22 @@ "bytes-per-inode ratio, the fewer inodes will be created. Generally, this\n" "value should not be smaller than the block size of the file system, or else\n" "too many inodes will be created. It is not possible to expand the number of\n" -"inodes on a file system after its creation. So be sure to enter a " -"reasonable\n" +"inodes on a file system after its creation. So be sure to enter a reasonable\n" "value for this parameter.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>每Inode 的位元組數：</b>\n" -"指定 Inode 比率的位元組數。在磁碟上 YaST2 會每一個 <每 Inode 的位元組數" -"> 位元組空間建立一個 Inode。每 Inode 的位元組數之比率愈大，所建立的 Inode " -"愈少。\n" -"此值通常不應小於檔案系統的區塊大小，以避免建立太多的 Inode。建立 Inode 之後，" -"便無法再擴展\n" +"指定 Inode 比率的位元組數。在磁碟上 YaST2 會每一個 <每 Inode 的位元組數> 位元組空間建立一個 Inode。每 Inode 的位元組數之比率愈大，所建立的 Inode 愈少。\n" +"此值通常不應小於檔案系統的區塊大小，以避免建立太多的 Inode。建立 Inode 之後，便無法再擴展\n" "其在檔案系統上的數目，因此在輸入此參數值時，請注意其合理性。</p>\n" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1015 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1016 #, fuzzy msgid "Percentage of Blocks &Reserved for root" msgstr "保留給根目錄的區塊百分比(&R)" #. popup text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1025 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1026 #, fuzzy msgid "" "The \"Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root\" value is incorrect.\n" @@ -6007,25 +5942,19 @@ #. xgettext: no-c-format #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1030 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1031 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p><b>Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root:</b> Specify the percentage of " -"blocks reserved for the super user. The default is computed so that normally " -"1 Gig is reserved. Upper limit for reserved default is 5.0, lowest reserved " -"default is 0.1.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>保留給根目錄的區塊百分比：</b> 指定保留給超級使用者的區塊百分比。此值預" -"設為 5%。</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root:</b> Specify the percentage of blocks reserved for the super user. The default is computed so that normally 1 Gig is reserved. Upper limit for reserved default is 5.0, lowest reserved default is 0.1.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>保留給根目錄的區塊百分比：</b> 指定保留給超級使用者的區塊百分比。此值預設為 5%。</p>" #. checkbox text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1039 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1040 #, fuzzy msgid "Disable Regular Checks" msgstr "關閉定期檢查" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1047 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1048 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>Disable Regular Checks:</b>\n" @@ -6035,12 +5964,12 @@ "在開機時停用定期檔案系統檢查。</p>\n" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1074 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1075 msgid "&Directory Index Feature" msgstr "目錄索引功能(&D)" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1081 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1082 msgid "" "<p><b>Directory Index:</b>\n" "Enables use of hashed b-trees to speed up lookups in large directories.</p>\n" @@ -6049,16 +5978,15 @@ "能夠使用雜湊的 b-trees 加速在大型目錄中的查詢。</p>\n" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1093 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1094 msgid "&No Journal" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1100 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1101 msgid "" "<p><b>No Journal:</b>\n" -"Suppressed use of journaling on filesystem. Only activate this when you " -"really\n" +"Suppressed use of journaling on filesystem. Only activate this when you really\n" "know what you are doing.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -6162,7 +6090,7 @@ #. mark swap-partitions with pseudo Mountpoint swap in targetMap #. @param [Hash{String => map}] target Disk map #. @return [Hash{String => map}] modified target -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:2704 src/modules/Storage.rb:3909 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:2706 src/modules/Storage.rb:3911 #, fuzzy msgid "" "Could not set encryption.\n" @@ -6176,7 +6104,7 @@ "提供的加密密碼可能不正確。\n" #. popup text -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3940 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3942 #, fuzzy msgid "" "The first and the second version\n" @@ -6188,7 +6116,7 @@ "請再試一次。" #. popup text -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3971 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3973 #, fuzzy msgid "" "The password may only contain the following characters:\n" @@ -6201,27 +6129,27 @@ #. Label: get password for encrypted volume #. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4025 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4027 #, fuzzy msgid "&Enter Encryption Password:" msgstr "輸入加密金鑰" #. Clear password fields on every round. -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4084 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4086 #, fuzzy msgid "Provide Password" msgstr "輸入提供者密碼" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4103 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4105 msgid "The following encrypted volumes are already available." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4118 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4120 #, fuzzy msgid "Encrypted Volume Activation" msgstr " 卷冊群組 " -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4122 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4124 msgid "" "The following volumes contain an encryption signature but the \n" "passwords are not yet known.\n" @@ -6229,13 +6157,13 @@ "during an update or if they contain an encrypted LVM physical volume." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4134 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4136 #, fuzzy msgid "Do you want to provide encryption passwords?" msgstr "您想要再重試一次嗎？" #. text in help field -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4191 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4193 msgid "" "Enter encryption password for any of the\n" "devices in the locked devices list.\n" @@ -6243,97 +6171,96 @@ msgstr "" #. header text -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4197 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4199 #, fuzzy msgid "Enter Encryption Password" msgstr "輸入加密金鑰" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4200 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4202 msgid "There are no encrypted volume to unlock." msgstr "" #. label text, multiple device names follow -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4213 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4215 #, fuzzy msgid "Provide password for any of the following devices:" msgstr "YaST2 偵測到下列裝置" #. label text, one device name follows -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4216 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4218 #, fuzzy msgid "Provide password for the following device:" msgstr "YaST2 偵測到下列裝置" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4229 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4231 msgid "Trying to unlock encrypted volumes..." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4253 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4255 msgid "Password did not unlock any volume." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4339 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4341 #, fuzzy msgid "IDE Disk" msgstr "DASD 磁碟" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4345 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4347 #, fuzzy msgid "SCSI Disk" msgstr "DASD 磁碟" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4351 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4353 msgid "Disk" msgstr "磁碟" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4379 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4381 #, fuzzy msgid "DM RAID" msgstr "RAID(&A)：" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4392 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4394 #, fuzzy msgid "MD RAID" msgstr "RAID(&A)：" #. TRANSLATORS: error popup -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5174 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5176 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Partitions cannot be created since other partitions on the disk are used." +msgid "Partitions cannot be created since other partitions on the disk are used." msgstr "" "無法調整分割區 %1 的大小，\n" "因為無法裝載檔案系統。\n" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5200 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5202 msgid "" "\n" "Device %1 cannot be modified because it contains activated swap\n" "that is needed to run the installation.\n" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5214 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5216 msgid "" "\n" "Device %1 cannot be modified because it contains the installation\n" "data needed to perform the installation.\n" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5243 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5245 msgid "" "\n" "Device %1 cannot be removed because it contains activated swap\n" "that is needed to run the installation.\n" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5252 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5254 msgid "" "\n" "Device %1 cannot be removed because it contains the installation\n" "data needed to perform the installation.\n" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5281 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5283 msgid "" "\n" "Device %1 cannot be removed because this would indirectly change\n" @@ -6341,7 +6268,7 @@ "the installation.\n" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5292 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5294 msgid "" "\n" "Device %1 cannot be removed because this would indirectly change\n" @@ -6349,7 +6276,7 @@ msgstr "" #. the check for verbose is needed for calls from StorageProposal (see bnc#871779) -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5314 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5316 #, fuzzy msgid "" "\n" @@ -6360,19 +6287,19 @@ "因為無法裝載檔案系統。\n" #. FIXME: please, add description of the list that is returned by this function. -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5403 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5405 #, fuzzy msgid "Nothing assigned as root filesystem!" msgstr "正在複製根檔案系統..." -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5404 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5406 msgid "Installation will most certainly fail fatally!" msgstr "" #. Set rather than Add, there might be some packs left over #. from previous 'MakeProposal' we don't need now #. This also covers the case when AddPackagesList returns [] or nil -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:6006 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:6008 #, fuzzy msgid "Adding the following resolvables failed: %1" msgstr "寫入防火牆規則失敗" @@ -6627,8 +6554,7 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<b>Mount by</b> indicates how the file system\n" -"is mounted: (Kernel) by kernel name, (Label) by file system label, (UUID) " -"by\n" +"is mounted: (Kernel) by kernel name, (Label) by file system label, (UUID) by\n" "file system UUID, (ID) by device ID, and (Path) by device path.\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -6641,8 +6567,7 @@ msgid "" "A question mark (?) indicates that\n" "the file system is not listed in <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>. It is either mounted\n" -"manually or by some automount system. When changing settings for this " -"volume\n" +"manually or by some automount system. When changing settings for this volume\n" "YaST will not update <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>.\n" msgstr "" @@ -6658,14 +6583,12 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "An asterisk (*) after the mount point\n" -"indicates a file system that is currently not mounted (for example, because " -"it\n" +"indicates a file system that is currently not mounted (for example, because it\n" "has the <tt>noauto</tt> option set in <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>)." msgstr "" "<p>\n" "在裝載點後面的星號 (*) 指出目前\n" -"未裝載的檔案系統 (例如，因為它在 <tt>/etc/fstab</tt> 中已設定 <tt>noauto 選項)。\n" +"未裝載的檔案系統 (例如，因為它在 <tt>/etc/fstab</tt> 中已設定 <tt>noauto</tt> 選項)。\n" " </p>\n" #. helptext for table column and overview entry @@ -6751,8 +6674,7 @@ "e.g. RAID or LVM. If not, this column is empty.\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"<b>使用項目</b>告知設備是否由 LVM、RAID 或 EVMS 所使用。如果您未使用上述三" -"者，\n" +"<b>使用項目</b>告知設備是否由 LVM、RAID 或 EVMS 所使用。如果您未使用上述三者，\n" "最好將此欄保留為空白。\n" "</p>\n" @@ -7046,50 +6968,48 @@ #. enable snapshots for root volume if desired #. penalty for not having separate /home -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:4551 src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:5674 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:4552 src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:5675 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Resize impossible due to inconsistent file system. Try checking file system " -"under Windows." +msgid "Resize impossible due to inconsistent file system. Try checking file system under Windows." msgstr "由於不一致的 FS，可能會進行調整。請在 Windows 之下檢查 FS。" #. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6163 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6164 #, fuzzy msgid "Create &LVM-based Proposal" msgstr "建立 LVM 基礎建議(&L)" #. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6178 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6179 #, fuzzy msgid "Encr&ypt Volume Group" msgstr " 卷冊群組 " #. TRANSLATORS: combobox label -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6196 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6197 #, fuzzy msgid "File System for Root Partition" msgstr "檔案系統選項：" #. TRANSLATORS: combobox label -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6243 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6244 #, fuzzy msgid "File System for Home Partition" msgstr "建議個別主分割區(&H)" #. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6261 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6262 #, fuzzy msgid "Enlarge &Swap for Suspend" msgstr "啟用暫停(&E)" -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6271 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6272 #, fuzzy msgid "Proposal Settings" msgstr "特殊設定" #. TRANSLATORS: help text -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6286 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6287 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p>To create an LVM-based proposal, choose the corresponding button. The\n" @@ -7099,7 +7019,7 @@ "若要建立基於 LVM 的要求，請選擇對應的按鈕。</p>\n" #. TRANSLATORS: help text -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6293 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6294 msgid "" "<p>The filesystem for the root partition can be selected with the\n" "corresponding combo box. With the filesystem BtrFS the proposal can\n" @@ -7108,33 +7028,33 @@ msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: help text -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6302 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6303 msgid "" "<p>The proposal can create a separate home partition. The filesystem for\n" "the home partition can be selected with the corresponding combo box.</p>" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: help text -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6309 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6310 msgid "" "<p>The swap partition can be made large enough to be used to suspend\n" "the system to disk in most cases.</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6334 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6335 #, fuzzy msgid "Enter your password for the proposal encryption." msgstr "請輸入此加密檔案系統的密碼。" #. Label: get password for user root #. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6341 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6342 msgid "Password:" msgstr "密碼：" #. Label: get same password again for verification #. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6352 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6353 #, fuzzy msgid "Reenter the password for verification:" msgstr "重新輸入密碼以進行確認(&V)：" @@ -7187,6 +7107,29 @@ msgid "Visible Information on Storage Devices:" msgstr "使用者資訊來源" +#, fuzzy +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Warning: With your current setup, your %1 installation\n" +#~ "will encounter problems when booting, because you have no \"boot\"\n" +#~ "partition and your \"root\" partition is an LVM logical volume.\n" +#~ "This does not work.\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "If you do not know exactly what you are doing, use a normal\n" +#~ "partition for your files below /boot.\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "Really use this setup?\n" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "警告：以目前的設定，您的 %1 安裝\n" +#~ "在開機時會有問題，因為您沒有 \"boot\"\n" +#~ " 分割區，而您的 \"root\" 分割區是 LVM 邏輯卷冊。\n" +#~ "這樣是行不通的。\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "如果您沒有執行的把握，請使用一般\n" +#~ "分割區存放 /boot 下的檔案。\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "要變更嗎？\n" + #~ msgid "&Edit Partition Setup..." #~ msgstr "編輯分割區設定...(&E)" @@ -7222,10 +7165,8 @@ #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "You have mounted a partition with Btrfs to the\n" -#~ "mount point /. This will very likely cause problems. Use a Linux file " -#~ "system,\n" -#~ "such as ext3 or ext4, for this mount point or an extra partition for /" -#~ "boot.\n" +#~ "mount point /. This will very likely cause problems. Use a Linux file system,\n" +#~ "such as ext3 or ext4, for this mount point or an extra partition for /boot.\n" #~ "\n" #~ "Really use this setup?\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -7289,12 +7230,9 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Mount in /etc/fstab By:</b>\n" #~ "Normally, a file system to mount is identified in /etc/fstab\n" -#~ "by the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system " -#~ "to mount\n" -#~ "is found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems " -#~ "can be\n" -#~ "mounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not " -#~ "possible.\n" +#~ "by the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system to mount\n" +#~ "is found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems can be\n" +#~ "mounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not possible.\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>裝載於 /etc/fstab：</b>\n" #~ "通常，要裝載的檔案系統會在 /etc/fstab\n" @@ -7329,12 +7267,9 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/" -#~ "tmp.\n" -#~ "You may leave the crypt password empty. If you do this, the system will " -#~ "create \n" -#~ "a random password at system startup for you. This means, you will lose " -#~ "all \n" +#~ "This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/tmp.\n" +#~ "You may leave the crypt password empty. If you do this, the system will create \n" +#~ "a random password at system startup for you. This means, you will lose all \n" #~ "data on these filesystems at system shutdown.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -7470,12 +7405,9 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "Depending on the size of your hard disk and your processor speed, this " -#~ "action\n" -#~ "might take some time. Several minutes are not unusual for really large " -#~ "disks.\n" -#~ "Often, the progress meter does not show a linear progress. Even if it " -#~ "looks\n" +#~ "Depending on the size of your hard disk and your processor speed, this action\n" +#~ "might take some time. Several minutes are not unusual for really large disks.\n" +#~ "Often, the progress meter does not show a linear progress. Even if it looks\n" #~ "slow near the end (\"95 %\"), please be patient. The formatting tool \n" #~ "performs various checks. </p>" #~ msgstr "" @@ -7907,9 +7839,7 @@ #~ msgid "Create file-based device %1$s of file %2$s (%3$s) as %5$s with %4$s" #~ msgstr "使用 %4$s 建立做為 %5$s 的檔案 %2$s (%3$s) 檔案為主設備 %1$s" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Create encrypted file-based device %1$s of file %2$s (%3$s) as %5$s with " -#~ "%4$s" +#~ msgid "Create encrypted file-based device %1$s of file %2$s (%3$s) as %5$s with %4$s" #~ msgstr "使用 %4$s 建立做為 %5$s 的檔案 %2$s (%3$s) 加密檔案為主設備 %1$s" #~ msgid "Create file-based device %1$s of file %2$s (%3$s)" @@ -7921,8 +7851,7 @@ #~ msgid "Format file-based device %1$s of %2$s (%3$s) as %5$s with %4$s" #~ msgstr "使用 %4$s 格式化做為 %5$s 的 %2$s (%3$s) 檔案為主設備 %1$s" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Format encrypted file-based device %1$s of %2$s (%3$s) as %5$s with %4$s" +#~ msgid "Format encrypted file-based device %1$s of %2$s (%3$s) as %5$s with %4$s" #~ msgstr "使用 %4$s 格式化做為 %5$s 的 %2$s (%3$s) 加密檔案為主設備 %1$s" #~ msgid "Format file-based device %1$s of %2$s (%3$s) with %4$s" @@ -8018,8 +7947,7 @@ #, fuzzy #~| msgid "Create encrypted software RAID %1$s (%2$s) for %4$s with %3$s" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Create encrypted software RAID %1$s (%2$s) from %5$s for %4$s with %3$s" +#~ msgid "Create encrypted software RAID %1$s (%2$s) from %5$s for %4$s with %3$s" #~ msgstr "使用 %3$s 建立用於 %4$s 的加密軟體 RAID %1$s (%2$s)" #, fuzzy @@ -8243,8 +8171,7 @@ #~ msgstr "可用空間 (%1)" #~ msgid "" -#~ "Your NTFS file system has %1 %3 free space available. Due to limitations " -#~ "in\n" +#~ "Your NTFS file system has %1 %3 free space available. Due to limitations in\n" #~ "the NTFS resizer, the file system can only be shrunk by up to %2 %3.\n" #~ "To be able to shrink the file system more, boot your Windows\n" #~ "system and run a disk defragmentation program under Windows to move\n" @@ -8555,45 +8482,31 @@ #~ "<p>在現有的分割區上，除了分割區的開始和大小，\n" #~ "其他皆可予以變更。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>First, choose the type of the partition and whether this partition " -#~ "should be formatted.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>First, choose the type of the partition and whether this partition should be formatted.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>首先，選擇分割區類型以及是否格式化此分割區。</p>" #~ msgid "<p>Then, enter the mount point ( /, /boot, /usr, /var, etc.)</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>接著，輸入裝載點 ( /、/boot、/usr、/var 等)。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>To change the start or end cylinder, delete this partition then create " -#~ "a new one with the new parameters. All data on this partition will be " -#~ "lost.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>若要變更開始磁柱或結束磁柱，請刪除此分割區，然後以新的參數建立一個新的" -#~ "分割區。此分割區中的所有資料將會遺失。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>To change the start or end cylinder, delete this partition then create a new one with the new parameters. All data on this partition will be lost.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>若要變更開始磁柱或結束磁柱，請刪除此分割區，然後以新的參數建立一個新的分割區。此分割區中的所有資料將會遺失。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Now, enter the location of the new partition on your hard disk. </p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Now, enter the location of the new partition on your hard disk. </p>" #~ msgstr "<p>現在，請輸入硬碟上的新分割區位置。</p>" #~ msgid "<p>Please enter the starting cylinder number of the partition. </p>" #~ msgstr "<p>請輸入分割區的開始磁柱號。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>After that, either specify an ending cylinder number or an offset from " -#~ "the first cylinder (e.g., +66).</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>After that, either specify an ending cylinder number or an offset from the first cylinder (e.g., +66).</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>然後，指定結束磁柱號或第一個磁柱的偏移 (如 +66)。</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>It is also possible to specify the size of the partition directly (e." -#~ "g., +100M or +20000K).</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>It is also possible to specify the size of the partition directly (e.g., +100M or +20000K).</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>您也可以直接指定分割區的大小 (例如 +100M 或 +20000K)。</p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>Enter the starting cylinder number of the partition.\n" -#~ "After that, either specify an ending cylinder number or an offset from " -#~ "the first cylinder (e.g., +66).\n" -#~ "It is also possible to specify the size of the partition directly (e.g., " -#~ "+2G, +100M, or +20000K).</p>\n" +#~ "After that, either specify an ending cylinder number or an offset from the first cylinder (e.g., +66).\n" +#~ "It is also possible to specify the size of the partition directly (e.g., +2G, +100M, or +20000K).</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>輸入分割區的開始磁柱號。\n" #~ "然後，指定結束磁柱號或第一個磁柱的偏移 (例如 +66)。\n" @@ -8606,8 +8519,7 @@ #~ "<p>\n" #~ "This is intended for <b>experts</b>.\n" #~ "If you are not familiar with the concepts of hard disk <b>partitions</b>\n" -#~ "and how to use them, you might want to go back and select <b>automatic\n" +#~ "and how to use them, you might want to go back and select <b>automatic</b>\n" #~ "partitioning.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" @@ -8621,8 +8533,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" #~ "Please note that <b>nothing will be written to your hard disk</b>\n" -#~ "until you confirm the entire installation in the last installation " -#~ "dialog.\n" +#~ "until you confirm the entire installation in the last installation dialog.\n" #~ "Until that point, you can safely abort the installation.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" @@ -8658,8 +8569,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "The table to the right shows the current partitions on all your hard " -#~ "disks.\n" +#~ "The table to the right shows the current partitions on all your hard disks.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" @@ -8706,10 +8616,8 @@ #~ msgstr "<p><tt>/dev/sda2 </tt>位於第 1 個磁碟的第二個主要分割區。</p>" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><tt>/dev/sda5 </tt>1st logical partition within the extended partition " -#~ "on\n" -#~ "the first disk. <b>Note:</b> this is always #5, even if there are less " -#~ "than four\n" +#~ "<p><tt>/dev/sda5 </tt>1st logical partition within the extended partition on\n" +#~ "the first disk. <b>Note:</b> this is always #5, even if there are less than four\n" #~ "primary partitions.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><tt>/dev/sda5 </tt>位於第 1 個磁碟的延伸分割區的\n" @@ -8722,8 +8630,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" #~ "On the i386 platform (i.e., normal PCs), there cannot be more than four\n" -#~ "<b>primary partitions</b> on any hard disk, because the respective table " -#~ "in the\n" +#~ "<b>primary partitions</b> on any hard disk, because the respective table in the\n" #~ "master boot record cannot contain more than four entries.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -8746,11 +8653,9 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "If you have an older PC and want to boot from a partition, make sure it " -#~ "ends below this\n" +#~ "If you have an older PC and want to boot from a partition, make sure it ends below this\n" #~ "1024 cylinder boundary. Create a separate partition and mount it as\n" -#~ "<b>/boot</b>, if necessary. A partition consisting of one single " -#~ "cylinder\n" +#~ "<b>/boot</b>, if necessary. A partition consisting of one single cylinder\n" #~ "(at least 64 MB) is usually sufficient for that.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -8764,8 +8669,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" #~ "One of the four primary partitions may be an <b>extended partition</b>.\n" -#~ "This extended partition can contain one or more <b>logical partitions.\n" +#~ "This extended partition can contain one or more <b>logical partitions</b>.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" @@ -8792,8 +8696,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "In connection with advanced boot managers such as <b>GRUB</b>, you can " -#~ "even\n" +#~ "In connection with advanced boot managers such as <b>GRUB</b>, you can even\n" #~ "boot your computer from a logical partition.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" @@ -8806,8 +8709,7 @@ #~ "<p>\n" #~ "The extended partition will <b>overlap</b> with the logical\n" #~ "partitions: for an extended partition from cylinder 200 to 500, logical\n" -#~ "partitions could range from, for example, 200 to 250, 251 to 400, and 401 " -#~ "to 500.\n" +#~ "partitions could range from, for example, 200 to 250, 251 to 400, and 401 to 500.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" @@ -8819,20 +8721,17 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" #~ "An asterisk (*) after the mount point indicates a file system that is\n" -#~ "currently not mounted (for example, because it has the <tt>noauto</tt> " -#~ "option set in <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>).\n" +#~ "currently not mounted (for example, because it has the <tt>noauto</tt> option set in <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>).\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" #~ "在裝載點後面的星號 (*) 指出目前\n" -#~ "未裝載的檔案系統 (例如，因為它在 <tt>/etc/fstab</tt> 中已設定 <tt>noauto 選項)。\n" +#~ "未裝載的檔案系統 (例如，因為它在 <tt>/etc/fstab</tt> 中已設定 <tt>noauto</tt> 選項)。\n" #~ " </p>\n" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "The column labeled <b>F</b> contains flags. <tt>C</tt> means the " -#~ "partition is encrypted. \n" +#~ "The column labeled <b>F</b> contains flags. <tt>C</tt> means the partition is encrypted. \n" #~ "<tt>F</tt> means the partition is selected to be formatted.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -8844,21 +8743,18 @@ #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "<b>Used By</b> tells if a device is used by LVM or RAID. If you do not " -#~ "use such\n" +#~ "<b>Used By</b> tells if a device is used by LVM or RAID. If you do not use such\n" #~ "things, it is perfectly normal for this column to be empty.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "<b>使用項目</b>告知設備是否由 LVM、RAID 或 EVMS 所使用。如果您未使用上述三" -#~ "者，\n" +#~ "<b>使用項目</b>告知設備是否由 LVM、RAID 或 EVMS 所使用。如果您未使用上述三者，\n" #~ "最好將此欄保留為空白。\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "<b>Mount By</b> indicates how the file system is mounted: (K) by Kernel " -#~ "Name,\n" +#~ "<b>Mount By</b> indicates how the file system is mounted: (K) by Kernel Name,\n" #~ "(L) by Label, (U) by UUID, (I) by Device ID, and (P) by Device Path.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -8878,11 +8774,9 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "The table to the right shows the current partitions on all your hard " -#~ "disks.\n" +#~ "The table to the right shows the current partitions on all your hard disks.\n" #~ "<b>Nothing will be written to your hard disk</b>\n" -#~ "until you confirm the entire installation in the last installation " -#~ "dialog.\n" +#~ "until you confirm the entire installation in the last installation dialog.\n" #~ "Until that point, you can safely abort the installation.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" @@ -9144,8 +9038,7 @@ #~ "<p>\n" #~ "Logical volumes are\n" #~ "usable almost everywhere normal <b>disk partitions</b> can be used.\n" -#~ "You can create file systems on logical volumes and use them, for example, " -#~ "as swap \n" +#~ "You can create file systems on logical volumes and use them, for example, as swap \n" #~ "or as raw partitions for databases.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" @@ -9157,8 +9050,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" #~ "If there is still unallocated\n" -#~ "physical storage in a volume group and you use <b>reiserfs</b> as your " -#~ "file system,\n" +#~ "physical storage in a volume group and you use <b>reiserfs</b> as your file system,\n" #~ "extend a logical volume and the underlying file system while it\n" #~ "is <b>mounted</b> and in <b>use</b>.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -9172,8 +9064,7 @@ #~ "<p>\n" #~ "The logical volumes need to be large enough\n" #~ "to hold all the files to install now, but you do not necessarily need to\n" -#~ "allocate all your physical storage now. The file systems can be " -#~ "increased \n" +#~ "allocate all your physical storage now. The file systems can be increased \n" #~ "later while your system is in use.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" @@ -9184,15 +9075,12 @@ #~ "再增加。\n" #~ "</p>\n" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>Add partitions</b> (called physical volumes) to your volume group." +#~ msgid "<p><b>Add partitions</b> (called physical volumes) to your volume group.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p><b>在卷冊群組中新增分割區</b>(稱為實體卷冊)。</p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "The volume group forms the <b>storage pool</b> from which your logical " -#~ "volumes,\n" +#~ "The volume group forms the <b>storage pool</b> from which your logical volumes,\n" #~ "like virtual partitions, are allocated.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" @@ -9201,8 +9089,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "Under normal circumstances, there is no need to have more than one " -#~ "volume \n" +#~ "Under normal circumstances, there is no need to have more than one volume \n" #~ "group. If you need more than one volume group for special reasons,\n" #~ "create them here. Each volume group must have at least one partition \n" #~ "that belongs to that volume group.</p>\n" @@ -9215,8 +9102,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "Each physical volume belongs <b>to exactly one</b> volume group. Assign " -#~ "all\n" +#~ "Each physical volume belongs <b>to exactly one</b> volume group. Assign all\n" #~ "partitions to use with Linux LVM to volume groups.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" @@ -9750,8 +9636,7 @@ #~ "To use RAID, at least two partitions of type 0xFD (or 0x83)\n" #~ "are required. Change your partition table accordingly.\n" #~ "In most cases, this can be done in the following way:\n" -#~ "click 'Create', select 'Do not format', and set the File System ID to " -#~ "0xFD.\n" +#~ "click 'Create', select 'Do not format', and set the File System ID to 0xFD.\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "若要使用 RAID，至少需要兩個 0xFD (或 0x83) 類型的\n" #~ "分割區。請適當地變更分割區表。\n" @@ -9993,13 +9878,10 @@ #~ "超過目前軟體 RAID 版本所能處理的數量。\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>Multipath:</b> <br>This mode allow access to the same physical " -#~ "device\n" -#~ "over multiple controllers for redundancy against a fault in a controller " -#~ "card. This mode can be used with at least two devices<p>\n" +#~ "<p><b>Multipath:</b> <br>This mode allow access to the same physical device\n" +#~ "over multiple controllers for redundancy against a fault in a controller card. This mode can be used with at least two devices<p>\n" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p><b>多重路徑：</b> <br>利用此模式可透過備援的多重控制卡存取相同的實體裝" -#~ "置，\n" +#~ "<p><b>多重路徑：</b> <br>利用此模式可透過備援的多重控制卡存取相同的實體裝置，\n" #~ "以備其中一片控制卡發生錯誤時之用。此模式至少可同時用於兩部裝置<p>\n" #~ msgid "Auto&detect Multipath" @@ -10015,8 +9897,7 @@ #~ "<p>The list contains the devices that could be automatically\n" #~ "detected for multipath setup. Disable the devices not to \n" #~ "have activated by double-clicking the table line and continue when \n" -#~ "finished. If you go back, none of the autodetected multipath raid " -#~ "devices\n" +#~ "finished. If you go back, none of the autodetected multipath raid devices\n" #~ "are created.</p>\n" #~ "<p>If you deselect lines, the names of the raid devices \n" #~ "after the deselected lines will be changed.</p>\n" @@ -10063,8 +9944,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Expert options:</b><br>Here, set\n" #~ "things like chunk size to get the best performance\n" -#~ "out of your system. These settings are used for all partitions of this " -#~ "RAID.</p>\n" +#~ "out of your system. These settings are used for all partitions of this RAID.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>專家選項：</b><br>在此，\n" #~ "設定如區塊大小等項目可取得系統的最佳效能。\n" @@ -10253,8 +10133,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "To create an LVM or EVMS based proposal, choose the corresponding button." -#~ "</p>\n" +#~ "To create an LVM or EVMS based proposal, choose the corresponding button.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" #~ "若要建立基於 LVM 或 EVMS 的要求，請選擇對應的按鈕。</p>\n" @@ -10328,12 +10207,8 @@ #~ "\n" #~ "確定要執行？\n" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>The upper part of this dialog contains the container-related " -#~ "functionality. Here, create, edit, and modify EVMS containers. </p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p>此對話方塊上方部分包含與容器相關的功能。在此您可以建立、編輯和修改 " -#~ "EVMS 容器。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>The upper part of this dialog contains the container-related functionality. Here, create, edit, and modify EVMS containers. </p>" +#~ msgstr "<p>此對話方塊上方部分包含與容器相關的功能。在此您可以建立、編輯和修改 EVMS 容器。</p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" @@ -10366,8 +10241,7 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "Change the settings for an EVMS container.\n" -#~ "Container type, PE size, and container name can only be set when " -#~ "creating\n" +#~ "Container type, PE size, and container name can only be set when creating\n" #~ "the container.\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "變更 EVMS 容器的設定。\n" @@ -10480,8 +10354,7 @@ #~ "To use LVM, at least one partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83)\n" #~ "is required. Change your partition table accordingly.\n" #~ "In most cases, this can be done in the following way:\n" -#~ "click 'Create', select 'Do not format', and set the File System ID to " -#~ "0x8e.\n" +#~ "click 'Create', select 'Do not format', and set the File System ID to 0x8e.\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "若要使用 LVM，至少需要一個 0x8e (或 0x83) 類型的\n" #~ "分割區。請適當地變更分割區表。\n" @@ -10509,9 +10382,7 @@ #~ msgid "Delete Partition Table" #~ msgstr "刪除分割區表" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Rereading the partition table cancels all current changes. Really reread " -#~ "the partition table?" +#~ msgid "Rereading the partition table cancels all current changes. Really reread the partition table?" #~ msgstr "重新讀取分割區表會取消目前所有的變更。確定要重新讀取分割區表？" #~ msgid "Select a loop device entry." Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/sudo.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/sudo.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/sudo.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: sudo\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-10-05 23:27+0800\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -332,8 +332,7 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "Host alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" -"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really " -"delete it?\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" msgstr "" "主機別名 %1 已為其中一個 sudo 規則使用。\n" "將其刪除可能會造成不一致的 sudo 組態檔案。確定要刪除嗎？\n" @@ -343,8 +342,7 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "User alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" -"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really " -"delete it?\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" msgstr "" "使用者別名 %1 已為其中一個 sudo 規則使用。\n" "將其刪除可能會造成不一致的 sudo 組態檔案。確定要刪除嗎？\n" @@ -354,8 +352,7 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "RunAs alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" -"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really " -"delete it?\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" msgstr "" "RunAs 別名 %1 已為其中一個 sudo 規則使用。\n" "將其刪除可能會造成不一致的 sudo 組態檔案。確定要刪除嗎？\n" @@ -365,8 +362,7 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "Command alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" -"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really " -"delete it?\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" msgstr "" "指令別名 %1 已為其中一個 sudo 規則使用。\n" "將其刪除可能會造成不一致的 sudo 組態檔案。確定要刪除嗎？\n" @@ -453,10 +449,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:74 msgid "" "<b>RunAs</b> column is an\n" -"\toptional parameter, containing user name (or alias) whose access " -"privileges\n" -"\twill be used to run commands. <b>NOPASSWD</b> is a tag, determining " -"whether\n" +"\toptional parameter, containing user name (or alias) whose access privileges\n" +"\twill be used to run commands. <b>NOPASSWD</b> is a tag, determining whether\n" "\tusers need to authorize themselves before running commands.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -498,8 +492,7 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:97 msgid "" "<p>To edit existing rule, select an entry from the table and click on \n" -"\t<b>Edit</b> button. To delete selected entry, click on <b>Delete</b> " -"button.\n" +"\t<b>Edit</b> button. To delete selected entry, click on <b>Delete</b> button.\n" "\t</p> \n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -511,11 +504,9 @@ #. Single User Specification help 1/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:104 msgid "" -"<p><b>User Name or Alias</b> may be specified by single username (e.g.foo), " -"group name prefixed\n" +"<p><b>User Name or Alias</b> may be specified by single username (e.g.foo), group name prefixed\n" "\twith '%' (e.g. %bar), or user alias name. If \n" -"\tkeyword 'ALL' is used, it stands for any user. Select from existing users, " -"groups and aliases \n" +"\tkeyword 'ALL' is used, it stands for any user. Select from existing users, groups and aliases \n" "\tin drop-down menu, or enter your own value. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -529,25 +520,18 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:112 msgid "" -"<p><b>Hostname or Alias</b> entry consists of either hostname(e.g. www." -"example.com), single IP \n" -"\taddress (e.g. 192.168.0.1), IP address combined with netmask, or host " -"alias. If commands may be\n" -"\trun on any host, use keyword 'ALL'. Hostname or IP address is matched " -"against your own hostname\n" -"\tor IP address, so if you don't intend to share one /etc/sudoers file " -"between multiple machines, \n" +"<p><b>Hostname or Alias</b> entry consists of either hostname(e.g. www.example.com), single IP \n" +"\taddress (e.g. 192.168.0.1), IP address combined with netmask, or host alias. If commands may be\n" +"\trun on any host, use keyword 'ALL'. Hostname or IP address is matched against your own hostname\n" +"\tor IP address, so if you don't intend to share one /etc/sudoers file between multiple machines, \n" "\t'ALL' or 'localhost' entry will be sufficient for almost all purposes. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" msgstr "" "<p><b>主機名稱或別名</b>項目是由主機名稱 (例如 www.example.com)、單一 IP \n" -"\t位址 (例如 192.168.0.1)、由網路遮罩組成的 IP 位址或主機別名所組成。若指令" -"可\n" -"\t執行於任何主機上，請使用關鍵字 'ALL'。主機名稱或 IP 位址會符合您自己的主機" -"名稱或 \n" -"\tIP 位址，所以若您不想在多個機器之間共享 /etc/sudoers 檔案，對於大部分的目的" -"而言，\n" +"\t位址 (例如 192.168.0.1)、由網路遮罩組成的 IP 位址或主機別名所組成。若指令可\n" +"\t執行於任何主機上，請使用關鍵字 'ALL'。主機名稱或 IP 位址會符合您自己的主機名稱或 \n" +"\tIP 位址，所以若您不想在多個機器之間共享 /etc/sudoers 檔案，對於大部分的目的而言，\n" "\t'ALL' 或 'localhost' 項目將已足夠。 \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -555,23 +539,18 @@ #. Single User Specification help 2/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:122 msgid "" -"<p><b>RunAs Username or Alias</b> is an optional parameter specifying an " -"user, \n" +"<p><b>RunAs Username or Alias</b> is an optional parameter specifying an user, \n" "\twhose access privileges \n" -"\twill be used to execute particular command. If empty, user <b>root</b> is " -"the default\n" -"\tone. It can be again single username, groupname prefixed with '%' or " -"run_as alias name\n" -"\tSelect from existing users, groups and aliases in drop-down menu, or enter " -"your own value.\n" +"\twill be used to execute particular command. If empty, user <b>root</b> is the default\n" +"\tone. It can be again single username, groupname prefixed with '%' or run_as alias name\n" +"\tSelect from existing users, groups and aliases in drop-down menu, or enter your own value.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" msgstr "" "<p><b>RunAs 使用者名稱或別名</b>是一個指定使用者 (\n" "\t其存取權限\n" "\t將用於執行特定指令) 的選擇性參數。若為空白，則<b>根</b>使用者將為預設的\n" -"\t使用者。其可再次為單一使用者名稱、使用 '%' 當作字首的群組名稱或 run_as 別" -"名\n" +"\t使用者。其可再次為單一使用者名稱、使用 '%' 當作字首的群組名稱或 run_as 別名\n" "\t從下拉式功能表的現有使用者、群組與別名選取，或輸入您自己的值。\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -579,10 +558,8 @@ #. Single User Specification help 3/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:132 msgid "" -"<p><b>No Password</b> is an optional tag. Normally, users have to " -"authenticate\n" -"\tthemselves (i.e. supply their own password, not root's one) before running " -"particular \n" +"<p><b>No Password</b> is an optional tag. Normally, users have to authenticate\n" +"\tthemselves (i.e. supply their own password, not root's one) before running particular \n" "\tcommand. Set No Password tag to 'Yes' if you want to\n" "\tdisable this authentication\n" "\t</p>\n" @@ -599,10 +576,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:141 msgid "" "<p><b>Commands to Run</b> table is a list of commands (optionally with\n" -"\tparameters), directories and command aliases that particular user will be " -"allowed \n" -"\tto run. If a directory name is used, any command in that directory can be " -"run. \n" +"\tparameters), directories and command aliases that particular user will be allowed \n" +"\tto run. If a directory name is used, any command in that directory can be run. \n" "\tAgain, keyword 'ALL' stands for any command, so use it with care.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -616,16 +591,13 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:149 msgid "" -"To add a new command, click on <b>Add</b> button, fill in command name with " -"optional\n" -"\tparameters and click <b>OK</b>. To remove command, select appropriate " -"entry from the table\n" +"To add a new command, click on <b>Add</b> button, fill in command name with optional\n" +"\tparameters and click <b>OK</b>. To remove command, select appropriate entry from the table\n" "\tand click on <b>Delete</b> button.\n" "\t" msgstr "" "若要新增新指令，請按一下<b>「新增」</b>按鈕，使用選擇性\n" -"\t參數填寫指令名稱，並按一下<b>「確定」</b>。若要移除指令，請從表格中選取適當" -"的項目\n" +"\t參數填寫指令名稱，並按一下<b>「確定」</b>。若要移除指令，請從表格中選取適當的項目\n" "\t並按一下<b>「刪除」</b>按鈕。\n" "\t" @@ -633,25 +605,21 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:156 msgid "" "<p><b><big>User Aliases</big></b><br>\n" -"\tIn this dialog, you can configure user aliases. User alias is a set of " -"users that is given\n" -"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set " -"in sudo configuration. \n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure user aliases. User alias is a set of users that is given\n" +"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set in sudo configuration. \n" "\t</p> \n" "\t" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>使用者別名</big></b><br>\n" "\t在此對話中，您可以設定使用者別名。使用者別名是擁有\n" -"\t獨特名稱的一組使用者。這個名稱之後將用來參照 sudo 組態中這個組合的所有使用" -"者。 \n" +"\t獨特名稱的一組使用者。這個名稱之後將用來參照 sudo 組態中這個組合的所有使用者。 \n" "\t</p> \n" "\t" #. User Aliases help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:164 msgid "" -"<p>To add a new user alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in " -"appropriate entries. \n" +"<p>To add a new user alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" "\tAlias name and list of users in the alias must not be empty. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -664,8 +632,7 @@ #. User Aliases help 3/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:171 msgid "" -"<p>To edit existing user alias, select an entry from the table and click on " -"<b>Edit</b>\n" +"<p>To edit existing user alias, select an entry from the table and click on <b>Edit</b>\n" "\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on <b>Delete</b> button. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -679,25 +646,21 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:178 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Host Aliases</big></b><br>\n" -"\tIn this dialog, you can configure host aliases. Host alias is a set of " -"hosts that is given\n" -"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all hosts in this set " -"in sudo configuration. \n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure host aliases. Host alias is a set of hosts that is given\n" +"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all hosts in this set in sudo configuration. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>主機別名</big></b><br>\n" "\t在此對話中，您可以設定主機別名。主機別名是擁有\n" -"\t獨特名稱的一組主機。這個名稱之後將用來參照 sudo 組態中這個組合的所有主" -"機。 \n" +"\t獨特名稱的一組主機。這個名稱之後將用來參照 sudo 組態中這個組合的所有主機。 \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" #. Host Aliases help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:186 msgid "" -"<p>To add a new host alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in " -"appropriate entries. \n" +"<p>To add a new host alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" "\tAlias name and list of hosts in the alias must not be empty. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -710,8 +673,7 @@ #. Host Aliases help 3/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:193 msgid "" -"<p>To edit existing host alias, select an entry from the table and click on " -"<b>Edit</b>\n" +"<p>To edit existing host alias, select an entry from the table and click on <b>Edit</b>\n" "\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on <b>Delete</b> button. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -725,25 +687,21 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:200 msgid "" "<p><b><big>RunAs Aliases</big></b><br>\n" -"\tIn this dialog, you can configure RunAs aliases. RunAs alias is a set of " -"users that is given\n" -"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set " -"in sudo configuration. \n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure RunAs aliases. RunAs alias is a set of users that is given\n" +"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set in sudo configuration. \n" "\t</p> \n" "\t" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>RunAs 別名</big></b><br>\n" "\t在此對話中，您可以設定 RunAs 別名。RunAs 別名是擁有\n" -"\t獨特名稱的一組使用者。這個名稱之後將用來參照 sudo 組態中這個組合的所有使用" -"者。 \n" +"\t獨特名稱的一組使用者。這個名稱之後將用來參照 sudo 組態中這個組合的所有使用者。 \n" "\t</p> \n" "\t" #. RunAs Aliases help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:208 msgid "" -"<p>To add a new RunAs alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in " -"appropriate entries. \n" +"<p>To add a new RunAs alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" "\tAlias name and list of users in the alias must not be empty. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -756,8 +714,7 @@ #. RunAs Aliases help 3/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:215 msgid "" -"<p>To edit existing RunAs alias, select an entry from the table and click on " -"<b>Edit</b>\n" +"<p>To edit existing RunAs alias, select an entry from the table and click on <b>Edit</b>\n" "\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on <b>Delete</b> button. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -771,10 +728,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:222 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Command Aliases</big></b><br>\n" -"\tIn this dialog, you can configure command aliases. Command alias is a set " -"of commands \n" -"\t(optionally with parameters) that is given an unique name. This name is " -"then used to refer\n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure command aliases. Command alias is a set of commands \n" +"\t(optionally with parameters) that is given an unique name. This name is then used to refer\n" "\tto all commands in this set in sudo configuration. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -789,8 +744,7 @@ #. Command Aliases help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:231 msgid "" -"<p>To add a new command alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in " -"appropriate entries. \n" +"<p>To add a new command alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" "\tAlias name and list of commands in the alias must not be empty. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -803,8 +757,7 @@ #. Command Aliases help 3/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:238 msgid "" -"<p>To edit existing command alias, select an entry from the table and click " -"on <b>Edit</b>\n" +"<p>To edit existing command alias, select an entry from the table and click on <b>Edit</b>\n" "\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on <b>Delete</b> button. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -818,18 +771,14 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:245 msgid "" "<p><b><big>User Alias</big></b><br>\n" -"\tUser alias consists of one or more users, system groups (prefixed with " -"'%') or other\n" -"\tuser aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase letters, " -"numbers and underscore\tonly), which is then used to refer to all users in " -"this alias.\n" +"\tUser alias consists of one or more users, system groups (prefixed with '%') or other\n" +"\tuser aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and underscore\tonly), which is then used to refer to all users in this alias.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>使用者別名</big></b><br>\n" "\t使用者別名是由一個或多個使用者、系統群組 (使用 '%' 當作字首) 或其他\n" -"\t使用者別名所組成。其被給予單一名稱 (僅能包含大寫字母、數字與底線\t)，該名稱" -"之後將用於參照此別名中的所有使用者。\n" +"\t使用者別名所組成。其被給予單一名稱 (僅能包含大寫字母、數字與底線\t)，該名稱之後將用於參照此別名中的所有使用者。\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -837,12 +786,9 @@ #. Single User Alias Help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:253 src/include/sudo/helps.rb:306 msgid "" -"<p>Enter unique name into <b>Alias Name</b> text entry. To add users or " -"groups to the\n" -"\talias, select user or group name from the drop-down menu and click on " -"<b>Add</b> button.\n" -"\tTo remove user from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, " -"and click on\n" +"<p>Enter unique name into <b>Alias Name</b> text entry. To add users or groups to the\n" +"\talias, select user or group name from the drop-down menu and click on <b>Add</b> button.\n" +"\tTo remove user from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and click on\n" "\t<b>Remove</b> button. To finish the configuration, click <b>OK</b>.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -861,8 +807,7 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:262 src/include/sudo/helps.rb:292 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:315 src/include/sudo/helps.rb:346 msgid "" -"<b>Note:</b> Alias name must not be empty. Each alias must have at least one " -"member.\n" +"<b>Note:</b> Alias name must not be empty. Each alias must have at least one member.\n" "\t" msgstr "" "<b>注意事項：</b>別名不得為空白。每個別名必須至少有一個成員。\n" @@ -872,21 +817,16 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:266 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Host Alias</big></b><br>\n" -"\tHost alias consists of one or more hostnames, single IP addresses, IP " -"addresses\n" -"\tcombined with netmask id dotted quad notation (e.g. " -"192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0) or\n" -"\tCIDR number of bits notation (e.g. 192.168.0.0/24), or other host aliases. " -"It is \n" -"\tgiven single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and underscore " -"only), which \n" +"\tHost alias consists of one or more hostnames, single IP addresses, IP addresses\n" +"\tcombined with netmask id dotted quad notation (e.g. 192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0) or\n" +"\tCIDR number of bits notation (e.g. 192.168.0.0/24), or other host aliases. It is \n" +"\tgiven single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and underscore only), which \n" "\tis then used to refer to all hosts in this alias.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>主機別名</big></b><br>\n" -"\t主機別名是由一個或多個主機名稱、單一 IP 位址、以點分隔的四個數字表示法結合" -"的網路遮罩 ID \n" +"\t主機別名是由一個或多個主機名稱、單一 IP 位址、以點分隔的四個數字表示法結合的網路遮罩 ID \n" "\t的 IP 位址 (例如 192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0) 或\n" "\t位元表示法的 CIDR 號碼 (例如 192.168.0.0/24)、或其他主機別名所組成。其被\n" "\t給予單一名稱 (僅能包含大寫字母、數字與底線)，該名稱\n" @@ -898,8 +838,7 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:277 msgid "" "<p>Enter unique name into <b>Alias Name</b> text entry. To add hosts to the\n" -"\talias, click on <b>Add</b> button. A pop-up window will appear, where you " -"can enter\n" +"\talias, click on <b>Add</b> button. A pop-up window will appear, where you can enter\n" "\tvalid hostname or IP address and then click <b>OK</b>.\n" "\t<p>\n" "\t" @@ -913,8 +852,7 @@ #. Single Host Alias Help 3/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:285 msgid "" -"To remove host from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and " -"click on\n" +"To remove host from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and click on\n" "\t<b>Remove</b> button. To finish the configuration, click <b>OK</b>.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -928,12 +866,9 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:296 msgid "" "<p><b><big>RunAs Alias</big></b><br>\n" -"\tRunAs alias is very similar to User Alias. It consists of one or more " -"users, system groups \n" -"\t(prefixed with '%') or other RunAs aliases. It is given single name (must " -"contain \n" -"\tuppercase letters, numbers and underscore only), which is then used to " -"refer to all users \n" +"\tRunAs alias is very similar to User Alias. It consists of one or more users, system groups \n" +"\t(prefixed with '%') or other RunAs aliases. It is given single name (must contain \n" +"\tuppercase letters, numbers and underscore only), which is then used to refer to all users \n" "\tin this alias.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -950,15 +885,11 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:319 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Command Alias</big></b><br>\n" -"\tCommand Alias is a list of one or more commands (with optional " -"parameters), directories, or\n" -"\tother command aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase " -"letters, numbers and\n" +"\tCommand Alias is a list of one or more commands (with optional parameters), directories, or\n" +"\tother command aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and\n" "\tunderscore only), which is \n" -"\tthen used to refer to all commands in this alias. A command can optionally " -"have one or more\n" -"\tparameters specified. If so, users can run the command with these " -"parameters only. If a \n" +"\tthen used to refer to all commands in this alias. A command can optionally have one or more\n" +"\tparameters specified. If so, users can run the command with these parameters only. If a \n" "\tdirectory name is used, any command in that directory can be run. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -976,27 +907,22 @@ #. Single Command Alias Help 2/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:331 msgid "" -"<p>Enter unique name into <b>Alias Name</b> text entry. To add a new command " -"to the alias,\n" -"\tclick on <b>Add</b> button.A pop-up window will appear, where you can " -"enter command name\n" -"\t(or select one from file browser by clicking on <b>Browse</b> button. " -"Additionally, you can\n" +"<p>Enter unique name into <b>Alias Name</b> text entry. To add a new command to the alias,\n" +"\tclick on <b>Add</b> button.A pop-up window will appear, where you can enter command name\n" +"\t(or select one from file browser by clicking on <b>Browse</b> button. Additionally, you can\n" "\tspecify command parameters in <b>Parameters</b> text entry\n" "\t" msgstr "" "<p>將獨特的名稱輸入<b>別名</b>文字項目。若要將新指令新增至別名，\n" "\t請按一下<b>「新增」</b>按鈕。將跳出一個視窗，您可以在其中輸入指令名稱\n" -"\t(或透過按一下 <b>「瀏覽」</b>按鈕，從檔案瀏覽器中選取指令名稱。此外，您可以" -"在<b>參數</b>文字項目中， \n" +"\t(或透過按一下 <b>「瀏覽」</b>按鈕，從檔案瀏覽器中選取指令名稱。此外，您可以在<b>參數</b>文字項目中， \n" "\t指定指令參數\n" "\t" #. Single Command Alias Help 3/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:339 msgid "" -"To remove command from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, " -"and click on\n" +"To remove command from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and click on\n" "\t<b>Remove</b> button. To finish the configuration, click <b>OK</b>.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -1013,8 +939,7 @@ #. m["no_passwd"] = (boolean) false; #. } #: src/modules/Sudo.rb:400 -msgid "" -"This rule is a system rule necessary for correct functionality of sudo.\n" +msgid "This rule is a system rule necessary for correct functionality of sudo.\n" msgstr "這規則是 sudo 能正確運作所需要的系統規則。\n" #: src/modules/Sudo.rb:407 @@ -1036,8 +961,7 @@ #. end Commands #: src/modules/Sudo.rb:545 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"All changes will be lost. Really quit sudo configuration without saving?" +msgid "All changes will be lost. Really quit sudo configuration without saving?" msgstr "所有變更將會遺失。確定要結束 sudo 組態而不儲存嗎？" #. Error message Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/support.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/support.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/support.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:35+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" "Language-Team: none\n" @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ #. Rich text title for Support in proposals #: src/clients/support_proposal.rb:83 msgid "Support" -msgstr "" +msgstr "支援" #. Menu title for Support in proposals #: src/clients/support_proposal.rb:87 @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:68 msgid "Open" -msgstr "" +msgstr "開啟" #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:79 msgid "Collect Data" @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ #. Support configure1 dialog contents #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:226 msgid "Save as" -msgstr "" +msgstr "另存新檔" #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:229 msgid "Directory to Save" @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:343 msgid "Cannot write settings." -msgstr "" +msgstr "無法寫入設定。" #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:389 msgid "Choose Directory Where to Save Tarball" @@ -177,11 +177,11 @@ #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:489 msgid "Expert Settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "精靈設定" #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:495 msgid "Options" -msgstr "" +msgstr "選項" #. Support overview dialog caption #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:584 @@ -209,11 +209,11 @@ #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:701 msgid "Email Address" -msgstr "" +msgstr "電子郵件位址" #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:708 msgid "Name" -msgstr "" +msgstr "名稱" #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:715 msgid "Phone Number" @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:866 msgid "Progress" -msgstr "" +msgstr "進度" #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:931 msgid "Collected Data Review" @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ #. `MultiLineEdit (`id (`file), `opt (`read_only), _("File Contents")) #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:978 src/include/support/dialogs.rb:1026 msgid "File Name" -msgstr "" +msgstr "檔案名稱" #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:984 msgid "Remove from Data" @@ -279,6 +279,8 @@ "<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" msgstr "" +"<p><b><big>中止起始化：</big></b><br>\n" +"按下<b>「中止」</b>，以安全地中止組態公用程式。</p>\n" #. Write dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:44 @@ -295,6 +297,10 @@ "An additional dialog informs whether it is safe to do so.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" +"<p><b><big>中止儲存：</big></b><br>\n" +"按<b>「中止」</b>，中止儲存程序。\n" +"會出現其他的對話方塊，通知執行此動作是否安全。\n" +"</p>\n" #. Summary dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:55 @@ -319,16 +325,17 @@ "If you press <b>Edit</b>, an additional dialog in which to change\n" "the configuration opens.</p>\n" msgstr "" +"<p><b><big>編輯或刪除：</big></b><br>\n" +"如果您按<b>「編輯」</b>，就會開啟其他的對話方塊，可以在其中變更\n" +"組態。</p>\n" #. Ovreview dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:72 msgid "" "\n" "<p><b><big>Opening SUSE Support Center</big></b><br>\n" -"To start a Web browser that opens the SUSE Support Center Portal, use " -"<b>Open SUSE Support Center</b>.\n" -"You can then open a Service Request with Global Technical Support. Make sure " -"you write down\n" +"To start a Web browser that opens the SUSE Support Center Portal, use <b>Open SUSE Support Center</b>.\n" +"You can then open a Service Request with Global Technical Support. Make sure you write down\n" "the Service Request number to include in the supportconfig data upload.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -351,8 +358,7 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:90 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Supportconfig Options</big></b><br>\n" -"Select an option to override the defaults. You can use the default " -"settings,\n" +"Select an option to override the defaults. You can use the default settings,\n" "gather the most data or only gather a minimum amount of data." msgstr "" @@ -369,38 +375,31 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Options</big></b><br>\n" "Collect additional information. Usually these options are not\n" -"necessary, but can be included if circumstances require more information.\n" +"necessary, but can be included if circumstances require more information.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Expert dialog help 1/1 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:108 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Default Options</b></big><br>\n" -"Select or deselect each of the data sets you would like to include in the " -"supportconfig tarball.</p>" +"Select or deselect each of the data sets you would like to include in the supportconfig tarball.</p>" msgstr "" #. Contact dialog help 1/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:112 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Contact Information</b></big><br>\n" -"Fill in each of the contact information fields that you would like to " -"include\n" -"in the supportconfig tarball. The fields are saved in the basic-environment." -"txt file.</p>" +"Fill in each of the contact information fields that you would like to include\n" +"in the supportconfig tarball. The fields are saved in the basic-environment.txt file.</p>" msgstr "" #. Contact dialog help 2/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Upload Information</big></b><br>\n" -"The upload target is the supportconfig tarball's destination URI. Supported " -"upload services include\n" -"ftp, http, https, scp. If you need to include the supportconfig tarball " -"filename in your upload target,\n" -"use the <i>tarball</i> keyword. This will get replaced with the actual " -"tarball filename.\n" +"The upload target is the supportconfig tarball's destination URI. Supported upload services include\n" +"ftp, http, https, scp. If you need to include the supportconfig tarball filename in your upload target,\n" +"use the <i>tarball</i> keyword. This will get replaced with the actual tarball filename.\n" "See <i>man supportconfig(1)</i> for further details.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -408,8 +407,7 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:126 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Upload Target Examples</big></b><br>\n" -"https://secure-www.novell.com/upload?appname=supportconfig&file=<i>tarball<br>\n" +"https://secure-www.novell.com/upload?appname=supportconfig&file=<i>tarball</i><br>\n" "ftp://ftp.novell.com/incoming<br>\n" "scp://central.server.foo.com/supportconfig/archives</p>" msgstr "" @@ -417,10 +415,8 @@ #. Contact dialog help 4/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:133 msgid "" -"<p><b>Note:</b> If you are uploading a supportconfig tarball to Global " -"Technical Support,\n" -"make sure you include the 11-digit service request number from your open " -"service request.\n" +"<p><b>Note:</b> If you are uploading a supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support,\n" +"make sure you include the 11-digit service request number from your open service request.\n" msgstr "" #. Collecting data dialkog help 1/1 @@ -434,16 +430,14 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:141 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Collected Data Review</big></b><br>\n" -"Review the data collected by supportconfig. If you do not want to share some " -"of the collected data,\n" +"Review the data collected by supportconfig. If you do not want to share some of the collected data,\n" "use <b>Remove from Data</b> and the selected file will be removed.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Configure1 dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:148 msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big><br>\n" +"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></b><br>\n" "If you want to store a copy of the supportconfig tarball, select the target\n" "directory and make sure that this option is checked.\n" "<br></p>\n" @@ -454,8 +448,7 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:155 src/include/support/helps.rb:180 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Upload URL</big></b><br>\n" -"This option has the location to which the supportconfig tarball will be " -"uploaded\n" +"This option has the location to which the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded\n" "as default value.\n" "Change this value only in special cases.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -472,8 +465,7 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:173 msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big><br>\n" +"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></b><br>\n" "If you have already created the supportconfig tarball, write the full path\n" "into the <i>Package with log files</i> field.\n" "<br></p>\n" @@ -486,6 +478,9 @@ "Press <b>Next</b> to continue.\n" "<br></p>\n" msgstr "" +"<p><b><big>組態第二部份</big></b><br>\n" +"按<b>「下一步」</b>以繼續。\n" +" <br></p>\n" #. Configure2 dialog help 2/2 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:204 @@ -494,6 +489,9 @@ "It is not possible. You must code it first. :-)\n" "</p>" msgstr "" +"<p><b><big>正在選取其他項目</big></b><br>\n" +"這是不可能的。您必須先加以編碼。:-)\n" +" </p>" #. encoding: utf-8 #. *************************************************************************** @@ -554,15 +552,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:57 -msgid "" -"System environment information, including sysctl and root's environment. env." -"txt" +msgid "System environment information, including sysctl and root's environment. env.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:60 -msgid "" -"Recursively gets *.conf files, along with various other configuration files " -"in /etc. etc.txt" +msgid "Recursively gets *.conf files, along with various other configuration files in /etc. etc.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:63 @@ -582,9 +576,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:75 -msgid "" -"Novell Linux User Management-related information, including a root DSE, UNIX " -"Config and workstation object searches. novell-lum.txt" +msgid "Novell Linux User Management-related information, including a root DSE, UNIX Config and workstation object searches. novell-lum.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:78 @@ -640,9 +632,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:117 -msgid "" -"Pluggable Authentication Module-related information, including user account " -"information. pam.txt" +msgid "Pluggable Authentication Module-related information, including user account information. pam.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:120 @@ -662,9 +652,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:132 -msgid "" -"System Activity Reporting-related information, including copies of the SAR " -"data files. sar.txt" +msgid "System Activity Reporting-related information, including copies of the SAR data files. sar.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:135 @@ -677,10 +665,8 @@ #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:141 msgid "" -"Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology-related information for " -"hard disks. WARNING: Some hard disk controllers and drives do not\n" -"behave nicely. Probing SMART data has been known to change file systems to " -"read only mode or even hang the server. Make sure probing SMART data\n" +"Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology-related information for hard disks. WARNING: Some hard disk controllers and drives do not\n" +"behave nicely. Probing SMART data has been known to change file systems to read only mode or even hang the server. Make sure probing SMART data\n" "works in your environment before enabling this option. fs-smartmon.txt\n" msgstr "" @@ -713,21 +699,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:167 -msgid "" -"Tells supportconfig to search the file system for all eDirectory instances " -"files. If set, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST is automatically set as well. -e" +msgid "Tells supportconfig to search the file system for all eDirectory instances files. If set, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST is automatically set as well. -e" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:170 -msgid "" -"A full file list using find from the root of the filesytem. -L, fs-files.txt" +msgid "A full file list using find from the root of the filesytem. -L, fs-files.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:173 -msgid "" -"Includes the entire log file, including comments, instead of just " -"VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT lines of it. Additional rotated logs are included if " -"available. -l" +msgid "Includes the entire log file, including comments, instead of just VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT lines of it. Additional rotated logs are included if available. -l" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:176 @@ -735,21 +715,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:179 -msgid "" -"Normally all of the /var/log/YaST2/* logs are included. This option " -"minimizes the amount of each file retrieved." +msgid "Normally all of the /var/log/YaST2/* logs are included. This option minimizes the amount of each file retrieved." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:182 -msgid "" -"Runs an rpm -V on every installed RPM package. This takes some time to " -"complete. -v, rpm-verify.txt" +msgid "Runs an rpm -V on every installed RPM package. This takes some time to complete. -v, rpm-verify.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:185 -msgid "" -"Normally only the base SLP service types are listed. This option allows you " -"to query each of the discovered service types individually. -s, slp.txt" +msgid "Normally only the base SLP service types are listed. This option allows you to query each of the discovered service types individually. -s, slp.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:188 @@ -769,47 +743,33 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:200 -msgid "" -"The number of lines to include when getting a log file. Zero means get the " -"entire file." +msgid "The number of lines to include when getting a log file. Zero means get the entire file." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:203 -msgid "" -"The supportconfig tarball location. The first valid location in the list is " -"always used." +msgid "The supportconfig tarball location. The first valid location in the list is always used." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:206 -msgid "" -"The maximum number of /var/log/messages lines to get. Zero means get the " -"entire file." +msgid "The maximum number of /var/log/messages lines to get. Zero means get the entire file." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:209 -msgid "" -"The maximum number of heartbeat policy engine log files to include in the " -"supportconfig tarball." +msgid "The maximum number of heartbeat policy engine log files to include in the supportconfig tarball." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:212 -msgid "" -"The maximum number of SAR data files to include in the supportconfig tarball." +msgid "The maximum number of SAR data files to include in the supportconfig tarball." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:215 msgid "" -"When set to 1, supportconfig runs in quiet mode. This option is useful if " -"you\n" -"plan on running supportconfig regularly in a cron job for example. Set with -" -"Q." +"When set to 1, supportconfig runs in quiet mode. This option is useful if you\n" +"plan on running supportconfig regularly in a cron job for example. Set with -Q." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:218 -msgid "" -"Used to specify where the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded, when using " -"the -u srnum startup option. You can specify any FTP server that supports " -"anonymous uploads. The default is SUSE's public ftp server." +msgid "Used to specify where the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded, when using the -u srnum startup option. You can specify any FTP server that supports anonymous uploads. The default is SUSE's public ftp server." msgstr "" #. Initialization dialog caption @@ -820,7 +780,7 @@ #. Initialization dialog contents #: src/include/support/wizards.rb:149 msgid "Initializing..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "正在啟始化..." #. global string created_directory=""; #: src/modules/Support.rb:143 @@ -829,7 +789,7 @@ #: src/modules/Support.rb:144 msgid "root Password" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Root 密碼" #: src/modules/Support.rb:163 msgid "Password incorrect" @@ -848,30 +808,30 @@ #. Progress stage 1/2 #: src/modules/Support.rb:329 msgid "Write the settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "寫入設定" #. Progress stage 2/2 #: src/modules/Support.rb:331 msgid "Run SuSEconfig" -msgstr "" +msgstr "執行 SuSEconfig" #. Progress step 1/2 #: src/modules/Support.rb:335 msgid "Writing the settings..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "正在寫入設定..." #. Progress step 2/2 #: src/modules/Support.rb:337 msgid "Running SuSEconfig..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "正在執行 SuSEconfig..." #. Progress finished #: src/modules/Support.rb:339 msgid "Finished" -msgstr "" +msgstr "已完成" #. TODO FIXME: your code here... #. Configuration summary text for autoyast #: src/modules/Support.rb:438 msgid "Configuration summary..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "組態摘要..." Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/sysconfig.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/sysconfig.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/sysconfig.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-10-16 11:22+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -309,24 +309,17 @@ #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:819 msgid "" "<p>After you save your changes, this editor changes the variables in the\n" -"corresponding sysconfig file. Then it starts activation commands, which " -"changes the underlying configuration files, stops and starts daemons,\n" -"and runs low-level configuration tools so your configuration in sysconfig " -"takes effect.</p>\n" +"corresponding sysconfig file. Then it starts activation commands, which changes the underlying configuration files, stops and starts daemons,\n" +"and runs low-level configuration tools so your configuration in sysconfig takes effect.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>在您儲存變更之後，此編輯器會變更\n" -"對應 sysconfig 檔案中的變數。然後其會開始啟動指令，變更之下的組態檔案、停止並" -"啟動精靈\n" +"對應 sysconfig 檔案中的變數。然後其會開始啟動指令，變更之下的組態檔案、停止並啟動精靈\n" "以及執行低階組態工具，讓 sysconfig 中的組態可以運作。</p>\n" #. helptext for popup - part 2/2 #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:825 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Important:</b> You still can edit each individual configuration file " -"manually. The name of file is displayed in the variable description.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>重要：</b> 您仍然可以手動編輯各個組態檔案。檔案的名稱會顯示在變數描述" -"中。</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Important:</b> You still can edit each individual configuration file manually. The name of file is displayed in the variable description.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>重要：</b> 您仍然可以手動編輯各個組態檔案。檔案的名稱會顯示在變數描述中。</p>" #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:830 msgid "/etc/sysconfig Editor" @@ -340,22 +333,13 @@ #. help rich text displayed after module start (1/2) #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:866 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<P><B>System Configuration Editor</B></P><P>With the system configuration " -"editor, you can change some system settings. You can also use YaST to " -"configure your hardware and system settings.</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P><B>系統組態編輯器</B></P><P>您可以使用系統組態編輯器變更部份系統設定。您也" -"可以使用 YaST2 設定您的硬體和系統設定。</P>" +msgid "<P><B>System Configuration Editor</B></P><P>With the system configuration editor, you can change some system settings. You can also use YaST to configure your hardware and system settings.</P>" +msgstr "<P><B>系統組態編輯器</B></P><P>您可以使用系統組態編輯器變更部份系統設定。您也可以使用 YaST2 設定您的硬體和系統設定。</P>" #. help rich text displayed after module start (2/2) #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:870 -msgid "" -"<P><B>Note:</B> Descriptions are not translated because they are read " -"directly from configuration files.</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P><B>注意事項：</B> 描述內容並未轉譯，因為這些內容是直接從組態檔案讀取出來" -"的。</P>" +msgid "<P><B>Note:</B> Descriptions are not translated because they are read directly from configuration files.</P>" +msgstr "<P><B>注意事項：</B> 描述內容並未轉譯，因為這些內容是直接從組態檔案讀取出來的。</P>" #. push button label - displayed only in autoinstallation config mode #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:877 @@ -384,12 +368,8 @@ #. help text in popup dialog #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:951 -msgid "" -"The search results are displayed here. If you see the item you want, select " -"it then click \"Go to\". Otherwise, click \"Cancel\" to close this dialog." -msgstr "" -"搜尋結果會在此處顯示。您若是看到所需要的項目，請選取之，然後按一下「到」。否" -"則，請按一下「取消」關閉這個對話方塊。" +msgid "The search results are displayed here. If you see the item you want, select it then click \"Go to\". Otherwise, click \"Cancel\" to close this dialog." +msgstr "搜尋結果會在此處顯示。您若是看到所需要的項目，請選取之，然後按一下「到」。否則，請按一下「取消」關閉這個對話方塊。" #. push button label #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:956 @@ -604,15 +584,12 @@ msgstr "組態摘要" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p> SuSEconfig saves a checksum of each configuration file, so it can " -#~ "detect if\n" -#~ " you have manually changed any of them. If you have changed a " -#~ "configuration file manually,\n" +#~ "<p> SuSEconfig saves a checksum of each configuration file, so it can detect if\n" +#~ " you have manually changed any of them. If you have changed a configuration file manually,\n" #~ " it will not touch it.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p> SuSEconfig 會儲存每個組態檔案的檢查總數，因此您若是\n" -#~ "手動變更了其中一個檔案，SuSEconfig 皆可以偵測出來。SuSEconfig 不會觸碰您手" -#~ "動\n" +#~ "手動變更了其中一個檔案，SuSEconfig 皆可以偵測出來。SuSEconfig 不會觸碰您手動\n" #~ "變更的組態檔案。</p>\n" #~ msgid "All configuration scripts will be started." Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/tftp-server.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/tftp-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/tftp-server.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2001-06-05 18:04+02:00\n" "Last-Translator: Novell Language \n" "Language-Team: Novell Language \n" @@ -82,12 +82,8 @@ #. dialog help text #: src/include/tftp-server/dialogs.rb:83 -msgid "" -"<p>Use this to enable a server for TFTP (trivial file transfer protocol). " -"The server will be started using xinetd.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>使用這個選項可讓您啟用 TFTP (細瑣檔案傳輸通訊協定) 伺服器。伺服器將使用 " -"xinetd 啟動。</p>" +msgid "<p>Use this to enable a server for TFTP (trivial file transfer protocol). The server will be started using xinetd.</p>" +msgstr "<p>使用這個選項可讓您啟用 TFTP (細瑣檔案傳輸通訊協定) 伺服器。伺服器將使用 xinetd 啟動。</p>" #. enlighten newbies, #102946 #. dialog help text @@ -102,8 +98,7 @@ "<p><b>Boot Image Directory</b>:\n" "Specify the directory where served files are located. The usual value is\n" "<tt>/tftpboot</tt>. The directory will be created if it does not exist. \n" -"The server uses this as its root directory (using the <tt>-s</tt> option).\n" +"The server uses this as its root directory (using the <tt>-s</tt> option).</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>開機影像目錄</b>：\n" "指定找到服務檔案的\n" @@ -195,8 +190,7 @@ #~ "<p><b>Boot Image Directory</b>:\n" #~ "Specify the directory where served files are\n" #~ "located. The usual value is <tt>/tftpboot</tt>. It is created if it\n" -#~ "does not exist. The server uses this as its root directory (using the " -#~ "<tt>-s</tt> option).</p>\n" +#~ "does not exist. The server uses this as its root directory (using the <tt>-s</tt> option).</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><b>開機影像目錄</b>：\n" #~ "指定找到服務檔案的\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/timezone_db.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/timezone_db.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/timezone_db.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: timezone_db\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:32+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-10-13 17:58+0800\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/tune.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/tune.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/tune.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: tune\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-08-04 16:02+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2009-09-04 11:50+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ray Chen \n" "Language-Team: \n" @@ -21,38 +21,36 @@ "X-Generator: KBabel 1.11.4\n" #. Command line help text for the hardware detection module, %1 is "hwinfo" -#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:47 -msgid "" -"Hardware Detection - this module does not support the command line " -"interface, use '%1' instead." +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:49 +msgid "Hardware Detection - this module does not support the command line interface, use '%1' instead." msgstr "硬體偵測 - 此模組不支援指令行介面，請使用 '%1' 代替。" #. translators: popup heading -#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:71 +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:73 msgid "Probing Hardware..." msgstr "正在偵測硬體..." #. progress bar label -#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:74 +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:76 msgid "Progress" msgstr "進度" #. title label -#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:292 +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:311 msgid "&All Entries" msgstr "所有項目(&A)" -#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:304 +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:323 msgid "&Save to File..." msgstr "儲存至檔案(&S)..." #. dialog header -#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:313 +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:332 msgid "Hardware Information" msgstr "硬體資訊" #. help text -#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:316 +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:335 msgid "" "<P>The <B>Hardware Information</B> module displays the hardware\n" "details of your computer. Click any node for more information.</p>\n" @@ -60,21 +58,25 @@ "<P><B>硬體資訊</B>模組會顯示您電腦的\n" "硬體詳細資訊。按一下任何節點以獲得更多資訊。</p>\n" -#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:319 -msgid "" -"<P>You can save hardware information to a file. Click <B>Save to File</B> " -"and enter the filename.</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P>您可以將硬體資訊儲存到檔案。按一下<B>「儲存至檔案」</B>然後輸入檔名。</P>" +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:338 +msgid "<P>You can save hardware information to a file. Click <B>Save to File</B> and enter the filename.</P>" +msgstr "<P>您可以將硬體資訊儲存到檔案。按一下<B>「儲存至檔案」</B>然後輸入檔名。</P>" +#. installation proposal header +#: src/clients/hwinfo_proposal.rb:31 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "System Settings" +msgid "System and Hardware Settings" +msgstr "系統設定" + #. this is a heading #. tree node string -#: src/clients/hwinfo_proposal.rb:48 src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:471 +#: src/clients/hwinfo_proposal.rb:50 src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:471 msgid "System" msgstr "系統" #. this is a menu entry -#: src/clients/hwinfo_proposal.rb:50 +#: src/clients/hwinfo_proposal.rb:52 msgid "S&ystem" msgstr "系統(&Y)" @@ -85,9 +87,7 @@ #. help text #: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:95 -msgid "" -"<P><B>Details</B></P><P>The details of the selected hardware component are " -"displayed here.</P>" +msgid "<P><B>Details</B></P><P>The details of the selected hardware component are displayed here.</P>" msgstr "<P><B>詳細資訊</B></P><P>所選取硬體元件的詳細資訊會顯示在此處。</P>" #. heading text, %1 is component name (e.g. "USB UHCI Root Hub") @@ -139,21 +139,13 @@ #. help text - part 1/3 #: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:180 -msgid "" -"<P><B>Detected Hardware</B><BR>This table contains all hardware components " -"detected in your system.</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P><B>偵測到的硬體</B><BR>這個表格會列出在您系統上所偵測到的所有硬體元件。" +msgid "<P><B>Detected Hardware</B><BR>This table contains all hardware components detected in your system.</P>" +msgstr "<P><B>偵測到的硬體</B><BR>這個表格會列出在您系統上所偵測到的所有硬體元件。</P>" #. help text - part 2/3 #: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:184 -msgid "" -"<P><B>Details</B><BR>Select a component and press <B>Details</B> to see a " -"more detailed description of the component.</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P><B>詳細資料</B><BR>選取一個元件並按<B>「詳細資料」</B> 可查看該元件更多的" -"詳細描述。</P>" +msgid "<P><B>Details</B><BR>Select a component and press <B>Details</B> to see a more detailed description of the component.</P>" +msgstr "<P><B>詳細資料</B><BR>選取一個元件並按<B>「詳細資料」</B> 可查看該元件更多的詳細描述。</P>" #. help text - part 3/3 #: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:188 @@ -161,9 +153,7 @@ msgid "" "<P><B>Save to File</B><BR>You can save\n" " hardware information (<I>hwinfo</I> output) to a file.</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P><B>儲存至檔案</B><BR>您可以將硬體資訊 (<I>hwinfo</I> 輸出) 儲存到檔案或磁" -"片。在<B>「儲存到檔案」</B>選取目標類型。</P>" +msgstr "<P><B>儲存至檔案</B><BR>您可以將硬體資訊 (<I>hwinfo</I> 輸出) 儲存到檔案或磁片。在<B>「儲存到檔案」</B>選取目標類型。</P>" #. heading text #: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:197 @@ -293,47 +283,28 @@ #. PCI ID help text #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:411 -msgid "" -"<P>It is possible to add a PCI ID to a device driver to extend its internal " -"database of known supported devices.</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P>可以新增 PCI ID 至裝置驅動程式，以擴充已知支援裝置的內部資料庫。</P>" +msgid "<P>It is possible to add a PCI ID to a device driver to extend its internal database of known supported devices.</P>" +msgstr "<P>可以新增 PCI ID 至裝置驅動程式，以擴充已知支援裝置的內部資料庫。</P>" #. PCI ID help text #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:415 -msgid "" -"<P>PCI ID numbers are entered and displayed as hexadecimal numbers. <b>SysFS " -"Dir.</b> is the directory name in the /sys/bus/pci/drivers directory. If it " -"is empty, the driver name is used as the directory name.</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P>PCI ID 編號是以十六進位數字的形式來輸入與顯示。<b>SysFS 目錄</b>為 /sys/" -"bus/pci/drivers 目錄中的目錄名稱。如果它為空白，則使用驅動程式名稱作為目錄名" -"稱。</P>" +msgid "<P>PCI ID numbers are entered and displayed as hexadecimal numbers. <b>SysFS Dir.</b> is the directory name in the /sys/bus/pci/drivers directory. If it is empty, the driver name is used as the directory name.</P>" +msgstr "<P>PCI ID 編號是以十六進位數字的形式來輸入與顯示。<b>SysFS 目錄</b>為 /sys/bus/pci/drivers 目錄中的目錄名稱。如果它為空白，則使用驅動程式名稱作為目錄名稱。</P>" #. PCI ID help text #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:419 -msgid "" -"<P>If the driver is compiled into the kernel, leave the driver name empty " -"and enter the SysFS directory name instead.</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P>若驅動程式編譯至核心，請將驅動程式名稱保持空白，並輸入 SysFS 目錄名稱。" +msgid "<P>If the driver is compiled into the kernel, leave the driver name empty and enter the SysFS directory name instead.</P>" +msgstr "<P>若驅動程式編譯至核心，請將驅動程式名稱保持空白，並輸入 SysFS 目錄名稱。</P>" #. PCI ID help text, %1 stands for a button name (OK or Finish -- depends on the situation) #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:424 -msgid "" -"<P>Use the buttons below the table to change the list of PCI IDs. Press <b>" -"%1</b> to activate the settings.</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P>使用表格下方的按鈕來變更 PCI ID 的清單。按 <b>%1</b> 以啟用設定。</P>" +msgid "<P>Use the buttons below the table to change the list of PCI IDs. Press <b>%1</b> to activate the settings.</P>" +msgstr "<P>使用表格下方的按鈕來變更 PCI ID 的清單。按 <b>%1</b> 以啟用設定。</P>" #. PCI ID help text #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:431 -msgid "" -"<P><B>Warning:</B> This is an expert configuration. Only continue if you " -"know what you are doing.</P>" -msgstr "" -"<P><B>警告：</B> 此為進階組態。如果您沒有把握如何執行，請勿繼續執行。</P>" +msgid "<P><B>Warning:</B> This is an expert configuration. Only continue if you know what you are doing.</P>" +msgstr "<P><B>警告：</B> 此為進階組態。如果您沒有把握如何執行，請勿繼續執行。</P>" #. tree node string #: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:26 @@ -1086,12 +1057,9 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Global I/O Scheduler</big></b><br>\n" "Select the algorithm which orders and sends commands to disk\n" -"devices. This is a global option, it will be used for all disk devices in " -"the\n" -"system. If the option is not configured, the default scheduler (usually " -"'cfq')\n" -"will be used. See the documentation in the /usr/src/linux/Documentation/" -"block\n" +"devices. This is a global option, it will be used for all disk devices in the\n" +"system. If the option is not configured, the default scheduler (usually 'cfq')\n" +"will be used. See the documentation in the /usr/src/linux/Documentation/block\n" "directory (package kernel-source) for more information.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>全域 I/O 規劃程式</big></b><br>\n" @@ -1110,22 +1078,18 @@ #: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_dialogs.rb:134 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Enable SysRq Keys</big></b><br>\n" -"If you enable SysRq keys, you will have some control over the system even if " -"it\n" -"crashes (such as during kernel debugging). If it is enabled, the key " -"combination\n" +"If you enable SysRq keys, you will have some control over the system even if it\n" +"crashes (such as during kernel debugging). If it is enabled, the key combination\n" "Alt-SysRq- will start the respective command (e.g. reboot the\n" "computer, dump kernel information). For further information, see\n" -"<tt>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</tt> (package kernel-source).\n" +"<tt>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</tt> (package kernel-source).</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>啟用 SysRq 鍵</big></b><br>\n" "如果啟用 SysRq 鍵，即使系統損毀 (例如核心除錯)，\n" "您仍能對系統有某些程度的控制。\n" "如果啟用此功能，Alt-SysRq- 會啟動各自的指令\n" "(例如重新啟動電腦、傾印核心資訊)。\n" -"如需進一步的資訊，請參閱 <tt>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</tt> (在" -"套件kernel-source )。</p>\n" +"如需進一步的資訊，請參閱 <tt>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</tt> (在套件kernel-source )。</p>\n" #. Short sleep between reads or writes #: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_ui.rb:29 @@ -1395,19 +1359,16 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<P>The table contains information about all attached IDE devices. \n" #~ "<B>Current DMA Mode</B> shows the actual settings. <B>Required DMA\n" -#~ "Mode</B> shows settings that will be applied after <B>Finish</B> is " -#~ "pressed and\n" +#~ "Mode</B> shows settings that will be applied after <B>Finish</B> is pressed and\n" #~ "after each boot.</P>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<P>表格包含所有連接的 IDE 設備的相關資訊。\n" -#~ "<B>「目前的 DMA 模式」</B>顯示實際的設定。<B>「必要的 DMA 模式」</B> 顯示" -#~ "在按下<B>「完成」</B>並重新開機後，會套用的設定。\n" +#~ "<B>「目前的 DMA 模式」</B>顯示實際的設定。<B>「必要的 DMA 模式」</B> 顯示在按下<B>「完成」</B>並重新開機後，會套用的設定。\n" #~ "</P>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<P><B><BIG>Changing the IDE DMA Mode</BIG></B><BR>\n" -#~ "Select a device in the table then select the desired DMA mode from <B>DMA " -#~ "Mode</b>.\n" +#~ "Select a device in the table then select the desired DMA mode from <B>DMA Mode</b>.\n" #~ "</P>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<P><B><BIG>變更 IDE DMA 模式</BIG></B><BR>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/update.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/update.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/update.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: update\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-10-05 23:37+0800\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -108,8 +108,7 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>Create a Complete Backup of\n" -"/etc/sysconfig:</b> This covers all configuration files that are part of " -"the\n" +"/etc/sysconfig:</b> This covers all configuration files that are part of the\n" "sysconfig mechanism, even those that will not be replaced.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>建立 /etc/sysconfig 的\n" @@ -147,7 +146,7 @@ #. screen title for update options #. this is a heading -#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:48 src/clients/update_proposal.rb:300 +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:48 src/clients/update_proposal.rb:278 msgid "Update Options" msgstr "更新選項" @@ -183,8 +182,7 @@ msgstr "未知的" #. label showing to which version we are updating -#. TRANSLATORS: proposal summary item, %1 is a product name -#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:80 src/clients/update_proposal.rb:200 +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:80 msgid "Update to %1" msgstr "更新到 %1" @@ -227,8 +225,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>With New Software:</b> This default setting\n" "updates the existing software and installs all new features and benefits of\n" -"the new <tt>%1</tt> version. The selection is based on the former " -"predefined\n" +"the new <tt>%1</tt> version. The selection is based on the former predefined\n" "software selection.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>加上新軟體： </b>本預設設定會\n" @@ -242,8 +239,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Only Installed Packages:</b> This selection\n" "only updates the packages already installed on your system. <i>Note:</i>\n" -"New software in the predefined software selection, such as new YaST modules, " -"is\n" +"New software in the predefined software selection, such as new YaST modules, is\n" "not available after the update. You might miss new features.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>只更新安裝的套件：</b>此選項\n" @@ -255,8 +251,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_update.rb:175 msgid "" "<p>After the update, some software might not\n" -"function anymore. Activate <b>Delete Unmaintained Packages</b> to delete " -"those\n" +"function anymore. Activate <b>Delete Unmaintained Packages</b> to delete those\n" "packages during the update.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>更新之後，部分軟體可能無法\n" @@ -286,7 +281,7 @@ #. inform user in the proposal about the failed mount #. error report #: src/clients/inst_update_partition_auto.rb:79 -#: src/clients/rootpart_proposal.rb:110 src/include/update/rootpart.rb:384 +#: src/clients/rootpart_proposal.rb:110 src/include/update/rootpart.rb:385 msgid "Failed to mount target system" msgstr "無法裝載目標系統" @@ -362,15 +357,13 @@ #. error message in proposal #. part of error popup message -#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:85 src/clients/update_proposal.rb:406 +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:85 src/clients/update_proposal.rb:384 msgid "Cannot read the current RPM Database." msgstr "無法讀取目前的 RPM 資料庫。" #. error message in proposal #: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:101 -msgid "" -"The installed product is not compatible with the product on the installation " -"media." +msgid "The installed product is not compatible with the product on the installation media." msgstr "安裝媒體上的產品與已安裝的產品不相容。" #. TRANSLATORS: unknown product (label) @@ -387,8 +380,7 @@ #: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:143 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"Updating system to another version (%1 -> %2) is not supported on the " -"running system.<br>\n" +"Updating system to another version (%1 -> %2) is not supported on the running system.<br>\n" "Boot from the installation media and use a normal upgrade\n" "or disable software repositories of products with different versions.\n" msgstr "" @@ -402,17 +394,17 @@ msgstr "警告：由 '%1' 升級到 '%2'，產品不完全適合。" #. Proposal for backup during update -#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:216 +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:191 msgid "Only update installed packages" msgstr "只更新已安裝的套件" #. proposal string -#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:231 +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:206 msgid "Update based on patterns" msgstr "根據模式更新" #. TRANSLATORS: proposal dialog help -#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:257 +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:232 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b><big>Update Options</big></b> Select how your system will be updated.\n" @@ -426,17 +418,17 @@ "另外，是否要移除不再維護的套件。</p>" #. this is a menu entry -#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:302 +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:280 msgid "&Update Options" msgstr "更新選項(&U)" #. part of error popup message, %1 stands for newline-separated list of files -#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:409 +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:387 msgid "None of these files exist:%1" msgstr "這些檔案都不存在：%1" #. continue-cancel popup -#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:539 +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:517 msgid "" "The installed product is not compatible with the product\n" "on the installation media. If you try to update using the\n" @@ -548,8 +540,8 @@ msgid "&Boot" msgstr "開機(&B)" -#. continue-cancel popup -#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:353 +#. error popup +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:354 msgid "" "No installed system that can be upgraded with this product was found\n" "on the selected partition." @@ -558,7 +550,7 @@ "找不到可以利用此產品來升級的已安裝系統。" #. continue-cancel popup -#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:363 +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:364 #, fuzzy msgid "" "The architecture of the system installed in the selected partition\n" @@ -568,23 +560,22 @@ "與此產品的架構不同。" #. pop-up question -#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:393 +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:394 msgid "" -"A possibly incomplete installation has been detected on the selected " -"partition.\n" +"A possibly incomplete installation has been detected on the selected partition.\n" "Are sure you want to use it anyway?" msgstr "" "在您選擇的分割區偵測到可能是未完成的安裝。\n" "您確定無論如何都要使用它嗎？" #. button label -#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:397 +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:398 msgid "&Yes, Use It" msgstr "是，確定使用這個介面(&Y)" #. Target load failed, #466803 #. Target load failed, #466803 -#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:435 src/include/update/rootpart.rb:460 +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:436 src/include/update/rootpart.rb:461 msgid "" "Initializing the system for upgrade has failed for unknown reason.\n" "It is highly recommended not to continue the upgrade process.\n" @@ -596,7 +587,7 @@ "\n" "您確定要繼續嗎？" -#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:441 src/include/update/rootpart.rb:466 +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:442 src/include/update/rootpart.rb:467 msgid "&Yes, Continue" msgstr "是的，繼續(&Y)" @@ -693,8 +684,7 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "Your /boot partition is too small (%1 MB).\n" -"We recommend a size of no less than %2 MB or else the new Kernel may not " -"fit.\n" +"We recommend a size of no less than %2 MB or else the new Kernel may not fit.\n" "It is safer to either enlarge the partition\n" "or not use a /boot partition at all.\n" "\n" @@ -788,10 +778,8 @@ #. a popup message #: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1463 msgid "" -"Your system uses a separate /var partition which is required for the " -"upgrade\n" -"process to detect the disk-naming changes. Select the /var partition " -"manually\n" +"Your system uses a separate /var partition which is required for the upgrade\n" +"process to detect the disk-naming changes. Select the /var partition manually\n" "to continue the upgrade process." msgstr "" "您的系統使用分開的 /var 分割區，升級程序需要此分割區來\n" @@ -829,11 +817,9 @@ #. Calling a script because otherwise this module would depend on yast2-country #: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1698 msgid "" -"Some partitions in the system on %1 are mounted by kernel-device name. This " -"is\n" +"Some partitions in the system on %1 are mounted by kernel-device name. This is\n" "not reliable for the update since kernel-device names are unfortunately not\n" -"persistent. It is strongly recommended to start the old system and change " -"the\n" +"persistent. It is strongly recommended to start the old system and change the\n" "mount-by method to any other method for all partitions." msgstr "" "有些在 %1 系統上的分割區是以核心裝置名稱掛載。 在更新時\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/users.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/users.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/users.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: users\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-10-06 21:27+0800\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -100,12 +100,8 @@ #. translators: command line help text for 'user' option #: src/clients/groups.rb:218 -msgid "" -"List of group members, usually usernames, separated by commas. The list of " -"LDAP user DNs must be separated by colons." -msgstr "" -"群組成員 (通常是使用者名稱) 的清單，以逗號分隔。LDAP 使用者 DN 的清單必須以冒" -"號分隔。" +msgid "List of group members, usually usernames, separated by commas. The list of LDAP user DNs must be separated by colons." +msgstr "群組成員 (通常是使用者名稱) 的清單，以逗號分隔。LDAP 使用者 DN 的清單必須以冒號分隔。" #. translators: command line help text for new_groupname option #: src/clients/groups.rb:225 @@ -157,24 +153,13 @@ #. helptext 2/3 #. help text for dialog "User Authentication Method" 2/2 #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:125 src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:162 -msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Local</b> to authenticate users only by using the local files " -"<i>/etc/passwd</i> and <i>/etc/shadow</i>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>若只要使用本地檔案 <i>/etc/passwd</i> 及 <i>/etc/shadow</i> 來驗證使用者，" -"請選取<b>「本地」</b>。</p>" +msgid "<p>Select <b>Local</b> to authenticate users only by using the local files <i>/etc/passwd</i> and <i>/etc/shadow</i>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>若只要使用本地檔案 <i>/etc/passwd</i> 及 <i>/etc/shadow</i> 來驗證使用者，請選取<b>「本地」</b>。</p>" #. optional helptext 2.5/3 (local users continued) #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:133 -msgid "" -"If you have a previous installation or alternative system, it is possible to " -"create users based on this source. To do so, select <b>Read User Data from a " -"Previous Installation</b>. This option uses an existing or creates a new " -"home directory for each user in the location specified for this installation." -msgstr "" -"如果您有上一個安裝或替用系統，則可根據此來源建立使用者。若要如此做，請選取" -"<b>「讀取上一個安裝的使用者資料」</b>。此選項會使用現有資料，或為在此安裝指定" -"位置中的每個使用者建立一個新的主目錄。" +msgid "If you have a previous installation or alternative system, it is possible to create users based on this source. To do so, select <b>Read User Data from a Previous Installation</b>. This option uses an existing or creates a new home directory for each user in the location specified for this installation." +msgstr "如果您有上一個安裝或替用系統，則可根據此來源建立使用者。若要如此做，請選取<b>「讀取上一個安裝的使用者資料」</b>。此選項會使用現有資料，或為在此安裝指定位置中的每個使用者建立一個新的主目錄。" #. radiobutton to select ldap user auth. #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:141 @@ -213,8 +198,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:185 msgid "" "<p>If you are using a NIS or LDAP server to store user data or if you want\n" -"to authenticate users against an NT server, choose the appropriate value. " -"Then\n" +"to authenticate users against an NT server, choose the appropriate value. Then\n" "press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of your client.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>如果您使用 NIS 或 LDAP 伺服器來儲存使用者資料，\n" @@ -225,8 +209,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:195 msgid "" "<p>If you are using a NIS or LDAP server to store user data, choose the\n" -"appropriate value. Then press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of " -"your client.</p>" +"appropriate value. Then press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of your client.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>如果您使用 NIS 或 LDAP 伺服器來儲存使用者資料，\n" "請選擇適當的值。然後按<b>「下一步」</b>繼續用戶端的設定。</p>" @@ -238,28 +221,22 @@ "authenticate users against an NT server, choose the appropriate value. Then\n" "press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of your client.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>如果您使用 LDAP 伺服器來儲存使用者資料，或者您想要驗證 NT 伺服器的使用者，" -"請選擇適當的值。然後\n" +"<p>如果您使用 LDAP 伺服器來儲存使用者資料，或者您想要驗證 NT 伺服器的使用者，請選擇適當的值。然後\n" "按<b>「下一步」</b>繼續用戶端的設定。</p>" #. helptext 3/3 -- only ldap available #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:215 msgid "" "<p>If you are using an LDAP server to store user data, choose the\n" -"appropriate value. Then press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of " -"your client.</p>" +"appropriate value. Then press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of your client.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>如果您使用 LDAP 伺服器來儲存使用者資料，\n" "請選擇適當的值。然後按<b>「下一步」</b>繼續用戶端的設定。</p>" #. helptext: additional kerberos support #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:225 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Set Up Kerberos Authentication</b> to configure Kerberos after " -"configuring the user data source.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>在設定使用者資料來源後，檢查<b>「設定 Kerberos 驗證」</b>以設定 " -"Kerberos 。</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Set Up Kerberos Authentication</b> to configure Kerberos after configuring the user data source.</p>" +msgstr "<p>在設定使用者資料來源後，檢查<b>「設定 Kerberos 驗證」</b>以設定 Kerberos 。</p>" #. check box label #. check box label @@ -356,8 +333,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "Because the root user is equipped with extensive permissions, the password\n" -"for \"root\" should be chosen carefully. A combination of letters and " -"numbers\n" +"for \"root\" should be chosen carefully. A combination of letters and numbers\n" "is recommended. To ensure that the password was entered correctly,\n" "reenter it in a second field.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -376,8 +352,7 @@ "<p>\n" "All the rules for user passwords apply to the \"root\" password:\n" "Distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have at\n" -"least 5 characters and, as a rule, not contain any accented letters or " -"umlauts.\n" +"least 5 characters and, as a rule, not contain any accented letters or umlauts.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -410,12 +385,8 @@ #. help text for 'test keyboard layout' entry' #: src/clients/inst_root.rb:187 -msgid "" -"<p>To check whether your current keyboard layout is correct, try entering " -"text into the <b>Test Keyboard Layout</b> field.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>請在 <b>測試鍵盤配置</b> 的區域輸入一些字，檢查您的目前鍵盤配置是否正確。" -"</p>" +msgid "<p>To check whether your current keyboard layout is correct, try entering text into the <b>Test Keyboard Layout</b> field.</p>" +msgstr "<p>請在 <b>測試鍵盤配置</b> 的區域輸入一些字，檢查您的目前鍵盤配置是否正確。</p>" #. report misspellings of the password #. report misspellings of the password @@ -570,12 +541,8 @@ #. Help text for password expert dialog 4/5 #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:168 src/include/users/widgets.rb:491 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p><b>SHA-512</b> is the current standard hash method. Using other " -"algorithms is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purposes.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>SHA-512</b> 是目前的標準 hash 方式，除非您為了相容的目的，否則 不建議使" -"用其他演算法。</p>" +msgid "<p><b>SHA-512</b> is the current standard hash method. Using other algorithms is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purposes.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>SHA-512</b> 是目前的標準 hash 方式，除非您為了相容的目的，否則 不建議使用其他演算法。</p>" #. text entry #. text entry @@ -663,8 +630,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:448 src/include/users/helps.rb:73 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"With the current password encryption (%1), the password length should be " -"between\n" +"With the current password encryption (%1), the password length should be between\n" " %2 and %3 characters.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -701,13 +667,10 @@ #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:467 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"For the <b>Username</b> use only letters (no accented characters), digits, " -"and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" -"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are " -"doing.\n" +"For the <b>Username</b> use only letters (no accented characters), digits, and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" +"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are doing.\n" "Usernames have stricter restrictions than passwords. You can redefine the\n" -"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for " -"information.\n" +"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for information.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -720,12 +683,8 @@ #. help text for main add user dialog #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:473 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Use this password for system administrator</b> if the same " -"password as entered for the first user should be used for root.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>核取 <b>系統管理員使用此密碼</b> 如果 root 要使用和第一個使用者相同的密" -"碼。</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Use this password for system administrator</b> if the same password as entered for the first user should be used for root.</p>" +msgstr "<p>核取 <b>系統管理員使用此密碼</b> 如果 root 要使用和第一個使用者相同的密碼。</p>" #. help text for main add user dialog #. these are used only during installation time @@ -733,21 +692,17 @@ #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:476 src/include/users/helps.rb:259 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"The username and password created here are needed to log in and work with " -"your Linux system. With <b>Automatic Login</b> enabled, the login procedure " -"is skipped. This user is logged in automatically.</p>\n" +"The username and password created here are needed to log in and work with your Linux system. With <b>Automatic Login</b> enabled, the login procedure is skipped. This user is logged in automatically.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"登入與使用 Linux 系統時，必須使用在此建立的使用者名稱和密碼。啟用<b>「自動登" -"入」</b>時，會略過登入程序。此使用者會自動登入。</p>\n" +"登入與使用 Linux 系統時，必須使用在此建立的使用者名稱和密碼。啟用<b>「自動登入」</b>時，會略過登入程序。此使用者會自動登入。</p>\n" #. help text for main add user dialog #. help text 5/7 (only during installation) #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:480 src/include/users/helps.rb:264 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Have mail for root forwarded to this user by checking <b>Receive System " -"Mail</b>.</p>\n" +"Have mail for root forwarded to this user by checking <b>Receive System Mail</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "核取<b>「接收系統郵件」</b>，轉寄 Root 使用者的郵件給此使用者。</p>\n" @@ -927,8 +882,7 @@ #: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_all.rb:105 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Here, see the table of all allowed attributes for the current LDAP entry " -"that were not set in previous dialogs.</p>" +"Here, see the table of all allowed attributes for the current LDAP entry that were not set in previous dialogs.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "在此處查看對於沒有在先前對話方塊設定的現存 LDAP 項目所有允許屬性的表格。</p>" @@ -954,8 +908,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "Edit each attribute using <b>Edit</b>. Some attributes \n" -"could be required, as defined in the user template in the <b>LDAP Client " -"Module</b>.</p>\n" +"could be required, as defined in the user template in the <b>LDAP Client Module</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "使用<b>「編輯」</b>來編輯每個屬性。某些屬性\n" @@ -978,13 +931,8 @@ #. helptext #: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_passwordpolicy.rb:91 -msgid "" -"<p>Assign a password policy object to this user in <b>DN of Password Policy " -"object</b>. Activate <b>Reset Password</b> to reset the password of modified " -"user.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>指派密碼規則物件給這個位於<b>密碼規則物件之 DN</b>的使用者。 啟用<b>重設密" -"碼</b>來重設修改之使用者的密碼。</p>" +msgid "<p>Assign a password policy object to this user in <b>DN of Password Policy object</b>. Activate <b>Reset Password</b> to reset the password of modified user.</p>" +msgstr "<p>指派密碼規則物件給這個位於<b>密碼規則物件之 DN</b>的使用者。 啟用<b>重設密碼</b>來重設修改之使用者的密碼。</p>" #. check box label #: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_passwordpolicy.rb:107 @@ -1087,35 +1035,20 @@ #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:101 msgid "" "<p>Define a size limit by specifying the number of 1 KB blocks the\n" -"user may have on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode " -"limit specifying the number of inodes the user may have on the file system.\n" +"user may have on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode limit specifying the number of inodes the user may have on the file system.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>以 1KB 區塊為單位，指定此使用者\n" "在這檔案系統中可使用大小限制。另外，您也可以設定 inode 數目的限制。</p>\n" #. helptext for quota, cont. #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:105 -msgid "" -"<p>You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. " -"The soft limits define a warning level at which users are informed they are " -"nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write " -"requests are denied.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>您可以在大小和 inode 數指定軟的與硬的限制。軟限制定義出一個警告的界線，使" -"用者將被警告他們已經接近使用的極限，而硬限制則會定義超出後就拒絕寫入的界線。" -"</p>" +msgid "<p>You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. The soft limits define a warning level at which users are informed they are nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write requests are denied.</p>" +msgstr "<p>您可以在大小和 inode 數指定軟的與硬的限制。軟限制定義出一個警告的界線，使用者將被警告他們已經接近使用的極限，而硬限制則會定義超出後就拒絕寫入的界線。</p>" #. helptext for quota, cont. #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:109 -msgid "" -"<p>As soon as the user has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the " -"grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the user is " -"allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace " -"interval starts immediately.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>當使用者抵達軟限制時，寬限期的輸入區域將被活化。指定此使用者可超過軟限制的" -"寬限時間。寬限期的倒數計時會立即開始。</p>" +msgid "<p>As soon as the user has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the user is allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace interval starts immediately.</p>" +msgstr "<p>當使用者抵達軟限制時，寬限期的輸入區域將被活化。指定此使用者可超過軟限制的寬限時間。寬限期的倒數計時會立即開始。</p>" #. helptext for quota #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:115 @@ -1128,35 +1061,20 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p>Define a size limit by specifying the number of 1 kB blocks the\n" -"group may use on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode " -"limit specifying the number of inodes the group may use on the file system.\n" +"group may use on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode limit specifying the number of inodes the group may use on the file system.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>以 1kB 區塊為單位，指定此群組\n" "在這檔案系統中可使用大小限制。另外，您也可以設定 inode 數目的限制。</p>\n" #. helptext for quota, cont. #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:123 -msgid "" -"<p>You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. " -"The soft limits define a warning level at which groups are informed they are " -"nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write " -"requests are denied.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>您可以在大小和 inode 數指定軟的與硬的限制。軟限制定義出一個警告的界線，群" -"組將被警告他們已經接近使用的極限，而硬限制則會定義超出後就拒絕寫入的界線。" +msgid "<p>You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. The soft limits define a warning level at which groups are informed they are nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write requests are denied.</p>" +msgstr "<p>您可以在大小和 inode 數指定軟的與硬的限制。軟限制定義出一個警告的界線，群組將被警告他們已經接近使用的極限，而硬限制則會定義超出後就拒絕寫入的界線。</p>" #. helptext for quota, cont. #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:127 -msgid "" -"<p>As soon as the group has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the " -"grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the group is " -"allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace " -"interval starts immediately.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>當群組抵達軟限制時，寬限期的輸入區域將被活化。指定此群組可超過軟限制的寬限" -"時間。寬限期的倒數計時會立即開始。</p>" +msgid "<p>As soon as the group has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the group is allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace interval starts immediately.</p>" +msgstr "<p>當群組抵達軟限制時，寬限期的輸入區域將被活化。指定此群組可超過軟限制的寬限時間。寬限期的倒數計時會立即開始。</p>" #. combo box label #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:188 @@ -1475,8 +1393,7 @@ "'%1' and '%2'\n" "were found. Use them for current user?\n" "\n" -"This means that data from this image will be used instead of current home " -"directory." +"This means that data from this image will be used instead of current home directory." msgstr "" #. popup label, %1 is path to directory @@ -1778,8 +1695,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "When entering a password, distinguish between uppercase and\n" -"lowercase. Passwords should not contain any accented characters or " -"umlauts. \n" +"lowercase. Passwords should not contain any accented characters or umlauts. \n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -1828,19 +1744,16 @@ #: src/include/users/helps.rb:123 msgid "" "<p><b>Default Login Shell</b><br>\n" -"The name of the new user's login shell. Select one from the list or enter " -"your own path to the shell.</P>\n" +"The name of the new user's login shell. Select one from the list or enter your own path to the shell.</P>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>預設登入外圍程序</b><br>\n" -"新使用者之登入外圍程序的名稱。請從清單中選取，或輸入自有的外圍程序路徑。\n" +"新使用者之登入外圍程序的名稱。請從清單中選取，或輸入自有的外圍程序路徑。</P>\n" #. Help text 3/6 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:127 msgid "" "<p><b>Default Home</b><br>\n" -"The initial path prefix for a new user's home directory. The username is " -"added\n" +"The initial path prefix for a new user's home directory. The username is added\n" "to the end of this value to create the default name of the home directory.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1853,8 +1766,7 @@ #: src/include/users/helps.rb:134 msgid "" "<p><b>Skeleton Directory</b><br>\n" -"The contents of this directory are copied to a user's home directory when a " -"new user is added. </p>\n" +"The contents of this directory are copied to a user's home directory when a new user is added. </p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>架構目錄</b><br>\n" "新增使用者時，會將此目錄的內容複製至使用者的家目錄。</p>\n" @@ -1874,8 +1786,7 @@ #: src/include/users/helps.rb:143 msgid "" "<p><b>Expiration Date</b><br>\n" -"The date on which the user account is disabled. The date must be in the " -"format\n" +"The date on which the user account is disabled. The date must be in the format\n" "YYYY-MM-DD. Leave it empty if this account never expires.</P>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>過期日</b><br>\n" @@ -1966,11 +1877,9 @@ "Create the <b>Username</b> from components of the full name by\n" "clicking <b>Suggestion</b>. It may be modified, but use only\n" "letters (no accented characters), digits, and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" -"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are " -"doing.\n" +"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are doing.\n" "Usernames have stricter restrictions than passwords. You can redefine the\n" -"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for " -"information.\n" +"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for information.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -1978,8 +1887,7 @@ "建立<b>「使用者名稱」</b>。使用者名稱可以修改，但只能使用\n" "字母 (非重音字母)、數字和 <tt>._-</tt>。\n" "除非您非常確定，請勿在這個項目中使用大寫字母。\n" -"使用者名稱的限制比密碼嚴格。您可以在/etc/login.defs 檔案中重新定義限制。請閱" -"讀它的說明頁面以獲得資訊。\n" +"使用者名稱的限制比密碼嚴格。您可以在/etc/login.defs 檔案中重新定義限制。請閱讀它的說明頁面以獲得資訊。\n" "</p>\n" #. alternative help text 2/7 @@ -1988,11 +1896,9 @@ "<p>\n" "For the <b>Username</b>, use only\n" "letters (no accented characters), digits, and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" -"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are " -"doing.\n" +"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are doing.\n" "Usernames have stricter restrictions than passwords. You can redefine the\n" -"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for " -"information.\n" +"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for information.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -2005,9 +1911,7 @@ #. help text 6/7 (only during installation) #: src/include/users/helps.rb:269 -msgid "" -"<p>Press <b>User Management</b> to add more users or groups to your system." +msgid "<p>Press <b>User Management</b> to add more users or groups to your system.</p>" msgstr "<p>按下<b>「使用者管理」</b>，以新增更多使用者或群組至您的系統。</p>" #. alternative help text 4/7 @@ -2027,12 +1931,10 @@ #: src/include/users/helps.rb:286 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"To edit various password settings of this user, such as expiration date, " -"click <b>Password Settings</b>.</p>\n" +"To edit various password settings of this user, such as expiration date, click <b>Password Settings</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"若要編輯這個使用者的密碼設定，例如：過期日，請按一下<b>「密碼設定」</b>。\n" +"若要編輯這個使用者的密碼設定，例如：過期日，請按一下<b>「密碼設定」</b>。</p>\n" #. help text 7/7 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:296 @@ -2097,8 +1999,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b>Password:</b>\n" -"To require users who are not members of the group to identify themselves " -"when\n" +"To require users who are not members of the group to identify themselves when\n" "switching to this group (see the man page of <tt>newgrp</tt>), assign a\n" "password to this group. For security reasons, this password is not shown\n" "here. This entry is not required.\n" @@ -2211,12 +2112,8 @@ #. help text for user's home directory mode #: src/include/users/helps.rb:430 -msgid "" -"<p>Optionally, set the <b>Home Directory Permission Mode</b> for this user's " -"home directory different from the default.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>您可以選擇性地將此使用者家目錄的<b>「家目錄許可模式」</b>設定為不同於預設" -"值。</p>" +msgid "<p>Optionally, set the <b>Home Directory Permission Mode</b> for this user's home directory different from the default.</p>" +msgstr "<p>您可以選擇性地將此使用者家目錄的<b>「家目錄許可模式」</b>設定為不同於預設值。</p>" #. alternate helptext 4.5/8; %1 is directory (e.g. '/etc/skel') #: src/include/users/helps.rb:440 @@ -2231,44 +2128,25 @@ #. help text for Move to new location checkbox #: src/include/users/helps.rb:452 -msgid "" -"<p>If changing the location of a user's home directory, move the contents of " -"the current directory with <b>Move to New Location</b>, activated by " -"default. Otherwise a new home directory is created without any of the " -"existing data.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>如果要變更使用者家目錄的位置，請以<b>「移動到新位置」</b>(預設即已啟用) 移" -"動目前的目錄內容。 否則就會建立新的家目錄，沒有任何現有資料。</p>" +msgid "<p>If changing the location of a user's home directory, move the contents of the current directory with <b>Move to New Location</b>, activated by default. Otherwise a new home directory is created without any of the existing data.</p>" +msgstr "<p>如果要變更使用者家目錄的位置，請以<b>「移動到新位置」</b>(預設即已啟用) 移動目前的目錄內容。 否則就會建立新的家目錄，沒有任何現有資料。</p>" #. help text for directory encryption #: src/include/users/helps.rb:464 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p>To encrypt the user's home directory, enable <b>Use Encrypted Home\n" -"Directory</b> and set the directory size. Encrypting a user's home " -"directory\n" -"does not provide strong security from other users. If this machine is " -"shared\n" +"Directory</b> and set the directory size. Encrypting a user's home directory\n" +"does not provide strong security from other users. If this machine is shared\n" "among multiple users, it may be possible for a user to compromise system\n" -"security by obtaining another user's key and gaining access to the encrypted " -"data. If strong security is required, the system should not be physically " -"shared.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>如果要為使用者的家目錄加密，請啟用<b>「使用加密的家目錄」</b>並設定目錄大" -"小。 為使用者的家目錄加密後，所提供的安全性無法抵擋其他使用者的危害。 如果多" -"名使用者共用此機器，某使用者就可能破壞系統安全性、取得其他使用者的金鑰，並存" -"取加密資料。 如果需要更強的安全性，該實體系統就不能與他人共用。</p>" +"security by obtaining another user's key and gaining access to the encrypted data. If strong security is required, the system should not be physically shared.</p>" +msgstr "<p>如果要為使用者的家目錄加密，請啟用<b>「使用加密的家目錄」</b>並設定目錄大小。 為使用者的家目錄加密後，所提供的安全性無法抵擋其他使用者的危害。 如果多名使用者共用此機器，某使用者就可能破壞系統安全性、取得其他使用者的金鑰，並存取加密資料。 如果需要更強的安全性，該實體系統就不能與他人共用。</p>" #. help text for directory encryption #: src/include/users/helps.rb:476 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>Home directories cannot be encrypted if a fingerprint reader device is " -"used. To encrypt the user's home directory, disable fingerprint " -"configuration first.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>當使用指紋辨識裝置時，家目錄無法被加密。要加密使用者的家目錄，首先停用指紋" -"辨識組態。</p>" +msgid "<p>Home directories cannot be encrypted if a fingerprint reader device is used. To encrypt the user's home directory, disable fingerprint configuration first.</p>" +msgstr "<p>當使用指紋辨識裝置時，家目錄無法被加密。要加密使用者的家目錄，首先停用指紋辨識組態。</p>" #. alternate helptext 5/8 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:487 @@ -2293,8 +2171,7 @@ "<p><b>其他資訊：</b>\n" "可以在此處設定其他的使用者資料。該欄位最多可包含\n" "三個部分，並以逗號分隔。標準使用方法為寫入\n" -"<i>「辦公室」</i>、<i>「辦公室電話」</i>和<i>「住家電話」</i>。對使用者執行 " -"<i>finger\n" +"<i>「辦公室」</i>、<i>「辦公室電話」</i>和<i>「住家電話」</i>。對使用者執行 <i>finger\n" " 指令時，會顯示此資訊。</p>\n" #. help text 6/8 @@ -2365,9 +2242,7 @@ #. helptext for plugin dialog 3/3 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:552 -msgid "" -"<p>Start the detailed configuration of a particular plug-in by selecting " -"<b>Launch</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Start the detailed configuration of a particular plug-in by selecting <b>Launch</b>.</p>" msgstr "<p>選取<b>「啟動」</b>，開始對特定插件進行詳細的組態設定。</p>" #. help texts 1/1 @@ -2388,9 +2263,7 @@ "<p>Activate <b>Force Password Change</b> to force the user to change the\n" "password at the next login. If <b>Last Password Change</b> is set to\n" "<i>Never</i>, the user will be forced to change the password.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>啟用 <b>強迫變更密碼</b> 來強迫使用者在下次登入時變更密碼。如果 <b>上次密" -"碼變更</b> 設定為 <i>永不</i>, 使用者將被強迫變更密碼。</p>" +msgstr "<p>啟用 <b>強迫變更密碼</b> 來強迫使用者在下次登入時變更密碼。如果 <b>上次密碼變更</b> 設定為 <i>永不</i>, 使用者將被強迫變更密碼。</p>" #. Help text 2/6 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:579 @@ -2425,23 +2298,19 @@ #. Help text 4/6 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:595 msgid "" -"<P><B>Maximum Number of Days for the Same Password</B><BR>Set how many days " -"a user \n" +"<P><B>Maximum Number of Days for the Same Password</B><BR>Set how many days a user \n" "can use the same password before it expires.</P>\n" msgstr "" -"<P><B>相同密碼最多可使用天數</B><BR>設定在過期前，使用者可使用相同密碼的天" -"數。\n" +"<P><B>相同密碼最多可使用天數</B><BR>設定在過期前，使用者可使用相同密碼的天數。\n" "</P>\n" #. Help text 5/6 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:599 msgid "" -"<P><B>Minimum Number of Days for the Same Password</B><BR>Set the minimum " -"age of \n" +"<P><B>Minimum Number of Days for the Same Password</B><BR>Set the minimum age of \n" "a password before a user is allowed to change it.</P>\n" msgstr "" -"<P><B>相同密碼最少可使用天數</B><BR>設定在過期前，使用者可使用相同密碼的天" -"數。\n" +"<P><B>相同密碼最少可使用天數</B><BR>設定在過期前，使用者可使用相同密碼的天數。\n" "</P>\n" #. Help text 6/6 : Don't reorder letters YYYY-MM-DD, date must be set in this format @@ -2475,8 +2344,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b>Changing the Values</b><br>\n" -"You can configure these settings by running appropriate modules. Select the " -"module with <b>Configure</b>.\n" +"You can configure these settings by running appropriate modules. Select the module with <b>Configure</b>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -2486,140 +2354,78 @@ #. help text for Password Policy Dialog #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:62 -msgid "" -"<p>Select the <b>Password Change Policies</b>, <b>Password Aging Policies, and <b>Lockout Policies</b> tabs to choose LDAP password policy groups " -"of attributes to configure.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>選取<b>「密碼變更規則」</b>、<b>「密碼期限規則」</b>和<b>「鎖定規則」</b>" -"標籤，以選擇要設定的屬性 LDAP 密碼規則群組。</p>" +msgid "<p>Select the <b>Password Change Policies</b>, <b>Password Aging Policies</b>, and <b>Lockout Policies</b> tabs to choose LDAP password policy groups of attributes to configure.</p>" +msgstr "<p>選取<b>「密碼變更規則」</b>、<b>「密碼期限規則」</b>和<b>「鎖定規則」</b>標籤，以選擇要設定的屬性 LDAP 密碼規則群組。</p>" #. help text for pwdInHistory attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:70 -msgid "" -"<p>Specify the <b>Maximum Number of Passwords Stored in History</b> to set " -"how many previously used passwords should be saved. Saved passwords may not " -"be used.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>指定<b>「歷程中儲存的最多密碼數」</b>以設定要儲存幾個已經使用過的密碼。 儲" -"存過的密碼不得再使用。</p>" +msgid "<p>Specify the <b>Maximum Number of Passwords Stored in History</b> to set how many previously used passwords should be saved. Saved passwords may not be used.</p>" +msgstr "<p>指定<b>「歷程中儲存的最多密碼數」</b>以設定要儲存幾個已經使用過的密碼。 儲存過的密碼不得再使用。</p>" #. help text for pwdMustChange attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:74 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>User Must Change Password after Reset</b> to force users to " -"change their passwords after the the password is reset or changed by an " -"administrator.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>核取<b>「重設後使用者必須變更密碼」</b>，強迫使用者在密碼重設或管理員變更" -"其密碼後，必須變更自己的密碼。</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>User Must Change Password after Reset</b> to force users to change their passwords after the the password is reset or changed by an administrator.</p>" +msgstr "<p>核取<b>「重設後使用者必須變更密碼」</b>，強迫使用者在密碼重設或管理員變更其密碼後，必須變更自己的密碼。</p>" #. help text for pwdAllowUserChange attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:78 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>User Can Change Password</b> to allow users to change their " -"passwords.</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>User Can Change Password</b> to allow users to change their passwords.</p>" msgstr "<p>核取<b>「使用者可變更密碼」</b>以允許使用者變更自己的密碼。</p>" #. help text for pwdSafeModify attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:82 -msgid "" -"<p>If the existing password must be provided along with the new password, " -"check <b>Old Password Required for Password Change</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>如果既有密碼與新密碼都必須輸入，請核取<b>「變更密碼時需要舊密碼」</b>。" +msgid "<p>If the existing password must be provided along with the new password, check <b>Old Password Required for Password Change</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>如果既有密碼與新密碼都必須輸入，請核取<b>「變更密碼時需要舊密碼」</b>。</p>" #. help text for pwdCheckQuality attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:86 -msgid "" -"<p>Select whether the password quality should be verified while passwords " -"are modified or added. Select <b>No Checking</b> if passwords should not be " -"checked at all. With <b>Accept Uncheckable Passwords</b>, passwords are " -"accepted even if the check cannot be performed, for example, if the user has " -"provided an encrypted password. With <b>Only Accept Checked Passwords</b> " -"passwords are refused if the quality test fails or the password cannot be " -"checked.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>選取修改或新增密碼時，是否要驗證密碼品質。 如果完全不要檢查密碼，請選取" -"<b>「不檢查」</b>。 設定<b>「接受不可檢查的密碼」</b>時，即使無法檢查密碼 (例" -"如使用者提供加密過的密碼)，也可以接受。 設定<b>「僅接受檢查過的密碼」</b>時，" -"如果密碼品質測試失敗或無法檢查密碼，該密碼就會遭到拒絕。</p>" +msgid "<p>Select whether the password quality should be verified while passwords are modified or added. Select <b>No Checking</b> if passwords should not be checked at all. With <b>Accept Uncheckable Passwords</b>, passwords are accepted even if the check cannot be performed, for example, if the user has provided an encrypted password. With <b>Only Accept Checked Passwords</b> passwords are refused if the quality test fails or the password cannot be checked.</p>" +msgstr "<p>選取修改或新增密碼時，是否要驗證密碼品質。 如果完全不要檢查密碼，請選取<b>「不檢查」</b>。 設定<b>「接受不可檢查的密碼」</b>時，即使無法檢查密碼 (例如使用者提供加密過的密碼)，也可以接受。 設定<b>「僅接受檢查過的密碼」</b>時，如果密碼品質測試失敗或無法檢查密碼，該密碼就會遭到拒絕。</p>" #. help text for pwdMinLength attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:90 -msgid "" -"Set the minimum number of characters that must be used in a password in " -"<b>Minimum Password Length</b>.</p>" +msgid "Set the minimum number of characters that must be used in a password in <b>Minimum Password Length</b>.</p>" msgstr "在<b>「密碼最短長度」</b>中設定密碼必須使用的最少字元數。</p>" #. help text for pwdMinAge attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:94 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Minimum Password Age</b> sets how much time must pass between " -"modifications to the password.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Minimum Password Age</b> sets how much time must pass between modifications to the password.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>「密碼最短壽命」</b>可設定必須隔多久時間才能修改密碼。</p>" #. help text for pwdMaxAge attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:98 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Maximum Password Age</b> sets how long after modification a password " -"expires.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Maximum Password Age</b> sets how long after modification a password expires.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>「密碼最長壽命」</b>可設定密碼修改多久後就會過期。</p>" #. help text for pwdExpireWarning attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:102 -msgid "" -"<p>In <b>Time before Password Expiration to Issue Warning</b> set how long " -"before a password is due to expire that an expiration warning messages " -"should be given to an authenticating user.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>在<b>「密碼過期前多久需發出警告」</b>中設定要在密碼到期前多久，向正在驗證" -"的使用者顯示警告訊息。</p>" +msgid "<p>In <b>Time before Password Expiration to Issue Warning</b> set how long before a password is due to expire that an expiration warning messages should be given to an authenticating user.</p>" +msgstr "<p>在<b>「密碼過期前多久需發出警告」</b>中設定要在密碼到期前多久，向正在驗證的使用者顯示警告訊息。</p>" #. help text for pwdGraceAuthNLimit attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:106 -msgid "" -"<p>Set the number of times an expired password can be used to authenticate " -"in <b>Allowed Uses of an Expired Password</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>在<b>「過期密碼的允許使用次數」</b>中設定過期密碼還能用來驗證的次數。</p>" +msgid "<p>Set the number of times an expired password can be used to authenticate in <b>Allowed Uses of an Expired Password</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>在<b>「過期密碼的允許使用次數」</b>中設定過期密碼還能用來驗證的次數。</p>" #. help text for pwdLockout attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:110 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Enable Password Locking</b> to forbid use of a password after a " -"specified number of consecutive failed bind attempts.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>核取<b>「啟用密碼鎖定」</b>可在嘗試結合但連續失敗達指定次數後，禁止使用某" -"密碼。</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Enable Password Locking</b> to forbid use of a password after a specified number of consecutive failed bind attempts.</p>" +msgstr "<p>核取<b>「啟用密碼鎖定」</b>可在嘗試結合但連續失敗達指定次數後，禁止使用某密碼。</p>" #. help text for pwdMaxFailure attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:114 -msgid "" -"<p>Set the number of consecutive failed bind attempts after which the " -"password may not be used to authenticate in <b>Bind Failures to Lock the " -"Password</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>在<b>「結合失敗幾次後需鎖定密碼？」</b>中設定嘗試結合但連續失敗達幾次後，" -"即不得使用該密碼進行驗證。</p>" +msgid "<p>Set the number of consecutive failed bind attempts after which the password may not be used to authenticate in <b>Bind Failures to Lock the Password</b>.</p>" +msgstr "<p>在<b>「結合失敗幾次後需鎖定密碼？」</b>中設定嘗試結合但連續失敗達幾次後，即不得使用該密碼進行驗證。</p>" #. help text for pwdLockoutDuration attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:118 -msgid "" -"<p>Set how long the password cannot be used in <b>Password Lock Duration</b>." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>Set how long the password cannot be used in <b>Password Lock Duration</b>.</p>" msgstr "<p>在<b>「密碼鎖定持續時間」</b>中設定不得使用該密碼的時間長度。</p>" #. help text for pwdFailureCountInterval attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:122 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Bind Failures Cache Duration</b> sets how long before password " -"failures are purged from the failure counter even though no successful " -"authentication has occurred.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>「結合失敗快取持續時間」</b>可設定密碼失敗多久後 (即使沒有任何一次驗證" -"成功)，即需清除失敗計數器。</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Bind Failures Cache Duration</b> sets how long before password failures are purged from the failure counter even though no successful authentication has occurred.</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>「結合失敗快取持續時間」</b>可設定密碼失敗多久後 (即使沒有任何一次驗證成功)，即需清除失敗計數器。</p>" #. tab label #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:171 @@ -2756,8 +2562,7 @@ #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:675 msgid "" "<p>Press <b>Configure</b> to configure settings stored on the\n" -"LDAP server. You will be asked for the password if you are not connected yet " -"or\n" +"LDAP server. You will be asked for the password if you are not connected yet or\n" "have changed your configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>按<b>「設定」</b>可設定儲存在\n" @@ -2772,12 +2577,10 @@ #. password policy help #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:683 msgid "" -"<p>Configure the selected password policy with <b>Edit</b>. Use <b>Add</b> " -"to add a new password policy. The configuration is only possible,\n" +"<p>Configure the selected password policy with <b>Edit</b>. Use <b>Add</b> to add a new password policy. The configuration is only possible,\n" " if the password policies are already enabled on the LDAP server.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>請以<b>「編輯」</b>設定已選取的密碼規則。 請使用<b>「新增」</b>加入新的密" -"碼規則。\n" +"<p>請以<b>「編輯」</b>設定已選取的密碼規則。 請使用<b>「新增」</b>加入新的密碼規則。\n" "只有在 LDAP 伺服器已啟用密碼規則時才能進行組態。</p>" #. checkbox label @@ -3062,8 +2865,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "Choose a password encryption method for local and system users.\n" -"<b>DES</b>, the Linux default method, works in all network environments, but " -"it\n" +"<b>DES</b>, the Linux default method, works in all network environments, but it\n" "restricts passwords to eight characters or less.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -3109,8 +2911,7 @@ #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:586 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<p>It seems that you are running a NIS server. In some network " -"environments,\n" +"<p>It seems that you are running a NIS server. In some network environments,\n" "you might be unable to log in to a NIS client when a user password is\n" "encrypted with a method other than DES.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -3142,18 +2943,14 @@ #. helptext 2/4 #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:730 -msgid "" -"<p>Here, extend the search filters for users and groups beyond the default " -"search filters.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>您可以在此處針對使用者和群組，延伸預設搜尋過濾器之外的搜尋過濾。</p>" +msgid "<p>Here, extend the search filters for users and groups beyond the default search filters.</p>" +msgstr "<p>您可以在此處針對使用者和群組，延伸預設搜尋過濾器之外的搜尋過濾。</p>" #. helptext 3/4 #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:734 msgid "" "<p>With <b>Default</b>, load the default filter from the user and group\n" -"configuration modules saved on the LDAP server (values of 'suseSearchFilter' " -"attributes).\n" +"configuration modules saved on the LDAP server (values of 'suseSearchFilter' attributes).\n" "If you are not connected yet, you are prompted for the password.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>藉由<b>「預設」</b>，從儲存在 LDAP 伺服器上的使用者與群組組態模組，\n" @@ -3255,8 +3052,7 @@ #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:969 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"The features described below are only available if you are using KDM or GDM " -"as the login manager.\n" +"The features described below are only available if you are using KDM or GDM as the login manager.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -3267,8 +3063,7 @@ #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:975 msgid "" "<p><b>Auto Login</b><br>\n" -"By setting <b>Auto Login</b>, skip the login procedure. The user chosen from " -"the list is logged in automatically.</p>\n" +"By setting <b>Auto Login</b>, skip the login procedure. The user chosen from the list is logged in automatically.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>「自動登入」</b><br>\n" "啟用<b>「自動登入」</b>，會略過登入程序。清單中選取的使用者會自動登入。</p>\n" @@ -3278,8 +3073,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Passwordless Logins</b><br>\n" "If this option is checked, all users are allowed to log in without entering\n" -"passwords. Otherwise, you are asked for the password even if you set a user " -"to log in automatically.</p>\n" +"passwords. Otherwise, you are asked for the password even if you set a user to log in automatically.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>無密碼登入</b><br>\n" "如果選取這個選項，所有的使用者被允許不需要輸入密碼就可登入。\n" @@ -3447,8 +3241,7 @@ #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1518 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Linux is a multiuser system. Several different users can be logged in to " -"the\n" +"Linux is a multiuser system. Several different users can be logged in to the\n" "system at the same time. To avoid confusion, each user must have\n" "a unique identity. Additionally, every user belongs to at least one group.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -3463,13 +3256,11 @@ #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1535 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Users and groups are arranged in various sets. Change the set currently " -"shown in the table with <b>Set Filter</b>.\n" +"Users and groups are arranged in various sets. Change the set currently shown in the table with <b>Set Filter</b>.\n" "Customize your view with <b>Customize Filter</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"使用者及群組會被安排在不同的組別中。使用<b>「設定過濾器」</b>變更目前在表格中" -"顯示的設定。\n" +"使用者及群組會被安排在不同的組別中。使用<b>「設定過濾器」</b>變更目前在表格中顯示的設定。\n" "<b>使用「自訂過濾器」</b>自訂您的檢視。</p>\n" #. help text 2/3 @@ -3477,16 +3268,14 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "Click <b>Expert Options</b> to edit various expert settings, such as\n" -"password encryption type, user authentication method, default values for " -"new\n" +"password encryption type, user authentication method, default values for new\n" "users, or login settings. With <b>Write Changes Now</b>, save\n" "all changes made so far without exiting the configuration module.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "按一下<b>「專家選項」</b> 編輯不同的專家設定，例如\n" "密碼加密類型、使用者驗證方法、新使用者的\n" -"預設值或登入設定。使用<b>「立即寫入變更」</b>，在不離開組態模組的狀況下，儲" -"存\n" +"預設值或登入設定。使用<b>「立即寫入變更」</b>，在不離開組態模組的狀況下，儲存\n" "目前所做的所有變更。</p>\n" #. help text 3/3, %1 is translated button label @@ -3559,8 +3348,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p>\n" -"Use this dialog to get information about existing groups and add or modify " -"groups.\n" +"Use this dialog to get information about existing groups and add or modify groups.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" @@ -4936,8 +4724,7 @@ #: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:540 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"For the password, use only characters that can be found on an English " -"keyboard\n" +"For the password, use only characters that can be found on an English keyboard\n" "layout. In cases of system error, it may be necessary to log in without a\n" "localized keyboard layout.\n" "</p>" @@ -5150,10 +4937,8 @@ #~ msgstr "eDirectory LDAP(&E)" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>If you are using a NIS or LDAP server to store user data or if you " -#~ "want\n" -#~ "to authenticate users against an NT server, choose the appropriate value." -#~ "</p>" +#~ "<p>If you are using a NIS or LDAP server to store user data or if you want\n" +#~ "to authenticate users against an NT server, choose the appropriate value.</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>如果您使用 NIS 或 LDAP 伺服器來儲存使用者資料，\n" #~ "或者您想要驗證 NT 伺服器的使用者，請選擇適當的值。</p>" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/vm.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/vm.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/vm.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: vm\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-10-06 21:32+0800\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -34,9 +34,7 @@ #. check for kernel-bigsmp #: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:157 -msgid "" -"x86_64 is the only supported architecture for hosting virtual machines. Your " -"architecture is " +msgid "x86_64 is the only supported architecture for hosting virtual machines. Your architecture is " msgstr "" #. we are already in UML, nested virtual machine is not supported @@ -49,7 +47,8 @@ "請在主機中啟動安裝。\n" #. progress stage 1/2 -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:193 +#. Generate a pop dialog to allow user selection of Xen or KVM +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:193 src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:281 msgid "Verify Installed Packages" msgstr "驗證輸入的套件" @@ -65,39 +64,25 @@ #. xen domain0 installation help text - 1/4 #: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:213 -msgid "" -"<p><big><b>VM Server Configuration</b></big></p><p>Configuration of the VM " -"Server (domain 0) has two parts.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><big><b>VM 伺服器組態</b></big></p><p>VM 伺服器的組態 (領域 0) 擁有兩個部" -"分。</p>" +msgid "<p><big><b>VM Server Configuration</b></big></p><p>Configuration of the VM Server (domain 0) has two parts.</p>" +msgstr "<p><big><b>VM 伺服器組態</b></big></p><p>VM 伺服器的組態 (領域 0) 擁有兩個部分。</p>" #. xen domain0 installation help text - 2/4 #: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:217 -msgid "" -"<p>The required packages are installed into the system first. Then the boot " -"loader is switched to GRUB (if not already used) and the Xen section is " -"added to the boot loader menu if it is missing.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>先在系統中安裝需要的套件。 然後將開機載入器切換到 GRUB (如果尚未使用)，並" -"將 Xen 區段新增至開機載入器功能表 (如果已遺失)。</p>" +msgid "<p>The required packages are installed into the system first. Then the boot loader is switched to GRUB (if not already used) and the Xen section is added to the boot loader menu if it is missing.</p>" +msgstr "<p>先在系統中安裝需要的套件。 然後將開機載入器切換到 GRUB (如果尚未使用)，並將 Xen 區段新增至開機載入器功能表 (如果已遺失)。</p>" #. xen domain0 installation help text - 3/4 #: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:221 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>GRUB is needed because it supports the multiboot standard required to " -"boot Xen and the Linux kernel.</p>" +msgid "<p>GRUB is needed because it supports the multiboot standard required to boot Xen and the Linux kernel.</p>" msgstr "<p>需要 GRUB，因為它支援啟動Xen 和 Linux 核心所需的多重開機標準。</p>" #. xen domain0 installation help text - 4/4 #: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:225 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>When the configuration has finished successfully, you can boot the VM " -"Server from the boot loader menu.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>當成功完成組態時，便可以選擇從開機載入器功能表來開機 VM 伺服器。</p>" +msgid "<p>When the configuration has finished successfully, you can boot the VM Server from the boot loader menu.</p>" +msgstr "<p>當成功完成組態時，便可以選擇從開機載入器功能表來開機 VM 伺服器。</p>" #. error popup #: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:230 @@ -138,91 +123,86 @@ msgid "libvirt LXC daemon" msgstr "" -#. Generate a pop dialog to allow user selection of Xen or KVM -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:285 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:288 msgid "Software to connect to Virtualization server" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:287 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:290 #, fuzzy msgid "Virtualization client tools" msgstr "已安裝 Hypervisor 與工具。" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:303 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:306 msgid "Xen Hypervisor" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:305 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:308 msgid "Xen server" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:306 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:309 msgid "Xen tools" msgstr "" #. SLED doesn't have any installation capabilities (L3 support) -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:381 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:384 #, fuzzy msgid "Package installation failed\n" msgstr "安裝即將中止。" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:389 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:392 #, fuzzy msgid "Package installation failed for lxc\n" msgstr "安裝即將中止。" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:396 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:399 msgid "Package installation failed for sled client pattern\n" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:407 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:410 msgid "Package installation failed for sles patterns\n" msgstr "" #. Assume python gtk is installed. If in text mode we don't care -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:420 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:423 msgid "Running in text mode. Install graphical components anyway?" msgstr "在文字模式執行中。無論如何安裝圖形部分嗎？" #. progressbar title - check whether Xen packages are installed -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:433 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:436 msgid "Checking packages..." msgstr "正在檢查套件..." #. progressbar title - install the required packages -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:436 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:439 msgid "Installing packages..." msgstr "正在安裝套件..." #. error popup #. Now see if they really were installed (bnc#508347) -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:441 src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:448 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:444 src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:451 msgid "Cannot install required packages." msgstr "無法安裝所需要的套件。" #. If grub2 is the bootloader and we succesfully installed Xen, update the grub2 files -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:458 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:461 #, fuzzy msgid "Updating grub2 configuration files..." msgstr "正在更新組態檔..." #. Default Bridge stage -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:469 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:474 msgid "Configuring Default Network Bridge..." msgstr "正在設定預設網路橋接..." #. Popup yes/no dialog -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:490 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:495 msgid "Network Bridge." msgstr "網路橋接。" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:491 -msgid "" -"<p>For normal network configurations hosting virtual machines, a network " -"bridge is recommended.</p><p>Configure a default network bridge?</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>對於管理虛擬機器一般網路設定，建議使用網路橋接。</p><p>要設定一個預設網路" -"橋接嗎？</p>" +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:496 +msgid "<p>For normal network configurations hosting virtual machines, a network bridge is recommended.</p><p>Configure a default network bridge?</p>" +msgstr "<p>對於管理虛擬機器一般網路設定，建議使用網路橋接。</p><p>要設定一個預設網路橋接嗎？</p>" #. Firewall stage - modify the firewall setting, add the xen bridge to FW_FORWARD_ALWAYS_INOUT_DEV #. Progress::NextStage(); @@ -233,35 +213,31 @@ #. Report::Error(_("Failed to configure the firewall to allow the Xen bridge") + "\n" + abortmsg); #. return false; #. } -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:551 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:557 msgid "KVM components are installed. Your host is ready to install KVM guests." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:554 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:560 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"KVM components are installed. Reboot the machine and select the native " -"kernel in the boot loader menu to install KVM guests." +msgid "KVM components are installed. Reboot the machine and select the native kernel in the boot loader menu to install KVM guests." msgstr "要安裝 Xen 客戶，重新開機並在開機載入器選單選擇 Xen 區段。\n" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:557 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:563 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"For installing Xen guests, reboot the machine and select the Xen section in " -"the boot loader menu." +msgid "For installing Xen guests, reboot the machine and select the Xen section in the boot loader menu." msgstr "要安裝 Xen 客戶，重新開機並在開機載入器選單選擇 Xen 區段。\n" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:560 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:566 #, fuzzy msgid "Xen Hypervisor and tools are installed." msgstr "已安裝 Hypervisor 與工具。" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:561 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:567 #, fuzzy msgid "Virtualization client tools are installed." msgstr "已安裝 Hypervisor 與工具。" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:562 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:568 #, fuzzy msgid "Libvirt LXC components are installed." msgstr "已安裝 Hypervisor 與工具。" @@ -271,9 +247,7 @@ #~ msgid "Select the virtualization platform to install." #~ msgstr "請選擇要安裝的虛擬平台" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "For installing KVM guests, reboot the machine to load the necessary " -#~ "drivers." +#~ msgid "For installing KVM guests, reboot the machine to load the necessary drivers." #~ msgstr "要安裝 KVM 客戶，重新開機以載入所需的驅動程式。" #~ msgid "Xen Network Bridge." Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/wagon.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/wagon.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/wagon.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -180,9 +180,7 @@ #: src/clients/wagon_dup_repositories.rb:106 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"The installed packages will be switched to the versions available in the " -"selected migration repositories." +msgid "The installed packages will be switched to the versions available in the selected migration repositories." msgstr "" "無法在軟體套件庫找到這些套件：\n" "%1" @@ -271,26 +269,19 @@ msgstr "產品註冊" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:212 -msgid "" -"Registration for product <b>%1</b> has been refunded, the product is not " -"registered." +msgid "Registration for product <b>%1</b> has been refunded, the product is not registered." msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:228 -msgid "" -"Registration for product <b>%1</b> has expired, the registration is not " -"valid anymore." +msgid "Registration for product <b>%1</b> has expired, the registration is not valid anymore." msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:244 -msgid "" -"Registration for product <b>%1</b> is provisional only, no updates available" +msgid "Registration for product <b>%1</b> is provisional only, no updates available" msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:278 -msgid "" -"The registration status is %1 days old. The summary above might not be " -"correct, run registration to update the status." +msgid "The registration status is %1 days old. The summary above might not be correct, run registration to update the status." msgstr "" #. display a critical warning @@ -300,16 +291,12 @@ msgstr "警告：" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:306 -msgid "" -"We strongly recommend to register unregistered or expired products before " -"starting migration." +msgid "We strongly recommend to register unregistered or expired products before starting migration." msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:312 #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:339 -msgid "" -"Migrating an unregistered or partly registered system might result in a " -"broken system." +msgid "Migrating an unregistered or partly registered system might result in a broken system." msgstr "" #. heading text @@ -544,12 +531,8 @@ "要使用指令，請使用 zypper 代替。\n" #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:396 -msgid "" -"Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use " -"xmlfile= command line option." -msgstr "" -"遺失目標檔案名稱 ('xmlfile' 選項)。使用 xmlfile= 指令行選" -"項。" +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use xmlfile= command line option." +msgstr "遺失目標檔案名稱 ('xmlfile' 選項)。使用 xmlfile= 指令行選項。" #. popup heading, with rich text widget and Yes/No buttons #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:453 @@ -558,19 +541,11 @@ #. du contains maps: $[ "dir" : [ total, used, pkgusage, readonly ], .... ] #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:586 -msgid "" -"There is not enough free space to migrate the system using download in " -"advance mode. Partition %1 needs at least %2MB more free disk space. (The " -"needed size is estimated, it is recommended to add slightly more free " -"space.) Add more disk space or disable download in advance mode." +msgid "There is not enough free space to migrate the system using download in advance mode. Partition %1 needs at least %2MB more free disk space. (The needed size is estimated, it is recommended to add slightly more free space.) Add more disk space or disable download in advance mode." msgstr "" #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:613 -msgid "" -"There might not be enough free space for download in advance mode migration. " -"The estimated free space after migration is %2MB, it is recommended to " -"increase the free space in case the estimation is inaccurate to avoid " -"installation errors." +msgid "There might not be enough free space for download in advance mode migration. The estimated free space after migration is %2MB, it is recommended to increase the free space in case the estimation is inaccurate to avoid installation errors." msgstr "" #. 'Product Long Name (product-libzypp-name)' @@ -603,16 +578,13 @@ #. Removing another product might be an issue #. (nevertheless selected by user or directly by YaST) #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:772 -msgid "" -"<font color='red'><b>Warning:</b> Product <b>%1</b> will be removed.</font>" +msgid "<font color='red'><b>Warning:</b> Product <b>%1</b> will be removed.</font>" msgstr "" #. Not selected by user #. @see BNC #575117 #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:792 -msgid "" -"<font color='red'><b>Error:</b> Product <b>%1</b> will be automatically " -"removed.</font>" +msgid "<font color='red'><b>Error:</b> Product <b>%1</b> will be automatically removed.</font>" msgstr "" #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:862 @@ -650,8 +622,7 @@ #. help text #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:945 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>To change the update settings, go to <b>Packages Proposal</b> section.</p>" +msgid "<p>To change the update settings, go to <b>Packages Proposal</b> section.</p>" msgstr "<p>若要改變 URL，請按 <b>「變更...」</b>按鈕。</p>" #. Product removal MUST be confirmed by user, otherwise migration will not continue. Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/wol.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/wol.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/wol.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:37+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2001-06-05 18:04+02:00\n" "Last-Translator: 裴寒牧 \n" "Language-Team: 中華 \n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/xpram.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/xpram.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/xpram.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: xpram\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2008-05-16 20:41+0800\n" "Last-Translator: swyear \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -57,15 +57,8 @@ #. help text for XPRAM 2/4 #: src/include/s390/xpram/ui.rb:53 -msgid "" -"<p>This tool currently only supports assigning the entire XPRAM to one " -"partition. To have multiple partitions, look at \"Device Drivers, Features " -"and Commands November 30, 2004\" for the Linux kernel 2.6 - April 2004 " -"stream.</p><p>In this case disable XPRAM in this module.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>這項工具目前僅支援將整個 XPRAM 指定到單一磁碟區中。若要使用多個磁碟區，請" -"參閱 Linux 核心 2.6 - 2004 年 4 月出版的 Device Drivers, Features and " -"Commands November 30, 2004。</p><p>在目前情況下，請停用本模組的 XPRAM。</p>" +msgid "<p>This tool currently only supports assigning the entire XPRAM to one partition. To have multiple partitions, look at \"Device Drivers, Features and Commands November 30, 2004\" for the Linux kernel 2.6 - April 2004 stream.</p><p>In this case disable XPRAM in this module.</p>" +msgstr "<p>這項工具目前僅支援將整個 XPRAM 指定到單一磁碟區中。若要使用多個磁碟區，請參閱 Linux 核心 2.6 - 2004 年 4 月出版的 Device Drivers, Features and Commands November 30, 2004。</p><p>在目前情況下，請停用本模組的 XPRAM。</p>" #. help text for XPRAM 3/4 #: src/include/s390/xpram/ui.rb:57 Modified: trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/yast2-apparmor.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/yast2-apparmor.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 15:59:55 UTC (rev 89801) +++ trunk/yast/zh_TW/po/yast2-apparmor.zh_TW.po 2014-10-07 16:00:49 UTC (rev 89802) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2-apparmor\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:41+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:51+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2008-05-25 13:57+0800\n" "Last-Translator: swyear \n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional \n" @@ -63,9 +63,7 @@ #. Read the profiles from the SCR agent #: src/clients/AA_DeleteProfile.rb:90 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Make a selection from the listed profiles and press Next to delete the " -"profile." +msgid "Make a selection from the listed profiles and press Next to delete the profile." msgstr "請從列出的設定檔中選擇一個選項，並按下「下一步」，刪除該設定檔。<p>" #: src/clients/AA_DeleteProfile.rb:93 @@ -153,9 +151,7 @@ #. *************************************************************************** #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:52 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"This operation generated the following error. Check your installation and " -"AppArmor profile settings." +msgid "This operation generated the following error. Check your installation and AppArmor profile settings." msgstr "本操作產生下列錯誤。 請檢查您的安裝與 AppArmor 設定檔設定。" #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:91 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:103 @@ -269,13 +265,9 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:441 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<p><b>AppArmor Status</b><br>This reports whether the AppArmor policy " -"enforcement \n" +"<p><b>AppArmor Status</b><br>This reports whether the AppArmor policy enforcement \n" "module is loaded and functioning.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p><b>AppArmor 狀態</b><br>報告 AppArmor 政策執行模組是否已經載入並且在執行" -"中。</p> <p><b>安全事件通知</b><br>如果您希望在發生存取違規時收到電子郵件通" -"知，請設定此工具。</p>" +msgstr "<p><b>AppArmor 狀態</b><br>報告 AppArmor 政策執行模組是否已經載入並且在執行中。</p> <p><b>安全事件通知</b><br>如果您希望在發生存取違規時收到電子郵件通知，請設定此工具。</p>" #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:444 msgid "" @@ -358,9 +350,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:57 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>These problems must be corrected before AppArmor can be started or the " -"profile management tools can be used.</p> " +msgid "<p>These problems must be corrected before AppArmor can be started or the profile management tools can be used.</p> " msgstr "<p>這些問題必須先修正，AppArmor 才能啟動、設定檔管理工具才能使用。</p>" #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:64 @@ -370,12 +360,8 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:70 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>Comprehensive documentation about AppArmor is available in the " -"Administration guide located in the directory: " -msgstr "" -"<p>您可以在使用者指南中找到 AppArmor 完整的相關文件。 您可以在目錄中找到該文" -"件。" +msgid "<p>Comprehensive documentation about AppArmor is available in the Administration guide located in the directory: " +msgstr "<p>您可以在使用者指南中找到 AppArmor 完整的相關文件。 您可以在目錄中找到該文件。" #. encoding: utf-8 #. *************************************************************************** @@ -799,99 +785,68 @@ "<ul><li>In a system with the [_POSIX_CHOWN_RESTRICTED] option defined, \n" "this overrides the restriction of changing file ownership \n" "and group ownership.</li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li>在已定義 [_POSIX_CHOWN_RESTRICTED] 選項的系統中，這會置換變更檔案擁有" -"權和群組擁有權的限制。</li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li>在已定義 [_POSIX_CHOWN_RESTRICTED] 選項的系統中，這會置換變更檔案擁有權和群組擁有權的限制。</li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:43 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<ul><li>Override all DAC access, including ACL execute access if \n" -"[_POSIX_ACL] is defined. Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE." -"</li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li>如果已定義 [_POSIX_ACL]，請置換所有 DAC 存取，包含 ACL 執行存取。 排" -"除 CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE 涵蓋的 DAC 存取。</li></ul>" +"[_POSIX_ACL] is defined. Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE.</li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li>如果已定義 [_POSIX_ACL]，請置換所有 DAC 存取，包含 ACL 執行存取。 排除 CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE 涵蓋的 DAC 存取。</li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:49 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<ul><li>Overrides all DAC restrictions regarding read and search \n" -"on files and directories, including ACL restrictions if [_POSIX_ACL] is " -"defined. \n" +"on files and directories, including ACL restrictions if [_POSIX_ACL] is defined. \n" "Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE. </li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li>如果已定義 [_POSIX_ACL]，請置換有關讀取和搜尋檔案和目錄的所有 DAC 限" -"制，包含 ACL 限制。 排除 CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE 涵蓋的 DAC 存取。 </li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li>如果已定義 [_POSIX_ACL]，請置換有關讀取和搜尋檔案和目錄的所有 DAC 限制，包含 ACL 限制。 排除 CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE 涵蓋的 DAC 存取。 </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:57 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<ul><li>Overrides all restrictions on allowed operations on files, where " -"file\n" +"<ul><li>Overrides all restrictions on allowed operations on files, where file\n" "owner ID must be equal to the user ID, except where CAP_FSETID is\n" "applicable. It does not override MAC and DAC restrictions. </li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li>如果檔案擁有者 ID 必須是使用者 ID，則請置換檔案中與允許作業相關的所有" -"限制，適用 CAP_FSETID 的檔案除外。 不會置換 MAC 和 DAC 限制。 </li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li>如果檔案擁有者 ID 必須是使用者 ID，則請置換檔案中與允許作業相關的所有限制，適用 CAP_FSETID 的檔案除外。 不會置換 MAC 和 DAC 限制。 </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:65 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<ul><li>Overrides the following restrictions: user ID must match the file " -"owner ID when setting the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits on that file; the " -"effective group ID (or one of the supplementary group IDs) must match the " -"file owner ID when setting the S_ISGID bit on that file; the S_ISUID and " -"S_ISGID bits are cleared on successful return from chown(2) (not " -"implemented). </li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li>置換限制如下：在該檔案上設定 S_ISUID 和 S_ISGID 位元時，有效使用者 " -"ID 應與檔案擁有者 ID 相符；在該檔案上設定 S_ISGID 位元時，有效群組 ID (或其中" -"一個補充群組 ID) 應與檔案擁有者 ID 相符；S_ISUID 和 S_ISGID 位元在從 " -"chown(2) 成功傳回的檔案上遭到清除 (未執行)。 </li></ul>" +msgid "<ul><li>Overrides the following restrictions: user ID must match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits on that file; the effective group ID (or one of the supplementary group IDs) must match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISGID bit on that file; the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits are cleared on successful return from chown(2) (not implemented). </li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li>置換限制如下：在該檔案上設定 S_ISUID 和 S_ISGID 位元時，有效使用者 ID 應與檔案擁有者 ID 相符；在該檔案上設定 S_ISGID 位元時，有效群組 ID (或其中一個補充群組 ID) 應與檔案擁有者 ID 相符；S_ISUID 和 S_ISGID 位元在從 chown(2) 成功傳回的檔案上遭到清除 (未執行)。 </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:71 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<ul><li>Overrides the restriction that the real or effective user ID \n" -"of a process sending a signal must match the real or effective user ID of " -"the process \n" +"of a process sending a signal must match the real or effective user ID of the process \n" "receiving the signal.</li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li>置換傳送訊息之程序的實際或有效使用者 ID 必須與接收訊息之程序的實際或" -"有效使用者 ID 相符的限制。</li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li>置換傳送訊息之程序的實際或有效使用者 ID 必須與接收訊息之程序的實際或有效使用者 ID 相符的限制。</li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:79 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<ul><li>Allows setgid(2) manipulation </li> <li> Allows setgroups(2) </li> \n" "<li> Allows forged gids on socket credentials passing. </li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li>允許 setgid(2) 操作 </li> <li> 允許 setgroups(2) </li> <li> 允許 " -"socket 憑證上的假 gid 通過。 </li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li>允許 setgid(2) 操作 </li> <li> 允許 setgroups(2) </li> <li> 允許 socket 憑證上的假 gid 通過。 </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:85 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<ul><li>Allows setuid(2) manipulation (including fsuid) </li> \n" "<li> Allows forged pids on socket credentials passing. </li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li>允許 setuid(2) 處理 (包含 fsuid) </li> <li> 允許 socket 憑證上的假 " -"pid 通過。 </li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li>允許 setuid(2) 處理 (包含 fsuid) </li> <li> 允許 socket 憑證上的假 pid 通過。 </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:91 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<ul><li> Transfer any capability in your permitted set to any pid, \n" "remove any capability in your permitted set from any pid</li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li> 將允許集中的功能傳送到 pid，從 pid 中移除允許集中的功能</li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li> 將允許集中的功能傳送到 pid，從 pid 中移除允許集中的功能</li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:97 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<ul><li>Allows modification of S_IMMUTABLE and S_APPEND file attributes</ul>" +msgid "<ul><li>Allows modification of S_IMMUTABLE and S_APPEND file attributes</li></ul>" msgstr "<ul><li>允許修改 S_IMMUTABLE 和 S_APPEND 檔案屬性</li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:103 @@ -899,9 +854,7 @@ msgid "" "<ul><li>Allows binding to TCP/UDP sockets below 1024 </li> \n" "<li> Allows binding to ATM VCIs below 32</li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li>允許繫結到 1024 以下的 TCP/UDP </li> <li> 允許繫結到 32 以下的 ATM " -"VCI</li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li>允許繫結到 1024 以下的 TCP/UDP </li> <li> 允許繫結到 32 以下的 ATM VCI</li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:109 #, fuzzy @@ -911,8 +864,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:115 msgid "" "<ul><li> Allows interface configuration</li> \n" -"<li> Allows administration of IP firewall, masquerading and accounting \n" +"<li> Allows administration of IP firewall, masquerading and accounting</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting debug option on sockets</li> \n" "<li> Allows modification of routing tables</li>" msgstr "" @@ -920,19 +872,12 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:121 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<li> Allows setting arbitrary process / process group ownership on sockets \n" +"<li> Allows setting arbitrary process / process group ownership on sockets</li> \n" "<li> Allows binding to any address for transparent proxying</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting TOS (type of service)</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting promiscuous mode</li> \n" "<li> Allows clearing driver statistics</li>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li> 允許介面組態</li> <li> 允許管理 IP 防火牆、偽裝和帳戶管理</li> <li> " -"允許在 socket 上設定除錯選項</li> <li> 允許修改路由表格</li> <li> 允許設定任" -"意程序/ 處理 socket 上的群組擁有權</li> <li> 允許繫結到任何透明代理的位址 <li> 允許設定 TOS (服務類型)</li> <li> 允許設定混雜模式</li> <li> 允許清" -"除驅動程式統計資料</li> <li> 允許多路傳播</li> <li> 允許讀取/寫入裝置特定註冊" -"</li> <li> 允許啟動 ATM 控制 socket</li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li> 允許介面組態</li> <li> 允許管理 IP 防火牆、偽裝和帳戶管理</li> <li> 允許在 socket 上設定除錯選項</li> <li> 允許修改路由表格</li> <li> 允許設定任意程序/ 處理 socket 上的群組擁有權</li> <li> 允許繫結到任何透明代理的位址</li> <li> 允許設定 TOS (服務類型)</li> <li> 允許設定混雜模式</li> <li> 允許清除驅動程式統計資料</li> <li> 允許多路傳播</li> <li> 允許讀取/寫入裝置特定註冊</li> <li> 允許啟動 ATM 控制 socket</li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:128 #, fuzzy @@ -941,27 +886,21 @@ "<li> Allows read/write of device-specific registers</li> \n" "<li> Allows activation of ATM control sockets </li>\n" "</ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li> 允許處理系統時鐘</li> <li> 允許 mips 上的 irix_stime</li> <li> 允許" -"設定即時時鐘</li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li> 允許處理系統時鐘</li> <li> 允許 mips 上的 irix_stime</li> <li> 允許設定即時時鐘</li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:137 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<ul><li> Allows use of RAW sockets</li> \n" "<li> Allows use of PACKET sockets </li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li> 允許使用 RAW socket</li> <li> 允許使用 PACKET socket </li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li> 允許使用 RAW socket</li> <li> 允許使用 PACKET socket </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:143 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<ul><li> Allows locking of shared memory segments</li> <li> Allows mlock " -"and\n" +"<ul><li> Allows locking of shared memory segments</li> <li> Allows mlock and\n" "mlockall (which does not really have anything to do with IPC) </li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li> 允許鎖定共用記憶體區段</li> <li> 允許 mlock 和 mlockall (與 IPC 並無" -"實際關聯) </li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li> 允許鎖定共用記憶體區段</li> <li> 允許 mlock 和 mlockall (與 IPC 並無實際關聯) </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:149 msgid "<ul><li> Override IPC ownership checks </li></ul>" @@ -970,21 +909,16 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:153 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<ul><li> Insert and remove kernel modules - modify kernel without limit \n" +"<ul><li> Insert and remove kernel modules - modify kernel without limit</li> \n" "<li> Modify cap_bset </li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li> 插入和移除核心模組 – µL­­¨î¦a­×§ï®Ö¤ß</li> <li> 修改 cap_bset </li>" +msgstr "<ul><li> 插入和移除核心模組 – µL­­¨î¦a­×§ï®Ö¤ß</li> <li> 修改 cap_bset </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:159 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<ul><li> Allows ioperm/iopl access</li> \n" "<li> Allows sending USB messages to any device via /proc/bus/usb </li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li> 允許 ioperm/iopl 存取</li> <li> 允許透過 /proc/bus/usb 將 USB 訊息傳" -"送到任何裝置</li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li> 允許 ioperm/iopl 存取</li> <li> 允許透過 /proc/bus/usb 將 USB 訊息傳送到任何裝置</li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:165 #, fuzzy @@ -1030,8 +964,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:199 msgid "" "<li> Allows removing semaphores</li> \n" -"<li> Used instead of CAP_CHOWN to \"chown\" IPC message queues, semaphores " -"and shared memory</li> \n" +"<li> Used instead of CAP_CHOWN to \"chown\" IPC message queues, semaphores and shared memory</li> \n" "<li> Allows locking/unlocking of shared memory segment</li> \n" "<li> Allows turning swap on/off</li> \n" "<li> Allows forged pids on socket credentials passing</li>" @@ -1042,8 +975,7 @@ "<li> Allows setting read ahead and flushing buffers on block devices</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting geometry in floppy driver</li> \n" "<li> Allows turning DMA on/off in xd driver</li> \n" -"<li> Allows administration of md devices (mostly the above, but some extra " -"ioctls)</li>" +"<li> Allows administration of md devices (mostly the above, but some extra ioctls)</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:212 @@ -1056,8 +988,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:218 msgid "" -"<li> Allows reading non-standardized portions of pci configuration space \n" +"<li> Allows reading non-standardized portions of pci configuration space</li> \n" "<li> Allows DDI debug ioctl on sbpcd driver</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting up serial ports</li> \n" "<li> Allows sending raw qic-117 commands</li>" @@ -1078,42 +1009,29 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:236 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<ul><li> Allows raising priority and setting priority on other (different " -"UID) processes</li> \n" -"<li> Allows use of FIFO and round-robin (realtime) scheduling on own " -"processes and setting \n" +"<ul><li> Allows raising priority and setting priority on other (different UID) processes</li> \n" +"<li> Allows use of FIFO and round-robin (realtime) scheduling on own processes and setting \n" "the scheduling algorithm used by another process.</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting cpu affinity on other processes </li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li> 允許提高優先順序以及在其他 (不同 UID) 程序上設定優先順序</li> <li> " -"允許在專屬程序上使用 FIFO 以及進行輪替式 (即時) 排程，以及使用另一個程序設定" -"排程演算法。</li> <li> 允許在其他程序上設定 cpu 相似性 </li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li> 允許提高優先順序以及在其他 (不同 UID) 程序上設定優先順序</li> <li> 允許在專屬程序上使用 FIFO 以及進行輪替式 (即時) 排程，以及使用另一個程序設定排程演算法。</li> <li> 允許在其他程序上設定 cpu 相似性 </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:245 msgid "" "<ul><li> Override resource limits. Set resource limits.</li> \n" "<li> Override quota limits.</li> \n" "<li> Override reserved space on ext2 filesystem</li> \n" -"<li> Modify data journaling mode on ext3 filesystem (uses journaling " -"resources)</li>" +"<li> Modify data journaling mode on ext3 filesystem (uses journaling resources)</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:251 #, fuzzy msgid "" -"<li> NOTE: ext2 honors fsuid when checking for resource overrides, so you " -"can override using fsuid too</li> \n" +"<li> NOTE: ext2 honors fsuid when checking for resource overrides, so you can override using fsuid too</li> \n" "<li> Override size restrictions on IPC message queues</li> \n" "<li> Allows more than 64hz interrupts from the real-time clock</li> \n" "<li> Override max number of consoles on console allocation</li> \n" "<li> Override max number of keymaps </li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li> 置換資源限制。 資源限制。</li> <li> 置換引號限制。</li> <li> 置換 " -"ext2 檔案系統上的保留空格</li> <li> 修改 ext3 檔案系統上的資料日誌模式 (使用" -"日誌資源)</li> <li> 注意事項： 檢查資源置換時，ext2 相當重視 fsuid，所以您也" -"可以使用 fsuid 進行置換</li> <li> IPC 訊息佇列上的置換大小限制</li> <li> 允許" -"來自即時時鐘 64hz 以上的干擾</li> <li> 置換主控台配置上的主控台數目上限</li> " -"<li> 置換金鑰地圖數目上限 </li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li> 置換資源限制。 資源限制。</li> <li> 置換引號限制。</li> <li> 置換 ext2 檔案系統上的保留空格</li> <li> 修改 ext3 檔案系統上的資料日誌模式 (使用日誌資源)</li> <li> 注意事項： 檢查資源置換時，ext2 相當重視 fsuid，所以您也可以使用 fsuid 進行置換</li> <li> IPC 訊息佇列上的置換大小限制</li> <li> 允許來自即時時鐘 64hz 以上的干擾</li> <li> 置換主控台配置上的主控台數目上限</li> <li> 置換金鑰地圖數目上限 </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:261 #, fuzzy @@ -1121,17 +1039,14 @@ "<ul><li> Allows manipulation of system clock</li> \n" "<li> Allows irix_stime on mips</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting the real-time clock </li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li> 允許處理系統時鐘</li> <li> 允許 mips 上的 irix_stime</li> <li> 允許" -"設定即時時鐘</li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li> 允許處理系統時鐘</li> <li> 允許 mips 上的 irix_stime</li> <li> 允許設定即時時鐘</li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:269 #, fuzzy msgid "" "<ul><li> Allows configuration of tty devices</li> \n" "<li> Allows vhangup() of tty </li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li> 允許 tty 裝置的組態</li> <li> 允許 tty 的 vhangup() </li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li> 允許 tty 裝置的組態</li> <li> 允許 tty 的 vhangup() </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:275 #, fuzzy @@ -1291,8 +1206,7 @@ "individual occurrences, including the date of the last occurrence. \n" "<br>For example:<br> <tt>AppArmor: PERMITTING access to capability\n" "'setgid' (httpd2-prefork(6347) profile /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork \n" -"active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct 9 16:05:54 " -"2004.</tt>\n" +"active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct 9 16:05:54 2004.</tt>\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1357,8 +1271,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:99 msgid "" "<li>Select <b>Include unknown security events</b> if \n" -"you would like to include events that are not rated with a severity number." +"you would like to include events that are not rated with a severity number.</li>" msgstr "" #. ---------------------------- @@ -1369,8 +1282,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:106 msgid "" -"This wizard presents entries generated by the AppArmor access control " -"module. \n" +"This wizard presents entries generated by the AppArmor access control module. \n" "You can generate highly optimized and robust security profiles \n" "by using the suggestions made by AppArmor." msgstr "" @@ -1399,9 +1311,7 @@ msgstr "<p><b>存取伺服器</b></p>" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:126 -msgid "" -"File permission access modes consists of combinations of the following six " -"modes:" +msgid "File permission access modes consists of combinations of the following six modes:" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:129 @@ -1538,14 +1448,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:196 -msgid "" -"<li><b>*</b> can substitute for any number of characters, except '/'<li>" +msgid "<li><b>*</b> can substitute for any number of characters, except '/'<li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:199 -msgid "" -"<li><b>**</b> can substitute for any number of characters, including '/'" +msgid "<li><b>**</b> can substitute for any number of characters, including '/'</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:202 @@ -1553,19 +1460,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:205 -msgid "" -"<li><b>[abc]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" +msgid "<li><b>[abc]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:208 -msgid "" -"<li><b>[a-c]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" +msgid "<li><b>[a-c]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:211 -msgid "" -"<li><b>{ab,cd}</b> will expand to one rule to match ab, one rule to match " -"cd</li>" +msgid "<li><b>{ab,cd}</b> will expand to one rule to match ab, one rule to match cd</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:214 @@ -1581,9 +1484,7 @@ "variables. You will be prompted to choose whether you want to sanitize the\n" "environment if you choose 'p' or 'u' during the profiling process.\n" "The variables are:" -msgstr "" -"<b>*Clean Exec</b><br>個別設定檔的 Clean Exec 選項和未設限的執行權限可提供額" -"外的安全性，方法是藉由移除子程式承襲之環境中的特定變數。 這些變數包括：" +msgstr "<b>*Clean Exec</b><br>個別設定檔的 Clean Exec 選項和未設限的執行權限可提供額外的安全性，方法是藉由移除子程式承襲之環境中的特定變數。 這些變數包括：" #. Globalz #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:55 @@ -1740,23 +1641,15 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:889 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"The profile already contains the provided hat name. Enter a different name " -"or press Abort to cancel this wizard." -msgstr "" -"設定檔已經包含所提供的 Hat 名稱。 請輸入不同的名稱重試一次，或按下「中止」取" -"消此精靈。" +msgid "The profile already contains the provided hat name. Enter a different name or press Abort to cancel this wizard." +msgstr "設定檔已經包含所提供的 Hat 名稱。 請輸入不同的名稱重試一次，或按下「中止」取消此精靈。" #. FIXME: format these texts better #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:928 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p>View and modify the contents of an individual profile. For existing " -"entries double click the permissions to access a modification dialog.</p>" -msgstr "" -"您可以在此表單中檢視和修改個別設定檔的內容。 對於現存的項目，您可以按一下權限" -"來存取修改對話方塊。<p>" +msgid "<p>View and modify the contents of an individual profile. For existing entries double click the permissions to access a modification dialog.</p>" +msgstr "您可以在此表單中檢視和修改個別設定檔的內容。 對於現存的項目，您可以按一下權限來存取修改對話方塊。<p>" #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:933 @@ -1767,18 +1660,12 @@ "a - file append<br>x - execute<br> i - inherit<br> p - discrete profile<br>\n" "P - discrete profile <br> (*clean exec)<br> u - unconstrained<br> \n" "U -unconstrained<br> (*clean exec)</code></p>" -msgstr "" -"<b>權限定義： </b><br><code> r – 讀取 <br> w – 寫入<br>l – 連結<br>m - mmap " -"PROT_EXEC<br>x – 執行<br> i – 承襲<br> p – 個別設定檔<br> P – 個別設定檔 " -"<br> (*Clean Exec)<br> u – 未設限<br> U – 未設限<br> (*clean " -"exec)</code><p>" +msgstr "<b>權限定義： </b><br><code> r – 讀取 <br> w – 寫入<br>l – 連結<br>m - mmap PROT_EXEC<br>x – 執行<br> i – 承襲<br> p – 個別設定檔<br> P – 個別設定檔 <br> (*Clean Exec)<br> u – 未設限<br> U – 未設限<br> (*clean exec)</code><p>" #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:942 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p><b>Add Entry:</b><br>Select the type of resource to add from the drop " -"down list.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Add Entry:</b><br>Select the type of resource to add from the drop down list.</p>" msgstr "<b>新增項目：</b><br>選取要從下拉式清單中新增的資源類型。<p>" #. help text - part x1 @@ -1804,18 +1691,14 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<li><b>Include</b><br>Add an include entry to this profile. This option \n" -"includes the profile entry contents of another file in this profile at load " -"time.</li>" -msgstr "" -"<li><b>包含</b><br>將包含項目新增到此設定檔。 此選項包含此設定檔在載入時間" -"時，另一個檔案的設定檔項目內容。</li>" +"includes the profile entry contents of another file in this profile at load time.</li>" +msgstr "<li><b>包含</b><br>將包含項目新增到此設定檔。 此選項包含此設定檔在載入時間時，另一個檔案的設定檔項目內容。</li>" #. help text - part x5 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:963 msgid "" "<li><b>Network Entry</b><br>Add a network rule entry to this profile. \n" -"This option will allow you to specify network access privileges for the " -"profile. \n" +"This option will allow you to specify network access privileges for the profile. \n" "You may specify a network address family and socket type.</li>" msgstr "" @@ -1824,17 +1707,11 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<li><b>Hat</b><br>Add a sub-profile for this profile, called a Hat. This\n" -"option is analogous to manually creating a new profile, which can be " -"selected\n" +"option is analogous to manually creating a new profile, which can be selected\n" "during execution only in the context of being asked for by a <b>changehat\n" "aware</b> application. \n" -"For more information on changehat, see <b>man changehat</b> on your system " -"or the Novell AppArmor Administration Guide.</li>" -msgstr "" -"<li><b>Hat</b><br>新增此設定檔的子設定檔 – 稱為 Hat。此選項與手動建立新設定檔" -"類似，但只可以在 <b>changehat aware</b> 應用程式要求的內容中執行時進行選取。 " -"如需 changehat 的相關資訊，請參閱系統上的 <b>man changehat</b> 或 Novell " -"AppArmor 使用手冊。</li>" +"For more information on changehat, see <b>man changehat</b> on your system or the Novell AppArmor Administration Guide.</li>" +msgstr "<li><b>Hat</b><br>新增此設定檔的子設定檔 – 稱為 Hat。此選項與手動建立新設定檔類似，但只可以在 <b>changehat aware</b> 應用程式要求的內容中執行時進行選取。 如需 changehat 的相關資訊，請參閱系統上的 <b>man changehat</b> 或 Novell AppArmor 使用手冊。</li>" #. help text - part x7 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:977 @@ -1845,8 +1722,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:982 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"<p><b>Delete Entry:</b><br>Removes the selected entry from this profile.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Delete Entry:</b><br>Removes the selected entry from this profile.</p>" msgstr "<b>刪除項目：</b><br>移除這個設定檔中的選定項目。<p>" #. help text - part y1 @@ -1854,13 +1730,9 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>*Clean Exec</b><br>The Clean Exec option for the discrete profile \n" -"and unconstrained execute permissions provide added security by stripping " -"the environment \n" -"that is inherited by the child program of specific variables. These " -"variables are:" -msgstr "" -"<b>*Clean Exec</b><br>個別設定檔的 Clean Exec 選項和未設限的執行權限可提供額" -"外的安全性，方法是藉由移除子程式承襲之環境中的特定變數。 這些變數包括：" +"and unconstrained execute permissions provide added security by stripping the environment \n" +"that is inherited by the child program of specific variables. These variables are:" +msgstr "<b>*Clean Exec</b><br>個別設定檔的 Clean Exec 選項和未設限的執行權限可提供額外的安全性，方法是藉由移除子程式承襲之環境中的特定變數。 這些變數包括：" #. help text - part y2 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:998 @@ -1924,9 +1796,7 @@ #. Widget activated in the table #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1145 #, fuzzy -msgid "" -"Include entries can not be edited. Select add or delete to manage Include " -"entries." +msgid "Include entries can not be edited. Select add or delete to manage Include entries." msgstr "無法編輯 Include 項目。請選取新增或刪除以管理 Include 項目。" #. Make sure that the entry doesn't already exist @@ -1940,9 +1810,7 @@ msgstr "選取 Include 的檔案" #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1335 -msgid "" -"Invalid #include file. Include files must be located in one of these " -"directories: \n" +msgid "Invalid #include file. Include files must be located in one of these directories: \n" msgstr "無效的 #include 檔案。 包含檔案必須位於下列其中一個目錄： \n" #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1379 @@ -1995,97 +1863,43 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>The Report Configuration dialog enables you to filter the archived \n" #~ "report selected in the previous screen. To filter by <b>Date Range:</b>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "「報告組態」對話方塊可讓您過濾在前一畫面選取的已歸檔報告。 根據<b>日期範圍" -#~ "</b>過濾：<br><br> <ol> <li>按一下<b>根據日期範圍過濾</b>。相關欄位會變成" -#~ "作用中狀態。 <li>請輸入定義報告範圍的開始與結束日期。" +#~ msgstr "「報告組態」對話方塊可讓您過濾在前一畫面選取的已歸檔報告。 根據<b>日期範圍</b>過濾：<br><br> <ol> <li>按一下<b>根據日期範圍過濾</b>。相關欄位會變成作用中狀態。 <li>請輸入定義報告範圍的開始與結束日期。" #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>The View Archive Reports form enables you to view previously " -#~ "generated\n" -#~ "reports located in the /var/log/apparmor/reports-archived directory. Use " -#~ "the checkboxes at the top to narrow-down the category of reports shown in " -#~ "the list to: SIR Reports, AUD Reports or ESS Reports. To see report " -#~ "details, select a report and click the <b>View</b> button.<br><br> You " -#~ "can view reports from one or more systems if you move the reports to the /" -#~ "var/log/apparmor/reports-archived directory.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "「檢視歸檔報告」表單可讓您檢視過去產生 (位於 /var/log/apparmor/reports-" -#~ "archived 目錄) 的報告。表單上方的核取方塊可讓您將清單中所顯示的報告類別範" -#~ "圍縮小為： SIR 報告、AUD 報告或 ESS 報告。 若要參閱報告的詳細資料，請選取" -#~ "報告並按一下<b>「檢視」</b>按鈕。<br><br> 如果您將報告移至 /var/log/" -#~ "apparmor/reports-archived 目錄，則可從一或多個系統檢視報告。" +#~ "<p>The View Archive Reports form enables you to view previously generated\n" +#~ "reports located in the /var/log/apparmor/reports-archived directory. Use the checkboxes at the top to narrow-down the category of reports shown in the list to: SIR Reports, AUD Reports or ESS Reports. To see report details, select a report and click the <b>View</b> button.<br><br> You can view reports from one or more systems if you move the reports to the /var/log/apparmor/reports-archived directory.</p>" +#~ msgstr "「檢視歸檔報告」表單可讓您檢視過去產生 (位於 /var/log/apparmor/reports-archived 目錄) 的報告。表單上方的核取方塊可讓您將清單中所顯示的報告類別範圍縮小為： SIR 報告、AUD 報告或 ESS 報告。 若要參閱報告的詳細資料，請選取報告並按一下<b>「檢視」</b>按鈕。<br><br> 如果您將報告移至 /var/log/apparmor/reports-archived 目錄，則可從一或多個系統檢視報告。" #~ msgid "repConfHelp" #~ msgstr "repConfHelp" #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" -#~ "<ul> <li><b>Policy Exceptions:</b> When an application requests a " -#~ "resource \n" -#~ "that's not defined within its profile, a security event is generated. \n" -#~ "<li><b>Policy Engine State Changes:</b> Enforces policy for applications " -#~ "and \n" -#~ "maintains its own state, including when engines start or stop, when a " -#~ "policy \n" -#~ "is reloaded, and when global security feature are enabled or disabled.</ul> \n" -#~ "Select the report from the archive, then <b>View</b> to see the report " -#~ "details.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<b>安全事件報告 (SIR)：</b>一種報告，可將欲追蹤的事件提供給管理員。SIR 會" -#~ "報告特定期間內違反本機應用程式限制政策的情形。SIR 會報告政策例外及政策引擎" -#~ "狀態變更。這兩種安全事件類型的定義如下： <ul> <li><b>政策例外：<b>當應用程" -#~ "式要求一項並未在設定檔中定義的資源時，將產生安全事件。 <li><b>政策引擎狀態" -#~ "變更：</b>執行應用程式政策並維持其狀態，包括何時啟動或停止引擎、何時重新載" -#~ "入政策，以及何時啟動或停用全域安全性功能。 </ul>從歸檔中選取報告，然後選取" -#~ "<b>「檢視」</b>以參閱報告詳細資料。" +#~ "<ul> <li><b>Policy Exceptions:</b> When an application requests a resource \n" +#~ "that's not defined within its profile, a security event is generated.</li> \n" +#~ "<li><b>Policy Engine State Changes:</b> Enforces policy for applications and \n" +#~ "maintains its own state, including when engines start or stop, when a policy \n" +#~ "is reloaded, and when global security feature are enabled or disabled.</li></ul> \n" +#~ "Select the report from the archive, then <b>View</b> to see the report details.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<b>安全事件報告 (SIR)：</b>一種報告，可將欲追蹤的事件提供給管理員。SIR 會報告特定期間內違反本機應用程式限制政策的情形。SIR 會報告政策例外及政策引擎狀態變更。這兩種安全事件類型的定義如下： <ul> <li><b>政策例外：<b>當應用程式要求一項並未在設定檔中定義的資源時，將產生安全事件。 <li><b>政策引擎狀態變更：</b>執行應用程式政策並維持其狀態，包括何時啟動或停止引擎、何時重新載入政策，以及何時啟動或停用全域安全性功能。 </ul>從歸檔中選取報告，然後選取<b>「檢視」</b>以參閱報告詳細資料。" #, fuzzy -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>Applications Audit Report (AUD):</b> An auditing tool that reports " -#~ "which application servers are running and whether they are confined by " -#~ "AppArmor. Application servers are applications that accept incoming " -#~ "network connections. This report provides the host machine's IP Address, " -#~ "the date the Applications Audit Report ran, the name and path of the " -#~ "unconfined program or application server, the suggested profile or a " -#~ "placeholder for a profile for an unconfined program, the process ID " -#~ "number, the state of the program (confined or unconfined) and the type of " -#~ "confinement that the profile is performing (enforce/complain).</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<b>應用程式稽核報告 (AUD)：</b>一種稽核工具，報告有哪些應用程式伺服器正在" -#~ "執行，以及有哪些受到 AppArmor 的限制。應用程式伺服器是可接受外來網路連線的" -#~ "應用程式。此報告可提供主機的 IP 位址、應用程式稽核報告的執行日期、未設限的" -#~ "程式或應用程式伺服器的名稱與路徑、建議未設限程式採用的設定檔或設定檔佔位" -#~ "符 (placeholder)、程序 ID 號碼、程式狀態 (設限或未設限)、以及設定檔執行的" -#~ "限制類型 (強制/抱怨)。<br><br>" +#~ msgid "<p><b>Applications Audit Report (AUD):</b> An auditing tool that reports which application servers are running and whether they are confined by AppArmor. Application servers are applications that accept incoming network connections. This report provides the host machine's IP Address, the date the Applications Audit Report ran, the name and path of the unconfined program or application server, the suggested profile or a placeholder for a profile for an unconfined program, the process ID number, the state of the program (confined or unconfined) and the type of confinement that the profile is performing (enforce/complain).</p>" +#~ msgstr "<b>應用程式稽核報告 (AUD)：</b>一種稽核工具，報告有哪些應用程式伺服器正在執行，以及有哪些受到 AppArmor 的限制。應用程式伺服器是可接受外來網路連線的應用程式。此報告可提供主機的 IP 位址、應用程式稽核報告的執行日期、未設限的程式或應用程式伺服器的名稱與路徑、建議未設限程式採用的設定檔或設定檔佔位符 (placeholder)、程序 ID 號碼、程式狀態 (設限或未設限)、以及設定檔執行的限制類型 (強制/抱怨)。<br><br>" #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Executive Security Summary (ESS):</b> A combined report, \n" -#~ "consisting of one or more high-level reports from one or more machines. " -#~ "This \n" -#~ "report can provide a single view of security events on multiple machines " -#~ "if each \n" +#~ "consisting of one or more high-level reports from one or more machines. This \n" +#~ "report can provide a single view of security events on multiple machines if each \n" #~ "machine's data is copied to the reports archive directory, which is \n" -#~ "<b>/var/log/apparmor/reports-archived</b>. This report provides the " -#~ "host \n" -#~ "machine's IP address, the start and end dates of the polled events, total " -#~ "number \n" -#~ "of rejects, total number of events, average of severity levels reported, " -#~ "and the \n" -#~ "highest severity level reported. One line of the ESS report represents a " -#~ "range \n" +#~ "<b>/var/log/apparmor/reports-archived</b>. This report provides the host \n" +#~ "machine's IP address, the start and end dates of the polled events, total number \n" +#~ "of rejects, total number of events, average of severity levels reported, and the \n" +#~ "highest severity level reported. One line of the ESS report represents a range \n" #~ "of SIR reports.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<b>執行安全摘要 (ESS)：</b>一種綜合報告，包含來自一或多部電腦的一或多個高" -#~ "階報告。如果各電腦的資料已複製到報告歸檔目錄 (<b>/var/ log/apparmor/" -#~ "reports-archived</b>)，此報告可提供單一檢視畫面，讓您檢視多台電腦上的安全" -#~ "事件， 此報告可提供主機的 IP 位址、獲取事件的開始與結束日期、拒絕事件的總" -#~ "數、事件的總數、報告的平均嚴重性、以及報告的最高嚴重性。ESS 報告的一行會顯" -#~ "示 SIR 報告的範圍。<br><br>" +#~ msgstr "<b>執行安全摘要 (ESS)：</b>一種綜合報告，包含來自一或多部電腦的一或多個高階報告。如果各電腦的資料已複製到報告歸檔目錄 (<b>/var/ log/apparmor/reports-archived</b>)，此報告可提供單一檢視畫面，讓您檢視多台電腦上的安全事件， 此報告可提供主機的 IP 位址、獲取事件的開始與結束日期、拒絕事件的總數、事件的總數、報告的平均嚴重性、以及報告的最高嚴重性。ESS 報告的一行會顯示 SIR 報告的範圍。<br><br>" #~ msgid "Archived Security Incident Report - Page " #~ msgstr "歸檔安全事件報告 - 頁" @@ -2255,8 +2069,7 @@ #, fuzzy #~| msgid "" #~| "<b>AppArmor Security Events</b><p>\n" -#~| " This table displays the events found that match your " -#~| "search criteria." +#~| " This table displays the events found that match your search criteria." #~ msgid "" #~ "<b>AppArmor Security Events</b><p>\n" #~ "This table displays the events that match your search criteria.\n" @@ -2503,12 +2316,8 @@ #~ msgstr "稽核" #, fuzzy -#~| msgid "" -#~| "SubDomain does not appear to be started. Please enable SubDomain and " -#~| "try again." -#~ msgid "" -#~ "AppArmor does not appear to be started. Please enable AppArmor and try " -#~ "again." +#~| msgid "SubDomain does not appear to be started. Please enable SubDomain and try again." +#~ msgid "AppArmor does not appear to be started. Please enable AppArmor and try again." #~ msgstr "子領域似乎未啟動。請啟用子領域並再試一次。" #, fuzzy @@ -2529,28 +2338,20 @@ #~ "Enter an application name to\n" #~ "continue generating a profile or press\n" #~ "Abort to cancel this wizard.\n" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "設定檔已經包含所提供的 Hat 名稱。 請輸入不同的名稱重試一次，或按下「中" -#~ "止」取消此精靈。" +#~ msgstr "設定檔已經包含所提供的 Hat 名稱。 請輸入不同的名稱重試一次，或按下「中止」取消此精靈。" #, fuzzy -#~| msgid "" -#~| "The profile already contains the provided hat name. Please enter a " -#~| "different name to try again, or press Abort to cancel this wizard." +#~| msgid "The profile already contains the provided hat name. Please enter a different name to try again, or press Abort to cancel this wizard." #~ msgid "" #~ "The specified pathname is a directory.\n" #~ "\n" #~ "Enter an application name to\n" #~ "continue generating a profile or press\n" #~ "Abort to cancel this wizard.\n" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "設定檔已經包含所提供的 Hat 名稱。 請輸入不同的名稱重試一次，或按下「中" -#~ "止」取消此精靈。" +#~ msgstr "設定檔已經包含所提供的 Hat 名稱。 請輸入不同的名稱重試一次，或按下「中止」取消此精靈。" #, fuzzy -#~| msgid "" -#~| ". Please enter a different name to try again or press Abort to cancel " -#~| "this wizard." +#~| msgid ". Please enter a different name to try again or press Abort to cancel this wizard." #~ msgid "" #~ "The specified file does not exist.\n" #~ "\n" @@ -2662,37 +2463,24 @@ #~ msgstr "無法開啟 %s。 無法套用變更。" #, fuzzy -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Please refer to this for more detailed information about AppArmor</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Please refer to this for more detailed information about AppArmor</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>請參閱該文件，以取得 AppArmor 的詳細相關資訊</p>" #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "<ul><li>Overrides all restrictions about allowed operations on files,\n" -#~ "where file owner ID must be equal to the user ID, except where CAP_FSETID " -#~ "is \n" +#~ "where file owner ID must be equal to the user ID, except where CAP_FSETID is \n" #~ "applicable. It doesn't override MAC and DAC restrictions. </li></ul>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<ul><li>如果檔案擁有者 ID 必須是使用者 ID，則請置換檔案中與允許作業相關的" -#~ "所有限制，適用 CAP_FSETID 的檔案除外。 不會置換 MAC 和 DAC 限制。 </li>" +#~ msgstr "<ul><li>如果檔案擁有者 ID 必須是使用者 ID，則請置換檔案中與允許作業相關的所有限制，適用 CAP_FSETID 的檔案除外。 不會置換 MAC 和 DAC 限制。 </li></ul>" #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "<ul><li>Overrides the following restrictions that the effective user \n" -#~ "ID shall match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISUID and S_ISGID " -#~ "bits on that \n" -#~ "file; that the effective group ID (or one of the supplementary group IDs) " -#~ "shall match \n" -#~ "the file owner ID when setting the S_ISGID bit on that file; that the " -#~ "S_ISUID and \n" -#~ "S_ISGID bits are cleared on successful return from chown(2) (not " -#~ "implemented). </li></ul>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<ul><li>置換限制如下：在該檔案上設定 S_ISUID 和 S_ISGID 位元時，有效使用" -#~ "者 ID 應與檔案擁有者 ID 相符；在該檔案上設定 S_ISGID 位元時，有效群組 ID " -#~ "(或其中一個補充群組 ID) 應與檔案擁有者 ID 相符；S_ISUID 和 S_ISGID 位元在" -#~ "從 chown(2) 成功傳回的檔案上遭到清除 (未執行)。 </li></ul>" +#~ "ID shall match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits on that \n" +#~ "file; that the effective group ID (or one of the supplementary group IDs) shall match \n" +#~ "the file owner ID when setting the S_ISGID bit on that file; that the S_ISUID and \n" +#~ "S_ISGID bits are cleared on successful return from chown(2) (not implemented). </li></ul>" +#~ msgstr "<ul><li>置換限制如下：在該檔案上設定 S_ISUID 和 S_ISGID 位元時，有效使用者 ID 應與檔案擁有者 ID 相符；在該檔案上設定 S_ISGID 位元時，有效群組 ID (或其中一個補充群組 ID) 應與檔案擁有者 ID 相符；S_ISUID 和 S_ISGID 位元在從 chown(2) 成功傳回的檔案上遭到清除 (未執行)。 </li></ul>" #~ msgid "Please select an action to perform from the buttons below." #~ msgstr "請從下方的按鈕選取要執行的動作。" @@ -2700,14 +2488,10 @@ #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><b>Generate Reports Help</b> <p>If there were, in fact, \n" -#~ "going to be any help for you (which, incidentally, there isn't going to " -#~ "be), \n" -#~ "then you would indeed find said help, here.</p><p>Thank you for your " -#~ "time, \n" +#~ "going to be any help for you (which, incidentally, there isn't going to be), \n" +#~ "then you would indeed find said help, here.</p><p>Thank you for your time, \n" #~ "and have a nice day.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<b>產生報告說明</b> <p>如果真的對您有幫助 (不過剛好不會有用)，那麼您可以在" -#~ "這裡找到說明。<p> 謝謝您特地抽空，再見。" +#~ msgstr "<b>產生報告說明</b> <p>如果真的對您有幫助 (不過剛好不會有用)，那麼您可以在這裡找到說明。<p> 謝謝您特地抽空，再見。" #~ msgid "Weds" #~ msgstr "星期三" @@ -2741,31 +2525,14 @@ #~ msgid "Abo(r)t" #~ msgstr "中止(R)" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>Profile Mode Configuration</b><br>This tool allows you to set " -#~ "AppArmor profiles to either complain or enforce mode.</p><p>Complain mode " -#~ "is a profile training state that logs application activity, but does not " -#~ "restrict the application's behavior.</p><p>Profiles in enforce mode are " -#~ "protected by AppArmor.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p><b>設定檔模式組態</b><br>此工具可讓將 AppArmor 設定檔設定為抱怨模式或強" -#~ "制模式。</p><p>抱怨模式是一種設定檔訓練狀態，可記錄應用程式的活動，但不會" -#~ "限制應用程式的行為。</p><p>強制模式中的設定檔由 AppArmor 所保護。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p><b>Profile Mode Configuration</b><br>This tool allows you to set AppArmor profiles to either complain or enforce mode.</p><p>Complain mode is a profile training state that logs application activity, but does not restrict the application's behavior.</p><p>Profiles in enforce mode are protected by AppArmor.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p><b>設定檔模式組態</b><br>此工具可讓將 AppArmor 設定檔設定為抱怨模式或強制模式。</p><p>抱怨模式是一種設定檔訓練狀態，可記錄應用程式的活動，但不會限制應用程式的行為。</p><p>強制模式中的設定檔由 AppArmor 所保護。</p>" #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ " <b>AppArmor Profiling Wizard</b><br>\n" -#~ " This wizard presents entries generated by the AppArmor access " -#~ "control module. You can generate highly optimized and robust security " -#~ "profiles by using the suggestions made by AppArmor. AppArmor suggests " -#~ "that you allow or deny access to specific resources or define execute " -#~ "permission for entries. These questions that display were logged during " -#~ "the normal application execution test previously performed. <br>\n" -#~ " The following help text describes the detail of the security " -#~ "profile syntax used by AppArmor. <br><br>At any stage, you may customize " -#~ "the profile entry by changing the suggested response. This overview will " -#~ "assist you in your options. Refer to the Novell AppArmor Administration " -#~ "Guide for step-by-step instructions. <br><br>\n" +#~ " This wizard presents entries generated by the AppArmor access control module. You can generate highly optimized and robust security profiles by using the suggestions made by AppArmor. AppArmor suggests that you allow or deny access to specific resources or define execute permission for entries. These questions that display were logged during the normal application execution test previously performed. <br>\n" +#~ " The following help text describes the detail of the security profile syntax used by AppArmor. <br><br>At any stage, you may customize the profile entry by changing the suggested response. This overview will assist you in your options. Refer to the Novell AppArmor Administration Guide for step-by-step instructions. <br><br>\n" #~ " <b>Access Modes</b><br>\n" #~ "\n" #~ " File permission access modes consists of combinations of\n" @@ -2851,21 +2618,16 @@ #~ "\t<li><b>*</b> can substitute for any number of characters, excepting\n" #~ " '/'<li>\n" #~ "\n" -#~ " \t<li><b>**</b> can substitute for any number of characters, " -#~ "including '/'</li>\n" +#~ " \t<li><b>**</b> can substitute for any number of characters, including '/'</li>\n" #~ "\n" #~ "\n" -#~ " <li><b>?</b> can substitute for any single character excepting " -#~ "'/'</li>\n" +#~ " <li><b>?</b> can substitute for any single character excepting '/'</li>\n" #~ "\n" -#~ " <li><b>[abc]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or " -#~ "c</li>\n" +#~ " <li><b>[abc]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>\n" #~ "\n" -#~ " <li><b>[a-c]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or " -#~ "c</li>\n" +#~ " <li><b>[a-c]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>\n" #~ "\n" -#~ " <li><b>{ab,cd}</b> will expand to one rule to match ab, one rule " -#~ "to match\n" +#~ " <li><b>{ab,cd}</b> will expand to one rule to match ab, one rule to match\n" #~ " cd</li>\n" #~ "\n" #~ " </ul>\n" @@ -2875,14 +2637,11 @@ #~ " <b>Clean Exec - for sanitized execution</b>\n" #~ " <br>\n" #~ " <br>\n" -#~ " The Clean Exec option for the discrete profile and " -#~ "unconstrained \n" +#~ " The Clean Exec option for the discrete profile and unconstrained \n" #~ " execute permissions provide added security by stripping the \n" #~ " environment that is inherited by the child program of specific \n" -#~ " variables. You will be prompted to choose whether you want to " -#~ "sanitize the\n" -#~ " enviroment if you choose 'p' or 'u' during the profiling " -#~ "process.\n" +#~ " variables. You will be prompted to choose whether you want to sanitize the\n" +#~ " enviroment if you choose 'p' or 'u' during the profiling process.\n" #~ " The variables are:\n" #~ " <ul> \n" #~ " <li>GCONV_PATH</li>\n" @@ -2908,13 +2667,8 @@ #~ " <li>TZDIR</li> </ul>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ " <b>AppArmor 設定檔精靈</b><br>\n" -#~ " 本精靈顯示 AppArmor 存取控制模組產生的項目。 使用 AppArmor 的建議，" -#~ "就能產生高度最佳化且穩固的安全性設定檔。 AppArmor 能建議您允許或拒絕他人存" -#~ "取特定資源，或定義項目的執行許可。 這些所顯示的問題，已在之前執行正常應用" -#~ "程式執行測試時加以記錄。 <br>\n" -#~ " 下列說明文字描述 AppArmor 使用的安全性設定檔語法詳細資料。 " -#~ "<br><br>您可在任何階段變更建議的回應，以自定設定檔項目。 本綜覽可協助您設" -#~ "定選項。 如需按部就班的指示，請參考《管理指南》。\n" +#~ " 本精靈顯示 AppArmor 存取控制模組產生的項目。 使用 AppArmor 的建議，就能產生高度最佳化且穩固的安全性設定檔。 AppArmor 能建議您允許或拒絕他人存取特定資源，或定義項目的執行許可。 這些所顯示的問題，已在之前執行正常應用程式執行測試時加以記錄。 <br>\n" +#~ " 下列說明文字描述 AppArmor 使用的安全性設定檔語法詳細資料。 <br><br>您可在任何階段變更建議的回應，以自定設定檔項目。 本綜覽可協助您設定選項。 如需按部就班的指示，請參考《管理指南》。\n" #~ " <br><br>\n" #~ " <b>存取模式</b><br>\n" #~ " \n" @@ -3052,17 +2806,8 @@ #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ " <b>AppArmor Profiling Wizard</b><br>\n" -#~ " This wizard presents entries generated by the AppArmor access " -#~ "control module. You can generate highly optimized and robust security " -#~ "profiles by using the suggestions made by AppArmor. AppArmor suggests " -#~ "that you allow or deny access to specific resources or define execute " -#~ "permission for entries. These questions that display were logged during " -#~ "the normal application execution test previously performed. <br>\n" -#~ " The following help text describes the detail of the security " -#~ "profile syntax used by AppArmor. <br><br>At any stage, you may customize " -#~ "the profile entry by overriding the suggestion. This overview will assist " -#~ "you in your options. Refer to the Novell AppArmor Administration Guide " -#~ "for step-by-step instructions.<br><br>\n" +#~ " This wizard presents entries generated by the AppArmor access control module. You can generate highly optimized and robust security profiles by using the suggestions made by AppArmor. AppArmor suggests that you allow or deny access to specific resources or define execute permission for entries. These questions that display were logged during the normal application execution test previously performed. <br>\n" +#~ " The following help text describes the detail of the security profile syntax used by AppArmor. <br><br>At any stage, you may customize the profile entry by overriding the suggestion. This overview will assist you in your options. Refer to the Novell AppArmor Administration Guide for step-by-step instructions.<br><br>\n" #~ "\n" #~ " <b>Access Modes</b><br>\n" #~ "\n" @@ -3114,8 +2859,7 @@ #~ " This mode is useful when a confined program needs to\n" #~ " be able to perform a privileged operation, such as\n" #~ " rebooting the machine. By placing the privileged section\n" -#~ " in another executable and granting unconfined execution " -#~ "rights,\n" +#~ " in another executable and granting unconfined execution rights,\n" #~ "\t it is possible to bypass the mandatory\n" #~ " constraints imposed on all confined processes.\n" #~ " For more information on what is constrained, see the\n" @@ -3147,22 +2891,16 @@ #~ " <br>\n" #~ "\n" #~ " <ul>\n" -#~ " <li><b>*</b> can substitute for any number of characters, " -#~ "excepting\n" +#~ " <li><b>*</b> can substitute for any number of characters, excepting\n" #~ " '/'<li>\n" #~ "\n" -#~ " <li><b>**</b> can substitute for any number of characters, " -#~ "including '/'</li>\n" +#~ " <li><b>**</b> can substitute for any number of characters, including '/'</li>\n" #~ "\n" #~ "\n" -#~ " <li><b>?</b> can substitute for any single character excepting " -#~ "'/'</li>\n" -#~ " <li><b>[abc]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or " -#~ "c</li>\n" -#~ " <li><b>[a-c]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or " -#~ "c</li>\n" -#~ " <li><b>{ab,cd}</b> will expand to one rule to match ab, one rule " -#~ "to match cd</li>\n" +#~ " <li><b>?</b> can substitute for any single character excepting '/'</li>\n" +#~ " <li><b>[abc]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>\n" +#~ " <li><b>[a-c]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>\n" +#~ " <li><b>{ab,cd}</b> will expand to one rule to match ab, one rule to match cd</li>\n" #~ "\n" #~ " </ul>\n" #~ "\n" @@ -3171,14 +2909,11 @@ #~ " <b>Clean Exec - for sanitized execution</b>\n" #~ " <br>\n" #~ " <br>\n" -#~ " The Clean Exec option for the discrete profile and " -#~ "unconstrained \n" +#~ " The Clean Exec option for the discrete profile and unconstrained \n" #~ " execute permissions provide added security by stripping the \n" #~ " enviroment that is inherited by the child program of specific \n" -#~ " variables. You will be prompted to choose whether you want to " -#~ "sanitize the\n" -#~ " environment if you choose 'p' or 'u' during the profiling " -#~ "process.\n" +#~ " variables. You will be prompted to choose whether you want to sanitize the\n" +#~ " environment if you choose 'p' or 'u' during the profiling process.\n" #~ " The variables are:\n" #~ " <ul> \n" #~ " <li>GCONV_PATH</li>\n" @@ -3205,13 +2940,8 @@ #~ "\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ " <b>AppArmor 設定檔精靈</b><br>\n" -#~ " 本精靈顯示 AppArmor 存取控制模組產生的項目。 使用 AppArmor 的建議，" -#~ "就能產生高度最佳化且穩固的安全性設定檔。 AppArmor 能建議您允許或拒絕他人存" -#~ "取特定資源，或定義項目的執行許可。 這些所顯示的問題，已在之前執行正常應用" -#~ "程式執行測試時加以記錄。 <br>\n" -#~ " 下列說明文字描述 AppArmor 使用的安全性設定檔語法詳細資料。 " -#~ "<br><br>您可在任何階段置換建議，以自定設定檔項目。 本綜覽可協助您設定選" -#~ "項。 如需按部就班的指示，請參考《管理指南》。\n" +#~ " 本精靈顯示 AppArmor 存取控制模組產生的項目。 使用 AppArmor 的建議，就能產生高度最佳化且穩固的安全性設定檔。 AppArmor 能建議您允許或拒絕他人存取特定資源，或定義項目的執行許可。 這些所顯示的問題，已在之前執行正常應用程式執行測試時加以記錄。 <br>\n" +#~ " 下列說明文字描述 AppArmor 使用的安全性設定檔語法詳細資料。 <br><br>您可在任何階段置換建議，以自定設定檔項目。 本綜覽可協助您設定選項。 如需按部就班的指示，請參考《管理指南》。\n" #~ " <br><br>\n" #~ " \n" #~ " <b>存取模式</b><br>\n" @@ -3305,8 +3035,7 @@ #~ " <li><b>?</b> 可取代任何單一字元，除了「/」</li>\n" #~ " <li><b>[abc]</b> 將取代 a、b 或 c 之單一字元</li>\n" #~ " <li><b>[a-c]</b> 將取代 a、b 或 c 之單一字元</li>\n" -#~ " <li><b>{ab,cd}</b> 將擴充成一條相符 ab 的規則、一條相符 cd 的規則" -#~ "</li>\n" +#~ " <li><b>{ab,cd}</b> 將擴充成一條相符 ab 的規則、一條相符 cd 的規則</li>\n" #~ " \n" #~ " </ul>\n" #~ " \n" @@ -3345,303 +3074,30 @@ #~ " <li>TZDIR</li> </ul>\n" #~ " \n" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<ul><li> Allow configuration of the secure attention key</li> <li> Allow " -#~ "administration of the random device</li> <li> Allow examination and " -#~ "configuration of disk quotas</li> <li> Allow configuring the kernel's " -#~ "syslog (printk behaviour)</li> <li> Allow setting the domain name</li> " -#~ "<li> Allow setting the hostname</li> <li> Allow calling bdflush()</li> " -#~ "<li> Allow mount() and umount(), setting up new smb connection</li> <li> " -#~ "Allow some autofs root ioctls</li> <li> Allow nfsservctl</li> <li> Allow " -#~ "VM86_REQUEST_IRQ</li> <li> Allow to read/write pci config on alpha</li> " -#~ "<li> Allow irix_prctl on mips (setstacksize)</li> <li> Allow flushing all " -#~ "cache on m68k (sys_cacheflush)</li> <li> Allow removing semaphores</li> " -#~ "<li> Used instead of CAP_CHOWN to \"chown\" IPC message queues, " -#~ "semaphores and shared memory</li> <li> Allow locking/unlocking of shared " -#~ "memory segment</li> <li> Allow turning swap on/off</li> <li> Allow forged " -#~ "pids on socket credentials passing</li> <li> Allow setting read ahead and " -#~ "flushing buffers on block devices</li> <li> Allow setting geometry in " -#~ "floppy driver</li> <li> Allow turning DMA on/off in xd driver</li> <li> " -#~ "Allow administration of md devices (mostly the above, but some extra " -#~ "ioctls)</li> <li> Allow tuning the ide driver</li> <li> Allow access to " -#~ "the nvram device</li> <li> Allow administration of apm_bios, serial and " -#~ "bttv (TV) device</li> <li> Allow manufacturer commands in isdn CAPI " -#~ "support driver</li> <li> Allow reading non-standardized portions of pci " -#~ "configuration space</li> <li> Allow DDI debug ioctl on sbpcd driver</li> " -#~ "<li> Allow setting up serial ports</li> <li> Allow sending raw qic-117 " -#~ "commands</li> <li> Allow enabling/disabling tagged queuing on SCSI " -#~ "controllers and sending arbitrary SCSI commands</li> <li> Allow setting " -#~ "encryption key on loopback filesystem </li></ul>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<ul><li> 允許設定安全警告金鑰的組態</li> <li> 允許管理隨機裝置</li> <li> " -#~ "允許檢查和設定磁碟引號</li> <li> 允許建立核心 syslog (printk 行為) 的組態" -#~ "</li> <li> 允許設定網域名稱</li> <li> 允許設定主機名稱</li> <li> Allow " -#~ "calling bdflush()</li> <li> 允許 mount() 和 umount() 安裝新的 smb 連線 <li> 允許一些 autofs 根 ioctls</li> <li> 允許 nfsservctl</li> <li> 允" -#~ "許 VM86_REQUEST_IRQ</li> <li> 允許讀取/寫入 Alpha 上的 pci config </li> " -#~ "<li> 允許 mips (setstacksize) 上的 irix_prctl </li> <li> 允許清除 m68k " -#~ "(sys_cacheflush) 上的所有快取</li> <li> 允許移除信號</li> <li> 不將 " -#~ "CAP_CHOWN 用於 \"chown\" IPC 訊息佇列，而改用信號和共用記憶體</li> <li> 允" -#~ "許鎖定/解除鎖定共用記憶體區段</li> <li> 允許開啟/關閉交換</li> <li> 允許 " -#~ "socket 憑證上的假 pid 通過</li> <li> 允許設定預先讀取和清除區塊裝置上的緩" -#~ "衝區</li> <li> 允許設定磁片中的規格</li> <li> 允許在 xd 驅動程式中開啟/關" -#~ "閉 DMA</li> <li> 允許管理 md 裝置 (大部分是上述提及的裝置，但仍有其他的 " -#~ "ioctls)</li> <li> 允許微調 ide 驅動程式</li> <li> 允許存取 nvram 裝置 <li> 允許管理 apm_bios、序列和 bttv (TV) 裝置</li> <li> 允許在 isdn " -#~ "CAPI 支援驅動程式中制定指令</li> <li> 允許讀取 pci 組態空間中的非標準部分" -#~ "</li> <li> 允許 sbpcd 驅動程式中的 DDI 除錯 ioctl</li> <li> 允許安裝序列" -#~ "連接埠</li> <li> 允許傳送原始 qic-117 指令</li> <li> 允許啟用/停用 SCSI 控" -#~ "制器上的標記佇列並傳送任意 SCSI 指令</li> <li> 允許在回送檔案系統上設定加" -#~ "密金鑰 </li></ul>" +#~ msgid "<ul><li> Allow configuration of the secure attention key</li> <li> Allow administration of the random device</li> <li> Allow examination and configuration of disk quotas</li> <li> Allow configuring the kernel's syslog (printk behaviour)</li> <li> Allow setting the domain name</li> <li> Allow setting the hostname</li> <li> Allow calling bdflush()</li> <li> Allow mount() and umount(), setting up new smb connection</li> <li> Allow some autofs root ioctls</li> <li> Allow nfsservctl</li> <li> Allow VM86_REQUEST_IRQ</li> <li> Allow to read/write pci config on alpha</li> <li> Allow irix_prctl on mips (setstacksize)</li> <li> Allow flushing all cache on m68k (sys_cacheflush)</li> <li> Allow removing semaphores</li> <li> Used instead of CAP_CHOWN to \"chown\" IPC message queues, semaphores and shared memory</li> <li> Allow locking/unlocking of shared memory segment</li> <li> Allow turning swap on/off</li> <li> Allow forged pids on socket credentials passing</li> <li> Allow setting read ahead and flushing buffers on block devices</li> <li> Allow setting geometry in floppy driver</li> <li> Allow turning DMA on/off in xd driver</li> <li> Allow administration of md devices (mostly the above, but some extra ioctls)</li> <li> Allow tuning the ide driver</li> <li> Allow access to the nvram device</li> <li> Allow administration of apm_bios, serial and bttv (TV) device</li> <li> Allow manufacturer commands in isdn CAPI support driver</li> <li> Allow reading non-standardized portions of pci configuration space</li> <li> Allow DDI debug ioctl on sbpcd driver</li> <li> Allow setting up serial ports</li> <li> Allow sending raw qic-117 commands</li> <li> Allow enabling/disabling tagged queuing on SCSI controllers and sending arbitrary SCSI commands</li> <li> Allow setting encryption key on loopback filesystem </li></ul>" +#~ msgstr "<ul><li> 允許設定安全警告金鑰的組態</li> <li> 允許管理隨機裝置</li> <li> 允許檢查和設定磁碟引號</li> <li> 允許建立核心 syslog (printk 行為) 的組態</li> <li> 允許設定網域名稱</li> <li> 允許設定主機名稱</li> <li> Allow calling bdflush()</li> <li> 允許 mount() 和 umount() 安裝新的 smb 連線</li> <li> 允許一些 autofs 根 ioctls</li> <li> 允許 nfsservctl</li> <li> 允許 VM86_REQUEST_IRQ</li> <li> 允許讀取/寫入 Alpha 上的 pci config </li> <li> 允許 mips (setstacksize) 上的 irix_prctl </li> <li> 允許清除 m68k (sys_cacheflush) 上的所有快取</li> <li> 允許移除信號</li> <li> 不將 CAP_CHOWN 用於 \"chown\" IPC 訊息佇列，而改用信號和共用記憶體</li> <li> 允許鎖定/解除鎖定共用記憶體區段</li> <li> 允許開啟/關閉交換</li> <li> 允許 socket 憑證上的假 pid 通過</li> <li> 允許設定預先讀取和清除區塊裝置上的緩衝區</li> <li> � ��許設定磁片中的規格</li> <li> 允許在 xd 驅動程式中開啟/關閉 DMA</li> <li> 允許管理 md 裝置 (大部分是上述提及的裝置，但仍有其他的 ioctls)</li> <li> 允許微調 ide 驅動程式</li> <li> 允許存取 nvram 裝置</li> <li> 允許管理 apm_bios、序列和 bttv (TV) 裝置</li> <li> 允許在 isdn CAPI 支援驅動程式中制定指令</li> <li> 允許讀取 pci 組態空間中的非標準部分</li> <li> 允許 sbpcd 驅動程式中的 DDI 除錯 ioctl</li> <li> 允許安裝序列連接埠</li> <li> 允許傳送原始 qic-117 指令</li> <li> 允許啟用/停用 SCSI 控制器上的標記佇列並傳送任意 SCSI 指令</li> <li> 允許在回送檔案系統上設定加密金鑰 </li></ul>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "The Security Event Notification screen enables you to setup email alerts " -#~ "for security events. In the following steps, specify how often alerts are " -#~ "sent, who receives the alert, and how severe the security event must be " -#~ "to send an alert. <br><br><b>Notification Types</b><br> <b>Terse " -#~ "Notification:</b> Terse notification summarizes the total number of " -#~ "system events without providing details. <br>For example:<br> dhcp-101." -#~ "up.wirex.com has had 10 security events since Tue Oct 12 11:10:00 " -#~ "2004<br><br> <b>Summary Notification:</b> The Summary notification " -#~ "displays the logged AppArmor security events, and lists the number of " -#~ "individual occurrences, including the date of the last occurrence. " -#~ "<br>For example:<br> SubDomain: PERMITTING access to capability " -#~ "'setgid' (httpd2-prefork(6347) profile /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork active /" -#~ "usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct 9 16:05:54 2004." -#~ "<br><br> <b>Verbose Notification:</b> The Verbose notification displays " -#~ "unmodified, logged AppArmor security events. It tells you every time an " -#~ "event occurs and writes a new line in the Verbose log. These security " -#~ "events include the date and time the event occurred, when the " -#~ "application profile permits access as well as rejects access, and the " -#~ "type of file permission access that is permitted or rejected. Verbose " -#~ "Notification also reports several messages that the logprof tool uses to " -#~ "interpret profiles. <br>For example:<br> Oct 9 15:40:31 SubDomain: " -#~ "PERMITTING r access to /etc/apache2/httpd.conf (httpd2-prefork(6068) " -#~ "profile /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) <li>Select <b>Include unknown security events</b> if you would like " -#~ "to include events that are not rated with a severity number.</li> </ol>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "「安全性事件通知」畫面可以用來設定安全性事件的電子郵件警示。請依照下面步驟" -#~ "執行，指定警示的發出頻率、哪些人員要接收警示，以及在哪種安全性事件嚴重程度" -#~ "時必須發出警示。<br><br><b>通知類型</b><br> <b>精簡通知：</b>精簡通知僅摘" -#~ "要報告系統事件的總數，且不提供詳細資訊。<br>範例：<br> dhcp-101.up.wirex." -#~ "com has had 10 security events since Tue Oct 12 11:10:00 2004<br><br> <b>" -#~ "摘要通知：</b>摘要通知會顯示已記錄的 安全性事件，並列出個別的發生次數，包" -#~ "含最後一次發生的日期。<br>範例：<br> SubDomain: PERMITTING access to " -#~ "capability 'setgid' (httpd2-prefork(6347) profile /usr/sbin/httpd2-" -#~ "prefork active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct " -#~ "9 16:05:54 2004.<br><br> <b>詳細通知：</b>詳細通知會顯示尚未修改的已記錄 " -#~ "Novell AppArmor 安全性事件。每次發生事件時都會通知您，並在詳細記錄中寫入新" -#~ "行。這些安全性事件包含事件發生的日期和時間、應用程式設定檔允許和拒絕存取的" -#~ "時間，以及允許或拒絕的檔案存取許可權類型。詳細通知也會報告 logprof 工具用" -#~ "來解譯設定檔的數種訊息。<br>範例：<br> Oct 9 15:40:31 SubDomain: " -#~ "PERMITTING r access to /etc/apache2/httpd.conf (httpd2-prefork(6068) " -#~ "profile /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) <br><br> <li>選取應該要發出通知的最低「<b>嚴重性</b>」。當發生的事件等" -#~ "於或大於選擇的嚴重程度時，系統會按照指定的時間間隔來記錄安全性事件並傳送通" -#~ "知。如果間隔為 1 天，當發生安全性事件實，每天都會傳送一則通知。<br><br> " -#~ "<b>嚴重性：</b>這些事件會以 0 到 10 來編號，10 代表最嚴重的安全性事件。" -#~ "<b>severity.db</b> 檔案會定義潛在安全性事件的嚴重程度。嚴重程度是根據不同" -#~ "安全性事件的威脅或重要性來決定，例如某些存取的資源或拒絕的服務。</li> <li>" -#~ "若要在事件報告中包含未提供嚴重性評等數字的事件，請選取「<b>包含未知嚴重程" -#~ "度事件</b>」。</li> </ol>" +#~ msgid "The Security Event Notification screen enables you to setup email alerts for security events. In the following steps, specify how often alerts are sent, who receives the alert, and how severe the security event must be to send an alert. <br><br><b>Notification Types</b><br> <b>Terse Notification:</b> Terse notification summarizes the total number of system events without providing details. <br>For example:<br> dhcp-101.up.wirex.com has had 10 security events since Tue Oct 12 11:10:00 2004<br><br> <b>Summary Notification:</b> The Summary notification displays the logged AppArmor security events, and lists the number of individual occurrences, including the date of the last occurrence. <br>For example:<br> SubDomain: PERMITTING access to capability 'setgid' (httpd2-prefork(6347) profile /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct 9 16:05:54 2004.<br><br> <b>Verbose Notification:</b> The Verbose notification displays unmodified , logged AppArmor security events. It tells you every time an event occurs and writes a new line in the Verbose log. These security events include the date and time the event occurred, when the application profile permits access as well as rejects access, and the type of file permission access that is permitted or rejected. Verbose Notification also reports several messages that the logprof tool uses to interpret profiles. <br>For example:<br> Oct 9 15:40:31 SubDomain: PERMITTING r access to /etc/apache2/httpd.conf (httpd2-prefork(6068) profile /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) <br><br> <ol> <li>Click <b>Filter By Date Range</b>. The fields become " -#~ "active. <li>Enter the start and end dates that delineate the scope of " -#~ "the report. <li>Enter other filtering parameters. See below for " -#~ "definitions of parameters. </ol> The following definitions help you to " -#~ "enter the filtering parameters in the Report Configuration Dialog: " -#~ "<br><br> <b>Program Name Pattern:</b> When you enter a program name or " -#~ "pattern that matches the name of the binary executable of the program of " -#~ "interest, the report will display security events that have occurred for " -#~ "a specific program.<br><br> <b>Profile Name Pattern:</b> When you enter " -#~ "the name of the profile, the report will display the security events that " -#~ "are generated for the specified profile. You can use this to see what is " -#~ "being confined by a specific profile.<br><br> <b>PID Number:</b> Process " -#~ "ID number is a number that uniquely identifies one specific process or " -#~ "running program (this number is valid only during the lifetime of that " -#~ "process).<br><br> <b>Severity Level:</b> Select the lowest severity " -#~ "level for security events that you would like to be included in the " -#~ "report. The selected severity level, and above, will be included in the " -#~ "reports.<br><br> <b>Detail:</b> A source to which the profile has denied " -#~ "access. This includes capabilities and files. You can use this field to " -#~ "report the resources are not allowed to be accessed by profiles.<br><br> " -#~ "<b>Mode:</b> The Mode is the permission that the profile grants to the " -#~ "program or process to which it is applied. The options are: r (read) w " -#~ "(write) l (link) x (execute)<br><br> <b>Access Type:</b> The access type " -#~ "describes what is actually happening with the security event. The options " -#~ "are: PERMITTING, REJECTING, or AUDITING.<br><br> <b>CSV or HTML:</b> " -#~ "Enables you to export a CSV (comma separated values) or html file. The " -#~ "CSV file separates pieces of data in the log entries with commas using a " -#~ "standard data format for importing into table-oriented applications. You " -#~ "can enter a pathname for your exported report by typing in the full " -#~ "pathname in the field provided.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "「報告組態」對話方塊可讓您過濾在前一畫面選取的已歸檔報告。 根據<b>日期範圍" -#~ "</b>過濾：<br><br> <ol> <li>按一下<b>根據日期範圍過濾</b>。 相關欄位會變成" -#~ "作用中狀態。 <li>請輸入定義報告範圍的開始與結束日期。 <li>輸入其他要過濾" -#~ "的參數。 請參閱以下參數的定義。 </ol>以下定義可協助您在「報告組態」對話方" -#~ "塊輸入過濾參數： <br><br> <b>程式名稱模式：</b> 當您輸入符合欲過濾的二進位" -#~ "執行檔名稱的程式名稱或模式後，報告將會顯示特定程式已發生的安全事件。" -#~ "<br><br> <b>設定檔名稱模式： </b>當您輸入設定檔的名稱，報告將會顯示特定設" -#~ "定檔所產生的安全事件。 您可以使用此報告內容來檢視已被特定設定檔限制的項" -#~ "目。<br><br> <b>PID 號碼：</b> 程序 ID 號碼是獨特的號碼，可用來識別某一特" -#~ "定程序或執行中的程式 (此號碼只有在程序的生命期間才是有效的)。<br><br> <b>" -#~ "嚴重性層級： </b> 選取您要納入報告中的最低等級安全事件嚴重性。 所選取的嚴" -#~ "重性及以上的層級會納入報告中。<br><br> <b>詳細資料： </b> 設定檔已拒絕存" -#~ "取的來源。 其中包涵功能與檔案。 您可以使用此欄位來報告被設定檔拒絕存取的" -#~ "來源。<br><br> <b>模式： </b>模式是設定檔授予所適用之程式或程序的許可。 選" -#~ "項為： r (讀取) w (寫入) l (連結) x (執行)<br><br> <b>存取類型：</b> 存取" -#~ "類型說明在安全事件中實際發生的情況。 選項為： PERMITTING (許可)、" -#~ "REJECTING (拒絕)或 AUDITING (稽核)。<br><br> <b>CSV 或 HTML： </b> 可讓您" -#~ "輸出 CSV (逗點分隔，comma separated values) 或 HTML 檔案。 CSV 檔案會使用" -#~ "標準資料格式，以逗號分隔記錄項目中的各筆資料，以便輸入表格導向的應用程" -#~ "式。 您可以在提供的欄位中鍵入完整的路徑名稱，以輸入您所輸出的報告的路徑。" +#~ msgid "<p>The Report Configuration dialog enables you to filter the archived report selected in the previous screen. To filter by <b>Date Range:</b><br><br> <ol> <li>Click <b>Filter By Date Range</b>. The fields become active. <li>Enter the start and end dates that delineate the scope of the report. <li>Enter other filtering parameters. See below for definitions of parameters. </ol> The following definitions help you to enter the filtering parameters in the Report Configuration Dialog: <br><br> <b>Program Name Pattern:</b> When you enter a program name or pattern that matches the name of the binary executable of the program of interest, the report will display security events that have occurred for a specific program.<br><br> <b>Profile Name Pattern:</b> When you enter the name of the profile, the report will display the security events that are generated for the specified profile. You can use this to see what is being confined by a specific profile.<br><br> <b>PID Number:

...

Process ID number is a number that uniquely identifies one specific process or running program (this number is valid only during the lifetime of that process).<br><br> <b>Severity Level:</b> Select the lowest severity level for security events that you would like to be included in the report. The selected severity level, and above, will be included in the reports.<br><br> <b>Detail:</b> A source to which the profile has denied access. This includes capabilities and files. You can use this field to report the resources are not allowed to be accessed by profiles.<br><br> <b>Mode:</b> The Mode is the permission that the profile grants to the program or process to which it is applied. The options are: r (read) w (write) l (link) x (execute)<br><br> <b>Access Type:</b> The access type describes what is actually happening with the security event. The options are: PERMITTING, REJECTING, or AUDITING.<br><br> <b>CSV or HTML:</b> Enables you to export a CSV (comma separated values) or ht ml file. The CSV file separates pieces of data in the log entries with commas using a standard data format for importing into table-oriented applications. You can enter a pathname for your exported report by typing in the full pathname in the field provided.</p>" +#~ msgstr "「報告組態」對話方塊可讓您過濾在前一畫面選取的已歸檔報告。 根據<b>日期範圍</b>過濾：<br><br> <ol> <li>按一下<b>根據日期範圍過濾</b>。 相關欄位會變成作用中狀態。 <li>請輸入定義報告範圍的開始與結束日期。 <li>輸入其他要過濾的參數。 請參閱以下參數的定義。 </ol>以下定義可協助您在「報告組態」對話方塊輸入過濾參數： <br><br> <b>程式名稱模式：</b> 當您輸入符合欲過濾的二進位執行檔名稱的程式名稱或模式後，報告將會顯示特定程式已發生的安全事件。<br><br> <b>設定檔名稱模式： </b>當您輸入設定檔的名稱，報告將會顯示特定設定檔所產生的安全事件。 您可以使用此報告內容來檢視已被特定設定檔限制的項目。<br><br> <b>PID 號碼：</b> 程序 ID 號碼是獨特的號碼，可用來識別某一特定程序或執行中的程式 (此號碼只有在程序的� ��命期間才是有效的)。<br><br> <b>嚴重性層級： </b> 選取您要納入報告中的最低等級安全事件嚴重性。 所選取的嚴重性及以上的層級會納入報告中。<br><br> <b>詳細資料： </b> 設定檔已拒絕存取的來源。 其中包涵功能與檔案。 您可以使用此欄位來報告被設定檔拒絕存取的來源。<br><br> <b>模式： </b>模式是設定檔授予所適用之程式或程序的許可。 選項為： r (讀取) w (寫入) l (連結) x (執行)<br><br> <b>存取類型：</b> 存取類型說明在安全事件中實際發生的情況。 選項為： PERMITTING (許可)、REJECTING (拒絕)或 AUDITING (稽核)。<br><br> <b>CSV 或 HTML： </b> 可讓您輸出 CSV (逗點分隔，comma separated values) 或 HTML 檔案。 CSV 檔案會使用標準資料格式，以逗號分隔記錄項目中的各筆資料，以便輸入表格導向的應用程式。 您可以在提供的欄位中鍵入完整的路徑名稱，以輸入� ��所輸出的報告的路徑。"

#, fuzzy -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>The AppArmor On-Demand Report screen displays an instantly generated " -#~ "version of one of the following reports. <b>Executive Security Summary: A combined report, consisting of one or more Security incident reports " -#~ "from one or more machines. This report provides a single view of " -#~ "security events on multiple machines.<br><br> <b>Applications Audit " -#~ "Report:</b> An auditing tool that reports which application servers are " -#~ "running and whether the applications are confined by AppArmor. " -#~ "Application servers are applications that accept incoming network " -#~ "connections. <br><br> <b>Security Incident Report:</b> A report that " -#~ "displays application security for a single host. It reports policy " -#~ "violations for locally confined applications during a specific time " -#~ "period. You can edit and customize this report, or add new versions.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "AppArmor On-Demand 報告畫面會以即時產生的方式顯示下列報告之一。 <b>執行安" -#~ "全摘要：</b>一種綜合報告，包含來自一或多部電腦的一或多個安全事件報告。 此" -#~ "報告提供單一檢視畫面，讓您檢視多台電腦上的安全事件。<b>應用程式稽核報告：" -#~ "</b>一種稽核工具，報告有哪些應用程式伺服器正在執行，以及有哪些應用程式受" -#~ "到 AppArmor 的限制。應用程式伺服器是可接受外來網路連線的應用程式。" -#~ "<br><br> <b>安全事件報告：</b>一種報告，顯示單一主機的應用程式安全性。 它" -#~ "會顯示特定期間內違反本機應用程式限制政策的情形。您可以編輯及自訂此報告或新" -#~ "增新的版本。" +#~ msgid "<p>The AppArmor On-Demand Report screen displays an instantly generated version of one of the following reports. <b>Executive Security Summary:</b> A combined report, consisting of one or more Security incident reports from one or more machines. This report provides a single view of security events on multiple machines.<br><br> <b>Applications Audit Report:</b> An auditing tool that reports which application servers are running and whether the applications are confined by AppArmor. Application servers are applications that accept incoming network connections. <br><br> <b>Security Incident Report:</b> A report that displays application security for a single host. It reports policy violations for locally confined applications during a specific time period. You can edit and customize this report, or add new versions.</p>" +#~ msgstr "AppArmor On-Demand 報告畫面會以即時產生的方式顯示下列報告之一。 <b>執行安全摘要：</b>一種綜合報告，包含來自一或多部電腦的一或多個安全事件報告。 此報告提供單一檢視畫面，讓您檢視多台電腦上的安全事件。<b>應用程式稽核報告：</b>一種稽核工具，報告有哪些應用程式伺服器正在執行，以及有哪些應用程式受到 AppArmor 的限制。應用程式伺服器是可接受外來網路連線的應用程式。<br><br> <b>安全事件報告：</b>一種報告，顯示單一主機的應用程式安全性。 它會顯示特定期間內違反本機應用程式限制政策的情形。您可以編輯及自訂此報告或新增新的版本。" #, fuzzy -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>The Report Configuration dialog enables you to filter the report " -#~ "selected in the previous screen. To filter by <b>Date Range:</b><br><br> " -#~ "<ol> <li>Click <b>Filter By Date Range</b>. The fields become active. " -#~ "<li>Enter the start and end dates that delineate the scope of the " -#~ "report. <li>Enter other filtering parameters. See below for definitions " -#~ "of parameters. </ol> The following definitions help you to enter the " -#~ "filtering parameters in the Report Configuration Dialog: <b>Program Name " -#~ "Pattern:</b> When you enter a program name or pattern that matches the " -#~ "name of the executable process of interest, the report will display " -#~ "security events that have occurred for a specific program.<br><br> " -#~ "<b>Profile Name Pattern:</b> When you enter the name of the security " -#~ "profile that is applied to the process, the report will display the " -#~ "security events that are generated for the specified profile. You can use " -#~ "this to see what is being confined by a specific profile.<br><br> <b>PID " -#~ "Number:</b> Process ID number is a number that uniquely identifies one " -#~ "specific process or running program (this number is valid only during the " -#~ "lifetime of that process).<br><br> <b>Severity Level:</b> Select the " -#~ "lowest severity level for security events that you would like to be " -#~ "included in the report. The selected severity level, and above, will be " -#~ "included in the reports.<br><br> <b>Detail:</b> A source to which the " -#~ "profile has denied access. This includes capabilities and files. You can " -#~ "use this field to report the resources are not allowed to be accessed by " -#~ "profiles.<br><br> <b>Mode:</b> The Mode is the permission that the " -#~ "profile grants to the program or process to which it is applied. The " -#~ "options are: r (read) w (write) l (link) x (execute)<br><br> <b>Access " -#~ "Type:</b> The access type describes what is actually happening with the " -#~ "security event. The options are: PERMITTING, REJECTING, or AUDITING." -#~ "<br><br> <b>CSV or HTML:</b> Enables you to export a CSV (comma separated " -#~ "values) or HTML file. The CSV file separates pieces of data in the log " -#~ "entries with commas using a standard data format for importing into table-" -#~ "oriented applications. You can enter a pathname for your exported report " -#~ "by typing in the full pathname in the field provided.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "「報告組態」對話方塊可讓您過濾在前一畫面選取的報告。根據<b>日期範圍</b>過" -#~ "濾：<br><br> <ol> <li>按一下<b>根據日期範圍過濾</b>。相關欄位會變成作用中" -#~ "狀態。 <li>請輸入定義報告範圍的開始與結束日期。 <li>輸入其他要過濾的參數。" -#~ "請參閱以下參數的定義。 </ol>以下定義可協助您在「報告組態」對話方塊輸入過濾" -#~ "參數： <b>程式名稱模式：</b> 當您輸入符合欲過濾的執行程序名稱的程式名稱或" -#~ "模式後，報告將會顯示特定程式已發生的安全事件。<br><br> <b>設定檔名稱模式：" -#~ "</b>當您輸入套用到程序的安全設定檔名稱後，報告將會顯示特定設定檔所產生的安" -#~ "全事件。您可以使用此報告內容來檢視已被特定設定檔限制的項目。<br><br> " -#~ "<b>PID 號碼：</b> 程序 ID 號碼是獨特的號碼，可用來識別某一特定程序或執行中" -#~ "的程式 (此號碼只有在程序的生命期間才是有效的)。<br><br> <b>嚴重性層級： 選取您要納入報告中的最低等級安全事件嚴重性。所選取的嚴重性及以上的層級" -#~ "會納入報告中。<br><br> <b>詳細資料：</b> 設定檔已拒絕存取的來源。 其中包" -#~ "涵功能與檔案。您可以使用此欄位來報告被設定檔拒絕存取的來源。<br><br> <b>模" -#~ "式：</b>模式是設定檔授與所適用之程式或程序的許可。選項為： r (讀取) w (寫" -#~ "入) l (連結) x (執行)<br><br> <b>存取類型：</b> 存取類型說明在安全事件中實" -#~ "際發生的情況。選項為： PERMITTING (許可)、REJECTING (拒絕)或 AUDITING (稽" -#~ "核)。<br><br> <b>CSV 或 HTML：</b> 可讓您輸出 CSV (逗點分隔，comma " -#~ "separated values) 或 HTML 檔案。CSV 檔案會使用標準資料格式，以逗號分隔記錄" -#~ "項目中的各筆資料，以便輸入表格導向的應用程式。您可以在提供的欄位中鍵入完整" -#~ "的路徑名稱，以輸入您所輸出的報告的路徑。<br><br>" +#~ msgid "<p>The Report Configuration dialog enables you to filter the report selected in the previous screen. To filter by <b>Date Range:</b><br><br> <ol> <li>Click <b>Filter By Date Range</b>. The fields become active. <li>Enter the start and end dates that delineate the scope of the report. <li>Enter other filtering parameters. See below for definitions of parameters. </ol> The following definitions help you to enter the filtering parameters in the Report Configuration Dialog: <b>Program Name Pattern:</b> When you enter a program name or pattern that matches the name of the executable process of interest, the report will display security events that have occurred for a specific program.<br><br> <b>Profile Name Pattern:</b> When you enter the name of the security profile that is applied to the process, the report will display the security events that are generated for the specified profile. You can use this to see what is being confined by a specific profile.<br><br> <b>PID Num ber:</b> Process ID number is a number that uniquely identifies one specific process or running program (this number is valid only during the lifetime of that process).<br><br> <b>Severity Level:</b> Select the lowest severity level for security events that you would like to be included in the report. The selected severity level, and above, will be included in the reports.<br><br> <b>Detail:</b> A source to which the profile has denied access. This includes capabilities and files. You can use this field to report the resources are not allowed to be accessed by profiles.<br><br> <b>Mode:</b> The Mode is the permission that the profile grants to the program or process to which it is applied. The options are: r (read) w (write) l (link) x (execute)<br><br> <b>Access Type:</b> The access type describes what is actually happening with the security event. The options are: PERMITTING, REJECTING, or AUDITING.<br><br> <b>CSV or HTML:</b> Enables you to export a CSV (comma separated values ) or HTML file. The CSV file separates pieces of data in the log entries with commas using a standard data format for importing into table-oriented applications. You can enter a pathname for your exported report by typing in the full pathname in the field provided.</p>" +#~ msgstr "「報告組態」對話方塊可讓您過濾在前一畫面選取的報告。根據<b>日期範圍</b>過濾：<br><br> <ol> <li>按一下<b>根據日期範圍過濾</b>。相關欄位會變成作用中狀態。 <li>請輸入定義報告範圍的開始與結束日期。 <li>輸入其他要過濾的參數。請參閱以下參數的定義。 </ol>以下定義可協助您在「報告組態」對話方塊輸入過濾參數： <b>程式名稱模式：</b> 當您輸入符合欲過濾的執行程序名稱的程式名稱或模式後，報告將會顯示特定程式已發生的安全事件。<br><br> <b>設定檔名稱模式：</b>當您輸入套用到程序的安全設定檔名稱後，報告將會顯示特定設定檔所產生的安全事件。您可以使用此報告內容來檢視已被特定設定檔限制的項目。<br><br> <b>PID 號碼：</b> 程序 ID 號碼是獨特的號碼，可用來識別某一特定程序或執行中的程式 (此號碼只有在程序的生命期� ��才是有效的)。<br><br> <b>嚴重性層級：</b> 選取您要納入報告中的最低等級安全事件嚴重性。所選取的嚴重性及以上的層級會納入報告中。<br><br> <b>詳細資料：</b> 設定檔已拒絕存取的來源。 其中包涵功能與檔案。您可以使用此欄位來報告被設定檔拒絕存取的來源。<br><br> <b>模式：</b>模式是設定檔授與所適用之程式或程序的許可。選項為： r (讀取) w (寫入) l (連結) x (執行)<br><br> <b>存取類型：</b> 存取類型說明在安全事件中實際發生的情況。選項為： PERMITTING (許可)、REJECTING (拒絕)或 AUDITING (稽核)。<br><br> <b>CSV 或 HTML：</b> 可讓您輸出 CSV (逗點分隔，comma separated values) 或 HTML 檔案。CSV 檔案會使用標準資料格式，以逗號分隔記錄項目中的各筆資料，以便輸入表格導向的應用程式。您可以在提供的欄位中鍵入完整的路徑名稱，以輸入您所輸出的報告 的路徑。<br><br>" #, fuzzy -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>The summary of scheduled reports page shows us when reports are " -#~ "scheduled to run. Reports can be set to run monthly, weekly, daily, or " -#~ "hourly. The default settings are daily at midnight. The reports can also " -#~ "be emailed, upon completion, to up to three email recipients.<br><br> In " -#~ "the Set Schedule section, you can schedule the following three types of " -#~ "security reports:<br><br> <b>Executive Security Summary:</b> A combined " -#~ "report, consisting of one or more Security incident reports from one or " -#~ "more machines. This report provides a single view of security events on " -#~ "multiple machines.<br><br> <b>Applications Audit Report:</b> An auditing " -#~ "tool that reports which application servers are running and whether the " -#~ "applications are confined by AppArmor. Application servers are " -#~ "applications that accept incoming network connections. <br><br> " -#~ "<b>Security Incident Report:</b> A report that displays application " -#~ "security for a single host. It reports policy violations for locally " -#~ "confined applications during a specific time period. You can edit and " -#~ "customize this report, or add new versions.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "已排程報告頁面的摘要會顯示排程，告訴您何時執行報告。您可設定每月、每週、每" -#~ "日或每小時執行一次報告。預設值是設定於每天午夜。報告完成之後亦可透過電子郵" -#~ "件傳送，最多可傳送給三位收件者。<br><br> 在「設定排程」區段，您可以排程下" -#~ "列三種類型的安全報告：<br><br> <b>執行安全摘要：</b>一種綜合報告，包含來自" -#~ "一或多部電腦的一或多個安全事件報告。 此報告提供單一檢視畫面，讓您檢視多台" -#~ "電腦上的安全事件。<b>應用程式稽核報告：</b>一種稽核工具，報告有哪些應用程" -#~ "式伺服器正在執行，以及有哪些應用程式受到 AppArmor 的限制。應用程式伺服器是" -#~ "可接受外來網路連線的應用程式。<br><br> <b>安全事件報告：</b>一種報告，顯示" -#~ "單一主機的應用程式安全性。 它會顯示特定期間內違反本機應用程式限制政策的情" -#~ "形。您可以編輯及自訂此報告或新增新的版本。" +#~ msgid "<p>The summary of scheduled reports page shows us when reports are scheduled to run. Reports can be set to run monthly, weekly, daily, or hourly. The default settings are daily at midnight. The reports can also be emailed, upon completion, to up to three email recipients.<br><br> In the Set Schedule section, you can schedule the following three types of security reports:<br><br> <b>Executive Security Summary:</b> A combined report, consisting of one or more Security incident reports from one or more machines. This report provides a single view of security events on multiple machines.<br><br> <b>Applications Audit Report:</b> An auditing tool that reports which application servers are running and whether the applications are confined by AppArmor. Application servers are applications that accept incoming network connections. <br><br> <b>Security Incident Report:</b> A report that displays application security for a single host. It reports policy violations for locally conf ined applications during a specific time period. You can edit and customize this report, or add new versions.</p>" +#~ msgstr "已排程報告頁面的摘要會顯示排程，告訴您何時執行報告。您可設定每月、每週、每日或每小時執行一次報告。預設值是設定於每天午夜。報告完成之後亦可透過電子郵件傳送，最多可傳送給三位收件者。<br><br> 在「設定排程」區段，您可以排程下列三種類型的安全報告：<br><br> <b>執行安全摘要：</b>一種綜合報告，包含來自一或多部電腦的一或多個安全事件報告。 此報告提供單一檢視畫面，讓您檢視多台電腦上的安全事件。<b>應用程式稽核報告：</b>一種稽核工具，報告有哪些應用程式伺服器正在執行，以及有哪些應用程式受到 AppArmor 的限制。應用程式伺服器是可接受外來網路連線的應用程式。<br><br> <b>安全事件報告：</b>一種報告，顯示單一主機的應用程式安全性。 它會顯示特定期間內違反本機應用程式限制政策的情形。您可以編輯� �自訂此報告或新增新的版本。" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>AppArmor Status</b><br>This reports whether the AppArmor policy " -#~ "enforcement module is loaded and functioning.</p> <p><b>Security Event " -#~ "Notification</b><br>Configure this tool if you want to be notified by " -#~ "email when access violations have occurred.</p> <p><b>Profile Modes<br>Use this tool to change the way that AppArmor uses individual " -#~ "profiles.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p><b>AppArmor 狀態</b><br>報告 AppArmor 政策執行模組是否已經載入並且在執" -#~ "行中。</p> <p><b>安全事件通知</b><br>如果您希望在發生存取違規時收到電子郵" -#~ "件通知，請設定此工具。</p> <p><b>設定檔模式</b><br>請使用此工具來改變 " -#~ "AppArmor 對個別設定檔的使用方式。</p>" +#~ msgid "<p><b>AppArmor Status</b><br>This reports whether the AppArmor policy enforcement module is loaded and functioning.</p> <p><b>Security Event Notification</b><br>Configure this tool if you want to be notified by email when access violations have occurred.</p> <p><b>Profile Modes</b><br>Use this tool to change the way that AppArmor uses individual profiles.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p><b>AppArmor 狀態</b><br>報告 AppArmor 政策執行模組是否已經載入並且在執行中。</p> <p><b>安全事件通知</b><br>如果您希望在發生存取違規時收到電子郵件通知，請設定此工具。</p> <p><b>設定檔模式</b><br>請使用此工具來改變 AppArmor 對個別設定檔的使用方式。</p>" #~ msgid "Email address is too long. Please enter another address." #~ msgstr "電子郵件地址太長。請輸入其他地址。" -- To unsubscribe, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+unsubscribe@opensuse.org To contact the owner, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+owner@opensuse.org